Index

210

English is not an official language of the Swiss Confederation. This translation is provided for information purposes only and has no legal force.

Swiss Civil Code

of 10 December 1907 (Status as of 1 July 2020)

The Federal Assembly of the Swiss Confederation,

based on Article 64 of the Federal Constitution1,2 and having considered the Dispatch of the Federal Council dated 28 May 19043,

decrees:

  Introduction

Art. 1 A. Application of the law

A. Application of the law

1 The law applies according to its wording or interpretation to all legal questions for which it contains a provision.

2 In the absence of a provision, the court1 shall decide in accordance with customary law and, in the absence of customary law, in accordance with the rule that it would make as legislator.

3 In doing so, the court shall follow established doctrine and case law.


1 Term in accordance with No I 1 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1). This amendment is taken into consideration throughout the Code.

Art. 2 B. Scope and limits of legal relationships / I. Acting in good faith

B. Scope and limits of legal relationships

I. Acting in good faith

1 Every person must act in good faith in the exercise of his or her rights and in the performance of his or her obligations.

2 The manifest abuse of a right is not protected by law.

Art. 3 B. Scope and limits of legal relationships / II. Good faith

II. Good faith

1 Where the law makes a legal effect conditional on the good faith of a person, there shall be a presumption of good faith.

2 No person may invoke the presumption of good faith if he or she has failed exercise the diligence required by the circumstances.

Art. 4 B. Scope and limits of legal relationships / III. Judicial discretion

III. Judicial1 discretion

Where the law confers discretion on the court or makes reference to an assessment of the circumstances or to good cause, the court must reach its decision in accordance with the principles of justice and equity.


1 Term in accordance with No I 1 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1). This amendment is taken into consideration throughout the Code.

Art. 5 C. Federal law and cantonal law / I. Cantonal civil law and local custom

C. Federal law and cantonal law

I. Cantonal civil law and local custom

1 Insofar as federal law reserves the application of cantonal law, the cantons may enact or repeal civil law provisions.

2 Where the law makes reference to practice or local custom, the existing cantonal law is deemed a valid expression thereof, provided no divergent practice is shown to exist.

Art. 6 C. Federal law and cantonal law / II. Cantonal public law

II. Cantonal public law

1 Federal civil law does not restrict the right of the cantons to enact public law.

2 The cantons are entitled within the limits of their sovereignty to restrict or prohibit the trade in certain goods or to declare transactions involving such goods legally invalid.

Art. 7 D. General provisions of the Code of Obligations

D. General provisions of the Code of Obligations

The general provisions of the Code of Obligations1 concerning the formation, performance and termination of contracts also apply to other civil law matters.


1 SR 220

Art. 8 E. Rules of evidence / I. Burden of proof

E. Rules of evidence

I. Burden of proof

Unless the law provides otherwise, the burden of proving the existence of an alleged fact shall rest on the person who derives rights from that fact.

Art. 9 E. Rules of evidence / II. Proof by public document

II. Proof by public document

1 Public registers and public deeds constitute full proof of the facts evidenced by them, unless their content is shown to be incorrect.

2 Such proof of incorrectness does not require to be in any particular form.

Art. 101

1 Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

  Part One: Law of Persons

  Title One: Natural Persons

  Chapter One: Legal Personality

Art. 11 A. Personality in general / I. Legal capacity

A. Personality in general

I. Legal capacity

1 Every person has legal capacity.

2 Accordingly, within the limits of the law, every person has the same capacity to have rights and obligations.

Art. 12 A. Personality in general / II. Capacity to act / 1. Nature

II. Capacity to act

1. Nature

A person who has capacity to act has the capacity to create rights and obligations through his actions.

Art. 131A. Personality in general / II. Capacity to act / 2. Requirements / a. In general

2. Requirements

a. In general

A person who is of age and is capable of judgement has the capacity to act.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 141A. Personality in general / II. Capacity to act / 2. Requirements / b. Majority

b. Majority

A person is of age if he or she has reached the age of 18.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), with effect from 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 151A. Personality in general / II. Capacity to act / 2. Requirements / c. ...

c. ...


1 Repealed by No I of the FA of 7 Oct. 1994, with effect from 1 Jan. 1996 (AS 1995 1126; BBl 1993 I 1169).

Art. 161A. Personality in general / II. Capacity to act / 2. Requirements / d. Capacity of judgement

d. Capacity of judgement

A person is capable of judgement within the meaning of the law if he or she does not lack the capacity to act rationally by virtue of being under age or because of a mental disability, mental disorder, intoxication or similar circumstances.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 171A. Personality in general / III. Incapacity / 1. In general

III. Incapacity

1. In general

A person does not have the capacity to act if he or she is incapable of judgement or is under age or is subject to a general deputyship.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 18 A. Personality in general / III. Incapacity / 2. Lack of capacity of judgement

2. Lack of capacity of judgement

A person who is incapable of judgement cannot create legal effect by his or her actions, unless the law provides otherwise.

Art. 19 A. Personality in general / III. Incapacity / 3. Persons capable of judgement but lacking the capacity to act. / a. Principle

3. Persons capable of judgement but lacking the capacity to act.

a. Principle1

1 Persons who are capable of judgement but lack the capacity to act may only enter into obligations or give up rights with the consent of their legal representative.2

2 Without such consent, they may only accept advantages that are free of charge or carry out minor everyday transactions.3

3 They are liable in damages for unpermitted acts.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 19a1A. Personality in general / III. Incapacity / 3. Persons capable of judgement but lacking the capacity to act. / b. Consent of the legal representative

b. Consent of the legal representative

1 Unless the law provides otherwise, the legal representative may consent expressly or tacitly in advance or approve the transaction retrospectively.

2 The other party is relieved of any obligation if approval is not given within a reasonable period that he or she fixes or has fixed by a court.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 19b1A. Personality in general / III. Incapacity / 3. Persons capable of judgement but lacking the capacity to act. / c. Absence of consent

c. Absence of consent

1 If the legal representative does not grant approval, either party may demand restitution of any performance already made. A person lacking capacity to act is however only liable to the extent that he or she has already benefited from the performance or to which he or she has been enriched at the time of the demand or has alienated the benefits in bad faith.

2 If the person lacking capacity to act has induced the other party to erroneously assume that he or she has the capacity to act, he or she is liable for the damage incurred.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 19c1A. Personality in general / III. Incapacity / 4. Strictly personal rights

4. Strictly personal rights

1 Persons capable of judgement but lacking capacity to act exercise their strictly personal rights independently; cases where the law requires the consent of the legal representative are reserved.

2 The legal representative acts for a person lacking capacity of judgement unless a right is so strictly personal that any form of representation is excluded.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 19d1A. Personality in general / IIIbis. Restriction of the capacity to act

IIIbis. Restriction of the capacity to act

The capacity to act may be restricted by an adult protection measure.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 20 A. Personality in general / IV. Kinship by blood and by marriage / 1. Blood kinship

IV.1 Kinship by blood and by marriage

1. Blood kinship

1 The degree of kinship2 is determined by the number of intermediary generations.

2 Lineal kinship exists between two persons where one is descended from the other and collateral kinship exists between two persons where both are descended from a third person and are not related lineally.


1 Amended of margin title in accordance with No I 3 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819, 1973 92; BBl 1971 I 1200).
2 Term amended by No I 3 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 211A. Personality in general / IV. Kinship by blood and by marriage / 2. Kinship by marriage

2. Kinship by marriage

1 Where one person is related to another, he or she is related as an in-law to the latter’s spouse or registered partner in the same line and to the same degree.

2 Kinship by marriage is not ended by dissolution of the marriage or of the registered partnership which created it.


1 Amended by Annex No 8 of the Registered Partnership Act of 18 June 2004, in force since 1 Jan. 2007 (AS 2005 5685; BBl 2003 1288).

Art. 22 A. Personality in general / V. Place of origin and domicile / 1. Origin

V. Place of origin and domicile

1. Origin

1 The place of origin of a person is determined by his or her citizenship.

2 Citizenship is governed by public law.

3 If a person is a citizen of more than one place, his or her place of origin is the one in which he or she is or was most recently resident or, in the absence of any such residence, the one in which he or she or his or her ancestors last acquired citizenship.

Art. 23 A. Personality in general / V. Place of origin and domicile / 2. Domicile / a. Definition

2. Domicile

a. Definition

1 A person’s domicile is the place in which he or she resides with the intention of settling; residence for the purpose of education or the accommodation of a person in an educative institution or care home, a hospital or a penal institution does not by itself establish domicile.1

2 No person may have more than one domicile at a time.

3 This provision does not apply to places of business.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 24 A. Personality in general / V. Place of origin and domicile / 2. Domicile / b. Change of domicile, temporary residence

b. Change of domicile, temporary residence

1 A person retains his or her domicile until such time as a new one is acquired.

2 A person’s domicile is deemed to be the place in which he or she is temporarily resident if no previously established domicile may be proven or if he or she was formerly resident abroad and has not yet established a domicile in Switzerland.

Art. 251A. Personality in general / V. Place of origin and domicile / 2. Domicile / c. Domicile of minors

c. Domicile of minors2

1 The domicile of a child subject to parental responsibility3 is deemed to be that of the parents or, if the parents have different domiciles, that of the parent with whom the child is resident; in all other cases it is deemed to be the child’s temporary domicile.

2 Children under guardianship are domiciled at the seat of the child protection authority.4


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 Term in accordance with No I 1 of the FA of 26 June 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1). This amendment is taken into consideration throughout the Code.
4 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 261A. Personality in general / V. Place of origin and domicile / 2. Domicile / d. Persons in institutions

d. Persons in institutions

Adults subject to a general deputyship are domiciled at the location of the adult protection authority.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 27 B. Protection of legal personality / I. Against excessive restriction

B. Protection of legal personality

I. Against excessive restriction1

1 No person may, wholly or in part, renounce his or her legal capacity or his or her capacity to act.

2 No person may surrender his or her freedom or restrict the use of it to a degree which violates the law or public morals.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 16 Dec. 1983, in force since 1 July 1985 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636).

Art. 281B. Protection of legal personality / II. Against infringements / 1. Principle

II. Against infringements

1. Principle

1 Any person whose personality rights are unlawfully infringed may petition the court for protection against all those causing the infringement.

2 An infringement is unlawful unless it is justified by the consent of the person whose rights are infringed or by an overriding private or public interest or by law.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 16 Dec. 1983, in force since 1 July 1985 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636).

Art. 28a1B. Protection of legal personality / II. Against infringements / 2. Actions / a. In general

2. Actions

a. In general2

1 The applicant may ask the court:

1.
to prohibit a threatened infringement;
2.
to order that an existing infringement cease;
3.
to make a declaration that an infringement is unlawful if it continues to have an offensive effect.

2 In particular the applicant may request that the rectification or the judgment be notified to third parties or published.

3 Claims for damages and satisfaction and for handing over profits in accordance with the provisions governing agency without authority are reserved.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 16 Dec. 1983, in force since 1 July 1985 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 23 June 2006 (Protection of the Personality against Violence, Threats and Harassment), in force since 1 July 2007 (AS 2007 137; BBl 2005 6871 6897).

Art. 28b1B. Protection of legal personality / II. Against infringements / 2. Actions / b. Violence, threats or harassment

b. Violence, threats or harassment

1 To obtain protection from violence, threats or harassment, the applicant may request the court in particular to order the offending party to refrain from:

1.
approaching the applicant or from entering a defined area around the applicant’s dwelling;
2.
frequenting specified locations, notably particular streets, squares or districts;
3.
from making contact with the applicant, especially by telephone, in writing or electronically, or from harassing the applicant in any other way.

2 If the applicant lives in the same dwelling as the offending party, the applicant may ask the court to order the offending party to leave the dwelling for a specified period. This period may be extended on one occasion for good cause.

3 Where justified by the circumstances, the court may:

1.
require the applicant to pay reasonable compensation for his or her exclusive use of the dwelling; or
2.
with the landlord’s consent, transfer the rights and obligations under the lease to the applicant alone.

3bis It shall give notice of its decision to the competent child and adult protection authorities, the competent cantonal authority under paragraph 4 and other authorities and third parties, provided this appears necessary in order to fulfil its responsibilities or for the protection of the applicant, or enables the decision to be enforced.2

4 The cantons shall designate an authority which in urgent cases may order the immediate expulsion of the offending party from the joint dwelling and shall enact rules governing the procedure.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 16 Dec. 1983 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636). Amended by No I of the FA of 23 June 2006 (Protection of the Personality against Violence, Threats and Harassment), in force since 1 July 2007 (AS 2007 137; BBl 2005 6871 6897).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 14 Dec. 2018 on Improving the Protection given to Victims of Violence, in force since 1 July 2020 (AS 2019 2273; BBl 2017 7307).

Art. 28c–28f1B. Protection of legal personality / II. Against infringements / 3. ...

3. ...


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 16 Dec. 1983 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636). Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 28g1B. Protection of legal personality / II. Against infringements / 4. Right of reply / a. Principle

4. Right of reply

a. Principle2

1 Any person whose personality rights are directly affected by a representation of events in periodically appearing media, especially the press, radio or television, shall have a right of reply.

2 There is no right of reply in respect of accurate reports of the public dealings of an authority in which the affected person took part.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 16 Dec. 1983, in force since 1 July 1985 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 23 June 2006 (Protection of the Personality against Violence, Threats and Harassment), in force since 1 July 2007 (AS 2007 137; BBl 2005 6871 6897).

Art. 28h1B. Protection of legal personality / II. Against infringements / 4. Right of reply / b. Form and content

b. Form and content

1 The text of the reply must be succinct and confine itself to the subject matter of the contentious representation.

2 The reply may be refused if it is plainly incorrect or violates the law or public morals.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 16 Dec. 1983, in force since 1 July 1985 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636).

Art. 28i1B. Protection of legal personality / II. Against infringements / 4. Right of reply / c. Procedure

c. Procedure

1 The author of the reply must send the text to the media company within 20 days of learning of the contentious representation, but at the latest within three months of publication.

2 The media company must immediately inform the author of the reply when it will be published or why it is rejected.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 16 Dec. 1983, in force since 1 July 1985 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636).

Art. 28k1B. Protection of legal personality / II. Against infringements / 4. Right of reply / d. Publication

d. Publication

1 The reply must be published as soon as possible and in such a manner as to ensure that it reaches the same audience or readership as the contentious representation.

2 The reply must be identified as such; the media company is not permitted to make any addition except to state whether it stands by its representation or to indicate its sources.

3 The reply must be published free of charge.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 16 Dec. 1983, in force since 1 July 1985 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636).

Art. 28l1B. Protection of legal personality / II. Against infringements / 4. Right of reply / e. Recourse to the courts

e. Recourse to the courts

1 If the media company obstructs the right of reply, rejects the reply or fails to publish it correctly, the party in question may petition the court.

2 ...2

3 and 4 ...3


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 16 Dec. 1983, in force since 1 July 1985 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636).
2 Repealed by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, with effect from 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).
3 Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 29 B. Protection of legal personality / III. Right to use one’s name / 1. Protection of one’s name

III. Right to use one’s name

1. Protection of one’s name

1 If a person’s use of his or her name is disputed, he or she may apply for a court declaration confirming his rights.

2 If a person is adversely affected because another person is using his or her name, he or she may seek an order prohibiting such use and, if the user is at fault, may bring a claim for damages and, where justified by the nature of the infringement, for satisfaction.

Art. 30 B. Protection of legal personality / III. Right to use one’s name / 2. Change of name / a. General

2. Change of name

a. General1

1 The government of the canton of residence may permit a person to change his or her name for good cause.2

2 ...3

3 A person adversely affected by a change of name may contest the same in court within one year of learning thereof.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).
3 Repealed by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), with effect from 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 30a1B. Protection of legal personality / III. Right to use one’s name / 2. Change of name / b. On the death of a spouse

b. On the death of a spouse

A person whose spouse dies may, if that person changed his or her surname on marriage, at any time declare before the civil registrar the wish to revert to the name by which he or she was known prior to the marriage.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 31 C. Beginning and end of personality rights / I. Birth and death

C. Beginning and end of personality rights

I. Birth and death

1 Personality rights begin on the birth of the living child and end on death.

2 An unborn child has legal capacity provided that it survives birth.

Art. 32 C. Beginning and end of personality rights / II. Proof / 1. Burden of proof

II. Proof

1. Burden of proof

1 Any person who, in exercising a right, relies on the fact that another person is living or has died or was alive at a particular time or survived another person must produce evidence thereof.

2 If it cannot be proved that, of a group of several deceased persons, one survived another, all are deemed to have died at the same time.

Art. 33 C. Beginning and end of personality rights / II. Proof / 2. Evidence / a. In general

2. Evidence

a. In general

1 Proof of the birth or death of a person is established by the records kept by the civil register.

2 If records are missing or shown to be incorrect, proof may be adduced in another form.

Art. 34 C. Beginning and end of personality rights / II. Proof / 2. Evidence / b. Presumption of death

b. Presumption of death

The death of a person is deemed proven, even if no-one has seen the corpse, if that person has disappeared in circumstances in which his death may be considered certain.

Art. 35 C. Beginning and end of personality rights / III. Declaration of presumed death / 1. In general

III. Declaration of presumed death

1. In general

1 If it is highly probable that a person is dead because he or she has disappeared in extremely life-threatening circumstances or has been missing for a lengthy period without any sign of life, the court may declare that person presumed dead on application by any person deriving rights from his or her death.

2 ...1


1 Repealed by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, with effect from 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).

Art. 36 C. Beginning and end of personality rights / III. Declaration of presumed death / 2. Procedure

2. Procedure

1 The application may be made when at least one year has elapsed since the life-threatening event or five years have elapsed since the last sign of life.

2 The court must, by suitable public means, call on any person who may provide information about the missing person to come forward within a specified period.

3 The period shall run for at least one year following the first public notice.

Art. 37 C. Beginning and end of personality rights / III. Declaration of presumed death / 3. Failure of application

3. Failure of application

If the missing person comes forward within the set period or if news of the missing person is received or if the date of his or her death is proved, the application fails.

Art. 38 C. Beginning and end of personality rights / III. Declaration of presumed death / 4. Effect

4. Effect

1 If no news is received during the set period, the missing person is declared presumed dead and rights derived from the fact of his or her death may be enforced as if death were proven.

2 The declaration of presumed death has retroactive effect from the time of the life-threatening event or the last sign of life.

3 A declaration of presumed death dissolves a marriage.1


1 Inserted by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).


  Chapter Two:1  Registration of Civil Status

Art. 391A. Registers / I. In general

A. Registers

I. In general

1 Civil status is recorded in an electronic register (civil register).

2 Civil status includes in particular:

1.
a person’s particulars, such as those relating to birth, marriage, registered civil partnership and death;
2.
a person’s status under the law of persons and family law, such as majority, parentage, marriage or registered civil partnership;
3.
names;
4.
cantonal and communal citizenship;
5.
nationality.

1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 15 Dec. 2017 (Registration of Civil Status and Land Register), in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 4017; BBl 2014 3551).

Art. 40 A. Registers / II. Duty to notify

II. Duty to notify1

1 The Federal Council determines which persons and authorities have a duty to furnish the information necessary to record civil status.

2 It may provide that breaches of said duty be punishable by fines.

3 ...2


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 5 Oct. 2001 (Electronic civil register), in force since 1 July 2004 (AS 2004 2911; BBl 2001 1639).
2 Repealed by No I of the FA of 5 Oct. 2001 (Electronic civil register), with effect from 1 July 2004 (AS 2004 2911; BBl 2001 1639).

Art. 41 A. Registers / III. Proof of undisputed information

III. Proof of undisputed information

1 Where documentary proof of information concerning civil status is required but is impossible or unreasonably difficult to obtain despite making reasonable efforts, the cantonal supervisory authority may accept a declaration made in the presence of the registrar as proof provided such information is not disputed.

2 The registrar shall remind any person making such a declaration of his or her duty to tell the truth and that a false declaration may lead to prosecution.

Art. 42 A. Registers / IV. Rectification / 1. By court order

IV. Rectification

1. By court order

1 Any person who satisfies the court that he or she has a personal interest warranting protection may seek an order for the registration of disputed information concerning personal status or the rectification or removal of an entry. The court shall hear the relevant cantonal supervisory authority, to which it shall notify its judgment.

2 The cantonal supervisory authorities are likewise entitled to make such applications.

Art. 43 A. Registers / IV. Rectification / 2. By the register authorities

2. By the register authorities

The register authorities must of their own accord rectify mistakes resulting from an obvious oversight or error.

Art. 43a1A. Registers / V. Data protection and disclosure

V. Data protection and disclosure

1 In relation to the registration of civil status, the Federal Council is responsible for safeguarding the personality and constitutional rights of persons in respect of whom data is processed.

2 It regulates the disclosure of data to private persons who may show a direct interest warranting protection.

3 It stipulates those authorities, in addition to the register authorities, to whom the data necessary for the performance of their legal duties may be disclosed periodically or on request. The disclosure provisions under cantonal law are reserved.

3bis The register authorities are required to report to the competent authority any criminal offences that come to their attention while carrying out their official duties.2

4 The following bodies have online access to data required for proving the identity of a person:

1.
the issuing authorities under the Federal Act of 22 June 20013 on Identification Documents for Swiss Nationals;
2.4
the federal agency responsible for operating the computerised police search system under Article 15 of the Federal Act of 13 June 20085 on the Federal Police Information Systems and the filtering agencies of the cantonal and communal police forces linked into the search system;
3.
the federal agency responsible for keeping the computerised register of convictions under Art. 359 of the Criminal Code6;
4.
the federal agency responsible for investigations regarding missing persons7;
5.8
the Federal Intelligence Service for the early detection and prevention of threats to internal or external security in accordance with Article 6 paragraph 1 letter a of the Intelligence Service Act of 25 September 20159;
6.10
the authorities responsible for keeping the cantonal and communal registers of residents in accordance with the Register Harmonisation Act of 23 June 200611;
7. 12
the federal agencies responsible for keeping the central registers of insured persons in accordance with Article 71 paragraph 4 letter a of the Federal Act of 20 December 194613 on Old-Age and Survivors Insurance;
8. 14
the federal agencies at the Federal Department of Foreign Affairs responsible for keeping the register of Swiss living abroad in accordance with Article 4 paragraph 1 of the Federal Act of 24 March 200015 on the Processing of Personal Data.

1 Introduced by No I of the FA of 5 Oct. 2001 (Electronic civil register), in force since 1 July 2004 (AS 2004 2911; BBl 2001 1639).
2 Inserted by No I 3 of the FA of 15 June 2012 on Measures against Forced Marriages, in force since 1 July 2013 (AS 2013 1035; BBl 2011 2185).
3 SR 143.1
4 Amended by Annex 1 No 4 of the FA of 13 June 2008 on the Federal Police Information Systems, in force since 5 Dec. 2008 (AS 2008 4989; BBl 2006 5061).
5 SR 361
6 Now: Art. 365.
7 Currently the Federal Office of Police.
8 Inserted by Annex No II 4 of the Intelligence Service Act of 25 Sept. 2015, in force since 1 Sept. 2017 (AS 2017 4095; BBl 2014 2105).
9 SR 121
10 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 15 Dec. 2017 (Registration of Civil Status and Land Register), in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 4017; BBl 2014 3551).
11 SR 431.02
12 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 15 Dec. 2017 (Registration of Civil Status and Land Register), in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 4017; BBl 2014 3551).
13 SR 831.10
14 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 15 Dec. 2017 (Registration of Civil Status and Land Register), in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 4017; BBl 2014 3551).
15 SR 235.2

Art. 44 B. Organisation / I. Civil register authorities / 1. Civil registrars

B. Organisation

I. Civil register authorities

1. Civil registrars

1 In particular, the registrars shall perform the following tasks:

1.
they maintain the civil register;
2.
they make notifications and provide extracts;
3.
they carry out the preparatory procedure for weddings and conduct the wedding ceremony;
4.
they record declarations as to civil status.

2 Exceptionally, the Federal Council may entrust a representative of Switzerland abroad with these tasks.

Art. 45 B. Organisation / I. Civil register authorities / 2. Supervisory authorities

2. Supervisory authorities

1 Each canton shall appoint a supervisory authority.

2 In particular, the supervisory authority shall perform the following tasks:

1.
it supervises the register offices;
2.
it supports and advises the register offices;
3.
it assists in maintaining the civil register and in carrying out the preparatory procedure for weddings;
4.
it issues directives on recognition and recording of matters relating to civil status that occur abroad and of foreign judicial and administrative decisions concerning civil status;
5.
it provides for the basic and continuing education and training of persons working in the civil register service.

3 The Confederation is responsible for oversight. It may have recourse to cantonal appeal procedures against the decisions of the registrars and the supervisory authorities.1


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 5 Oct. 2001 (Electronic civil register), in force since 1 July 2004 (AS 2004 2911; BBl 2001 1639).

Art. 45a1B. Organisation / Ia. Central civil information system

Ia. Central civil information system

1 The Confederation shall operate and develop a central civil information system for running a centralised civil register.

2 The Confederation bears the operating and development costs.

3 The cantons shall pay the Confederation an annual fee for the use of the system for the purposes of managing the register of civil status.

4 The Confederation shall involve the cantons in the development of the system and provide technical support in its use.

5 In cooperation with the cantons, the Federal Council regulates:
1.
the details of the cantons’ involvement in developing the system;
2.
the amount to be paid by the cantons for its use;
3.
the rights of access of the civil register authorities and other agencies with access rights;
4.
how the Confederation and cantons cooperate over running the system;
5.
the organisational and technical measures necessary to safeguard data protection and data security;
6.
data archiving.

6 It may provide for the costs of services for third parties for purposes unrelated to civil status matters to be charged to these third parties.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 5 Oct. 2001 (Electronic civil register) (AS 2004 2911; BBl 2001 1639). Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 15 Dec. 2017 (Registration of Civil Status and Land Register), in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 4017; BBl 2014 3551).

Art. 46 B. Organisation / II. Liability

II. Liability

1 Any person suffering loss caused unlawfully by persons employed in the civil register service in the exercise of their official duties is entitled to damages and, where justified by the gravity of the loss, to satisfaction.

2 The canton is liable; it may have recourse against persons who have caused loss wilfully or through gross negligence.

3 The Government Liability Act of 14 March 19581 applies in relation to persons employed by the Confederation.


Art. 47 B. Organisation / III. Disciplinary measures

III. Disciplinary measures

1 Wilful or negligent breaches of official duty by persons working in civil register offices are subject to disciplinary measures taken by the cantonal supervisory authority.

2 Disciplinary measures shall consist of reprimands, fines of up to CHF 1000 or, in serious cases, removal from office.

3 The right to prosecute is reserved.

Art. 48 C. Implementing provisions / I. Federal law

C. Implementing provisions

I. Federal law

1 The Federal Council issues the provisions on implementation.

2 In particular it regulates:

1.
the registers to be maintained and the information to be recorded;

2. the use of the OASI number in accordance with Article 50c of the Federal Act of 20 December 19461 on the Old-Age and Survivors' Insurance for the purpose of electronic data exchange between official registers of persons;

3. the maintenance of the register;

4.
supervision.2

3 To ensure technically reliable implementation the Federal Council may set minimum requirements for the basic and continuing education and training of personnel in the civil register service and for the function of registrar.

4 It determines the fees charged by the civil register service.

5 It determines the conditions on which it is permissible by electronic means:

1.
to provide civil status information;
2.
to make declarations concerning civil status;
3.
to make notifications and provide extracts from the civil register.3

1 SR 831.10
2 Amended by Annex No 2 of the Register Harmonisation Act of 23 June 2006, in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2006 4165; BBl 2006 427).
3 Inserted by No I of the FA of 5 Oct. 2001 (Electronic Civil Register), in force since 1 July 2004 (AS 2004 2911; BBl 2001 1639).

Art. 49 C. Implementing provisions / II. Cantonal law

II. Cantonal law

1 The cantons define the civil register districts.

2 They enact the provisions necessary for implementation within the framework of federal law.

3 Such cantonal provisions, with the exception of those concerning remuneration of personnel, are subject to approval by the Confederation.

Art. 50 and 51

Repealed


  Title Two: Legal Entities

  Chapter One: General Provisions

Art. 52 A. Legal personality

A. Legal personality

1 Associations of persons organised as corporate bodies and independent bodies with a specific purpose acquire legal personality on being entered in the commercial register.

2 Public law corporations and bodies, and associations that do not have a commercial purpose do not require registration.1

3 Associations of persons and bodies which pursue an immoral or unlawful purpose may not acquire legal personality.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 12 Dec. 2014 on the Implementation of the 2012 Revision of the Recommendations of the Financial Action Task Force, in force since 1 Jan. 2016 (AS 2015 1389; BBl 2014 605).

Art. 53 B. Legal capacity

B. Legal capacity

Legal entities have all the rights and duties other than those which presuppose intrinsically human attributes, such as gender, age or kinship.

Art. 54 C. Capacity to act / I. Requirements

C. Capacity to act

I. Requirements

Legal entities have capacity to act once the governing bodies required by law and their articles of association have been appointed.

Art. 55 C. Capacity to act / II. Action on behalf of the legal entity

II. Action on behalf of the legal entity

1 The governing bodies express the will of the legal entity.

2 They bind the legal entity by concluding transactions and by their other actions.

3 The governing officers are also personally liable for their wrongful acts.

Art. 561D. Seat

D. Seat

The seat of the legal entity is located where its administration is carried out, unless its articles of association provide otherwise.


1 Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).

Art. 57 E. Dissolution / I. Application of assets

E. Dissolution

I. Application of assets

1 On dissolution of a legal entity, and unless provided otherwise by law, the articles of association, the founding charter or the governing bodies, its assets pass to the state authority (Confederation, canton, commune) to which the entity had been assigned according to its objects.

2 Such assets must be used as far as possible for the original purpose.

3 Where a legal entity is dissolved due to its pursuit of immoral or unlawful objects, the assets pass to the state authority even where contrary provision has been made.1


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law on Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 58 E. Dissolution / II. Liquidation

II. Liquidation

The procedure for liquidating the assets of the legal entity is governed by the regulations for cooperatives.

Art. 59 F. Reservation of public law and company law

F. Reservation of public law and company law

1 Public and ecclesiastical corporations and institutions are governed by federal and cantonal public law.

2 Associations of persons which pursue a commercial purpose are subject to the provisions on companies and cooperatives.

3 Common land cooperatives and similar bodies remain subject to the provisions of cantonal law.


  Chapter Two: Associations

Art. 60 A. Formation / I. Corporate group of persons

A. Formation

I. Corporate group of persons

1 Associations with a political, religious, scientific, cultural, charitable, social or other non-commercial purpose acquire legal personality as soon as their intention to exist as a corporate body is apparent from their articles of association.

2 The articles of association must be done in writing and indicate the objects of the association, its resources and its organisation.

Art. 61 A. Formation / II. Entry in the commercial register

II. Entry in the commercial register1

1 Once the articles of association have been ratified and the committee appointed, the association is eligible for entry in the commercial register.

2 The association must be registered if it:

1.
conducts a commercial operation in pursuit of its objects;
2.
is subject to an audit requirement.2

3 The articles of association and a list of committee members must be enclosed with the application for registration.


1 Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).
2 Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).

Art. 62 A. Formation / III. Associations lacking legal personality

III. Associations lacking legal personality

Associations which cannot acquire or have not yet acquired legal personality are treated as simple partnerships.

Art. 63 A. Formation / IV. Relationship between articles of association and the law

IV. Relationship between articles of association and the law

1 Where the articles of association do not provide rules for the association’s organisation or its relationship with its members, the following provisions apply.

2 Mandatory provisions of law cannot be altered by the articles of association.

Art. 64 B. Organisation / I. General meeting / 1. Function, convening of meetings

B. Organisation

I. General meeting

1. Function, convening of meetings

1 The general meeting of members is the supreme governing body of the association.

2 The general meeting is called by the committee.

3 General meetings must be convened in accordance with the rules set out in the articles of association and also, as required by law, if one-fifth of the members so request.

Art. 65 B. Organisation / I. General meeting / 2. Powers

2. Powers

1 The general meeting of members decides on admission and exclusion of members, appoints the committee and decides all matters which are not reserved to other governing bodies of the association.

2 It supervises the activities of the governing bodies and may at any time dismiss the latter without prejudice to any contractual rights of those dismissed.

3 The right of dismissal exists by law whenever justified by good cause.

Art. 66 B. Organisation / I. General meeting / 3. Resolutions / a. Form

3. Resolutions

a. Form

1 Resolutions are passed by the general meeting.

2 The written consent of all members to a proposal is equivalent to a resolution of the general meeting.

Art. 67 B. Organisation / I. General meeting / 3. Resolutions / b. Voting rights and majority

b. Voting rights and majority

1 All members have equal voting rights at the general meeting.

2 Resolutions require a majority of the votes of the members present.

3 Resolutions may be taken on matters for which proper notice has not been given only where this is expressly permitted by the articles of association.

Art. 68 B. Organisation / I. General meeting / 3. Resolutions / c. Exclusion from voting

c. Exclusion from voting

Each member is by law excluded from voting on any resolution concerning a transaction or dispute between him or her, his or her spouse or a lineal relative on the one hand and the association on the other.

Art. 69 B. Organisation / II. Committee / 1. Rights and duties in general

II. Committee

1. Rights and duties in general1

The committee is entitled and obliged as defined under the articles of association to manage and represent the association.


1 Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).

Art. 69a1B. Organisation / II. Committee / 2. Accounting

2. Accounting

The committee shall maintain the association’s business ledgers. The provisions of the Code of Obligations2 on commercial bookkeeping and accounting apply mutatis mutandis.


1 Inserted by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names) (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969). Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 23 Dec. 2011 (Accounting Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 6679; BBl 2008 1589).
2 SR 220

Art. 69b1B. Organisation / III. Auditors

III. Auditors

1 The association must submit its accounts to a full audit by external auditors if two of the following figures are exceeded in two successive business years:

1.
total assets of CHF 10 million;
2.
turnover of CHF 20 million;
3.
average annual total of 50 full-time staff.

The association must submit its accounts to a limited audit by external auditors if a member with personal liability or an obligation to provide further capital so requests.

The provisions of the Code of Obligations2 on external auditors for companies apply mutatis mutandis.

4 In all other cases the articles of association and the general meeting3 are free to make such auditing arrangements as they deem fit.


1 Inserted by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).
2 SR 220
3 Corrected by the Federal Assembly Drafting Committee (Art. 58 para. 1 ParlA; SR 171.10).

Art. 69c1B. Organisation / IV. Organisational defects

IV. Organisational defects

1 If the association lacks one of the prescribed governing bodies, a member or a creditor may apply to the court for an order that the necessary measures be taken.

2 In particular, the court may set the association a time limit in which to restore the situation required by law and may, if necessary, appoint an administrator.

3 The association bears the cost of such measures. The court may order the association to make an advance payment to the persons appointed.

4 For good cause, the association may apply to the court for the removal of the persons it appointed.


1 Inserted by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).

Art. 70 C. Membership / I. Admission, resignation

C. Membership

I. Admission, resignation

1 Members may be admitted at any time.

2 All members have a legal right to resign subject to six months’ notice expiring at the end of the calendar year or, if an administrative period is provided for, at the end of such period.

3 Membership is neither transferable nor heritable.

Art. 711C. Membership / II. Duty to pay subscriptions

II. Duty to pay subscriptions

Members have a duty to pay subscriptions if the articles of association so provide.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 17 Dec. 2004 (Determination of Subscription Duties for Association Members), in force since 1 June 2005 (AS 2005 2117; BBl 2004 4835 4843).

Art. 72 C. Membership / III. Exclusion

III. Exclusion

1 The articles of association may specify the grounds on which a member may be excluded, but exclusion may also occur without reasons being given.

2 In such cases, the exclusion may not be challenged based on the reasons.

3 Unless the articles of association provide otherwise, exclusion requires a resolution by the members and good cause.

Art. 73 C. Membership / IV. Status of former members

IV. Status of former members

1 Members who resign or are excluded have no claim on the assets of the association.

2 They are liable for the subscriptions due during the period of their membership.

Art. 74 C. Membership / V. Protection of the objects of the association

V. Protection of the objects of the association

No member may be forced against his or her will to accept a change in the objects of the association.

Art. 75 C. Membership / VI. Protection of members

VI. Protection of members

Any member who has not consented to a resolution which infringes the law or the articles of association is entitled by law to challenge such resolution in court within one month of learning thereof.

Art. 75a1Cbis. Liability

Cbis. Liability

The association is liable for its obligations with its assets. Such liability is limited to the assets unless the articles of association provide otherwise.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 17 Dec. 2004 (Determination of Subscription Duties for Association Members), in force since 1 June 2005 (AS 2005 2117; BBl 2004 4835 4843).

Art. 76 D. Dissolution / I. Manner of dissolution / 1. By resolution

D. Dissolution

I. Manner of dissolution

1. By resolution

The association may be dissolved at any time by resolution of the members.

Art. 77 D. Dissolution / I. Manner of dissolution / 2. By operation of law

2. By operation of law

The association is dissolved by operation of law if it is insolvent or if the committee may no longer be appointed in accordance with the articles of association.

Art. 78 D. Dissolution / I. Manner of dissolution / 3. By court order

3. By court order

Where the objects of the association are unlawful or immoral, the competent authority or an interested party may apply for a court order of dissolution.

Art. 79 D. Dissolution / II. Deletion from the commercial register

II. Deletion from the commercial register

Where the association is registered, the committee or the court shall inform the commercial registrar of the dissolution so that the entry may be deleted.


  Chapter Three: Foundations

Art. 80 A. Formation / I. In general

A. Formation

I. In general

A foundation is established by the endowment of assets for a particular purpose.

Art. 81 A. Formation / II. Form of establishment

II. Form of establishment

1 A foundation may be created by public deed or by testamentary disposition.1

2 The foundation is entered in the commercial register based on its charter and, as the case may be, in accordance with any directions issued by the supervisory authority, and the entry must indicate the members of the board of trustees.

3 The probate authority shall inform the commercial registrar of the creation of the foundation by testamentary disposition.2


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law on Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law on Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 82 A. Formation / III. Challenge

III. Challenge

A foundation may be challenged by the founder’s heirs or creditors in the same manner as a gift.

Art. 831B. Organisation / I. In general

B. Organisation

I. In general

The foundation charter shall stipulate the foundation’s governing bodies and the manner in which it is to be administered.


1 Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).

Art. 83a1B. Organisation / II. Bookkeeping

II. Bookkeeping

1 The supreme governing body of the foundation shall maintain its business ledgers. The provisions of the Code of Obligations2 on commercial bookkeeping and accounting apply mutatis mutandis.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law on Foundations) (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191). Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 23 Dec. 2011 (Accounting Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 6679; BBl 2008 1589).
2 SR 220

Art. 83b1B. Organisation / III. Auditors / 1. Duty of audit and applicable law

III. Auditors

1. Duty of audit and applicable law

1 The board of trustees shall appoint external auditors.

2 The supervisory authority may exempt a foundation from the duty to appoint external auditors. The Federal Council determines the conditions for such exemption.

3 Where there are no special provisions for foundations, the provisions of the Code of Obligations2 on external auditors for public limited companies apply mutatis mutandis.

If the foundation has a duty to carry out a limited audit, the supervisory authority may require a full audit where necessary for a reliable assessment of the foundation’s financial situation.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law on Foundations) (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191). Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).
2 SR 220

Art. 83c1B. Organisation / III. Auditors / 2. Supervisory authority

2. Supervisory authority

The external auditors must provide the supervisory authority with a copy of the audit report and all important communications with the foundation.


1 Inserted by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).

Art. 83d1B. Organisation / IV. Organisational defects

IV. Organisational defects

1 If the planned system of organisation proves inadequate or if the foundation lacks one of the prescribed governing bodies or one such body is not lawfully constituted, the supervisory authority must take the necessary measures. In particular it may:

1.
set a time limit within which the foundation must restore the legally required situation; or
2.
appoint the body which is lacking or an administrator.

2 In the event that the foundation is unable to organise itself effectively, the supervisory authority shall transfer its assets to another foundation with as similar objects as possible.

3 The foundation bears the cost of such measures. The supervisory authority may require the foundation to make an advance payment to the persons appointed.

4 For good cause, the foundation may request the supervisory authority to remove persons whom it has appointed.


1 Inserted by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).

Art. 84 C. Supervision

C. Supervision

1 Foundations are supervised by the state authority (Confederation, canton, commune) to which they are assigned.

1bis The cantons may subject foundations at communal level to supervision at cantonal level.1

2 The supervisory authority must ensure that the foundation’s assets are used for their declared purpose.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law on Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 84a1Cbis. Measures in the event of overindebtedness and insolvency

Cbis. Measures in the event of overindebtedness and insolvency

1 Where there are grounds for concern that the foundation is overindebted or will no longer be able to meet its obligations in the longer term, its board of trustees must draw up an interim balance sheet at liquidation values and submit it to the external auditors. If the foundation has no external auditors, the board of trustees must submit the interim balance sheet to the supervisory authority.

2 If the external auditors establish that the foundation is overindebted or will no longer be able to meet its obligations in the longer term, it must submit the interim balance sheet to the supervisory authority.

3 The supervisory authority shall direct the board of trustees to take the necessary measures. If it fails to do so, the supervisory authority takes such measures itself.

4 If necessary, the supervisory authority shall take legal enforcement measures; the provisions of company law on commencement or deferral of compulsory dissolution apply mutatis mutandis.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law on Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 84b1

1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law on Foundations) (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191). Repealed by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), with effect from 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).

Art. 851D. Modification of the foundation / I. Reorganisation

D. Modification of the foundation

I. Reorganisation

At the request of the supervisory authority and having heard the board of trustees, the competent federal or cantonal authority may modify the foundation’s organisation where such a step is urgently required in order to preserve the foundation’s assets or safeguard the pursuit of its objects.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law on Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 86 D. Modification of the foundation / II. Amendment of objects / 1. Request by the supervisory authority or the board of trustees

II. Amendment of objects

1. Request by the supervisory authority or the board of trustees1

1 At the request of the supervisory authority or the board of trustees, the competent federal or cantonal authority may amend the objects of the foundation where the original objects have altered in significance or effect to such an extent that the foundation has plainly become estranged from the founder’s intentions.2

2 Subject to the same requirements, conditions that are detrimental to the objects of the foundation may be revoked or amended.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law of Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law of Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 86a1D. Modification of the foundation / II. Amendment of objects / 2. At the founder’s request or in accordance with his testamentary disposition

2. At the founder’s request or in accordance with his testamentary disposition

1 The competent federal or cantonal authority shall amend the objects of the foundation at the founder’s request or in accordance with his or her testamentary disposition, provided that the charter reserves the right to amend the objects and that at least ten years have elapsed since the foundation was established or since the last amendment requested by the founder.

2 Where the foundation pursues public or charitable objects within the meaning of Art. 56 lit. g of the Federal Act of 14 December 1990 on Direct Federal Taxation2, such new objects must likewise be public or charitable.

3 The right to amend a foundation’s objects is neither transferable nor heritable. If the founder is a legal entity, the right extinguishes at the latest 20 years after the establishment of the foundation.

4 Joint founders may only jointly request an amendment of the foundation’s objects.

5 The probate authority shall inform the competent authority of any testamentary disposition concerning the amendment of the foundation’s objects.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law of Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).
2 SR 642.11

Art. 86b1D. Modification of the foundation / III. Minor amendments to the charter

III. Minor amendments to the charter

Having heard the board of trustees, the supervisory authority may make minor amendments to the foundation charter provided these are objectively justified and do not impair the rights of any third party.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law of Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 87 E. Family and ecclesiastical foundations

E. Family and ecclesiastical foundations

1 Family and ecclesiastical foundations are not subject to supervision, unless otherwise provided by public law.

1bis They are exempt from the duty to appoint external auditors.1

2 Private law disputes are decided by the courts.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law of Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 881F. Dissolution and deletion from the register / I. Dissolution by the competent authority

F. Dissolution and deletion from the register

I. Dissolution by the competent authority

1 The competent federal or cantonal authority shall dissolve the foundation on application or of its own accord if:

1.
its objects have become unattainable and the foundation cannot be maintained by modifying its charter; or
2.
its objects have become unlawful or immoral.

2 Family and ecclesiastical foundations shall be dissolved by court order.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law of Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 891F. Dissolution and deletion from the register / II. Right to apply for dissolution, deletion from the register

II. Right to apply for dissolution, deletion from the register

1 Any interested party may file an application or bring an action for the dissolution of a foundation.

2 Dissolution must be reported to the commercial registrar so that the entry may be deleted.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law of Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 89a1G. Employee benefits schemes

G. Employee benefits schemes2

1 The following additional provisions apply to employee benefits schemes established in accordance with Art. 331 of the Code of Obligations3 in the form of a foundation.4

2 The foundation’s governing bodies must furnish the beneficiaries with the necessary information concerning the foundation’s organisation, activities and assets.

3 If employees pay contributions into the benefits scheme, they are entitled to participate in its administration at least in proportion to their contributions; wherever possible, the employees must elect their representative from among their employer’s personnel.5

4 ...6

5 The beneficiaries may sue the foundation for the distribution of benefits if they have paid contributions into it or if according to the foundation’s regulations they have a legal entitlement to such benefits.

6 For employee benefits schemes providing old age, survivors’ and invalidity pensions which are subject to the Vested Benefits Act of 17 December 19937 (VBA), the provisions of the Federal Act of 25 June 1982 on Occupational Old Age, Survivors’ and Invalidity Pension Provision (OPA)8 on the following matters apply:9

1.10
the definition and principles of occupational pension arrangements and the insurable salary or income (Art. 1, 33a and 33b);
2.11
the requirement of being subject to OASI (Art. 5 para. 1);
3.
the beneficiaries in the case of survivors’ benefits (Art. 20a);
3a.12
the adjustment of the invalidity pension following the equitable division of occupational pensions (Art. 24 para. 5);
3b.13
the provisional continuation of insurance and of the entitlement to benefits on the reduction or termination of the invalidity pension (Art. 26a);
4.14
the adjustment of plan benefits to inflation (Art. 36 para. 2–4);
4a.15 the agreement on a lump sum payment (Art. 37a);
5.
the prescription of claims and the safekeeping of insurance documents (Art. 41);
5a.16
the use, processing and disclosure of the OASI number for the Old Age and Survivors’ Insurance (Art. 48 para. 4, Art. 85a lit. f and Art. 86a para. 2 lit. bbis);
6.
liability (Art. 52);
7.17
the licensing and duties of the supervisory bodies (Art. 52a–52e);
8.18
the integrity and loyalty of the persons responsible, transactions with close associates and conflicts of interest (Art. 51b, 51c and 53a);
9.
partial or total liquidation (Art. 53b–53d);
10.19
termination of contracts (Art. 53e);
11.
the guarantee fund (Art. 56 para. 1 lit. c and para. 2–5, Art. 56a, 57 and 59);
12.20
supervision and oversight (Art. 61–62a and 64–64c);
13.21
...
14.22
financial security (Art. 65 para. 1, 3 and 4, Art. 66 para. 4, Art. 67 and Art. 72a–72g);
15.
transparency (Art. 65a);
16.
reserves (Art. 65b);
17.
insurance contracts between occupational benefits schemes and insurance institutions (Art. 68 para. 3 and 4);
18.
asset management (Art. 71);
19.
legal recourse (Art. 73 and 74);
20.
criminal provisions (Art. 75–79);
21.
buy-in (Art. 79b);
22.
insurable salary and income (Art. 79c);
23.
provision of information to insured persons (Art. 86b).23

7 For employee benefits schemes providing old age, survivors’ and invalidity pensions but which are not subject to the VBA, such as employer-sponsored welfare funds with discretionary benefits and financing foundations, only the following provisions of the OPA apply:

1.
the requirement of being subject to OASI (Art. 5 para. 1);
2.
the use, processing and disclosure of the OASI number (Art. 48 para. 4, 85a let. f and 86a para. 2 let. bbis);
3.
liability (Art. 52);
4.
the licensing and duties of the auditors (Art. 52a, 52b and 52c para. 1 let. a–d and g, 2 and 3);
5.
the integrity and loyalty of the persons responsible, transactions with close associates and conflicts of interest (Art. 51b, 51c and 53a);
6.
total liquidation (Art. 53c);
7.
supervision and oversight (Art. 61–62a and 64–64b);
8.
legal recourse (Art. 73 and 74);
9.
criminal provisions (Art. 75–79);
10.
tax treatment (Art. 80, 81 para. 1 and 83).24

8 For employee benefits schemes under paragraph 7, the following provisions also apply:

1.
they manage their assets so that security, an adequate yield on investments and the required liquidity for their tasks are guaranteed.
2.
the supervisory authority shall rule on partial liquidation matters related to employer-sponsored welfare funds with discretionary benefits at the request of the foundation board.
3.
they shall respect the principles of equal treatment and fairness mutatis mutandis.25

1 Inserted by No II of the FA of 21 March 1958, in force since 1 July 1958 (AS 1958 379; BBl 1956 II 825). Originally Art. 89bis, until the entry into force of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
2 Amended by No II Art. 2 No 1 of the FA of 25 June 1971, in force since 1 Jan. 1972 (AS 1971 1465; BBl 1967 II 241).
3 SR 220
4 Amended by No II Art. 2 No 1 of the FA of 25 June 1971, in force since 1 Jan. 1972 (AS 1971 1465; BBl 1967 II 241).
5 Amended by No II Art. 2 No 1 of the FA of 25 June 1971, in force since 1 Jan. 1972 (AS 1971 1465; BBl 1967 II 241).
6 Repealed by No III of the FA of 21 June 1996, with effect from 1 Jan. 1997 (AS 1996 3067; BBl 1996 I 564 580).
7 SR 831.42
8 SR 831.40
9 Amended by No I of the FA of 25 Sept. 2015 (Employee Benefits Schemes), in force since 1 April 2016 (AS 2016 935; BBl 2014 6143 6649).
10 Amended by No II 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Measures to Facilitate the Employment of Older Persons), in force since 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 4427; BBl 2007 5669).
11 Amended by No I of the FA of 25 Sept. 2015 (Employee Benefits Schemes), in force since 1 April 2016 (AS 2016 935; BBl 2014 6143 6649).
12 Inserted by Annex No 2 of the FA of 18 March 2011 (6th InvI Revision, first set of measures) (AS 2011 5659; BBl 2010 1817). Amended by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).
13 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).
14 Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 18 June 2004, in force since 1 Jan. 2005 (AS 2004 4635; BBl 2003 6399).
15 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).
16 Inserted by Annex No 1 of the FA of 23 June 2006 (New OASI Insurance Number), in force since 1 Dec. 2007 (AS 2007 5259; BBl 2006 501).
17 Amended by No II 1 of the FA of 19 March 2010 (OPA Structural Reform), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 3393; BBl 2007 5669).
18 Amended by No II 1 of the FA of 19 March 2010 (OPA Structural Reform), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 3393; BBl 2007 5669).
19 Amended by No II of the FA of 20 Dec. 2006 (Change of Employee Benefits Scheme), in force since 1 May 2007 (AS 2007 1803 1805; BBl 2005 5941 5953).
20 Amended by No II 1 of the FA of 19 March 2010 (OPA Structural Reform), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 3393; BBl 2007 5669).
21 Repealed by No II 1 of the FA of 19 March 2010 (OPA Structural Reform), with effect from 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 3393; BBl 2007 5669).
22 Amended by No II 1 of the FA of 17 Dec. 2010 (Funding of benefits schemes for public corporations), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 3385; BBl 2008 8411).
23 Inserted by Annex No 1 of the FA of 25 June 1982 on Old Age, Survivors’ and Disability Insurance (AS 1983 797; BBl 1976 I 149). Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 3 Oct. 2003 (1st revision of OPA), No 6, 7, 10–12, 14 (with the exception of Art. 66 para. 4), 15, 17–20 and 23 in force since 1 April 2004, No 3–5, 8, 9, 13, 14 (Art. 66 para. 4) and 16 in force since 1 Jan. 2005, No 1, 21 and 22 in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2004 1677; BBl 2000 2637).
24 Inserted by No I of the FA of 25 Sept. 2015 (Employee Benefits Schemes), in force since 1 April 2016 (AS 2016 935; BBl 2014 6143 6649).
25 Inserted by No I of the FA of 25 Sept. 2015 (Employee Benefits Schemes), in force since 1 April 2016 (AS 2016 935; BBl 2014 6143 6649).


  Title Twobis:2  3  Collective Assets

Art. 89b A. No management

A. No management

1 In the case of a public collection for charitable purposes, if no arrangements have been made for the management or use of the collective assets, the competent authority shall take the required measures.

2 It may appoint an administrator for the collective assets or allocate the assets to an association or a foundation with objects that are as similar as possible.

3 The administrator is subject, mutatis mutandis, to the regulations on deputyships in context of adult protection.

Art. 89c B. Jurisdiction B. Jurisdiction

B. Jurisdiction

1 The canton in which the main part of the collective is managed has jurisdiction.

2 Unless the canton provides otherwise, the authority that supervises the foundations has jurisdiction.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).2 Corrected by the Federal Assembly Drafting Committee (Art. 58 Abs. 1 ParlA; SR 171.10).3 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

  Part Two: Family Law

  Division One: Marital Law

  Title Three:1  Marriage

  Chapter One: Engagement

Art. 90 A. Betrothal

A. Betrothal

1 Engagement is constituted by mutual promises to marry.

2 Minors incur no obligation through betrothal without the consent of their legal representative.1

3 Engagement does not give rise to any actionable obligation to marry.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 91 B. Ending the engagement / I. Gifts

B. Ending the engagement

I. Gifts

1 If the engagement is ended, the engaged parties may demand the return of gifts made to each other, with the exception of the usual occasional gifts, unless the engagement has ended as a result of death.

2 Where such gifts are no longer at hand, restitution is subject to the provisions governing unjust enrichment.

Art. 92 B. Ending the engagement / II. Duty to contribute

II. Duty to contribute

If one of the engaged couple has in good faith incurred expense in anticipation of the marriage ceremony and the engagement is then ended, that party may claim a reasonable contribution from the other where this is not inequitable in the overall circumstances.

Art. 93 B. Ending the engagement / III. Prescription

III. Prescription

Claims arising from the engagement prescribe one year from the ending of the engagement.


  Chapter Two: Requirements for Marriage

Art. 94 A. Capacity to marry

A. Capacity to marry

1 To be able to marry, the prospective spouses must have reached 18 years of age and have the capacity of judgement.

2 ...1


1 Repealed by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), with effect from 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 95 B. Impediments / I. Kinship

B. Impediments

I. Kinship1

1 Marriage between lineal relatives and between siblings or half-siblings, whether related to each other by parentage or adoption, is prohibited.2

2 Adoption does not remove the impediment to marriage constituted by kinship between the adopted child and his issue on the one hand and his adoptive family on the other.


1 Amended by Annex No 8 of the Civil Partnerships Act of 18 June 2004, in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 5685; BBl 2003 1288).
2 Amended by Annex No 8 of the Civil Partnerships Act of 18 June 2004, in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 5685; BBl 2003 1288).

Art. 96 B. Impediments / II. Previous marriage

II. Previous marriage

A person wishing to remarry must prove that any previous marriage has been annulled or dissolved.


  Chapter Three: Preparation and Wedding Ceremony

Art. 97 A. General principles

A. General principles

1 The wedding ceremony takes place in the presence of the civil registrar after the preparatory procedure has been taken.

2 The engaged couple may marry in the civil register district of their choice.

3 No religious wedding ceremony is permitted prior to the civil ceremony.

Art. 97a1Abis. Circumvention of the legislation on foreign nationals

Abis. Circumvention of the legislation on foreign nationals

1 The civil registrar shall not consider a request for marriage if the bride or groom clearly has no intention of living together but wishes to circumvent the provisions on the admission and residence of foreign nationals.

2 The civil registrar shall grant a hearing to the prospective spouses and may obtain information from other authorities or third parties.


1 Inserted by Annex No II 4 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 on Foreign Nationals, in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 5437; BBl 2002 3709).

Art. 98 B. Preparatory procedure / I. Request

B. Preparatory procedure

I. Request

1 The preparatory procedure is carried out at the civil register office at the domicile of the bride or groom at their request.

2 They must appear in person. If they may show that they clearly cannot be required to do so, the preparatory procedure may be carried out in writing.

3 They must furnish documentary proof of identity and personally declare at the civil register office that they satisfy the legal requirements for marriage; they must also produce any necessary consent.

4 Engaged couples who are not Swiss citizens must prove during the preparatory procedure that they are lawfully resident in Switzerland.1


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 12 June 2009 (Prevention of Marriages in the event of Unlawful Residence), in force since 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 3057; BBl 2008 2467 2481).

Art. 99 B. Preparatory procedure / II. Conduct and completion of the preparatory procedure

II. Conduct and completion of the preparatory procedure

1 The civil register office verifies that:

1.
the request has been duly submitted;
2.
the identity of the engaged couple has been established; and
3.1
the requirements for marriage are satisfied, and in particular whether there are any circumstances that suggest that the request clearly does not reflect the free will of the engaged couple.

2 Provided these requirements are fulfilled, the civil register office shall inform the betrothed parties that the preparatory procedure has been completed and of the legally prescribed time limits for holding the wedding ceremony.2

3 After consulting the engaged couple and in conformity with cantonal regulations, the civil register office sets the date of the wedding ceremony or, upon request, authorises that it may be conducted in another civil register district.

4 The civil register office must inform the competent authority of the identity of any engaged couple who have not proven that they are lawfully resident in Switzerland.3


1 Amended by No I 3 of the FA of 15 June 2012 on Measures against Forced Marriages, in force since 1 July 2013 (AS 2013 1035; BBl 2011 2185).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 28 Sept. 2018, in force since 1 Jan. 2020 (AS 2019 3813; BBl 2017 6769).
3 Inserted by No I of the FA of 12 June 2009 (Prevention of Marriages in the event of Unlawful Residence), in force since 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 3057; BBl 2008 2467 2481).

Art. 1001B. Preparatory procedure / III. Time limits

III. Time limits

The wedding ceremony may take place within three months following notification of completion of the preparatory procedure.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 28 Sept. 2018, in force since 1 Jan. 2020 (AS 2019 3813; BBl 2017 6769).

Art. 101 C. Wedding ceremony / I. Venue

C. Wedding ceremony

I. Venue

1 The wedding ceremony takes place at the wedding venue of the civil register district chosen by the engaged couple.

2 Where the preparatory procedure was conducted in a different civil register district, the engaged couple must produce a marriage licence.

3 If the engaged couple show that they cannot reasonably be required to appear at the official venue, the wedding may take place at another location.

Art. 102 C. Wedding ceremony / II. Form

II. Form

1 A wedding is a public ceremony that takes place in the presence of two adult witnesses who are capable of judgement.1

2 The civil registrar asks the bride and groom individually whether each wishes to marry the other.

3 If both answer in the affirmative, they are pronounced married by mutual consent.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 103 D. Implementing provisions

D. Implementing provisions

The Federal Council and, within the scope of their powers, the cantons shall enact the necessary implementing provisions.


  Chapter Four: Annulment of Marriage

Art. 104 A. General principle

A. General principle

A marriage contracted before a civil registrar may be annulled only on one of the grounds provided in this chapter.

Art. 105 B. Annulment not subject to a time limit / I. Grounds

B. Annulment not subject to a time limit

I. Grounds

Grounds for annulment are:

1.
that one of the spouses1 was already married at the time of the wedding and the previous marriage had not been dissolved by divorce or by the death of the previous spouse;
2.
that one of the spouses lacked capacity of judgement at the time of the wedding and has not regained such capacity since;
3.2
that the marriage was prohibited due to kinship;
4.3
one of the spouses has no intention of living with the other, but wishes to circumvent the provisions on the admission and residence of foreign nationals;
5.4
a spouse has not married of his or her own free will;
6.5
one of the spouses is a minor, unless the continuation of the marriage is in the overriding interest of this spouse.

1 Footnote relevant to German text only.
2 Amended by No 8 of the Civil Partnerships Act of 18 June 2004, in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 5685; BBl 2003 1288).
3 Inserted by Annex No II 4 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 on Foreign Nationals, in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 5437; BBl 2002 3709).
4 Inserted by No I 3 of the FA of 15 June 2012 on Measures against Forced Marriages, in force since 1 July 2013 (AS 2013 1035; BBl 2011 2185).
5 Inserted by No I 3 of the FA of 15 June 2012 on Measures against Forced Marriages, in force since 1 July 2013 (AS 2013 1035; BBl 2011 2185).

Art. 106 B. Annulment not subject to a time limit / II. Action for annulment

II. Action for annulment

1 An action for annulment is brought ex officio by the competent cantonal authority at the domicile of the spouses; in addition, any interested party is entitled to bring such action. Provided this is compatible with their duties, the federal and cantonal authorities shall contact the authority competent for the action if they have reason to believe that there are grounds for annulment.1

2 If the marriage has been otherwise dissolved, the authority may no longer seek an annulment ex officio; however, any interested party may seek a declaration of annulment.

3 An action for annulment may be brought at any time.


1 Last sentence inserted by No I 3 of the FA of 15 June 2012 on Measures against Forced Marriages, in force since 1 July 2013 (AS 2013 1035; BBl 2011 2185).

Art. 107 C. Annulment subject to a time limit / I. Grounds

C. Annulment subject to a time limit

I. Grounds

A spouse may seek a declaration of annulment if he or she:

1.
temporarily lacked capacity of judgement at the time of the wedding;
2.
married in error, whether because he or she did not wish to marry at all or did not wish to marry the other person;
3.
contracted the marriage because he or she was intentionally deceived with regard to essential personal attributes of the other spouse;
4.1
...

1 Repealed by No I 3 of the FA of 15 June 2012 on Measures against Forced– Marriages, with effect from 1 July 2013 (AS 2013 1035; BBl 2011 2185).

Art. 108 C. Annulment subject to a time limit / II. Action for annulment

II. Action for annulment

1 An action for annulment must be brought within six months of learning of the grounds for annulment or of the date on which the threat ceased, but in any event within five years of the wedding.

2 The right to bring an action for annulment does not pass to heirs; however, an heir may continue an action already brought.

Art. 109 D. Effects of judgment

D. Effects of judgment

1 A marriage does not become invalid until a court has declared it annulled; prior to such judgment it has all the effects of a valid marriage with the exception of claims under inheritance law, which in any event the surviving spouse loses.

2 The provisions governing divorce apply mutatis mutandis to the effects of a court declaration of annulment on the spouses and their children.

3 The presumption of paternity in favour of the husband does not apply if the marriage is annulled because it served to circumvent the provisions on the admission and residence of foreign nationals.1


1 Inserted by Annex No II 4 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 on Foreign Nationals, in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 5437; BBl 2002 3709).

Art. 1101

1 Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).


  Title Four:2  Divorce and Separation

  Chapter One: Requirements for Divorce

Art. 1111A. Divorce by joint request / I. Comprehensive agreement

A. Divorce by joint request

I. Comprehensive agreement

1 Where the spouses jointly request divorce and submit a comprehensive agreement on the consequences of the divorce along with any necessary documents and with joint applications in respect of the children, the court shall hear the spouses both separately and together. The hearing may comprise two or more sessions.

2 If the court is persuaded that desire for divorce and the agreement are the product of free will and careful reflection and that the agreement with the applications in respect of the children may be approved, the court shall issue the divorce decree.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 25 Sept. 2009 (Reflection Period in Divorce Proceedings by joint Application), in force since 1 Feb. 2010 (AS 2010 281; BBl 2008 1959 1975).

Art. 112 A. Divorce by joint request / II. Partial agreement

II. Partial agreement

1 The spouses may jointly request divorce and ask the court to decide matters on which they cannot reach agreement.

2 As in the case of comprehensive agreement, the court shall hear the parties on those consequences of the divorce on which they have reached agreement and on their request that the remaining consequences be decided by the court.

3 ...1


1 Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 1131

1 Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 1141B. Divorce at the petition of one spouse / I. After living apart

B. Divorce at the petition of one spouse

I. After living apart

A spouse may petition for divorce if, at the time the petition is filed or at the time the divorce request is replaced by a divorce petition, the spouses have lived apart for at least two years.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 2003 (Separation Period in Divorce Law), in force since 1 June 2004 (AS 2004 2161; BBl 2003 3927 5825).

Art. 1151B. Divorce at the petition of one spouse / II. Irretrievable breakdown

II. Irretrievable breakdown

Prior to the expiry of the two-year period, a spouse may petition for divorce if the marriage has irretrievably broken down for compelling reasons for which he or she is not responsible.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 2003 (Separation Period in Divorce Law), in force since 1 June 2004 (AS 2004 2161; BBl 2003 3927 5825).

Art. 1161

1 Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).


  Chapter Two: Separation

Art. 117 A. Requirements and procedure

A. Requirements and procedure

1 Spouses may petition for a separation decree subject to the same requirements as apply to divorce.

2 ...1

3 The right to petition for divorce is unaffected by the separation decree.


1 Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 118 B. Effects of separation

B. Effects of separation

1 By operation of the law, the separation decree implements the marital property separation of property regime.

2 Otherwise, the provisions governing measures for the protection of the marital union apply mutatis mutandis.


  Chapter Three: Consequences of Divorce

Art. 1191A. Civil status of divorced spouses

A. Civil status of divorced spouses

1 A spouse who has changed his or her surname on marriage retains that surname following divorce; he or she may at any time declare before the civil registrar the wish to revert to the name by which he or she was known prior to the marriage.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 120 B. Marital property law and inheritance law

B. Marital property law and inheritance law

1 The provisions of marital property law apply to the division of marital property.

2 Divorced spouses have no rights of inheritance in relation to each other and may not make claims based on testamentary dispositions made before their divorce proceedings were made pending.

Art. 121 C. Family home

C. Family home

1 If a spouse must remain in the family home because of the children or for other compelling reasons, the court may transfer the rights and obligations under the tenancy agreement to that spouse provided this is not inequitable for the other.

2 The previous tenant is jointly and severally liable for payment of the rent up to the date on which the tenancy ends or may be terminated pursuant to the tenancy agreement or by law, but for a maximum period of two years; if an action is brought to recover rent due, he or she is entitled to set off the amount paid in instalments equal to the amount of the monthly rent against any maintenance payments owed to the other spouse.

3 If the home belongs to the family of one of the spouses, the court may, on the same conditions, grant the other spouse a right of residence for a fixed term in return for reasonable compensation or set-off against maintenance payments. Where new and compelling reasons so require, such right of residence may be restricted or revoked.

Art. 1221D. Occupational pensions / I. Principle

D. Occupational pensions

I. Principle

In the event of divorce, any occupational pension assets accrued during the marriage up to the point at which divorce proceedings commence are divided equitably.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).

Art. 1231D. Occupational pensions / II. Equitable division of termination benefits

II. Equitable division of termination benefits

1 Termination benefits including vested benefits and early withdrawals for purchasing owner-occupied property are divided equally.

2 Paragraph 1 does not apply to one-off contributions from individual property in accordance with the law.

3 The termination benefits to be divided are calculated on the basis of Articles 15–17 and 22a or 22b of the Vested Benefits Act of 17 December 19932.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).
2 SR 831.42

Art. 1241D. Occupational pensions / III. Equitable division of invalidity pension prior to statutory retirement age

III. Equitable division of invalidity pension prior to statutory retirement age

1 If, at the point at which divorce proceedings commence, a spouse is drawing an invalidity pension prior to the statutory retirement age, the amount to which he or she would be entitled under Article 2 paragraph 1ter of the Vested Benefits Act of 17 December 19932 following cancellation of the invalidity pension counts as the termination benefits.

2 The provisions on the equitable division of termination benefits apply mutatis mutandis.

3 The Federal Council determines in which cases the amount under paragraph 1 may not be applied in the division because there has been a reduction due to over-compensation.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).
2 SR 831.42

Art. 124a1D. Occupational pensions / IV. Equitable division in the case of invalidity pensions after statutory retirement age and in the case of retirement pensions

IV. Equitable division in the case of invalidity pensions after statutory retirement age and in the case of retirement pensions

1 If, at the point at which divorce proceedings commence, a spouse is drawing an invalidity pension after the statutory retirement age or drawing a retirement pension, the court decides at its own discretion how the pension is to be divided. In doing so it primarily takes into account the duration of the marriage and the pension requirements of each spouse.

2 The share of the pension awarded to the spouse entitled thereto is converted into a life-long pension. This is paid to the entitled spouse by the liable spouse’s occupational pension fund or is transferred to the entitled spouse’s own occupational pension fund.

3 The Federal Council regulates:

1.
the actuarial conversion of the share of the pension into a life-long pension;
2.
the procedure in cases in which the retirement benefits are postponed or the invalidity pension is reduced due to over-compensation.

1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).

Art. 124b1D. Occupational pensions / V. Exceptions

V. Exceptions

1 The spouses may, in an agreement on the consequences of the divorce, agree not to divide the assets equally or not to divide them at all if there are sufficient retirement pension and invalidity pension funds otherwise.

2 The court may award the entitled spouse less than half of the termination benefits or rule that they should not be divided if good cause exists. Good cause exists above all when equal division would be unreasonable:

1.
in view of the division of marital property or the economic circumstances following divorce;
2.
in view of the pension requirements, in particular with regard to the difference in age between the spouses.

3 The court may award the entitled spouse more than half of the termination benefits if he or she cares for joint children following the divorce and the liable spouse continues to have sufficient retirement and invalidity pension assets.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).

Art. 124c1D. Occupational pensions / VI. Offset of mutual entitlements

VI. Offset of mutual entitlements

1 The spouses’ mutual entitlements to termination benefits or a share of a pension are offset. The pension entitlement is offset before the share of the pension awarded to the entitled spouse is converted into a life-long pension.

2 Termination benefits may only be offset against a share of a pension if the spouses and the occupational pension institutions agree.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).

Art. 124d1D. Occupational pensions / VII. Unreasonableness

VII. Unreasonableness

If, having considered the pension requirements of both spouses, an equitable division of occupational pension assets is unreasonable, the liable spouse shall owe the entitled spouse a lump sum payment.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).

Art. 124e1D. Occupational pensions / VIII. Impossibility

VIII. Impossibility

1 If the equitable division of pension fund assets is not possible, the liable spouse shall owe the entitled spouse adequate compensation in the form of a lump sum payment or as a pension.

2 A Swiss judgment may be amended at the request of the liable spouse if pension entitlements existing abroad have been offset by adequate compensation pursuant to paragraph 1 and such pension entitlements are then divided up in a foreign decision that is binding on the foreign party liable to pay pension contributions.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).

Art. 125 E. Post-marital maintenance / I. Requirements

E. Post-marital maintenance

I. Requirements

1 If a spouse cannot reasonably be expected to provide for his or her own maintenance, including an appropriate level of retirement provision, the other spouse must pay a suitable contribution.

2 In deciding whether such a contribution is to be made and, if so, in what amount and for how long, the following factors in particular must be considered:

1.
the division of duties during the marriage;
2.
the duration of the marriage;
3.
the standard of living during the marriage;
4.
the age and health of the spouses;
5.
the income and assets of the spouses;
6.
the extent and duration of child care still required of the spouses;
7.
the vocational training and career prospects of the spouses and the likely cost of reintegration into working life;
8.
expectancy of federal old age and survivor’s insurance benefits and of occupational or other private or state pensions, including the expected proceeds of any division of withdrawal benefits.

3 Exceptionally, a maintenance contribution may be denied or reduced if it would clearly be inequitable, particularly because the spouse otherwise entitled to receive such contribution:

1.
has grossly neglected his or her duty to contribute to the maintenance of the family;
2.
has wilfully brought about his or her own indigence;
3.
has committed a serious criminal offence against the other spouse or a person close to him or her.
Art. 126 E. Post-marital maintenance / II. Modalities of maintenance contributions

II. Modalities of maintenance contributions

1 The court shall fix an amount to be paid periodically by way of maintenance contribution and set the date on which the duty of maintenance commences.

2 Where justified in specific circumstances, a lump sum settlement may be ordered instead of regular payments.

3 The court may attach conditions to the maintenance contribution.

Art. 127 E. Post-marital maintenance / III. Regular payments / 1. Special terms

III. Regular payments

1. Special terms

The spouses may wholly or in part exclude any alteration of the regular maintenance payments stipulated in the agreement.

Art. 128 E. Post-marital maintenance / III. Regular payments / 2. Adjustment for inflation

2. Adjustment for inflation

The court may direct that the maintenance contribution will automatically increase or decrease depending on specified changes in the cost of living.

Art. 129 E. Post-marital maintenance / III. Regular payments / 3. Adjustment by court order

3. Adjustment by court order

1 In the event of a substantial and enduring change in circumstances, the periodic maintenance payments may be reduced, cancelled or suspended for a certain time; an improvement in the circumstances of the party entitled to maintenance may be taken into account only if the payments stipulated in the divorce decree provided sufficient maintenance.

2 The party entitled to maintenance may request that the payments be adjusted in line with future inflation if the income of the other party has increased unexpectedly since the divorce.

3 Within five years of the divorce, the party entitled to maintenance may request that payments be ordered or increased provided the divorce decree states that it was not possible at that time to order sufficient maintenance payments and provided the economic circumstances of the party obliged to pay maintenance have since improved.

Art. 130 E. Post-marital maintenance / III. Regular payments / 4. Expiry by law

4. Expiry by law

1 The duty to pay maintenance expires on the death of either the receiving party or the paying party.

2 Unless otherwise agreed, it likewise expires on the remarriage of the party entitled to receive maintenance.

Art. 1311E. Post-marital maintenance / IV. Enforcement / 1. Enforcement assistance

IV. Enforcement

1. Enforcement assistance

1 Where the liable party fails to pay maintenance, an official agency designated by cantonal law shall on request, in an appropriate way and usually without charge, assist the party entitled to maintenance to enforce his or her claims.

2 The Federal Council determines the terms of enforcement assistance.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 131a1E. Post-marital maintenance / IV. Enforcement / 2. Advance payments

2. Advance payments

1 Public law may provide for advance payments to be made should the liable person fail to make the necessary maintenance payments.

2 If the state authority makes maintenance payments to the entitled person, the maintenance entitlement with all rights is assigned to the state authority.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 132 E. Post-marital maintenance / IV. Enforcement / 3. Directions to debtors and posting security

3. Directions to debtors and posting security1

1 If the party obliged to pay maintenance fails to do so, the court may order his debtors to make payment in whole or in part to the party entitled to maintenance.

2 If the party obliged to pay maintenance persistently fails to do so, or if there are grounds to suspect that said party is preparing to abscond or is dissipating or concealing his assets, the court may order him to post appropriate security for future maintenance contributions.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 1331F. Children / I. Parental rights and obligations

F. Children

I. Parental rights and obligations

1 The court regulates parental rights and obligations in accordance with the provisions on the legal effects of the parent-child relationship. In particular it regulates:

1.
parental responsibility;
2.
residence;
3.
contact (Art. 273) or the sharing of parenting duties; and
4.
child maintenance contributions.

2 It shall consider all circumstances important to the child's best interests. It shall take account of a joint proposal by the parents and, if feasible, the opinion of the child.

3 It may order that the child maintenance contribution continue to be paid after the child reaches the age of majority.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 134 F. Children / II. Change of circumstances

II. Change of circumstances

1 At the request of either parent, the child or the child protection authority, new arrangements for parental responsibility shall be made by the child protection authority provided this is in the child’s best interests due to a substantial change in circumstances.

2 The requirements for the modification of other parental rights and -obligations are governed by the provisions on the effects of the parent-child relationship.1

3 If the parents agree, the child protection authority reassesses parental responsibility, residence and approves a child support agreement. In the other cases, the court competent to modify the divorce decree decides.2

4 If the court is required to decide on the modification of parental responsibility, residence or the child maintenance contribution for a minor child, it shall if necessary also reassess contact or sharing of parenting duties; in the other cases, the child protection authority shall decide on the modification of contact or sharing of parenting duties.3


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).
3 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 1351491

1 Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 150–158

Repealed


  Title Five:3  General Effects of Marriage

Art. 159 A. Marital union; rights and duties of spouses

A. Marital union; rights and duties of spouses

1 The wedding ceremony binds the spouses in marital union.

2 They mutually undertake to strive to safeguard the interests of the marital union and to care jointly for the children.

3 They owe each other loyalty and support.

Art. 1601B. Surname

B. Surname

1 Each spouse retains his or her surname.

2 However, the prospective spouses may declare to the civil registrar that they wish bear the surname of the bride or the groom as the family surname.

3 If the prospective spouses retain their surnames, they decide which of the surnames their children will bear. In justified cases, the civil registrar may relieve the prospective spouses of this obligation.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 1611C. Cantonal and communal citizenship

C. Cantonal and communal citizenship

Each spouse retains his or her cantonal and communal citizenship.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 162 D. Marital home

D. Marital home

The spouses jointly decide where to establish the marital home.

Art. 163 E. Maintenance of the family / I. In general

E. Maintenance of the family

I. In general

1 The spouses jointly provide for the proper maintenance of the family, each according to his or her ability.

2 They agree on the contributions each of them will make, notably by providing money, looking after the household, caring for the children or supporting the other’s career or business.

3 In so doing they take due account of the needs of the marital union and of their own personal circumstances.

Art. 164 E. Maintenance of the family / II. Allowance for personal use

II. Allowance for personal use

1 A spouse who looks after the household, cares for the children or supports the career or business of the other spouse is entitled to receive from the latter a reasonable allowance for his or her own personal use.

2 When determining said allowance, account must be taken of the personal resources of the receiving spouse and the need to provide conscientiously for the family, career and business.

Art. 165 E. Maintenance of the family / III. Extraordinary contributions by one spouse

III. Extraordinary contributions by one spouse

1 Where the contribution made by one spouse to the other’s career or business is significantly greater than required in the light of the latter’s contribution to the maintenance of the family, he or she is entitled to reasonable compensation.

2 The same applies if a spouse has contributed significantly more of his or her own income or assets to the maintenance of the family than he or she was obliged to contribute.

3 However, a spouse is not entitled to compensation if such extraordinary contribution was made under a work, loan or partnership agreement or on the basis of some other legal relationship.

Art. 166 F. Representation of the marital union

F. Representation of the marital union

1 While living together under the same roof, both spouses represent the marital union with regard to the day-to-day needs of the family.

2 A spouse may represent the marital union with regard to the other needs of the family only if:

1.
authorised so to do by the other spouse or by court order;
2.
the interests of the marital union brook no delay and the other spouse is unable to consent due to illness, absence or other similar reasons.

3 Each spouse is personally liable for his or her own actions and, to the extent that these do not exceed his or her powers of representation in a manner apparent to third parties, also renders the other spouse jointly and severally liable for such actions.

Art. 167 G. Spouses’ career or business

G. Spouses’ career or business

In the choice and pursuit of his or her career or business, each spouse must have due regard to the other and to the welfare of the marital union.

Art. 168 H. Transactions by the spouses / I. In general

H. Transactions by the spouses

I. In general

Each spouse may enter into transactions with the other or with third parties unless the law provides otherwise.

Art. 169 H. Transactions by the spouses / II. Family home

II. Family home

1 A spouse may terminate a tenancy agreement, alienate the family home or limit the rights in respect of the family home by other transactions only with the express consent of the other.

2 If the spouse cannot obtain such consent or it is withheld without good cause, he or she may petition the court.

Art. 170 J. Duty to inform

J. Duty to inform

1 Each spouse has the right to demand information from the other concerning his or her income, assets and debts.

2 At the request of one spouse, the court may order the other spouse or a third party to furnish the information required and to produce the necessary documents.

3 This does not apply to any information held by lawyers, solicitors, doctors, clergy and their auxiliary staff which is subject to professional confidentiality.

Art. 171 K. Protection of the marital union / I. Counselling agencies

K. Protection of the marital union

I. Counselling agencies

The cantons must ensure that spouses experiencing marital problems may seek help individually or jointly from marriage guidance or family counselling agencies.

Art. 172 K. Protection of the marital union / II. Court measures / 1. In general

II. Court measures

1. In general

1 If a spouse fails to fulfil his or her duties to the family or if the spouses disagree on matters of importance to the marital union, they may apply jointly or separately to the court for mediation.

2 The court reminds the spouses of their duties and attempts to settle their differences; if the spouses consent, experts may be consulted or they may be referred to a marriage guidance or family counselling agency.

3 If necessary, at the request of one spouse the court will take the steps envisaged by law. The provision governing the protection of the person from violence, threats or harassment applies mutatis mutandis.1


1 Second sentence inserted by No I of the FA of 23 June 2006 (Protection of the Personality against Violence, Threats or Harassment), in force since 1 July 2007 (AS 2007 137; BBl 2005 6871 6897).

Art. 173 K. Protection of the marital union / II. Court measures / 2. While living together / a. Financial contributions

2. While living together

a. Financial contributions

1 At the request of one spouse, the court determines the amounts to be paid for the maintenance of the family.

2 Likewise, at the request of one spouse, it determines the allowance payable to the spouse who looks after the household, cares for the children or supports the other’s career or business.

3 Payments may be claimed for the future and for one year preceding the request.

Art. 174 K. Protection of the marital union / II. Court measures / 2. While living together / b. Revocation of powers of representation

b. Revocation of powers of representation

1 If a spouse exceeds his or her power to represent the marital union or proves incapable of exercising it, at the other spouse’s request the court may revoke such power in whole or in part.

2 The spouse making such request may inform third parties of the revocation only by communications in person.

3 The revocation is effective towards third parties acting in good faith only if it has been made public by order of the court.

Art. 175 K. Protection of the marital union / II. Court measures / 3. Suspension of joint household / a. Grounds

3. Suspension of joint household

a. Grounds

A spouse is entitled to suspend the joint household for as long as his or her personality rights or financial security or the welfare of the family are seriously endangered by living together.

Art. 176 K. Protection of the marital union / II. Court measures / 3. Suspension of joint household / b. Arrangements for living apart

b. Arrangements for living apart

1 If the suspension of the joint household is justified, at the request of one spouse the court will:

1.1
determine the maintenance paid to any children and the other spouse;
2.
issue directions on the use of the home and the household effects;
3.
order a separation of property where justified in the circumstances.

2 A spouse may also make such request if living together is impossible, in particular because the other spouse refuses to do so without good cause.

3 If the spouses have minor children, the court must take the necessary steps in accordance with the provisions governing the legal effects of the parent-child relationship.2


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 176a1K. Protection of the marital union / II. Court measures / 4. Enforcement / a. Enforcement assistance and advance payments

4. Enforcement

a. Enforcement assistance and advance payments

The provisions governing enforcement assistance and advance payments on divorce and consequent to the parent-child relationship apply.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 177 K. Protection of the marital union / II. Court measures / 4. Enforcement / b. Directions to debtors

b. Directions to debtors1

If a spouse fails to fulfil his or her duty to maintain the family, the court may order his or her debtors to make payment in full or in part to the other spouse.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 178 K. Protection of the marital union / II. Court measures / 5. Restriction of power to dispose of assets

5. Restriction of power to dispose of assets

1 To the extent required to ensure the family’s financial security or fulfilment of a financial obligation arising from the marital union, at the request of one spouse the court may make the power to dispose of certain assets conditional on its consent.

2 The court orders the appropriate protective measures.

3 If it prohibits a spouse from disposing of land it must have a note to this effect recorded in the land register.

Art. 1791K. Protection of the marital union / II. Court measures / 6. Change of circumstances

6. Change of circumstances2

1 If there is a change in circumstances, at the request of either spouse the court shall modify the measures or revoke the same if they are no longer justified. The provisions on a change of circumstances in divorce cases apply mutatis mutandis.3

2 If the spouses resume living together, the measures ordered in connection with living apart lapse, with the exception of the separation of property and the child protection measures.


1 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).
3 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 1801

Repealed


1 Repealed by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, with effect from 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).


  Title Six:4  Marital Property Law

  Chapter One: General Provisions

Art. 181 A. Ordinary property regime

A. Ordinary property regime

Spouses are subject to the provisions governing participation in acquired property provided they have not agreed otherwise in a marital agreement and provided no extraordinary marital property regime has come into effect.

Art. 182 B. Marital agreement / I. Choice of regime

B. Marital agreement

I. Choice of regime

1 A marital agreement may be concluded before or after the wedding.

2 The prospective spouses or the spouses may choose, set aside or modify their marital property regime only within the limits of the law.

Art. 183 B. Marital agreement / II. Capacity to enter into an agreement

II. Capacity to enter into an agreement

1 A person wishing to enter into a marital agreement must have capacity of judgement.

2 Minors, or adults subject to a deputyship that covers the conclusion of a marital agreement require the consent of their legal representative.1


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 184 B. Marital agreement / III. Form of the agreement

III. Form of the agreement

The marital agreement must be executed as a public deed and signed by the parties and, where applicable, by the legal representative.

Art. 185 C. Extraordinary property regime / I. At the request of one spouse / 1. By court order

C. Extraordinary property regime

I. At the request of one spouse

1. By court order

1 At the request of one spouse, the court shall order a separation of property where there is good cause to do so.

2 In particular, good cause exists:

1.
if the other spouse is overindebted or his or her share of the common property has been distrained;
2.
if the other spouse is endangering the interests of the applicant or of the marital union;
3.
if the other spouse unreasonably withholds the consent required for the disposal of common property;
4.
if the other spouse refuses to provide the applicant with information concerning his or her income, assets and debts or concerning common property;
5.
if the other spouse permanently lacks capacity of judgement.

3 Where a spouse permanently lacks capacity of judgement, his or her legal representative may likewise request separation of property for this reason.

Art. 1861C. Extraordinary property regime / I. At the request of one spouse / 2. ...

2. ...


1 Repealed by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, with effect from 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).

Art. 187 C. Extraordinary property regime / I. At the request of one spouse / 3. Revocation

3. Revocation

1 The spouses may at any time reinstate their previous marital property regime or implement a new one by marital agreement.

2 If the reason for the separation of property no longer exists, at the request of one spouse the court may direct that the previous marital property regime be reinstated.

Art. 188 C. Extraordinary property regime / II. In the event of bankruptcy or distraint / 1. Bankruptcy

II. In the event of bankruptcy or distraint

1. Bankruptcy

If a spouse living under the community of property regime is declared bankrupt, separation of property takes effect ex officio.

Art. 189 C. Extraordinary property regime / II. In the event of bankruptcy or distraint / 2. Distraint / a. By court order

2. Distraint

a. By court order

If a spouse living under the community of property regime is pursued for a personal debt and his or her share of the common property is distrained, the debt enforcement supervisory authority may request that the court order a separation of property.

Art. 190 C. Extraordinary property regime / II. In the event of bankruptcy or distraint / 2. Distraint / b. Request

b. Request1

1 The request is directed against both spouses.

2 ...2


1 Amended by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, in force since 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).
2 Repealed by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, with effect from 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).

Art. 191 C. Extraordinary property regime / II. In the event of bankruptcy or distraint / 3. Revocation

3. Revocation

1 If the creditors have been satisfied, at the request of one spouse the court may order the restoration of the community of property regime.

2 By marital agreement, the spouses may opt for the participation in acquired property regime.

Art. 192 C. Extraordinary property regime / III. Liquidation of the previous marital property regime

III. Liquidation of the previous marital property regime

Whenever the separation of property regime comes into effect, the liquidation of the previous regime is governed by the provisions applicable to the latter, unless the law provides otherwise.

Art. 193 D. Protection of creditors

D. Protection of creditors

1 The establishment, variation or liquidation of a marital property regime may not have the effect of releasing an asset with which one of the spouses or the marital union had hitherto been liable to creditors from such liability.

2 If such an asset has been transferred to the other spouse, the latter must pay the debt but may be released from such liability to the extent that he or she may prove that the asset received is worth less than the debt.

Art. 1941E. ...

E. ...


1 Repealed by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, with effect from 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).

Art. 195 F. Management of one spouse’s assets by the other

F. Management of one spouse’s assets by the other

1 Where one spouse expressly or tacitly entrusts management of his or her assets to the other, the provisions governing agency apply unless otherwise agreed.

2 The provisions governing settlement of debts between spouses are reserved.

Art. 195a G. Inventory

G. Inventory

1 Each spouse may at any time require the other’s cooperation in drawing up an inventory of their joint assets in the form of a public deed.

2 Such an inventory is deemed accurate if made within one year of the inclusion of such assets under the regime.


  Chapter Two: Statutory Marital Property Regime of Participation in Acquired Property

Art. 196 A. Ownership / I. Categories

A. Ownership

I. Categories

The marital property regime of participation in acquired property comprises the property acquired during the marriage and the individual property of each spouse.

Art. 197 A. Ownership / II. Acquired property

II. Acquired property

1 Acquired property comprises those assets which a spouse has acquired for valuable consideration during the marital property regime.

2 In particular, the acquired property of a spouse comprises:

1.
the proceeds from his or her employment;
2.
benefits received from staff welfare schemes, social security and social welfare institutions;
3.
compensation for inability to work;
4.
income derived from his or her own property;
5.
property acquired to replace acquired property.
Art. 198 A. Ownership / III. Individual property / 1. By operation of law

III. Individual property

1. By operation of law

By operation of law, a spouse’s individual property comprises:

1.
personal effects used exclusively by that spouse;
2.
assets belonging to one spouse at the beginning of the marital property regime or acquired later at no cost by inheritance or otherwise;
3.
claims for satisfaction;
4.
acquisitions that replace individual property.
Art. 199 A. Ownership / III. Individual property / 2. By marital agreement

2. By marital agreement

1 Under a marital agreement, spouses may declare acquired property to be individual property set aside for professional or business use.

2 Furthermore, spouses may stipulate in a marital agreement that income from individual property does not qualify as acquired property.

Art. 200 A. Ownership / IV. Proof

IV. Proof

1 Any person who asserts that a specific object or asset is owned by one or other spouse bears the burden of proof.

2 If no such proof may be adduced, the object or asset is presumed to be in the co-ownership of both spouses.

3 Until proven otherwise, all assets of a spouse are deemed to be acquired property.

Art. 201 B. Management, benefits and power of disposal

B. Management, benefits and power of disposal

1 Within the limits of the law, each spouse administers and enjoys the benefits of his or her individual property and has power of disposal over it.

2 If an asset is in the co-ownership of both spouses, neither spouse may dispose of his or her share in it without the other’s consent, unless otherwise agreed.

Art. 202 C. Liability toward third parties

C. Liability toward third parties

Each spouse is liable for his or her debts with all his or her property.

Art. 203 D. Debts between spouses

D. Debts between spouses

1 The marital property regime does not affect the maturity of debts contracted between spouses.

2 However, if payment of debts or the restitution of objects owed by a spouse would cause him or her serious difficulties which might endanger the marital union, such spouse may request a time limit within which to satisfy the claim; the claim is to be secured where reasonable in the circumstances.

Art. 204 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / I. Time of dissolution

E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation

I. Time of dissolution

1 The marital property regime is dissolved on the death of a spouse or on implementation of a different regime.

2 In the case of divorce, separation, annulment of the marriage or a court order for separation of property, the dissolution of the marital property regime takes retroactive effect as of the date on which the application was filed.

Art. 205 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / II. Taking back property and settling debts / 1. In general

II. Taking back property and settling debts

1. In general

1 Each spouse shall take back any of his or her property that is in the other’s possession.

2 Where one spouse shows an overriding interest in gaining sole possession of an object or asset in co-ownership, and notwithstanding any other legal measures available, he or she may request that said object or asset be allocated to him or her in return for compensation.

3 The spouses settle their debts to each other.

Art. 206 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / II. Taking back property and settling debts / 2. Participation in increased value

2. Participation in increased value

1 Where a spouse has contributed to the acquisition, improvement or preservation of an asset belonging to the other without receiving equivalent compensation, and where at the time of the liquidation that asset has increased in value, then his or her claim corresponds to his or her proportionate contribution and is calculated according to the current value of the asset; if, conversely, the asset has decreased in value, his or her claim corresponds to the original contribution.

2 If such an asset had already been alienated beforehand, the claim is calculated according to the proceeds obtained and is due immediately.

3 By written agreement, spouses may exclude participation in the increased value or vary the proportion thereof.

Art. 207 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / III. Calculating the surplus for each spouse / 1. Separation of acquired property and individual property

III. Calculating the surplus for each spouse

1. Separation of acquired property and individual property

1 The property acquired during marriage and the individual property of each spouse are separated according to their value at the time of the dissolution of the marital property regime.

2 Lump sum pension or invalidity benefits received by a spouse are added to his or her individual property in an amount equivalent to the present value of the pension or invalidity annuity to which he or she would be entitled on dissolution of the marital property regime.

Art. 208 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / III. Calculating the surplus for each spouse / 2. Additions

2. Additions

1 The following are added to the property acquired during marriage:

1.
the value of dispositions made without consideration by one spouse without the other’s consent during the five years preceding the dissolution of the marital property regime, save for the usual occasional gifts;
2.
the value of assets disposed of by one spouse during the marital property regime with the intention of diminishing the other’s share.

2 ...1


1 Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 209 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / III. Calculating the surplus for each spouse / 3. Compensation operations between acquired property and individual property

3. Compensation operations between acquired property and individual property

1 Where debts incurred in connection with acquired property have been paid out of individual property or where debts incurred in connection with individual property have been paid out of acquired property, there is a claim for compensation when the marital property regime is liquidated.

2 A debt encumbers the property in relation to which it was incurred, and in the event of doubt, it encumbers the acquired property.

3 If assets belonging to one category of property have contributed to the acquisition, improvement or preservation of assets belonging to the other and if the value of the latter has increased or diminished, the claim for compensation corresponds to the proportionate contribution made and is calculated according to the value of the assets at the time of the liquidation or their disposal.

Art. 210 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / III. Calculating the surplus for each spouse / 4. Surplus

4. Surplus

1 The remaining total value of the acquired property, including the assets added in and claims for compensation, and after deduction of the debts encumbering the acquired property, constitutes the surplus.

2 A deficit is disregarded.

Art. 211 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / IV. Valuation / 1. Market value

IV. Valuation

1. Market value

For the purpose of liquidating the marital property regime, assets are stated at their market value.

Art. 212 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / IV. Valuation / 2. Capitalised value / a. In general

2. Capitalised value

a. In general

1 An agricultural enterprise which one spouse continues to operate as owner or in respect of which the surviving spouse or one of the issue makes a justified claim for undivided allocation is stated at its capitalised value when calculating the proportionate added value and the claim for participation.

2 The owner of the agricultural enterprise or his or her heirs may bring a claim against the other spouse for proportionate added value or participation only in the amount they would receive if the business were stated at its market value.

3 The inheritance law provisions governing valuation and the participation of co-heirs in the profit apply mutatis mutandis.

Art. 213 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / IV. Valuation / 2. Capitalised value / b. Special circumstances

b. Special circumstances

1 The allocation value may be increased by a suitable amount if justified by special circumstances.

2 Special circumstances include in particular the maintenance requirements of the surviving spouse, the purchase price of the agricultural enterprise including capital investments, and the financial circumstances of the spouse to whom the agricultural enterprise belongs.

Art. 214 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / IV. Valuation / 3. Defining juncture

3. Defining juncture

1 For the purpose of valuing the acquired property at hand at the time of the dissolution of the marital property regime, the defining juncture is the time of the division.

2 For assets added to the acquired property, the defining juncture is the date on which they were alienated.

Art. 215 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / V. Participation in the surplus / 1. By law

V. Participation in the surplus

1. By law

1 Each spouse or his or her heirs is or are entitled to one-half of the surplus of the other spouse.

2 The claims are set off.

Art. 216 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / V. Participation in the surplus / 2. By agreement / a. In general

2. By agreement

a. In general

1 A different participation in the surplus may be agreed by marital agreement.

2 Such agreements must not adversely affect the statutory inheritance entitlements of children who are not the common issue of the spouses or those of the issue of such children.

Art. 217 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / V. Participation in the surplus / 2. By agreement / b. On divorce, separation, annulment of the marriage or separation of property by court order

b. On divorce, separation, annulment of the marriage or separation of property by court order

In the case of divorce, separation, annulment of marriage or separation of property by court order, agreements varying the statutory participation in the surplus are valid only if the marital property agreement expressly so provides.

Art. 218 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / VI. Payment of the participation claim and the share of the increased value / 1. Deferred payment

VI. Payment of the participation claim and the share of the increased value

1. Deferred payment

1 If immediate payment of the participation claim and the share of the increased value would cause serious difficulties for the debtor, he or she may request a deferral.

2 Unless otherwise agreed by the spouses, the participation claim and the share of the increased value bear interest as of completion of the division of property and, where justified in the circumstances, security must be furnished.

Art. 219 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / VI. Payment of the participation claim and the share of the increased value / 2. Home and household effects

2. Home and household effects

1 To ensure that the surviving spouse may maintain his or her accustomed lifestyle, at his or her request he or she will be granted a usufruct of or a right of residence in the home in which the spouses lived and which belonged to the deceased spouse, and this will be set off against his or her entitlement, subject to any contrary provision in the marital agreement.

2 On the same conditions, he or she may request that ownership of the household effects be transferred to him or her.

3 Where justified in the circumstances, at the request of the surviving spouse or the other legal heirs of the deceased spouse, ownership of the home may be granted rather than a usufruct or right of residence.

4 The surviving spouse may not claim such rights in respect of premises in which the deceased practised a profession or ran a business and which are required by one of his or her issue in order to continue said profession or business, subject to the provisions of agricultural inheritance law.

Art. 220 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / VI. Payment of the participation claim and the share of the increased value / 3. Claims against third parties

3. Claims against third parties

1 If the assets of the debtor or his or her estate are insufficient to cover the participation claim on division of the property, the entitled spouse or his or her heirs may demand from third-party beneficiaries the return of such dispositions as are to be added to the acquired property up to the amount of the shortfall.

2 The right to bring a claim is extinguished one year after the spouse or his or her heirs learn of the infringement of their rights, but in any event ten years after the dissolution of the marital property regime.

3 Moreover, the provisions governing claims in abatement under inheritance law apply mutatis mutandis.1


1 Amended by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, in force since 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).


  Chapter Three: Community of Property

Art. 221 A. Ownership / I. Categories

A. Ownership

I. Categories

The marital property regime of community of property comprises the common property and the individual property of each spouse.

Art. 222 A. Ownership / II. Common property / 1. General community of property

II. Common property

1. General community of property

1 The general community of property combines the assets and income of the spouses into common property, with the exception of those assets which by law constitute individual property.

2 The common property belongs to both spouses jointly.

3 Neither spouse is entitled to dispose of his or her share of the common property.

Art. 223 A. Ownership / II. Common property / 2. Limited community of property / a. Community restricted to acquired property

2. Limited community of property

a. Community restricted to acquired property

1 By marital agreement, the spouses may restrict community of property to the property acquired during marriage.

2 Revenue from individual property becomes common property.

Art. 224 A. Ownership / II. Common property / 2. Limited community of property / b. Further community of property regimes

b. Further community of property regimes

1 By marital agreement, the spouses may exclude from the community of property specific assets or types of assets, such as land, a spouse’s income from work or assets used to practise a profession or run a business.

2 Unless otherwise agreed, income from such assets does not become common property.

Art. 225 A. Ownership / III. Individual property

III. Individual property

1 Individual property may be created by marital agreement, dispositions by third parties or by law.

2 By law, items for the exclusive personal use of a spouse and claims for satisfaction constitute individual property.

3 A spouse’s statutory inheritance entitlement may not pass to him or her from his or her relatives as individual property where the marital agreement provides that such assets are common property.

Art. 226 A. Ownership / IV. Proof

IV. Proof

All assets are presumed to be common property unless proven to be the individual property of a spouse.

Art. 227 B. Management and power of disposal / I. Common property / 1. Everyday housekeeping

B. Management and power of disposal

I. Common property

1. Everyday housekeeping

1 The spouses must manage the common property in the best interests of the marital union.

2 Within the limits of everyday housekeeping, each spouse may incur commitments on behalf of the marital union and dispose of common property.

Art. 228 B. Management and power of disposal / I. Common property / 2. Extraordinary housekeeping

2. Extraordinary housekeeping

1 Outside the limits of everyday housekeeping, the spouses may incur commitments on behalf of the common property and dispose thereof only jointly or individually with the other’s consent.

2 Third parties are entitled to presume such consent provided they do not know or cannot be expected to know that it is absent.

3 The provisions governing representation of the marital union are reserved.

Art. 229 B. Management and power of disposal / I. Common property / 3. Use of common property for professional or business purposes

3. Use of common property for professional or business purposes

If a spouse practises a profession or runs a business on his or her own using common property with the other’s consent, he or she may conclude all transactions that such activities entail.

Art. 230 B. Management and power of disposal / I. Common property / 4. Renunciation and acceptance of inheritances

4. Renunciation and acceptance of inheritances

1 Without the other’s consent, a spouse is not entitled to renounce an inheritance which would become common property or accept inheritance of an overindebted estate.

2 If the spouse is unable to obtain consent or if it is withheld without good cause, he or she may petition the court.1


1 Amended by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, in force since 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 231 B. Management and power of disposal / I. Common property / 5. Liability and management costs

5. Liability and management costs

1 In relation to dealings concerning common property, on dissolution of the marital property regime, each spouse is liable as if he or she were an agent.

2 The costs of management are borne by the common property.

Art. 232 B. Management and power of disposal / II. Individual property

II. Individual property

1 Each spouse administers and disposes of his or her individual property within the limits of the law.

2 If income accrues to individual property, the management costs are borne by such property.

Art. 233 C. Liability toward third parties / I. Full liability

C. Liability toward third parties

I. Full liability

Each spouse is liable with his or her individual property and the common property:

1.
for debts incurred in exercising his or her powers to represent the marital union or in managing the common property;
2.
for debts incurred in the pursuit of a profession or business, provided common property has been used for this or the income therefrom becomes common property;
3.
for debts for which the other spouse is also personally liable;
4.
for debts in respect of which the spouses have agreed with third parties that their common property as well as the debtor’s individual property will be liable.
Art. 234 C. Liability toward third parties / II. Individual liability

II. Individual liability

1 For all other debts a spouse is liable only to the extent of his or her individual property and half the value of the common property.

2 Claims arising from the unjust enrichment of the marital union are reserved.

Art. 235 D. Debts between spouses

D. Debts between spouses

1 The marital property regime does not affect the maturity of debts contracted between spouses.

2 However, if payment of debts or the restitution of objects owed by a spouse would cause him or her serious difficulties which might endanger the marital union, such spouse may request to be granted a time limit in which to satisfy the claim; the claim is to be secured where reasonable in the circumstances.

Art. 236 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / I. Time of dissolution

E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation

I. Time of dissolution

1 The marital property regime is dissolved on the death of a spouse, the implementation of a different regime or when one of the spouses is declared bankrupt.

2 In the case of divorce, separation, annulment of the marriage or a court order for separation of property, the dissolution of the marital property regime takes retroactive effect as of the date on which the application was filed.

3 When determining the composition of common property and individual property, the defining juncture is the dissolution of the marital property regime.

Art. 237 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / II. Allocation to individual property

II. Allocation to individual property

Lump sum pension or invalidity benefits received by a spouse that have become common property are added to his or her individual property in the capitalised amount equivalent to the pension or invalidity annuity to which he or she would be entitled on dissolution of the marital property regime.

Art. 238 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / III. Compensation operations between joint and individual property

III. Compensation operations between joint and individual property

1 Where debts encumbering one category of property were paid out of assets belonging to the other, respective compensation claims between the common property and the individual property of each spouse arise on the dissolution of the marital property regime.

2 A debt encumbers the property in relation to which it was incurred, but in the case of doubt it encumbers the common property.

Art. 239 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / IV. Participation in increased value

IV. Participation in increased value

Where the individual property of a spouse or the common property has contributed to the acquisition, improvement or preservation of an asset belonging to another category of property, the provisions governing increased value in relation to participation in acquired property apply mutatis mutandis.

Art. 240 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / V. Valuation

V. Valuation

For the purpose of valuing the common property at hand at the time of the dissolution of the marital property regime, the defining juncture is the time of the division.

Art. 241 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / VI. Division / 1. On death or implementation of a different marital property regime

VI. Division

1. On death or implementation of a different marital property regime

1 If the community of property regime is dissolved by the death of a spouse or the implementation of a different marital property regime, each party or his or her heirs is entitled to one-half of the common property.

2 A different method of division may be agreed by marital agreement.

3 Such agreements must not adversely affect the statutory inheritance entitlements of the spouse’s issue.

Art. 242 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / VI. Division / 2. In other cases

2. In other cases

1 On divorce, separation, annulment of the marriage or separation of property by law or court order, each spouse shall take back from the common property such property as would have been his or her individual property under the participation in acquired property regime.

2 The remaining common property is divided equally between the spouses.

3 Agreements to vary the statutory method of division are valid only if the marital agreement expressly so provides.

Art. 243 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / VII. Division of the property / 1. Individual property

VII. Division of the property

1. Individual property

If the community of property is dissolved by the death of a spouse, the surviving spouse may request that such property as would have been his or her individual property under the participation in acquired property regime be allocated to him or her and count toward his or her share of the estate.

Art. 244 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / VII. Division of the property / 2. Home and household effects

2. Home and household effects

1 If the home in which the spouses lived or any household effects belong to the common property, the surviving spouse may request that such property be allocated to him or her and count toward his or her share of the estate.

2 Where justified in the circumstances, at the request of the surviving spouse or the other legal heirs of the deceased spouse, a usufruct or right of residence may be granted in lieu of ownership.

3 If the community of property is not dissolved by death, each spouse may make such requests where he or she may show an overriding interest.

Art. 245 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / VII. Division of the property / 3. Other assets

3. Other assets

If a spouse demonstrates an overriding interest, he or she may also demand that other assets be allocated to him or her and count toward his or her share.

Art. 246 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / VII. Division of the property / 4. Further provisions

4. Further provisions

In other respects the provisions governing the division of property in co-ownership and the division of estates apply mutatis mutandis.


  Chapter Four: Separation of Property

Art. 247 A. Management, benefits and power of disposal / I. In general

A. Management, benefits and power of disposal

I. In general

Within the limits of the law, each spouse shall administer and enjoy the benefits of his or her own property and has power of disposal over it.

Art. 248 A. Management, benefits and power of disposal / II. Proof

II. Proof

1 Any person who asserts that a specific object or asset is owned by one or other spouse bears the burden of proof.

2 If no such proof may be adduced, there is a presumption of co-ownership.

Art. 249 B. Liability toward third parties

B. Liability toward third parties

Each spouse is liable for his or her debts with all his or her property.

Art. 250 C. Debts between spouses

C. Debts between spouses

1 The marital property regime does not affect the maturity of debts contracted between spouses.

2 However, if payment of debts or the restitution of objects owed by a spouse would cause him or her serious difficulties which might endanger the marital union, such spouse may request to be granted a time limit in which to satisfy the claim; the claim is to be secured where reasonable in the circumstances.

Art. 251 D. Allocation of property in co-ownership

D. Allocation of property in co-ownership

Where one spouse shows an overriding interest in gaining sole possession of an object or asset in co-ownership, and notwithstanding any other legal measures available, he or she may request that said object or asset be allocated to him or her in return for compensation.


  Division Two: Kinship

  Title Seven: Formation of the Parent-child Relationship5 

  Chapter One: General Provisions6 

Art. 2521A. Formation of parent-child relationship in general

A. Formation of parent-child relationship in general

1 The parent-child relationship is formed between child and mother on the birth of the child.

2 It is formed between child and father by virtue of the latter being married to the mother, by recognition or by court declaration.

3 Moreover, the parent-child relationship is formed by adoption.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2531B. ...

B. ...


1 Repealed by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, with effect from 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).

Art. 2541

1 Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).


  Chapter Two: Paternity of the Husband7 

Art. 2551A. Presumption

A. Presumption

1 Where a child is born in wedlock, the husband is deemed to be the father.

2 If the husband dies, he is deemed to be the father provided the child is born within 300 days of his death or, if born thereafter, if it is shown that the child was conceived before the husband’s death.

3 If the husband has been declared presumed dead, he is deemed to have been the father provided the child is born within 300 days of the life-threatening event or the last sign of life.


1 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

Art. 2561B. Challenge / I. Right to challenge

B. Challenge

I. Right to challenge

1 The presumption of paternity may be challenged in court:

1.
by the husband;
2.2
by the child if the spouses cease living together while the child is still a minor.

2 The husband’s challenge is directed against the child and the mother, that of the child against the husband and the mother.

3 The husband has no right of challenge if he consented to impregnation by a third party. The child’s right to challenge paternity is subject to the Reproductive Medicine Act of 18 December 19983.4


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 SR 810.11
4 Amended by Art. 39 of the Federal Act on Medically Assisted Reproduction of 18 Dec. 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 3055; BBl 1996 III 205).

Art. 256a1B. Challenge / II. Grounds for challenge / 1. In the case of conception in wedlock

II. Grounds for challenge

1. In the case of conception in wedlock

1 If a child was conceived in wedlock, the challenging party must show that the husband is not the father.

2 The child is presumed to have been conceived in wedlock if it was born no earlier than 180 days after the wedding and no later than 300 days after the marriage was dissolved as a result of death.2


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

Art. 256b1B. Challenge / II. Grounds for challenge / 2. In the case of conception before marriage or while spouses were living apart

2. In the case of conception before marriage or while spouses were living apart

1 If a child was conceived before the marriage was concluded or at a time when the spouses were living apart, no further grounds need be given for the challenge.

2 However, in such cases the paternity of the husband is still presumed where the court is satisfied that he had sexual intercourse with the mother around the date of the conception.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 256c1B. Challenge / III. Time limits

III. Time limits

1 The husband must file the challenge within one year of learning of the birth and of the fact that he is not the father or that another man had sexual intercourse with the mother around the date of the conception, but in any event not later than five years after the birth.

2 The child’s challenge must be filed at the latest within one year of attaining the age of majority.2

3 Once these time limits have expired, a challenge of paternity is admissible provided there is good cause for the delay.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 2571C. Conflict of presumptions

C. Conflict of presumptions

1 Where a child was born within 300 days of the dissolution of the marriage as a result of death and the mother has since remarried, the second husband is deemed to be the father.2

2 If this presumption is disproved, the first husband is deemed to be the father.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

Art. 2581D. Challenge by the parents

D. Challenge by the parents

1 If the husband died or lost capacity of judgement before the time limit expired, his father or his mother may challenge his paternity.

2 In this case the provisions governing a challenge by the husband apply mutatis mutandis.

3 The one-year time limit for bringing the claim begins at the earliest on the date on which the father or mother learns of the husband’s death or loss of capacity of judgement.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2591E. Marriage of the parents

E. Marriage of the parents

1 If the parents marry each other, the provisions governing children born in wedlock apply mutatis mutandis to a child born prior to the marriage, providing the paternity of the husband is established by recognition or court declaration.

2 Recognition may be challenged:

1.
by the mother;
2.2
by the child or, after his or her death, by his or her issue if the spouses ceased living together while the child was still a minor or if recognition did not occur until after the child's twelfth birthday;
3.
by the husband’s commune of origin or residence;
4.
by the husband.

3 The provisions governing challenge of recognition apply mutatis mutandis.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).


  Chapter Three: Recognition and Court Declaration of Paternity8 

Art. 2601A. Recognition / I. Admissibility and form

A. Recognition

I. Admissibility and form

1 Where the parent-child relationship exists only with the mother, the father may recognise the child.

2 Where the recognising person is a minor or subject to a general deputyship or if the adult protection authority has issued a related order, recognition requires the consent of his or her legal representative.2

3 Recognition is effected by means of a declaration made before the civil registrar or by testamentary disposition or, if an action to declare paternity is pending, by a declaration made to the court.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 260a1A. Recognition / II. Challenge / 1. Right to challenge

II. Challenge

1. Right to challenge

1 Recognition may be challenged before the courts by any interested party, namely the mother, the child or, after its death, its issue, and by the commune of origin or domicile of the recognising person.

2 The recognising person is entitled to file a challenge only if he or she recognised the child under threat of imminent and substantial risk to his or her own life, limb, reputation or property or to those of a person close to him or her, or in the erroneous belief that he was the father.

3 The challenge is directed against the recognising person and the child, insofar as they themselves are not the challenging persons.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 260b1A. Recognition / II. Challenge / 2. Grounds

2. Grounds

1 The challenging person must prove that the recognising person is not the child’s father.

2 However, mother and child are only required to prove this if the recognising person may satisfy the court that he had sexual intercourse with the mother around the time of the child’s conception.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 260c1A. Recognition / II. Challenge / 3. Time limits

3. Time limits

1 The challenge must be filed within one year of the date on which the claimant learned of the recognition and the fact that the recognising person is not the father, or that another man had sexual intercourse with the mother around the time of the conception, or on which he or she learned of his or her error or on which the threat ceased, but in any event within five years of the recognition.

2 In all cases, the child may file the challenge at any time prior to the elapse of one year after attaining the age of majority.2

3 Once these time limits have expired, a challenge of recognition is admissible provided there is good cause for the delay.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 2611B. Action to determine paternity / I. Right to bring the action

B. Action to determine paternity

I. Right to bring the action

1 Both mother and child are entitled to bring an action to declare the existence of the parent-child relationship between the child and the father.

2 The action is brought against the father or, if he has died, in order of priority against his issue, parents or siblings or, where none exist, against the competent authority of his last domicile.

3 If the father has died, the court must inform his wife that the action has been brought so that she may safeguard her interests.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2621B. Action to determine paternity / II. Presumption

II. Presumption

1 If the defendant had sexual intercourse with the mother during the period between the 300th day and the 180th day before the child’s birth, his paternity is presumed.

2 Paternity is also presumed even if the child was conceived prior to the 300th day or after the 180th day prior to birth provided the defendant had sexual intercourse with the mother during the period in which the child was conceived.

3 There is no such presumption if the defendant shows that his paternity is either impossible or less probable than that of another man.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2631B. Action to determine paternity / III. Time limits

III. Time limits

1 The action is admissible both before and after the birth but must be brought:

1.
by the mother within one year of the birth;
2.2
by the child at any time prior to the elapse of one year after attaining the age of majority.

2 If a parent-child relationship already exists with another man, the action may in any event be brought within one year of the date on which said relationship is annulled.

3 Once these time limits have expired, an action for determination of paternity is admissible provided there is good cause for the delay.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).


  Chapter Four:9  Adoption

Art. 2641A. Adoption of minors / I. General requirements

A. Adoption of minors

I. General requirements

1 A minor child may be adopted if the persons wishing to adopt have raised and cared for the child for at least one year and provided the general circumstances suggest that establishing a parent-child relationship would be in the child’s best interests without being unfair for any other children of the adoptive parents.

2 Adoption is only possible, if the persons wishing to adopt the child are able to provide for the child up to the child’s majority on the basis of their age and their personal circumstances.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 264a1A. Adoption of minors / II. Joint adoption

II. Joint adoption

1 Spouses may adopt a child jointly if they have been in the same household for at least three years and both are at least 28 years old.

2 Exceptions from the minimum age may be made if this is necessary for the welfare of the child. The spouses must justify the exception.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200). Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877)

Art. 264b1A. Adoption of minors / III. Adoption by a single person

III. Adoption by a single person

1 A person who is not married and does not live in a registered partnership is permitted to adopt a child alone if he or she is at least 28 years old.

2 A married person who is at least 28 years old is permitted to adopt alone where the other spouse permanently lacks capacity of judgement or has been of unknown whereabouts for more than 2 years or if the spouses have been separated by court order for more than 3 years.

3 A person living in a registered partnership who is at least 28 years old is permitted to adopt a child alone if his or her registered partner permanently lacks capacity of judgement or has been of unknown whereabouts for more than 2 years.

4 Exceptions from the minimum age may be made if this is necessary for the welfare of the child. The person wishing to adopt must justify the exception.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200). Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877)

Art. 264c1A. Adoption of minors / IV. Adoption of a stepchild

IV. Adoption of a stepchild

1 A person is permitted to adopt the child of the person:

1.
to whom he or she is married;
2.
with whom he or she lives in a registered partnership;
3.
with whom he or she cohabits.

2 The couple must have been in the same household for at least three years.

3 Persons who cohabit are not permitted to be married or to be bound by a registered partnership.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 264d1A. Adoption of minors / V. Difference in age

V. Difference in age

1 The age difference between the child and the persons wishing to adopt may not be less than 16 years and not more than 45 years.

2 Exceptions may be made if this is necessary for the welfare of the child. The person wishing to adopt must justify the exception.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 2651A. Adoption of minors / VI. Consent of the child and the child protection authority

VI. Consent of the child and the child protection authority

1 If the child is capable of judgement, its consent is required for the adoption.

2 Where the child has a legal guardian or a legal representative, adoption requires the consent of the child protection authority even if the child is capable of judgement.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 265a1A. Adoption of minors / VII. Parents’ consent / 1. Form

VII. Parents’ consent2

1. Form

1 Adoption requires the consent of the child’s father and mother.

2 Such consent must be given by oral or written declaration to the child protection authority of the parents’ or child’s domicile or temporary residence and must be recorded.

3 Such consent is valid even if the persons wishing to adopt are not named or not yet determined.3


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).
3 Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 265b1A. Adoption of minors / VII. Parents’ consent / 2. Time of consent

2. Time of consent

1 Consent to adoption may not be given until at least six weeks after the birth of the child.

2 It may be revoked within six weeks of having been accepted.

3 Where consent, having been revoked, is given again, it is then final.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 265c1A. Adoption of minors / VII. Parents’ consent / 3. Dispensing with consent / a. Requirements

3. Dispensing with consent

a. Requirements

The consent of a parent may be dispensed with if the identity of that parent is unknown, or if he or she has been of unknown whereabouts for some length of time, or permanently lacks capacity of judgement.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 265d1A. Adoption of minors / VII. Parents’ consent / 3. Dispensing with consent / b. Decision

b. Decision

1 Where the child is entrusted to persons wishing to adopt with a view to subsequent adoption and the consent of one parent is not forthcoming, the child protection authority at the child’s domicile shall , at the request of the legal guardian or a legal representative, an adoption agency or the persons wishing to adopt, decide whether such consent can be dispensed with, as a rule before the child is placed in care.2

2 In all other cases, the decision is made at the time of the adoption.

3 ...3


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).
3 Repealed by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), with effect from 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 2661B. Adoption of an adult

B. Adoption of an adult

1 An adult may be adopted if:

1.
he or she is permanently in need of help for physical, mental or psychological reasons and the persons wishing to adopt have looked after him or her for at least one year;
2.
the persons wishing to adopt raised and cared for the person for at least one year while he or she was still a minor; or
3.
there are other good reasons and he or she has lived in the same household with the persons wishing to adopt for at least one year.

2 In all other respects, the provisions governing adoption of minors apply mutatis mutandis, with the exception of the provision on parental consent.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 2671C. Effects / I. In general

C. Effects

I. In general

1 The adoptive child acquires the legal status of a child of the persons wishing to adopt.

2 Previous parent-child relationships are extinguished.

3 The child’s relationship with the parent who:

1.
is married to;
2.
lives in a registered partnership with;
3.
cohabits with;

the adopting person is not extinguished.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 267a1C. Effects / II. Name

II. Name

1 In the case of joint adoption and adoption by a single person, the minor may be given a new first name if there are good reasons for doing so. Prior to this, the child is heard in person in an appropriate manner by the competent authority or by a third party appointed for this purpose, unless this is inadvisable due to the child's age or for other good cause. If the child is at least twelve years of age, a change of name requires his or her consent.

2 The name of the child is determined in accordance with the provisions governing the legal effects of the parent-child relationship. These apply mutatis mutandis to the adoption of the child by the registered partner of its mother or father.

3 The competent authority may authorise an adult to be adopted to continue using his or her existing name if there are good reasons for doing so.

4 The change of name of an adult to be adopted does not affect the naming of persons whose name is derived from the previous name of the person to be adopted, unless they expressly agree to a change of name.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200). Amended by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581)

Art. 267b1C. Effects / III. Citizenship

III. Citizenship

The citizenship of a minor is determined by provisions governing the legal effects of the parent-child relationship.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 2681 D. Procedure / I. In general

D. Procedure

I. In general

1 Adoption is pronounced by the competent cantonal authority at the adoptive parents’ domicile.

2 The adoption requirements must already be met when the application is submitted.2

3 Once the application has been submitted, the death or loss of capacity of judgement of the person wishing to adopt does not preclude the adoption provided the other requirements are still fulfilled.3

4 If the child attains the age of majority after the application for adoption has been submitted, the provisions governing the adoption of minors continue to apply provided the requirements for adoption were previously fulfilled.4

5 The adoption decision shall contain all the information required for entry in the civil register relating to the first name, surname and citizenship of the adopted person.5


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).
3 Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).
4 Inserted by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).
5 Inserted by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 268a1D. Procedure / II. Investigation

II. Investigation

1 An application for adoption may not be upheld until all material circumstances have been thoroughly investigated, where necessary in consultation with the relevant specialists.

2 In particular, the investigation must look into the character and health of the persons wishing to adopt and the child, their mutual relationship, their suitability as parents, their financial situation, motives and family circumstances and the history of the child care relationship.2

3 ...3


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).
3 Repealed by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), with effect from 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 268abis1D. Procedure / III. Hearing for the child

III. Hearing for the child

1 The child shall be heard in person in an appropriate manner by the cantonal authority responsible for the adoption procedure or by a third party appointed for this purpose, unless this is inadvisable due to the child's age or for other good cause.

2 Minutes shall be kept of the hearing.

3 A child capable of judgement may appeal against a decision to refuse a hearing.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 268ater1D. Procedure / IV. Representation for the child

IV. Representation for the child

1 The cantonal authority responsible for the adoption procedure shall order the child to be represented and appoint a person experienced in welfare and legal matters as the child's deputy.

2 If a child with the capacity to consent so requests, a representative must be appointed.

3 The child may challenge the rejection of his or her request by filing an objection.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 268aquater1D. Procedure / V. Taking account of the attitude of family members

V. Taking account of the attitude of family members

1 Where the persons wishing to adopt have issue of their own, the latter’s attitude to the adoption must be taken into account.

2 Prior to the adoption of an adult, the attitude of following persons must also be taken into account:

1.
the spouse or registered partner of the person to be adopted;
2.
the biological parents of the person to be adopted
3.
the issue of the person to be adopted, unless this is inadvisable due to their age or for other good cause.

3 These persons shall, if possible, be notified of the adoption decision.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 268b1Dbis. Confidentiality of adoption information

Dbis. Confidentiality of adoption information

1 The adopted child and the adoptive parents are entitled to confidentiality of adoption information.

2 Identifying information about the minor or his or her adoptive parents may only be disclosed to the biological parents if the child is capable of judgement, and the adoptive parents and the child have consented to disclosure.

3 Identifying information about the adult child may be disclosed to the biological parents and their direct descendants if the child has consented to disclosure.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 268c1Dter. Information on the adoption, the biological parents and their issue

Dter. Information on the adoption, the biological parents and their issue

1 The adoptive parents must inform the child of his or her adoption when his or her age or maturity permits.

2 A minor is entitled to information about his or her biological parents, provided it is not possible to draw conclusions about their identity. The child shall be given identifying information only if he or she can show an interest worthy of protection.

3 An adult child may at any time request that the personal details of his or her biological parents and further information about them be disclosed to him or her. The adult child may also request that information about the direct descendants of his or her biological parents be disclosed to him or her if the descendants are of age and have consented to the disclosure.


1 Inserted by Annex No 2 of the FA of 22 June 2001 on the Hague Adoption Convention and Measures to Protect Children in respect of Inter-Country Adoption (AS 2002 3988; BBl 1999 5795). Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 268d1Dquater. Cantonal information centre and tracing services

Dquater. Cantonal information centre and tracing services

1 Information about the biological parents, their direct descendants and the child may be obtained from the cantonal authority responsible for the adoption procedure.

2 The authority shall inform the person referred to in the request for information about the request and, where necessary, obtain his or her consent to contact the person requesting information. The authority may delegate these tasks to a specialised tracing service.

3 If the person referred to in the request for information refuses to make personal contact, the authority or the authorised tracing service shall inform the person requesting information and draw his or her attention to the personal rights of the person referred to in the request for information.

4 The cantons shall designate a body to provide advice to the biological parents, their direct descendants or the child on request.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 268e1Dquinquies. Contact with the biological parents

Dquinquies. Contact with the biological parents

1 The adoptive parents and the biological parents may agree that the biological parents be entitled to reasonable contact with the minor. This agreement and any amendments thereto shall be submitted to the child protection authority at the child’s place of residence for approval. The child protection authority or a third party appointed by it shall hear the child in person in an appropriate manner before the decision is taken, unless this is inadvisable due to the child's age or for other good cause. If the child is capable of judgement, its consent is required for the agreement.

2 If the best interests of the child are at risk or if there is disagreement about the implementation of the agreement, the child protection authority shall decide.

3 The child may refuse contact with its biological parents at any time. The adoptive parents may not pass on information to the biological parents against the child’s will.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 2691E. Challenge / I. Grounds / 1. Lack of consent

E. Challenge

I. Grounds

1. Lack of consent

1 Where for no just cause consent has not been obtained, those persons whose consent is required may bring an action to challenge the adoption providing this does not seriously impair the interests of the child.

2 However, the parents are not entitled to bring such action where they may appeal against the decision to the Federal Supreme Court.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 269a1E. Challenge / I. Grounds / 2. Other defects

2. Other defects

1 If the adoption displays other grave defects, it may be challenged by any interested party and in particular by the commune of origin or domicile.

2 However, a challenge is excluded if the defect has been rectified in the interim or if it relates solely to procedural provisions.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 269b1E. Challenge / II. Time limits

II. Time limits

An action to challenge the adoption must be brought within six months of discovering the grounds for the challenge and in any event within two years of the adoption.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 269c1F. Adoption agency services

F. Adoption agency services

1 The Confederation is responsible for supervising child adoption agency activities.

2 Any person engaging in such activities professionally or in connection with his or her professional activities requires an official licence; this does not apply to agency services rendered by the child protection authority.2

3 The Federal Council enacts the implementing regulations and determines the manner in which the cantonal authorities responsible for placing children in foster care with a view to subsequent adoption are to be involved in assessing fulfilment of the requirements for approval of adoption and in carrying out the necessary supervision.

4 ...3


1 Inserted by No I 3 of the FA of 30 June 1972 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200). Amended by Annex No 2 of the FA of 22 June 2001 on the Hague Adoption Convention and Measures to Protect Children in respect of Inter-Country Adoption, in force since 1 Jan. 2003 (AS 2002 3988; BBl 1999 5795).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 Repealed by Annex No 15 of the Federal Administrative Court Law of 17 June 2005, with effect from 1 Jan. 2007 (AS 2006 2197; BBl 2001 4202).


  Title Eight: Effects of the Parent-Child Relationship10 

  Section One: Community of Parents and Children11 

Art. 2701A. Family surname / I. Child of married parents

A. Family surname

I. Child of married parents

1 Where the parents are married to each other but bear different surnames, the child takes the surname that the parents decided would be given to their children when they married.

2 Within one year of the birth of their first child, the parents may request that the child take the surname of the other parent.

3 If the parents bear a joint family name, the child takes that name.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 270a1A. Family surname / II. Child of unmarried parents

II. Child of unmarried parents

1 If one parent has parental responsibility, the child takes that parent's surname before marriage. If the parents share parental responsibility, they decide which of their surnames before marriage their children should take.

2 If joint parental responsibility is established after the birth of the first child, either parent may within a year of its establishment declare before the civil registrar that the child should take the other parent's name before marriage. This declaration applies to all common children, regardless of who is given parental responsibility.

3 If neither parent has parental responsibility, the child takes the mother's name before marriage.

4 A change in the allocation of parental responsibility has no effect on names. The provisions on changing names are reserved.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship) (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581). Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 270b1A. Family surname / III. Consent of the child

III. Consent of the child

If the child has attained the age of twelve, his or her surname may only be changed if he or she consents.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 2711B. Citizenship

B. Citizenship

1 The child acquires the cantonal and communal citizenship of the parent whose surname the child bears.

2 Where a child acquires the surname of the other parent while still a minor, the child acquires the cantonal and communal citizenship of that parent.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 2721C. Support and common welfare

C. Support and common welfare

Parents and children owe each other such support, consideration and respect as the good of the family community requires.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2731D. Contact / I. Parents and children / 1. Principle

D. Contact

I. Parents and children

1. Principle

1 Parents not granted parental responsibility or whose children are not resident with them are entitled to reasonable contact with their minor children, and their children are entitled to contact with them.2

2 The child protection authority may remind parents, foster parents or the child of their duties and issue them with instructions where the exercise or failure to exercise contact entitlements is detrimental to the child or where such reminder or direction is required for some other reason.

3 Contact entitlements must be stipulated if either the father or the mother so requests.


1 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 2741D. Contact / I. Parents and children / 2. Restrictions

2. Restrictions

1 The father and the mother must refrain from any conduct that impairs the child’s relationship with the other parent or makes the task of the person with custody more difficult.2

2 Where contact with the child is not in its best interests, or the parents breach their duties in the course of such contact or have not cared for the child to any meaningful degree, or other good cause exists, the parents’ right of contact with the child may be refused or withdrawn.

3 Where the parents have consented to the adoption of their child or their consent may be dispensed with, their right of contact with the child is extinguished as soon as the child is placed in foster care with a view to future adoption.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

Art. 274a1D. Contact / II. Third parties

II. Third parties

1 In extraordinary circumstances, a right of contact with the child may also be granted to other persons and in particular to relatives, to the extent this serves the child’s best interests.

2 The restrictions on parents’ visiting rights apply mutatis mutandis.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2751D. Contact / III. Responsible authorities

III. Responsible authorities

1 Responsibility for orders regulating rights of contact with the child lies with the child protection authority at the child’s domicile and with that of his or her place of temporary residence, insofar as the latter has taken or is taking child protection measures.

2 If the court regulates parental responsibility, residence or the child maintenance contribution in accordance with the provisions on the divorce and protection of the marital union, it shall also regulate contact.2

3 Where no orders have yet been issued regulating the father’s and mother’s contact entitlements, no contact may be had against the will of the person granted parental responsibility or with whom the child resides.


1 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 275a1E. Right to information

E. Right to information

1 Parents who do not exercise parental responsibility should be informed of special events in the child’s life and consulted before important decisions affecting its development are taken.

2 They are entitled to obtain information concerning the child’s condition and development from third parties involved in its care, such as teachers and doctors, in the same manner as the person with parental responsibility.

3 The provisions governing responsibility for and limitations on contact with the child apply mutatis mutandis.


1 Inserted by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).


  Section Two: Parents’ Duty of Maintenance12 

Art. 2761A. General / I. Object and scope

A. General

I. Object and scope2

1 Maintenance is provided by caring for and raising the child and in the form of monetary payments.3

2 The parents must, each according to their own abilities, provide for the child’s maintenance, including the costs of caring for and raising the child, his or her education and measures taken for his or her protection.4

3 The parents are released from their duty of maintenance to the extent that the child may reasonably be expected to meet the costs thereof from his or her own earnings or other resources.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).
3 Amended by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).
4 Amended by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 276a1A. General / II. Precedence of maintenance for minors

II. Precedence of maintenance for minors

1 The duty of maintenance towards a minor shall take precedence over other maintenance duties under family law.

2 In justified cases, the court may disregard this rule, in particular in order to prevent any disadvantage to a child entitled to maintenance who is of age.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 2771B. Duration

B. Duration

1 The parents’ duty of maintenance lasts until the child attains the age of majority.2

2 If at that juncture the child has not yet had a suitable education, the parents must pay for his or her maintenance, to the extent conscionable in the overall circumstances, until such time as the child can complete a suitable education within the customary timescale.3


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 Amended by No I of the FA of 7 Oct. 1994, in force since 1 Jan. 1996 (AS 1995 1126; BBl 1993 I 1169).

Art. 2781C. Married parents

C. Married parents

1 For the duration of their marriage, the parents bear the costs of maintenance in accordance with the provisions of marital law.

2 Each spouse must give the other all reasonable assistance in discharging the duty to maintain children born prior to the marriage.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2791D. Court action / I. Right to sue

D. Court action

I. Right to sue2

1 The child is entitled to sue the father or the mother or both for maintenance in future and for one year prior to the bringing of such action.

23 ...3


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, in force since 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).
3 Repealed by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, with effect from 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).

Art. 2802841D. Court action / II. and III. ...

II. and III. ...


1 Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 2851D. Court action / IV. Amount of child maintenance contribution / 1. Parents’ contribution

IV. Amount of child maintenance contribution

1. Parents’ contribution

1 The child maintenance contribution should correspond to the child’s needs and to the parents’ financial circumstances and resources; the child’s assets and income must be taken into account.

2 The child maintenance contribution also serves to ensure that the child is cared for by the parents or by third parties.

3 The child maintenance contribution is payable in advance on the dates stipulated by the court.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 285a1D. Court action / IV. Amount of child maintenance contribution / 2. Other payments for maintenance of the child

2. Other payments for maintenance of the child

1 Family allowance credits paid to the parent required to pay maintenance must be paid in addition to the maintenance.

2 Unless the court rules otherwise, any child allowance, social security children’s supplement and similar child support benefits to which the parent subject to the duty of maintenance is entitled must be paid in addition to the child maintenance contribution.

3 Where as a result of old age or invalidity the parent subject to the duty of maintenance subsequently receives social security, children’s supplements or similar child support benefits which replace his or her employment income, he or she must pay said benefits to the child; by operation of law, his or her existing child maintenance contribution is automatically reduced by the amount of such new benefits.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 2861D. Court action / V. Change of circumstances / 1. In general

V. Change of circumstances

1. In general2

1 The court may order that the child maintenance contribution be automatically increased or decreased in the event of specified changes in the child’s needs, the parents’ financial resources or the cost of living.

2 If circumstances change considerably, at the request of one parent or the child the court will set a new level of child maintenance contribution or revoke it entirely.

3 Should the child have unforeseen, extraordinary needs the court may order the parents to make a special financial contribution.3


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).
3 Inserted by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

Art. 286a1D. Court action / V. Change of circumstances / 2. Shortfalls

2. Shortfalls

1 If it was previously established in an approved maintenance agreement or a decision that no maintenance contribution could be set to provide due maintenance for the child, and should the circumstances of the parent liable to pay maintenance have since improved substantially, the child is entitled to claim payments that were not met by this parent during the previous five years in which payments were owed to provide due maintenance.

2 This claim must be brought within one year of it being known that the circumstances have improved substantially.

3 This claim passes with all rights to the other parent or to the state authority in as far as this parent or the state authority has met the missing share of the due maintenance.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 2871E. Maintenance agreements / I. Regular payments

E. Maintenance agreements

I. Regular payments

1 Maintenance agreements are binding on the child only once they have been approved by the child protection authority.

2 Child maintenance contributions stipulated in such agreements may be modified, providing such changes have not been excluded with the approval of the child protection authority.

3 If the agreement is concluded in court proceedings, such approval must be given by the court.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 287a1E. Maintenance agreements / II. Scope of a maintenance agreement

II. Scope of a maintenance agreement

Where maintenance contributions are set in a maintenance agreement, the agreement must specify:

a.
the income and assets of each parent and each child from which the set amount is calculated;
b.
the amount set for each child;
c.
the amount required to cover any shortfall in the due maintenance of each child;
d.
if and to what extent the maintenance contributions will be adjusted to reflect changes in living costs.

1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 2881E. Maintenance agreements / III. Final settlement

III. Final settlement2

1 Full and final settlement of the child’s maintenance entitlement may be agreed if it is in the child’s best interests.

2 The settlement agreement becomes binding on the child only:

1.
once the child protection authority or, in the case of an agreement reached during court proceedings, the court has approved it, and
2.
once the settlement amount has been paid into the account designated in the approval.

1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Originally No II.

Art. 2891F. Fulfilment / I. Entitlement

F. Fulfilment

I. Entitlement

1 The right to child maintenance contributions is that of the child and, so long as he or she is a minor, is fulfilled by payment to the child's legal representative or to the person with whom the child resides, unless the court decides otherwise.2

2 However, where the state authority assumes the cost of maintaining the child, such claim and all attendant rights pass to the state authority.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 2901F. Fulfilment / II. Enforcement / 1. Enforcement assistance

II. Enforcement

1. Enforcement assistance

1 If a father or mother does not fulfil his or her obligation to provide maintenance, a specialist office designated by cantonal law shall, on application, help the child and the other parent to enforce the maintenance claim appropriately and free of charge.

2 The Federal Council determines the terms of enforcement assistance.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 2911F. Fulfilment / II. Enforcement / 2. Directions to debtors

2. Directions to debtors

If the parents neglect to take due care of the child, the court may order their debtors to make payment in whole or in part to the child’s legal representative.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2921F. Fulfilment / III. Security

III. Security

If the parents are persistently neglectful in their duty of maintenance, or if there are grounds to suspect that they are preparing to abscond or are dissipating or concealing their assets, the court may order them to furnish appropriate security for future child maintenance contributions.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2931G. Public law

G. Public law

1 Subject to the duty of relatives to provide support, public law determines who must bear the costs of maintenance if neither the parents nor the child may defray them.

2 Public law also governs the provision of advances to maintain the child if the parents fail to fulfil their duty of maintenance.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2941H. Foster parents

H. Foster parents

1 Foster parents are entitled to receive an appropriate fostering allowance unless otherwise agreed or clearly dictated by the circumstances.

2 Where children are fostered by close relatives or with a view to subsequent adoption there is a presumption that no remuneration is due.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2951J. Rights of the unmarried mother

J. Rights of the unmarried mother

1 Up to one year after the birth at the latest, the mother may file a claim against the father or his legal heirs for compensation:2

1.
in respect of the confinement costs;
2.
in respect of the costs of maintenance for at least four weeks prior to the birth and at least eight weeks thereafter;
3.
in respect of other expenses rendered necessary by the pregnancy or confinement, including the initial equipment for the child.

2 On grounds of equity, the court may award partial or full compensation for such costs if the pregnancy ends prematurely.

3 Third-party payments to which the mother is entitled by law or by contract must be taken into consideration to the extent justified in the circumstances.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, in force since 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).


  Section Three: Parental Responsibility13 

Art. 2961A. Principles

A. Principles

1 Parental responsibility serves the best interests of the child.

2 Until such time as they attain the age of majority, children remain the joint parental responsibility of their father and mother.

3 Parents who are minors or subject to a general deputyship may not exercise parental responsibility. When the parents attain the age of majority, they are assigned parental responsibility. If the general deputyship is revoked, the child protection authority shall assign parental responsibility in a manner appropriate to the child's best interests.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 2971Abis. Death of a parent

Abis. Death of a parent

1 If the parents have joint parental responsibility and one parent dies, the surviving parent retains sole parental responsibility.

2 If a parent who has sole parental responsibility dies, the child protection authority shall assign parental responsibility to the surviving parent or if a legal guardian is appointed for the child, to the person more suited to safeguarding the child's best interests.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 2981Ater. Divorce and other marital proceedings

Ater. Divorce and other marital proceedings

1 In divorce proceedings or proceedings to protect the marital union, the court shall assign one parent sole parental responsibility if this is necessary to safeguard the child's best interests.

2 It may limit itself to regulating residence, contact or sharing of parenting duties if there is no prospect of the parents agreeing on these matters.

2bis When regulating residence, contact and the sharing of parenting duties it shall take account of the right of the child to maintain regular personal relationships with both parents.2

2ter Where joint parental responsibility is awarded, with respect to the child’s best interests, it shall consider the possibility of the child residing with both parents on an alternating basis, if this is requested by one of the parents or by the child.3

3 It shall request the child protection authority to appoint a legal guardian for the child if neither the mother nor the father can be expected to accept parental responsibility.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).
3 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 298a1Aquater. Recognition and court declaration of paternity / I. Joint declaration by the parents

Aquater. Recognition and court declaration of paternity

I. Joint declaration by the parents

1 If the parents are not married to each other and if the father recognises the child, or the parent-child relationship is established by court judgment but joint parental responsibility was not ordered at the time of the judgment, joint parental responsibility is established based on a joint declaration by the parents.

2 In the declaration, the parents confirm that they:

1.
are prepared to accept joint responsibility for the child; and
2.
have agreed on residence and contact or on the sharing of parenting duties and on the child maintenance contribution for the child.

3 Before making the declaration, the parents may seek advice from the child protection authority.

4 If the parents make the declaration at the same time as recognising paternity, the declaration is made to the civil registrar. A subsequent declaration must be made to the child protection authority at the child's domicile.

5 Unless and until the declaration has been made, the mother has sole parental responsibility.


1 Inserted by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1). Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 298b1Aquater. Recognition and court declaration of paternity / II. Decision of the child protection authority

II. Decision of the child protection authority

1 If a parent refuses to make a declaration on joint parental responsibility, the other parent may request the child protection authority at the child's domicile to intervene.

2 The child protection authority shall order joint parental responsibility, unless the mother should retain sole parental responsibility or sole parental responsibility should be assigned to the father in order to safeguard the child's best interests.

3 At the same time as deciding on parental responsibility, the child protection authority shall regulate any other matters in dispute. An action for payment of the maintenance contribution may be brought before the competent court; in such a case the court also decides on parental responsibility and other matters relating to the child.2

3bis In its decision on residence, contact and the sharing of parenting duties, the child protection authority shall take account of the right of the child to maintain regular personal relationships with both parents.3

3ter Where joint parental responsibility is awarded, with respect to the child’s best interests, it shall consider the possibility of the child residing with both parents on an alternating basis, if this is requested by one of the parents or by the child.4

4 If the mother is a minor or subject to a general deputyship, the child protection authority shall assign parental responsibility to the father or appoint a legal guardian for the child, depending on which measure is more suitable to safeguard the child's best interests.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).
2 Second sentence amended by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).
3 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).
4 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 298c1Aquater. Recognition and court declaration of paternity / III. Paternity action

III. Paternity action

If the court upholds a paternity action, it shall order joint parental responsibility unless the mother retains sole parental responsibility or sole parental responsibility is assigned to the father in order to safeguard the child's best interests.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 298d1Aquater. Recognition and court declaration of paternity / IV. Change in circumstances

IV. Change in circumstances

1 At the request of either parent, the child or ex officio, the child protection authority shall reassign parental responsibility if this is necessary to safeguard the child's best interests due to a substantial change in circumstances.

2 It may limit itself to regulating residence, contact or the sharing of parenting duties.

3 An action for a change to the maintenance payments may be brought to the competent court; in such a case the court may make a new ruling on parental responsibility and other matters relating to the child.2


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 298e1Aquinquies. Change in the situation after the adoption of a stepchild in a cohabitation relationship

Aquinquies. Change in the situation after the adoption of a stepchild in a cohabitation relationship

If the person who adopts the child cohabits with the child’s mother or father, and there is a substantial change in the circumstances, the provision on the change of circumstances applies mutatis mutandis in the case of recognition and judgement of paternity.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 2991Asexies. Step-parents

Asexies. Step-parents2

Each spouse must give the other reasonable support in exercising parental responsibility over the latter’s children and must represent the other spouse as circumstances require.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 3001Asepties. Foster parents

Asepties. Foster parents2

1 If a child is placed in foster care with third parties, unless the relevant orders provide otherwise, these third parties exercise parental responsibility over the child in loco parentis to the extent required for the proper fulfilment of their duties.

2 Foster parents must be consulted before any important decisions are taken regarding the child.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 3011B. Scope / I. In general

B. Scope

I. In general

1 The parents raise and care for a child with his or her best interests in mind and take all necessary decisions unless the child has capacity to act.

1bis The parent who is taking care of the child may decide alone if:

1.
the matter is routine or urgent;
2.
the other parent cannot be consulted without incurring unreasonable trouble or expense.2

2 The child owes his or her parents obedience; according to how mature the child is, the parents shall allow the child the freedom to shape his or her own life and, wherever feasible, take due account of the child’s opinion in important matters.

3 The child is not permitted to leave the family home without the parents’ consent, nor may he or she be unlawfully removed from them.

4 The parents give the child his or her first name.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 301a1B. Scope / II. Deciding on the place of residence

II. Deciding on the place of residence

1 Parental responsibility includes the right to decide on the child's place of residence.

2 If parents exercise joint parental responsibility and if one parent wishes to change the child's place of residence, this requires the consent of the other parent or a decision of the court or the child protection authority if:

a.
the new place of residence is outside Switzerland; or
b.
the change of place of residence has serious consequences for the ability of the other parent to exercise parental responsibility and have contact.

3 If one parent has sole parental responsibility and if he or she wishes to change the child's place of residence, he must inform the other parent of this in good time.

4 A parent who wishes to change his or her own domicile has the same duty to provide information.

5 If required, the parents shall agree to modify the rules on parental responsibility, residence, contact and the child maintenance contribution in such a way as to safeguard the child's best interests. If they are unable to agree, the court or the child protection authority decides.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 3021B. Scope / III. Upbringing

III. Upbringing2

1 The parents must raise the child according to their circumstances and encourage and safeguard the child's physical, mental and moral development.

2 The parents must arrange for the child, especially if he or she has physical or learning disabilities, to receive an appropriate general and vocational education that corresponds as closely as possible to the child’s abilities and inclinations.

3 To that end, the parents must co-operate as appropriate with school authorities and, where required, with public and charitable youth support agencies.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 3031B. Scope / IV. Religious upbringing

IV. Religious upbringing2

1 The parents are free to determine the child’s religious upbringing.

2 Any agreement restricting this freedom is invalid.

3 Once a child is 16 years of age, he or she is free to decide his or her own religious denomination.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 3041B. Scope / V. Representation / 1. In relation to third parties / a. In general

V. Representation

1. In relation to third parties

a. In general2

1 By operation of law, the parents are vested with the power to represent the child in all dealings with third parties to the extent they have parental responsibility for the child.3

2 If both parents have parental responsibility, all third parties acting in good faith may assume that each parent acts with the other’s consent.4

3 Parents acting as their child's representative may not provide any financial guarantees, establish any foundations or make gifts on behalf of the client, with the exception of customary occasional gifts.5


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).
3 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
4 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
5 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 3051B. Scope / V. Representation / 1. In relation to third parties / b. Child’s legal status

b. Child’s legal status2

1 A child under parental responsibility may by his or her own acts establish rights and obligations and exercise strictly personal rights under the law of persons.3

2 The child is liable with all his or her assets for any obligations entered into, without regard to the parents’ property rights.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 3061B. Scope / V. Representation / 2. Within the family community

2. Within the family community

1 Children with capacity of judgement who are under parental responsibility may, with their parents’ consent, act for the family as a whole, but in so doing engage not themselves but their parents.2

2 If the parents are prevented from acting or if they have interests in a matter that conflict with those of the child, the child protection authority shall appoint a deputy or regulate the matter itself.3

3 In the event of a conflict of interests, the parents' powers become automatically void by law in relation to the matter concerned.4


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
3 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
4 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 3071C. Child protection / I. Appropriate measures

C. Child protection

I. Appropriate measures

1 If the child’s best interests are threatened and the parents are unwilling or unable to remedy the situation, the child protection authority must take all appropriate measures to protect the child.

2 The child protection authority has the same duty with regard to children placed with foster parents or otherwise living outside the family home.

3 In particular it is entitled to remind parents, foster parents or the child of their duties, issue specific instructions regarding care, upbringing or education and appoint a suitable person or agency with powers to investigate and monitor the situation.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 3081C. Child protection / II. Deputyship

II. Deputyship2

1 Where circumstances so require, the child protection authority shall appoint a child deputy whose function is to help the parents look after the child by providing advice and practical support.

2 It may assign special powers to the deputy, in particular to represent the child in the paternity action, in safeguarding the child's right to child support and the child's other rights and in supervising contact.3

3 Parental responsibility may be restricted accordingly.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).
3 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 3091

1 Repealed by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), with effect from 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 3101C. Child protection / III. Revocation of the right to decide on place of residence

III. Revocation of the right to decide on place of residence2

1 Where there is no other way to avert a threat to the child’s best interests, the child protection authority must remove the child from the parents or from any third parties with whom he or she is staying and place the child in a suitable location.

2 At the request of the parents or the child, the child protection authority must do likewise if relations between them have deteriorated to the extent that it is no longer conscionable for the child to remain in the family home and provided no other practical remedy is available in the circumstances.

3 Where a child has lived for some length of time with foster parents, the child protection authority may forbid the parents to take the child back if such action might pose a serious risk to the child’s development.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 3111C. Child protection / IV. Withdrawal of parental responsibility / 1. Ex-officio

IV. Withdrawal of parental responsibility

1. Ex-officio2

1 If other child protection measures have failed or offer little prospect of proving adequate, the child protection authority shall revoke parental responsibility:3

1.4
if the parents are unable to exercise parental responsibility as required on account of inexperience, illness, disability, absence, violent behaviour or other similar reasons;
2.
if the parents have not cared for the child to any meaningful degree or have flagrantly violated their duties towards the child.

2 Where parental responsibility is withdrawn from both parents, a legal guardian is appointed for their children.

3 Unless expressly ordered otherwise, the withdrawal of parental responsibility is effective in respect of all the children, including those born subsequently.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19. Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
4 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 3121C. Child protection / IV. Withdrawal of parental responsibility / 2. With the parents' consent

2. With the parents' consent2

The child protection authority shall withdraw parental responsibility:3

1.
if the parents so request for good cause;
2.
if the parents have consented to having the child adopted in future by unnamed third parties.

1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 3131C. Child protection / V. Change in circumstances

V. Change in circumstances

1 If circumstances change, the child protection measures in place must be adapted to suit the new situation.

2 On no account may parental responsibility be restored within less than one year of its withdrawal.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 3141C. Child protection / VI. Procedure / 1. General

VI. Procedure

1. General

1 The provisions on the procedure before the adult protection authority apply mutatis mutandis.

2 In appropriate cases, the child protection authority may request the parents to attempt mediation.

3 If the child protection authority appoints a deputy, it shall state the tasks of the deputy and any restrictions on parental responsibility in the decision.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 314a1C. Child protection / VI. Procedure / 2. Hearing for the child

2. Hearing for the child

1 The child is heard in person in an appropriate manner by the child protection authority or by a third party appointed for this purpose, unless this is inadvisable due to the child's age or other good cause.

2 The record of the hearing contains only the findings of relevance to the decision. The parents are informed of these findings.

3 A child capable of judgement may appeal against a decision to refuse a hearing.


1 Inserted by No II of the FA of 6 Oct. 1978 (AS 1980 31; BBl 1977 III 1). Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 314abis1C. Child protection / VI. Procedure / 3. Representation for the child

3. Representation for the child

1 If necessary, the child protection authority shall order the child to be represented and appoint a person experienced in welfare and legal matters as the child's deputy.

2 The child protection authority shall consider the appointment of a representative in particular if:

1.
the proceedings relate to the child's accommodation;
2.
the parties file differing applications in relation to regulating parental responsibility or important contact issues.

3 The child's deputy may file applications and appeals.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 314b1C. Child protection / VI. Procedure / 4. Committal to a secure institution or psychiatric hospital

4. Committal to a secure institution or psychiatric hospital

1 If the child must be committed to a secure institution or a psychiatric hospital, the adult protection provisions on care-related hospitalisation apply mutatis mutandis.

2 If the child is capable of judgement, he or she may petition the court directly.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 314c1C. Child protection / VI. Procedure / 5. Right to notify

1 Any person may notify the child protection authorities if a child’s physical, mental or sexual integrity appears to be at risk.

5. Right to notify

2 If a report is in the interest of the child, persons who are subject to professional confidentiality under the Swiss Criminal Code2 are also entitled to notify the authorities. This provision does not apply to auxiliary persons bound by professional confidentiality under the Criminal Code.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 15 Dec. 2017 (Child Protection), in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 2947; BBl 2015 3431).
2 SR 311.0

Art. 314d1C. Child protection / VI. Procedure / 6. Duty to notify

6. Duty to notify

1 The following persons, provided they are not subject to professional confidentiality under the Swiss Criminal Code2, are obliged to report if there are clear indications that the physical, psychological or sexual integrity of a child is at risk and that they cannot remedy the threat as part of their professional activities:

1.
specialists from the fields of medicine, psychology, care services, childcare, education, counselling, religion and sport who have regular contact with children;
2.
persons who learn of such a case in their official capacity.

2 The duty to notify is fulfilled when a person notifies a superior.

3 The cantons may provide for further notification obligations.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 15 Dec. 2017 (Child Protection), in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 2947; BBl 2015 3431).
2 SR 311.0

Art. 314e1C. Child protection / VI. Procedure / 7. Cooperation and administrative assistance

7. Cooperation and administrative assistance

1 The persons and third parties involved in the proceedings are obliged to cooperate in ascertaining the facts of the case. The child protection authority issues the necessary orders to protect any interests worthy of protection. If necessary, it shall issue an order for the compulsory enforcement of the duty to cooperate.

2 Persons bound by professional confidentiality in accordance with the Swiss Criminal Code2 are entitled to cooperate without having to be released from this confidentiality requirement beforehand. This provision does not apply to auxiliary persons bound by professional confidentiality under the Criminal Code.

3 Persons bound by professional confidentiality in accordance with the Swiss Criminal Code are obliged to cooperate if the person entitled to confidentiality has authorised them to do so or if the superior authority or the supervisory authority has released them from professional confidentiality at the request of the child protection authority. Article 13 of the Lawyers Act of 23 June 20003 remains reserved.

4 Administrative authorities and courts shall pass on the necessary documentation, reports and information, provided there is no conflict with interests worthy of protection.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 15 Dec. 2017 (Child Protection), in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 2947; BBl 2015 3431).
2 SR 311.0
3 SR 935.61

Art. 3151C. Child protection / VII. Jurisdiction / 1. In general

VII. Jurisdiction

1. In general2

1 Child protection measures are ordered by the child protection authorities at the child’s domicile.3

2 If the child lives with foster parents or otherwise outside the parental family home or if there is risk in delay, responsibility also rests with the authorities of the place in which the child is currently staying.

3 If the latter authorities implement a child protection measure, they must inform the authority at the child’s domicile.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
3 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 315a1C. Child protection / VII. Jurisdiction / 2. In marital proceedings / a. Jurisdiction of the court

2. In marital proceedings

a. Jurisdiction of the court

1 If the court is called on to rule on relations between the parents and the children in accordance with the provisions governing divorce or protection of the marital union, it must also order all necessary child protection measures and instruct the child protection authority to implement them.2

2 The court may also modify child protection measures already in place to take account of changes in circumstances.

3 However, the child protection authority retains the power:3

1.
to continue child protection proceedings introduced prior to the court proceedings;
2.
to order such measures as are required immediately to protect the child where the court is unlikely to be able to do so in good time.

1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1). Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 315b1C. Child protection / VII. Jurisdiction / 2. In marital proceedings / b. Amendment of court orders

b. Amendment of court orders

1 The court has jurisdiction to amend court orders regarding custody awards and child protection:

1.
during divorce proceedings;
2.
in proceedings to alter the divorce decree pursuant to the regulations governing divorce;
3.
in proceedings to modify measures for protection of the marital union; the regulations governing divorce are applicable mutatis mutandis.

2 In all other cases jurisdiction lies with the child protection authority.2


1 Inserted by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 3161C. Child protection / VIII. Supervision of foster children

VIII. Supervision of foster children

1 Any person taking in foster children requires authorisation from and is under the supervision of the child protection authority at his domicile or some other body designated by the canton.

1bis Where a child is fostered with a view to subsequent adoption, a single cantonal authority is responsible.2

2 The Federal Council enacts implementing regulations.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Inserted by Annex No 2 of the FA of 22 June 2001 on the Hague Adoption Convention and Measures to Protect Children in respect of Inter-Country Adoption, in force since 1 Jan. 2003 (AS 2002 3988; BBl 1999 5795).

Art. 3171C. Child protection / IX. Cooperation in youth support

IX. Cooperation in youth support

The cantons issue such regulations as are required to ensure effective cooperation between the authorities and official bodies in the areas of child protection under civil law, the criminal law relating to young offenders and other youth support activities.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).


  Section Four: Property of the Child14 

Art. 3181A. Management

A. Management

1 As long as they have parental responsibility for the child, the parents have the right and the duty to administer the child’s property.

2 If a parent dies, the surviving parent must file an inventory of the child's property with the child protection authority.2

3 If the child protection authority regards it as appropriate in view of the nature and extent of the child's property and the personal circumstances of the parents, it shall order an inventory to be prepared or regular accounts and reports to be submitted.3


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 3191B. Use of income

B. Use of income

1 The parents are permitted to use the income from the child’s property for the child’s maintenance, upbringing and education and, where equitable, also for the requirements of the household.

2 Any surplus accrues to the child’s property.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 3201C. Drawing on the child’s assets

C. Drawing on the child’s assets

1 Settlements, compensation and similar payments may be used in portions to fund the child’s maintenance in accordance with its current requirements.

2 Where necessary to meet the costs of maintenance, upbringing or education, the child protection authority may permit the parents to make use of other parts of the child’s assets in specific amounts.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 3211D. Freely disposable property of the child / I. Endowments

D. Freely disposable property of the child

I. Endowments

1 The parents are not permitted to draw on revenue from the child’s assets if, when given to the child, they were designated as interest-bearing investments or savings or use of the revenue by the parents was expressly excluded.

2 Management by the parents is excluded only where expressly so provided when the child is endowed with the assets.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 3221D. Freely disposable property of the child / II. Statutory entitlement

II. Statutory entitlement

1 By testamentary disposition the child’s statutory inheritance entitlement may also be excluded from management by the parents.

2 If the testator appoints a third party to administer the bequest, the child protection authority may require the latter to carry out periodic accounting and reporting.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 3231D. Freely disposable property of the child / III. Employment income, professional and business assets

III. Employment income, professional and business assets

1 The child manages and enjoys the benefits of all fruits of his or her own labour and of those of his or her assets that are released by his or her parents for use in the child's professional or business activities.

2 If the child lives with its parents in the family home, they may require the child to make an appropriate contribution to his or her maintenance.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 3241E. Protection of the child’s property / I. Appropriate measures

E. Protection of the child’s property

I. Appropriate measures

1 Where there is no adequate guarantee that the child’s property will be diligently managed, the child protection authority takes the necessary measures to protect it.

2 In particular, the child protection authority may issue instructions regarding such management and, where the periodic accounting and reporting is insufficient, may order the parents to deposit the property or furnish security.

3 Procedure and jurisdiction are regulated mutatis mutandis by the provisions governing child protection.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 3251E. Protection of the child’s property / II. Withdrawal of management

II. Withdrawal of management

1 If there is no other way to avert a threat to the child’s property, the child protection authority shall appoint a child welfare advocate to manage it.

2 The child protection authority does likewise if a child’s property that is not managed by the parents is threatened.

3 Where there is serious concern that income from the child’s property or the amounts designated for use or released to cover the child’s needs are not being used as intended, the child protection authority may also appoint a child welfare advocate to manage those assets.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 3261F. End of asset management / I. Return of property

F. End of asset management

I. Return of property

On termination of parental responsibility or the parents’ management, the parents must hand over the child’s property together with a final statement of account to the adult child or to the child’s legal representative.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 3271F. End of asset management / II. Liability

II. Liability

1 The parents are liable to make restitution as if they were authorised agents.

2 The parents must surrender the proceeds of any property alienated in good faith.

3 The parents do not owe compensation for any authorised expenditures on the child or the household.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).


  Section Five:15  Minors subject to Guardianship

Art. 327a A. Principle

A. Principle

If a child is not subject to parental responsibility, the child protection authority shall appoint a guardian for the child.

Art. 327b B. Legal status / I. Of the child

B. Legal status

I. Of the child

A child subject to guardianship has the same legal status as a child subject to parental responsibility.

Art. 327c B. Legal status / II. Of the guardian

II. Of the guardian

1 A guardian has the same rights as the parents.

2 The provisions on adult protection, and in particular on appointing a and acting as a deputy and the involvement of the adult protection authority apply mutatis mutandis.

3 If the child must be committed to a secure institution or psychiatric hospital, the adult protection provisions on care-related hospitalisation apply mutatis mutandis.


  Title Nine: Family Community

  Chapter One: Duty of Assistance

Art. 3281A. Persons obliged to lend assistance

A. Persons obliged to lend assistance

1 A person living in financial comfort has a duty to lend assistance to any lineal relatives of older or younger generations who would suffer hardship without such assistance.

2 The duty of maintenance of parents, spouses and registered partners is reserved.2


1 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
2 Amended by Annex No 8 of the Federal Act on Partnerships of 18 June 2004, in force since 1 Jan. 2007 (AS 2005 5685; BBl 2003 1288).

Art. 329 B. Scope and enforcement of the claim for assistance

B. Scope and enforcement of the claim for assistance1

1 The claim for assistance is directed against those with a duty to provide it in order of their inheritance entitlements; the amount is dependent on the degree of assistance required to maintain the indigent claimant and on the circumstances of the person obliged to provide it.

1bis No claim for support may be made if the hardship arises from a restriction in the ability to pursue gainful employment owing to the care of one’s own children.2

2 Where in the light of special circumstances the court deems it inequitable to require a person to fulfil his duty of assistance, the court may restrict such duty or revoke it entirely.3

3 The provisions governing child maintenance entitlement and the transfer of such entitlement to the state authority are applicable mutatis mutandis.4


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).
3 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
4 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 330 C. Maintenance of foundlings

C. Maintenance of foundlings

1 Foundlings are maintained by the commune in which they have become naturalised.

2 If a foundling’s parentage is established, the commune may require those relatives with a duty of assistance and, as a last recourse, the state authority under such duty to compensate it for the costs incurred in maintaining the foundling.


  Chapter Two: Authority within the Household

Art. 331 A. Requirement

A. Requirement

1 Where by law, agreement or family custom persons living in common household have a head of the family, such person holds authority within the household.

2 The authority extends over all persons living in the household, whether relatives by blood1 or by marriage or employees or persons in a similar position based on a contractual relationship.2


1 Term amended by No I 3 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).
2 Amended by No II Art. 2 No 2 of the FA of 25 June 1971, in force since 1 Jan. 1972 (AS 1971 1465; BBl 1967 II 241).

Art. 332 B. Effect / I. House rules and welfare

B. Effect

I. House rules and welfare

1 The house rules to which the household members are subject must take due account of the interests of all involved.

2 In particular, the household members must be allowed the freedom required for their education, occupation and religious practices.

3 All property brought in by the household members must be kept safe and sound by the head of the family with the same care and attention given to his own property.

Art. 333 B. Effect / II. Liability

II. Liability

1 If damage is caused by a member of the household who is a minor, suffers from a mental disability, is subject to a general deputyship, or is mentally ill, the head of the family is liable unless he can show that his supervision of the household was as diligent as would normally be expected in the circumstances prevailing.1

2 The head of the family is obliged to ensure that the condition of a household member who suffers from a mental disability or a mental illness does not result in risk or damage to himself or to others.2

3 Where necessary, the head of the family must notify the competent authority with a view to having the requisite precautionary measures put in place.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 3341B. Effect / III. Claims of children and grandchildren / 1. Requirements

III. Claims of children and grandchildren

1. Requirements

1 Adult children or grandchildren who have contributed their labour or income to parents or grandparents with whom they live in a common household are entitled to suitable compensation in return.2

2 In the event of dispute the court determines the amount of compensation, the security required and the payment method.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 6 Oct. 1972, in force since 15 Feb. 1973 (AS 1973 93; BBl 1970 I 805, 1971 I 737).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 334bis1B. Effect / III. Claims of children and grandchildren / 2. Asserting claims

2. Asserting claims

1 The compensation due to children or grandchildren may be claimed on the debtor’s death.

2 It may also be claimed during the debtor’s lifetime if his property is distrained or he is declared bankrupt, the common household ceases to exist or the business changes hands.

3 The claim is not subject to prescription, but must be brought at the latest on division of the deceased debtor’s estate.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 6 Oct. 1972, in force since 15 Feb. 1973 (AS 1973 93; BBl 1970 I 805, 1971 I 737).


  Chapter Three: Family Property

Art. 335 A. Family foundations

A. Family foundations

1 A body of assets may be tied to a family by means of a family foundation created under the law of persons or inheritance law in order to meet the costs of raising, endowing or supporting family members or for similar purposes.

2 It is no longer permitted to establish a fee tail.

Art. 336 B. Ownership in undivided shares / I. Formation / 1. Authority

B. Ownership in undivided shares

I. Formation

1. Authority

Members of a family may tie a body of assets to the family by placing all or part of an inheritance or other property under joint ownership in undivided shares.

Art. 337 B. Ownership in undivided shares / I. Formation / 2. Form

2. Form

The agreement establishing joint ownership in undivided shares is valid only if done as a public deed signed by all co-owners or their representatives.

Art. 338 B. Ownership in undivided shares / II. Duration

II. Duration

1 Joint ownership in undivided shares may be constituted for a limited or indefinite duration.

2 If constituted for an indefinite duration, it may be terminated by any co-owner subject to six months’ notice.

3 Where the co-owned asset is an agricultural enterprise, such notice must always expire on a spring or autumn date in accordance with local custom.

Art. 339 B. Ownership in undivided shares / III. Effect / 1. Type of ownership

III. Effect

1. Type of ownership

1 Joint ownership in undivided shares binds the co-owners together in common economic activity.

2 Unless otherwise provided, they enjoy equal rights in the co-owned property.

3 For the duration of their joint ownership in undivided shares, they may neither seek a division of the property nor dispose of their own share.

Art. 340 B. Ownership in undivided shares / III. Effect / 2. Management and representation / a. In general

2. Management and representation

a. In general

1 The affairs of the joint ownership in undivided shares are regulated by all the co-owners acting collectively.

2 Each co-owner may take ordinary administrative actions on his own initiative.

Art. 341 B. Ownership in undivided shares / III. Effect / 2. Management and representation / b. Manager's powers

b. Manager's powers

1 The co-owners may appoint one of their number to act as their manager.

2 The manager represents the co-owners in all external dealings and directs their economic activities.

3 Where representation by the other co-owners is excluded, such exclusion may be invoked against third parties acting in good faith only if the sole representative is entered in the commercial register.

Art. 342 B. Ownership in undivided shares / III. Effect / 3. Common property and personal property

3. Common property and personal property

1 The property under joint ownership in undivided shares is owned collectively by all the co-owners.

2 The co-owners are jointly and severally liable for debts encumbering such property.

3 Except where otherwise agreed, all property belonging to a co-owner besides that owned collectively in undivided shares, and all property inherited or acquired in some other manner without valuable consideration during the co-ownership is the personal property of that co-owner.

Art. 343 B. Ownership in undivided shares / IV. Dissolution / 1. Grounds

IV. Dissolution

1. Grounds

Joint ownership in undivided shares is dissolved:

1.
by agreement or notice of termination;
2.
on expiry of the period for which ownership in undivided shares was established, providing it is not tacitly renewed;
3.
on realisation of a co-owner’s share of the property that has been distrained;
4.
if a co-owner is declared bankrupt;
5.
at the request of a co-owner for good cause.
Art. 344 B. Ownership in undivided shares / IV. Dissolution / 2. Notice, insolvency, marriage

2. Notice, insolvency, marriage

1 If one co-owner gives notice to terminate joint ownership in undivided shares or is declared bankrupt, or if his share is realised after having been distrained, joint ownership in undivided shares may be maintained by the other co-owners provided they reach a settlement with him or his creditors.

2 A co-owner who marries is entitled to request such settlement without giving notice of termination.

Art. 345 B. Ownership in undivided shares / IV. Dissolution / 3. Death of a co-owner

3. Death of a co-owner

1 On the death of a co-owner, heirs who are not also co-owners are entitled only to settlement of his share.

2 Where he is survived by issue entitled to inherit his share, with the consent of the other co-owners such issue may accede to the joint ownership in undivided shares in his place.

Art. 346 B. Ownership in undivided shares / IV. Dissolution / 4. Division

4. Division

1 Division of the collectively owned property or settlement of a withdrawing co-owner’s share is based on the condition of the property when the grounds for dissolution arose.

2 Its implementation may not be requested at an inopportune time.

Art. 347 B. Ownership in undivided shares / V. Revenue-generating co-ownership / 1. Nature

V. Revenue-generating co-ownership

1. Nature

1 The co-owners may entrust the exploitation and representation of the collectively owned property to one of their number on condition that he pay each co-owner a share of the net profit annually.

2 Unless otherwise agreed, such share is determined equitably on the basis of the average revenues generated by the property over a sufficiently long period and with due regard to the work done by the person managing it.

Art. 348 B. Ownership in undivided shares / V. Revenue-generating co-ownership / 2. Special grounds for dissolution

2. Special grounds for dissolution

1 If the collectively owned property is not properly managed or the managing co-owner fails to meet his obligations towards the other co-owners, the joint ownership in undivided shares may be dissolved.

2 Where there is good cause, a co-owner may request the court to authorise him to assume joint management of the property, taking due consideration of the provisions governing the division of the estate.

3 In all other respects, revenue-generating joint ownership in undivided shares is subject to the provisions governing the joint ownership in undivided shares of a collectively managed business.

Art. 349–3581

1 Repealed by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, with effect from 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

Art. 3591

1 Repealed by No II 21 of the FA of 15 Dec. 1989 on Approval of Cantonal Decrees by the Federal Government, with effect from 1 Feb. 1991 (AS 1991 362; BBl 1988 II 1333).


  Division Three:16  The Protection of Adults

  Title Ten: Own Arrangements for Care and Statutory Measures

  Section One: Own Arrangements for Care

  Subsection One: The Advance Care Directive

Art. 360 A. Principle

A. Principle

1 A person with capacity to act may instruct a natural person or legal entity to take responsibility for his or her personal care or the management of his or her assets or to act as his or her legal agent in the event that he or she is no longer capable of judgement.

2 He or she must define the tasks that are to be assigned and may issue instructions on how these tasks are to be fulfilled.

3 He or she may provide for a replacement for the event that the appointee is not suitable for the tasks, does not accept the mandate or terminates the mandate.

Art. 361 B. Execution and revocation / I. Execution

B. Execution and revocation

I. Execution

1 The advance care directive must be executed in holographic form or publicly authenticated.

2 A holograph advance care directive must be handwritten, dated and signed by the client from beginning to end.

3 On request, the Civil Register Office shall record in the central database the fact that a person has executed an advance care directive and the place where it is kept. The Federal Council shall issue the required provisions, in particular on the access to the data.

Art. 362 B. Execution and revocation / II. Revocation

II. Revocation

1 The client may revoke the advance care directive at any time in either of the ways provided for its execution.

2 He or she may also revoke the advance care directive by destroying the document.

3 If he or she executes a new advance care directive without expressly revoking the previous directive, the new advance care directive replaces the previous one unless it is clearly no more than an amendment to the same.

Art. 363 C. Decision on effectiveness and acceptance

C. Decision on effectiveness and acceptance

1 Where the adult protection authority learns that a person is no longer capable of judgement, but it is unaware if there is an advance care directive, it shall enquire at the Civil Register Office.

2 If there is an advance care directive, the adult protection authority shall verify if:

1.
the directive has been validly executed;
2.
the requirements for its effectiveness are met;
3.
the appointee is fit for his or her duties; and
4.
if further adult protection measures are required.

3 If the appointee accepts the advance care directive, the authority shall advise him or her of his or her obligations under the provisions of the Code of Obligations1 on agency contracts and issue him or her with a formal document stating his or her powers.


1 SR 220

Art. 364 D. Interpretation and clarification

D. Interpretation and clarification

The appointee may request the adult protection authority to interpret the advance care directive and to add clarification to secondary points.

Art. 365 E. Fulfilment

E. Fulfilment

1 The appointee shall represent the client in accordance with the advance care directive and fulfil his or her duties with due care in accordance with the provisions of the Code of Obligations1 on agency contracts.

2 Where transactions must be carried out that are not covered by the advance care directive, or if the appointee has an interest in a matter that conflicts with that of the client, the appointee shall notify the adult protection authority immediately.

3 In the event of a conflict of interest, the powers of the appointee cease to apply by law.


1 SR 220

Art. 366 F. Remuneration and expenses

F. Remuneration and expenses

1 If the advance care directive has no instructions on the remuneration of the appointee, the adult protection authority shall specify appropriate remuneration provided this appears justified given the extent of the duties or if the services provided by the appointee are normally remunerated.

2 The remuneration and the required expenses are charged to the client.

Art. 367 G. Termination

G. Termination

1 The appointee may terminate the advance care directive at any time subject to giving two months' written notice to the adult protection authority.

2 For good cause, the appointee may terminate the directive without notice.

Art. 368 H. Intervention by the adult protection authority

H. Intervention by the adult protection authority

1 If the interests of the client are endangered or no longer protected, the adult protection authority may take the required measures ex officio or at the request of a closely associated person.

2 It may in particular issue the appointee with instructions, order the appointee to file an inventory, regular accounts and reports or revoke all or some of his or her powers.

Art. 369 I. Regaining the capacity of judgement

I. Regaining the capacity of judgement

1 If the client regains the capacity of judgement, the advance care directive shall by law cease to have effect.

2 If the interests of the client are endangered thereby, the appointee must continue to carry out the tasks assigned to him or her until the client can safeguard his or her own interests.

3 The appointee is bound as if the directive still applies by transactions that he or she enters into before he or she learns that the directive has ceased to apply.


  Subsection Two: The Patient Decree

Art. 370 A. Principle

A. Principle

1 A person who is capable of judgement may specify in a patient decree which medical procedures he or she agrees or does not agree to in the event that he or she is no longer capable of judgement.

2 He or she may also designate a natural person who in the event that he or she is no longer capable of judgement should discuss the medical procedures with the attending doctor and decide on his or her behalf. He or she may issue instructions to this person.

3 He or she may issue alternative instructions for the event that the designated person is not suitable for the tasks, does not accept the mandate or terminates the mandate.

Art. 371 B. Execution and revocation

B. Execution and revocation

1 The patient decree must be executed in writing, and be dated and signed.

2 Any person who has executed a patient decree may have this fact and the place where it is kept entered on his or her health insurance card. The Federal Council shall issue the required provisions, in particular on the access to the data.

3 The provision on revoking an advance care directive applies mutatis mutandis.

Art. 372 C. Loss of capacity of judgement

C. Loss of capacity of judgement

1 If the patient lacks capacity of judgement and it is not known if there is a patient decree, the attending doctor shall ascertain the position from the health insurance card. The foregoing does not apply to urgent cases.

2 The doctor shall comply with the patient decree unless it violates statutory regulations or there is reasonable doubt that it is based on the patient's free will or still corresponds to his or her presumed will.

3 The doctor shall make a note in the patient records of any reasons why the patient decree was not complied with.

Art. 373 D. Intervention by the adult protection authority

D. Intervention by the adult protection authority

1 Any person closely related to the patient may contact the adult protection authority in writing and claim that:

1.
the patient decree is not being complied with;
2.
the interests of the patient are being endangered or no longer safeguarded;
3.
the patient decree is not based on the patient's free will.

2 The provision on intervention by the adult protection authority in the case of an advance care directive applies mutatis mutandis.


  Section Two: Statutory Measures for Persons lacking Capacity of Judgement

  Sub-Section One: Representation by the Spouse or Registered Partner

Art. 374 A. Requirements for and extent of the right to act as representative

A. Requirements for and extent of the right to act as representative

1 Any person who as spouse or registered partner cohabits with a person who is no longer capable of judgement or who regularly and personally provides that person with support has a statutory right to act as that person's representative if there is no advance care directive and no deputy has been appointed.

2 The right to act as representative includes:

1.
all legal acts that are normally required to meet the need for support;
2.
due management of income and other assets; and
3.
the right to open and deal with post, if necessary.

3 For legal acts involving exceptional asset management, the spouse or the registered partner must obtain the consent of the adult protection authority.

Art. 375 B. Exercise of the right to act as representative

B. Exercise of the right to act as representative

The exercise of the right to act as representative is governed by the provisions of the Code of Obligations1 on agency contracts mutatis mutandis.


1 SR 220

Art. 376 C. Intervention by the adult protection authority

C. Intervention by the adult protection authority

1 If there is any doubt as to whether the requirements for representation are met, the adult protection authority shall decide on the right to act as representative and if required shall provide the spouse or the registered partner with a document stating his or her powers.

2 If the interests of the person lacking capacity of judgement are endangered or no longer safeguarded, the adult protection authority shall at the request of a closely associated person or ex officio revoke the power of the spouse or registered partner to act as representative partly or fully and shall appoint a deputy.


  Sub-Section Two: Representation in relation to Medical Procedures

Art. 377 A. Treatment plan

A. Treatment plan

1 If a person lacking capacity of judgement has not given instructions on treatment in a patient decree, the attending doctor shall plan the required treatment in consultation with the person entitled to act as representative in relation to medical procedures.

2 The doctor shall inform the representative about all the important aspects of the planned medical procedures, and in particular about the reasons therefor, their purpose, form, methods, risks, side effects and costs, the consequences of not carrying out the treatment and any alternative treatment options.

3 If possible, the person lacking capacity of judgement shall also be involved in making the decision.

4 The treatment plan shall be adapted to ongoing developments.

Art. 378 B. The representative

B. The representative

1 The following persons are entitled in the following order to represent the person lacking capacity of judgement and to grant or refuse consent to the planned out-patient or in-patient measures:

1.
a person appointed in a patient decree or in an advance care directive;
2.
a deputy with a right to act as representative in relation to medical procedures;
3.
any person who as a spouse or registered partner cohabits with the person lacking capacity of judgement or who regularly and personally provides him or her with support;
4.
any person who cohabits with the person lacking capacity of judgement and who regularly and personally provides him or her with support;
5.
issue who regularly and personally provide the person lacking capacity of judgement with support;
6.
the parents, if they regularly and personally provide the person lacking capacity of judgement with support;
7.
siblings, if they regularly and personally provide the person lacking capacity of judgement with support.

2 If two or more persons have the right to act as representative, the doctor, acting in good faith, may require that each act with the agreement of the others.

3 If a patient decree contains no instructions, the representative shall decide according to the presumed wishes and interests of the person lacking capacity of judgement.

Art. 379 C. Urgent cases

C. Urgent cases

In urgent cases, the doctor may carry out medical procedures according to the presumed wishes and interests of the person lacking capacity of judgement.

Art. 380 D. Treatment of a mental disorder

D. Treatment of a mental disorder

The treatment of a mental disorder of a person lacking capacity of judgement in a psychiatric hospital is governed by the provisions on care-related hospitalisation.

Art. 381 E. Intervention by the adult protection authority

E. Intervention by the adult protection authority

1 The adult protection authority shall establish a representative deputyship if there is no representative available or the representative does not wish to exercise the right to act.

2 It shall appoint a representative or establish a representative deputyship if:

1.
it is unclear who has a right to act as representative
2.
the persons with a right to act as representative are unable to agree; or
3.
the interests of the person lacking capacity of judgement are endangered or no longer safeguarded.

3 It shall act at the request of the doctor, another closely associated person or ex officio.


  Sub-Section Three: Stays in Residential or Care Institutions

Art. 382 A. Care agreement

A. Care agreement

1 If a person lacking capacity of judgement is cared for in a residential or nursing institution for a longer period, a written care agreement must be drawn up to regulate the services that the institution provides and the costs thereof.

2 In determining the services provided by the institution, account must be taken of the wishes of the person concerned as far as possible.

3 Responsibility for representing the person lacking capacity of judgement in concluding, amending or terminating the care agreement is governed mutatis mutandis by the provisions on representation relating to medical procedures.

Art. 383 B. Restriction of freedom of movement / I. Requirements

B. Restriction of freedom of movement

I. Requirements

1 The residential or nursing institution may restrict the freedom of movement of the person lacking capacity of judgement only if less stringent measures are clearly insufficient or prove to be so and the measure serves to:

1.
prevent serious danger to the life or physical integrity of the client or third parties; or
2.
remedy serious disruption to life in and around the institution.

2 Before his or her freedom of movement is restricted, it shall be explained to the person concerned what is happening, why the measure has been ordered, how long it will probably last and who will be responsible for the person concerned during this period. The foregoing does not apply in emergencies.

3 An order to restrict freedom of movement shall be revoked as soon as possible and in every case reviewed regularly to ascertain whether it is still required.

Art. 384 B. Restriction of freedom of movement / II. Records and Information

II. Records and Information

1 A record shall be kept of any measure restricting freedom of movement. This shall contain in particular the names of the person ordering the measure, the purpose, the nature and the duration the measure.

2 The representative in relation to medical procedures shall be notified of the measure restricting freedom of movement and may inspect the record at any time.

3 The persons supervising the residential or nursing institution shall also have a right to inspect the record.

Art. 385 B. Restriction of freedom of movement / III. Intervention by the adult protection authority

III. Intervention by the adult protection authority

1 The person concerned or a closely related person may submit a written request at any time for the adult protection authority at the location of the institution to intervene in relation to a measure restricting freedom of movement.

2 If the adult protection authority establishes that the measure fails to meet the statutory requirements, it shall amend the measure, revoke it or order an official adult protection measure. If necessary, it shall notify the institution's supervisory authority.

3 Any request for an assessment to be made by the adult protection authority shall be passed on to the authority immediately.

Art. 386 C. Protection of privacy

C. Protection of privacy

1 The residential or nursing institution shall protect the privacy of a person lacking capacity of judgement and where possible encourage contacts with persons outside the institution.

2 If no one outside the institution expresses an interest in the client, the residential or nursing institution shall notify the adult protection authority.

3 The freedom to choose one's doctor shall be respected unless there is good cause for not doing so.

Art. 387 D. Supervision of residential and care institution

D. Supervision of residential and care institution

The cantons shall make residential and care institution in which person lacking capacity of judgement are cared for subject to supervision, unless federal regulations already guarantee supervision.


  Title Eleven: Official Measures

  Section One: General Principles

Art. 388 A. Aim

A. Aim

1 Official adult protection measures shall aim to secure the best interests and protection of persons in need.

2 Where possible, they should preserve and encourage the independence of the persons concerned.

Art. 389 B. Subsidiarity and proportionality

B. Subsidiarity and proportionality

1 The adult protection authority shall order a measure if:

1.
support for the person in need offered by his or her family, other closely related persons or private or public services is or proves to be insufficient;
2.
where the person in need is no longer capable of judgement, he or she has failed to make any or sufficient arrangements for his or her own care and the statutory measures are insufficient.

2 Any official measure must be necessary and suitable.


  Section Two: The Deputyship

  Sub-Section One: General Provisions

Art. 390 A. Requirements

A. Requirements

1 The adult protection authority shall establish a deputyship if an adult:

1.
due to a learning disability, a mental disorder or a similar inherent debility is wholly or partially unable to manage his or her own affairs;
2.
due to a temporary loss of the capacity of judgement or temporary absence is neither able to take care of matters that must be dealt with, nor has appointed a representative.

2 Account must be taken of the burden on and the protection of family members and third parties.

3 The deputyship shall be established at the request of the person concerned (the client) or a closely associated person or ex officio.

Art. 391 B. Scope of responsibilities

B. Scope of responsibilities

1 The adult protection authority shall define the scope of the deputyship's responsibilities according to the needs of the client.

2 The scope of responsibilities shall relate to personal care, the management of his or her assets or legal matters.

3 Without the consent of the client, the deputy may only open his or her post or enter his or her residence if the adult protection authority has expressly granted the power to do so.

Art. 392 C. Dispensing with a deputyship

C. Dispensing with a deputyship

If establishing a deputyship is clearly a disproportionate measure due the extent of the work involved, the adult protection authority may:

1.
do what is required itself, and in particular consent to a transaction;
2.
instruct third parties to carry out individual tasks; or
3.
designate a suitable person or agency that must be consulted and informed on specific matters.

  Sub-Section Two: Types of Deputyship

Art. 393 A. Assistance deputyship

A. Assistance deputyship

1 An assistance deputyship is established with the consent of the person in need if he or she needs assistance in order to deal with certain matters.

2 The assistance deputyship does not limit the capacity of the client to act.

Art. 394 B. Representative deputyship / I. In general

B. Representative deputyship

I. In general

1 A representative deputyship is established if the person in need is unable to deal with certain matters and therefore must be represented.

2 The adult protection authority may limit the capacity of the client to act accordingly.

3 Even if his or her capacity to act has not been limited, the client is bound by the acts of the deputy.

Art. 395 B. Representative deputyship / II. Asset management

II. Asset management

1 If the adult protection authority establishes a representative deputyship to manage assets, it shall specify the assets to be managed by the deputy. It may make all or part of the income, all or part of the capital or all or part of the income and capital subject to the deputy's management.

2 The management powers also cover savings from the managed income or the revenue from the managed capital unless the adult protection authority provides otherwise.

3 Without limiting the capacity of the client to act, the adult protection authority may prohibit him or her from accessing individual assets.

4 If the adult protection authority prohibits the client from disposing of heritable property, it must arrange for a note to be made in the land register.

Art. 396 C. Advisory deputyship

C. Advisory deputyship

1 An advisory deputyship shall be established if the client requires for his or her own protection that certain acts be made subject to the consent of the deputy.

2 The client's capacity to act shall thus be limited accordingly by law.

Art. 397 D. Combination of deputyships

D. Combination of deputyships

Assistance, representative and advisory deputyships may be combined with each other.

Art. 398 E. General deputyship

E. General deputyship

1 A general deputyship is established if a person, in particular due to permanent loss of capacity of judgement, is in particular need.

2 It covers all aspects of personal care, management of assets and legal matters.

3 The client's capacity to act is revoked by law.


  Sub-Section Three: End of the Deputyship

Art. 399

1 The deputyship ends by law on the death of the client.

2 The adult protection authority shall terminate a deputyship at the request of the client or of a closely associated person or ex officio as soon as there is no reason for it to continue.


  Sub-Section Four: The Deputy

Art. 400 A. Appointment / I. General requirements

A. Appointment

I. General requirements

1 The adult protection authority shall appoint as deputy a natural person who has the personal aptitude and knowledge to carry out the planned tasks, who has the time required to do so and who can carry out the tasks in person. Where circumstances require, it may appoint two or more persons.

2 The person may only be appointed with their consent.1

3 The adult protection authority shall ensure that the deputy receives the instructions, advice and support that he or she requires


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 29 Sept. 2017, in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 2801; BBl 2017 1811 3205).

Art. 401 A. Appointment / II. Wishes of the client or his or her closely associated persons

II. Wishes of the client or his or her closely associated persons

1 If the client proposes someone as his or her deputy, the adult protection authority shall agree to the proposal provided the person proposed is suitable and is prepared to accept the deputyship

2 It shall if possible take account of the wishes of family members or other closely associated persons.

3 If the client rejects a specific person as the deputy, the adult protection authority shall respect this wish provided it is reasonable.

Art. 402 A. Appointment / III. Appointment of two or more persons

III. Appointment of two or more persons

1 If the adult protection authority appoints two or more persons as deputies, it shall specify whether their tasks should be carried out jointly or who is responsible for which tasks.

2 Two or more deputies may be required to carry out their tasks jointly only if they agree to do so.

Art. 403 B. Incapacity and conflict of interests

B. Incapacity and conflict of interests

1 If the deputy is unable to act or if the deputy's interests conflict with those of the client, the adult protection authority shall appoint a substitute deputy or regulate the matter itself.

2 In the event of a conflict of interests, the powers of the deputy cease to apply by law in the relevant matter.

Art. 404 C. Remuneration and expenses

C. Remuneration and expenses

1 The deputy is entitled to appropriate remuneration and to the reimbursement of necessary expenses from the assets of the client. In the case of professional deputies, the remuneration is paid and expenses reimbursed by the employer.

2 The adult protection authority determines the level of remuneration. It takes account in particular of the extent and the complexity of the tasks assigned to the deputy.

3 The cantons shall issue implementing provisions and rules on remuneration and reimbursing expenses if they cannot be paid out of the assets of the client.


  Sub-Section Five: Deputyship Tasks

Art. 405 A. Assumption of office

A. Assumption of office

1 The deputy shall obtain the information required to fulfil his or her tasks and shall make personal contact with the client.

2 If the deputyship involves asset management, the deputy shall immediately make an inventory of the assets to be managed in cooperation with the adult protection authority.

3 If justified in the circumstances, the adult protection authority may order a public inventory to be made. This has the same effect for creditors as a public inventory under the law of succession.

4 Third parties are obliged to provide all the information required for the inventory to be made.

Art. 406 B. Relationship with the client

B. Relationship with the client

1 The deputy shall carry out his or her tasks in the interests of the client, take account of the client's opinions, where possible, and respect the client's desire to organise his or her life in a way that corresponds to his or her abilities and accords with his or her wishes and ideas.

2 The deputy shall try to develop a relationship of mutual trust with the client and to prevent any deterioration in the client's debility or to reduce the effect thereof.

Art. 407 C. Client's autonomy

C. Client's autonomy

Even if his or her capacity to act has been revoked, a client who is capable of judgement may through his or her own acts establish rights and obligations under the law of persons, and exercise strictly personal rights.

Art. 408 D. Asset management / I. Tasks

D. Asset management

I. Tasks

1 The deputy shall manage the assets with due care and carry out all the legal acts connected with their management.

2 In particular the deputy may:

1.
accept payments due to the client by third parties thus discharging their obligations;
2.
pay debts where appropriate;
3.
represent the client in attending to his or her everyday needs, if necessary.

3 The Federal Council shall issue provisions on the investment and safe custody of assets.

Art. 409 D. Asset management / II. Personal allowance

II. Personal allowance

The deputy shall provide the client with an allowance from the client's assets which the client is free to spend.

Art. 410 D. Asset management / III. Accounts

III. Accounts

1 The deputy shall keep accounts and submit them to the adult protection authority for approval at regular intervals specified by the authority, and at least every two years.

2 The deputy shall explain the accounts to the client and provide him or her with a copy on request.

Art. 411 E. Reporting

E. Reporting

1 The deputy shall submit a report on the client's situation and the deputyship to the adult protection authority as often as necessary, but at least every two years.

2 The deputy shall if possible consult the client when preparing the report and provide the client with a copy request.

Art. 412 F. Special transactions

F. Special transactions

1 The deputy may not provide any financial guarantees, establish any foundations or make gifts on behalf of the client, with the exception of customary occasional gifts.

2 Assets that are of special value to the client or his or her family shall not be disposed of if possible.

Art. 413 G. Duties of care and confidentiality

G. Duties of care and confidentiality

1 In fulfilling his or her tasks, the deputy shall have the same duty of care as an agent under the provisions of the Code of Obligations1.

2 The deputyship is subject to a duty of confidentiality unless this is contrary to overriding interests.

3 Third parties must be notified of the existence of the deputyship provided this is required for the deputy to duly fulfil his or her tasks.


1 SR 220

Art. 414 H. Amendment of conditions

H. Amendment of conditions

The deputy shall notify the adult protection authority immediately of any circumstances that require the measure to be amended or make the termination of the deputyship possible.


  Sub-Section Six: Role of the Adult Protection Authority

Art. 415 A. Examination of accounts and report

A. Examination of accounts and report

1 The adult protection authority shall examine the accounts and grant or refuse approval thereof; if necessary, they shall require the accounts to be corrected.

2 It shall examine the report and, if necessary, require it to be amended.

3 If necessary, it shall take measures to safeguard the interests of the client appropriately.

Art. 416 B. Transactions requiring consent / I. By law

B. Transactions requiring consent

I. By law

1 The consent of the adult protection authority is required before the deputy may carry out any of the following transactions on behalf of the client:

1.
liquidation of the household, terminating the lease on a dwelling where the client lives;
2.
long-term contracts for the client's accommodation;
3.
acceptance or renunciation of a inheritance if an express declaration is required therefor, as well as contracts of succession and contracts dividing an estate;
4.
the acquisition, sale, pledge and other burdening of immovable property and the construction of buildings that goes beyond ordinary administrative activities;
5.
the acquisition, sale and pledge of other assets and the creation of a usufruct where such transactions do not fall under the conduct of ordinary administration and management;
6.
the acceptance and granting of substantial loans, entering into bill-of-exchange-related liabilities;
7.
life annuity and lifetime maintenance agreements as well as life assurance, provided these do not form part of an occupational pension in connection with a contract of employment;
8.
the takeover or liquidation of a business, involvement in a company with personal liability or a substantial capital participation;
9.
declaration of inability to pay, conduct of legal proceedings, conclusion of a settlement, an arbitration agreement or a composition agreement, subject to the reservation of provisional measures by the deputy in cases of urgency.

2 The adult protection authority's consent is not required if a client who is capable of judgement grants his or her consent and his or her capacity to act is not limited by the deputyship.

3 Contracts between the deputy and the client shall always require the adult protection authority's consent other than in the case of assignments issued by the client that do not involve the payment of a fee.

Art. 417 B. Transactions requiring consent / II. By order

II. By order

The adult protection authority may for good cause order that other transactions should require its consent.

Art. 418 B. Transactions requiring consent / III. Lack of consent

III. Lack of consent

If a transaction has been entered into without the required consent of the adult protection authority, this shall only affect the client to the extent provided for under the provisions of the law of persons on lack of consent from a legal representative.


  Sub-Section Seven: Intervention by the Adult Protection Authority

Art. 419

The client, a closely related person or any person with a legitimate interest may call on the adult protection authority to intervene in relation to acts or omissions by the deputy or by a third party or agency to which the adult protection authority has issued an assignment.


  Sub-Section Eight: Special Provisions for Family Members

Art. 420

If the client's spouse, registered partner, parents, issue, sibling, or de facto life partner is appointed deputy, the adult protection authority may wholly or partly absolve the deputy of the obligations to prepare an inventory, submit regular reports and accounts, and obtain consent for specific transaction if this is justified by the circumstances.


  Sub-Section Nine: Termination of the Office of Deputy

Art. 421 A. By law

A. By law

The office of deputy terminates by law:

1.
on expiry of a term of office set by the adult protection authority, unless the deputy is confirmed in office;
2.
with the end of the deputyship;
3.
with termination of employment as a professional deputy;
4.
in the event that the deputy is made subject to a deputyship, becomes incapable of judgement, or dies.
Art. 422 B. Discharge / I. At the deputy's request

B. Discharge

I. At the deputy's request

1 The deputy may request to be discharged at the earliest after serving a term of four years.

2 Prior to this, the deputy may request to be discharged for good cause.

Art. 423 B. Discharge / II. Other cases

II. Other cases

1 The adult protection authority shall discharge the deputy if:

1.
he or she is no longer suitable to carry out the tasks;
2.
there is other good cause for his or her discharge.

2 The client or a closely associated person may request that the deputy be discharged.

Art. 424 C. Continuation of transactions

C. Continuation of transactions

The deputy must continue with transactions that cannot be postponed until a successor takes over office, unless the adult protection authority orders otherwise. This provision does not apply to a professional deputy.

Art. 425 D. Final report and final accounts

D. Final report and final accounts

1 When the term of office ends, the deputy shall submit a final report to the adult protection authority and if applicable file the final accounts. The adult protection authority may waive this requirement for professional deputies if the employment relationship ends.

2 The adult protection authority shall examine and approve the final report and the final accounts in the same way as the regular reports and accounts.

3 It shall pass on the final report and final accounts to the client or his or her heirs and if applicable to the new deputy and shall at the same time draw the attention of these persons to the provisions on accountability.

4 It shall also inform them whether it exonerated the deputy or refused to approve the final report or the final accounts.


  Section Three: Care-Related Hospitalisation

Art. 426 A. The measures / I. Hospitalisation for treatment or care

A. The measures

I. Hospitalisation for treatment or care

1 A person suffering from a mental disorder or mental disability or serious neglect (the patient) may be committed to an appropriate institution if the required treatment or care cannot be provided otherwise.

2 The burden that the patient places on family members and third parties and their protection must be taken into account.

3 The patient shall be discharged as soon as the requirements for hospitalisation no longer are fulfilled.

4 The patient or a closely related person may request his or her discharge at any time. A decision must be made on the request immediately.

Art. 427 A. The measures / II. Detention of persons admitted voluntarily

II. Detention of persons admitted voluntarily

1 If a person suffering from a mental disorder who has entered an institution voluntarily wishes to leave the institution, he or she may be detained by the institution's medical management for a maximum of three days if he or she:

1.
is a risk to his or her own life or limb; or
2.
is a serious risk to the life or the physical integrity of others.

2 At the end of the three day period, the patient may leave the institution unless he or she is subject to an enforceable hospitalisation order.

3 The patient shall be notified in writing that he or she may petition the court.

Art. 428 B. Responsibility for hospitalisation and discharge / I. Adult protection authority

B. Responsibility for hospitalisation and discharge

I. Adult protection authority

1 The adult protection authority is responsible for ordering hospitalisation and discharge.

2 In specific cases, it may delegate responsibility for discharge to the institution.

Art. 429 B. Responsibility for hospitalisation and discharge / II. Doctors / 1. Responsibility

II. Doctors

1. Responsibility

1 The cantons may designate doctors who in addition to the adult protection authority are authorised to order hospitalisation for a period specified by cantonal law. The period may not exceed six weeks.

2 Hospitalisation may not continue beyond the specified period at the latest unless an enforceable hospitalisation order from the adult protection authority applies.

3 The institution decides on discharge.

Art. 430 B. Responsibility for hospitalisation and discharge / II. Doctors / 2. Procedures

2. Procedures

1 The doctor shall examine and interview the patient in person.

2 The hospitalisation order shall contain at least the following information:

1.
the place and date of the examination;
2.
the name of the doctor;
3.
the diagnosis, reasons therefor and the purpose of hospitalisation;
4.
instructions on rights of appeal.

3 An appeal does not have suspensive effect unless the doctor or the competent court orders otherwise.

4 A copy of the hospitalisation order shall be given to the patient; a further copy shall be given to the institution on the patient's admission.

5 The doctor shall if possible notify a person closely related to the patient in writing on his or her committal and on the rights of appeal.

Art. 431 C. Regular review

C. Regular review

1 The adult protection authority shall conduct a review at the latest six months after hospitalisation of whether the requirements for hospitalisation are still being met and whether the institution is still suitable.

2 It shall conduct a second review within the following six months. Thereafter it shall conduct a review as often as necessary, but at least once every year.

Art. 432 D. Authorised representative

D. Authorised representative

Any person committed to an institution may appoint a person that he or she trusts as a representative to support him or her during his or her stay and until the conclusion of all related procedures.

Art. 433 E. Medical measures in the case of a mental disorder / I. Treatment plan

E. Medical measures in the case of a mental disorder

I. Treatment plan

1 If a person is committed to an institution to be treated for a mental disorder, the attending doctor shall draw up written treatment plan in consultation with the patient and if applicable his or her authorised representative.

2 The doctor shall inform the patient and the authorised representative of all matters relevant to the planned medical procedures, and in particular the reasons therefor, their purpose, nature, modalities, risks and side effects, of the consequences of not undergoing treatment and of any alternative treatment options.

3 The treatment plan shall be given to the patient so that he or she may consent. Where the patient is incapable of judgement, account must be taken of any patient decree.

4 The treatment plan is adjusted to take account of ongoing developments.

Art. 434 E. Medical measures in the case of a mental disorder / II. Treatment without consent

II. Treatment without consent

1 In the absence of the patient's consent, the chief physician in the department may order in writing the medical procedures planned in the treatment plan if:

1.
failure to carry out the treatment could lead to serious damage to the patient's health or seriously endanger the life or the physical integrity of third parties;
2.
the patient is unable to exercise judgement in relation to his or her need for treatment; and
3.
no appropriate measure is available that is less invasive.

2 Written notice of the order shall be given to the patient and his or her authorised representative together with instructions on rights of appeal.

Art. 435 E. Medical measures in the case of a mental disorder / III. Emergencies

III. Emergencies

1 In an emergency, essential medical procedures may be carried out immediately to protect the patient or third parties.

2 If the institution is aware how the person wishes to be treated, it shall take account of those wishes.

Art. 436 E. Medical measures in the case of a mental disorder / IV. Pre-discharge interview

IV. Pre-discharge interview

1 If there is a risk that the medical condition will recur, the attending doctor shall attempt to agree with the client before discharge on principles for treatment in the event that the patient is committed to the institution again.

2 The pre-discharge interview must be documented.

Art. 437 E. Medical measures in the case of a mental disorder / V. Cantonal law

V. Cantonal law

1 The cantons shall regulate follow-up care.

2 They may provide for out-patient measures.

Art. 438 F. Measures restricting freedom of movement

F. Measures restricting freedom of movement

Measures restricting the patient's freedom of movement in the institution are governed by the provisions on restricting the freedom of movement of patients in residential or care institutions mutatis mutandis. The right to appeal to the court is reserved.

Art. 439 G. Petition to the court

G. Petition to the court

1 In the following cases, the patient or a closely related person may petition the competent court in writing:

1.
in cases of hospitalisation ordered by a doctor;
2.
in cases where the patient is detained by the institution;
3.
in cases where a request for discharge is refused by the institution;
4.
in cases where a mental disorder is treated without consent;
5.
in cases of measures restricting freedom of movement.

2 The deadline for appealing to the court is ten days from the date on which notice of the decision is given. In the case of measures restricting freedom of movement, an appeal may be made to the court at any time.

3 The procedure is governed mutatis mutandis by the provisions on proceedings before a judicial appellate authority.

4 An application for judicial assessment must be passed on to the competent court immediately.


  Title Twelve: Organisation

  Section One: Authorities and Local Jurisdiction

Art. 440 A. Adult protection authority

A. Adult protection authority

1 The adult protection authority is a specialist authority. It is appointed by the cantons.

2 It has a quorum of three members for taking decisions. The cantons may provide for exceptions for specific matters.

3 It also carries out the tasks of the child protection authority.

Art. 441 B. Supervisory authority

B. Supervisory authority

1 The cantons shall appoint the supervisory authorities.

2 The Federal Council may issue provisions on supervision.

Art. 442 C. Local jurisdiction

C. Local jurisdiction

1 The adult protection authority at the place of residence of the client has jurisdiction. In ongoing proceedings, the same authority retains jurisdiction until the case has been concluded.

2 In urgent cases, the authority where the client is actually residing has jurisdiction. If this authority carries out a measure, it shall notify the authority in the client's normal place of residence.

3 In the case of a deputyship due to absence, the authority at the place where the majority of the assets have been managed or have been transferred to the client has jurisdiction.

4 The cantons are entitled to declare the authority in the client's place of origin rather than place of residence to have jurisdiction over citizens of the canton who are resident in the canton, provide the commune of origin is wholly or partly responsible for supporting persons in need.

5 If a person subject to a measure changes place of residence, the authority at the new place shall take responsibility for the measure immediately, unless there is good cause for not doing so.


  Section Two: Procedure

  Sub-section One: Before the Adult Protection Authority

Art. 443 A. Notification rights and obligations

A. Notification rights and obligations

1 Any person may notify the adult protection authority if a person appears to be in need of assistance. The provisions on professional confidentiality are reserved.

2 Any person who while acting in an official capacity learns that a person needs assistance and is unable to provide this assistance in the context of their professional activities is required to notify the adult protection authority. The provisions on professional confidentiality remain reserved.1

3 The cantons may provide for further notification obligations.2


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 15 Dec. 2017 (Child Protection), in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 2947; BBl 2015 3431).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 15 Dec. 2017 (Child Protection), in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 2947; BBl 2015 3431).

Art. 444 B. Verification of jurisdiction

B. Verification of jurisdiction

1 The adult protection authority shall verify its jurisdiction ex officio.

2 If it decides that it has no jurisdiction, it shall assign the case immediately to the authority that it regards as having jurisdiction.

3 If it is uncertain as to whether it has jurisdiction, it shall consult the authority that it believes may have jurisdiction.

4 If no agreement is reached after consultation, the authority originally involved shall refer the question of jurisdiction to the appellate authority.

Art. 445 C. Precautionary measures

C. Precautionary measures

1 The adult protection authority shall at the request of a person participating in the proceedings or ex officio take all the precautionary measures required for the duration of the proceedings. It may in particular order an adult protection measure as a precautionary measure.

2 In cases of particular urgency, it may take precautionary measures immediately without hearing the persons participating in the proceedings. At the same time, it shall give these persons the opportunity to express their views, after which it shall review its decision.

3 An appeal against precautionary measures may be filed within ten days of notice thereof being given.

Art. 446 D. Procedural principles

D. Procedural principles

1 The adult protection authority investigates the circumstances of the case ex officio.

2 It shall conduct the required enquiries and gather the required evidence. It may instruct a suitable person or agency to carry out enquiries. If necessary, it shall commission an opinion from an expert.

3 It is not limited by the requests made by the persons participating in the proceedings.

4 It shall apply the law ex officio.

Art. 447 E. Hearing

E. Hearing

1 The client shall be heard in person unless to do so appears inappropriate.

2 In a case involving care-related hospitalisation, the adult protection authority shall normally hear the client normally as a panel.

Art. 448 F. Obligations to cooperate and administrative assistance

F. Obligations to cooperate and administrative assistance

1 The persons participating in the proceedings and third parties are obliged to cooperate in the enquiries into the circumstances. The adult protection authority shall make the arrangements required to safeguard legitimate interests. If necessary, it shall order the enforcement of the duty to cooperate.

2 Doctors, dentists, pharmacists, midwives and birth assistants, chiropractors and psychologists and their auxiliary personnel are only obliged to cooperate if the person entitled to confidentiality has authorised them to do so or if a superior authority or the supervisory authority has relieved them of the obligation of professional confidentiality at their own request or at the request of the adult protection authority.1

3 Members of the clergy, lawyers, defence agents, mediators and former welfare deputies appointed in the case are not subject to the obligation to cooperate.

4 Administrative authorities and courts shall hand over the required files, draw up reports and provide information unless legitimate interests require otherwise.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 15 Dec. 2017 (Child Protection), in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 2947; BBl 2015 3431).

Art. 449 G. Assessment in an institution

G. Assessment in an institution

1 If a psychiatric assessment is essential and cannot be carried out on an out-patient basis, the adult protection authority shall have the client admitted to a suitable institution for assessment.

2 The provisions on the procedure for care-related hospitalisation apply mutatis mutandis.

Art. 449a H. Appointment of a representative

H. Appointment of a representative

If necessary, the adult protection authority shall order that the client be represented and appoint a person experienced in care-related and legal matters as deputy.

Art. 449b I. Inspection of files

I. Inspection of files

1 The persons participating in the proceedings have the right to inspect the case files, unless legitimate interests require otherwise.

2 If a person participating in the proceedings is refused access to any case files, the information therein may only be used in the proceedings if the authority discloses the content relevant to the case verbally or in writing to the person concerned.

Art. 449c J. Notification duty

J. Notification duty

The adult protection authority shall notify the civil register office if:

1.
it makes a person subject to a general deputyship due to permanent loss of the capacity of judgement;
2.
an advance care directive become effective for a person permanently lacking capacity of judgement.

  Sub-section Two: Before the Appellate Authority

Art. 450 A. Object and right of appeal

A. Object and right of appeal

1 Decisions of the adult protection authority are subject to a right of appeal to the competent court.

2 The following persons have a right of appeal:

1.
persons participating in the proceedings;
2.
persons closely associated with the client;
3.
persons with a legitimate interest in the contested decision being reversed or amended.

3 The appeal must be filed with the court in writing and with a statement of the grounds.

Art. 450a B. Grounds of appeal

B. Grounds of appeal

1 The appeal may challenge:

1.
an infringement of the law;
2.
an incorrect or incomplete finding of legally relevant fact;
3.
an inappropriate decision.

2 An appeal is also competent on the grounds of denial of justice or unjustified delay.

Art. 450b C. Deadline for filing the appeal

C. Deadline for filing the appeal

1 The appeal must be filed within thirty days of notification of the decision. This deadline also applies to persons entitled to appeal who are not required to be notified of the decision.

2 In the case of a decision concerning care-related accommodation, the appeal must be filed within ten days of notification of the decision.

3 An appeal on the grounds of denial of justice or unjustified delay may be filed at any time.

Art. 450c D. Suspensive effect

D. Suspensive effect

An appeal has suspensive effect unless the adult protection authority or the judicial appellate authority rules otherwise.

Art. 450d E. Consultation with the lower instance and reconsideration

E. Consultation with the lower instance and reconsideration

1 The judicial appellate authority shall give the adult protection authority the opportunity to express its position.

2 Instead of submitting its views, the adult protection authority may reconsider its decision.

Art. 450e F. Special provisions in the case of care-related hospitalisation

F. Special provisions in the case of care-related hospitalisation

1 A statement of grounds is not required for an appeal against a decision relating to care-related hospitalisation.

2 The appeal does not have suspensive effect unless the adult protection authority or the judicial appellate authority rules otherwise.

3 In cases involving mental disorders, the decision must be based on the opinion of an expert.

4 The judicial appellate authority shall normally hear the client as a panel of judges. If necessary, it shall order that the client be represented and appoint a person experienced in care-related and legal matters as deputy.

5 Normally, it decides within five working days of the appeal being filed.


  Sub-Section Three: Joint Provision

Art. 450f

In addition, the provisions of the Civil Procedure Ordinance apply mutatis mutandis, unless the cantons provide otherwise.


  Sub-Section Four: Enforcement

Art. 450g

1 The adult protection authority shall enforce decisions on request or ex officio.

2 If the adult protection authority or the judicial appellate authority in the decision has already ordered compulsory enforcement measures, these may be enforced directly.

3 The person responsible for enforcement may enlist the help of the police if necessary. Normally a warning must be given before direct compulsory measures are applied.


  Section Three: Relationship with Third parties and Duty of Cooperation

Art. 451 A. Duty of confidentiality and information

A. Duty of confidentiality and information

1 The adult protection authority is subject to a duty of confidentiality in the absence of overriding interests.

2 Any person who shows a credible interest may request the adult protection authority to provide information on the existence and the effects of an adult protection measure.

Art. 452 B. Effect of the measures on third parties

B. Effect of the measures on third parties

1 An adult protection measure may be cited in opposition to third parties even if they are acting in good faith.

2 If the deputyship limits the capacity of the client to act, debtors must be notified that contractual performance only relieves them of their obligations payment if it is made to the deputy. Prior to notice being given, the deputyship may not be cited in opposition to debtors acting in good faith.

3 If a person subject to an adult protection measure induces other persons to accept his or her capacity to act in error, he or she is liable to them for any damage caused thereby.

Art. 453 C. Duty of cooperation

C. Duty of cooperation

1 If there is a serious risk that a person in need will endanger himself or herself or commit a felony or misdemeanour that seriously damages another person physically or mentally or causes them material loss, the adult protection authority shall cooperate with the agencies concerned and the police.

2 In such cases, persons subject to official or professional confidentiality are entitled to notify the adult protection authority.


  Section Four: Accountability

Art. 454 A. Principle

A. Principle

1 Any person who is injured by an unlawful act or omission related to official adult protection measures has the right to damages and, if justified by the seriousness of the injury, to satisfaction.

2 The same right applies if the adult protection authority or the supervisory authority behaves unlawfully in relation to other adult protection matters.

3 The canton is liable; the person suffering damage has no right to damages against the person who caused the damage.

4 The canton's right of recourse against the person that caused the damage is governed by the cantonal law.

Art. 455 B. Prescription

B. Prescription

1 The right to claim damages or satisfaction prescribes in accordance with the provisions of the Code of Obligations1 on the law of tort.2

2 If the person who caused the damage committed a criminal offence through his or her conduct, the right to claim damages or satisfaction prescribes at the earliest when the right to prosecute the offence prescribes. If the right to prosecute is no longer liable to prescription because a first instance criminal judgment has been issued, the right to claim damages or satisfaction prescribes at the earliest three years after notice of the judgment is given.3

3 If the injury is related to the ordering or conduct of a long-term measure, the prescriptive period for a claim against the canton does not begin before the long-term measure ends or is continued by another canton.


1 SR 220
2 Amended by Annex No 3 of the FA of 15 June 2018 (Revision of the Law on Prescription), in force since 1 Jan. 2020 (AS 2018 5343; BBl 2014 235).
3 Amended by Annex No 3 of the FA of 15 June 2018 (Revision of the Law on Prescription), in force since 1 Jan. 2020 (AS 2018 5343; BBl 2014 235).

Art. 456 C. Liability under agency law C. Liability under agency law

C. Liability under agency law

The liability of a person entrusted with another's care as well as that of a spouse or registered partner of a person lacking capacity of judgement or of a representative in the case of medical measures, insofar as that person is not a welfare deputy is governed by the provisions of the Code of Obligations1 on agency.


1 SR 220


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).2 Amended by No I 3 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).3 Amendment of Title Five in accordance with No I 1 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191). See also Art. 8–8b of the Final Title below.4 Amended of Title Six in accordance with No I 1 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191). See also Art. 9–11a of the Final Title below.5 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).6 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).7 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).8 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).9 Originally Chapter Three.10 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).11 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).12 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).13 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1). Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).14 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978(AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).15 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).16 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

  Part Three: Law of Succession

  Division One: Heirs

  Title Thirteen: Statutory Heirs

Art. 457 A. Related heirs / I. Issue

A. Related1 heirs

I. Issue

1 The nearest heirs of a deceased person are his or her issue.

2 Children inherit in equal parts.

3 Predeceased children are replaced by their own issue in all degrees per stirpes.


1 Term amended by No I 3 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 458 A. Related heirs / II. Parental line

II. Parental line

1 Where the deceased is not survived by any issue, the estate passes to the parental line.

2 The father and mother each inherit one-half of the estate.

3 A predeceased parent is replaced by his or her issue in all degrees per stirpes.

4 Where there are no issue on one side, the entire estate passes to the heirs on the other.

Art. 459 A. Related heirs / III. Grandparental line

III. Grandparental line

1 Where the deceased is survived by neither issue nor heirs in the parental line, the estate passes to the line of the grandparents.

2 Where the grandparents of the paternal and maternal lines survive the deceased, they inherit in equal parts on both sides.

3 A predeceased grandparent is replaced by his or her issue in all degrees per stirpes.

4 If a grandparent on the paternal or maternal side has predeceased without issue, that entire half of the estate is inherited by the heirs on that side.

5 If there are no heirs in either the paternal or the maternal side, the entire estate passes to the heirs in the other side.

Art. 4601A. Related heirs / IV. Scope of succession rights

IV. Scope of succession rights

The succession rights of relatives end with the line of the grandparents.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 4611

1 Repealed by No I 2 of the FA of 25 June 1976, with effect from 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 4621B. Surviving spouses and registered partners

B. Surviving spouses and registered partners

Surviving spouses and registered partners receive:

1.
one-half of the estate, where they are obliged to share with the deceased’s issue;
2.
three-quarters of the estate, where they are obliged to share with heirs in the parental line;
3.
the entire estate, where no heirs exist in the parental line either.

1 Amended by Annex No 8 of the Same-Sex Partnership Act of 18 June 2004, in force since 1 Jan. 2007 (AS 2005 5685; BBl 2003 1288).

Art. 4634641C...

C...


1 Repealed by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, with effect from 1 Jan 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 4651

1 Repealed by No I 3 of the FA of 30 June 1972, with effect from 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200). However, see Art. 12a Final Title below.

Art. 4661D. State authority

D. State authority

Where the deceased leaves no heirs, his or her estate passes to the canton in which he or she was last resident or to the commune designated by the law of that canton.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).


  Title Fourteen: Testamentary Dispositions

  Section One: Testamentary Capacity

Art. 467 A. Wills

A. Wills

Any person who has the capacity of judgement and is at least 18 years old has the right to draw up a will disposing of his or her property in accordance with the limits and forms prescribed by law.

Art. 4681B. Contract of succession

B. Contract of succession

1 Any person who is capable of judgement and has reached the age of 18 may conclude a contract of succession as a testator.

2 Persons subject to a deputyship that covers the conclusion of a contract of succession require the consent of their legal representative.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 469 C. Voidable dispositions

C. Voidable dispositions

1 Dispositions made in error or under the influence of malicious deception, threats or coercion are void.

2 However, they become valid if not revoked by the testator within one year of his or her discovering the error or deception or of his or her release from the threat or coercion.

3 If a disposition contains an obvious error with regard to persons or objects and the testator’s true intention may be established with certainty, the disposition shall be rectified accordingly.


  Section Two: Testamentary Freedom

Art. 470 A. Disposable part / I. Scope of testamentary powers

A. Disposable part

I. Scope of testamentary powers

1 A person who is survived by issue, parents, a spouse or a registered partner may make a testamentary disposition of that part of his or her property which exceeds the statutory entitlement of the survivor or survivors.1

2 A person who is not survived by any such heirs may dispose of his or her entire property by testamentary disposition.


1 Amended by Annex No 8 of the Same-Sex Partnership Act of 18 June 2004, in force since 1 Jan. 2007 (AS 2005 5685; BBl 2003 1288).

Art. 4711A. Disposable part / II. Statutory entitlement

II. Statutory entitlement

The statutory entitlement is:

1.
for any issue, three-quarters of their statutory succession rights;
2.
for each parent, one-half;
3.2
for the surviving spouse or registered partner, one-half.

1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).
2 Amended by Annex No 8 of the Same-Sex Partnership Act of 18 June 2004, in force since 1 Jan. 2007 (AS 2005 5685; BBl 2003 1288).

Art. 4721A. Disposable part / III. ...

III. ...


1 Repealed by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 473 A. Disposable part / IV. Dispositions in favour of the spouse

IV. Dispositions in favour of the spouse

1 By a testamentary disposition, the testator may grant the surviving spouse a usufruct of the entire part of the estate passing to their common issue.1

2 This usufruct shall replace the statutory succession right due to the spouse where the common issue are co-heirs with the spouse. In addition to this usufruct, the disposable part is one-quarter of the estate.2

3 If the surviving spouse remarries, the usufruct ceases to apply to that part of the estate which, on succession, could not have been encumbered by a usufruct under the provisions ordinarily governing the statutory entitlements of the deceased’s issue.3


1 Amended by No I of the Swiss Civil Code of 5 Oct. 2001, in force since 1 March 2002 (AS 2002 269; BBl 2001 1121 2011 2111).
2 Amended by No I of the Swiss Civil Code of 5 Oct. 2001, in force since 1 March 2002 (AS 2002 269; BBl 2001 1121 2011 2111).
3 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 474 A. Disposable part / V. Calculation of the disposable part / 1. Deduction of debts

V. Calculation of the disposable part

1. Deduction of debts

1 The disposable part is calculated on the basis of the value of the deceased’s assets at the time of his or her death.

2 In calculating this value, the deceased’s debts, the funeral expenses, the costs of sealing and of drawing up the inventory and the maintenance claims of members of the household for one month are deducted from value of the estate.

Art. 475 A. Disposable part / V. Calculation of the disposable part / 2. Inter vivos gifts

2. Inter vivos gifts

Inter vivos gifts are added to the estate insofar as they are subject to an action in abatement.

Art. 476 A. Disposable part / V. Calculation of the disposable part / 3. Insurance claims

3. Insurance claims

Where a life assurance claim maturing on the death of the deceased was established in favour of a third party by an inter vivos or testamentary disposition or mortis causa or was transferred by the deceased during his or her lifetime to a third party without valuable consideration, the redemption value of such insurance claim at the time of death is added to the estate.

Art. 477 B. Disinheritance / I. Grounds

B. Disinheritance

I. Grounds

The testator has the power to deprive an heir of his or her statutory entitlement by means of a testamentary disposition:

1.1
if the heir has committed a serious crime against the testator or a person close to him or her;
2.
if the heir has seriously breached his or her duties under family law towards the testator or the latter’s dependants.

1 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

Art. 478 B. Disinheritance / II. Effect

II. Effect

1 The disinherited person may neither participate in the estate nor bring an action in abatement.

2 Unless disposed of otherwise by the testator, the disinherited person’s portion passes to the testator’s statutory heirs as if the disinherited person had predeceased.

3 The disinherited person’s issue retain their statutory entitlements as if he or she had predeceased.

Art. 479 B. Disinheritance / III. Burden of proof

III. Burden of proof

1 A disinheritance is valid only if the testator indicates the reason for the disinheritance in his or her testamentary disposition.

2 If the disinherited person challenges the disinheritance on the grounds that the reason therefor is incorrect, any heir or legatee wishing to benefit from the disinheritance must prove that the reason is correct.

3 Where no such proof may be adduced or no reason for the disinheritance is indicated, the disposition shall be upheld insofar as it does not deprive the disinherited person of his or her statutory entitlement unless it was made by the testator in obvious error regarding the reason for the disinheritance.

Art. 480 B. Disinheritance / IV. Disinheritance of an insolvent person

IV. Disinheritance of an insolvent person

1 If unpaid debt certificates exist in respect of any of the issue of the testator, the latter may deprive the said issue of one-half of his or her statutory entitlement providing he or she leaves that half to the existing or subsequently born children of the said issue.

2 At the disinherited person’s request, the disinheritance is void if, on commencement of the succession process, the unpaid debt certificates no longer exist against him or her or if their total amount does not exceed one-quarter of his or her share of the estate.


  Section Three: Types of Disposition

Art. 481 A. In general

A. In general

1 Within the limits of his or her right to dispose of his or her property, the testator may dispose of it in part or in full by will or by contract of succession.

2 Any property in respect of which no testamentary disposition has been made passes to the statutory heirs.

Art. 482 B. Burdens and conditions

B. Burdens and conditions

1 The testator may attach burdens or conditions to the disposition, the fulfilment of which may be requested by any interested party once the disposition becomes effective.

2 Immoral or unlawful burdens or conditions render the disposition null and void.

3 Where they are merely onerous to third parties or meaningless, they are deemed not to exist.

4 If an animal receives a bequest by testamentary disposition, this disposition is deemed to be a burden by which the animal must be cared for according to its needs.1


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 2002 (Article of Basic Principles: Animals), in force since 1 April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806).

Art. 483 C. Naming of heirs

C. Naming of heirs

1 The testator may name one or more heirs to the entire estate or to a fraction thereof.

2 Any disposition by which a beneficiary should receive all or a specified fraction of the deceased’s estate is deemed to constitute the naming of an heir.

Art. 484 D. Legacy / I. Nature

D. Legacy

I. Nature

1 The testator may bequeath a legacy to a beneficiary without naming that person as an heir.

2 He or she may bequeath a specific legacy or the usufruct of the whole or a part of the estate, or he or she may instruct the heirs or other legatees to make payments to that person from the value of the estate or to release that person from obligations.

3 If the testator bequeaths a specific legacy but the object is not part of the estate and no other intention is evident from the disposition, no obligation is placed on the obligor of the legacy.

Art. 485 D. Legacy / II. Duty on the obligor of the legacy

II. Duty on the obligor of the legacy

1 The object must be delivered to the beneficiary in the same condition that it was in at the commencement of the succession process, including damage and growth and with or without encumbrance.

2 With regard to expenditure on and deterioration of the legacy since the commencement of the succession process, the obligor of the legacy has the same rights and duties as an agent without authority.

Art. 486 D. Legacy / III. Relationship to the estate

III. Relationship to the estate

1 Where the legacies exceed the value of the estate or of the bequest to the obligor or of the disposable part, application may be made to have them abated proportionately.

2 If the obligors do not survive the testator, are unworthy to inherit or disclaim their inheritance, the legacies remain nonetheless effective.

3 If the testator has bequeathed a legacy to a statutory or named heir, the latter has the right to claim the legacy even if he or she disclaims his or her inheritance.

Art. 487 E. Substitution

E. Substitution

In his or her disposition, the testator may designate one or more persons to whom the estate or legacy shall pass in the event that the initial heir or legatee is predeceased or disclaims it.

Art. 488 F. Remaindermen / I. Designation of a remainderman

F. Remaindermen

I. Designation of a remainderman

1 The testator is entitled in his or her dispositions to require the named heir, as provisional heir, to deliver the estate to a third party, as remainderman.

2 No such obligation may be imposed on the remainderman.

3 The same provisions apply to legacies.

Art. 489 F. Remaindermen / II. Time of delivery

II. Time of delivery

1 Except where the disposition stipulates otherwise, the time of delivery is deemed to be the death of the provisional heir.

2 Where a different time is specified and that time has not yet occurred on the death of the provisional heir, the inheritance passes to his or her heirs against security.

3 If for whatever reason that time may no longer occur, the inheritance passes unreservedly to the heirs of the provisional heir.

Art. 490 F. Remaindermen / III. Security

III. Security

1 In all cases in which remaindermen are designated, the competent authority must order an inventory to be drawn up.

2 Delivery of the inheritance to the provisional heir is made only against security, except where the testator has expressly released him or her from such an obligation; in the case of immovable property, security may be provided by entering the delivery obligation under priority notice in the land register.

3 If the provisional heir is unable to provide security or jeopardises the remainderman’s expectancy, the inheritance must be placed under probate administration.

Art. 491 F. Remaindermen / IV. Legal status / 1. Of the provisional heir

IV. Legal status

1. Of the provisional heir

1 A provisional heir acquires the inheritance in the same manner as any named heir.

2 He or she becomes the owner of the inheritance with an obligation to deliver it.

Art. 492 F. Remaindermen / IV. Legal status / 2. Of the remainderman

2. Of the remainderman

1 The remainderman acquires the testator’s bequest if he or she is alive at the stipulated delivery time.

2 If he or she dies before then, the inheritance passes to the provisional heir unless the testator has ordered otherwise.

3 If the provisional heir dies before the testator or is unworthy of inheritance or disclaims the inheritance, it passes to the remainderman.

Art. 492a1F. Remaindermen / V. Issue lacking capacity of judgement

V. Issue lacking capacity of judgement

1 If any issue permanently lacks capacity of judgement and if he or she is not survived by issue or a spouse, the testator may designate a remainderman in respect of the residue.

2 The designation of the remainderman ceases to apply by law if the issue, contrary to expectation, becomes capable of judgement.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 493 G. Foundations

G. Foundations

1 The testator is entitled to bequeath all or part of the disposable portion of his or her property to a foundation for any purpose of his or her choosing.

2 However, the foundation is valid only if it conforms to the legal requirements.

Art. 494 H. Contracts of succession / I. Contracts naming heirs and making legacies

H. Contracts of succession

I. Contracts naming heirs and making legacies

1 The testator may, by contract of succession, undertake to another person to bequeath his or her estate or a legacy to that person or a third party.

2 He or she is free to dispose of his or her property as he or she sees fit.

3 However, testamentary dispositions or gifts that are incompatible with obligations entered into under the contract of succession are subject to challenge.

Art. 495 H. Contracts of succession / II. Renunciation of inheritance / 1. Significance

II. Renunciation of inheritance

1. Significance

1 The testator may conclude an inheritance renunciation contract with an heir with or without valuable consideration.

2 The renouncing party is not deemed to be an heir on succession.

3 Unless the contract provides otherwise, the renunciation of an inheritance also applies to the issue of the renouncing party.

Art. 496 H. Contracts of succession / II. Renunciation of inheritance / 2. Void renunciation

2. Void renunciation

1 Where certain persons are named in the renunciation contact as heirs in lieu of the renouncing party, the renunciation is void if such persons fail to acquire the inheritance for whatever reason.

2 Where an inheritance is renounced in favour of co-heirs, the renunciation is presumed to be effective only in respect of the heirs of the line descending from their nearest common ascendant and has no effect with regard to more distant heirs.

Art. 497 H. Contracts of succession / II. Renunciation of inheritance / 3. Rights of the creditors of the estate

3. Rights of the creditors of the estate

If the deceased was insolvent on commencement of the succession process and his or her creditors are not satisfied by the heirs, the renouncing party and his or her heirs may be held liable to the extent that they received valuable consideration for the renounced inheritance within the five years prior to the death of the deceased and were still enriched by such consideration on succession.


  Section Four: Formal Requirements of Testamentary Dispositions

Art. 498 A. Wills / I. Drawing up a will / 1. In general

A. Wills

I. Drawing up a will

1. In general

The testator may make his or her will in the form of a public deed or in holographic or oral form.

Art. 499 A. Wills / I. Drawing up a will / 2. By public deed / a. Formal requirements

2. By public deed

a. Formal requirements

A will by public deed is made in the presence of two witnesses by a public official, notary public or other person authorised under cantonal law to conduct such business.

Art. 500 A. Wills / I. Drawing up a will / 2. By public deed / b. Role of the public official

b. Role of the public official

1 The testator must inform the official of his or her wishes, whereupon the official draws up the deed or causes it to be drawn up and gives it to the testator to read.

2 The deed must be signed by the testator.

3 The official must date and sign the deed.

Art. 501 A. Wills / I. Drawing up a will / 2. By public deed / c. Role of the witnesses

c. Role of the witnesses

1 As soon as the public deed has been signed and dated, the testator must declare to the two witnesses, in the presence of the official, that he or she has read the document and that it contains his or her will.

2 The witnesses must sign the deed and in so doing confirm that the testator made said declaration in their presence and that, in their judgment, in so doing he or she was in full possession of testamentary capacity.

3 It is not necessary for the witnesses to be informed of the content of the deed.

Art. 502 A. Wills / I. Drawing up a will / 2. By public deed / d. Drawing up a will without the testator reading and signing it

d. Drawing up a will without the testator reading and signing it

1 If the testator does not read and sign the deed, the official must read it out in the presence of the two witnesses and the testator, who must then declare that the deed contains his or her will.

2 In this case the witnesses must not only attest to the testator’s declaration and their judgment concerning his or her testamentary capacity but must also confirm, by appending their signatures, that the deed was read out to the testator by the official in their presence.

Art. 503 A. Wills / I. Drawing up a will / 2. By public deed / e. Persons involved

e. Persons involved

1 Persons who lack capacity to act, have been deprived of their civil rights due to a criminal conviction1 or are unable to read or write, lineal relatives2 or siblings of the testator or their spouses and the testator’s spouse are not permitted to act as authenticating officials or witnesses when making a will in the form of a public deed.

2 No disposition may be made in the will in favour of any authenticating officer or witness or his or her lineal relatives, siblings or spouse.


1 The suspension of civil rights and privileges due to criminal conviction has been abolished (see AS 1971 777; BBl 1965 I 561 and AS 1974 55; BBl 1974 I 1457).
2 Term amended by No I 3 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 504 A. Wills / I. Drawing up a will / 2. By public deed / f. Safekeeping of wills

f. Safekeeping of wills

The cantons must ensure that public officials entrusted with wills either keep the original or a copy of such deeds themselves or else forward them to an authority for safekeeping.

Art. 505 A. Wills / I. Drawing up a will / 3. Holographic will

3. Holographic will

1 A holographic will must be written in the testator’s own hand from start to finish, include an indication of the day, month and year on which it is drawn up, and be signed by the testator.1

2 The cantons must ensure that such wills can be forwarded, whether open or sealed, to an authority for safekeeping.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 23 June 1995, in force since 1 Jan. 1996 (AS 1995 4882; BBl 1994 III 516, V 607).

Art. 506 A. Wills / I. Drawing up a will / 4. Oral will / a. Dispositions

4. Oral will

a. Dispositions

1 Where the testator is prevented from using any other form of will by extraordinary circumstances such as the imminent risk of death, breakdown in communications, epidemic or war, he or she is entitled to make a will in oral form.

2 To do so, he or she must declare his or her will in the presence of two witnesses and instruct them to have it drawn up as required in the form of a deed.

3 The witnesses are subject to the same disqualification provisions as apply to wills made in the form of public deeds.

Art. 507 A. Wills / I. Drawing up a will / 4. Oral will / b. Conversion into deed

b. Conversion into deed

1 The oral will, including the place, day, month and year, must be written down immediately by one of the witnesses, then signed by both and lodged without delay with a judicial authority together with a declaration that the testator was in full possession of his or her testamentary capacity and that he or she informed them of his or her will in the special circumstances prevailing at that time.

2 The two witnesses may instead have the will recorded by a judicial authority along with the same declaration.

3 If the testator makes his or her oral will while on military service, an officer with the rank of captain or higher may take the place of the judicial authority.

Art. 508 A. Wills / I. Drawing up a will / 4. Oral will / c. Loss of validity

c. Loss of validity

If the testator subsequently has the opportunity to draw up his or her will in another form, the oral will ceases to be valid 14 days after such opportunity arises.

Art. 509 A. Wills / II. Revocation and destruction / 1. Revocation

II. Revocation and destruction

1. Revocation

1 The testator may revoke his or her will at any time in one of the forms envisaged for drawing it up.

2 Such revocation may apply to all or part of the will.

Art. 510 A. Wills / II. Revocation and destruction / 2. Destruction

2. Destruction

1 The testator may revoke his or her will by destroying the deed.

2 If the deed is destroyed by others wilfully or by accident, the will likewise becomes void inasmuch as its content may no longer be ascertained precisely and completely; claims for damages are reserved.

Art. 511 A. Wills / II. Revocation and destruction / 3. Subsequent wills

3. Subsequent wills

1 If the testator makes a will without expressly revoking a previous will, the later will supersedes the earlier unless it is manifestly no more than a codicil thereto.

2 Likewise, a bequest of a specific object is revoked if the testator subsequently makes a new disposition of the same object that is incompatible with the previous disposition.

Art. 512 B. Contracts of succession / I. Execution

B. Contracts of succession

I. Execution

1 In order to be valid, a contract of succession must meet the same formal requirements as a will executed as a public deed.

2 The contracting parties must simultaneously declare their intentions to the public official and sign the deed before him or her and two witnesses.

Art. 513 B. Contracts of succession / II. Revocation / 1. Inter vivos / a. By contract and by will

II. Revocation

1. Inter vivos

a. By contract and by will

1 The contract of succession may be revoked at any time by written agreement between the parties.

2 The testator may unilaterally revoke the naming of an heir or a legacy provided the heir or legatee is guilty of conduct constituting grounds for disinheritance after the contract was concluded.

3 The unilateral revocation must be done in one of the forms prescribed for drawing up wills.

Art. 514 B. Contracts of succession / II. Revocation / 1. Inter vivos / b. By withdrawal from the contract

b. By withdrawal from the contract

A person entitled to benefits inter vivos under a contract of succession may declare his or her withdrawal from the contract in accordance with the provisions of the Code of Obligations1 in the event of failure to perform such benefits or to furnish security for them.


1 SR 220

Art. 515 B. Contracts of succession / II. Revocation / 2. Predeceased heir

2. Predeceased heir

1 Where the heir or legatee does not survive the testator, the contract becomes void.

2 Where at the time of the heir’s death the testator has been enriched as a result of the contract of succession, unless otherwise provided, the heirs of the deceased may demand restitution of the amount involved.

Art. 516 C. Restriction of testamentary freedom

C. Restriction of testamentary freedom

If a testator becomes subject to a restriction of testamentary freedom after he or she has made a testamentary disposition, the disposition is not annulled but is subject to action in abatement.


  Section Five: Executors

Art. 517 A. Appointment of executors

A. Appointment of executors

1 In the will, the testator may appoint one or more persons with capacity to act to execute the will.

2 The probate authority shall notify these persons of the appointment ex officio and they must state whether they accept it within 14 days of such notification, silence being deemed tacit acceptance.

3 They are entitled to adequate recompense for their activities.

Art. 518 B. Function of an executor

B. Function of an executor

1 Unless otherwise provided by the testator, the executors have the same rights and duties as an official estate administrator.

2 The executors’ function is to represent the testator’s wishes and, in particular, to administer the estate, settle debts left by the testator, distribute legacies and divide the estate in accordance with the testator’s instructions or as required by law.

3 Where more than one executor has been appointed, these powers are exercised jointly, unless the testator has provided otherwise.


  Section Six: Declaration of Invalidity and Abatement of Dispositions

Art. 519 A. Action for declaration of invalidity / I. On grounds of lack of testamentary capacity, lack of free will, unlawfulness or immorality

A. Action for declaration of invalidity

I. On grounds of lack of testamentary capacity, lack of free will, unlawfulness or immorality

1 Where contested, a testamentary disposition may be declared invalid:

1.
if it was made by the testator at a time when he or she lacked testamentary capacity;
2.
if it is the product of a lack of free will;
3.
if its content or a condition attached to it is immoral or unlawful.

2 An action of declaration of invalidity may be brought by any interested heir or legatee.

Art. 520 A. Action for declaration of invalidity / II. On grounds of formal defect / 1. In general

II. On grounds of formal defect

1. In general1

1 If the testamentary disposition is formally defective, it is declared invalid on being contested before a court.

2 If the formal defect consists in the certain persons being party to the execution of the disposition who or whose family members are beneficiaries under the testamentary disposition, only the clauses relating to those beneficiaries shall be declared invalid.

3 The right of action is governed by the same provisions as apply in the event of a lack of testamentary capacity.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 23 June 1995, in force since 1 Jan. 1996 (AS 1995 4882; BBl 1994 III 516, V 607).

Art. 520a1A. Action for declaration of invalidity / II. On grounds of formal defect / 2. In holographic wills

2. In holographic wills

If the formal defect in a holographic will consists in the day, month or year not being indicated correctly or at all, the will may be declared invalid only if the precise date cannot be ascertained in some other manner and is necessary in order to determine the testator’s testamentary capacity, the chronological order of multiple wills or any other issue affecting the validity of the will.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 23 June 1995, in force since 1 Jan. 1996 (AS 1995 4882; BBl 1994 III 516, V 607).

Art. 521 A. Action for declaration of invalidity / III. Prescription

III. Prescription

1 The right to bring an action of declaration of invalidity prescribes one year after the contesting party learned of the will and the ground for nullity and in any event a maximum of ten years after the commencement of probate proceedings.

2 In all cases, the right to bring an action on grounds of lack of testamentary capacity, immorality or unlawfulness against a beneficiary acting in bad faith does not prescribe until 30 years have elapsed.

3 Invalidity may be invoked as a defence at any time.

Art. 522 B. Action in abatement / I. Requirements / 1. In general

B. Action in abatement

I. Requirements

1. In general

1 Where the testator has exceeded his or her testamentary freedom, those heirs who do not receive the full value of their statutory entitlement may sue to have the disposition abated to the permitted amount.

2 Clauses contained in testamentary dispositions relating to the entitlements of the statutory heirs are deemed merely to be instructions for dividing the estate unless it is evident from the disposition that the testator intended otherwise.

Art. 523 B. Action in abatement / I. Requirements / 2. Bequests in favour of heirs with a statutory entitlement

2. Bequests in favour of heirs with a statutory entitlement

Where a testamentary disposition contains legacies in favour of several heirs with a statutory entitlement and the testator has exceeded his or her testamentary freedom, such legacies shall be abated among the co-heirs in proportion to the amounts by which they exceed each co-heir’s statutory entitlement.

Art. 524 B. Action in abatement / I. Requirements / 3. Rights of creditors

3. Rights of creditors

1 Where the testator has exceeded his or her testamentary freedom to the detriment of an heir and the latter fails to bring a action in abatement despite being instructed to do so by the bankruptcy administrators or by creditors holding unpaid debt certificates on succession, the administrators or creditors themselves may bring an action in abatement for the amount necessary to cover their claims within the same time limit that applies to the heir.

2 The same right applies in the case of a disinheritance not contested by the person disinherited.

Art. 525 B. Action in abatement / II. Effect / 1. Of abatement in general

II. Effect

1. Of abatement in general

1 Abatement is applied in equal proportion in respect of all named heirs and legatees unless it is evident from the disposition that the testator intended otherwise.

2 Where the abatement applies to a legacy whose beneficiary is also the obligor of other legacies, subject to the same proviso such beneficiary may request that those other legacies be abated proportionately.

Art. 526 B. Action in abatement / II. Effect / 2. On specific legacies

2. On specific legacies

Where a specific legacy that cannot be divided without loss of value is to be abated, the legatee may either claim it and pay the balance or claim the disposable amount in lieu of the object.

Art. 527 B. Action in abatement / II. Effect / 3. On dispositions inter vivos / a. Cases

3. On dispositions inter vivos

a. Cases

The following are subject to abatement in the same manner as testamentary dispositions:

1.
advances against a person’s share of an inheritance made in the form of wedding gifts, settlements or assignments of assets, to the extent these are not subject to hotchpot;
2.
compensation payments in settlement of future rights of inheritance;
3.
gifts that were freely revocable by the deceased or made in the five years prior to his or her death, with the exception of customary occasional gifts;
4.
assets alienated by the deceased with the obvious intention of circumventing the limitations on his or her testamentary freedom.
Art. 528 B. Action in abatement / II. Effect / 3. On dispositions inter vivos / b. Restitution

b. Restitution

1 A person acting in good faith has a duty of restitution only to the extent that he or she is still enriched by such transactions with the deceased at the time of succession.

2 Where benefits conferred under a contract of succession are subject to abatement, the beneficiary is entitled to reclaim a proportionate amount of the counter-performance made to the testator.

Art. 529 B. Action in abatement / II. Effect / 4. On assurance claims

4. On assurance claims

Where a life assurance claim maturing on the death of the deceased was established in favour of a third party by a disposition inter vivos or by a testamentary disposition or was transferred by the deceased during his or her lifetime to a third party without valuable consideration, such claim is subject to abatement at its redemption value.

Art. 530 B. Action in abatement / II. Effect / 5. On usufruct and annuities

5. On usufruct and annuities

If the testator has encumbered the estate with rights of usufruct and annuities such that their capitalised value over their probable duration exceeds the disposable part of the estate, the heirs are entitled either to seek proportionate abatement of such rights or to redeem them by surrendering the disposable part of the estate to the beneficiaries.

Art. 5311B. Action in abatement / II. Effect / 6. On naming of remaindermen

6. On naming of remaindermen

The naming of a remainderman in respect of an heir entitled to a statutory entitlement is invalid as to that part of the estate; the provision on issue who are incapable of judgement is reserved.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 532 B. Action in abatement / III. Order of abatement

III. Order of abatement

Abatement applies first to testamentary dispositions and thereafter to dispositions inter vivos in reverse chronological order until the statutory entitlement has been reconstituted.

Art. 533 B. Action in abatement / IV. Prescription

IV. Prescription

1 A claim in abatement prescribes one year after the date on which the heirs learned of the infringement of their rights and in any event after ten years have elapsed since the succession, in the case of testamentary disposition, or since the testator’s death, in the case of other dispositions.

2 If the declaration of the invalidity of a later disposition revives an earlier one, the prescriptive periods begin on the date on which invalidity was declared.

3 The entitlement to abatement may be invoked as a defence at any time.


  Section Seven: Claims under Contracts of Succession

Art. 534 A. Claims in respect of lifetime transfers

A. Claims in respect of lifetime transfers

1 If the testator transfers his or her property during his or her lifetime to the contractual heir, the latter may arrange for a public inventory to be taken.

2 Where the testator has not transferred all his or her property or has acquired property since the transfer, except where otherwise provided the contract applies only to the property transferred.

3 Where such transfer takes place during the testator’s lifetime, except where otherwise provided all rights and obligations arising from the contract pass to the heirs of the named heir.

Art. 535 B. Hotchpot in the case of renunciation of inheritance / I. Abatement

B. Hotchpot in the case of renunciation of inheritance

I. Abatement

1 If the testator during his or her lifetime conferred benefits on a renouncing heir that exceed that heir’s share of the estate, his or her co-heirs may request abatement.

2 However, such benefits are subject to abatement only to the extent they exceed the statutory entitlement of the renouncing heir.

3 Allowance is made for them according to the provisions governing hotchpot.

Art. 536 B. Hotchpot in the case of renunciation of inheritance / II. Reimbursement

II. Reimbursement

If as a result of abatement a renouncing heir is obliged to reimburse the estate, he or she has the choice of either taking the reimbursement upon himself or of placing the entire benefit into hotchpot and participating in the division as if he or she had never renounced.


  Division Two: Succession

  Title Fifteen: Commencement of the Succession Process

Art. 537 A. Requirements for the deceased

A. Requirements for the deceased

1 Succession commences on the death of the deceased.

2 Insofar as dispositions and divisions made during deceased's lifetime are relevant under law of succession, they are taken into account according to the condition of the estate as at the time of his or her death.

Art. 538 B. Place where succession commences

B. Place where succession commences1

1 The succession process commences in respect of the entire estate at the deceased’s last domicile.

2 ...2


1 Amended by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, in force since 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).
2 Repealed by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, with effect from 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).

Art. 539 C. Requirements for the heirs / I. Capacity / 1. Legal capacity

C. Requirements for the heirs

I. Capacity

1. Legal capacity

1 Every person is capable of being an heir and acquiring property by testamentary disposition unless by law he or she is deemed incapable of inheritance.

2 Bequests with a designated purpose to groups of persons not constituting a legal entity are acquired by all such persons individually with an obligation to use them as prescribed or, where this is not practical, give rise to a trust.

Art. 540 C. Requirements for the heirs / I. Capacity / 2. Unworthiness to inherit / a. Grounds

2. Unworthiness to inherit

a. Grounds

1 A person is unworthy of inheriting or acquiring anything by a testamentary disposition if:

1.
he or she wilfully and unlawfully caused or attempted to cause the death of the person now deceased;
2.
he or she wilfully and unlawfully rendered the person now deceased permanently incapable of making a testamentary disposition;
3.
by malice, coercion or threat he or she induced the person now deceased to make or revoke a testamentary disposition or prevented him or her from doing so;
4.
he or she wilfully and unlawfully eliminated or invalidated a testamentary disposition in such a manner as to prevent the person now deceased from drawing up a new one.

2 Unworthiness to inherit does not apply if the person now deceased has forgiven the person concerned.

Art. 541 C. Requirements for the heirs / I. Capacity / 2. Unworthiness to inherit / b. Effect on issue

b. Effect on issue

1 Unworthiness to inherit applies only to the person concerned.

2 His or her issue inherit from the deceased as if the person unworthy to inherit were predeceased.

Art. 542 C. Requirements for the heirs / II. Capacity to inherit on succession / 1. As heir

II. Capacity to inherit on succession

1. As heir

1 In order to inherit, an heir must be alive and capable of inheriting at the time of succession.

2 If an heir dies after commencement of succession, his or her rights of inheritance in respect of the estate pass to his or her own heirs.

Art. 543 C. Requirements for the heirs / II. Capacity to inherit on succession / 2. As legatee

2. As legatee

1 A legatee surviving the testator and capable of inheriting acquires a claim to the legacy.

2 If he or she dies before the testator, his or her legacy is extinguished in favour of the person who would have been obliged to deliver the legacy to him, unless some other intention is evident from the disposition.

Art. 544 C. Requirements for the heirs / II. Capacity to inherit on succession / 3. Unborn child

3. Unborn child

1 A child is capable of inheriting from the moment of conception onwards, providing he or she is subsequently born alive.

1bis If it is required to protect the child's interests, the child protection authority shall establish a deputyship.1

2 If the child is stillborn, it is disregarded for inheritance purposes.2


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 545 C. Requirements for the heirs / II. Capacity to inherit on succession / 4. Remaindermen

4. Remaindermen

1 The testator may bequeath his or her estate or part thereof to a person not yet living when succession commences by designating such person a remainderman.

2 Where no provisional heir is named, the statutory heirs are deemed to be the provisional heirs.

Art. 546 D. Presumption of death / I. Inheriting from persons presumed dead / 1. Devolution against security

D. Presumption of death

I. Inheriting from persons presumed dead

1. Devolution against security

1 Where a person has been declared presumed dead, before his or her heirs or legatees succeed to the estate, they must furnish security for the restitution of the property to those with a prevailing claim or to the missing person himself.

2 Such security shall be furnished for five years in the case of disappearance in life-threatening circumstances and for 15 years in the case of absence without sign of life, but never beyond the date on which the missing person would have become 100 years old.

3 The five-year period runs from the date on which the estate is transferred and the 15-year period from the last sign of life.

Art. 547 D. Presumption of death / I. Inheriting from persons presumed dead / 2. Annulment of presumption of death and restitution

2. Annulment of presumption of death and restitution

1 If the person who is presumed dead returns or other parties assert prevailing claims to the estate, those put in possession of the estate must return it according to the rules governing possession.

2 Provided they acted in good faith, they are liable to parties with prevailing claims only during the period in which action may be brought for reclamation of the estate.

Art. 548 D. Presumption of death / II. Succession rights of persons presumed dead

II. Succession rights of persons presumed dead

1 If it is impossible to determine whether an heir is alive or dead when succession commences because he or she has disappeared, his or her share of the inheritance is placed under official administration.

2 Those who would succeed to the missing heir’s share if he or she were dead may request the court to declare the heir presumed dead one year after his or her disappearance in life-threatening circumstances or five years after the last sign of life and, once such declaration has been made, may apply for release of their shares of his or her inheritance.

3 Such shares are released according to the provisions governing release to the heirs of persons presumed dead.

Art. 549 D. Presumption of death / III. Correlation of the two cases

III. Correlation of the two cases

1 If the heirs of the person presumed dead are already in possession of his or her property and an inheritance passes to him or her, his or her co-heirs may invoke this fact and request that such inheritance be released to them without need for a second declaration of presumed death.

2 The heirs of the person presumed dead may likewise invoke a declaration of presumed death obtained by the co-heirs.

Art. 550 D. Presumption of death / IV. Procedure ex officio

IV. Procedure ex officio

1 Where the missing person’s property or succession rights have been under official administration for ten years or more, or he or she would have reached the age of 100, at the request of the competent authority the declaration of presumed death is pronounced ex officio.

2 If no rightful heirs come forward during the public notice period, the property of the person presumed dead passes to the state authority with right to succeed or, if he or she was never resident in Switzerland, to the canton of origin.

3 The local authority or canton concerned has the same duty of restitution as those put in possession of the estate towards the person presumed dead and parties with prevailing claims.


  Title Sixteen: Effect of Succession

  Chapter One: Measures to Safeguard Succession

Art. 551 A. In general

A. In general

1 The competent authority must of its own accord take all measures necessary to ensure proper succession.1

2 In the cases envisaged by law, in particular, such measures include sealing the estate, drawing up the inventory, appointing the estate administrators and reading out the wills of the deceased.

3 ...2


1 Amended by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, in force since 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).
2 Repealed by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, with effect from 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).

Art. 552 B. Sealing the estate

B. Sealing the estate

The order to seal the estate is given whenever provided for by cantonal law.

Art. 553 C. Inventory

C. Inventory

1 The order to draw up an inventory is given:

1.
where an heir is under guardianship or is to be made a ward of court;
2.
where an heir is permanently absent and without representation;
3.
at the request of one of the heirs;
4.
where an adult heir is or is to be made subject to a general deputyship.1

2 The inventory is drawn up in accordance with the provisions of cantonal law and normally must be completed within two months of the death of the deceased.

3 Cantonal legislation may require that an inventory be drawn up in other cases.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 554 D. Estate administrators / I. In general

D. Estate administrators

I. In general

1 Estate administrators are appointed:

1.
where such an appointment is in the best interests of an heir who is permanently absent and without representation;
2.
where none of the claimants may adequately establish his or her succession rights or the existence of an heir is uncertain;
3.
where not all heirs are known;
4.
in special cases provided for by law.

2 Where the deceased had named an executor, administration of the estate is entrusted to him or her.

3 Where the deceased was subject to a deputyship that covers asset management, the deputy is responsible for administering the estate unless other instructions apply.1


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 555 D. Estate administrators / II. In the case of unknown heirs

II. In the case of unknown heirs

1 If the authority is uncertain as to whether the deceased is survived by heirs or whether it is aware of all the heirs, the authority must by appropriate public means call on all persons with succession rights to come forward and claim them within one year.

2 If no such person comes forward during this time and if no heirs are known to the authority, the estate passes to the state authority with right to succeed, subject to any action for recovery of inheritance.

Art. 556 E. Probate proceedings / I. Duty to submit the will

E. Probate proceedings

I. Duty to submit the will

1 If the deceased left a will, this must be submitted to the authority without delay even if it appears to be invalid.

2 The public official by whom the will was recorded or with whom it was deposited or any other person who had custody of the will or found it among the personal effects of the deceased is personally responsible on learning of the testator’s death for ensuring that the will is submitted to the authority.

3 Once the will has been submitted, the authority must, where feasible after hearing all interested parties, either release the estate to the statutory heirs on a provisional basis or appoint estate administrators.

Art. 557 E. Probate proceedings / II. Reading the will

II. Reading the will

1 The testator’s will must be opened and read out by the competent authority within one month of its submission.

2 All heirs known to the authority are summoned to attend the reading.

3 If the testator left more than one will, all are to be submitted to the authority and opened and read out by it.

Art. 558 E. Probate proceedings / III. Notification of interested parties

III. Notification of interested parties

1 At the estate’s expense, all interested parties receive a copy of the provisions of the will as relate to them.

2 Legatees of unknown whereabouts are informed by appropriate public notice.

Art. 559 E. Probate proceedings / IV. Release of the estate

IV. Release of the estate

1 One month after notification of the interested parties, at the request of the named heirs the probate authority issues such persons with a certificate confirming them as heirs, subject to action of declaration of invalidity and for recovery of inheritance, providing their entitlement has not expressly been challenged by the statutory heirs or the legatees of an earlier will.

2 At the same time the estate administrator will be instructed, where applicable, to release the estate into their possession.


  Chapter Two: Vesting of the Estate

Art. 560 A. Vesting / I. Heirs

A. Vesting

I. Heirs

1 On the death of the deceased, the estate in its entirety vests by operation of law in the heirs.

2 Subject to the statutory exceptions, the deceased’s claims, rights of ownership, limited rights in rem and rights of possession automatically pass to the heirs and the debts of the deceased become the personal debts of the heirs.

3 Vesting in the named heirs takes effect retroactively from the date on which the succession process commenced and the statutory heirs must relinquish the estate to them according to the rules governing possession.

Art. 5611A. Vesting / II. ...

II. ...


1 Repealed by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, with effect from 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 562 A. Vesting / III. Legatees / 1. Vesting

III. Legatees

1. Vesting

1 The legatees have a personal claim against the obligors of their legacies or, where no-one is specifically named as such, against the legal or named heirs.

2 Unless otherwise provided by testamentary disposition, the claim becomes due once the obligor has accepted the inheritance or is no longer able to disclaim it.

3 If the heirs fail to fulfil their obligation, they may be sued for release of the bequeathed property or, where the legacy pertains to performance of some action, for damages.

Art. 563 A. Vesting / III. Legatees / 2. Object

2. Object

1 Where the bequest to the legatee is a usufruct or annuity or other recurring benefit, unless otherwise stipulated, his or her claim is determined according to the provisions of property law and the Code of Obligations.

2 If the legacy is a life assurance claim maturing on the death of the testator, the legatee is entitled to assert that claim directly.

Art. 564 A. Vesting / III. Legatees / 3. Relationship between creditors and legatees

3. Relationship between creditors and legatees

1 The claims of the testator’s creditors precede those of legatees.

2 The claims of the heir’s creditors rank equally with those of the testator’s creditors, provided the heir acquired the inheritance without reservation.

Art. 565 A. Vesting / III. Legatees / 4. Abatement

4. Abatement

1 If, after the legacies have been distributed, the heirs pay debts of the estate that were previously unknown to them, they are entitled to reimbursement from the legatees of an amount corresponding to the proportionate abatement of such legacies that the heirs could have claimed.

2 However, the legatees may be held liable only in the amount by which they are enriched at the time such reimbursement is demanded.

Art. 566 B. Disclaimer / I. Declaration / 1. Right to renounce

B. Disclaimer

I. Declaration

1. Right to renounce

1 The legal and named heirs are entitled to disclaim the inheritance passing to them.

2 There is a presumption of a disclaimer if at the time of his or her death the deceased had been officially declared insolvent or was manifestly insolvent.

Art. 567 B. Disclaimer / I. Declaration / 2. Time limit / a. In general

2. Time limit

a. In general

1 The time limit for a disclaimer is three months.

2 For statutory heirs, this limit begins on the date on which they learned of the death, unless they can show that they did not learn of their succession rights until later, and for named heirs it begins on the date on which they received official notification of the testator’s disposition.

Art. 568 B. Disclaimer / I. Declaration / 2. Time limit / b. In the case of an inventory

b. In the case of an inventory

If an inventory has been drawn up as a precautionary measure, the disclaimer time limit for all heirs begins on the date on which the authority notified them that the inventory was complete.

Art. 569 B. Disclaimer / I. Declaration / 3. Passing of right to disclaim

3. Passing of right to disclaim

1 If an heir dies before disclaiming or accepting an inheritance, the right to disclaim passes to his or her heirs.

2 For such heirs, the disclaimer time limit begins on the date on which they learned that the inheritance passed to the deceased heir and ends no sooner than the date on which the time limit for disclaiming the inheritance from the deceased heir expires.

3 Where such heirs disclaim the inheritance and it passes to other heirs who previously had no succession rights, the disclaimer time limit for the latter begins on the date on which they learned of the disclaimer.

Art. 570 B. Disclaimer / I. Declaration / 4. Form

4. Form

1 An heir must declare his or her disclaimer orally or in writing to the competent authority.

2 It must be unconditional and without reservation.

3 The authority keeps an official record of disclaimers.

Art. 571 B. Disclaimer / II. Forfeiture of right to disclaim

II. Forfeiture of right to disclaim

1 If the heir fails to declare that he or she disclaims the inheritance within the relevant time limit, he or she acquires it without reservation.

2 Where an heir has interfered in the affairs of the estate before expiry of the disclaimer time limit or has acted in a manner not conducive to administering the estate or maintaining the deceased’s business activities, or where he or she has appropriated or concealed objects belonging to the estate, he or she is no longer entitled to disclaim the inheritance.

Art. 572 B. Disclaimer / III. Disclaimer by one co-heir

III. Disclaimer by one co-heir

1 Where the deceased has not made a testamentary disposition and one of two or more heirs disclaims the inheritance, his or her share of the estate passes to the other heirs as if he or she had predeceased.

2 Where the deceased has made testamentary disposition, any share of the estate disclaimed by a named heir passes to the testator’s nearest statutory heirs, unless other intentions on the part of the testator are evident from the disposition.

Art. 573 B. Disclaimer / IV. Disclaimer by all the nearest heirs / 1. In general

IV. Disclaimer by all the nearest heirs

1. In general

1 Where the inheritance is disclaimed by all the nearest heirs, the estate is liquidated by the bankruptcy office.

2 If liquidation produces a surplus after payment of debts, this passes to those entitled to inherit as if they had not disclaimed it.

Art. 574 B. Disclaimer / IV. Disclaimer by all the nearest heirs / 2. Entitlement of surviving spouse

2. Entitlement of surviving spouse

If the deceased’s issue have disclaimed the inheritance, the authority notifies the disclaimer to the surviving spouse, who is entitled to declare acceptance within one month.

Art. 575 B. Disclaimer / IV. Disclaimer by all the nearest heirs / 3. Disclaimer in favour of subsequent heirs

3. Disclaimer in favour of subsequent heirs

1 When disclaiming the inheritance, the heirs may request that it be offered to their subsequent heirs before the estate is liquidated.

2 In this event, the authority informs the subsequent heirs that the preceding heirs have disclaimed, and if the former fail to declare their acceptance of the inheritance within one month, they are likewise deemed to have disclaimed it.

Art. 576 B. Disclaimer / V. Extension of time limit

V. Extension of time limit

Where there is good cause, the competent authority may grant the legal and named heirs an extension of the time limit or set a new one.

Art. 577 B. Disclaimer / VI. Disclaimer of a legacy

VI. Disclaimer of a legacy

Where a legatee disclaims a legacy, it becomes void in favour of the obligor, unless other intentions on the part of the testator are evident from his or her disposition.

Art. 578 B. Disclaimer / VII. Security for the heir’s creditors

VII. Security for the heir’s creditors

1 Where an overindebted heir has disclaimed an inheritance in order to withhold it from his or her creditors, the latter or the bankruptcy administrators may challenge the disclaimer within six months unless their claims are secured.

2 If their challenge is upheld, the inheritance is placed in official liquidation.

3 Any surplus serves first to satisfy the challenging creditors and any balance remaining after redemption of the other debts passes to the heirs in whose favour the disclaimer was made.

Art. 579 B. Disclaimer / VIII. Liability in the event of disclaimer

VIII. Liability in the event of disclaimer

1 Where the deceased was insolvent and his or her heirs disclaim the inheritance, they remain liable to his or her creditors to the extent that in the five years prior to his or her death they received property or assets from him or her which on division of the estate would have been subject to hotchpot.

2 The endowment of newly-weds according to local custom and the costs of raising and educating children are not affected by such liability.

3 Heirs acting in good faith are liable only to the extent they are still enriched.


  Chapter Three: Public Inventory

Art. 580 A. Requirements

A. Requirements

1 Any heir entitled to disclaim his or her inheritance has the right to request a public inventory.

2 The request must be made to the competent authority within one month in the same form as the disclaimer.

3 A request made by one heir is also valid for the others.

Art. 581 B. Procedure / I. Inventory

B. Procedure

I. Inventory

1 The public inventory is drawn up by the competent authority in accordance with the provisions of cantonal law and consists of a list of all the assets and debts of the estate, together with an appraisal of the value of each item in the inventory.

2 Any person able to provide information on the financial circumstances of the deceased is personally obliged to give the authority all the information it requires.

3 In particular, the heirs must inform the authority of any debts of the deceased that are known to them.

Art. 582 B. Procedure / II. Formal call to account

II. Formal call to account

1 In the course of drawing up the inventory, the authority shall make a formal call to account whereby appropriate public notices are issued calling on all creditors and debtors of the deceased, including creditors under a surety, to come forward and register their claims and debts within a specified time limit.

2 Such notices must alert the creditors to the consequences of any failure to register.

3 The time limit for registering must not be earlier than one month from the date of the first public notice.

Art. 583 B. Procedure / III. Inclusion ex officio

III. Inclusion ex officio

1 Claims and debts evident from the public registers or from the papers of the deceased are included ex officio.

2 The debtors and creditors must be notified of any such inclusion.

Art. 584 B. Procedure / IV. Result

IV. Result

1 On expiry of the published time limit, the inventory is closed and made available for perusal by all interested parties for at least one month.

2 The costs are borne by the estate and, where this is insufficient, by the heirs who requested the inventory.

Art. 585 C. Situation of the heirs during the inventory / I. Administration

C. Situation of the heirs during the inventory

I. Administration

1 While the inventory is being drawn up, only the necessary administrative actions may be taken.

2 Where the authority authorises an heir to continue the deceased’s business activities, the co-heirs may request that security be furnished.

Art. 586 C. Situation of the heirs during the inventory / II. Debt enforcement, litigation, prescription

II. Debt enforcement, litigation, prescription

1 While the inventory is being drawn up, no action may be taken to enforce the debts of the deceased.

2 ...1

3 Except in urgent matters, court proceedings may neither be commenced nor continued.


1 Repealed by Annex No 3 of the FA of 15 June 2018 (Revision of the Law on Prescription), with effect from 1 Jan. 2020 (AS 2018 5343; BBl 2014 235).

Art. 587 D. Effect / I. Time limit for declaration of intention

D. Effect

I. Time limit for declaration of intention

1 Once the inventory is closed, all the heirs are requested to declare within one month their intentions with regard to acquiring the inheritance due to them.

2 Where justified in the circumstances, the competent authority may set a further time limit for obtaining appraisals, settling disputed claims and the like.

Art. 588 D. Effect / II. Declaration of intention

II. Declaration of intention

1 During the set time limit, an heir may disclaim his or her inheritance or request official liquidation or accept the inheritance either subject to public inventory or without reservation.

2 Where an heir makes no declaration, he or she is deemed to have accepted the inheritance subject to public inventory.

Art. 589 D. Effect / III. Effects of acceptance subject to public inventory / 1. Liability as per inventory

III. Effects of acceptance subject to public inventory

1. Liability as per inventory

1 Where an heir accepts the inheritance subject to public inventory, the debts of the deceased listed in the inventory and the assets pass to him or her.

2 The acquisition of the inheritance with all attendant rights and obligations takes effect retroactively from the date on which the succession process commenced.

3 The heir is liable for debts listed in the inventory both with the inheritance and with his or her own assets.

Art. 590 D. Effect / III. Effects of acceptance subject to public inventory / 2. Liability beyond the inventory

2. Liability beyond the inventory

1 The heirs are not liable either personally or with the inheritance towards creditors of the estate whose claims were not included in the inventory because the creditors failed to register them in time.

2 Where such failure to register claims in the inventory was through no fault of the creditor or his or her claims were not included in the inventory despite having been registered, the heir is liable to the extent he or she is enriched by the inheritance.

3 In all cases, creditors may assert claims to the extent these are secured by a lien on the estate assets.

Art. 591 E. Liability for debts subject to a surety

E. Liability for debts subject to a surety

Any debts under a surety given by the deceased are listed separately in the inventory and may be asserted against an heir, even where he or she accepts the inheritance, only in the amount that would be allocated to the surety debt if all debts of the estate were to be redeemed under the rules governing bankruptcy.

Art. 592 F. Acquisition by a state authority

F. Acquisition by a state authority

Where an estate passes to a state authority, a formal call to account is made ex officio and the state authority is liable for the debts of the estate only in the amount of the assets it has inherited from the estate.


  Chapter Four: Official Liquidation

Art. 593 A. Requirements / I. At the request of an heir

A. Requirements

I. At the request of an heir

1 Rather than disclaim the inheritance or accept it subject to public inventory, each heir is entitled to request official liquidation.

2 However, such request may not be granted if at least one co-heir accepts the inheritance.

3 In the event of official liquidation, the heirs are not liable for the debts of the estate.

Art. 594 A. Requirements / II. At the request of the deceased’s creditors

II. At the request of the deceased’s creditors

1 Where the deceased’s creditors have good cause to fear that their claims will not be met and such claims are not satisfied or secured at their request, within three months of the death of the deceased or the reading of the will they may demand the official liquidation of the estate.

2 Subject to the same conditions, legatees may request provisional measures by way of security.

Art. 595 B. Procedure / I. Administration

B. Procedure

I. Administration

1 The official liquidation is carried out by the competent authority or by one or more estate administrators acting at the authority’s behest.

2 It begins with the taking of an inventory and the attendant formal call to account.

3 The estate administrator is under the authority’s supervision and the heirs may appeal to the authority against any measures taken or planned by the administrator.

Art. 596 B. Procedure / liquidation

II. Ordinary

liquidation

1 For the purpose of liquidation, any business activities of the deceased still in operation are brought to a close, his or her obligations are performed, his or her claims are called in, his or her legacies are distributed where possible, his or her rights and duties are determined at law, where necessary, and his or her assets are converted into cash.

2 Land formerly belonging to the deceased is sold at public auction; it may be disposed of by private sale only with the consent of all the heirs.

3 The heirs are entitled even during the liquidation process to request that some or all of the objects and monies that are not required for the liquidation be released into their possession.

Art. 597 B. Procedure / III. Liquidation by the bankruptcy office

III. Liquidation by the bankruptcy office

If the estate is overindebted, its liquidation is carried out by the bankruptcy office in accordance with the provisions governing bankruptcy.


  Chapter Five: Action for Recovery of Inheritance

Art. 598 A. Requirements

A. Requirements

1 A person who believes that, as a legal or named heir, he or she has a better claim than the current possessor to an estate or a part thereof may assert his or her claim by bringing an action for recovery of inheritance.

2 ...1


1 Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 599 B. Effect

B. Effect

1 If the claim is upheld, the possessor must relinquish the estate or the part thereof to the claimant in accordance with the rules governing possession.

2 The defendant cannot invoke adverse possession in respect of property belonging to the estate.

Art. 600 C. Prescription

C. Prescription

1 The right to bring an action for recovery of inheritance against a defendant acting in good faith prescribes one year after the date on which the claimant learned that the property was possessed by the defendant and that he or she has a better claim to it, but in all cases ten years after the death of the deceased or the date on which the will was read.

2 The prescriptive period for the right to bring an action against a defendant acting in bad faith is always 30 years.

Art. 601 D. Action by a legatee

D. Action by a legatee

The right of a legatee to bring an action prescribes ten years after notification of the testamentary disposition or from the subsequent date on which the legacy became due.


  Title Seventeen: Division of the Estate

  Chapter One: Community of Heirs prior to Division

Art. 602 A. Effect of succession / I. Community of heirs

A. Effect of succession

I. Community of heirs

1 Where several heirs inherit the estate, on succession and until such time as it is divided they form a community in respect of all rights and obligations of the estate.

2 They become joint owners of the property belonging to the estate and have joint power of disposal over the rights of the estate, subject to contractual or statutory powers of representation and administration.

3 At the request of one co-heir, the competent authority may appoint a representative of the community of heirs until the estate is divided.

Art. 603 A. Effect of succession / II. Liability of the heirs

II. Liability of the heirs

1 The heirs are jointly and severally liable for the debts of the deceased.

2 The appropriate compensation due to children or grandchildren for contributions made to the household they shared with the deceased must be added to the debts of the estate unless this would render the estate overindebted.1


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 6 Oct. 1972, in force since 15 Feb. 1973 (AS 1973 93; BBl 1970 I 805, 1971 I 737).

Art. 604 B. Right to division

B. Right to division

1 Any heir may at any time request that the estate be divided unless he or she is under a contractual or statutory obligation to remain a member of the community of heirs.

2 On application by an heir, the court may order a temporary deferral of the division of the estate or specific parts thereof where immediate division would substantially impair their value.

3 Where one heir is insolvent, his or her co-heirs may apply for provisional measures to secure their own claims immediately upon succession.

Art. 605 C. Deferral of division

C. Deferral of division

1 If on succession the rights of an unborn child need to be taken into consideration, the division of the estate must be deferred until the child is born.

2 In the interim, the child’s mother is entitled to enjoy the benefits of the joint estate to the extent required for her maintenance.

Art. 606 D. Claims of household members

D. Claims of household members

Heirs who were members of the household of and maintained by the deceased at the time of his or her death may demand that they be maintained for a further month at the estate’s expense.


  Chapter Two: Method of Division

Art. 607 A. In general

A. In general

1 Statutory heirs must divide the estate among themselves and with the named heirs according to the same principles.

2 Except where provided otherwise, they are free to decide on the method of division.

3 Co-heirs in possession of estate property or in debt to the deceased must provide precise information regarding such circumstances prior to the division.

Art. 608 B. Instructions concerning the division / I. Testamentary disposition

B. Instructions concerning the division

I. Testamentary disposition

1 The testator is entitled by means of testamentary disposition to give his or her heirs instructions concerning the division and the formation of portions.

2 Such instructions are binding on the heirs, subject to measures to balance out the portions in the event of an inequality not intended by the testator.

3 Unless other intentions on the part of the testator are evident from his or her disposition, any bequest of a given part of the estate to one particular heir is deemed to be merely an instruction concerning the division rather than a specific legacy.

Art. 609 B. Instructions concerning the division / II. Assistance from the authorities

II. Assistance from the authorities

1 At the request of a creditor who has acquired or distrained an inheritance that has passed to an heir or who holds unpaid debt certificates against him or her, the authorities must assist in the division in place of that heir.

2 Cantonal law may provide for official intervention in the division process in other cases.

Art. 610 C. Performing the division / I. Equal rights of heirs

C. Performing the division

I. Equal rights of heirs

1 Except where other provisions apply, all heirs have an equal right to the estate property.

2 They must disclose to each other all circumstances concerning their relationship with the deceased insofar as these pertain to the just and equitable division of the estate.

3 Each heir may request that the debts of the deceased be redeemed or secured prior to division of the estate.

Art. 611 C. Performing the division / II. Formation of lots

II. Formation of lots

1 The heirs form as many portions or lots as there are heirs or stirpes.

2 If they are unable to reach agreement, at the request of one heir the competent authority must form the lots with due regard to local custom and the personal circumstances and wishes of the majority of the co-heirs.

3 The lots are distributed among the heirs either as agreed or by the drawing of lots.

Art. 612 C. Performing the division / III. Allocation and sale of specific objects

III. Allocation and sale of specific objects

1 Where the value of an object belonging to the estate would be substantially diminished if such object were divided, it is allocated in its entirety to one of the heirs.

2 Where the heirs are unable to agree on the division or allocation of an object, it must be sold and the proceeds divided.

3 At the request of an heir, such sale must be carried out at auction and, in the absence of agreement among the heirs, the competent authority decides whether such auction is to be public or only among the heirs.

Art. 612a1C. Performing the division / IV. Allocation of the home and household effects to the surviving spouse

IV. Allocation of the home and household effects to the surviving spouse

1 Where the house or apartment in which the spouses lived or the household effects form part of the estate, the surviving spouse may request that such property be allocated to him or her against his or her portion.

2 Where justified in the circumstances, at the request of the surviving spouse or the other statutory heirs of the deceased, a usufruct or right of residence may be granted rather than ownership of the home.

3 The surviving spouse cannot claim such rights in respect of premises in which the deceased practised a profession or ran a business and which are required by one of his or her issue in order to continue the profession or business, subject to the provisions of agricultural law of succession.

4 The same provisions apply mutatis mutandis to registered partners.2


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).
2 Inserted by Annex No 8 of the Same-Sex Partnership Act of 18 June 2004, in force since 1 Jan. 2007 (AS 2005 5685; BBl 2003 1288).

Art. 613 D. Special items / I. Items that belong together, family documents

D. Special items

I. Items that belong together, family documents

1 Items which by their nature belong together must not be separated if one of the heirs objects to such separation.

2 Family documents and items of special sentimental value to the family must not be sold if any of the heirs objects.

3 If the heirs cannot reach agreement, the competent authority decides whether to sell such items or to allocate them, against the recipient’s portion or otherwise, giving due regard to local custom and, in the absence of such custom, to the personal circumstances of the heirs.

Art. 613a1D. Special items / I.bis Agricultural inventory

I.bis Agricultural inventory

Where the tenant of an agricultural enterprise dies and one of his or her heirs continues the lease on his or her own, on request he or she may have the entire inventory (livestock, machinery, supplies, etc.) allocated to him or her and charged to his or her portion at its utility value.


1 Inserted by Art. 92 No 1 of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on Rural Land Rights, in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1410; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 614 D. Special items / II. Claims of the deceased against his or her heirs

II. Claims of the deceased against his or her heirs

Claims of the deceased against an heir are charged to the latter’s portion.

Art. 615 D. Special items / III. Pledged estate property

III. Pledged estate property

If as a result of the division an heir receives estate property that is pledged to secure the debts of the deceased, the debt to the pledgee is likewise transferred to him or her.

Art. 6161

1 Repealed by Art. 92 No 1 of the FA of 4 Oct 1991 on Rural Land Rights, with effect from 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1410; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 6171D. Special items / IV. Land / 1. Method of allocation / a. Imputed value

IV. Land

1. Method of allocation

a. Imputed value

Land is charged to the heirs’ portions at its market value as at the time of the division.


1 Amended by Art. 92 No 1 of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on Rural Land Rights, in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1410; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 618 D. Special items / IV. Land / 1. Method of allocation / b. Valuation procedure

b. Valuation procedure

1 Where the heirs are unable to agree on the market value, it is estimated by an officially appointed expert.1

2 ...2


1 Amended by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, in force since 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).
2 Repealed by No I 1 of the FA of 6 Oct. 1972, with effect from 15 Feb. 1994 (AS 1973 93; BBl 1970 I 805, 1971 I 737).

Art. 6191D. Special items / V. Agricultural businesses and land

V. Agricultural businesses and land

The method of including and allocating agricultural enterprises and agricultural land is governed by the Federal Act of 4 October 19912 on Rural Land Rights.


1 Amended by Art. 92 No 1 of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on Rural Land Rights, in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1410; BBl 1988 III 953).
2 SR 211.412.11

Art. 620–6251

1 Repealed by Art. 92 No 1 of the FA of 4 Oct 1991 on Rural Land Rights with effect from 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1410; BBl 1988 III 953).


  Chapter Three: Hotchpot

Art. 626 A. Hotchpot duty of the heirs

A. Hotchpot duty of the heirs

1 The statutory heirs are under a mutual obligation to place into hotchpot any property received from the deceased during his or her lifetime as advancements against their share of the estate.

2 Unless the deceased expressly instructed otherwise, anything gifted or granted to his or her issue by way of dowry, endowment or assignment of assets, debt remission and the like is subject to hotchpot.

Art. 627 B. Hotchpot if heirs cease to be heirs

B. Hotchpot if heirs cease to be heirs

1 If a person ceases to be an heir before or after succession, his or her duty of hotchpot passes to the heirs that replace him or her.

2 The issue of an heir have a duty of hotchpot in respect of advancements made in his or her favour even if those advancements have not devolved on them.

Art. 628 C. Calculation method / I. In kind or by imputation of value

C. Calculation method

I. In kind or by imputation of value

1 When placing property in hotchpot, the heirs may at their discretion do so either in kind or by imputing its value, even if the advancements made in their favour exceed the value of their share of the estate.

2 The above provisions are subject to any contrary instructions issued by the testator and to the co-heirs’ right to abatement of the advancements.

Art. 629 C. Calculation method / II. Correlation with share of the estate

II. Correlation with share of the estate

1 Where advancements to an heir exceed the value of his or her share of the estate, subject to claims in abatement, the surplus is exempt from hotchpot if it may be shown that the deceased intended to favour said heir by such advancements.

2 Exemption from hotchpot is presumed in the case of endowments in the usual order of magnitude made to the issue on their marriage.

Art. 630 C. Calculation method / III. Hotchpot value

III. Hotchpot value

1 Hotchpot is calculated according to the value of the advancements on succession or, where the advanced property has previously been sold, the sale proceeds obtained.

2 Any expenditure on and damage to the property and the natural produce derived therefrom must be allowed for among the heirs according to the rules governing possession.

Art. 631 D. Education costs

D. Education costs

1 Unless it is shown that the deceased intended otherwise, sums expended by him or her on the upbringing and education of individual children are subject to hotchpot only insofar as they exceed the normal amounts.

2 Children still in education or who suffer from disabilities must be granted appropriate advance payments on division of the estate.1


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 632 E. Occasional gifts

E. Occasional gifts

Customary occasional gifts are not subject to hotchpot.

Art. 6331

1 Repealed by No I 1 of the FA of 6 Oct. 1972, with effect from 15 Feb. 1994 (AS 1973 93; BBl 1970 I 805, 1971 I 737).


  Chapter Four: Completion and Effect of Division

Art. 634 A. Agreement / I. Contract of division

A. Agreement

I. Contract of division

1 The division of the estate becomes binding on the heirs once the lots have been formed and received or on conclusion of the contract of division.

2 In order to be valid, the contract of division must be done in writing.

Art. 635 A. Agreement / II. Contracts regarding shares of the estate

II. Contracts regarding shares of the estate

1 In order to be valid, contracts between heirs regarding assignment of shares of the estate must be done in writing.1

2 If such contracts are concluded by an heir with third parties, they do not give the latter any right to participate in the division of the estate, but merely confer a claim on the share allocated to that heir as a result of the division.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 636 A. Agreement / III. Contracts prior to succession

III. Contracts prior to succession

1 Contracts concluded without the involvement and authorisation of the testator between one heir and another or between an heir and a third party regarding an inheritance that has not yet devolved on the heir are not binding.

2 Any performance rendered under such contracts may be reclaimed.

Art. 637 B. Liability among co-heirs / I. Warranty

B. Liability among co-heirs

I. Warranty

1 On completion of the division, the co-heirs are mutually liable for the estate property as if they were purchasers and vendors.

2 They must mutually warrant the existence of claims allocated to them in the division and, except in the case of securities with a market price, are mutually liable as simple guarantors for the debtor’s solvency in the amount at which such claims were brought into account.

3 Claims under such warranty prescribe one year after the division or the subsequent date on which the claims fell due.

Art. 638 B. Liability among co-heirs / II. Challenging the division

II. Challenging the division

A contract of division may be challenged in accordance with the provisions governing challenge of contract in general.

Art. 639 C. Liability toward third parties / I. Joint and several liability

C. Liability toward third parties

I. Joint and several liability

1 Even after the division of the estate, the heirs remain jointly and severally liable with their entire property for the debts of the testator to his or her creditors, providing the latter have not expressly or tacitly agreed to a division or transfer of such debts.

2 The joint and several liability of the co-heirs prescribes five years after the division or the subsequent date on which the debt claim fell due.

Art. 640 C. Liability toward third parties / II. Recourse against co-heirs C. Liability toward third parties / II. Recourse against co-heirs

II. Recourse against co-heirs

1 If an heir has paid a debt owed by the deceased that was not allocated to him or her in the division, or if he or she has paid more of a debt than he or she has assumed, he or she has right of recourse against the co-heirs.

2 Recourse is taken first against the person who assumed such debt in the division.

3 In all other respects, the heirs must bear the debts in proportion to their shares in the estate, unless otherwise agreed.

  Part Four: Property Law

  Division One: Ownership

  Title Eighteen: General Provisions

Art. 641 A. Nature of ownership / I. In general

A. Nature of ownership

I. In general1

1 The owner of an object is free to dispose of it as he or she sees fit within the limits of the law.

2 He or she has the right to reclaim it from anyone withholding it from him or her and to protect it against any unwarranted interference.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 2002 (Article of Basic Principles: Animals), in force since 1 April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806).

Art. 641a1A. Nature of ownership / II. Animals

II. Animals

1 Animals are not objects.

2 Where no special provisions exist for animals, they are subject to the provisions governing objects.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 2002 (Article of Basic Principles: Animals), in force since 1 April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806).

Art. 642 B. Scope of ownership / I. Constituent parts

B. Scope of ownership

I. Constituent parts

1 The owner of an object also has ownership of all its constituent parts.

2 A constituent part is anything which, according to local custom, is held to be an essential part of an object and which cannot be detached without destroying, damaging or altering it.

Art. 643 B. Scope of ownership / II. Natural fruits

II. Natural fruits

1 The owner of an object also has ownership of its natural fruits.

2 Natural fruits are the periodic produce and revenues customarily derived from an object used according to its purpose.

3 Prior to separation, the natural fruits are an integral part of the object.

Art. 644 B. Scope of ownership / III. Accessories / 1. Definition

III. Accessories

1. Definition

1 Any disposition affecting an object also applies to its accessories, unless an exception is made.

2 Accessories are those chattels which, according to local custom or the clear will of the main object's owner, permanently facilitate the management, use or preservation of the main object and are auxiliary thereto by virtue of having been joined to it, adapted to it or otherwise connected with it.

3 If an object is an accessory, it remains so regardless of temporary separation from the main object.

Art. 645 B. Scope of ownership / III. Accessories / 2. Exclusions

2. Exclusions

Chattels do not qualify as accessories if they are intended for temporary use or consumption by the possessor of the main object, are not intrinsically related to it or are connected with it only for storage, sale or hire purposes.

Art. 646 C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 1. Relationship among co-owners

C. Collective ownership

I. Co-ownership

1. Relationship among co-owners

1 Co-ownership exists where several persons own a share in an object which is physically undivided.

2 Unless otherwise stipulated, they are co-owners in equal measure.

3 Each co-owner has the rights and obligations of ownership in respect of his or her share in the object, and said share may be alienated and pledged by him or her, or distrained by his or her creditors.

Art. 6471C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 2. Use and administration rules

2. Use and administration rules

1 The co-owners may agree rules on use and administration that deviate from the statutory provisions and provide therein that the rules may be amended with the consent of the majority of all co-owners.2

1bis Any amendment to the provisions of the use and administration rules on the allocation of exclusive rights of use also requires the consent of the co-owners who are directly affected.3

2 Such rules cannot annul or restrict the rights of each co-owner:

1.
to request such measures as are necessary to preserve the object’s value and serviceability and, where required, to have these ordered by a court;
2.
to take, on his or her own initiative and at the expense of all co-owners, such measures as are urgently needed to safeguard the object against imminent or incremental damage.

1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).
2 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
3 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 647a1C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 3. Ordinary administration

3. Ordinary administration

1 Each co-owner may attend to ordinary administration and in particular carry out repairs, sowing and harvesting, short-term custody and supervision, may conclude contracts for such purposes and may exercise the powers derived from such contracts and from rental, lease, work and service agreements, including the payment and acceptance of monies on behalf of all the co-owners.

2 With the consent of the majority of the co-owners, the authority to carry out administration may be submitted to a different regime, subject to the statutory provisions governing necessary and urgent measures.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 647b1C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 4. Major administrative acts

4. Major administrative acts

1 By the consent of a majority of the co-owners together representing a majority share in the object, major administrative acts may be carried out, notably including changes in methods of cultivation or use, conclusion and termination of rental and lease agreements, participation in land improvements and the appointment of an administrator whose authority extends beyond ordinary administrative acts.

2 The provisions governing necessary construction work are reserved.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 647c1C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 5. Construction work / a. Necessary work

5. Construction work

a. Necessary work

Maintenance, reconstruction and renovation work necessary to preserve the object’s value and serviceability may be carried out with the consent of the majority of co-owners where such work does not fall under the authority of each individual co-owner to take ordinary administrative steps.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 647d1C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 5. Construction work / b. Useful work

b. Useful work

1 Renovations and refurbishments aimed at enhancing the value or improving the object’s profitability or serviceability require the approval of a majority of the co-owners together representing a majority share in the object.

2 Alterations which permanently hinder or render unprofitable a co-owner’s use or exploitation of the object for its existing purpose may not be carried out without the consent of that co-owner.

3 Where an alteration would require a co-owner to bear unreasonable costs, in particular because they are disproportionate to the value of his or her share, the alteration may be carried out without his or her consent only if the other co-owners assume such part of his or her share of the costs as exceeds that which he or she may reasonably be expected to meet.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 647e1C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 5. Construction work / c. Works to improve appearance or convenience

c. Works to improve appearance or convenience

1 Building works serving merely to embellish the object, improve its appearance or make its use more comfortable or convenient may only be carried out with the consent of all the co-owners.

2 If such works are commissioned with the consent of the majority of the co-owners who also represent a majority share in the object, they may be carried out even against the wishes of a dissenting co-owner providing they do not permanently impair the latter’s right of use and enjoyment and the other co-owners compensate him or her for the merely temporary impairment and assume his or her share of the costs.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993 ; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 6481C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 6. Power of disposal over the object

6. Power of disposal over the object

1 Each co-owner is entitled to represent, use and exploit the object insofar as is compatible with the rights of the other co-owners.

2 The alienation or encumbrance of the object and the modification of its designated purpose require the consent of all co-owners, unless they have unanimously agreed some other arrangement.

3 Where mortgage rights or real burdens apply to co-ownership shares, the co-owners are not permitted to further encumber the object itself with such charges.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 6491C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 7. Costs and expenses

7. Costs and expenses

1 Except where otherwise provided, the administrative costs, taxes and other expenses arising from co-ownership or in relation to the object in co-ownership are borne by the co-owners in proportion to their shares.

2 If a co-owner has borne more than his or her fair share of such costs, he or she is entitled to compensation from the others to an equivalent extent.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 649a1C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 8. Binding nature of rules and noting in the land register

8. Binding nature of rules and noting in the land register2

The use and administration rules agreed by the co-owners, their administrative decisions and all relevant court judgments and orders are also binding on a co-owner’s legal successor and on any person acquiring a right in rem to a co-ownership share.

2 They may be noted next to co-ownership shares of immovable property in the land register.3


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).
2 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
3 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 649b1C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 9. Exclusion from collective ownership / a. Co-owners

9. Exclusion from collective ownership

a. Co-owners

1 A co-owner may be excluded from the community of co-owners by court order if, as a result of his or her conduct or that of persons to whom he or she granted use of the object or for whom he or she is responsible, his or her duties towards the other co-owners individually or collectively are so seriously violated that continuation of the community of co-owners becomes unreasonable.

2 Where the community comprises only two co-owners, each has the right to sue the other; in other cases, unless otherwise agreed, legal action against one co-owner must be authorised by a majority of all the co-owners excluding the person to be sued.

3 If the court rules in favour of excluding the defendant, it shall order him or her to alienate his or her share and, should he or she fail to do so within the allowed time limit, shall order it to be sold at public auction in accordance with the provisions governing the forced sale of land to the exclusion of the provisions governing dissolution of co-ownership.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 649c1C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 9. Exclusion from collective ownership / b. Further entitled persons

b. Further entitled persons

The provisions governing exclusion of co-owners apply mutatis mutandis to usufructuaries and to owners of other rights in rem or personal rights of use entered under priority notice in the land register in respect of co-ownership shares.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 6501C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 10. Dissolution / a. Right to request division

10. Dissolution

a. Right to request division

1 Every co-owner has the right to request the dissolution of the co-ownership unless this is excluded by an agreement, by division of the object into condominium units or by the dedication of the object to a permanent purpose.

2 Dissolution may be excluded for a maximum of 50 years by means of an agreement which, where the object is land, is valid only if done as a public deed and which may be entered under priority notice in the land register.2

3 Dissolution may not be requested at an inopportune time.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).
2 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 651 C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 10. Dissolution / b. Form of partition

b. Form of partition

1 Dissolution is effected by means of physical division, by private sale or sale at auction and division of the sale proceeds, or by transfer of the entire object to one or more co-owners who buy out the others.

2 If the co-owners are unable to agree on the method of dissolution, the court will order the physical division of the object or, where this is impossible without substantially diminishing its value, its sale at public auction or private auction among the co-owners.

3 Physical division giving rise to unequal shares may entail monetary payments to balance out the shares.

Art. 651a1C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 10. Dissolution / c. Animals kept as pets

c. Animals kept as pets

1 In the event of disputes over ownership of animals kept as pets rather than for investment or commercial purposes, the court will award sole ownership to whichever party offers the better conditions of animal welfare in which to keep the animal.

2 The court may order the person to whom ownership of the animal is awarded to provide appropriate compensation to the other party; the court determines the amount at its discretion.

3 The court shall take all necessary provisional measures, in particular in relation to the animal’s care in the interim.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 2002 (Article of Basic Principles: Animals), in force since 1 April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806).

Art. 652 C. Collective ownership / II. Joint ownership / 1. Prerequisites

II. Joint ownership

1. Prerequisites

If several persons bound together into a community by legal provision or contract own an object by virtue of that community, they are joint owners and the rights of each joint owner attach to the whole object.

Art. 653 C. Collective ownership / II. Joint ownership / 2. Effect

2. Effect

1 The rights and obligations of the joint owners are determined by the rules governing their legal or contractual community.

2 Unless otherwise provided, the unanimous decision of all the joint owners is required in order to exercise ownership rights and in particular to dispose of the object in any way.

3 For the duration of the community, the right to divide the object or make dispositions relating to a fraction of it is excluded.

Art. 654 C. Collective ownership / II. Joint ownership / 3. Dissolution

3. Dissolution

1 Dissolution occurs when the object is alienated or the community is terminated.

2 Unless otherwise provided, division of the object is effected according to the provisions governing co-ownership.

Art. 654a1C. Collective ownership / III. Joint ownership of agricultural enterprises and land

III. Joint ownership of agricultural enterprises and land

The dissolution of joint ownership of agricultural enterprises and agricultural land is governed by the Federal Act of 4 October 19912 on Rural Land Rights.


1 Inserted by Art. 92 No 1 of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on Rural Land Rights, in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1410; BBl 1988 III 953).
2 SR 211.412.11


  Title Nineteen: Land Ownership

  Chapter One: Object, Acquisition and Loss of Land Ownership

Art. 6551A. Subject matter / I. Immovable property

A. Subject matter

I. Immovable property2

1 The object of land ownership is all immovable property.

2 Within the meaning of this Code, immovable property includes:

1.
parcels of land and the buildings thereon;
2.
distinct and permanent rights recorded in the land register;
3.
mines;
4.
co-ownership shares in immovable property.

3 An easement relating to immovable property may be recorded in the land register as an independent and permanent right if it:

1.
is not created in favour of a benefited property nor exclusively for a specific person; and
2.
is established for at least 30 years or for an unlimited period.3

1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).
2 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
3 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 655a1A. Subject matter / II. Dependent property

II. Dependent property

1 A parcel of land may be linked to another parcel of land such that the owner of the main parcel of land is also the owner of the attached parcel of land. The attached parcel shares the same legal destiny as the main parcel and may not be alienated, pledged or encumbered separately.

2 If the parcels are linked for a permanent purpose, the statutory right of pre-emption of the co-owners and the right to demand dissolution may not be claimed.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 656 B. Acquisition / I. Registration

B. Acquisition

I. Registration

1 The acquisition of land ownership must be recorded in the land register.

2 In the case of appropriation, inheritance, compulsory purchase, debt enforcement or court judgment, the acquirer becomes the owner even before registration in the land register but obtains the power of disposal over the immovable property only once he or she has been recorded as the owner in the land register.

Art. 657 B. Acquisition / II. Types of acquisition / 1. Transfer

II. Types of acquisition

1. Transfer

1 In order to be binding, a contract to transfer land ownership must be executed as a public deed.

2 Testamentary disposition and marital contracts require the forms prescribed by the law of succession and marital property law.

Art. 658 B. Acquisition / II. Types of acquisition / 2. Appropriation

2. Appropriation

1 Immovable property recorded in the land register may be appropriated only if the register establishes that it has no owner.

2 Appropriation of land not recorded in the land register is subject to the provisions governing ownerless objects.

Art. 659 B. Acquisition / II. Types of acquisition / 3. Formation of new land

3. Formation of new land

1 If new exploitable land is formed from previously ownerless land as a result of alluvion, filling or ground displacement, changes in the course or level of public waters or in some other manner, such land belongs to the canton in which it lies.

2 The cantons are free to allocate such land to owners of adjoining land.

3 If a person can show that parts of ground have become detached from his or her property, he or she is entitled to take them back within an appropriate period.

Art. 660 B. Acquisition / II. Types of acquisition / 4. Ground displacement / a. In general

4. Ground displacement

a. In general1

1 Ground displacement from one parcel of land to another does not alter the boundaries of the parcels.

2 Earth and other objects moving from one parcel to the other in the process are subject to the provisions governing driftage or the joining and mixing of chattels.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 660a1B. Acquisition / II. Types of acquisition / 4. Ground displacement / b. Constant ground displacement

b. Constant ground displacement

1 The general principle whereby ground displacement does not alter land boundaries does not apply to areas designated by the cantons as being in permanent danger of ground displacement.

2 When designating such areas, due consideration shall be given to the characteristics of the land in question.

3 Where a parcel of land forms part of such an area, this fact must be notified in an appropriate manner to the interested parties and recorded in the land register.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 660b1B. Acquisition / II. Types of acquisition / 4. Ground displacement / c. Redrawing of boundaries

c. Redrawing of boundaries

1 If a land boundary is rendered impractical by ground displacement, any affected landowner may request that it be redrawn.

2 Any loss or gain in value shall be balanced out.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 661 B. Acquisition / II. Types of acquisition / 5. Adverse possession / a. Ordinary adverse possession

5. Adverse possession

a. Ordinary adverse possession

Where a person has been wrongly recorded in the land register as the owner of immovable property, his or her ownership may no longer be challenged if he or she has been in possession of it in good faith, uninterruptedly and without challenge for ten years.

Art. 662 B. Acquisition / II. Types of acquisition / 5. Adverse possession / b. Extraordinary adverse possession

b. Extraordinary adverse possession

1 Where a person has been in possession of immovable property not recorded in the land register uninterruptedly and without challenge for 30 years as if it were his or her property, he or she has the right to be registered as the owner.

2 The same right applies on the same conditions to a person in possession of immovable property whose owner is not evident from the land register or who was declared dead or presumed dead at the beginning of the 30-year adverse possession period.

3 However, such registration may be made only by court order on expiry of a publicly notified period for objections, provided no such objections have been raised or those raised have been dismissed.

Art. 663 B. Acquisition / II. Types of acquisition / 5. Adverse possession / c. Time limits

c. Time limits

The rules for computing, interrupting and suspending adverse possession time limits are determined mutatis mutandis by the provisions governing prescription of debt claims.

Art. 664 B. Acquisition / II. Types of acquisition / 6. Ownerless and public objects

6. Ownerless and public objects

1 Ownerless and public objects are subject to the sovereignty of the canton on whose territory they are situated.

2 No rights of private ownership apply to public waters or to land not suitable for cultivation, such as rocks and scree, firn and glaciers, or to springs rising therefrom, unless proof to the contrary is produced.

3 The cantons shall enact the provisions required to govern the appropriation of ownerless land, exploitation and common use of public objects such as roads, town and village squares, waterways and riverbeds.

Art. 665 B. Acquisition / III. Right to registration

III. Right to registration

1 By virtue of acquisition, the acquirer gains a personal claim against the owner to be recorded in the land register and, should the owner refuse, the right to have ownership awarded by court order.

2 In the case of appropriation, inheritance, compulsory purchase, debt enforcement or court judgment, the acquirer may obtain such registration on his or her own initiative.

3 Changes to land ownership occurring by operation of law as a result of marital community of property or the dissolution thereof shall be recorded in the land register at the request of either spouse.1


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 666 C. Loss

C. Loss

1 Land ownership is extinguished on deletion of the land register entry and on complete loss of the immovable property.

2 In the case of compulsory purchase, the time at which the loss occurs is determined according to federal and cantonal compulsory purchase law.

Art. 666a1D. Judicial measures / I. Where the owner cannot be found

D. Judicial measures

I. Where the owner cannot be found

1 If the owner recorded in the land register cannot be identified, if his or her address is unknown or if the name or address of one or more of his or her heirs is unknown, the court may on application order the required measures.
2 The court may in particular appoint a representative. On application, it shall stipulate the extent of the powers of representation. Unless it stipulates otherwise, such powers shall be limited to measures to maintain the property.

3 The following may apply for measures to be ordered:

1.
any person with a legitimate interest;
2.
the land register at the location of the immovable property.

4 The ordering of measures does not interrupt the period required to obtain extraordinary adverse possession.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 666b1D. Judicial measures / II. In the absence of the required management bodies

II. In the absence of the required management bodies

If a legal entity or other rights holder that is recorded in the land register as the owner no longer has the required management bodies, and person with a legitimate interest or the land register at the location of the immovable property may apply to the court for the required measures relating to the immovable property to be ordered.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).


  Chapter Two: Substance and Limitation of Land Ownership

Art. 667 A. Substance / I. Scope

A. Substance

I. Scope

1 Land ownership extends upwards into the air and downwards into the ground to the extent determined by the owner’s legitimate interest in exercising his or her ownership rights.

2 Within the limits prescribed by law, it includes all buildings and plants as well as springs.

Art. 668 A. Substance / II. Boundaries / 1. Type of boundary

II. Boundaries

1. Type of boundary

1 Land boundaries are established by the land register plans and by boundary markings on the land itself.

2 In the event of discrepancy between the existing land register plans and the boundary markings, the land register plans are presumed correct.

3 The foregoing presumption does not apply to areas designated by the canton as being in permanent danger of ground displacement.1


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 669 A. Substance / II. Boundaries / 2. Duty to establish boundaries

2. Duty to establish boundaries

Every landowner is obliged, at the request of his or her neighbour, to co-operate in establishing the boundary where it is unclear, whether by amendment of the land register plans or by affixing boundary markers.

Art. 670 A. Substance / II. Boundaries / 3. Co-ownership of boundary markers

3. Co-ownership of boundary markers

Where boundaries are marked by features such as walls, hedges and fences, such features are presumed to be jointly owned by the two neighbouring landowners.

Art. 671 A. Substance / III. Buildings on the parcel of land / 1. Land and building materials / a. Ownership

III. Buildings on the parcel of land

1. Land and building materials

a. Ownership

1 Where a person uses materials belonging to another in building work on his or her own land or materials of his or her own on land belonging to another, such materials become an integral part of the parcel of land.

2 However, where such materials are used against the will of their owner, the latter is entitled to demand that the materials be removed and returned to him or her at the landowner’s expense to the extent this is possible without causing disproportionate damage.

3 On the same condition, where the materials were used against the will of the landowner, the latter may demand that they be removed from his or her land at the expense of the builder.

Art. 672 A. Substance / III. Buildings on the parcel of land / 1. Land and building materials / b. Compensation

b. Compensation

1 Where the materials are not removed from the land, the landowner must provide appropriate compensation for the cost of the materials.

2 Where the landowner on whose land the building work was carried out acted in bad faith, the court may award full damages.

3 Where the owner of the materials used in the building work acted in bad faith, the damages awarded may not exceed the minimum value of the building work to the landowner.

Art. 673 A. Substance / III. Buildings on the parcel of land / 1. Land and building materials / c. Assignment of land ownership

c. Assignment of land ownership

Where the value of the building plainly exceeds the value of the land, the party acting in good faith may request that ownership of both building and land be assigned to the owner of the materials in exchange for appropriate compensation.

Art. 674 A. Substance / III. Buildings on the parcel of land / 2. Encroaching buildings

2. Encroaching buildings

1 Buildings and other structures encroaching from one parcel of land onto another remain part of the parcel from which they originate, providing their owner has a right in rem to their existence.

2 The right to encroach on neighbouring land may be recorded as an easement in the land register.

3 If an injured party fails to object in timely manner to an unauthorised encroachment, despite being aware of it, where justified in the circumstances the builder of the encroaching structure, provided he or she acted in good faith, may be granted ownership of the encroaching part thereof or of the land below it in exchange for appropriate compensation.

Art. 675 A. Substance / III. Buildings on the parcel of land / 3. Building right

3. Building right

1 Buildings and other structures that are dug into or built onto land belonging to another person or otherwise permanently connected with that parcel of land on or below its surface may have a separate owner provided their existence is recorded as an easement in the land register.

2 The creation of rights to buildings in respect of individual storeys of a building is not permitted.

Art. 676 A. Substance / III. Buildings on the parcel of land / 4. Pipes, cables, conduits

4. Pipes, cables, conduits

1 Pipes, cables and conduits for water, gas, electricity and the like located outside the parcel of land which they serve are, except where otherwise regulated, the property of the utility plant from which they come or to which they lead.1

2 Where the provisions of the law of neighbours do not apply, the encumbrance of parcels of land by rights in rem relating to such pipes, cables and conduits belonging to another person is established by way of easement.

3 If the pipe, cable or conduit is visible, the easement is created when the pipe, cable or conduit is laid. In other cases, it is created by entry in the land register.2


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 677 A. Substance / III. Buildings on the parcel of land / 5. Movable structures

5. Movable structures

1 Sheds, huts, shacks, cabins and the like retain their separate owner if they are constructed on land belonging to another person without the intention of becoming a permanent fixture.

2 Their existence is not recorded in the land register.

Art. 678 A. Substance / IV. Plants grown on the parcel of land

IV. Plants grown on the parcel of land

1 Where a person uses another person’s plants on his or her own land or his or her own plants on another person’s land, the same rights and obligations arise as for the use of building materials or for movable structures.

2 An easement corresponding to a building right may be created in respect of individual plants and plantations for a minimum of ten and a maximum of 100 years.1

3 The servient owner may request the termination of the easement before the end of the agreed duration in the event of the termination of a lease agreement concluded between him or her and the easement beneficiary concerning the use of the land. The court shall determine the financial consequences taking due account of all the circumstances.2


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 20 June 2003, in force since 1 Jan. 2004 (AS 2003 4121; BBl 2002 4721).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 June 2003, in force since 1 Jan. 2004 (AS 2003 4121; BBl 2002 4721).

Art. 679 A. Substance / V. Landowner’s liability / 1. Acts in excess of ownership rights

V. Landowner’s liability

1. Acts in excess of ownership rights1

1 Where a person incurs or is at risk of damage because a landowner acts in excess of his or her ownership rights, he or she may sue for abatement of the damage or for protection against any imminent damage and for damages.

2 Where a building or installation deprives a neighbouring parcel of land of certain properties, the aforementioned rights apply only if the regulations that applied at the time the building or installation was constructed were not complied with.2


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 679a1A. Substance / V. Landowner’s liability / 2. Lawful management of the land

2. Lawful management of the land

Where a landowner temporarily causes excessive and unavoidable disadvantages to a neighbour while managing his or her parcel of land lawfully, in particular by building and thus causes damage, the neighbour may only claim damages from the landowner.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 680 B. Limitations / I. In general

B. Limitations

I. In general

1 Statutory restrictions on ownership exist irrespective of whether they are recorded in the land register.

2 Any lifting or modification thereof by agreement is invalid unless executed in the form of a public deed and recorded in the land register.

3 Public law restrictions on ownership may not be revoked or modified.

Art. 6811B. Limitations / II. Restrictions on alienation; statutory right of pre-emption / 1. General principles

II. Restrictions on alienation; statutory right of pre-emption

1. General principles

1 Statutory rights of pre-emption may also be exercised in the case of compulsory sale at auction, but only at the auction itself and on the conditions that apply to a sale to the highest bidder; in other respects statutory rights of pre-emption may be exercised subject to the conditions that apply to contractual rights of pre-emption.

2 The right of pre-emption becomes void if the land is sold to a person with a right of pre-emption of equal or higher rank.

3 Statutory rights of pre-emption may neither be inherited nor assigned. They take precedence over contractual rights of pre-emption.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 681a1B. Limitations / II. Restrictions on alienation; statutory right of pre-emption / 2. Exercise

2. Exercise

1 Where a purchase agreement is concluded, the vendor must notify persons with a right of pre-emption of the terms thereof.

2 If a person wishes to exercise his or her right of pre-emption, he or she must assert it within three months of learning of the conclusion and terms of the purchase agreement. Such a right may no longer be exercised once two years have elapsed since the entry of the new owner in the land register.

3 During that time a person may exercise a right of pre-emption against any owner of the land.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 681b1B. Limitations / II. Restrictions on alienation; statutory right of pre-emption / 3. Modification, waiver

3. Modification, waiver

1 An agreement excluding or modifying a statutory right of pre-emption is valid only if executed in the form of a public deed. It may be entered under priority notice in the land register provided the right of pre-emption is held by the current owner of another parcel of land.

2 The beneficiary may waive his or her statutory right of pre-emption in writing once the event that triggers it has occurred.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 6821B. Limitations / II. Restrictions on alienation; statutory right of pre-emption / 4. In respect of co-ownership and building rights

4. In respect of co-ownership and building rights2

1 Co-owners have a right of pre-emption against any person acquiring a share who is not a co-owner. If several co-owners exercise their right of pre-emption, the share is allocated to them in proportion to their existing shares.3

2 The owner of a parcel of land encumbered with a distinct and permanent building right shall also have a right of pre-emption in respect of that right over anyone wishing to acquire it, and the holder of the right has a right of pre-emption in respect of the parcel of land it encumbers, providing the land is used in the exercise of his or her right.

3...4


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).
3 Amended by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).
4 Repealed by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), with effect from 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 682a1B. Limitations / II. Restrictions on alienation; statutory right of pre-emption / 5. Right of pre-emption of farms and farmland

5. Right of pre-emption of farms and farmland

Rights of pre-emption of agricultural enterprises and agricultural land are also governed by the Federal Act of 4 October 19912 on Rural land Rights.


1 Inserted by Art. 92 No 1 of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on Rural Land Rights, in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1410; BBl 1988 III 953).
2 SR 211.412.11

Art. 6831

1 Repealed by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), with effect from 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 684 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 1. Excess detriment

III. Law of neighbours

1. Excess detriment1

1 In exercising their ownership rights, including in particular the right to run a business on his or her land, landowners are obliged to refrain from any excess detrimental to neighbouring properties.

2 In particular all harmful effects that are not justified by the location and character of the land or by local custom such as air pollution emissions of noxious vapours, noise, vibrations, radiation or the deprivation of sunlight or daylight are prohibited.2


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 685 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 2. Excavation and construction / a. Rule

2. Excavation and construction

a. Rule

1 When carrying out excavation or construction work, the owner is not permitted to damage the adjoining properties by causing their terrain to shift, exposing it to the risk of shifting or by weakening existing structures.

2 Buildings which contravene the provisions of the law of neighbours are subject to the provisions governing encroaching buildings.

Art. 686 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 2. Excavation and construction / b. Cantonal regulations

b. Cantonal regulations

1 The cantons may set minimum separation distances to be observed in excavation and construction works.

2 They have the right to issue further building regulations.

Art. 687 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 3. Plants / a. Rule

3. Plants

a. Rule

1 Overhanging branches and roots encroaching beyond the boundary may be severed and kept by the neighbour if they are damaging his or her property and have not been removed within a reasonable time following his or her complaint in relation thereto.

2 If a landowner tolerates branches overhanging cultivated or developed land, he or she is entitled to the fruit that grows on them.

3 These provisions do not apply to adjoining parcels of woodland.

Art. 688 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 3. Plants / b. Cantonal regulations

b. Cantonal regulations

The cantons are authorised to set minimum separation distances for plantations depending on the type of land and plants involved or to oblige the landowner to permit the overhanging branches or encroaching roots of fruit trees and to regulate or annul his or her right to take the fruit from such branches.

Art. 689 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 4. Flowing waters

4. Flowing waters

1 Every landowner is obliged to receive the waters flowing naturally from a higher-lying parcel of land, such as rain water, melting snow and water from unchannelled springs.

2 No person may alter the natural course of flow to his or her neighbour’s damage.

3 Water flowing to a lower-lying parcel of land and required by that property may be withheld only to the extent that such water is indispensable to the higher-lying parcel of land.

Art. 690 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 5. Drainage

5. Drainage

1 Where a higher-lying parcel of land is drained, the owner of lower-lying parcel of land is obliged to receive such water as previously flowed naturally onto his or her land without being entitled to compensation.

2 If he or she suffers damage as a result of drainage channels, he or she may require the owner of the higher-lying parcel of land to continue such channels through the lower-lying parcel of land at the latter’s expense.

Art. 691 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 6. Pipes, cables, conduits / a. Duty to permit

6. Pipes, cables, conduits

a. Duty to permit

1 Every landowner is obliged to permit water conduits, drainage pipes, gas pipes and the like and subterranean or overhead cables to traverse his or her land in exchange for full compensation, to the extent that such works would be impossible or prohibitively expensive if they did not traverse his or her land.1

2 The right for pipes, cables and conduits to traverse an adjoining parcel of land may not be claimed on the basis of the law of neighbours in cases subject to compulsory purchase under cantonal or federal law.

3 At the request of the dominant or the servient owner, such rights shall be recorded in the land register as an easement at the expense of the dominant owner. The right for pipes, cables and conduits to traverse an adjoining parcel of land may be cited in opposition to a person acquiring a parcel of land in good faith, even if it is not registered.2


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 692 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 6. Pipes, cables, conduits / b. Safeguarding the interests of the servient landowner

b. Safeguarding the interests of the servient landowner

1 The servient owner is entitled to just and equitable consideration of his or her own interests.

2 Where justified by extraordinary circumstances, he or she may request that the piece of the land above which overhead pipes, cables and conduits are to be routed together with a reasonable portion of the surrounding land be purchased from him or her at its full value.

Art. 693 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 6. Pipes, cables, conduits / c. Change of circumstances

c. Change of circumstances

1 If circumstances change, the servient owner may request that the route of the pipe, cable or conduit be altered in accordance with his or her interests.

2 The costs of such re-routing are normally borne by the owner of the dominant property.

3 However, where justified by special circumstances, an appropriate portion of the costs may be charged to the servient owner.

Art. 694 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 7. Rights of way / a. Necessary right of way

7. Rights of way

a. Necessary right of way

1 Where a landowner does not have adequate access from his or her land to a public thoroughfare, he or she has the right to require his or her neighbours to grant him or her the necessary right of way in exchange for full compensation.

2 This right is in the first place exercised against the neighbour who, in the light of existing ownership and access circumstances, may most reasonably be expected to grant such right of way, and secondly in respect of the neighbour for whom it is least damaging.

3 When determining the route of a right of way, the interests of both parties must be taken into consideration.

Art. 695 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 7. Rights of way / b. Other rights of way

b. Other rights of way

The cantons reserve the right to enact more detailed provisions which govern the landowner’s right to enter neighbouring land for the purposes of managing his or her own land or carrying out repairs or building works and which regulate rights of way for the purpose of tillage, watering cattle, transit over fallow ground or in the dead season, transit for timber gathering, and the like.

Art. 696 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 7. Rights of way / c. Notation in the land register

c. Notation in the land register

1 Rights of way established directly by law exist without need for registration.

2 However, if permanent they are noted in the land register.

Art. 697 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 8. Enclosure

8. Enclosure

1 The costs of enclosing a parcel of land are borne by its owner, subject to the provisions governing co-ownership of boundary markers.

2 Cantonal law may enact provisions governing the duty to enclose and the manner of enclosure.

Art. 698 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 9. Duty to maintain

9. Duty to maintain

The costs of any structures required for the exercise of rights under the law of neighbours are borne by the landowners in proportion to their interests.

Art. 699 B. Limitations / IV. Right of access and to ward off danger / 1. Access

IV. Right of access and to ward off danger

1. Access

1 Any person has the right to enter woodlands and meadows and to gather wild berries, fungi and the like to the extent permitted by local custom except where the competent authority enacts specific limited prohibitions in the interests of conservation.

2 Cantonal law may enact more detailed regulations on access to land owned by others for the purposes of hunting and fishing.

Art. 700 B. Limitations / IV. Right of access and to ward off danger / 2. Retrieval of driftage and the like

2. Retrieval of driftage and the like

1 If objects are carried onto another parcel of land by water, wind, avalanche or other force of nature or by chance event, or if animals such as livestock, swarms of bees, poultry and fish stray onto his or her property, the landowner must grant the rightful owner access to his or her land to search for and retrieve them.

2 The landowner is entitled to claim damages for any damage caused and to that end has a special lien as to such objects and animals.

Art. 701 B. Limitations / IV. Right of access and to ward off danger / 3. Trespass to ward off danger or damage

3. Trespass to ward off danger or damage

1 If a person is able to ward off imminent damage or present danger from himself or herself or others only by trespassing on land belonging to another, the latter is obliged to tolerate such trespass to the extent that such danger or damage would be considerably greater than the detriment caused by the trespass.

2 Appropriate compensation is owed for any resultant damage.

Art. 702 B. Limitations / V. Public law restrictions on ownership / 1. In general

V. Public law restrictions on ownership

1. In general

The Confederation, cantons and communes reserve the right to impose restrictions on ownership that are in the public interest, and in particular that relate to building, fire and health regulations, forestry and road services, towpaths, erection of boundary markings and triangulation pillars, land improvements, fragmentation of landholdings, consolidation of agricultural land and building land, conservation of antiquities and natural monuments, preservation of areas of natural beauty and scenic vantage points and protection of mineral springs.

Art. 7031B. Limitations / V. Public law restrictions on ownership / 2. Land improvements

2. Land improvements

1 Where it is possible to carry out land improvements, such as watercourse modifications, drainage, irrigation, reforestation, path-building, land consolidation procedures and the like, only by collective endeavour and such endeavour has been approved by the majority of the landowners owning more than half of the land involved, the other landowners are obliged to participate. Landowners who choose not to participate in the decision-making process are deemed to consent. Participation is recorded in the land register.

2 The cantons regulate the procedure. In particular, they must issue detailed rules on consolidation of landholdings.

3 Cantonal legislation may further facilitate the realisation of such land improvements and may declare that the corresponding provisions also apply to building land and to areas designated as being in permanent danger of ground displacement.2


1 Amended by Art. 121 of the Agriculture Act of 3 oct. 1951, in force since 1 Jan. 1954 (AS 1953 1073; BBl 1951 I 130).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 704 C. Rights to springs and wells / I. Spring ownership and spring rights

C. Rights to springs and wells

I. Spring ownership and spring rights

1 Springs are an integral part of the land and their ownership may be acquired only through ownership of the land from which they rise.

2 Rights to spring water on land owned by others are established as easements by entry in the land register.

3 Groundwater is deemed equivalent to springs.

Art. 705 C. Rights to springs and wells / II. Diversion of springs

II. Diversion of springs

1 Cantonal law may regulate, restrict or prohibit the diversion of spring waters to safeguard the public interest.

2 In the event of conflict between cantons, the final decision rests with the Federal Council.

Art. 706 C. Rights to springs and wells / III. Cutting off springs / 1. Damages

III. Cutting off springs

1. Damages

1 Where springs and wells that enjoy considerable use or whose waters are collected for further use are cut off, diminished or contaminated by building works, installations or other measures to the detriment of their owners or rightful users, such persons are entitled to claim damages.

2 Where the damage was done neither intentionally nor through negligence, or the injured parties are themselves at fault, the court determines the amount and manner of compensation at its discretion.

Art. 707 C. Rights to springs and wells / III. Cutting off springs / 2. Restoration

2. Restoration

1 If springs and wells that are indispensable for the exploitation or habitation of a parcel of land or for the supply of drinking water are cut off or contaminated, those affected have the right to demand that the status quo ante be restored where at all possible.

2 In other cases restoration of the status quo ante may be demanded only where this is justified by special circumstances.

Art. 708 C. Rights to springs and wells / IV. Community of spring owners

IV. Community of spring owners

1 Where springs located near to each other and belonging to different owners form a group rising from a common catchment basin, each of the owners may request that the springs be collectively captured and channelled to the rightful users in proportion to the existing volume of flow.

2 The costs of the common installations are borne by the rightful users in proportion to their respective interests.

3 If one user opposes the request, each user has the right to capture and divert his or her own spring in the normal manner, even if the volume of flow of the other springs is thereby diminished, and is liable to pay compensation only to the extent that his or her own spring is augmented by the new works.

Art. 709 C. Rights to springs and wells / V. Use of springs

V. Use of springs

The cantons have the right to determine the extent to which privately owned springs, wells and streams may also be used by neighbours and other persons for drawing water, watering livestock and the like.

Art. 710 C. Rights to springs and wells / VI. Right to use an essential water source

VI. Right to use an essential water source

1 If a parcel of land lacks the water required for domestic and farming requirements and if such water cannot be obtained from anywhere else except at an entirely disproportionate cost and effort, the owner may request that a neighbour able to spare such water without suffering hardship allow him or her a share of the latter’s spring or well to him or her in exchange for full compensation.

2 When determining which water source is thus affected, the interests of the person required to supply the water are the primary consideration.

3 Where circumstances change, a modification of the arrangement in place may be requested.

Art. 711 C. Rights to springs and wells / VII. Duty to cede / 1. Water sources

VII. Duty to cede

1. Water sources

1 Where landowners make no use of springs, wells or streams, or make very little use thereof in comparison with their potential utility, they may be required to cede them in exchange for full compensation for supplying drinking water, fire hydrants or other uses in the public interest.

2 Such compensation may take the form of water supplied from the new installation.

Art. 712 C. Rights to springs and wells / VII. Duty to cede / 2. Land

2. Land

Owners of drinking water utilities have the right to expropriate the land surrounding their springs to the extent necessary to protect them from contamination.


  Chapter Three:1  Condominium

Art. 712a A. Definition and object / I. Definition

A. Definition and object

I. Definition

1 Condominium is a form of co-ownership of immovable property that gives the co-owner the exclusive right to make sole use of specific parts of a building thereon and design the interior of such parts.

2 Each condominium owner is free to manage, use and design the structure of his or her own parts of the building as he or she wishes but must not obstruct any other condominium owners in the exercise of their own rights or in any way damage the common parts of the building, fittings and installations or impair their functional effectiveness or appearance.

3 Each condominium owner is obliged to maintain his or her parts of the building in the manner required to preserve the sound condition and good appearance of the building as a whole.

Art. 712b A. Definition and object / II. Object

II. Object

1 The object of the exclusive right may be individual storeys or parts of a storey which must be self-contained with their own access and used either as dwellings or as self-contained units of rooms used for business or other purposes, although separate ancillary rooms are allowed.

2 The condominium owner may not be granted an exclusive right to the following:

1.
the land on which the building stands and the building right by virtue of which it is constructed;
2.
the parts of the building that are vital to the soundness, structure and stability of the building as a whole or of the units of other condominium owners or that determine the outward form and appearance of the building;
3.
the fittings and installations that also serve the other condominium owners in the use of their units.

3 The deed of constitution or a subsequent agreement among the condominium owners executed in the same form may stipulate that other parts of the building are common property, failing which they are presumed to be the object of a exclusive right.

Art. 712c A. Definition and object / III. Power of disposal

III. Power of disposal

1 Condominium owners do not by law have first right of refusal in respect of a third party acquiring a share, but such right may be stipulated in the deed of constitution or by subsequent agreement and entered under priority notice in the land register.

2 Similarly, it may be stipulated that the alienation, encumbrance with usufruct or right of residence or letting of a unit is valid only if the other co-owners do not object by resolution made within 14 days of receiving notice of such transaction.

3 The objection is ineffective if made without good cause.1


1 Amended by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, in force since 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 712d B. Creation and extinction / I. Deed of constitution

B. Creation and extinction

I. Deed of constitution

1 Condominium is constituted by entry in the land register.

2 Such entry may be requested:

1.
on the basis of an agreement between the condominium owners to constitute their shares as condominium;
2.
on the basis of a declaration by the owner of the property or the holder of a distinct and permanent building right to form shares in co-ownership and to constitute the same as condominium.

3 In order to be valid, the constitution of condominium must be executed in the form of a public deed or, where provided for in a testamentary disposition or in a contract of division of estate, in the form prescribed by the law of succession.

Art. 712e B. Creation and extinction / II. Layout of the condominium units and shares in the property

II. Layout of the condominium units and shares in the property1

1 The deed of constitution must specify the manner in which the property is divided into condominium units and define the share that each unit represents of the value of the property or of the building right expressed as fractions with a common denominator.2

2 Alteration of the size of a share requires the consent of all directly involved parties and the approval of the assembly of condominium owners; however, each condominium owner is entitled to seek rectification if his or her share has been defined incorrectly in error or is no longer accurate owing to structural modifications to the building or its surroundings.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 712f B. Creation and extinction / III. Extinction

III. Extinction

1 Condominium is extinguished on the loss of the property or the building right and its deletion from the land register.

2 Such deletion may be requested in accordance with a termination agreement or by a single condominium owner holding all the shares, but it requires the consent of all persons with rights in rem to the individual units which cannot be transferred to the property as a whole without detriment.

3 Any condominium owner may request termination of the condominium where:

1.
more than half the value of the building has been destroyed and reconstruction would impose an onerous burden on him; or
2.
the building has been divided into condominium units for more than 50 years and can no longer be used in accordance with the regulations due to its poor structural condition.1

4 Condominium owners wishing to maintain the condominium may prevent such termination by buying out the others.2


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 712g C. Administration and use / I. Applicable provisions

C. Administration and use

I. Applicable provisions

1 The provisions governing co-ownership regulate the authority to take administrative action and instruct construction work.

2 Except where such provisions are mandatory, they may be replaced by others set out in the deed of constitution or adopted by unanimous resolution of the assembly of condominium owners.

3 Moreover, each condominium owner is entitled to request that a set of rules governing administration and use be drawn up and noted in the land register, such rules being binding once accepted by resolution passed by a majority of the condominium owners who together represent more than one-half of the property and being subject to amendment by the same majority even if included in the deed of constitution.

4 Any amendment to the allocation of exclusive rights of use in accordance with the regulations shall also require the consent of the condominium owners directly affected.1


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 712h C. Administration and use / II. Communal charges and costs / 1. Definition and distribution

II. Communal charges and costs

1. Definition and distribution

1 The condominium owners bear the charges in relation to the communal parts of the property and the costs of joint administration in proportion to the value of their shares.

2 In particular, such charges and costs include:

1.
regular maintenance, repairs and renovations of the communal parts of the parcel of land and the building and shared fittings and installations;
2.
administration, including remuneration of the administrator;
3.
public duties and taxes imposed collectively on the co-owners;
4.
interest and capital repayments to lenders to whom the property is pledged or to whom the condominium owners are jointly and severally liable.

3 Where specific parts of the building, fittings or installations are of little or no benefit to certain condominium owners, the allocation of shared costs must take this into account.

Art. 712i C. Administration and use / II. Communal charges and costs / 2. Liability for cost contributions / a. Statutory lien

2. Liability for cost contributions

a. Statutory lien

1 The community of condominium owners is entitled to establish a lien on each condominium owner’s unit as security for his or her portion of the shared costs over the previous three years.

2 Registration of the lien may be requested by the administrator or, where no administrator has been appointed, by any condominium owner so authorised by majority resolution or court order and by any person for whom the claim for shared costs has been distrained.

3 In other respects, the provisions governing the establishment of a building contractor’s lien apply mutatis mutandis.

Art. 712k C. Administration and use / II. Communal charges and costs / 2. Liability for cost contributions / b. Special lien

b. Special lien

The community of condominium owners has the same special lien that a lessor would have on the chattels located in the condominium owner’s unit as security for shared costs over the previous three years.

Art. 712l C. Administration and use / III. Community’s capacity to act

III. Community’s capacity to act

1 The community of condominium owners acquires under its own name the revenue derived from its administrative activities, including in particular contributions from the individual condominium owners and the resultant funds, such as the renovation fund.

2 The community of condominium owners may sue and collect debts in its own name and may be sued or subjected to debt enforcement proceedings.1


1 Amended by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, in force since 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).

Art. 712m D. Organisation / I. Assembly of condominium owners / 1. Competence and legal status

D. Organisation

I. Assembly of condominium owners

1. Competence and legal status

1 In addition to those rights stipulated in other provisions, the assembly of condominium owners has the following rights in particular:

1.
to decide on all administrative matters outside the administrator’s remit;
2.
to appoint the administrator and supervise his or her activities;
3.
to elect a committee or person to whom it may delegate administrative matters, including in particular the tasks of advising the administrator, superintending his or her management activities, and reporting and making recommendations to the assembly on such matters;
4.
to approve the budget, accounts and division of costs among the condominium owners each year;
5.
to establish a renovation fund for maintenance and renovation;
6.
to safeguard the building against fire and other risks and to take out the customary liability insurance and, furthermore, to require any condominium owner who has fitted his or her unit out at extraordinary expense to pay an additional premium unless he or she has arranged supplementary insurance for his or her own account.

2 In the absence of any specific provisions in the law, the assembly of condominium owners and its delegates are subject to the provisions on governing bodies of associations and challenges to resolutions of associations.

Art. 712n D. Organisation / I. Assembly of condominium owners / 2. Convening and chairing meetings

2. Convening and chairing meetings

1 The assembly of condominium owners is convened and chaired by the administrator, unless the assembly resolves otherwise.

2 Minutes are taken of the assembly’s resolutions and held in safekeeping by the administrator or the chairman of the meeting.

Art. 712o D. Organisation / I. Assembly of condominium owners / 3. Voting rights

3. Voting rights

1 Where a unit is owned by more than one person, these persons together have only one vote, to be cast by one of their number as their representative.

2 Similarly, the owner and the usufructuary of a unit must agree on the exercise of their voting rights, failing which the usufructuary is deemed to hold the right to vote on all administrative matters with the exception of building work carried out for merely useful or decorative purposes or to enhance comfort or convenience.

Art. 712p D. Organisation / I. Assembly of condominium owners / 4. Quorum

4. Quorum

1 The assembly of condominium owners is quorate if one half of the condominium owners representing one half of the shares in condominium, and in any event at least two condominium owners, are present or represented.

2 If the assembly is not quorate, a second meeting must be convened which may be held no earlier than ten days after the first.

3 The second meeting is quorate if one third of the condominium owners, and in any event at least two condominium owners, are present or represented.

Art. 712q D. Organisation / II. Administrator / 1. Appointment

II. Administrator

1. Appointment

1 If the assembly of condominium owners fails to appoint an administrator, any condominium owner is entitled to request the court to appoint one.

2 Other interested parties, such as the pledgee or insurer, have the same right to request court appointment of an administrator.

Art. 712r D. Organisation / II. Administrator / 2. Removal

2. Removal

1 By resolution of the assembly of condominium owners, the administrator may be removed from his or her position at any time, subject to claims for compensation.

2 If the assembly of condominium owners refuses to remove the administrator despite good cause to do so, any condominium owner may, within one month, request the court to remove him or her.

3 A court-appointed administrator may not be removed prior to expiry of the period for which he or she was appointed.

Art. 712s D. Organisation / II. Administrator / 3. Duties / a. Implementation of provisions and resolutions concerning administration and use

3. Duties

a. Implementation of provisions and resolutions concerning administration and use

1 The administrator shall take all action required for collective administration in accordance with the relevant legal provisions, the rules and resolutions passed by the assembly of condominium owners and must of his or her own accord take all measures urgently needed to prevent or remedy damage to the property.

2 He or she divides the communal costs and charges among the condominium owners, makes out the relevant invoices, collects contributions, manages the available funds and applies them as required by law.

3 He or she ensures that the condominium owners exercise their exclusive rights and use the communal parts of the property and the communal fittings and installations in accordance with the relevant legal provisions, regulations and house rules.

Art. 712t D. Organisation / II. Administrator / 3. Duties / b. External representation

b. External representation

1 The administrator shall represent the condominium owners both as a community and as individuals in all external dealings relating to communal administration within the scope of his or her statutory duties.

2 Except in summary proceedings, the administrator must obtain the prior approval of the assembly of condominium owners to act as plaintiff or defendant in civil proceedings unless the matter is urgent, in which case such approval may be obtained retrospectively.

3 Declarations, demands, judgments and court orders addressed to the community of condominium owners are deemed duly notified once they are served on the administrator at his or her domicile or at the place where the property is situated.


  Title Twenty: Chattel Ownership

Art. 713 A. Object

A. Object

Chattel ownership relates to movable physical objects and to forces of nature that may be the subject of legal rights and which do not form part of any immovable property.

Art. 714 B. Forms of acquisition / I. Transfer / 1. Delivery of possession

B. Forms of acquisition

I. Transfer

1. Delivery of possession

1 Transfer of chattel ownership requires the delivery of possession to the acquirer.

2 A person who in good faith receives possession of a chattel as owner will become its owner even if the transferor is not authorised to alienate it as soon his or her possession of it is protected according to the provisions governing possession.

Art. 715 B. Forms of acquisition / I. Transfer / 2. Reservation of ownership / a. In general

2. Reservation of ownership

a. In general

1 Reservation of ownership in respect of a chattel transferred to the acquirer is only effective provided it is entered in the official register kept by the debt enforcement office at his or her current domicile.

2 Reservation of ownership is not permitted in livestock trading.

Art. 716 B. Forms of acquisition / I. Transfer / 2. Reservation of ownership / b. Transactions involving payment by instalments

b. Transactions involving payment by instalments

An object transferred under reservation of ownership may be reclaimed by the owner only on condition that he or she reimburse any payments made for it by the acquirer after deduction of an appropriate rental charge and compensation for wear and tear.

Art. 717 B. Forms of acquisition / I. Transfer / 3. Acquisition without possession

3. Acquisition without possession

1 If as a result of a special legal relationship, the chattel remains in the transferor’s possession, this transfer of ownership is null and void in relation third parties if the underlying intention was to disadvantage them or to circumvent the provisions governing the pledging of chattels.

2 The court shall rules on this at its discretion.

Art. 718 B. Forms of acquisition / II. Appropriation / 1. Ownerless chattels

II. Appropriation

1. Ownerless chattels

Ownership of an ownerless chattel is acquired by the act of taking it into possession with the intention of becoming its owner.

Art. 719 B. Forms of acquisition / II. Appropriation / 2. Escaped animals

2. Escaped animals

1 Captured animals become ownerless if they regain their freedom and their owner fails to search for them immediately and persistently with a view to recapturing them.

2 Domesticated animals become ownerless once they regress to a feral state and no longer return to their masters.

3 Swarms of bees do not become ownerless by virtue of straying onto land belonging to others.

Art. 720 B. Forms of acquisition / III. Found property / 1. Reporting, tracing / a. In general

III. Found property

1. Reporting, tracing

a. In general1

1 A person finding a lost object must inform its owner and, if the latter is unknown, either report the find to the police or himself take appropriate steps to publicise the find and trace the owner.

2 He or she has a duty to report the find to the police if the value of the object clearly exceeds ten francs.

3 A person who finds an object in an occupied house or on premises used for public services or public transport must deposit it with the head of the household, the tenant or the supervisor.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 2002 (Article of Basic Principles: Animals), in force since 1 April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806).

Art. 720a1B. Forms of acquisition / III. Found property / 1. Reporting, tracing / b. Animals

b. Animals

1 A person who finds a lost animal must, subject to Art. 720 para. 3, inform the owner or, if the latter is unknown, report his or her find.

2 The cantons designate the authority to which such finds must be reported.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 2002 (Article of Basic Principles: Animals), in force since 1 April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806). Para. 2 comes into force on 1 April 2004.

Art. 721 B. Forms of acquisition / III. Found property / 2. Safekeeping and auction

2. Safekeeping and auction

1 A find must be held in appropriate safekeeping.

2 If it requires expensive maintenance or is susceptible to rapid deterioration, or if the police or a public body has held it for more than one year, it may be sold at public auction with the prior authorisation of the competent authority.

3 The proceeds of sale at auction replace the object.

Art. 722 B. Forms of acquisition / III. Found property / 3. Acquisition of ownership, return

3. Acquisition of ownership, return

1 A person who has discharged his or her duties as finder acquires ownership of the find if it has not been possible to trace the rightful owner within five years of the announcement or public notice being given of the find.

1bis In the case of animals kept as pets rather than for investment or commercial purposes, the period is two months.1

1ter If the finder puts the animal in a home with the intention of renouncing its ownership, on expiry of the two-month period the animal home is at liberty to dispose of the animal as it sees fit.2

2 If the find is returned to its owner, the finder is entitled to compensation for all outlays and to a suitable finder’s reward.

3 In the case of a find made in an occupied house or on premises used for public services or public transport, the head of the household, tenant or supervisor is deemed to be the finder but is not entitled to any finder’s reward.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 2002 (Article of Basic Principles: Animals), in force since 1 April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 2002 (Article of Basic Principles: Animals), in force since 1 April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806).

Art. 723 B. Forms of acquisition / III. Found property / 4. Treasure trove

4. Treasure trove

1 If an object of value is found in circumstances indicating with certainty that it has lain buried or hidden so long that it will not be possible to trace its owner, it is treated as treasure trove.

2 Subject to the provisions governing objects of scientific value, treasure trove belongs to the owner of the land or chattel where it was found.

3 The finder is entitled to an appropriate finder’s reward not exceeding one-half of the treasure’s value.

Art. 724 B. Forms of acquisition / III. Found property / 5. Objects of scientific value

5. Objects of scientific value

1 Ownerless natural specimens and antiquities of scientific value are the property of the canton on whose territory they are found.1

1bis Such objects must not be alienated without the consent of the competent cantonal authorities. They may not be purchased in good faith or acquired through adverse possession. There is no prescriptive period on the canton’s right to recover them.2

2 The owner of the land on which such objects are found is obliged to permit their excavation in exchange for compensation for the damage caused.

3 The finder, and in the case of treasure trove also the owner is entitled to an appropriate finder’s reward not exceeding one-half of the value of the find.


1 Amended by Art. 32 No 1 of the Cultural Property Transfer Act of 20 June 2003, in force since 1 June 2005 (AS 2005 1869; BBl 2002 535).
2 Inserted by Art. 32 No 1 of the Cultural Property Transfer Act of 20 June 2003, in force since 1 June 2005 (AS 2005 1869; BBl 2002 535).

Art. 725 B. Forms of acquisition / IV. Driftage

IV. Driftage

1 If chattels are carried onto a person’s property by water, wind, avalanche or other force of nature or by chance event, or if animals belonging to others stray onto his or her property, such a person has the rights and obligations of the finder of a lost object.

2 If a swarm of bees flies into an occupied beehive belonging to another person, the owner of that hive acquires said swarm without obligation to compensate.

Art. 726 B. Forms of acquisition / V. Processing

V. Processing

1 If a person has processed or reworked an object that does not belong to him, the newly created object becomes the property of that person if the work is more valuable than the material, failing which it belongs to the original owner.

2 Where the person doing such work did not act in good faith, the court may award the newly created object to the original owner even if his or her work is more valuable than the material.

3 Claims for damages and unjust enrichment are reserved.

Art. 727 B. Forms of acquisition / VI. Joining and mixing chattels

VI. Joining and mixing chattels

1 If chattels belonging to different owners are mixed or joined together such that they may no longer be separated without substantial damage or prohibitive labour and expense, those involved acquire joint ownership rights in the new object in proportion to the value of the constituent parts at the time that they were mixed or joined.

2 If one chattel is mixed with or joined to another such that it acquires the character of a secondary component of the latter, the entire object belongs to the owner of the primary component.

3 Claims for damages and unjust enrichment are reserved.

Art. 728 B. Forms of acquisition / VII. Adverse possession

VII. Adverse possession

1 If a person has possessed a chattel belonging to another person uninterruptedly and without challenge for five years believing in good faith that he or she owns it, he or she becomes its owner by adverse possession.

1bis In the case of animals kept as pets rather than for investment or commercial purposes, the period is two months.1

1ter Subject to exceptions prescribed by law, the time limit for adverse possession in the case of objects of cultural heritage within the meaning of Art. 2 para. 1 of the Cultural Property Transfer Act of 20 June 20032 is 30 years.3

2 Involuntary loss of possession does not interrupt adverse possession provided the possessor regains the chattel within one year or by means of legal action brought within the same time limit.

3 The computation, interruption and suspension of adverse possession time limits are governed mutatis mutandis by the provisions on the prescription of debts.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 2002 (Article of Basic Principles: Animals), in force since 1 April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806).
2 SR 444.1
3 Inserted by Art. 32 No 1 of the Cultural Property Transfer Act of 20 June 2003, in force since 1 June 2005 (AS2005 1869; BBl 2002 535).

Art. 729 C. Loss

C. Loss

Even where possession has been lost, ownership of the chattel is not extinguished until the owner relinquishes his or her right or until another person subsequently acquires ownership.


  Division Two: Limited Rights in rem

  Title Twenty-One: Easements and Real Burdens

  Chapter One: Easements

Art. 730 A. Object

A. Object

1 A parcel of land may be encumbered in favour of another property such that the servient owner must permit the owner of the dominant property to exercise certain rights over it to or may not exercise certain of the rights attaching to his or her property for the benefit of the owner of the dominant property.

2 An obligation to carry out certain acts may only be accessory to an easement. Any person acquiring the dominant or servient property is only bound by such an obligation if it is based on an entry in the land register.1


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 731 B. Creation and extinction / I. Creation / 1. Registration

B. Creation and extinction

I. Creation

1. Registration

1 An easement is created by entry in the land register.

2 The provisions governing land ownership apply to the acquisition or registration of an easement, except where otherwise provided.

3 Adverse possession of an easement is possible only in respect of parcels of land which may be possessed adversely.

Art. 7321B. Creation and extinction / I. Creation / 2. Legal transaction

2. Legal transaction

1 The legal transaction creating an easement is only valid if done as a public deed.

2 If in the circumstances the exercise of the easement is limited to part of the dominant property and if the geographical location is not sufficiently identifiable in the certificate of legal title, it must be shown in a diagram in an extract of the plan for the land register.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 733 B. Creation and extinction / I. Creation / 3. Creation in favour of own property

3. Creation in favour of own property

The owner of a property may create an easement on a property in favour of another property which he or she also owns.

Art. 734 B. Creation and extinction / II. Extinction / 1. In general

II. Extinction

1. In general

An easement is extinguished with the deletion of its registration or the complete loss of either the servient or the dominant property.

Art. 735 B. Creation and extinction / II. Extinction / 2. Amalgamation

2. Amalgamation

1 If the beneficiary of an easement becomes the servient owner, he or she may have the easement deleted from the land register.

2 If it is not deleted, the easement remains in place as a right in rem.

Art. 736 B. Creation and extinction / II. Extinction / 3. By court order

3. By court order

1 If an easement is of no value to the dominant property, the servient owner may request its deletion.

2 If the dominant property still derives a benefit from the easement but this is minor and disproportionate to the encumbrance, the easement may be partly or wholly cancelled in return for compensation.

Art. 737 C. Nature / I. Scope / 1. In general

C. Nature

I. Scope

1. In general

1 The beneficiary is entitled to take all measures necessary to preserve and exercise the easement.

2 However, he or she is obliged to exercise his or her rights as benignly as possible.

3 The servient owner must not do anything to obstruct the exercise of the easement or render it more difficult.

Art. 738 C. Nature / I. Scope / 2. As defined by land register entry

2. As defined by land register entry

1 The land register entry for an easement defines the scope of the easement, provided it clearly indicates the attendant rights and duties.

2 Within the limits of such entry, the scope of the easement may be inferred from the reason for its creation or from the fact that it has been exercised unchallenged and in good faith for some length of time.

Art. 739 C. Nature / I. Scope / 3. If needs change

3. If needs change

Additional encumbrances may not be imposed on the servient owner if the needs of the dominant property change.

Art. 740 C. Nature / I. Scope / 4. Cantonal law and local custom

4. Cantonal law and local custom

In the absence of any other specific arrangement in a given case, cantonal law and local custom shall govern rights of way, such as footpaths, bridle paths, carriageways, field paths, rights of transit in the dead season or for carting wood, rights of pasture, of transit for watering cattle or for irrigation and similar rights.

Art. 740a1C. Nature / I. Scope / 5. In the case of two or more beneficiaries

5. In the case of two or more beneficiaries

1 If two or more beneficiaries benefit from common fixtures based on the same easement and if no other agreement exists, the provisions applicable to co-owners apply by analogy.

2 The right to leave the community by waiving the easement may be excluded for a maximum of 30 years by agreement in the form specified for the easement agreement. The agreement may be noted in the land register.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 741 C. Nature / II. Duty of maintenance

II. Duty of maintenance

1 The beneficiary is responsible for maintaining any fixtures required for the exercise of an easement.

2 If the fixture also serves the interests of the servient owner, both parties are responsible for its maintenance in proportion to their interests. An alternative arrangement is binding on the acquirer of the dominant and the acquirer of the servient property if there is proof thereof in the land register.1


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 742 C. Nature / III. Relocation of the encumbrance

III. Relocation of the encumbrance1

1 If only part of a property is affected by the exercise of an easement, the servient owner is entitled, provided he or she can show a legitimate interest and bears the cost, to request that the right be transferred to another location which is no less suitable for the beneficiary.

2 He or she is entitled to do so even if the easement is recorded in the land register as being in a specific location.

3 ...2


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Repealed by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), with effect from 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 7431C. Nature / IV. Partition of a property

IV. Partition of a property

1 If the dominant property is partitioned, the easement normally continues to exist in favour of each part of the dominant property.

2 If according to the documentary evidence or the circumstances the exercise of the easement is limited to individual parts of the property, it must be deleted in respect of the other parts.

3 The revision procedure is governed by the regulations on the deletion and amendment of land register entries.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 7441

1 Repealed by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), with effect from 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).


  Chapter Two: Usufruct and other Personal Servitudes

Art. 745 A. Usufruct / I. Object

A. Usufruct

I. Object

1 A usufruct may be held over chattels, immovable property, rights or assets.

2 Unless otherwise provided, it confers complete enjoyment of the object on the usufructuary.

3 A usufruct of immovable property may be limited to a specific part thereof.1


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 June 2003, in force since 1 Jan. 2004 (AS 2003 4121; BBl 2002 4721).

Art. 746 A. Usufruct / II. Establishment / 1. In general

II. Establishment

1. In general

1 A usufruct of chattels or debts is established by transfer to the acquirer and a usufruct of immovable property by entry in the land register.

2 The provisions governing ownership apply to the acquisition of a usufruct of chattels and of immovable property as well as to entry in the land register, except where otherwise provided.

Art. 7471A. Usufruct / II. Establishment / 2. ...

2. ...


1 Repealed by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, with effect from 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 748 A. Usufruct / III. Extinction / 1. Grounds

III. Extinction

1. Grounds

1 Usufruct is extinguished in the event of the complete loss of the object to which it applies and in the case of immovable property on deletion of the entry from the land register where the entry was required to establish the usufruct.

2 Other grounds for extinction, such as the passage of time or the renunciation or death of the usufructuary, confer on the owner only a right to apply for the deletion of the entry.

3 A statutory usufruct ends on cessation of its cause.

Art. 749 A. Usufruct / III. Extinction / 2. Duration

2. Duration

1 Usufruct ceases with the death of the usufructuary and in the case of legal entities on their dissolution.

2 In the case of legal entities, however, it may not last more than 100 years.

Art. 750 A. Usufruct / III. Extinction / 3. Replacement on extinction of usufruct

3. Replacement on extinction of usufruct

1 The owner of the object of a usufruct is not obliged to replace or restore the object if it has been destroyed.

2 If it is replaced or restored the usufruct is restored with it.

3 If an object that has been destroyed is replaced, as may be the case with compulsory purchase and insurance indemnities, the usufruct continues on the replacement object.

Art. 751 A. Usufruct / III. Extinction / 4. Return / a. Duty

4. Return

a. Duty

When the usufruct ends, the person in possession of the object must return it to the owner.

Art. 752 A. Usufruct / III. Extinction / 4. Return / b. Liability

b. Liability

1 The usufructuary is liable for complete loss or deterioration of the object, unless he or she shows that he or she was not at fault.

2 He or she must replace any items which have been used up if such consumption is not intrinsic to the use of the object.

3 He or she is not obliged to compensate for any depreciation caused by the proper use of the object.

Art. 753 A. Usufruct / III. Extinction / 4. Return / c. Costs

c. Costs

1 If the usufructuary has of his or her own free will incurred costs or made improvements, on return of the object he or she may request compensation in accordance with the provisions governing agency without authority.

2 He or she is entitled to remove any fixtures he or she has installed for which the owner is not prepared to pay compensation; he or she is, however, obliged to restore the object to its previous condition.

Art. 754 A. Usufruct / III. Extinction / 5. Prescription of compensation rights

5. Prescription of compensation rights

The owner’s right to compensation for alterations or depreciation and the usufructuary’s right to compensation for expenditure or to remove fixtures prescribe one year after the return of the object.

Art. 755 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 1. Rights of the usufructuary / a. In general

IV. Scope

1. Rights of the usufructuary

a. In general

1 The usufructuary has the rights of possession, use and enjoyment of the object.

2 He or she is responsible for looking after it.

3 In the exercise of these rights, he or she must exercise reasonable care.

Art. 756 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 1. Rights of the usufructuary / b. Natural fruits

b. Natural fruits

1 Natural fruits belong to the usufructuary if they have ripened during the period of the usufruct.

2 The person who has cultivated the land is entitled to claim equitable compensation for his or her costs from the person who receives the ripe fruits, whereby this compensation should not exceed their value.

3 Constituent parts of the usufruct other than fruits or produce belong to the owner.

Art. 757 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 1. Rights of the usufructuary / c. Interest

c. Interest

Interest on usufructuary capital and other periodic returns accrue to the usufructuary from the day on which the usufruct begins until the day on which it ends, even if they mature at a later date.

Art. 758 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 1. Rights of the usufructuary / d. Assignability

d. Assignability

1 Unless it is a strictly personal right, the exercise of the usufruct may be assigned to another person.

2 The owner is entitled to assert his or her rights directly against such person.

Art. 759 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 2. Rights of the owner / a. Supervision

2. Rights of the owner

a. Supervision

The owner may object to any unlawful or inappropriate use of the object.

Art. 760 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 2. Rights of the owner / b. Security

b. Security

1 The owner is entitled to request security from the usufructuary providing he or she may show that his or her rights are jeopardised.

2 He or she is entitled to request security without such showing and already before transfer where consumable objects or securities are the object of the usufruct.

3 If securities are the object of the usufruct, their deposit constitutes sufficient security.

Art. 761 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 2. Rights of the owner / c. Security in the case of gifts and statutory usufruct

c. Security in the case of gifts and statutory usufruct

1 A person who has transferred an object as a gift while reserving a personal right of usufruct may not be required to provide security.

2 The obligation to provide security in the case of statutory usufruct is subject to the specific rules governing the legal relationship.

Art. 762 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 2. Rights of the owner / d. Consequence of failure to provide security

d. Consequence of failure to provide security

If the usufructuary fails to provide security within the reasonable time limit set for that purpose, or if he or she persists in using the object unlawfully despite the owner’s objections, the court may dispossess him or her of the object until further notice and appoint a trustee.

Art. 763 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 3. Inventory

3. Inventory

The owner and the usufructuary have the right at any time to request that a publicly notarised inventory of the objects subject to the usufruct be drawn up at their joint expense.

Art. 764 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 4. Costs / a. Preservation of the object

4. Costs

a. Preservation of the object

1 The usufructuary must preserve the object in its original condition and of his or her own accord carry out such repairs and renovations as constitute normal maintenance.

2 If more substantial work or measures are necessary to protect the object, the usufructuary must inform the owner and allow such work to be carried out.

3 If the owner does not attend to the matter, the usufructuary is authorised to take the necessary steps at the owner’s expense.

Art. 765 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 4. Costs / b. Maintenance and administration

b. Maintenance and administration

1 The usufructuary must bear the costs of the normal maintenance and administration of the object, the interest on the attendant debt and taxes and other duties for the duration of his or her rights over the object.

2 If the taxes and duties are payable by the owner, the usufructuary must compensate him or her to the same extent.

3 All other charges are borne by the owner, but if the usufructuary does not advance the owner the necessary funds on request, he or she is entitled to dispose of parts of the usufruct for this purpose.

Art. 766 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 4. Costs / c. Duty to pay interest on usufruct of assets

c. Duty to pay interest on usufruct of assets

In the case of a usufruct of assets, the usufructuary must pay interest on the debts but, where justified in the circumstances, is entitled on request to be released from that obligation by redemption of the debt so that afterwards the usufruct is confined to the remainder of the assets.

Art. 767 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 4. Costs / d. Insurance

d. Insurance

1 The usufructuary must insure the object in favour of the owner against fire and other risks to the extent such insurance is required under the duty of care required by local custom.

2 Where this is the case, and also where a usufruct is established on an already insured object, the usufructuary bears the costs of the insurance for the duration of the usufruct.

Art. 768 A. Usufruct / V. Special cases / 1. Land / a. Fruits

V. Special cases

1. Land

a. Fruits

1 The usufructuary of immovable property must ensure that it is not exploited beyond the normal limits by the type of use to which it is put.

2 To the extent that fruits are collected beyond such limits they belong to the owner.

Art. 769 A. Usufruct / V. Special cases / 1. Land / b. Use

b. Use

1 The usufructuary must not change the intended use of the immovable property in a manner that is significantly detrimental to the owner.

2 He or she must neither transform nor substantially modify the object.

3 He or she may dig quarries, marl pits, peat cuttings and the like only after giving prior notice to the owner and on condition that the intended use of the immovable property is not substantially changed.

Art. 770 A. Usufruct / V. Special cases / 1. Land / c. Woodland

c. Woodland

1 The usufructuary of woodland is entitled to farm it within the limits of a reasonable business plan.

2 Both owner and usufructuary may require compliance with a plan which takes due account of their rights.

3 Where there is large-scale loss of woodland caused by storm, snow, fire, insect infestation or other factors, either the exploitation must gradually be reduced or the business plan adapted to the changed circumstances; income realised from the clearing of timber must be invested at interest and serves as compensation for the loss of woodland.

Art. 771 A. Usufruct / V. Special cases / 1. Land / d. Mines

d. Mines

The provisions governing the usufruct of woodland apply mutatis mutandis to the usufruct of objects, such as mines, whose use involves the extraction of substances from the earth.

Art. 772 A. Usufruct / V. Special cases / 2. Consumables and valued chattels

2. Consumables and valued chattels

1 In the absence of an agreement to the contrary, the usufructuary becomes the owner of consumable objects but is liable to replace the value they had at the beginning of the usufruct.

2 Where any other chattels which have been valued are transferred to the usufructuary he or she may, in the absence of an agreement to the contrary, freely dispose of them but is liable for their replacement if he or she exercises such right.

3 Agricultural equipment, herds of animals, stores of goods and the like may be replaced with objects of the same kind and quality.

Art. 773 A. Usufruct / V. Special cases / 3. Claims / a. Scope

3. Claims

a. Scope

1 A usufruct of debts entitles the usufructuary to retain the realised revenue.

2 Notices of termination to the debtor and dispositions relating to securities subject to a usufruct must be made jointly by the creditor and the usufructuary; notices of termination by the debtor must be addressed to both.

3 If a debt is at risk, the creditor and the usufructuary have a mutual right to request each other’s consent to such measures as are required to ensure diligent administration.

Art. 774 A. Usufruct / V. Special cases / 3. Claims / b. Repayments and reinvestment

b. Repayments and reinvestment

1 If the debtor is not specifically authorised to repay either the creditor or the usufructuary, he or she must pay them jointly or deposit the amount.

2 The benefit received, such as the repayment of the principal, if under the usufruct.

3 Both creditor and usufructuary are entitled to a secure, interest-bearing reinvestment of the principal.

Art. 775 A. Usufruct / V. Special cases / 3. Claims / c. Right to assignment

c. Right to assignment

1 The usufructuary has the right to request the assignment of the debts and securities over which he or she has a usufruct within three months of the beginning thereof.

2 Once assignment has been effected, he or she is liable to the former creditor for the value of the debts and securities as at the date of assignment and is required to provide security for that amount unless waived by the creditor.

3 If the creditor has not waived his or her right to security, the assignment becomes effective only once security has been posted.

Art. 776 B. Right of residence / I. In general

B. Right of residence

I. In general

1 The right of residence is the right to live in all or part of a building.

2 It is neither transferable nor heritable.

3 It is subject to the provisions governing usufruct unless the law provides otherwise.

Art. 777 B. Right of residence / II. Rights of the usufructuary

II. Rights of the usufructuary

1 The scope of the right of residence is generally tailored to the personal requirements of the usufructuary.

2 However, unless the right is expressly restricted to the person of the holder, he or she may share the residence with his or her family and household.

3 If the right of residence is limited to part of a building, the holder may use the fittings and installations intended for common use.

Art. 778 B. Right of residence / III. Maintenance costs

III. Maintenance costs

1 If the right of residence is exclusive, the usufructuary bears the costs of ordinary maintenance.

2 If the right of residence is exercised jointly with the owner, the latter bears the maintenance costs.

Art. 779 C. Building right / I. Object and entry in the land register

C. Building right

I. Object and entry in the land register1

1 Immovable property may be encumbered with an easement entitling a third party to erect or maintain a construction above or below ground on such land.

2 Unless otherwise agreed, this right is transferable and heritable.

3 If the building right has the character of a distinct and permanent right it may be recorded in the land register as immovable property.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 March 1965, in force since 1 July 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).

Art. 779a1C. Building right / II. Legal transaction

II. Legal transaction

1 The legal transaction creating a building right is only valid if done as a public deed.

2 If the remuneration for the building right and any other contractual provisions should be noted in the land register, they are also only valid if done as a public deed.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 March 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969). Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 779b1C. Building right / III. Nature, scope and noting

III. Nature, scope and noting2

1 Contractual provisions on the nature and scope of a building right, such as location, design, size and purpose of the buildings, as well as on the use of land which, although not built on, is used in the exercise of the building right, are binding on every new owner of the right and the servient property.

2 Additional contractual provisions may be noted in the land register, if the parties so agree.3


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 March 1965, in force since 1 July 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).
2 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
3 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 779c1C. Building right / IV. Consequences of expiry / 1. Reversion

IV. Consequences of expiry

1. Reversion

When the building right expires, any existing construction reverts to the landowner and becomes an integral part of his or her parcel of land.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 March 1965, in force since 1 July 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).

Art. 779d1C. Building right / IV. Consequences of expiry / 2. Compensation

2. Compensation

1 The landowner must pay the holder of the expired right adequate compensation for the buildings which have reverted to his or her ownership, but such compensation is subject to the outstanding claims of creditors to whom the building right was pledged as security and is not payable to the holder of the building right without their consent.

2 If the compensation has neither been paid nor secured, the holder of the expired right or a creditor to whom the building right was pledged as security may request that a mortgage right be registered in place of and with the same rank as the expired right as security for the compensation claim.

3 Such registration must be made within three months of expiry of the building right.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 March 1965, in force since 1 July 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).

Art. 779e1

1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 March 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969). Repealed by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), with effect from 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 779f1C. Building right / V. Premature reversion / 1. Prerequisites

V. Premature reversion

1. Prerequisites

If the holder of the building right grossly violates his or her right in rem or his or her contractual obligations, the owner is entitled to premature reversion by requesting that the building right with all rights and encumbrances be transferred back to him or her.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 March 1965, in force since 1 July 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).

Art. 779g1C. Building right / V. Premature reversion / 2. Exercising the right of reversion

2. Exercising the right of reversion

1 The right of reversion may be exercised only provided adequate compensation is paid for the reverting buildings, the amount payable being susceptible to reduction if the holder of the building right is at fault.

2 The building right will not be transferred to the owner until the compensation has been paid or secured.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 March 1965, in force since 1 July 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).

Art. 779h1C. Building right / V. Premature reversion / 3. Other applicable cases

3. Other applicable cases

The provisions governing the exercise of the right of reversion apply to all rights reserved by the landowner to terminate or reclaim the building right prematurely in the event of breach of duty.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 March 1965, in force since 1 July 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).

Art. 779i1C. Building right / VI. Liability for remuneration for the right / 1. Right to establish a lien

VI. Liability for remuneration for the right

1. Right to establish a lien

1 Provided the building right is recorded in the land register, the landowner is entitled to established a lien thereon against each current holder as security for up to three annual payments.

2 Where the remuneration does not consist of equal annual payments, the landowner is entitled to record a statutory lien for an amount aggregating three annual payments.


1 Inserted by section I of the FA of 19 March 1965, in force since 1 July 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).

Art. 779k1C. Building right / VI. Liability for remuneration for the right / 2. Registration

2. Registration

1 The lien may be recorded at any time during the existence of the building right and is exempt from deletion in compulsory sale proceedings.

2 The provisions governing recording of a building contractor’s lien apply mutatis mutandis.


1 Inserted by section I of the FA of 19 March 1965, in force since 1 July 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).

Art. 779l1C. Building right / VII. Maximum duration

VII. Maximum duration

1 A building right may be established as a distinct right for a maximum of 100 years.

2 It may be prolonged at any time for a further period of up to 100 years in the same form as that required for its establishment, but any obligation to do so stipulated in advance is not binding.


1 Inserted by section I of the FA of 19 March 1965, in force since 1 July 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).

Art. 780 D. Right of access to water sources

D. Right of access to water sources

1 The right of access to a water source on a parcel of land owned by another encumbers such land with a servitude permitting the drawing and channelling-off of water.

2 Unless otherwise agreed, the right is transferable and heritable.

3 If the right of access to water is distinct and permanent, it may be recorded in the land register as immovable property.

Art. 781 E. Other servitudes

E. Other servitudes

1 An owner may establish other servitudes on his or her property in favour of any person or group if such servitudes meet a particular need, such as rights of access for shooting practice or rights of way.

2 Unless otherwise agreed, such servitudes are non-transferable and their nature and scope is based on the beneficiaries’ normal needs.

3 In other respects they are subject to the provisions governing easements.

Art. 781a1F. Judicial measures

F. Judicial measures

The beneficiaries of an easement recorded in the land register are subject by analogy to the provisions on judicial measures in the event that the owner cannot be found or in the absence of the required management bodies of a legal entity.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).


  Chapter Three: Real Burdens

Art. 782 A. Object

A. Object

1 A real burden obliges an owner of immovable property to fulfil an obligation to a beneficiary for which he or she is liable solely with the immovable property.

2 The current owner of another property may be designated as the beneficiary.

3 Other than in the case of public law real burdens, a real burden may have as its object only one obligation, which is determined either by the nature of the servient property or the economic needs of the benefited property.1


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 783 B. Establishment and extinction / I. Establishment / 1. Registration and form of acquisition

B. Establishment and extinction

I. Establishment

1. Registration and form of acquisition

1 A real burden is established by recording in the land register.

2 The entry must stipulate a total value for the real burden denominated in Swiss currency which, in the case of periodic payments and in the absence of any agreement to the contrary, shall equal twenty times the annual payment.

3 The provisions governing land ownership apply to the acquisition or registration of real burdens, unless otherwise provided.

Art. 7841B. Establishment and extinction / I. Establishment / 2. Public law real burdens

2. Public law real burdens

The establishment of public law real burdens and their effect in relation to third parties acting in good faith is governed by analogy by the provisions of cantonal law on statutory liens.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 7851

1 Repealed by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), with effect from 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 786 B. Establishment and extinction / II. Extinction / 1. In general

II. Extinction

1. In general

1 A real burden is extinguished on deletion of the entry or on the complete loss of the servient property.

2 In the case of redemption, replacement or other causes of extinction, the burdened owner acquires a right against the beneficiary for the deletion of the entry.

Art. 787 B. Establishment and extinction / II. Extinction / 2. Redemption / a. By the creditor

2. Redemption

a. By the creditor

1 The creditor may request redemption of the real burden by agreement and also:1

1.2
if the servient property has been divided and the creditor does not accept the transfer of the debt to the divided parts;
2.
if the owner reduces the value of the land without providing other security by way of replacement;
3.
if the debtor is in arrears for three years’ worth of performance.

2 If the creditor requests redemption due to the division of the property, the he or she must give one year’s notice of termination within one month of the transfer becoming legally binding.3


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
3 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 788 B. Establishment and extinction / II. Extinction / 2. Redemption / b. By the debtor

b. By the debtor

1 The debtor may request redemption of the real burden by agreement, and also:

1.
if the beneficiary fails to abide by the agreement establishing the real burden;
2.
if the real burden has been in existence for thirty years, even where a longer duration or a charge in perpetuity was agreed.

2 If the debtor wishes to redeem the charge after thirty years, he or she must in every case give notice of termination one year in advance.

3 The real burden may not be redeemed in such manner if it is linked with a perpetual easement.

Art. 789 B. Establishment and extinction / II. Extinction / 2. Redemption / c. Redemption sum

c. Redemption sum

The redemption sum is equal to the amount recorded in the land register as the total value of the real burden, unless its real value is shown to be less.

Art. 790 B. Establishment and extinction / II. Extinction / 3. Prescription

3. Prescription

1 A real burden is not subject to prescription.

2 Each individual obligation is subject to prescription from the time it becomes the obligor’s personal debt.

Art. 791 C. Scope / I. Creditor’s rights

C. Scope

I. Creditor’s rights

1 The real burden creditor has no personal claim against the debtor, but only the right to satisfaction from the servient property.

2 However, three years after it if due, each individual obligation becomes a personal obligation for which the property is no longer liable.

Art. 792 C. Scope / II. Debt liability

II. Debt liability

1 If the land changes ownership, the new owner automatically becomes the obligor under the real burden.

2 If the land is divided, the owners of the divided parts become debtors under the real burden. The debt is apportioned over the divided parts of the property in accordance with the provisions on mortgage contracts.1


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).


  Title Twenty-Two: Mortgages

  Chapter One: General Provisions

Art. 793 A. Requirements / I. Types

A. Requirements

I. Types

1 A mortgage may be created on immovable property in the form of a mortgage contract or a mortgage certificate.1

2 No other types of mortgage are permitted.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 794 A. Requirements / II. Form of the debt / 1. Amount

II. Form of the debt

1. Amount

1 Whenever a mortgage is created, a specific amount denominated in Swiss currency must be indicated as the debt.

2 If the amount of the debt is unspecified, a maximum amount must be indicated up to which the property is liable for all claims of the creditor.

Art. 795 A. Requirements / II. Form of the debt / 2. Interest

2. Interest

1 The interest payable may be set at any level at the parties’ discretion within the legal limits imposed to prevent abusive interest rates.

2 Cantonal law may provide for a maximum permissible interest rate for debts secured by mortgages.

Art. 796 A. Requirements / III. Immovable property / 1. Property subject to a charge

III. Immovable property

1. Property subject to a charge

1 A mortgage may be created only on immovable property recorded in the land register.

2 The cantons may prohibit or enact special provisions to regulate the creation of mortgages over publicly owned land or over common land and pastures owned by corporations, and over any associated rights of use.

Art. 797 A. Requirements / III. Immovable property / 2. Specification / a. In the case of a single property

2. Specification

a. In the case of a single property

1 Where a mortgage is created, the immovable property that it encumbers must be clearly specified.

2 Parts of a property may not be made subject to a mortgage unless the division of the property has been recorded in the land register.

Art. 798 A. Requirements / III. Immovable property / 2. Specification / b. In the case of more than one property

b. In the case of more than one property

1 A mortgage right may be created on two or more properties for a single debt provided the properties are all owned by the same person or by debtors who are jointly and severally liable.

2 In all other cases where more than one property is made subject to a mortgage as security for a single debt, each of the properties shall be encumbered for a specified portion of the total debt.

3 Unless otherwise agreed, the total amount secured by the mortgage is divided in proportion to the values of the properties.

Art. 798a1A. Requirements / III. Immovable property / 3. Agricultural properties

3. Agricultural properties

The Federal Act of 4 October 19912 on Rural Land Rights applies to the establishment of mortgages over agricultural properties.


1 Inserted by Art. 92 No 1 of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on Rural Land Rights, in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1410; BBl 1988 III 953).
2 SR 211.412.11

Art. 799 B. Creation and extinction / I. Creation / 1. Registration

B. Creation and extinction

I. Creation

1. Registration

1 Subject to exceptions provided by law, a mortgage is created by its recording in the land register.

2 A legal transaction creating a mortgage is valid only if done as a public deed.1


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 800 B. Creation and extinction / I. Creation / 2. In the case of joint ownership

2. In the case of joint ownership

1 In the case of joint ownership of a property, each joint owner may create a mortgage over his or her share.

2 In the case of collective ownership, the property may be made subject to a mortgage only as a whole and in the name of all co-owners.

Art. 801 B. Creation and extinction / II. Extinction

II. Extinction

1 A mortgage is extinguished on deletion of the entry or the complete loss of the property.

2 Extinction as a result of compulsory purchase is governed by federal and cantonal compulsory purchase law.

Art. 802 B. Creation and extinction / III. Charges on consolidated land / 1. Transfer of liens

III. Charges on consolidated land

1. Transfer of liens

1 In the case of land consolidation procedures carried out with the assistance or under the supervision of the public authorities, the mortgage rights assigned are transferred with the same ranking to the land allotted by way of replacement.

2 Where one parcel of land replaces several parcels which are subject to a mortgage as security for different debts, or not all of which are subject to a mortgage, the liens will be applied to the single parcel of land and their ranking preserved wherever possible.

Art. 803 B. Creation and extinction / III. Charges on consolidated land / 2. Redemption by the debtor

2. Redemption by the debtor

The debtor is entitled to redeem liens on parcels of land involved in a land consolidation procedure by giving three months’ notice expiring on the date on which such consolidation takes effect.

Art. 804 B. Creation and extinction / III. Charges on consolidated land / 3. Monetary compensation

3. Monetary compensation

1 Where monetary compensation is received in connection with the consolidation of parcels of land subject to mortgages, such funds are distributed among the creditors according to their rank or, if of equal rank, in proportion to the size of their claims.

2 Such compensation must not be paid to the debtor without the creditors’ consent if it exceeds one-twentieth of the secured debt, or if the new parcel of land no longer provides sufficient security.

Art. 805 C. Effect / I. Extent of security

C. Effect

I. Extent of security

1 A mortgage right encumbers the entire property including all its constituent parts and accessories.

2 If accessories, such as machines or hotel furnishings, are expressly listed in the mortgage agreement and noted as such in the land register, they are treated accordingly unless it is shown that the law precludes their qualification as accessories.

3 Rights of third parties to the accessories are reserved.

Art. 806 C. Effect / II. Rent

II. Rent

1 If the mortgaged property is let, the mortgage covers the rent claims which accrue between the date on which foreclosure proceedings are commenced or the date on which the debtor is declared bankrupt and the date of realisation.

2 Tenants and lessees are bound by the mortgage only once they have been informed of the enforcement proceedings or the bankruptcy has been published.

3 Transactions by the property owner involving claims for unmatured rent and any actions of distraint by other creditors are invalid in respect of any mortgage creditor who initiated foreclosure proceedings before the rent claims matured.

Art. 807 C. Effect / III. Prescription

III. Prescription

Claims for which a mortgage has been recorded in the land register are not subject to prescription.

Art. 808 C. Effect / IV. Safeguarding powers / 1. In the event of a reduction in value / a. Court order and action by the creditor

IV. Safeguarding powers

1. In the event of a reduction in value

a. Court order and action by the creditor

1 If the owner reduces the value of the mortgaged property, the creditor may request that the court prohibit any further detrimental action.

2 The creditor may be authorised by the court to take appropriate measures and may do so even without authorisation if there is risk in delay.

3 He or she may request compensation for the costs of such measures from the owner and shall acquire a lien on the property for the corresponding amount. This lien does not require to be recorded in the land register and takes precedence over all other registered encumbrances.1

4 If the amount of the lien exceeds 1000 francs and the lien is not recorded in the land register within four months of completion of the measures, it may not cited in opposition to third parties who rely on the land register in good faith.2


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 809 C. Effect / IV. Safeguarding powers / 1. In the event of a reduction in value / b. Security, restoration, redemption

b. Security, restoration, redemption

1 If the property has depreciated, the creditor has the right to request that the debtor secure his or her debts or restore the property to its previous state.

2 He or she may also demand security in the case of imminent depreciation.

3 If the debtor does not comply within the time limit set by the court, the creditor may request redemption of such portion of the debt as is appropriate to compensate for the reduced degree of security.

Art. 810 C. Effect / IV. Safeguarding powers / 2. Depreciation without owner’s fault

2. Depreciation without owner’s fault

1 In the event of depreciation without fault on the owner’s part, the creditor has a right to security or redemption only if the owner is indemnified for the damage.

2 However, the creditor is entitled to take measures to prevent or eliminate the depreciation. He or she shall acquire a lien on the property for his or her costs which does not render the owner personally liable. This lien does not require to be recorded in the land register and takes precedence over all other registered encumbrances.1

3 If the amount of the lien exceeds 1000 francs and the lien is not recorded in the land register within four months of completion of the measures, it may not be cited in opposition to third parties who rely on the land register in good faith.2


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 811 C. Effect / IV. Safeguarding powers / 3. Disposal of minor portions of the property

3. Disposal of minor portions of the property

If a part of the property worth less than one-twentieth of the secured debt is disposed of, the creditor may not refuse to release this portion from liability under the lien provided a proportionate repayment of the debt is made or the rest of the property provides him or her with sufficient security.

Art. 812 C. Effect / V. Further encumbrances

V. Further encumbrances

1 Any waiver by the owner of right to create further charges over the servient property is non-binding.

2 If, after the mortgage right has been created, the immovable property is encumbered with an easement or a real burden without the mortgage creditor’s consent, the mortgage right takes precedence over the later encumbrances, which will be deleted if, in the event of enforcement proceedings, their existence is prejudicial to the mortgage creditor.

3 However, the beneficiary of the easement or real burden has a claim for payment of the value of his or her right out of the enforcement proceeds, such claim taking precedence over the beneficiaries of encumbrances subsequently recorded in the land register.

Art. 813 C. Effect / VI. Rank / 1. Effect of rank

VI. Rank

1. Effect of rank

1 A mortgage is confined to the rank indicated in the entry.

2 Mortgage rights may be established in a second or any lower rank provided the amount taking precedence is specified in the entry.

Art. 814 C. Effect / VI. Rank / 2. Ranking

2. Ranking

1 If mortgage rights of different rank are created on an immovable property, any deletion does not entitle the beneficiaries of lower-ranking mortgage to advance in rank.

2 The owner may create another mortgage in place of one which has been deleted.

3 An agreement providing for mortgage creditors to advance in rank only has in rem effect where it is recorded as a priority notice in the land register.

Art. 815 C. Effect / VI. Rank / 3. Vacant ranks

3. Vacant ranks

If a subordinate mortgage right is created and no higher-ranking mortgage exists, or if the debtor has not yet made use of an existing higher-ranking right to create a mortgage, or if a precedent claim is worth less than the amount recorded in the land register, in the event of foreclosure, the proceeds are distributed among the actual mortgage creditors according to their rank and irrespective of vacant ranks.

Art. 816 C. Effect / VII. Foreclosure / 1. Mode

VII. Foreclosure

1. Mode

1 In the event of default on the part of the debtor, the creditor has the right to payment out of the proceeds of the sale of the property.

2 Any agreement stipulating that the property subject to the mortgage will become the property of the creditor in the event of default on the part of the debtor is invalid.

3 Where several properties are made subject to a mortgage as security for a single claim, foreclosure proceedings must be brought simultaneously against all such properties, while individual properties are sold only if deemed necessary by the debt enforcement office.

Art. 817 C. Effect / VII. Foreclosure / 2. Distribution of the proceeds

2. Distribution of the proceeds

1 The proceeds from the sale of the property are distributed among the mortgage creditors according to their rank.

2 Creditors of the same rank are entitled to equal satisfaction.

Art. 818 C. Effect / VII. Foreclosure / 3. Extent of security

3. Extent of security

1 A mortgage right secures the creditor:

1.
for the principal;
2.
for the costs of debt enforcement and default interest;
3.1
for three years’ accrued annual interest due on the date of the application for foreclosure or the debtor is declared bankrupt, plus the interest due since the last maturity date; in the case of a mortgage certificate only the interest actually due is secured by the mortgage.

2 The interest rate originally agreed must not exceed five per cent to the detriment of subordinate mortgage creditors.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 8191C. Effect / VII. Foreclosure / 4. Security for maintenance costs

4. Security for maintenance costs

1 If a creditor has incurred expenses necessary for the maintenance of the property, in particular by paying insurance premiums owed by the owner, such expenses are secured by a lien over the property. This lien does not require to be recorded in the land register and takes precedence over all other registered encumbrances.

2 If the amount of the lien exceeds 1000 francs and the lien is not recorded in the land register within four months of the compensatory act being carried out, it may not be cited in opposition to third parties who rely on the land register in good faith.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 820 C. Effect / VIII. Lien in the case of land improvements / 1. Precedence

VIII. Lien in the case of land improvements

1. Precedence

1 If a rural property increases in value due to improvements carried out with the help of the public authorities, the owner may record a lien in the land register as security for his or her share of the costs which takes precedence over all other registered encumbrances on the property.

2 If such land improvement is made without state subsidy, the owner may enter the lien for a maximum of two-thirds of his or her costs.

Art. 821 C. Effect / VIII. Lien in the case of land improvements / 2. Extinction of debt and lien

2. Extinction of debt and lien

1 If a land improvement is made without state subsidy, the debt in relation to the lien must be repaid in annual payments of at least five per cent of the registered amount of the lien.

2 The lien is extinguished for the claim and for each annual payment three years after maturity, and any lower-ranking mortgage creditors advance in rank.

Art. 822 C. Effect / IX. Entitlement to insurers’ payments

IX. Entitlement to insurers’ payments

1 A payment under insurance policy may be made to the owner of the insured property only with the consent of all the charge creditors.

2 However, it may be made to the owner for the purposes of restoring the property subject to the charge provided adequate security is furnished.

3 In other respects, the cantonal provisions governing fire insurance are reserved.

Art. 8231C. Effect / X. Untraceable creditor

X. Untraceable creditor

Where the name or place of residence of the creditor is unknown, the court may, at the request of the debtor or other interested parties, order the necessary measures in cases where the law requires that a creditor take personal action as a matter of urgency.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).


  Chapter Two: The Mortgage Contract

Art. 824 A. Purpose and nature

A. Purpose and nature

1 A mortgage contract may secure any kind of debt, be it current, future or contingent.

2 The mortgaged property need not be owned by the debtor.

Art. 825 B. Establishment and extinction / I. Establishment

B. Establishment and extinction

I. Establishment

1 A mortgage contract is created in a specific rank even if the secured amount is indeterminate or variable, and it retains such rank notwithstanding any fluctuations in the secured amount.

2 The creditor may request that the land registrar provide him or her with an extract concerning the mortgage contract. Such an extract has only evidential status and does not constitute a negotiable instrument.

3 In lieu of such evidence, a certificate of registration may be appended to the mortgage contract deed.

Art. 826 B. Establishment and extinction / II. Extinction / 1. Right to have entry deleted

II. Extinction

1. Right to have entry deleted

If the debt is extinguished, the owner of the mortgaged property may request the creditor to authorise the deletion of the entry from the land register.

Art. 827 B. Establishment and extinction / II. Extinction / 2. Position of owner

2. Position of owner

1 If the property owner is not the debtor of the secured debt, he or she may redeem the mortgage on the same conditions as the debtor may repay the debt.

2 If he or she satisfies the creditor, the claim passes to him or her.

Art. 828 B. Establishment and extinction / II. Extinction / 3. Unilateral redemption / a. Conditions and procedure

3. Unilateral redemption

a. Conditions and procedure

1 Where a property is mortgaged for more than its value in respect of debts for which the acquirer is not personally liable, and providing no debt enforcement proceedings are pending, cantonal law may authorise the acquirer to redeem the mortgage rights either by paying the purchase price to the creditors or, where the property was acquired without payment, the amount at which he or she values the property.

2 He or she must give the creditors six months’ notice in writing of his or her intention to redeem the mortgage.

3 The redemption amount is distributed among the creditors according to their rank.

Art. 829 B. Establishment and extinction / II. Extinction / 3. Unilateral redemption / b. Public auction

b. Public auction

1 Within one month of the acquirer’s notification, the creditors are entitled to request that the mortgaged property be sold at public auction provided that they advance the costs, such auction to be announced publicly and held within one month of the date on which it was requested.

2 If a higher price than the one offered is obtained at auction, the mortgage is redeemed at that higher price.

3 The costs of the public auction are borne by the acquirer if a higher price is obtained, or otherwise by the creditor who requested the auction.

Art. 830 B. Establishment and extinction / II. Extinction / 3. Unilateral redemption / c. Official valuation

c. Official valuation

Cantonal law may provide that the redemption amount be determined by an official valuation rather than by sale at public auction.

Art. 831 B. Establishment and extinction / II. Extinction / 4. Termination

4. Termination

Where the owner of the mortgaged property is not also the debtor, notice given by the creditor to terminate his or her claim is binding on the owner only if it is served on both him or her and the debtor.

Art. 832 C. Effect / I. Ownership and liability / 1. Alienation

C. Effect

I. Ownership and liability

1. Alienation

1 The alienation of a mortgaged property does not affect liability under the mortgage contract and of the debtor unless otherwise agreed.

2 However, if the new owner has assumed liability for the secured debt, the previous debtor is discharged unless the creditor notifies him or her in writing within one year that he or she intends to retain him or her as debtor.

Art. 833 C. Effect / I. Ownership and liability / 2. Division

2. Division

1 If part of a mortgaged property or one of two or more mortgaged properties belonging to the same owner is alienated or if the mortgaged property is divided, unless otherwise agreed, liability under the mortgage will be reallocated in proportion to the value of the different parts.

2 If the creditor does not wish to accept such reallocation, within one month of its becoming final he or she may request repayment of his or her debt within one year.

3 Where the new owners have assumed liability for the debts secured by their properties, the previous debtor is discharged unless the creditor notifies him or her in writing within one year that he or she intends to retain him or her as debtor.

Art. 834 C. Effect / I. Ownership and liability / 3. Notice of assumption of debt

3. Notice of assumption of debt

1 If the new owner assumes the debt, the land registrar notifies the creditor accordingly.

2 The one-year time limit for the creditor’s declaration runs as of such notice.

Art. 835 C. Effect / II. Assignment of a debt

II. Assignment of a debt

The assignment of a debt secured by a mortgage contract is valid without entry in the land register.

Art. 8361D. Statutory mortgage right / I. Under cantonal law

D. Statutory mortgage right

I. Under cantonal law

1 Where cantonal law grants the creditor the right to a lien in respect of debts that are directly related to the servient property, the lien is created when it is recorded in the land register.

2 Where statutory liens amounting to over 1000 francs are created under cantonal law without being recorded in the land register and if they are not recorded in the land register within four months of the underlying debt becoming due, or at the latest within two years of the debt arising, on expiry of the period allowed for registration they may no longer be cited in opposition to third parties who rely on the land register in good faith.

3 More restrictive regulations under cantonal law are reserved.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 8371D. Statutory mortgage right / II. With entry / 1. Cases in point

II. With entry

1. Cases in point

1 The right to establish a statutory mortgage right applies to:

1.
the vendor’s claim to the sale price;
2.
the claims of co-heirs and other co-owners in undivided shares arising from the division of immovable property which belonged to the community;
3.
the claims of tradesmen and building contractors who have supplied labour and materials, or labour alone, for construction or other works, for demolition work, scaffolding work or for securing the construction pit or similar on the property whether the debtor is the owner of the property, tradesman or building contractor, tenant or any other person with rights to the property.

2 If a tenant or other person with rights to the property is liable for debts due to tradesmen or building contractors, the claim is valid only if the property owner has consented to the work being done.

3 The beneficiary may not waive such statutory mortgage rights in advance.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 838 D. Statutory mortgage right / II. With entry / 2. Vendor, co—heirs and co—owners

2. Vendor, co—heirs and co—owners

A lien in favour of the vendor, co-heirs or co-owners in undivided shares must be registered within three months of transfer of ownership.

Art. 8391D. Statutory mortgage right / II. With entry / 3. Tradesmen and building contractors / a. Registration

3. Tradesmen and building contractors

a. Registration

1 A tradesman's or building contractor’s lien may be recorded in the land register as of the date of his or her undertaking to perform work.

2 Application for such entry must be made within four months of completion of the work.

3 The lien is entered only if the claim has been acknowledged by the owner or confirmed in a court judgment and may not be requested if the owner provides the claimant with adequate security.

4 If the property is indisputably administrative assets and if the owner's liability for the debt is not based on contractual obligations, the owner shall be liable to the tradesmen or building contractor for debts that are acknowledged or determined by a court in accordance with the provisions on a debt subject to a simple surety, provided a written claim for the debt making reference to the statutory surety was made against the owner no later than four months after completion of the work.

5 If there is a dispute as to whether immovable property constitutes administrative assets, the tradesman or building contractor may apply for the provisional recording of the lien in the land register no later than four months after completion of the work.

6 If it is held in a court judgment that the immovable property constitutes administrative assets, the provisional recording of the lien must be deleted. It shall be replaced by the statutory surety provided the requirements of paragraph 4 are met. The deadline is met with the provisional recording of the lien.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 840 D. Statutory mortgage right / II. With entry / 3. Tradesmen and building contractors / b. Rank

b. Rank

If more than one statutory building contractor’s lien is recorded in the land register, such liens confer an equal entitlement to satisfaction from the mortgaged property even if the entries were made on different dates.

Art. 841 D. Statutory mortgage right / II. With entry / 3. Tradesmen and building contractors / c. Privileged claim

c. Privileged claim

1 Where the claims of tradesmen and building contractors are not wholly satisfied by foreclosure, the shortfall must be compensated for by the higher-ranking creditors out of such portion of the proceeds as exceeds the land value, provided it is apparent to such creditors that their liens have encumbered the property to the detriment of the tradesmen and building contractors.

2 If the higher-ranking creditor alienates his or her mortgage security, he or she must compensate the tradesmen and building contractors for any sum of which they are deprived by such alienation.

3 Once an interested party has had the beginning of the work noted in the land register, until the time limit for registration has expired, liens may only be registered in the form of mortgage contracts.


  Chapter Three:2  Mortgage Certificates

Art. 842 A. Mortgage certificate / I. Purpose; Relationship with the debt arising from the basic relationship

A. Mortgage certificate

I. Purpose; Relationship with the debt arising from the basic relationship

1 A mortgage certificate gives rise to a personal debt secured by a mortgage.

2 In the absence of an agreement to the contrary, the mortgage certificate, where applicable, co-exists with the debt to be secured that arises from the basic relationship between the creditor and the debtor

3 The debtor may raise the personal objections arising from the basic relationship against the creditor and his or her legal successors where they do not act in good faith.

Art. 843 A. Mortgage certificate / II. Form

II. Form

The mortgage certificate takes the form of either a register mortgage certificate or a mortgage certificate on paper.

Art. 844 A. Mortgage certificate / III. Position of owner

III. Position of owner

1 The owner of a mortgaged property who is not also the debtor under the mortgage certificate is subject to the provisions governing mortgage contracts.

2 In the case of a mortgage certificate, the owner of the mortgaged property may raise the same objections as the debtor.

Art. 845 A. Mortgage certificate / IV. Sale. Division

IV. Sale. Division

The consequences of the sale and the division of the property are governed by the provisions on mortgage contracts.

Art. 846 A. Mortgage certificate / V. Mortgage certificate debt and ancillary agreements / 1. In general

V. Mortgage certificate debt and ancillary agreements

1. In general

1 The mortgage certificate debt must neither relate to the basic relationship nor include conditions or considerations in return.

2 The mortgage certificate may include debt-related ancillary agreements on the rate of interest, repayment instalments and discharge as well as other ancillary provisions relating to the mortgage certificate debt. A reference to a separate agreement is permitted.

Art. 847 A. Mortgage certificate / V. Mortgage certificate debt and ancillary agreements / 2. Notice

2. Notice

1 The mortgage certificate may be discharged by the creditor or the debtor at six months notice at the end of any month unless otherwise agreed.

2 Any agreement may not allow the creditor a shorter period of notice than three months, unless the debtor defaults in making the repayments or paying the interest.

Art. 848 A. Mortgage certificate / VI. Protection of persons acting in good faith

VI. Protection of persons acting in good faith

For any person relying on the land register in good faith, the details of the mortgage certificate debt and the lien accord with the entry.

Art. 849 A. Mortgage certificate / VII. Objections by the debtor

VII. Objections by the debtor

1 The debtor may raise only such objections as arise from the entry in the land register or to which he or she is personally entitled with regard to the creditor or to document of title in the case of a mortgage certificate on paper.

2 Agreements including ancillary provisions on the mortgage certificate debt may only be cited in opposition to an acquirer of the mortgage certificate acting in good faith if they are referred to in the land register and on the document of title in the case of a mortgage certificate on paper.

Art. 850 A. Mortgage certificate / VIII. Authorised person

VIII. Authorised person

On the issue of a mortgage certificate, a person may be granted a power of attorney. This person must make and receive payments, receive notices, consent to releases from liability under the mortgage and in general safeguard the rights of the creditors, debtor and owner with all due care and impartiality

2 The name of the authorised person must be recorded in the land register and on the document of title.

3 If the power of attorney lapses and the persons involved are unable to agree, the court shall make the necessary arrangements.

Art. 851 A. Mortgage certificate / IX. Place of payment

IX. Place of payment

1 The debtor must make all payments at the domicile of the creditor unless otherwise agreed.

2 If the creditor’s domicile is unknown or has changed to the detriment of the debtor, the latter may discharge his or her obligation by depositing payment with the competent authority at his or her own domicile or at the creditor’s former domicile

Art. 852 A. Mortgage certificate / X. Changes in the legal relationship

X. Changes in the legal relationship

1 Where the legal relationship changes to the advantage of the debtor, in particular through the repayment of the debt, the debtor may request the creditor to agree to an amendment being recorded in the land register.

2 In the case of a mortgage certificate on paper, the land register shall note the amendment on the document of title.

3 In the absence of such an entry or the note on the document of title, the effect of the change in the legal relationship has no effect on an acquirer of the mortgage certificate acting in good faith.

Art. 853 A. Mortgage certificate / XI. Discharge

XI. Discharge

If the mortgage certificate debt is discharged, the debtor may request the creditor:

1.
to agree to transfer the register mortgage certificate into the name of the debtor; or
2.
to hand over the document of title to the paper mortgage certificate without cancelling the same.
Art. 854 A. Mortgage certificate / XII. Extinction / 1. In the absence of a creditor

XII. Extinction

1. In the absence of a creditor

1 If there is no longer a creditor, or if the creditor waives his or her lien, the debtor has the option of either having the entry deleted or allowing it to remain in the land register.

2 The debtor also has the right to continue to use the mortgage certificate.

Art. 855 A. Mortgage certificate / XII. Extinction / 2. Deletion

2. Deletion

A mortgage certificate on paper may not be deleted from the land register before the document of title has been cancelled or declared void by the court.

Art. 856 A. Mortgage certificate / XIII. Public call to creditors

XIII. Public call to creditors

1 If the creditor under a mortgage certificate has not come forward for ten years and if no demand has been made for interest during that period, the owner of the mortgaged property may ask the court to make a public call for the creditor to come forward within six months

2 If the creditor fails to come forward within this period and if an investigation concludes that there is a high probability that a valid claim no longer exists, the court shall:

1.
in the case of a register mortgage certificate, delete the lien from the land register; or
2.
cancel the mortgage certificate on paper and delete the lien from the land register.
Art. 857 B. Register mortgage certificate / I. Establishment

B. Register mortgage certificate

I. Establishment

1 A register mortgage certificate is created when it is recorded in the land register.

2 It is recorded in the name of the creditor or of the landowner.

Art. 858 B. Register mortgage certificate / II. Transfer

II. Transfer

1 The transfer of a register mortgage certificate is achieved by recording the new creditor in the land register based on a written declaration from the previous creditor.

2 Payments by the debtor only have a discharging effect if they are made to the person who at the time of payment is recorded as the creditor in the land register.

Art. 859 B. Register mortgage certificate / III. Pledging, distraint and usufruct

III. Pledging, distraint and usufruct

1 The pledging of the register mortgage certificate is achieved by recording the creditor of a charge on chattels in the land register based on a written declaration from the creditor recorded in the land register.

2 A distraint order is executed by recording the restriction on power of disposal in the land register.

3 The usufruct is created by its recording in the land register.

Art. 860 C. Mortgage certificate on paper / I. Creation / 1. Registration

C. Mortgage certificate on paper

I. Creation

1. Registration

1 The creation of a mortgage certificate on paper always requires an entry in the land register and a document of title

2 The bearer or a specific person, in particular the landowner, may be named as the creditor under the paper mortgage certificate.

3 The mortgage certificate shall take effect on registration even if the document of title has not yet been issued.

Art. 861 C. Mortgage certificate on paper / I. Creation / 2. Document of title

2. Document of title

1 The mortgage certificate on paper is issued by the land register issued.

2 It must be signed by the land registrar in order to be valid. Other requirements as to form shall be imposed by the Federal Council.

3 It may be delivered to the creditor or his or her authorised agent only with the express consent of the debtor and of the owner of the servient property.

Art. 862 C. Mortgage certificate on paper / II. Protection of persons acting in good faith

II. Protection of persons acting in good faith

1 For any person relying on the land register in good faith, the rights stated in the document of title duly issued as a mortgage certificate on paper apply.

2 If the wording of the document of title does not correspond to the entry or if there is no entry, the land register is authoritative.

3 A person who has acquired a document of title in good faith is entitled to damages in accordance with the provisions governing the land register.

Art. 863 C. Mortgage certificate on paper / III. Creditor's rights / 1. Claims

III. Creditor's rights

1. Claims

1 A claim arising from a mortgage certificate may not be alienated, pledged or otherwise asserted unless the claimant is in possession of the document.

2 This does not apply to the assertion of a claim in cases where the document of title has been cancelled or not yet issued

Art. 864 C. Mortgage certificate on paper / III. Creditor's rights / 2. Assignment

2. Assignment

1 The assignment of a mortgage certificate debt requires the delivery of the document of title to the assignee.

2 If the title is in the names of a person, the title must also be endorsed and the name of the assignee given.

Art. 865 C. Mortgage certificate on paper / IV. Cancellation

IV. Cancellation

1 Where a document of title has been lost or destroyed without the intention of repaying the debt, the creditor may request the court to cancel the document of title and order the debtor to make payment or that a new document of title be issued for as yet unmatured claims

2 The cancellation is made in accordance with the provisions governing the cancellation of bearer securities but subject to a notice period of six months

3 Likewise, the debtor may request that a lost certificate which has already been redeemed be cancelled.

Art. 866874

Repealed


  Chapter Four: Issue of Bonds secured by a Mortgage Right

Art. 875 A. Bond issues secured by a lien

A. Bond issues secured by a lien

Registered or bearer bonds may be secured by a mortgage:

1.
by issuing a mortgage contract or a mortgage certificate for the entire series and appointing an agent for the creditors and the borrower;
2.
by establishing a mortgage right for the entire bond issue in favour of the issuer and establishing a mortgage on that debt in favour of the bond holders.
Art. 8768831

1 Repealed by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), with effect from 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).


  Title Twenty-Three: Charges on Chattels

  Chapter One: Pledges of Chattels and Special Liens

Art. 884 A. Pledges / I. Establishment / 1. Possession by pledgee

A. Pledges

I. Establishment

1. Possession by pledgee

1 Except where otherwise provided by law, chattels may be pledged only by the transfer of possession of the chattel to the pledgee.

2 Any person who in good faith takes a chattel in pledge acquires a general lien over it, provided that third parties do not have rights over the chattel as a result of prior possession, even if the pledger had no authority to alienate it.

3 The general lien is not established as long as the pledger retains exclusive possession of the chattel.

Art. 885 A. Pledges / I. Establishment / 2. Pledge of livestock

2. Pledge of livestock

1 A general lien on livestock to secure the claims of lending institutions and co-operatives authorised to carry out such transactions by the competent authority of the canton in which they have their seat may be established without transfer of possession by entry in a public register and notification to the debt enforcement office.

2 The Federal Council regulates the keeping of the register.1

3 The cantons may levy fees for entries in the register and the associated administration; they determine the register districts and the responsible officials.2


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 886 A. Pledges / I. Establishment / 3. Subordinate pledge

3. Subordinate pledge

A subordinate pledge is established by notifying the pledgee in writing and instructing him or her to deliver the pledged chattel to the subordinate pledgee after his or her claim has been satisfied.

Art. 887 A. Pledges / I. Establishment / 4. Further pledge by pledgee

4. Further pledge by pledgee

The pledgee may only give the pledged chattel in further pledge with the pledger’s consent.

Art. 888 A. Pledges / II. Extinction / 1. Loss of possession

II. Extinction

1. Loss of possession

1 The general lien is extinguished once the pledgee no longer possesses the pledged chattel and is unable to demand its return from third parties.

2 The effects of the lien are suspended as long as the pledger has exclusive possession of the pledged chattel with the pledgee’s consent.

Art. 889 A. Pledges / II. Extinction / 2. Return

2. Return

1 The pledgee must return the pledged chattel to the entitled party where the pledge is extinguished due to payment of the debt or for some other reason.

2 He or she is not obliged to return the pledged chattel, in whole or in part, until his or her claim has been fully satisfied.

Art. 890 A. Pledges / II. Extinction / 3. Liability of the pledgee

3. Liability of the pledgee

1 The pledgee is liable for the depreciation or loss of the pledged chattel, unless he or she shows that he or she is not at fault.

2 If the pledgee has alienated the pledged chattel or given it in further pledge without authority, he or she is liable for any resulting damage.

Art. 891 A. Pledges / III. Effect / 1. Rights of the pledgee

III. Effect

1. Rights of the pledgee

1 If the debtor is in default the creditor has the right to satisfy his or her claim from the proceeds of the pledge.

2 The general lien provides the creditor with security for his or her claim, including contractual interest, debt enforcement costs and default interest.

Art. 892 A. Pledges / III. Effect / 2. Scope of the general lien

2. Scope of the general lien

1 The general lien encumbers the pledged chattel including its accessories.

2 Unless otherwise agreed, the pledgee must deliver the natural fruits of the pledged chattel to the owner once they are no longer a constituent part thereof.

3 Fruits which are a constituent part of the pledged chattel at the time of its realisation are included in it.

Art. 893 A. Pledges / III. Effect / 3. Rank

3. Rank

1 Where there are several pledges on the same chattel, the pledgees are satisfied according to their rank.

2 Rank is determined by the date on which the pledges were established.

Art. 894 A. Pledges / III. Effect / 4. Default agreements

4. Default agreements

Any agreement stipulating that the pledged chattel will become the property of the pledgee in the event of default on the part of the debtor is invalid.

Art. 895 B. Special lien / I. Requirements

B. Special lien

I. Requirements

1 A creditor has the right to retain chattels and securities which have come into his or her possession with the debtor’s consent until his or her claim has been satisfied, providing such claim is due and intrinsically connected with the retained objects.

2 Between persons engaged in commerce, an intrinsic connection exists where both the claim and the retained objects relate to their commercial dealings.

3 The creditor has a special lien provided that third parties do not have rights as a result of prior possession, even if the chattel which he or she has received in good faith does not belong to the debtor.

Art. 896 B. Special lien / II. Exceptions

II. Exceptions

1 No special lien may be asserted over chattels which by their nature are not realisable.

2 Equally, no special lien may be asserted where to do so would be incompatible with an obligation assumed by the creditor or with instructions issued by the debtor prior to or upon transfer of the chattel or with public policy.

Art. 897 B. Special lien / III. In the event of insolvency

III. In the event of insolvency

1 In the event of the debtor’s insolvency, the creditor has a special lien even if his or her claim is not yet due.

2 If the insolvency did not occur or become known to the creditor until after transfer of the chattel, the special lien may be exercised even if incompatible with a prior obligation or with a special instruction issued by the debtor.

Art. 898 B. Special lien / IV. Effect

IV. Effect

1 If the debtor is in default and fails to provide sufficient security, the creditor is entitled to realise the retained object in the same manner as a pledged chattel after notifying the debtor.

2 Where retained registered securities are to be realised, the debt enforcement or bankruptcy official must take the necessary steps on the debtor’s behalf.


  Chapter Two: Liens on Debts and Other Rights

Art. 899 A. In general

A. In general

1 Debts or other rights may be pledged provided they are assignable.

2 Unless otherwise provided, a general lien on debts and other rights is regulated by the provisions governing the pledging of chattels.

Art. 900 B. Establishment / I. In the case of ordinary claims

B. Establishment

I. In the case of ordinary claims

1 In order to pledge a debt not evidenced in writing or for which only a borrower’s note exists, the pledge agreement must be executed in writing and, where applicable, the borrower’s note transferred.

2 The pledgee and the pledger may inform the debtor of the pledge.

3 In order to pledge other rights, a written pledge agreement must be drawn up and any form required for the transfer must be observed.

Art. 901 B. Establishment / II. In the case of securities

II. In the case of securities

1 In the case of bearer securities, delivery of the certificate to the pledgee is sufficient to establish the pledge.

2 In the case of other securities, the certificate must be delivered and either endorsed or accompanied by a declaration of assignment.

3 The pledging of intermediated securities is governed exclusively by the Intermediated Securities Act of 3 October 20081.2


1 SR 957.1
2 Inserted by Annex No 1 of the Intermediated Securities Act of 3 Oct. 2008, in force since 1 Jan. 2010 (AS 2009 3577; BBl 2006 9315).

Art. 902 B. Establishment / III. In the case of documents of title to goods

III. In the case of documents of title to goods

1 Where there are documents of title to goods, the goods may be pledged by pledging the documents.

2 Where a special warrant exists in addition to a document of title to goods, pledging the warrant is sufficient to pledge the goods, provided notice of the pledge including the amount of the debt and the maturity date is entered on the document of title.

Art. 903 B. Establishment / IV. Subordinate pledge

IV. Subordinate pledge

A subordinate pledge of a debt is valid only if the prior ranking pledgee is notified in writing of the subordinate pledge by the creditor or by the subordinate pledgee.

Art. 904 C. Effect / I. Extent of security

C. Effect

I. Extent of security

1 Unless otherwise agreed, a pledge of interest-bearing debts or other debts conferring periodic subsidiary benefits, such as dividends, is limited to the current debt and the creditor is not entitled to payments which have already fallen due.

2 However, where such subsidiary rights are evidenced by separate documents, unless otherwise agreed, they are also covered by pledged to the extent that the pledge has been validly established.

Art. 905 C. Effect / II. Representation of pledged shares and capital contributions to limited liability companies

II. Representation of pledged shares and capital contributions to limited liability companies1

1 Pledged shares are represented at general meetings of shareholders by the shareholder rather than the pledgee.

2 Pledged capital contributions to a limited liability company are represented in the members' general meeting by the member rather than the pledgee.2


1 Inserted by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).
2 Inserted by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).

Art. 906 C. Effect / III. Administration and payment

III. Administration and payment

1 If diligent administration so requires, the creditor may give notice to terminate the pledged claim and collect the debt and the pledgee is entitled to request that such procedures be carried out.

2 Once notified of the pledge, the debtor may make payment to either the creditor or the pledgee, but only with the other party’s consent.

3 Where no such consent is forthcoming, he or she must deposit the amount due.


  Chapter Three: Pawnbroking

Art. 907 A. Pawnbrokers / I. Licensing

A. Pawnbrokers

I. Licensing

1 Any person wishing to operate as a pawnbroker requires a licence from the cantonal government.

2 Cantonal law may provide that such licences are granted only to cantonal or communal bodies and charitable organisations.

3 The cantons may levy fees from pawnbrokers.

Art. 908 A. Pawnbrokers / II. Duration of licence

II. Duration of licence

1 A licences is granted to private pawnbrokers for a specific period only, but may be renewed.

2 A licence may be revoked at any time if the pawnbroker fails to comply with the provisions applicable to his or her business.

Art. 909 B. Pawning / I. Establishment

B. Pawning

I. Establishment

A chattel is pawned by delivering it to the pawnbroker against receipt.

Art. 910 B. Pawning / II. Effect / 1. Sale of pawned chattel

II. Effect

1. Sale of pawned chattel

1 If the pawned chattel is not redeemed by the redemption deadline, the pawnbroker may sell it at public auction after making a prior call for redemption.

2 The pawnbroker has no claim against the pledger.

Art. 911 B. Pawning / II. Effect / 2. Right to surplus

2. Right to surplus

1 If the auction proceeds exceed the pawned amount, the pledger is entitled to the surplus.

2 Several claims against the same pledger may be treated as a single claim for the purpose of calculating the surplus.

3 The claim to the surplus prescribes five years after the sale of the pawned chattel.

Art. 912 B. Pawning / III. Redemption of the pawned chattel / 1. Right of redemption

III. Redemption of the pawned chattel

1. Right of redemption

1 Provided it has not yet been sold, the pledger may redeem the pawned chattel against return of the receipt.

2 If the pledger is unable to present the receipt, he or she is entitled to redeem the pawned chattel after the redemption deadline provided he or she establishes his or her entitlement.

3 As of six months after the redemption deadline, the pledger also has such right even where the pawnbroker has expressly reserved the right to release the pawned chattel only against return of the receipt.

Art. 913 B. Pawning / III. Redemption of the pawned chattel / 2. Pawnbroker’s rights

2. Pawnbroker’s rights

1 On redemption the pawnbroker is entitled to charge interest for the full current month.

2 If the pawnbroker has expressly reserved the right to return the pawned chattel to any bearer of the pawn receipt, he or she may do so as long as he or she does not know and could not reasonably be expected to know that the bearer acquired the receipt unlawfully.

Art. 914 C. Purchase with right of repurchase

C. Purchase with right of repurchase

Commercial purchases with right of repurchase are deemed equivalent to pawnbroking.

Art. 915 D. Rules governing pawnbroking

D. Rules governing pawnbroking

1 Cantonal law may issue further regulations governing pawnbroking.

2 ...1


1 Repealed by Section II 21 of the FA of 15 Dec. 1989 on the Approval of Cantonal Decrees by the Confederation, with effect from 1 Feb. 1991 (AS 1991 362; BBl 1988 II 1333).


  Chapter Four: ...

Art. 916–9181

1 Repealed by Art. 52 No 2 of the Mortgage Bond Act of 25 June 1930, with effect from 1 Feb. 1931 (BS 2 747; BBl 1925 III 527).


  Division Three: Possession and the Land Register

  Title Twenty-Four: Possession

Art. 919 A. Definition and types / I. Definition

A. Definition and types

I. Definition

1 Effective control over a thing constitutes possession of it.

2 In the case of easements and real burdens, effective exercise of the right constitutes possession.

Art. 920 A. Definition and types / II. Direct and derivative possession

II. Direct and derivative possession

1 Where the possessor transfers an object to a third party in order to confer on him or her a limited right in rem or a personal right, both are considered to have possession.

2 The owner of the object has direct possession and any other possessor has derivative possession.

Art. 921 A. Definition and types / III. Temporary interruption

III. Temporary interruption

Possession is not lost if the exercise of effective control is impeded or interrupted by occurrences of a temporary nature.

Art. 922 B. Transfer / I. Among parties present in person

B. Transfer

I. Among parties present in person

1 Possession is transferred by the delivery of the object itself or of the means by which the recipient may gain effective control of it.

2 Transfer is complete once the transferee is able to exercise effective control over the object with the consent of the prior possessor.

Art. 923 B. Transfer / II. Among absent persons

II. Among absent persons

Transfer among persons who are absent is completed on delivery of the object to the transferee or his or her representative.

Art. 924 B. Transfer / III. Without physical transfer

III. Without physical transfer

1 Possession of an object may be acquired without physical delivery if a third party or the transferor himself retains possession of it in terms of a special legal relationship.

2 The transfer is not binding on the third party who retains possession of the object until he or she has been notified thereof by the transferor.

3 The third party is entitled to refuse delivery to the acquirer for the same reasons for which he or she could have refused delivery to the transferor.

Art. 925 B. Transfer / IV. In the case of documents of title to goods

IV. In the case of documents of title to goods

1 Delivery of documents of title to goods which have been consigned to a carrier or a warehouse is equivalent to the delivery of the goods themselves.

2 However, where a bona fide acquirer of the document of title to goods is in conflict with a bona fide acquirer of the goods, the latter has priority.

Art. 926 C. Legal remedies / I. Protection of possession / 1. Defence against interference

C. Legal remedies

I. Protection of possession

1. Defence against interference

1 A possessor has the right to use force in self-defence against any unlawful interference.

2 If he or she has been dispossessed of an object by force or by clandestine means, he or she has the right to recover it immediately by expelling the trespasser from the property or, in the case of a chattel, by taking it from a person caught in the act and pursued immediately.

3 In doing so, he or she must abstain from all force not justified by the circumstances.

Art. 927 C. Legal remedies / I. Protection of possession / 2. Action for restitution

2. Action for restitution

1 A person who wrongfully dispossesses another of an object is obliged to return it, even if he or she claims a better right to it.

2 If the defendant may immediately show a better right entitling him or her to reclaim the object from the claimant, he or she may refuse to return it.

3 The claim is for restitution of the object plus damages.

Art. 928 C. Legal remedies / I. Protection of possession / 3. Action for trespass

3. Action for trespass

1 A possessor disturbed by trespass may bring an action against the trespasser even if the latter claims to be in the right.

2 The claim is for cessation of trespass, prohibition of further trespass and damages.

Art. 929 C. Legal remedies / I. Protection of possession / 4. Admissibility and prescription

4. Admissibility and prescription

1 An action for restitution or trespass is only admissible if the possessor sues for restitution of the object or for cessation of trespass immediately on becoming aware of the interference in his or her rights and the identity of the trespasser.

2 The action prescribes one year after the date of the trespass or dispossession even if the claimant did not become aware of the interference in his or her rights and the identity of the trespasser until a later date.

Art. 930 C. Legal remedies / II. Remedies / 1. Presumption of ownership

II. Remedies

1. Presumption of ownership

1 The possessor of a chattel is presumed to be its owner.

2 Each previous possessor is presumed to have been the owner of the chattel while it was in his or her possession.

Art. 931 C. Legal remedies / II. Remedies / 2. Presumption of indirect ownership

2. Presumption of indirect ownership

1 The possessor of a chattel who does not purport to be its owner may invoke the presumption that the person from whom he or she received it in good faith is the owner.

2 Where a person possessing a chattel invokes a limited right in rem or a personal right, the existence of such a right is presumed, but such presumption cannot be invoked against the person from whom the possessor received the chattel.

Art. 932 C. Legal remedies / II. Remedies / 3. Action against the possessor

3. Action against the possessor

The possessor of a chattel may invoke the presumption of his or her better right in any action brought against him, subject to the provisions governing wrongful dispossession or trespass.

Art. 933 C. Legal remedies / II. Remedies / 4. Power of disposal and right of restitution / a. Entrusted objects

4. Power of disposal and right of restitution

a. Entrusted objects

A person who takes possession of a chattel in good faith in order to become its owner or to acquire a limited right in rem is protected therein even if the chattel was entrusted to the transferor without any authority to effect the transfer.

Art. 934 C. Legal remedies / II. Remedies / 4. Power of disposal and right of restitution / b. Stolen or lost chattels

b. Stolen or lost chattels

1 A possessor whose chattel has been stolen or lost, or who has otherwise been dispossessed of it against his or her will, may reclaim it from any possessor within a period of five years. Article 722 is reserved.1

1bis The right to recover an object of cultural heritage as defined by Article 2 paragraph 1 of the Cultural Property Transfer Act of 20 June 20032, possession of which has been lost against the owner’s will, prescribes one year after the owner becomes aware of where and by whom such object is being held, but at the latest 30 years after the loss.3

2 If a chattel has been sold at public auction, or on the market, or by a merchant dealing in goods of the same kind, it may be reclaimed from the first and any subsequent bona fide purchaser only against reimbursement of the price paid.

3 In other respects, restitution is subject to the provisions governing possession in good faith.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 2002 (Article of Basic Principles: Animals), in force since 1 April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5086).
2 SR 444.1
3 Inserted by Art. 32 No 1 of the Federal Act on Transfer of Cultural Heritage of 20 June 2003, in force since 1 June 2005 (AS 2005 1869; BBl 2002 535).

Art. 935 C. Legal remedies / II. Remedies / 4. Power of disposal and right of restitution / c. Cash and bearer securities

c. Cash and bearer securities

Cash and bearer securities cannot be reclaimed from a recipient in good faith even if the possessor was dispossessed of them against his or her will.

Art. 936 C. Legal remedies / II. Remedies / 4. Power of disposal and right of restitution / d. Bad faith

d. Bad faith

1 A person who has not acquired a chattel in good faith may be required by the previous possessor to return it at any time.

2 However, if the previous possessor likewise did not acquire the chattel in good faith, he or she cannot reclaim the chattel from any subsequent possessor.

Art. 937 C. Legal remedies / II. Remedies / 5. Presumption of title to land

5. Presumption of title to land

1 In respect of land recorded in the land register, only the person registered may invoke presumption of title and bring an action for recovery of possession.

2 However, a person who exercises effective control over the land may bring an action for wrongful dispossession or trespass.

Art. 938 C. Legal remedies / III. Liability / 1. Possessor in good faith / a. Use

III. Liability

1. Possessor in good faith

a. Use

1 A person possessing an object in good faith is not liable to its rightful owner for the consequences of using it in accordance with his or her presumed right.

2 He or she is not obliged to replace what has been lost or damaged.

Art. 939 C. Legal remedies / III. Liability / 1. Possessor in good faith / b. Indemnity

b. Indemnity

1 Where the rightful owner requests restitution of an object, the possessor in good faith may request indemnification for any necessary or useful expenditure incurred and may refuse to surrender the object until such indemnification is forthcoming.

2 He or she has no right to indemnification of other expenditure, but where none is proffered, he or she may remove anything for which he or she has incurred cost, provided this may be done without damaging the property.

3 Any fruits collected by a possessor are set off against his or her claim for indemnification.

Art. 940 C. Legal remedies / III. Liability / 2. Possession in bad faith

2. Possession in bad faith

1 A person possessing an object in bad faith must return it to the rightful owner and compensate him or her for any damage resulting from such wrongful possession, including any fruits he or she collected or failed to collect.

2 He or she may claim indemnification only of such expenditure as the rightful owner would also have had to incur.

3 As long as a possessor does not know to whom he or she must surrender the object, he or she is only liable for damage for which he or she is at fault.

Art. 941 C. Legal remedies / IV. Adverse possession

IV. Adverse possession

A possessor fulfilling the requirements of adverse possession may count his or her predecessor’s period of possession as part of his or her own provided his or her predecessor’s possession also qualified as adverse possession.


  Title Twenty-Five: The Land Register

Art. 942 A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 1. In general

A. Organisation

I. Constituent parts

1. In general

1 The land register is kept as a record of property rights.

2 It consists of the main register, the plans, property directories, supporting documents and property descriptions appended to the main register, and the journal.

3 The land register may be kept on paper or electronically.1

4 Where the land register is kept electronically, legal effect attaches to such data as are properly stored in the system and legible in letters and figures or displayed on plans by means of the technical capabilities of the devices and equipment used by the land register.2


1 Inserted by Annex 1 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2003 on Electronic Signatures, in force since 1 Jan. 2005 (AS 2004 5085; BBl 2001 5679).
2 Inserted by Annex 1 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2003 on Electronic Signatures, in force since 1 Jan. 2005 (AS 2004 5085; BBl 2001 5679).

Art. 9431A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 2. Registered data / a. Object

2. Registered data

a. Object

1 The following are recorded in the land register as immovable property:

1.
parcels of land and the buildings thereon;
2.
distinct and permanent rights recorded in the land register;
3.
mines;
4.
co-ownership shares in immovable property.

2 The Federal Council issues detailed regulations governing the prerequisites for and method of registration of distinct and permanent rights, mines and co-ownership shares in immovable property.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 944 A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 2. Registered data / b. Exceptions

b. Exceptions

1 Immovable property which is not privately owned and is in public use will be recorded in the land register only if rights in rem attaching to such property are to be registered or if cantonal law provides for its registration.

2 If registered immovable property is transformed into property that is not subject to registration, it is deleted from the land register.

3 ...1


1 Repealed by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immoveable Property Law) and the Code of Obligations (Sale of Immoveable Property), with effect from 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 945 A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 3. Registers / a. Main Register

3. Registers

a. Main Register

1 Each item of immovable property has its own folio and number in the main register.

2 The procedure to be followed in the event of the division or consolidation of immovable property is determined by Federal Council ordinance.

Art. 946 A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 3. Registers / b. Folio

b. Folio

1 The following data is entered in separate sections on each folio:

1.
ownership;
2.
the easements and real burdens established in favour of or encumbering the property;
3.
the liens with which it is encumbered.

2 Accessories may be noted on the folio at the owner’s request and, once noted, may be deleted only with the consent of all such interested parties as are evident from the land register.

Art. 947 A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 3. Registers / c. Joint folio

c. Joint folio

1 Two or more parcels of land may be entered on one folio with the owner’s consent, regardless of whether they are contiguous.

2 The entries on such folio are valid for all the land in question with the exception of easements.

3 The owner may at any time request that entries for individual parcels of land be removed from a joint folio, all rights being reserved.

Art. 948 A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 3. Registers / d. Journal, supporting documents

d. Journal, supporting documents

1 Applications for entry in the land register are recorded without delay in the journal in chronological order indicating the applicant and the object of his or her request.

2 Supporting documents are duly classified and archived.

3 In cantons where the land registrar is authorised to draw up public deeds, the supporting documents may be replaced by an official record whose entries constitute public deeds.

Art. 949 A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 4. Implementing ordinances / a. In general

4. Implementing ordinances

a. In general1

1 The Federal Council prescribes the land register forms, issues the necessary regulations and regulates at its discretion the keeping of auxiliary registers.

2 The cantons may establish special provisions governing the registration of rights in rem on land under cantonal law, but such provisions become valid only when approved by the Confederation.


1 Amended by No 1 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2003 on Electronic Signatures, in force since 1 Jan. 2005 (AS 2004 5085; BBl 2001 5679).

Art. 949a1A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 4. Implementing ordinances / b. For electronic registers

b. For electronic registers

1 A canton wishing to keep the land register electronically must obtain the approval of the Federal Department of Justice and Police.

2 The Federal Council regulates:

1.
the authorisation procedure;
2.
the scope and technical details of the electronic land register, particularly the procedure by which entries become effective;
3.
whether and on what conditions electronic communication with the land register is permissible;
4.
whether and on what conditions the public will be given access to unrestricted data recorded in the main register;
5.
data access, the logging of retrieval requests and conditions for the withdrawal of user entitlements in the event of abuse;
6.
data protection;
7.
long-term data security and data archiving.

3 The Federal Department of Justice and Police and the Federal Department of Defence, Civil Protection and Sport define data models and standard interfaces for the land register and official land surveys.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land; AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953). Amended by No 1 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2003 on Electronic Signatures, in force since 1 Jan. 2005 (AS 2004 5085; BBl 2001 5679).

Art. 949b1A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 4. Implementing ordinances / 4a. ...

4a. ...


1 Not yet in force (AS 2018 4017).

Art. 949c1A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 4. Implementing ordinances / 4b. ...

4b. ...


1 Not yet in force (AS 2018 4017).

Art. 949d1A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 4c. Commissioning private individuals to use the electronic version of the land register

4c. Commissioning private individuals to use the electronic version of the land register

1 The cantons which maintain the land register electronically may commission private individuals to:

1.
ensure access to the data in the land register in the retrieval process;
2.
ensure public access to the data of the main register which can be viewed without proof of interest;
3.
to carry out electronic transactions with the land registry.

2 The commissioned individuals are subject to the oversight of the cantons and of the Confederation.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 15 Dec. 2017 (Registration of Civil Status and Land Register), in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 4017; BBl 2014 3551).

Art. 9501A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 5. Official cadastral survey

5. Official cadastral survey

1 The entry for and description of each parcel of land in the register are based on the official cadastral survey, and in particular on a plan drawn for the land register.

2 The Geoinformation Act of 5 October 20072 regulates the qualitative and technical requirements of the official cadastral survey.


1 Amended by Annex No II of the FA of 5 Oct. 2007 on Geoinformation, in force since 1 July 2008 (AS 2008 2793; BBl 2006 7817).
2 SR 510.62

Art. 951 A. Organisation / II. Keeping the register / 1. Districts / a. Allocation to districts

II. Keeping the register

1. Districts

a. Allocation to districts

1 For land register purposes the cantons are divided into districts.

2 Immovable property is entered in the register for the district in which it is situated.

Art. 952 A. Organisation / II. Keeping the register / 1. Districts / b. Land straddling more than one district

b. Land straddling more than one district

1 Immovable property that lies in more than one district is entered in the register of each district, with reference being made to the register of the other districts.

2 Entries which establish rights are to be made in the register of the district in which the largest part of the property is situated.

3 Entries in this land register will be notified by the registrar to the other land registries.

Art. 953 A. Organisation / II. Keeping the register / 2. Land registries

2. Land registries

1 The cantons are responsible for setting up the land registries, the demarcation of the districts, the appointment and remuneration of officials and supervision arrangements.

2 The regulations issued by the cantons, save for those concerning the appointment and remuneration of officials, are subject to approval by the Confederation.1


1 Amended by No II 21 of the FA of 15 Dec. 1989 on the Approval of Cantonal Decrees by the Confederation, in force since 1 Feb. 1991 (AS 1991 362; BBl 1988 II 1333).

Art. 954 A. Organisation / II. Keeping the register / 3. Fees

3. Fees

1 The cantons may levy fees for entry in the land register and for the necessary surveys.

2 No charge may be made for entries relating to land improvements or to land exchanges for the purpose of agricultural consolidation.

Art. 955 A. Organisation / III. Liability

III. Liability1

1 The cantons are liable for any damage arising from the maintenance of the land register.

2 They have a right of recourse against the land register officials and employees and against the immediate supervisory bodies if they are at fault.

3 They may require the officials and employees to provide security.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 9561A. Organisation / IV. Administrative supervision

IV. Administrative supervision

1 The management of the land registries is subject to the administrative supervision of the cantons.

2 The Confederation exercises the supervisory control.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 956a1A. Organisation / V. Legal protection / 1. Right of appeal

V. Legal protection

1. Right of appeal

1 A ruling issued by the land registry may be contested before an authority designated by the canton; a ruling includes the unlawful refusal to carry out or delay in carrying out an official act.

2 The following persons are entitled to appeal:

1.
any person who suffers particular prejudice due to a ruling issued by the land registry and who has a legitimate interest in its revocation or amendment;
2.
the cantonal administrative supervisory authority it has a right of appeal under cantonal law;
3.
the federal supervisory authority.

3 No appeal may be brought against an entry, amendment or deletion of rights in rem or priority notices executed in the main register.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 956b1A. Organisation / V. Legal protection / 2. Appeal proceedings

2. Appeal proceedings

1 The period within which an appeal to the cantonal appellate authorities must be filed amounts to 30 days.

2 Where the land registry refuses to carry out or delays in carrying out a specific official act, however, an appeal may be filed at any time.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 9571

1 Repealed by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), with effect from 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 958 B. Registration / I. Land register entries / 1. Ownership and rights in rem

B. Registration

I. Land register entries

1. Ownership and rights in rem

The following rights to immovable property are recorded in the land register:

1.
ownership;
2.
easements and real burdens;
3.
liens.
Art. 959 B. Registration / I. Land register entries / 2. Priority notices / a. Personal rights

2. Priority notices

a. Personal rights

1 Personal rights may be entered under priority notice in the land register where such notices are expressly provided for by law, as is the case for a right of pre-emption, right of repurchase, right of purchase, usufructuary lease and tenancy.

2 By virtue of being entered under priority notice, they may be invoked against any rights subsequently acquired.

Art. 960 B. Registration / I. Land register entries / 2. Priority notices / b. Restrictions on powers of disposal

b. Restrictions on powers of disposal

1 Restrictions on powers of disposal may be entered under priority notice for individual parcels of land if they result from:

1.
an official order made to secure disputed or enforceable claims;
2.1
a distraint order;
3.2
a case in which entry under priority notice is envisaged by law, such as a remainderman’s expectancy.

2 On entry under priority notice, the restrictions on powers of disposal become effective against all subsequently acquired rights.


1 Amended by Annex No 4 of the FA of 16 Dec. 1994, in force since 1 Jan. 1997 (AS 1995 1227; BBl 1991 III 1).
2 Amended by No I 4 of the Federal Act of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

Art. 961 B. Registration / I. Land register entries / 2. Priority notices / c. Provisional entries

c. Provisional entries

1 Provisional entries may be made in the land register:

1.
in order to secure asserted rights in rem;
2.
in the cases where the law permits the applicant to complete his or her application.

2 They are made either with the consent of all interested parties or by court order and the right, provided it is later confirmed, becomes effective in rem as of the date of the provisional entry.

3 The court rules on the application and, provided the applicant satisfies the court of his or her entitlement, approves the provisional entry, precisely specifying its nature, duration and effect and, where necessary, setting a time limit within which the applicant must bring an action to assert his or her rights.1


1 Amended by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, in force since 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 961a1B. Registration / I. Land register entries / 2. Priority notices / d. Entry of subordinate rights

d. Entry of subordinate rights

A priority notice in the land register does not preclude the registration of a right with a subordinate rank.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 9621B. Registration / II. Noting / 1. Restrictions under public law

II. Noting

1. Restrictions under public law

1 The state authority or another public body must arrange for a public law restriction on ownership ordered in respect of a specific property that imposes a permanent restriction on use or power of disposal or duty relating to the property on the owner to be noted in the land register.

2 Where the restriction on ownership ceases to apply, the state authority or the other public body must arrange for the note to be deleted from the land register. If the state authority or the other public body fails to act, the land register may delete the note ex officio.

3 The Federal Council shall stipulate the areas of cantonal law in which restrictions on ownership must be noted in the land register. The cantons may provide for additional notes. They shall draw up a list of circumstances requiring a note, which must be passed on to the Confederation.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 962a1B. Registration / II. Noting / 2. Of representatives

2. Of representatives

The following may be noted in the land register:

1.
the statutory representative at his or her request or at the request of the competent authority;
2.
the estate administrator, the representative of the heirs, the official liquidator and the executors at their request or at the request of the heirs or the competent authority;
3.
the representative of an owner, charge creditor or easement beneficiary whose whereabouts are unknown at his or her request or at the request of the court;
4.
the representative of a legal entity or other rights holder in the absence of the required management body at his or her request or at the request of the court;
5.
the administrator of a condominium association at his or her request or at the request of the condominium owners meeting or of the court.

1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 963 B. Registration / III. Requirements for entry / 1. Applications / a. For an entry

III. Requirements for entry

1. Applications

a. For an entry

1 Entries in the land register are based on a written declaration by the owner of the immovable property to which the entry relates.

2 No declaration by the owner is required where the acquirer may rely on a provision of the law, a final court judgment or a document having effect equal to that of a court judgment.

3 The officials authorised to execute public deeds may be instructed by the cantons to notify the transactions certified by such deeds for entry in the land register.

Art. 964 B. Registration / III. Requirements for entry / 1. Applications / b. For a deletion

b. For a deletion

1 Amendment or deletion of an entry in the land register requires an declaration in writing by the person whose entitlement results from the entry.

2 Such application may be made by signing the journal.

Art. 965 B. Registration / III. Requirements for entry / 2. Authority / a. Valid proof of authority

2. Authority

a. Valid proof of authority

1 A disposition in the land register, such as an entry, amendment or deletion, may be made only on the basis of documents establishing the right to make such disposition and its legal basis.

2 Authority to request a disposition is established by proof that the applicant is the person entitled by virtue of the entry in the land register or has been duly vested with a power of attorney by said person.

3 The legal basis for the requested disposition is established by proof that the formal requirements have been observed.

Art. 966 B. Registration / III. Requirements for entry / 2. Authority / b. Completion of application

b. Completion of application

1 Where the documentation required for a disposition in the land register is not forthcoming, the application is rejected.

2 However, provided the legal basis is established and the application lacks only certain documents, a provisional entry may be made with the owner’s consent or by court order.

Art. 967 B. Registration / IV. Manner of entry / 1. In general

IV. Manner of entry

1. In general

1 The entries in the main register are made in the order in which applications are received or in which certifications and declarations are signed by the land registrar.

2 Interested parties will be provided on request with an extract of the entry.

3 The formal requirements for entries, deletions and extracts are regulated by the Federal Council.

Art. 968 B. Registration / IV. Manner of entry / 2. For easements

2. For easements

Easements are entered and deleted on the folios of both the dominant and servient properties.

Art. 969 B. Registration / V. Duty to notify

V. Duty to notify

1 The registrar must notify interested parties of all dispositions in the land register made without their knowledge; he or she shall, in particular, notify any acquisition of ownership by a third party to parties with rights of pre-emption which are entered under priority notice in the land register or to parties with rights which exist by law and are evident from the land register.1

2 The time limit for challenging such dispositions begins on receipt of such notification.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 9701C. Public nature of land register / I. Information and right of consultation

C. Public nature of land register

I. Information and right of consultation

1 Any person showing a legitimate interest is entitled to consult the land register or to be provided with an extract.

2 A person is entitled to obtain the following information from the main register without showing a legitimate interest:

1.
the name and description of the immovable property;
2.
the name and identity of the owner;
3.
the form of ownership and the date of acquisition.

3 The Federal Council shall specify other particulars of easements, real burdens and notices in the register which may be made public without the need to show a legitimate interest. It shall pay due regard to the protection of personal privacy.

4 An objection based on ignorance of a land register entry is inadmissible.


1 Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 19 Dec 2003 on Electronic Signatures, in force since 1 Jan. 2005 (AS 2004 5085; BBl 2001 5679).

Art. 970a1C. Public nature of land register / II. Publication

II. Publication

1 The cantons may provide that all acquisitions of immovable property be published.

2 They may not publish the consideration involved in a division of estate, an advance against a person’s share of an inheritance, a marital agreement or a liquidation of marital property.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land; AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953). Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2003 on Electronic Signatures, in force since 1 Jan. 2005 (AS 2004 5085; BBl 2001 5679).

Art. 971 D. Effect / I. Need for an entry

D. Effect

I. Need for an entry

1 Where the establishment of a right in rem is subject to entry in the land register, such right has effect in rem only if it has been entered.

2 Within the limits of such entry, the scope of a right may be established by supporting documents or in some other manner.

Art. 972 D. Effect / II. Effect of entry / 1. In general

II. Effect of entry

1. In general

1 Rights in rem are established and assigned their rank and date by virtue of being entered in the main register.

2 The entry has retroactive effect as of its recording in the journal, provided the supporting documents required by law are included with the application or, in the case of provisional entries, are submitted in good time.

3 In cantons where the registrar draws up public deeds by means of an entry in an official record of title, such a record constitutes entry in the journal.

Art. 973 D. Effect / II. Effect of entry / 2. In relation to third parties acting in good faith

2. In relation to third parties acting in good faith

1 Any person who, relying in good faith on an entry in the land register, has acquired property or any other right in rem in reliance thereon, is protected in such acquisition.

2 This rule does not apply to boundaries of land in areas designated by the cantons as being in permanent danger of ground displacement.1


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 974 D. Effect / II. Effect of entry / 3. In relation to third parties acting in bad faith

3. In relation to third parties acting in bad faith

1 If the entry of a right in rem is unwarranted, a third party who is or ought to be aware thereof may not rely on the entry.

2 An entry is unwarranted if it is without legal basis or was made on the basis of an invalid transaction.

3 A person whose rights in rem are infringed by such an entry may invoke its defectiveness directly against the third party acting in bad faith.

Art. 974a1E. Deletion and amendment of entries / I. Revision / 1. On the division of property

E. Deletion and amendment of entries

I. Revision

1. On the division of property

1 If a property is divided, the easements, priority notices and notes for each divided part must be revised.

2 The owner of the property being divided must advise the land registry which entries to delete and which to transfer to the divided parts. If this is not done, the application must be rejected.

3 Where an entry according to the supporting documents or the circumstances does not relate to a divided part, it must be deleted. The procedure is governed by the regulations on the deletion of an entry.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 974b1E. Deletion and amendment of entries / I. Revision / 2. In the case of the consolidation of parcels of land

2. In the case of the consolidation of parcels of land

1 Two or more parcels of land belonging to one owner may only be consolidated if no mortgage rights or real burdens have to be transferred from the individual parcels to the consolidated property or if the creditor consents.

2 If easements, priority notices or notes encumbering the property must be recorded, they may be consolidated only if the beneficiaries consent or if their rights are not prejudiced due to the nature of the encumbrance.

3 If easements, priority notices or notes benefiting the property real estate must be recorded, they may only be consolidated if the owner of the servient property consents or if the encumbrance is not increased by consolidation.

4 The provisions on revision on the division of property apply by analogy.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 975 E. Deletion and amendment of entries / II. Unwarranted entries

II. Unwarranted entries1

1 Where an entry of a right in rem is unwarranted or a correct entry has been deleted or modified in an unwarranted manner, any person whose rights in rem are thereby infringed may bring an action for deletion or amendment of the entry.

2 Rights in rem acquired in good faith by third parties relying on the entry and claims for damages are reserved.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 9761E. Deletion and amendment of entries / III. Simplified deletion / 1. Clearly insignificant entries

III. Simplified deletion

1. Clearly insignificant entries

The land register may delete an entry ex officio if the entry:

1.
is limited in time and has lost its legal significance as it has expired;
2.
relates to a non-assignable or non-heritable right of a deceased person;
3.
cannot affect the property due to the local situation;
4.
relates to a property that no longer exists.

1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 976a1E. Deletion and amendment of entries / III. Simplified deletion / 2. Other entries / a. In general

2. Other entries

a. In general

1 If an entry in all probability has no legal importance, in particular because according to the supporting documents or the circumstances it does not relate to the property, then any person encumbered may request its deletion.

2 If the land registry regards the request as justified, it shall inform the beneficiary that it will delete the entry unless he or she files an objection with land registry within 30 days.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 976b1E. Deletion and amendment of entries / III. Simplified deletion / 2. Other entries / b. On objection

b. On objection

1 If the beneficiary files an objection, the land registry shall reassess the request for deletion at the request of the encumbered person.

2 If the land registry concludes that the request should be granted despite the objection, it shall notify the beneficiary that it will delete the entry from the main register unless the beneficiary brings a court action to declare that the entry is of legal significance.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 976c1E. Deletion and amendment of entries / III. Simplified deletion / 3. Public revision procedure

3. Public revision procedure

1 If conditions have changed in fact or law in a specific area and as a result a large number of easements, priority notices or notes have completely or largely lapsed or if the situation can no longer be determined, the authority designated by the canton may order a revision in this area.

2 This order must be noted in the corresponding land register folios.

3 The cantons shall regulate the details and the procedure. They may further simplify the revision procedure or issue regulations that deviate from federal law.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 977 E. Deletion and amendment of entries / IV. Corrections E. Deletion and amendment of entries / IV. Corrections

IV. Corrections1

1 Unless the interested parties consent in writing, the land registrar may correct the register only in accordance with a court order.

2 Instead of correcting an unwarranted entry, the registrar may delete it and make a new one.

3 The land registrar may correct typographical errors of his or her own accord in accordance with regulations to be issued by the Federal Council.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).


1 Inserted by No II of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).2 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

  Final Title: Commencement and Implementing Provisions1 

  Chapter One: Application of Former and New Law2 

Art. 1 A. General provisions / I. General rule of non-retroactive effect

A. General provisions

I. General rule of non-retroactive effect

1 When this Code comes into force, the legal effects of circumstances which occurred previously remain subject to those provisions of federal or cantonal law which were applicable when the circumstances occurred.

2 Accordingly, the legally binding nature and consequences of acts which took place before the commencement hereof remain subject to the law which was applicable at the time.

3 However, circumstances occurring after the commencement hereof are subject to the new law, unless this Code provides otherwise.

Art. 2 A. General provisions / II. Retroactive effect / 1. Public policy and good morals

II. Retroactive effect

1. Public policy and good morals

1 The provisions of this Code specifically enacted in the interests of public policy and good morals apply when it comes into force to all circumstances, unless this Code provides otherwise.

2 Accordingly, provisions of the previous law which under the new law are deemed to contravene public policy and good morals cease to apply when the new law comes into force.

Art. 3 A. General provisions / II. Retroactive effect / 2. Relationships defined by law

2. Relationships defined by law

When this Code comes into force, legal relationships whose content is defined by law irrespective of the will of the parties concerned are subject to the new law, even if previously such relationships were valid.

Art. 4 A. General provisions / II. Retroactive effect / 3. Non-vested rights

3. Non-vested rights

The legal effects of circumstances which occurred while the previous law was still in force and which enjoy no protection under the new law are subject to the latter once it has come into force.

Art. 5 B. Law of persons / I. Capacity to act

B. Law of persons

I. Capacity to act

1 Capacity to act shall be assessed in all cases in accordance with the provisions of this Code.

2 However, any person who has the capacity to act under the previous law when this Code comes into force but who would not have the capacity to act under the new law will also be recognised as having the capacity to act when this Code comes into force.

Art. 6 B. Law of persons / II. Presumed death

II. Presumed death

1 The declaration of presumed death becomes subject to the new law when this Code comes into force.

2 When this Code comes into force, declarations of death or absence under the previous law have the same effects as a declaration of presumed death under the new law, but the consequences that have occurred under the previous law prior to this Code coming into force, such as succession or dissolution of marriage, remain valid.

3 Proceedings ongoing when the new law comes into force shall be restarted in accordance with the provisions of this Code, taking account of the time that has elapsed, or, if requested by the parties, concluded in accordance with the previous procedure, respecting the previous deadlines.

Art. 6a1B. Law of persons / IIa. Central civil register database

IIa. Central civil register database

1 The Federal Council regulates the transition from the former procedure for keeping the civil register to the electronic civil register.

2 The Confederation assumes the capital investment costs up to an amount of 5 million francs.


1 Inserted by No 1 of the FA of 5 Oct. 2001 (Electronic civil register), in force since 1 July 2004 (AS 2004 2911; BBl 2001 1639).

Art. 6b1B. Law of persons / III. Legal entities / 1. In general

III. Legal entities

1. In general2

1 Associations of persons and institutions or foundations that had acquired legal personality under the previous law, retain their personality under the new law even where they would not acquire legal personality under the new law.

2 Existing legal entities that require to be entered in the public register in accordance with this Code must register within five years of the commencement of the new law even if no provision was made for registration under the previous law and are no longer recognised as legal entities on expiry of this time limit.

2bis Religious foundations and family foundation that are not entered in the commercial register when the Amendment of 12 December 2014 (Art. 52 para. 2) comes into force continue to be recognised as legal entities. They must be entered in the commercial register within five years of the Amendment coming into force. The Federal Council shall take the special circumstances of religious foundations into account when determining the requirements for entry in the commercial register.3

3 The status of the legal personality of all legal entities is determined by the new law as soon as this Code comes into force.


1 Originally Art. 6a. Previously Art. 7.
2 Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).
3 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 12 Dec. 2014 on the Implementation of the 2012 Revision of the Recommendations of the Financial Action Task Force, in force since 1 Jan. 2016 (AS 2015 1389; BBl 2014 605).

Art. 6c1B. Law of persons / III. Legal entities / 2. Accounting and auditors

2. Accounting and auditors

The provisions of the Amendment of 16 December 20052 relating to accounting and auditors apply from first financial year that begins on or after the commencement of this Code.


1 Inserted by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).
2AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969

Art. 6d1B. Law of persons / IV. Protection of the individual against violence, threats or stalking

IV. Protection of the individual against violence, threats or stalking

The new law applies to proceedings that are already pending when the amendment of 14 December 2018 comes into force.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 14 Dec. 2018 on Improving the Protection given to Victims of Violence, in force since 1 July 2020 (AS 2019 2273; BBl 2017 7307).

Art. 71C. Family law / I. Marriage

C. Family law

I. Marriage

1 The new law applies to marriage as soon as the Federal Act of 26 June 19982 has come into force.

2 Marriages subject to grounds for annulment under the previous law may, once the new law has come into force, only be annulled under the new law. However the period that has lapsed before this date will be taken into account in determining time limits.


1 Inserted by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
2AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1

Art. 7a1C. Family law / Ibis. Divorce / 1. Principle

Ibis. Divorce

1. Principle

1 Divorce proceedings are governed by the new law as soon as the Federal Act of 26 June 19982 has come into force.

2 Divorces that had taken full legal effect under the previous law remain valid; the new provisions on enforcement apply to periodic maintenance payments or lump sum settlement that are fixed as an alternative to maintenance or as a maintenance contribution.

3 Any amendment of the divorce decree is carried out in accordance with the previous law with the exception of the provisions on children and procedural matters.


1 Inserted by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
2AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1

Art. 7b1C. Family law / Ibis. Divorce / 2. Pending divorce proceedings

2. Pending divorce proceedings

1 The new law applies to divorce proceedings that are pending on the commencement of the Federal Act of 26 June 19982 and which must be judged by a cantonal authority.

2 New legal requests that are required due to the change in the applicable law are permitted; uncontested parts of the judgment remain binding, unless they are materially so closely connected with the requests that remain to be judged that it makes sense to reassess the entire case

3 The Federal Supreme Court decides in accordance with the previous law in cases where the contested judgment was issued before the commencement of the Federal Act of 26 June 1998; this also applies if the case is referred back to the cantonal authority.


1 Inserted by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
2AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1

Art. 7c1C. Family law / Ibis. Divorce / 3. Period of separation for pending divorce proceedings

3. Period of separation for pending divorce proceedings

For divorce proceedings that are pending on commencement of the Amendment of 19 December 20032 and must be judged by a cantonal authority, the period of separation under the new law applies.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 2003 (Period of Separation under Divorce Law), in force since 1 June 2004 (AS 2004 2161; BBl 2003 3927 5825).
2AS 2004 2161

Art. 7d1C. Family law / Ibis. Divorce / 4. Occupational pension

4. Occupational pension

1 The new law on occupational pensions on divorce applies as soon as the amendment of 19 June 2015 comes into force.

2 The new law applies to divorce cases pending before a cantonal court at the time when the amendment of 19 June 2015 comes into force.

3 When the contested decision was made before the amendment of 19 June 2015 came into force, the Federal Supreme Court shall decide under previous law; this also applies when a case is referred back to the cantonal court.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).

Art. 7e1C. Family law / Ibis. Divorce / 5. Conversion of existing pensions

5. Conversion of existing pensions

1 If on divorce under the previous law the court, when deciding on the equitable division of pensions, has awarded compensation to the entitled spouse in the form of a pension that terminates on the death of the liable or the entitled spouse, the entitled spouse may, within one year of the amendment of 19 June 2015 coming into force, demand that he or she be granted a life-long pension in accordance with Article 124a instead, should the liable spouse draw an old-age pension or an invalidity pension after the commencement of the statutory pension age.

2 In the case of decisions made abroad, jurisdiction is determined by Article 64 of the Federal Act of 18 December 19872 on International Private Law.

3 Any pension payments already made under previous law are considered part of the pension awarded.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).
2 SR 291

Art. 81C. Family law / Iter. Effects the marriage in general / 1. Principle

Iter. Effects the marriage in general

1. Principle

For the effects of the marriage in general, the new law applies as soon as the Federal Act of 5 October 1984 has come into force.


1 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

Art. 8a1C. Family law / Iter. Effects the marriage in general / 2. Surname

2. Surname

A spouse who changed his or her name on marriage before the amendment to this Code of 30 September 2011 came into force may declare to the civil registrar at any time that he or she wishes to use his or her name before marriage again.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191). Amended by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 8b1C. Family law / Iter. Effects the marriage in general / 3. Citizenship

3. Citizenship

A Swiss woman who married under the previous law may within one year of the new law coming into force declare to the competent authority of her former canton of origin that she wishes to retain the citizenship that she held as a single woman.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 91C. Family law / II. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted before 1 January 1912

II. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted before 1 January 19122

The legal effects on marital property of marriages contracted before 1 January 1912 are governed by the provisions of the Civil Code on the application of the previous and new law that came into force on that day.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).
2 For the application of the transitional law, see also the previous provisions of the Sixth Title at the end of the Civil Code.

Art. 9a1C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 1. In general

IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 19122

1. In general

1 The new law applies to marriages that exist when the Federal Act of 5 October 1984 comes into force, unless otherwise provided.

2 The legal effects on marital property of marriages that were dissolved before the Federal Act of 5 October 1984 came into force are governed by the previous law.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).
2 See the provisions applicable until 31 Dec. 1987 at the end of this text.

Art. 9b1C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 2. Change from a union of property to participation in acquired property / a. Change to the bodies of assets

2. Change from a union of property to participation in acquired property

a. Change to the bodies of assets

1 Spouses who have hitherto been subject to a union of property regime are now subject to the regulations on participation in acquired property in relation to each other and to third parties.

2 The assets of each spouse become his or her own property or acquisitions in accordance with the regulations on participation in acquired property; separate property in terms of a marital agreement becomes personal assets.

3 The wife reclaims the property she brought into the marriage that became her husband's property or makes a claim for compensation.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 9c1C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 2. Change from a union of property to participation in acquired property / b. Preferential right

b. Preferential right

In the event of the husband's bankruptcy and the distraint of his assets, the previous provisions on the wife's right to compensation in respect of property that she has brought into the marriage and which is no longer available continue to apply for ten years after the new law comes into force.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 9d1C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 2. Change from a union of property to participation in acquired property / c. Division of marital property under the new law

c. Division of marital property under the new law

1 After the new law comes into force, the division of marital property between the spouses is governed for the entire duration of the previous and the new statutory marital property regime by the regulations on participation in acquired property, unless the spouses have completed the division of marital property in accordance with the provisions on union of property at the time when the new law comes into force.

2 Before the new law comes into force, either spouse may give written notice to the other that the current marital property regime of union of property must be dissolved in accordance with the previous law.

3 If the marital property regime is dissolved because an action filed before the new law comes into force is upheld, the division of marital property is governed by the previous law.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 9e1C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 3. Retention of the union of property regime

3. Retention of the union of property regime

1 Spouses subject to the statutory marital property regime of union of property who have not changed this marital property regime by marital agreement may by one year at the latest after the new law comes into force elect to retain the union of property regime by filing a joint written declaration with the marital property register office at their domicile; the marital property register office shall maintain a register of such declarations that anyone may inspect.

2 The marital property regime may only be cited in opposition to a third party if that third party is or should be aware of it.

3 The new regulations on the separation of property apply in future to the spouses' separate property.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 9f1C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 4. Retention of separation of property by operation of law or by court order

4. Retention of separation of property by operation of law or by court order

In the case of a separation of property established by operation of the law or by court order, the spouses are subject to the new provisions on the separation of property.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 101C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 5. Marital agreement / a. In general

5. Marital agreement

a. In general

1 If the spouses have entered into a marital agreement in accordance with the Civil Code, this marital agreement continues to apply and their entire marital property regime continues to be governed by the previous law, subject to the reservation of the provisions of this Title on separate property, legal effect on third parties and the contractual separation of property.

2 The new regulations on the separation of property apply in future to the spouses' separate property.

3 Agreements on participation in a surplus or deficit in the case of a union of property regime must not adversely affect the statutory inheritance entitlements of children who are not the common issue of the spouses or those of the issue of such children.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 10a1C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 5. Marital agreement / b. Legal effect in relation to third parties

b. Legal effect in relation to third parties

1 The marital property regime may only be cited in opposition to a third party if that third party is or should be aware of it.

2 If the marital property agreement has no legal effect in relation to third parties, the provisions on participation in acquired property apply from now on in relation to such parties.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 10b1C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 5. Marital agreement / c. Application of the new law

c. Application of the new law

1 Spouses subject to a union of property regime who have changed this marital property regime by marital agreement may by one year at the latest after the new law comes into force elect to make their legal rights subject to the new statutory marital property regime of participation in acquired property by filing of a joint written declaration with marital property register office at their domicile.

2 In this event, contractual participation in the surplus shall in future apply to the total amount of the surplus of both spouses, unless a marital property agreement provides otherwise.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 10c1C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 5. Marital agreement / d. Contractual separation of property according to previous law

d. Contractual separation of property according to previous law

If the spouses agreed to a separation of property under the previous law, they are subject in future to the new provisions on the separation of property.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 10d1C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 5. Marital agreement / e. Marital agreements concluded with a view to the new law coming into force

e. Marital agreements concluded with a view to the new law coming into force

Marital agreements concluded before the Federal Act of 5 October 1984 comes into force but which are intended to take effect only under the new law do not require the approval of the child protection authority.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 10e1C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 5. Marital agreement / f. Register of marital property

f. Register of marital property

1 After the Federal Act of 5 October 1984 comes into force, no further entries will be made in the register of marital property.

2 The right to inspect the register continues to apply.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 111C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 6. Repayment of debts in the case of separation of assets under the law of marital property

6. Repayment of debts in the case of separation of assets under the law of marital property

If a separation of assets under the law of marital property in connection with the new law coming into force causes serious difficulties for a spouse who is liable to pay debts or the replace property that is due, he or she may request additional time to pay; the debt must be secured if this is justified by the circumstances.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 11a1C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 7. Protection of creditors

7. Protection of creditors

If the marital property rights change when the Federal Act of 5 October 1984 comes into force, the provisions on the protection the creditors in the event of a change in the marital property regime govern liability.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 121C. Family law / III. The parent-child relationship in general

III. The parent-child relationship in general

1 As soon as this Code comes into force, the establishment and effects of the parent-child relationship are governed by the new law; the surname and the citizenship acquired under previous law are retained.

2 Children who are subject to parental authority by operation of the new law but who are under guardianship when the new law comes into force must be placed under parental authority no later than one year after that date unless the contrary was ordered under the provisions on the withdrawal of parental of authority.

3 A transfer or withdrawal of parental authority officially ordered under the previous law remains effective after the new law comes into force.

4 When the Amendment of 21 June 2013 comes into force, if parental responsibility is assigned to only one parent, the other parent may within one year of this Amendment coming into force request the competent authority to order joint parental responsibility. Article 298b applies mutatis mutandis.2

5 A parent whose parental responsibility is revoked on divorce may file a request with the competent court only if the divorce was decreed less than five years before the Amendment of 21 June 2013 comes into force.3


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).
3 Inserted by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 12a1C. Family law / IIIbis. Adoption / 1. Continuation of the previous law

IIIbis. Adoption

1. Continuation of the previous law

1 An adoption pronounced before the new provisions of the Federal Act of 30 June 1972 on the Amendment of the Swiss Civil Code come into force continues to be governed by the law that came into force on 1 January 19122; consents validly given in accordance with this law remain effective in every case.

2 Persons who are not yet 20 years old when the Federal Act of 7 October 1994 comes into force may still be adopted in accordance with the provisions on minority after attaining majority provided the application is filed within two years of the Federal Act coming into force and of their 20th birthday.3


1 Inserted by No I 3 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).
2 Art. 465 Civil Code in the version of 1 Jan. 1912: 1 An adoptive child and his or her issue have the same rights of succession in respect of the adoptive parents as the issue of their marriage. 2 Adoptive parents and their blood relatives have no rights of succession in respect of an adoptive child.
3 Inserted by No I of the FA of 7 Oct. 1994, in force since 1 Jan. 1996 (AS 1995 1126; BBl 1993 I 1169).

Art. 12b1C. Family law / IIIbis. Adoption / 2. Pending proceedings

2. Pending proceedings

The new law applies to adoption procedures pending at the time the amendment of 17 June 2016 comes into force.


1 Inserted by No I 3 of the FA of 30 June 1972 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200). Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 12c1C. Family law / IIIbis. Adoption / 3. Application of the new law

3. Application of the new law

The provisions of the amendment of 17 June 2016 on the confidentiality of adoption information, on information about the biological parents and their direct descendants and on the possibility of arranging contact between the biological parents and the child also apply to adoptions which are granted prior to the amendment coming into force or which are pending at the time it comes into force.


1 Inserted by No I 3 of the FA of 30 June 1972 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200). Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 12cbis1

1 Inserted by Annex No 2 of the FA of 22 June 2001 on the Hague Convention on Adoption and on Measures to Protect Children in International Adoption Cases (AS 2002 3988; BBl 1999 5795). Repealed by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), with effect from 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 12d1C. Family law / IIIter. Contesting a declaration of legitimacy

IIIter. Contesting a declaration of legitimacy

The contesting of a declaration of legitimacy made under the previous law is governed by analogy by the provisions of the new laws on the contesting of recognition following the parents' marriage.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 131C. Family law / IV. Paternity actions / 1. Pending actions

IV. Paternity actions

1. Pending actions

1 Actions pending when the new law comes into force are judged in accordance with the new law.

2 The effects until the new law comes into force are determined by the previous law.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 13a1C. Family law / IV. Paternity actions / 2. New actions

2. New actions

1 If a pecuniary obligation on the father's part is established by court decision or by contract before the new law comes into force, and if the child has not yet reached the age of ten when the new law comes into force, the child may within two years bring an action under the provisions of the new law to have the parent-child relationship declared.

2 If the Defendant proves that he or she is not the father or is less likely to be the father than another person, the right to claim future maintenance lapses.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 13b1C. Family law / IVbis. Time limit for declaring or challenging the parent-child relationship

IVbis. Time limit for declaring or challenging the parent-child relationship

Any person who attains majority due to the Federal Act of 7 October 1994 coming into force may in any case file an action within one year to declare or challenge the parent-child relationship.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 7 Oct. 1994, in force since 1 Jan. 1996 (AS 1995 1126; BBl 1993 I 1169).

Art. 13c1C. Family law / IVter. Maintenance contributions / 2. Pending proceedings

IVter. Maintenance contributions

1. Existing maintenance titles

The child may apply for the revision of any maintenance payments set in an approved maintenance agreement or in a decision before the amendment of 20 March 2015 came into force. If they were set at the same time as maintenance payments to one of the parents, payments shall only be revised if there has been a substantial change in circumstances.

Art. 13cbis2

2. Pending proceedings

1 The new legislation applies to proceedings that are pending at the time of the amendment of 20 March 2015 coming into force.

2 When the contested decision was made before the amendment of 20 March 2015 came into force, the Federal Supreme Court shall decide under the previous law; this also applies when a case is referred back to the cantonal court.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 7 Oct. 1994 (AS 1995 1126; BBl 1993 I 1169). Amended by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 13d1C. Family law / IVquater. Name of the child

IVquater. Name of the child

1 If after the amendment to this Code of 30 September 2011 comes into force the parents on the basis of a declaration under Article 8a of this Title no longer have the same surname, they may declare within one year of the new law coming into force that their children will take the surname before marriage of the parent who made the declaration.

2 If the parental responsibility of a child of parents who are not married to each other is transferred to both parents or the father alone before the amendment to this Code of 30 September 2011 comes into force, the declaration provided for in Article 270a paragraphs 2 and 3 may be made within one year of the new law coming into force.

3 In accordance with Article 270b, this shall be subject to the child's consent.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 141C. Family law / V. Adult protection / 1. Existing measures

V. Adult protection

1. Existing measures

1 The new law governs adult protection as soon as the Amendment of 19 December 20082 comes into force.

2 Persons who have been made wards of court under the previous law shall be made subject to a general deputyship under the new law. The adult protection authority shall adapt to the new law as soon as possible. Unless the authority has decided otherwise in the case of extended parental responsibility, parents are exempt from the obligation to prepare an inventory, report and file accounts regularly and to obtain consent for certain transactions.

3 Other measures ordered under the previous law cease to apply three years after the Amendment of 19 December 2008 comes into force unless the adult protection authority transforms them into a measure under the new law.

4 Where a doctor based on Article 397b paragraph 2 in its version of 1 January 19813 ordered the care-related detention of a mentally ill person, this measure shall continue to apply. The relevant institution shall notify the adult protection authority six months at the latest after the new law comes into force whether it regarded the requirements for hospitalisation to be met. The adult protection authority shall carry out the required enquiries in accordance with the provisions on regular review and if applicable confirm the hospitalisation decision.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
2AS 2011 725
3 AS 1980 31

Art. 14a1C. Family law / V. Adult protection / 2. Pending proceedings

2. Pending proceedings

1 Pending proceedings shall be continued by the new competent authority after the Amendment of 19 December 20082 comes into force.

2 The new procedural law applies.

3 The authority shall decide whether and to what extent the previous proceedings require to be amended.


1 Inserted by No II of the FA of 6 Oct. 1978 (AS 1980 31; BBl 1977 III 1). Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
2AS 2011 725

Art. 15 D. Succession law / I. Heirs and succession

D. Succession law

I. Heirs and succession

1 The succession rights and the related and inseparable effects on marital property under cantonal law of the death of a father, a mother or a spouse are determined, provided the deceased dies before this Code comes into force, by the previous law.

2 The foregoing applies both to heirs and to succession.

Art. 16 D. Succession law / II. Testamentary dispositions

II. Testamentary dispositions

1 The making or revocation of a testamentary disposition carried out before this Code comes into force, if done by a person subsequently deceased who had testamentary capacity under the law that applied at the time, may not be contested on the grounds that the deceased died following the commencement of the new law and would not have had testamentary capacity under its provisions.

2 A testamentary disposition may not be contested due to a formal defect if it complies with the provisions on form that applied when it was made or at the time of death.

3 The contesting of a disposition on the grounds that the testator exceeded his or her testamentary freedom or due to the nature of the disposition is governed in the case of all testamentary dispositions by the provisions of the new law if the deceased died after the commencement of this Code.

Art. 17 E. Property law / I. Rights in rem in general

E. Property law

I. Rights in rem in general

1 Rights in rem existing when this Code comes into force continue to be recognised under the new law subject to the reservation of the regulations on the land register.

2 However, the scope of rights of ownership and restricted rights in rem is subject to the new law after this Code comes into force unless the Code provides otherwise.

3 Rights that can no longer be created under the new law remain subject to the previous law.

Art. 18 E. Property law / II. Right to entry in the land register

II. Right to entry in the land register

1 Rights to create a right in rem that were established before this Code comes into force are recognised as valid provided they correspond to the form required by the former or the new law.

2 The ordinance on maintaining the land register determines what documentary proof is required for the registration of such rights.

3 The scope of a right in rem established before this Code comes into force by a legal transaction remains recognised under the new law, provided it is compatible with the same.

Art. 19 E. Property law / III. Adverse possession

III. Adverse possession

1 Adverse possession is governed by the new law after this Code comes into force.

2 If however adverse possession recognised under the new law has begun under the previous law, the time that elapsed before this Code comes into force is taken into account in the calculating the period of adverse possession.

Art. 201E. Property law / IV. Special rights of ownership / 1. Trees on another person's land

IV. Special rights of ownership

1. Trees on another person's land

1 Existing rights of ownership in relation to trees on another person's land continue to be recognised under cantonal law.

2 The cantons shall have the power to limit or revoke these conditions.


1 Amended by No IV of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 20bis1E. Property law / IV. Special rights of ownership / 2. Condominium / a. Original

2. Condominium

a. Original

Condominium governed by the former cantonal law is subject to the new provisions of this Code even if the storeys or parts of storeys are not divided into self-contained dwellings or business units.


1 Inserted by No IV of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 20ter1E. Property law / IV. Special rights of ownership / 2. Condominium / b. Converted

b. Converted

1 The cantons may also make condominium recorded in the land register in forms that accord with the law that came into force on 1 January 1912 subject to the new regulations on condominium.

2 The new law becomes effective when the corresponding amendment is made to the entries in the land register.


1 Inserted by No IV of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 20quater1E. Property law / IV. Special rights of ownership / 2. Condominium / c. Correction of the land registers

c. Correction of the land registers

In order to make the converted condominium subject to the new regulations and to register existing condominium, the cantons may order the correction of the land registers and issue special procedural regulations for this purpose.


1 Inserted by No IV of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 21 E. Property law / V. Easements

V. Easements

1 The easements created before this Code comes into force remain valid following the introduction of the land register even if not registered, but until registered may not be enforced against third parties acting in good faith.

2 Obligations ancillary to easements that were established before the amendment of 11 December 20091 came into force and which are based solely on land register supporting documents may continue to be cited in opposition to third parties who rely on the land register in good faith.2


1AS 2011 4637
2 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 22 E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 1. Recognition of the existing document of title

VI. Mortgage rights

1. Recognition of the existing document of title

1 Documents of title existing when this Code comes into force remain in force without having to be adapted to the new law.

2 The cantons have the right to require new versions of existing documents of title to be drawn up on the basis of the new law within specific time limits.

Art. 23 E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 2. Creation of liens

2. Creation of liens

1 After this Code comes into force, new mortgage rights may only be created in the forms recognised herein.

2 Until the introduction of the land register, the previous cantonal legal forms for their creation remain valid.

Art. 24 E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 3. Repayment of securities

3. Repayment of securities

1 The repayment and modification the title, release from liability under a lien and suchlike are subject to the new provisions following the commencement of the new law.

2 However, until the introduction of the land register, the forms are governed by cantonal law.

Art. 25 E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 4. Extent of liability under the lien

4. Extent of liability under the lien

1 In the case of all mortgage rights, the extent of liability under the lien is determined by the new law.

2 However, if by virtue of a special agreement the creditor has validly received certain objects with the property pledged, the lien continues to apply to these objects even if they could not be pledged under the new law.

Art. 26 E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 5. Rights and obligations from the mortgage / a. In general

5. Rights and obligations from the mortgage

a. In general

1 The rights and obligations of the creditor and of the debtor in relation to the contractual effect of liens existing when this Code comes into force are governed by the previous law.

2 In relation to effects that arise by operation of the law which cannot be modified contractually, the new law also applies to existing liens.

3 If the lien applies to two or more parcels of land, liability under the lien continues to be governed by the previous law.

Art. 27 E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 5. Rights and obligations from the mortgage / b. Rights to security

b. Rights to security

The rights of the lien creditor during the existing legal relationship, such as rights to security, and the rights of the debtor are governed by the new law in relation to all liens from the time at which this Code comes into force.

Art. 28 E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 5. Rights and obligations from the mortgage / c. Termination, transfer

c. Termination, transfer

For liens existing when this Code comes into force, the termination of the secured debts and the transfer the document of title are governed by the previous law, subject to the reservation of the mandatory provisions of the new law.

Art. 29 E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 6. Ranking

6. Ranking

1 Until the introduction of the land register, the ranking of liens is governed by the previous law.

2 Following the introduction of the land register, the ranking of creditors is governed by the land register law contained in this Code.

Art. 30 E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 7. Ranking positions

7. Ranking positions

1 In relation to a fixed ranking position or the right of a creditor to claim a vacant position or an advancement in ranking, the new law applies on the introduction of the land register and in every case from five years after this Code comes into force, subject to the reservation of creditors' existing special claims.

2 The cantons may enact further transitional provisions.1


1 Amended by No II 21 of the FA of 15 Dec. 1989 on the Approval of Cantonal Legislation by the Confederation, in force since 1 Feb. 1991 (AS 1991 362; BBl 1988 II 1333).

Art. 31 and 321E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 8. ...

8. ...


1 Repealed by No I 2 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), with effect from 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 33 E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 9. Equal status of previous forms of lien with those under the new law

9. Equal status of previous forms of lien with those under the new law

1 The cantonal implementing legislation may stipulate that in general or in a specific legal relationship a form of mortgage under the previous law shall be regarded as equivalent to a form of mortgage under the new law.

2 If this occurs, the provisions of this Code also apply to such cantonal liens from the date on which the Code comes into force.

3 ...1


1 Repealed by No II 21 of the FA of 15 Dec. 1989 on the Approval of Cantonal Legislation by the Confederation (AS 1991 362; BBl 1988 II 1333).

Art. 33a1E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 10. Continued application of previous law to existing forms of lien

10. Continued application of previous law to existing forms of lien

1 Land charge certificates and mortgage certificates issued in series remain recorded in the land register.

2 They remain governed by the provisions of the previous law.

3 Cantonal law may provide for the conversion of land charge certificates created under federal law or earlier law into forms of lien under the current law. Conversion may also involve the introduction of personal liability for the owner of the mortgaged property for minor sums.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 33b1E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 11. Conversion the form of the mortgage certificate

11. Conversion the form of the mortgage certificate

The landowner and the mortgage certificate creditors may jointly request in writing that a mortgage certificate on paper recorded before the amendment of 11 December 20092 comes into force be converted into a register mortgage certificate.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2AS 2011 4637

Art. 34 E. Property law / VII. Charges on chattels / 1. Provisions on form

VII. Charges on chattels

1. Provisions on form

1 From the date on which the Code comes into force, charges on chattels may only be created in the forms provided for herein.

2 Where a charge on chattels has been created in another form before this time, it is extinguished after a period of six months which begins to run if the debt is due for payment from the date on which the new law comes into force and in other cases from the date on which it becomes due for payment or when termination is permitted.

Art. 35 E. Property law / VII. Charges on chattels / 2. Effect

2. Effect

1 The effects of the charge on chattels, the rights and obligations of the pledgee, of the pledger and of the pledge debtor are governed from the date on which this Code comes into force by the new law, even if the charge was created before that date.

2 An agreement stipulating that the pledged chattel will become the property of the pledgee in the event of default on the part of the debtor that is concluded before this Code comes into force ceases to be valid from that date.

Art. 36 E. Property law / VIII. Special lien

VIII. Special lien

1 A special lien under this Code also extends to objects that were subject to the power of disposal of the creditor before this Code comes into force.

2 It may also be exercised by the creditors in respect of claims that originated before this date.

3 The effect of special liens originating at an earlier date is subject to the provisions of this Code.

Art. 37 E. Property law / IX. Possession

IX. Possession

When this Code comes into force, possession becomes subject to the new law.

Art. 38 E. Property law / X. Land register / 1. Establishment of the land register

X. Land register

1. Establishment of the land register

1 After consulting the cantons, the Federal Council shall draw up a plan for the introduction of the land register. It may delegate this responsibility to the competent department or office.1

2 ...2


1 Amended by Annex No II of the FA of 5 Oct. 2007 on Geoinformation, in force since 1 July 2008 (AS 2008 2793; BBl 2006 7817).
2 Repealed by Annex No II of the FA of 5 Oct. 2007 on Geoinformation, with effect from 1 July 2008 (AS 2008 2793; BBl 2006 7817).

Art. 391E. Property law / X. Land register / 2. Official cadastral survey / a. ...

2. Official cadastral survey

a. ...


1 Repealed by Annex No II of the FA of 5 Oct. 2007 on Geoinformation, with effect from 1 July 2008 (AS 2008 2793; BBl 2006 7817)

Art. 40 E. Property law / X. Land register / 2. Official cadastral survey / b. Relation to the land register

b. Relation to the land register

1 As a general rule, the surveying should precede the establishment of the land register.

2 With consent of the Confederation, however, the land register may be established beforehand if adequate descriptions of the properties are available.

Art. 41 E. Property law / X. Land register / 2. Official cadastral survey / c. Time schedule

c. Time schedule

1 ...1

2 The surveying and the introduction of the land register may be carried out successively for the individual districts of a canton.


1 Repealed by Annex No II of the FA of 5 October 2007 on Geoinformation, with effect from 1 July 2008 (AS 2008 2793; BBl 2006 7817).

Art. 421

1 Repealed by Annex No II of the FA of 5 October 2007 on Geoinformation, with effect from 1 July 2008 (AS 2008 2793; BBl 2006 7817).

Art. 43 E. Property law / X. Land register / 3. Registration of rights in rem / a. Procedure

3. Registration of rights in rem

a. Procedure

1 On the introduction of the land register, rights in rem that already exist shall be recorded in the register.

2 For this purpose, an announcement must be made to the public requesting them to give notice of and register these rights.

3 Rights in rem registered under the previous law in public books shall, provided they may be created under the new law, be entered ex officio in the land register.

Art. 44 E. Property law / X. Land register / 3. Registration of rights in rem / b. Consequences of non-registration

b. Consequences of non-registration

1 Rights in rem under the previous law that are not registered remain valid but may not be cited in opposition to third parties who rely in good faith on the land register.

2 The Confederation or the cantons may however enact legislation to have all rights in rem that are not recorded in the land register declared invalid after a specific date subject to prior notice.

3 Unregistered public law real burdens and statutory liens under cantonal law created before the amendment of 11 December 20091 comes into force may for a period of ten years from the date on which the amendment comes into force be cited in opposition to third parties who rely on the land register in good faith.2


1AS 2011 4637
2 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 451E. Property law / X. Land register / 4. Abolished rights

4. Abolished rights

1 Rights in rem that may no longer be established under the land register law such as the ownership of trees on another person's land, liens on usufructs and suchlike are not recorded in the land register but must be noted in an appropriate manner.

2 If such rights have lapsed for whatever reason, they may not be re-established.


1 Amended by No IV of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 46 E. Property law / X. Land register / 5. Postponement in the introduction of the land register

5. Postponement in the introduction of the land register

1 The introduction of the land register in accordance with the provisions of this Code may be postponed by the cantons with the authorisation of the Federal Council provided the cantonal provisions on forms of notice, with or without amendments appear to be sufficient to guarantee the effects that the new law requires of the land register.

2 The forms of notice under cantonal law that are intended to guarantee the effects required by the new law must be precisely specified.

Art. 47 E. Property law / X. Land register / 6. Introduction of the property law before the land register

6. Introduction of the property law before the land register

The property law under this Code in general comes into force even if the land registers have not been established.

Art. 48 E. Property law / X. Land register / 7. Effect of cantonal forms

7. Effect of cantonal forms

1 When the property law comes into force and before the introduction of the land register, the cantons may designate the procedures, such those for drawing up documents or registration in the registers for land, liens and servitudes, that will immediately have the effect of being recorded in the land register.

2 Even without or before the introduction of the land register, it may be provided that these procedures have the same effect as being recorded in the land register in the case of the creation, transfer, modification and extinction of rights in rem.

3 However, in the event that the land register itself is not introduced or another equivalent institution established, these procedures do not have the same effect as being recorded in the land register in relation to third parties relying thereon in good faith.

Art. 491F. Prescription

F. Prescription

1 Where the new law specifies a longer period than the previous law, the new law applies, provided prescription has not yet taken effect under the previous law.

2 Where the new law specifies a shorter period, the previous law applies.

3 The entry into force of the new law does not change the date on which an ongoing prescriptive period began, unless the law provides otherwise.

4 Otherwise, the new law governs prescription from the time it comes into force.


1 Amended by Annex No 3 of the FA of 15 June 2018 (Revision of the Law on Prescription), in force since 1 Jan. 2020 (AS 2018 5343; BBl 2014 235).

Art. 50 G. Forms of contract

G. Forms of contract

Contracts concluded before this Code comes into force remain valid even if their form is not in accordance with the provisions of the new law.


  Chapter Two: Introductory and Transitional Provisions

Art. 51 A. Repeal of cantonal civil law

A. Repeal of cantonal civil law

On commencement of the Civil Code, cantonal civil law provisions are repealed unless federal law provides otherwise.

Art. 52 B. Supplementary cantonal provisions / I. Rights and duties of the cantons

B. Supplementary cantonal provisions

I. Rights and duties of the cantons

1 The cantons shall enact the provisions required to supplement the Civil Code, including in particular those governing the competent authorities1 and the establishment of civil registries, guardianship authorities and land registries.

2 The cantons shall enact any such supplementary provisions as are required to implement the Civil Code and may do so provisionally in the form of ordinances.2

3 Cantonal provisions on register law require federal approval.3

4 Notice of cantonal provisions on other matters must be given to the Federal Office of Justice.4


1 Presently the Adult protection authority (see Art. 440).
2 Amended by No II 21 of the FA of 15 Dec. 1989 on Approval of Cantonal Decrees by the Confederation, in force since 1 Feb. 1991 (AS 1991 362; BBl 1988 II 1333).
3 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
4 Inserted by No II 21 of the FA of 15 Dec. 1989 on Approval of Cantonal Decrees by the Confederation, in force since 1 Feb. 1991 (AS 1991 362; BBl 1988 II 1333). Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 53 B. Supplementary cantonal provisions / II. Substitute ordinances

II. Substitute ordinances

1 Where a canton has failed to enact the necessary provisions in time, the Federal Council shall provisionally enact substitute ordinances and notify the Federal Assembly.

2 Where a canton refrains from exercising its powers in respect of matters for which supplementary legislation is not indispensable, the provisions of the Civil Code remain applicable.

Art. 54 C. Designation of competent authorities

C. Designation of competent authorities

1 Where the Civil Code makes reference to a competent authority, the cantons shall designate such authority, be it existing or yet to be created.

2 Where the Civil Code does not make express reference to a court or an administrative authority, the cantons may designate either as the competent authority.

3 Unless the Civil Procedure Code of 19 December 20081 applies, the cantons regulate proceedings.2


1 SR 272
2 Amended by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, in force since 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 55 D. Public deeds / I. In general

D. Public deeds

I. In general1

1 The cantons shall regulate the manner in which public deeds are drawn up on their territory.

2 They enact provisions for the drawing up of public deeds in foreign languages.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 55a1D. Public deeds / II. Electronic copies and legalisations

II. Electronic copies and legalisations

1 The cantons may authorise the authenticating officials to make electronic copies of the public deeds that they issue.

2 They may also authorise the authenticating officials to certify electronically that the electronic copies that they create correspond to the original documents on paper and that the signatures are genuine.

3 The authenticating official must use a qualified electronic signature based on a qualified certificate from a recognised provider of certification services in accordance with the Federal Act of 18 March 20162 on Electronic Signatures.3

4 The Federal Council shall issue implementing provisions that guarantee the interoperability of computer systems and the integrity, authenticity and security of the data.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 SR 943.03
3 Amended by Annex No II 3 of the FA of 18 March 2016 on Electronic Signatures, in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 4651; BBl 2014 1001).

Art. 561E. Allocation of water rights

E. Allocation of water rights

Until such time as federal law regulates the allocation of water rights, the following provision applies:

Rights to public waters may be recorded in the land register as distinct and permanent rights, provided they have been granted for at least 30 years or indefinitely and are not allocated to a dominant property in the form of an easement.


1 See current Art. 59 of the FA of 22 Dec. 1916 on Exploitation of Water Resources (SR 721.80).

Art. 571F.–H. ...

F.–H. ...


1 Repealed by Art. 53 para. 1 item b of the FA of 8 Nov. 1934 on Banks and Savings Banks, with effect from 1 March 1935 (AS 51 117; BS 10 337; BBl 1934 I 171).

Art. 581J. Debt enforcement and bankruptcy

J. Debt enforcement and bankruptcy

When this Code comes into force, the Federal Act of 11 April 18892 on Debt enforcement and Bankruptcy is amended as follows:

...3


1 Last four articles renumbered owing to revocation of the original Art. 58 and 59, in accordance with No I of the Code of Obligations transitional provisions, in force since 1 Jan. 1912 (AS 27 317; BS 2 199; BBl 1905 II 1, 1909 III 725, 1911 I 845).
2 SR 281.1
3 For text, see the federal act referred to. For the wording of Art. 132bis, 141 para. 3 and 258 para. 4, see AS 24 233 Final Title Art. 60.

Art. 591K. Application of Swiss and foreign law

K. Application of Swiss and foreign law

1 The Federal Act of 25 June 18912 on the Civil Law Status of Immigrants and Temporary Residents remains in force in respect of the legal status of Swiss nationals abroad and of foreigners in Switzerland and insofar as different laws apply in the cantons.

2 ...3

3 The following provisions are inserted in the Federal Act of 25 June 1891:

Art. 7a–7i

...


1 Last four articles renumbered owing to revocation of the original Art. 58 and 59, in accordance with No I of the Code of Obligations transitional provisions, in force since 1 Jan. 1912 (AS 27 317; BS 2 199; BBl 1905 II 1, 1909 III 725, 1911 I 845).
2 [BS 2 737; AS 1972 2819 II 1, 1977 237 II 1, 1986 122 II 1. AS 1988 1776 Annex No I para. a]. See current IPLA of 18 Dec. 1987 (SR 291).
3 Repealed by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, with effect from 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 601L. Repeal of federal civil law

L. Repeal of federal civil law

1 When this Code comes into force, any provisions of federal civil law which contradict it are repealed.

2 In particular, the following are repealed: the Federal Act of 24 December 18742 on the Determination and Documentation of Civil Status and Marriage; the Federal Act of 22 June 18813 on Personal Capacity to Act; the Federal Act of 14 June 18814 on the Code of Obligations.

3 The special acts concerning the railways, steamships, the post, telegraph and telephone services, the seizure and compulsory liquidation of railways, the laws relating to factory employment and liability arising from the operation of factories and other enterprises, and all federal laws on matters governed by the Code of Obligations which have been enacted to supplement the Federal Act of 14 June 1881 on the Code of Obligations, remain in force.


1 Amended by No I of the Code of Obligations transitional provisions, in force since 1 Jan. 1912 (AS 27 317; BS 2 199; BBl 1905 II 1, 1909 III 725, 1911 I 845).
2 [AS 1 506]
3 [AS 5 556]
4 [AS 5 635, 11 490; BS 2 784 Art. 103 para. 1]

Art. 611M. Final Provision M. Final Provision

M. Final Provision

1 This Code comes into force on 1 January 1912.

2 Subject to the Federal Assembly’s approval, the Federal Council is authorised to declare individual provisions effective at an earlier date.


1 Last four articles renumbered owing to revocation of the original Art. 58 and 59, in accordance with No I of the Code of Obligations transitional provisions, in force since 1 Jan. 1912 (AS 27 317; BBl 1905 II 1, 1909 III 725, 1911 I 845).


1 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).2 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

  Text of the Previous Provisions1  of Title Six

  Title Six: Marital Property Law


1 BS 2 3. These provisions apply as transitional law insofar as provided by Art. 9a ff. Final Title (Revision of Marital Law of 5 Oct. 1984). The provisions have not been translated into English.

  Table of Contents

A. Application of the law Art. 1

I. Acting in good faith Art. 2

II. Good faith Art. 3

III. Judicial discretion Art. 4

I. Cantonal civil law and local custom Art. 5

II. Cantonal public law Art. 6

D. General provisions of the Code of Obligations Art. 7

I. Burden of proof Art. 8

II. Proof by public document Art. 9

Repealed Art. 10

I. Legal capacity Art. 11

1. Nature Art. 12

2. Requirements

a. In general Art. 13

b. Majority Art. 14

c. ... Art. 15

d. Capacity of judgement Art. 16

1. In general Art. 17

2. Lack of capacity of judgement Art. 18

3. Persons capable of judgement but lacking the capacity to act.

a. Principle Art. 19

b. Consent of the legal representative Art. 19a

c. Absence of consent Art. 19b

4. Strictly personal rights Art. 19c

IIIbis. Restriction of the capacity to act Art. 19d

1. Blood kinship Art. 20

2. Kinship by marriage Art. 21

1. Origin Art. 22

2. Domicile

a. Definition Art. 23

b. Change of domicile, temporary residence Art. 24

c. Domicile of minors Art. 25

d. Persons in institutions Art. 26

I. Against excessive restriction Art. 27

1. Principle Art. 28

2. Actions

a. In general Art. 28a

b. Violence, threats or harassment Art. 28b

3. ... Art. 28c–28f

4. Right of reply

a. Principle Art. 28g

b. Form and content Art. 28h

c. Procedure Art. 28i

d. Publication Art. 28k

e. Recourse to the courts Art. 28l

1. Protection of one’s name Art. 29

2. Change of name

a. General Art. 30

b. On the death of a spouse Art. 30a

I. Birth and death Art. 31

1. Burden of proof Art. 32

2. Evidence

a. In general Art. 33

b. Presumption of death Art. 34

1. In general Art. 35

2. Procedure Art. 36

3. Failure of application Art. 37

4. Effect Art. 38

I. In general Art. 39

II. Duty to notify Art. 40

III. Proof of undisputed information Art. 41

1. By court order Art. 42

2. By the register authorities Art. 43

V. Data protection and disclosure Art. 43a

1. Civil registrars Art. 44

2. Supervisory authorities Art. 45

Ia. Central civil information system Art. 45a

II. Liability Art. 46

III. Disciplinary measures Art. 47

I. Federal law Art. 48

II. Cantonal law Art. 49

Repealed Art. 50 and 51

A. Legal personality Art. 52

B. Legal capacity Art. 53

I. Requirements Art. 54

II. Action on behalf of the legal entity Art. 55

D. Seat Art. 56

I. Application of assets Art. 57

II. Liquidation Art. 58

F. Reservation of public law and company law Art. 59

I. Corporate group of persons Art. 60

II. Entry in the commercial register Art. 61

III. Associations lacking legal personality Art. 62

IV. Relationship between articles of association and the law Art. 63

1. Function, convening of meetings Art. 64

2. Powers Art. 65

3. Resolutions

a. Form Art. 66

b. Voting rights and majority Art. 67

c. Exclusion from voting Art. 68

1. Rights and duties in general Art. 69

2. Accounting Art. 69a

III. Auditors Art. 69b

IV. Organisational defects Art. 69c

I. Admission, resignation Art. 70

II. Duty to pay subscriptions Art. 71

III. Exclusion Art. 72

IV. Status of former members Art. 73

V. Protection of the objects of the association Art. 74

VI. Protection of members Art. 75

Cbis. Liability Art. 75a

1. By resolution Art. 76

2. By operation of law Art. 77

3. By court order Art. 78

II. Deletion from the commercial register Art. 79

I. In general Art. 80

II. Form of establishment Art. 81

III. Challenge Art. 82

I. In general Art. 83

II. Bookkeeping Art. 83a

1. Duty of audit and applicable law Art. 83b

2. Supervisory authority Art. 83c

IV. Organisational defects Art. 83d

C. Supervision Art. 84

Cbis. Measures in the event of overindebtedness and insolvency Art. 84a

Art. 84b

I. Reorganisation Art. 85

1. Request by the supervisory authority or the board of trustees Art. 86

2. At the founder’s request or in accordance with his testamentary disposition Art. 86a

III. Minor amendments to the charter Art. 86b

E. Family and ecclesiastical foundations Art. 87

I. Dissolution by the competent authority Art. 88

II. Right to apply for dissolution, deletion from the register Art. 89

G. Employee benefits schemes Art. 89a

A. No management Art. 89b

B. Jurisdiction Art. 89c

A. Betrothal Art. 90

I. Gifts Art. 91

II. Duty to contribute Art. 92

III. Prescription Art. 93

A. Capacity to marry Art. 94

I. Kinship Art. 95

II. Previous marriage Art. 96

A. General principles Art. 97

Abis. Circumvention of the legislation on foreign nationals Art. 97a

I. Request Art. 98

II. Conduct and completion of the preparatory procedure Art. 99

III. Time limit Art. 100

I. Venue Art. 101

II. Form Art. 102

D. Implementing provisions Art. 103

A. General principle Art. 104

I. Grounds Art. 105

II. Action for annulment Art. 106

I. Grounds Art. 107

II. Action for annulment Art. 108

D. Effects of judgment Art. 109

Repealed Art. 110

I. Comprehensive agreement Art. 111

II. Partial agreement Art. 112

Repealed Art. 113

I. After living apart Art. 114

II. Irretrievable breakdown Art. 115

Repealed Art. 116

A. Requirements and procedure Art. 117

B. Effects of separation Art. 118

A. Civil status of divorced spouses Art. 119

B. Marital property law and inheritance law Art. 120

C. Family home Art. 121

I. Principle Art. 122

II. Equitable division of termination benefits Art. 123

III. Equitable division of invalidity pension prior to statutory retirement age Art. 124

IV. Equitable division in the case of invalidity pensions after statutory retirement age and in the case of retirement pensions Art. 124a

V. Exceptions Art. 124b

VI. Offset of mutual entitlements Art. 124c

VII. Unreasonableness Art. 124d

VIII. Impossibility Art. 124e

I. Requirements Art. 125

II. Modalities of maintenance contributions Art. 126

1. Special terms Art. 127

2. Adjustment for inflation Art. 128

3. Adjustment by court order Art. 129

4. Expiry by law Art. 130

1. Enforcement assistance Art. 131

2. Advance payments Art. 131a

3. Directions to debtors and posting security Art. 132

I. Parental rights and obligations Art. 133

II. Change of circumstances Art. 134

Repealed Art. 135–158

A. Marital union; rights and duties of spouses Art. 159

B. Surname Art. 160

C. Cantonal and communal citizenship Art. 161

D. Marital home Art. 162

I. In general Art. 163

II. Allowance for personal use Art. 164

III. Extraordinary contributions by one spouse Art. 165

F. Representation of the marital union Art. 166

G. Spouses’ career or business Art. 167

I. In general Art. 168

II. Family home Art. 169

J. Duty to inform Art. 170

I. Counselling agencies Art. 171

1. In general Art. 172

2. While living together

a. Financial contributions Art. 173

b. Revocation of powers of representation Art. 174

3. Suspension of joint household

a. Grounds Art. 175

b. Arrangements for living apart Art. 176

4. Enforcement

a. Enforcement assistance and advance payments Art. 176a

b. Directions to debtors Art. 177

5. Restriction of power to dispose of assets Art. 178

6. Change of circumstances Art. 179

Repealed Art. 180

A. Ordinary property regime Art. 181

I. Choice of regime Art. 182

II. Capacity to enter into an agreement Art. 183

III. Form of the agreement Art. 184

1. By court order Art. 185

2. ... Art. 186

3. Revocation Art. 187

1. Bankruptcy Art. 188

2. Distraint

a. By court order Art. 189

b. Request Art. 190

3. Revocation Art. 191

III. Liquidation of the previous marital property regime Art. 192

D. Protection of creditors Art. 193

E. ... Art. 194

F. Management of one spouse’s assets by the other Art. 195

G. Inventory Art. 195a

I. Categories Art. 196

II. Acquired property Art. 197

1. By operation of law Art. 198

2. By marital agreement Art. 199

IV. Proof Art. 200

B. Management, benefits and power of disposal Art. 201

C. Liability toward third parties Art. 202

D. Debts between spouses Art. 203

I. Time of dissolution Art. 204

1. In general Art. 205

2. Participation in increased value Art. 206

1. Separation of acquired property and individual property Art. 207

2. Additions Art. 208

3. Compensation operations between acquired property and individual property Art. 209

4. Surplus Art. 210

1. Market value Art. 211

2. Capitalised value

a. In general Art. 212

b. Special circumstances Art. 213

3. Defining juncture Art. 214

1. By law Art. 215

2. By agreement

a. In general Art. 216

b. On divorce, separation, annulment of the marriage or separation of property by court order Art. 217

1. Deferred payment Art. 218

2. Home and household effects Art. 219

3. Claims against third parties Art. 220

I. Categories Art. 221

1. General community of property Art. 222

2. Limited community of property

a. Community restricted to acquired property Art. 223

b. Further community of property regimes Art. 224

III. Individual property Art. 225

IV. Proof Art. 226

1. Everyday housekeeping Art. 227

2. Extraordinary housekeeping Art. 228

3. Use of common property for professional or business purposes Art. 229

4. Renunciation and acceptance of inheritances Art. 230

5. Liability and management costs Art. 231

II. Individual property Art. 232

I. Full liability Art. 233

II. Individual liability Art. 234

D. Debts between spouses Art. 235

I. Time of dissolution Art. 236

II. Allocation to individual property Art. 237

III. Compensation operations between joint and individual property Art. 238

IV. Participation in increased value Art. 239

V. Valuation Art. 240

1. On death or implementation of a different marital property regime Art. 241

2. In other cases Art. 242

1. Individual property Art. 243

2. Home and household effects Art. 244

3. Other assets Art. 245

4. Further provisions Art. 246

I. In general Art. 247

II. Proof Art. 248

B. Liability toward third parties Art. 249

C. Debts between spouses Art. 250

D. Allocation of property in co-ownership Art. 251

A. Formation of parent-child relationship in general Art. 252

B. ... Art. 253

Repealed Art. 254

A. Presumption Art. 255

I. Right to challenge Art. 256

1. In the case of conception in wedlock Art. 256a

2. In the case of conception before marriage or while spouses were living apart Art. 256b

III. Time limits Art. 256c

C. Conflict of presumptions Art. 257

D. Challenge by the parents Art. 258

E. Marriage of the parents Art. 259

I. Admissibility and form Art. 260

1. Right to challenge Art. 260a

2. Grounds Art. 260b

3. Time limits Art. 260c

I. Right to bring the action Art. 261

II. Presumption Art. 262

III. Time limits Art. 263

I. General requirements Art. 264

II. Joint adoption Art. 264a

III. Adoption by a single person Art. 264b

IV. Adoption of a stepchild Art. 264c

V. Difference in age Art. 264d

VI. Consent of the child and the child protection authority Art. 265

1. Form Art. 265a

2. Time of consent Art. 265b

3. Dispensing with consent

a. Requirements Art. 265c

b. Decision Art. 265d

B. Adoption of an adult Art. 266

I. In general Art. 267

II. Name Art. 267a

III. Citizenship Art. 267b

I. In general Art. 268

II. Investigation Art. 268a

III. Hearing for the child Art. 268abis

IV. Representation for the child Art. 268ater

V. Taking account of the attitude of family members Art. 268aquater

Dbis.Confidentiality of adoption information Art. 268b

Dter. Information on the adoption, the biological parents and their issue Art. 268c

Dquater. Cantonal information centre and tracing services Art. 268d

Dquinquies. Contact with the biological parents Art. 268e

1. Lack of consent Art. 269

2. Other defects Art. 269a

II. Time limits Art. 269b

F. Adoption agency services Art. 269c

I. Child of married parents Art. 270

II. Child of unmarried parents Art. 270a

III. Consent of the child Art. 270b

B. Citizenship Art. 271

C. Support and common welfare Art. 272

1. Principle Art. 273

2. Restrictions Art. 274

II. Third parties Art. 274a

III. Responsible authorities Art. 275

E. Right to information Art. 275a

I. Object and scope Art. 276

II. Precedence of maintenance for minors Art. 276a

B. Duration Art. 277

C. Married parents Art. 278

I. Right to sue Art. 279

II. and III. ... Art. 280–284

1. Parents’ contribution Art. 285

2. Other payments for maintenance of the child Art. 285a

1. In general Art. 286

2. Shortfalls Art. 286a

I. Regular payments Art. 287

II. Scope of a maintenance agreement Art. 287a

III. Final settlement Art. 288

I. Entitlement Art. 289

1. Enforcement assistance Art. 290

2. Directions to debtors Art. 291

III. Security Art. 292

G. Public law Art. 293

H. Foster parents Art. 294

J. Rights of the unmarried mother Art. 295

A. Principles Art. 296

Abis. Death of a parent Art. 297

Ater. Divorce and other marital proceedings Art. 298

I. Joint declaration by the parents Art. 298a

II. Decision of the child protection authority Art. 298b

III. Paternity action Art. 298c

IV. Change in circumstances Art. 298d

Aquinquies. Change in the situation after the adoption of a stepchild in a cohabitation relationship Art. 298e

Asexies. Step-parents Art. 299

Asepties. Foster parents Art. 300

I. In general Art. 301

II. Deciding on the place of residence Art. 301a

III. Upbringing Art. 302

IV. Religious upbringing Art. 303

1. In relation to third parties

a. In general Art. 304

b. Child’s legal status Art. 305

2. Within the family community Art. 306

I. Appropriate measures Art. 307

II. Deputyship Art. 308

Repealed Art. 309

III. Revocation of the right to decide on place of residence Art. 310

1. Ex-officio Art. 311

2. With the parents' consent Art. 312

V. Change in circumstances Art. 313

1. General Art. 314

2. Hearing for the child Art. 314a

3. Representation for the child Art. 314abis

4. Committal to a secure institution or psychiatric hospital Art. 314b

5. Right to notify Art. 314c

6. Duty to notify Art. 314d

7. Cooperation and administrative assistance Art. 314e

1. In general Art. 315

2. In marital proceedings

a. Jurisdiction of the court Art. 315a

b. Amendment of court orders Art. 315b

VIII. Supervision of foster children Art. 316

IX. Cooperation in youth support Art. 317

A. Management Art. 318

B. Use of income Art. 319

C. Drawing on the child’s assets Art. 320

I. Endowments Art. 321

II. Statutory entitlement Art. 322

III. Employment income, professional and business assets Art. 323

I. Appropriate measures Art. 324

II. Withdrawal of management Art. 325

I. Return of property Art. 326

II. Liability Art. 327

A. Principle Art. 327a

I. Of the child Art. 327b

II. Of the guardian Art. 327c

A. Persons obliged to lend assistance Art. 328

B. Scope and enforcement of the claim for assistance Art. 329

C. Maintenance of foundlings Art. 330

A. Requirement Art. 331

I. House rules and welfare Art. 332

II. Liability Art. 333

1. Requirements Art. 334

2. Asserting claims Art. 334bis

A. Family foundations Art. 335

1. Authority Art. 336

2. Form Art. 337

II. Duration Art. 338

1. Type of ownership Art. 339

2. Management and representation

a. In general Art. 340

b. Manager's powers Art. 341

3. Common property and personal property Art. 342

1. Grounds Art. 343

2. Notice, insolvency, marriage Art. 344

3. Death of a co-owner Art. 345

4. Division Art. 346

1. Nature Art. 347

2. Special grounds for dissolution Art. 348

Repealed Art. 349–359

A. Principle Art. 360

I. Execution Art. 361

II. Revocation Art. 362

C. Decision on effectiveness and acceptance Art. 363

D. Interpretation and clarification Art. 364

E. Fulfilment Art. 365

F. Remuneration and expenses Art. 366

G. Termination Art. 367

H. Intervention by the adult protection authority Art. 368

I. Regaining the capacity of judgement Art. 369

A. Principle Art. 370

B. Execution and revocation Art. 371

C. Loss of capacity of judgement Art. 372

D. Intervention by the adult protection authority Art. 373

A. Requirements for and extent of the right to act as representative Art. 374

B. Exercise of the right to act as representative Art. 375

C. Intervention by the adult protection authority Art. 376

A. Treatment plan Art. 377

B. The representative Art. 378

C. Urgent cases Art. 379

D. Treatment of a mental disorder Art. 380

E. Intervention by the adult protection authority Art. 381

A. Care agreement Art. 382

I. Requirements Art. 383

II. Records and Information Art. 384

III. Intervention by the adult protection authority Art. 385

C. Protection of privacy Art. 386

D. Supervision of residential and care institution Art. 387

A. Aim Art. 388

B. Subsidiarity and proportionality Art. 389

A. Requirements Art. 390

B. Scope of responsibilities Art. 391

C. Dispensing with a deputyship Art. 392

A. Assistance deputyship Art. 393

I. In general Art. 394

II. Asset management Art. 395

C. Advisory deputyship Art. 396

D. Combination of deputyships Art. 397

E. General deputyship Art. 398

Art. 399

I. General requirements Art. 400

II. Wishes of the client or his or her closely associated persons Art. 401

III. Appointment of two or more persons Art. 402

B. Incapacity and conflict of interests Art. 403

C. Remuneration and expenses Art. 404

A. Assumption of office Art. 405

B. Relationship with the client Art. 406

C. Client's autonomy Art. 407

I. Tasks Art. 408

II. Personal allowance Art. 409

III. Accounts Art. 410

E. Reporting Art. 411

F. Special transactions Art. 412

G. Duties of care and confidentiality Art. 413

H. Amendment of conditions Art. 414

A. Examination of accounts and report Art. 415

I. By law Art. 416

II. By order Art. 417

III. Lack of consent Art. 418

Art. 419

Art. 420

A. By law Art. 421

I. At the deputy's request Art. 422

II. Other cases Art. 423

C. Continuation of transactions Art. 424

D. Final report and final accounts Art. 425

I. Hospitalisation for treatment or care Art. 426

II. Detention of persons admitted voluntarily Art. 427

I. Adult protection authority Art. 428

1. Responsibility Art. 429

2. Procedures Art. 430

C. Regular review Art. 431

D. Authorised representative Art. 432

I. Treatment plan Art. 433

II. Treatment without consent Art. 434

III. Emergencies Art. 435

IV. Pre-discharge interview Art. 436

V. Cantonal law Art. 437

F. Measures restricting freedom of movement Art. 438

G. Petition to the court Art. 439

A. Adult protection authority Art. 440

B. Supervisory authority Art. 441

C. Local jurisdiction Art. 442

A. Notification rights and obligations Art. 443

B. Verification of jurisdiction Art. 444

C. Precautionary measures Art. 445

D. Procedural principles Art. 446

E. Hearing Art. 447

F. Obligations to cooperate and administrative assistance Art. 448

G. Assessment in an institution Art. 449

H. Appointment of a representative Art. 449a

I. Inspection of files Art. 449b

J. Notification duty Art. 449c

A. Object and right of appeal Art. 450

B. Grounds of appeal Art. 450a

C. Deadline for filing the appeal Art. 450b

D. Suspensive effect Art. 450c

E. Consultation with the lower instance and reconsideration Art. 450d

F. Special provisions in the case of care-related hospitalisation Art. 450e

Art. 450f

Art. 450g

A. Duty of confidentiality and information Art. 451

B. Effect of the measures on third parties Art. 452

C. Duty of cooperation Art. 453

A. Principle Art. 454

B. Prescription Art. 455

C. Liability under agency law Art. 456

I. Issue Art. 457

II. Parental line Art. 458

III. Grandparental line Art. 459

IV. Scope of succession rights Art. 460

Art. 461

B. Surviving spouses and registered partners Art. 462

Repealed Art. 463–464

C... Art. 465

D. State authority Art. 466

A. Wills Art. 467

B. Contract of succession Art. 468

C. Voidable dispositions Art. 469

I. Scope of testamentary powers Art. 470

II. Statutory entitlement Art. 471

III. ... Art. 472

IV. Dispositions in favour of the spouse Art. 473

1. Deduction of debts Art. 474

2. Inter vivos gifts Art. 475

3. Insurance claims Art. 476

I. Grounds Art. 477

II. Effect Art. 478

III. Burden of proof Art. 479

IV. Disinheritance of an insolvent person Art. 480

A. In general Art. 481

B. Burdens and conditions Art. 482

C. Naming of heirs Art. 483

I. Nature Art. 484

II. Duty on the obligor of the legacy Art. 485

III. Relationship to the estate Art. 486

E. Substitution Art. 487

I. Designation of a remainderman Art. 488

II. Time of delivery Art. 489

III. Security Art. 490

1. Of the provisional heir Art. 491

2. Of the remainderman Art. 492

V. Issue lacking capacity of judgement Art. 492a

G. Foundations Art. 493

I. Contracts naming heirs and making legacies Art. 494

1. Significance Art. 495

2. Void renunciation Art. 496

3. Rights of the creditors of the estate Art. 497

1. In general Art. 498

2. By public deed

a. Formal requirements Art. 499

b. Role of the public official Art. 500

c. Role of the witnesses Art. 501

d. Drawing up a will without the testator reading and signing it Art. 502

e. Persons involved Art. 503

f. Safekeeping of wills Art. 504

3. Holographic will Art. 505

4. Oral will

a. Dispositions Art. 506

b. Conversion into deed Art. 507

c. Loss of validity Art. 508

1. Revocation Art. 509

2. Destruction Art. 510

3. Subsequent wills Art. 511

I. Execution Art. 512

1. Inter vivos

a. By contract and by will Art. 513

b. By withdrawal from the contract Art. 514

2. Predeceased heir Art. 515

C. Restriction of testamentary freedom Art. 516

A. Appointment of executors Art. 517

B. Function of an executor Art. 518

I. On grounds of lack of testamentary capacity, lack of free will, unlawfulness or immorality Art. 519

1. In general Art. 520

2. In holographic wills Art. 520a

III. Prescription Art. 521

1. In general Art. 522

2. Bequests in favour of heirs with a statutory entitlement Art. 523

3. Rights of creditors Art. 524

1. Of abatement in general Art. 525

2. On specific legacies Art. 526

3. On dispositions inter vivos

a. Cases Art. 527

b. Restitution Art. 528

4. On assurance claims Art. 529

5. On usufruct and annuities Art. 530

6. On naming of remaindermen Art. 531

III. Order of abatement Art. 532

IV. Prescription Art. 533

A. Claims in respect of lifetime transfers Art. 534

I. Abatement Art. 535

II. Reimbursement Art. 536

A. Requirements for the deceased Art. 537

B. Place where succession commences Art. 538

1. Legal capacity Art. 539

2. Unworthiness to inherit

a. Grounds Art. 540

b. Effect on issue Art. 541

1. As heir Art. 542

2. As legatee Art. 543

3. Unborn child Art. 544

4. Remaindermen Art. 545

1. Devolution against security Art. 546

2. Annulment of presumption of death and restitution Art. 547

II. Succession rights of persons presumed dead Art. 548

III. Correlation of the two cases Art. 549

IV. Procedure ex officio Art. 550

A. In general Art. 551

B. Sealing the estate Art. 552

C. Inventory Art. 553

I. In general Art. 554

II. In the case of unknown heirs Art. 555

I. Duty to submit the will Art. 556

II. Reading the will Art. 557

III. Notification of interested parties Art. 558

IV. Release of the estate Art. 559

I. Heirs Art. 560

II. ... Art. 561

1. Vesting Art. 562

2. Object Art. 563

3. Relationship between creditors and legatees Art. 564

4. Abatement Art. 565

1. Right to renounce Art. 566

2. Time limit

a. In general Art. 567

b. In the case of an inventory Art. 568

3. Passing of right to disclaim Art. 569

4. Form Art. 570

II. Forfeiture of right to disclaim Art. 571

III. Disclaimer by one co-heir Art. 572

1. In general Art. 573

2. Entitlement of surviving spouse Art. 574

3. Disclaimer in favour of subsequent heirs Art. 575

V. Extension of time limit Art. 576

VI. Disclaimer of a legacy Art. 577

VII. Security for the heir’s creditors Art. 578

VIII. Liability in the event of disclaimer Art. 579

A. Requirements Art. 580

I. Inventory Art. 581

II. Formal call to account Art. 582

III. Inclusion ex officio Art. 583

IV. Result Art. 584

I. Administration Art. 585

II. Debt enforcement, litigation, prescription Art. 586

I. Time limit for declaration of intention Art. 587

II. Declaration of intention Art. 588

1. Liability as per inventory Art. 589

2. Liability beyond the inventory Art. 590

E. Liability for debts subject to a surety Art. 591

F. Acquisition by a state authority Art. 592

I. At the request of an heir Art. 593

II. At the request of the deceased’s creditors Art. 594

I. Administration Art. 595

liquidation Art. 596

III. Liquidation by the bankruptcy office Art. 597

A. Requirements Art. 598

B. Effect Art. 599

C. Prescription Art. 600

D. Action by a legatee Art. 601

I. Community of heirs Art. 602

II. Liability of the heirs Art. 603

B. Right to division Art. 604

C. Deferral of division Art. 605

D. Claims of household members Art. 606

A. In general Art. 607

I. Testamentary disposition Art. 608

II. Assistance from the authorities Art. 609

I. Equal rights of heirs Art. 610

II. Formation of lots Art. 611

III. Allocation and sale of specific objects Art. 612

IV. Allocation of the home and household effects to the surviving spouse Art. 612a

I. Items that belong together, family documents Art. 613

I.bis Agricultural inventory Art. 613a

II. Claims of the deceased against his or her heirs Art. 614

III. Pledged estate property Art. 615

Repealed Art. 616

1. Method of allocation

a. Imputed value Art. 617

b. Valuation procedure Art. 618

V. Agricultural businesses and land Art. 619

Repealed Art. 620–625

A. Hotchpot duty of the heirs Art. 626

B. Hotchpot if heirs cease to be heirs Art. 627

I. In kind or by imputation of value Art. 628

II. Correlation with share of the estate Art. 629

III. Hotchpot value Art. 630

D. Education costs Art. 631

E. Occasional gifts Art. 632

Repealed Art. 633

I. Contract of division Art. 634

II. Contracts regarding shares of the estate Art. 635

III. Contracts prior to succession Art. 636

I. Warranty Art. 637

II. Challenging the division Art. 638

I. Joint and several liability Art. 639

II. Recourse against co-heirs Art. 640

I. In general Art. 641

II. Animals Art. 641a

I. Constituent parts Art. 642

II. Natural fruits Art. 643

1. Definition Art. 644

2. Exclusions Art. 645

1. Relationship among co-owners Art. 646

2. Use and administration rules Art. 647

3. Ordinary administration Art. 647a

4. Major administrative acts Art. 647b

5. Construction work

a. Necessary work Art. 647c

b. Useful work Art. 647d

c. Works to improve appearance or convenience Art. 647e

6. Power of disposal over the object Art. 648

7. Costs and expenses Art. 649

8. Binding nature of rules and noting in the land register Art. 649a

9. Exclusion from collective ownership

a. Co-owners Art. 649b

b. Further entitled persons Art. 649c

10. Dissolution

a. Right to request division Art. 650

b. Form of partition Art. 651

c. Animals kept as pets Art. 651a

1. Prerequisites Art. 652

2. Effect Art. 653

3. Dissolution Art. 654

III. Joint ownership of agricultural enterprises and land Art. 654a

I. Immovable property Art. 655

II. Dependent property Art. 655a

I. Registration Art. 656

1. Transfer Art. 657

2. Appropriation Art. 658

3. Formation of new land Art. 659

4. Ground displacement

a. In general Art. 660

b. Constant ground displacement Art. 660a

c. Redrawing of boundaries Art. 660b

5. Adverse possession

a. Ordinary adverse possession Art. 661

b. Extraordinary adverse possession Art. 662

c. Time limits Art. 663

6. Ownerless and public objects Art. 664

III. Right to registration Art. 665

C. Loss Art. 666

I. Where the owner cannot be found Art. 666a

II. In the absence of the required management bodies Art. 666b

I. Scope Art. 667

1. Type of boundary Art. 668

2. Duty to establish boundaries Art. 669

3. Co-ownership of boundary markers Art. 670

1. Land and building materials

a. Ownership Art. 671

b. Compensation Art. 672

c. Assignment of land ownership Art. 673

2. Encroaching buildings Art. 674

3. Building right Art. 675

4. Pipes, cables, conduits Art. 676

5. Movable structures Art. 677

IV. Plants grown on the parcel of land Art. 678

1. Acts in excess of ownership rights Art. 679

2. Lawful management of the land Art. 679a

I. In general Art. 680

1. General principles Art. 681

2. Exercise Art. 681a

3. Modification, waiver Art. 681b

4. In respect of co-ownership and building rights Art. 682

5. Right of pre-emption of farms and farmland Art. 682a

Repealed Art. 683

1. Excess detriment Art. 684

2. Excavation and construction

a. Rule Art. 685

b. Cantonal regulations Art. 686

3. Plants

a. Rule Art. 687

b. Cantonal regulations Art. 688

4. Flowing waters Art. 689

5. Drainage Art. 690

6. Pipes, cables, conduits

a. Duty to permit Art. 691

b. Safeguarding the interests of the servient landowner Art. 692

c. Change of circumstances Art. 693

7. Rights of way

a. Necessary right of way Art. 694

b. Other rights of way Art. 695

c. Notation in the land register Art. 696

8. Enclosure Art. 697

9. Duty to maintain Art. 698

1. Access Art. 699

2. Retrieval of driftage and the like Art. 700

3. Trespass to ward off danger or damage Art. 701

1. In general Art. 702

2. Land improvements Art. 703

I. Spring ownership and spring rights Art. 704

II. Diversion of springs Art. 705

1. Damages Art. 706

2. Restoration Art. 707

IV. Community of spring owners Art. 708

V. Use of springs Art. 709

VI. Right to use an essential water source Art. 710

1. Water sources Art. 711

2. Land Art. 712

I. Definition Art. 712a

II. Object Art. 712b

III. Power of disposal Art. 712c

I. Deed of constitution Art. 712d

II. Layout of the condominium units and shares in the property Art. 712e

III. Extinction Art. 712f

I. Applicable provisions Art. 712g

1. Definition and distribution Art. 712h

2. Liability for cost contributions

a. Statutory lien Art. 712i

b. Special lien Art. 712k

III. Community’s capacity to act Art. 712l

1. Competence and legal status Art. 712m

2. Convening and chairing meetings Art. 712n

3. Voting rights Art. 712o

4. Quorum Art. 712p

1. Appointment Art. 712q

2. Removal Art. 712r

3. Duties

a. Implementation of provisions and resolutions concerning administration and use Art. 712s

b. External representation Art. 712t

A. Object Art. 713

1. Delivery of possession Art. 714

2. Reservation of ownership

a. In general Art. 715

b. Transactions involving payment by instalments Art. 716

3. Acquisition without possession Art. 717

1. Ownerless chattels Art. 718

2. Escaped animals Art. 719

1. Reporting, tracing

a. In general Art. 720

b. Animals Art. 720a

2. Safekeeping and auction Art. 721

3. Acquisition of ownership, return Art. 722

4. Treasure trove Art. 723

5. Objects of scientific value Art. 724

IV. Driftage Art. 725

V. Processing Art. 726

VI. Joining and mixing chattels Art. 727

VII. Adverse possession Art. 728

C. Loss Art. 729

A. Object Art. 730

1. Registration Art. 731

2. Legal transaction Art. 732

3. Creation in favour of own property Art. 733

1. In general Art. 734

2. Amalgamation Art. 735

3. By court order Art. 736

1. In general Art. 737

2. As defined by land register entry Art. 738

3. If needs change Art. 739

4. Cantonal law and local custom Art. 740

5. In the case of two or more beneficiaries Art. 740a

II. Duty of maintenance Art. 741

III. Relocation of the encumbrance Art. 742

IV. Partition of a property Art. 743

Repealed Art. 744

I. Object Art. 745

1. In general Art. 746

2. ... Art. 747

1. Grounds Art. 748

2. Duration Art. 749

3. Replacement on extinction of usufruct Art. 750

4. Return

a. Duty Art. 751

b. Liability Art. 752

c. Costs Art. 753

5. Prescription of compensation rights Art. 754

1. Rights of the usufructuary

a. In general Art. 755

b. Natural fruits Art. 756

c. Interest Art. 757

d. Assignability Art. 758

2. Rights of the owner

a. Supervision Art. 759

b. Security Art. 760

c. Security in the case of gifts and statutory usufruct Art. 761

d. Consequence of failure to provide security Art. 762

3. Inventory Art. 763

4. Costs

a. Preservation of the object Art. 764

b. Maintenance and administration Art. 765

c. Duty to pay interest on usufruct of assets Art. 766

d. Insurance Art. 767

1. Land

a. Fruits Art. 768

b. Use Art. 769

c. Woodland Art. 770

d. Mines Art. 771

2. Consumables and valued chattels Art. 772

3. Claims

a. Scope Art. 773

b. Repayments and reinvestment Art. 774

c. Right to assignment Art. 775

I. In general Art. 776

II. Rights of the usufructuary Art. 777

III. Maintenance costs Art. 778

I. Object and entry in the land register Art. 779

II. Legal transaction Art. 779a

III. Nature, scope and noting Art. 779b

1. Reversion Art. 779c

2. Compensation Art. 779d

Repealed Art. 779e

1. Prerequisites Art. 779f

2. Exercising the right of reversion Art. 779g

3. Other applicable cases Art. 779h

1. Right to establish a lien Art. 779i

2. Registration Art. 779k

VII. Maximum duration Art. 779l

D. Right of access to water sources Art. 780

E. Other servitudes Art. 781

F. Judicial measures Art. 781a

A. Object Art. 782

1. Registration and form of acquisition Art. 783

2. Public law real burdens Art. 784

Repealed Art. 785

1. In general Art. 786

2. Redemption

a. By the creditor Art. 787

b. By the debtor Art. 788

c. Redemption sum Art. 789

3. Prescription Art. 790

I. Creditor’s rights Art. 791

II. Debt liability Art. 792

I. Types Art. 793

1. Amount Art. 794

2. Interest Art. 795

1. Property subject to a charge Art. 796

2. Specification

a. In the case of a single property Art. 797

b. In the case of more than one property Art. 798

3. Agricultural properties Art. 798a

1. Registration Art. 799

2. In the case of joint ownership Art. 800

II. Extinction Art. 801

1. Transfer of liens Art. 802

2. Redemption by the debtor Art. 803

3. Monetary compensation Art. 804

I. Extent of security Art. 805

II. Rent Art. 806

III. Prescription Art. 807

1. In the event of a reduction in value

a. Court order and action by the creditor Art. 808

b. Security, restoration, redemption Art. 809

2. Depreciation without owner’s fault Art. 810

3. Disposal of minor portions of the property Art. 811

V. Further encumbrances Art. 812

1. Effect of rank Art. 813

2. Ranking Art. 814

3. Vacant ranks Art. 815

1. Mode Art. 816

2. Distribution of the proceeds Art. 817

3. Extent of security Art. 818

4. Security for maintenance costs Art. 819

1. Precedence Art. 820

2. Extinction of debt and lien Art. 821

IX. Entitlement to insurers’ payments Art. 822

X. Untraceable creditor Art. 823

A. Purpose and nature Art. 824

I. Establishment Art. 825

1. Right to have entry deleted Art. 826

2. Position of owner Art. 827

3. Unilateral redemption

a. Conditions and procedure Art. 828

b. Public auction Art. 829

c. Official valuation Art. 830

4. Termination Art. 831

1. Alienation Art. 832

2. Division Art. 833

3. Notice of assumption of debt Art. 834

II. Assignment of a debt Art. 835

I. Under cantonal law Art. 836

1. Cases in point Art. 837

2. Vendor, co—heirs and co—owners Art. 838

3. Tradesmen and building contractors

a. Registration Art. 839

b. Rank Art. 840

c. Privileged claim Art. 841

I. Purpose; Relationship with the debt arising from the basic relationship Art. 842

II. Form Art. 843

III. Position of owner Art. 844

IV. Sale. Division Art. 845

1. In general Art. 846

2. Notice Art. 847

VI. Protection of persons acting in good faith Art. 848

VII. Objections by the debtor Art. 849

VIII. Authorised person Art. 850

IX. Place of payment Art. 851

X. Changes in the legal relationship Art. 852

XI. Discharge Art. 853

1. In the absence of a creditor Art. 854

2. Deletion Art. 855

XIII. Public call to creditors Art. 856

I. Establishment Art. 857

II. Transfer Art. 858

III. Pledging, distraint and usufruct Art. 859

1. Registration Art. 860

2. Document of title Art. 861

II. Protection of persons acting in good faith Art. 862

1. Claims Art. 863

2. Assignment Art. 864

IV. Cancellation Art. 865

Repealed Art. 866–874

A. Bond issues secured by a lien Art. 875

Repealed Art. 876–883

1. Possession by pledgee Art. 884

2. Pledge of livestock Art. 885

3. Subordinate pledge Art. 886

4. Further pledge by pledgee Art. 887

1. Loss of possession Art. 888

2. Return Art. 889

3. Liability of the pledgee Art. 890

1. Rights of the pledgee Art. 891

2. Scope of the general lien Art. 892

3. Rank Art. 893

4. Default agreements Art. 894

I. Requirements Art. 895

II. Exceptions Art. 896

III. In the event of insolvency Art. 897

IV. Effect Art. 898

A. In general Art. 899

I. In the case of ordinary claims Art. 900

II. In the case of securities Art. 901

III. In the case of documents of title to goods Art. 902

IV. Subordinate pledge Art. 903

I. Extent of security Art. 904

II. Representation of pledged shares and capital contributions to limited liability companies Art. 905

III. Administration and payment Art. 906

I. Licensing Art. 907

II. Duration of licence Art. 908

I. Establishment Art. 909

1. Sale of pawned chattel Art. 910

2. Right to surplus Art. 911

1. Right of redemption Art. 912

2. Pawnbroker’s rights Art. 913

C. Purchase with right of repurchase Art. 914

D. Rules governing pawnbroking Art. 915

I. Definition Art. 919

II. Direct and derivative possession Art. 920

III. Temporary interruption Art. 921

I. Among parties present in person Art. 922

II. Among absent persons Art. 923

III. Without physical transfer Art. 924

IV. In the case of documents of title to goods Art. 925

1. Defence against interference Art. 926

2. Action for restitution Art. 927

3. Action for trespass Art. 928

4. Admissibility and prescription Art. 929

1. Presumption of ownership Art. 930

2. Presumption of indirect ownership Art. 931

3. Action against the possessor Art. 932

4. Power of disposal and right of restitution

a. Entrusted objects Art. 933

b. Stolen or lost chattels Art. 934

c. Cash and bearer securities Art. 935

d. Bad faith Art. 936

5. Presumption of title to land Art. 937

1. Possessor in good faith

a. Use Art. 938

b. Indemnity Art. 939

2. Possession in bad faith Art. 940

IV. Adverse possession Art. 941

1. In general Art. 942

2. Registered data

a. Object Art. 943

b. Exceptions Art. 944

3. Registers

a. Main Register Art. 945

b. Folio Art. 946

c. Joint folio Art. 947

d. Journal, supporting documents Art. 948

4. Implementing ordinances

a. In general Art. 949

b. For electronic registers Art. 949a

4b. ... Art. 949b

4c. ... Art. 949c

4c. Commissioning private individuals to use the electronic version of the land register Art. 949d

5. Official cadastral survey Art. 950

1. Districts

a. Allocation to districts Art. 951

b. Land straddling more than one district Art. 952

2. Land registries Art. 953

3. Fees Art. 954

III. Liability Art. 955

IV. Administrative supervision Art. 956

1. Right of appeal Art. 956a

2. Appeal proceedings Art. 956b

Repealed Art. 957

1. Ownership and rights in rem Art. 958

2. Priority notices

a. Personal rights Art. 959

b. Restrictions on powers of disposal Art. 960

c. Provisional entries Art. 961

d. Entry of subordinate rights Art. 961a

1. Restrictions under public law Art. 962

2. Of representatives Art. 962a

1. Applications

a. For an entry Art. 963

b. For a deletion Art. 964

2. Authority

a. Valid proof of authority Art. 965

b. Completion of application Art. 966

1. In general Art. 967

2. For easements Art. 968

V. Duty to notify Art. 969

I. Information and right of consultation Art. 970

II. Publication Art. 970a

I. Need for an entry Art. 971

1. In general Art. 972

2. In relation to third parties acting in good faith Art. 973

3. In relation to third parties acting in bad faith Art. 974

1. On the division of property Art. 974a

2. In the case of the consolidation of parcels of land Art. 974b

II. Unwarranted entries Art. 975

1. Clearly insignificant entries Art. 976

2. Other entries

a. In general Art. 976a

b. On objection Art. 976b

3. Public revision procedure Art. 976c

IV. Corrections Art. 977

I. General rule of non-retroactive effect Art. 1

1. Public policy and good morals Art. 2

2. Relationships defined by law Art. 3

3. Non-vested rights Art. 4

I. Capacity to act Art. 5

II. Presumed death Art. 6

IIa. Central civil register database Art. 6a

1. In general Art. 6b

2. Accounting and auditors Art. 6c

IV. Protection of the individual against violence, threats or stalking Art. 6d

I. Marriage Art. 7

1. Principle Art. 7a

2. Pending divorce proceedings Art. 7b

3. Period of separation for pending divorce proceedings Art. 7c

4. Occupational pension Art. 7d

5. Conversion of existing pensions Art. 7e

1. Principle Art. 8

2. Surname Art. 8a

3. Citizenship Art. 8b

II. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted before 1 January 1912 Art. 9

1. In general Art. 9a

2. Change from a union of property to participation in acquired property

a. Change to the bodies of assets Art. 9b

b. Preferential right Art. 9c

c. Division of marital property under the new law Art. 9d

3. Retention of the union of property regime Art. 9e

4. Retention of separation of property by operation of law or by court order Art. 9f

5. Marital agreement

a. In general Art. 10

b. Legal effect in relation to third parties Art. 10a

c. Application of the new law Art. 10b

d. Contractual separation of property according to previous law Art. 10c

e. Marital agreements concluded with a view to the new law coming into force Art. 10d

f. Register of marital property Art. 10e

6. Repayment of debts in the case of separation of assets under the law of marital property Art. 11

7. Protection of creditors Art. 11a

III. The parent-child relationship in general Art. 12

1. Continuation of the previous law Art. 12a

2. Pending proceedings Art. 12b

3. Application of the new law Art. 12c

Repealed Art. 12cbis

IIIter. Contesting a declaration of legitimacy Art. 12d

1. Pending actions Art. 13

2. New actions Art. 13a

IVbis. Time limit for declaring or challenging the parent-child relationship Art. 13b

1. Existing maintenance titles

2. Pending proceedings Art. 13c

IVquater. Name of the child Art. 13d

1. Existing measures Art. 14

2. Pending proceedings Art. 14a

I. Heirs and succession Art. 15

II. Testamentary dispositions Art. 16

I. Rights in rem in general Art. 17

II. Right to entry in the land register Art. 18

III. Adverse possession Art. 19

1. Trees on another person's land Art. 20

2. Condominium

a. Original Art. 20bis

b. Converted Art. 20ter

c. Correction of the land registers Art. 20quater

V. Easements Art. 21

1. Recognition of the existing document of title Art. 22

2. Creation of liens Art. 23

3. Repayment of securities Art. 24

4. Extent of liability under the lien Art. 25

5. Rights and obligations from the mortgage

a. In general Art. 26

b. Rights to security Art. 27

c. Termination, transfer Art. 28

6. Ranking Art. 29

7. Ranking positions Art. 30

8. ... Art. 31 and 32

9. Equal status of previous forms of lien with those under the new law Art. 33

10. Continued application of previous law to existing forms of lien Art. 33a

11. Conversion the form of the mortgage certificate Art. 33b

1. Provisions on form Art. 34

2. Effect Art. 35

VIII. Special lien Art. 36

IX. Possession Art. 37

1. Establishment of the land register Art. 38

2. Official cadastral survey

a. ... Art. 39

b. Relation to the land register Art. 40

c. Time schedule Art. 41

Repealed Art. 42

3. Registration of rights in rem

a. Procedure Art. 43

b. Consequences of non-registration Art. 44

4. Abolished rights Art. 45

5. Postponement in the introduction of the land register Art. 46

6. Introduction of the property law before the land register Art. 47

7. Effect of cantonal forms Art. 48

F. Prescription Art. 49

G. Forms of contract Art. 50

A. Repeal of cantonal civil law Art. 51

I. Rights and duties of the cantons Art. 52

II. Substitute ordinances Art. 53

C. Designation of competent authorities Art. 54

I. In general Art. 55

II. Electronic copies and legalisations Art. 55a

E. Allocation of water rights Art. 56

F.–H. ... Art. 57

J. Debt enforcement and bankruptcy Art. 58

K. Application of Swiss and foreign law Art. 59

L. Repeal of federal civil law Art. 60

M. Final Provision Art. 61


 AS 24 233, 27 207 and BS 2 3


1 [BS 1 3]. This provision corresponds to Art. 122 of the Federal Constitution of 18 April 1999 (SR 101).2 Amended by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, in force since 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).3 BBl 1904 IV 1, 1907 VI 367

Index

210

Schweizerisches Zivilgesetzbuch

vom 10. Dezember 1907 (Stand am 1. Januar 2021)

Die Bundesversammlung der Schweizerischen Eidgenossenschaft,

gestützt auf Artikel 64 der Bundesverfassung1,2 nach Einsicht in eine Botschaft des Bundesrates vom 28. Mai 19043,

beschliesst:

  Einleitung

Art. 1 A. Anwendung des Rechts

A. Anwendung des Rechts

1 Das Gesetz findet auf alle Rechtsfragen Anwendung, für die es nach Wortlaut oder Auslegung eine Bestimmung enthält.

2 Kann dem Gesetz keine Vorschrift entnommen werden, so soll das Gericht1 nach Gewohnheitsrecht und, wo auch ein solches fehlt, nach der Regel entscheiden, die es als Gesetzgeber aufstellen würde.

3 Es folgt dabei bewährter Lehre und Überlieferung.


1 Ausdruck gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 26. Juni 1998, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1). Diese Änd. ist im ganzen Erlass berücksichtigt.

Art. 2 B. Inhalt der Rechtsverhältnisse / I. Handeln nach Treu und Glauben

B. Inhalt der Rechtsverhältnisse

I. Handeln nach Treu und Glauben

1 Jedermann hat in der Ausübung seiner Rechte und in der Erfüllung seiner Pflichten nach Treu und Glauben zu handeln.

2 Der offenbare Missbrauch eines Rechtes findet keinen Rechtsschutz.

Art. 3 B. Inhalt der Rechtsverhältnisse / II. Guter Glaube

II. Guter Glaube

1 Wo das Gesetz eine Rechtswirkung an den guten Glauben einer Person geknüpft hat, ist dessen Dasein zu vermuten.

2 Wer bei der Aufmerksamkeit, wie sie nach den Umständen von ihm verlangt werden darf, nicht gutgläubig sein konnte, ist nicht berechtigt, sich auf den guten Glauben zu berufen.

Art. 4 B. Inhalt der Rechtsverhältnisse / III. Gerichtliches Ermessen

III. Gerichtliches1 Ermessen

Wo das Gesetz das Gericht auf sein Ermessen oder auf die Würdigung der Umstände oder auf wichtige Gründe verweist, hat es seine Entscheidung nach Recht und Billigkeit zu treffen.


1 Ausdruck gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 26. Juni 1998, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1). Diese Änd. ist im ganzen Erlass berücksichtigt.

Art. 5 C. Verhältnis zu den Kantonen / I. Kantonales Zivilrecht und Ortsübung

C. Verhältnis zu den Kantonen

I. Kantonales Zivilrecht und Ortsübung

1 Soweit das Bundesrecht die Geltung kantonalen Rechtes vorbehält, sind die Kantone befugt, zivilrechtliche Bestimmungen aufzustellen oder aufzuheben.

2 Wo das Gesetz auf die Übung oder den Ortsgebrauch verweist, gilt das bisherige kantonale Recht als deren Ausdruck, solange nicht eine abweichende Übung nachgewiesen ist.

Art. 6 C. Verhältnis zu den Kantonen / II. Öffentliches Recht der Kantone

II. Öffentliches Recht der Kantone

1 Die Kantone werden in ihren öffentlich-rechtlichen Befugnissen durch das Bundeszivilrecht nicht beschränkt.

2 Sie können in den Schranken ihrer Hoheit den Verkehr mit gewissen Arten von Sachen beschränken oder untersagen oder die Rechtsgeschäfte über solche Sachen als ungültig bezeichnen.

Art. 7 D. Allgemeine Bestimmungen des Obligationenrechtes

D. Allgemeine Bestimmungen des Obligationenrechtes

Die allgemeinen Bestimmungen des Obligationenrechtes1 über die Entstehung, Erfüllung und Aufhebung der Verträge finden auch Anwendung auf andere zivilrechtliche Verhältnisse.


1 SR 220

Art. 8 E. Beweisregeln / I. Beweislast

E. Beweisregeln

I. Beweislast

Wo das Gesetz es nicht anders bestimmt, hat derjenige das Vorhandensein einer behaupteten Tatsache zu beweisen, der aus ihr Rechte ableitet.

Art. 9 E. Beweisregeln / II. Beweis mit öffentlicher Urkunde

II. Beweis mit öffentlicher Urkunde

1 Öffentliche Register und öffentliche Urkunden erbringen für die durch sie bezeugten Tatsachen vollen Beweis, solange nicht die Unrichtigkeit ihres Inhaltes nachgewiesen ist.

2 Dieser Nachweis ist an keine besondere Form gebunden.

Art. 101

1 Aufgehoben durch Anhang 1 Ziff. II 3 der Zivilprozessordnung vom 19. Dez. 2008, mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

  Erster Teil: Das Personenrecht

  Erster Titel: Die natürlichen Personen

  Erster Abschnitt: Das Recht der Persönlichkeit

Art. 11 A. Persönlichkeit im Allgemeinen / I. Rechtsfähigkeit

A. Persönlichkeit im Allgemeinen

I. Rechtsfähigkeit

1 Rechtsfähig ist jedermann.

2 Für alle Menschen besteht demgemäss in den Schranken der Rechtsordnung die gleiche Fähigkeit, Rechte und Pflichten zu haben.

Art. 12 A. Persönlichkeit im Allgemeinen / II. Handlungsfähigkeit / 1. Inhalt

II. Handlungsfähigkeit

1. Inhalt

Wer handlungsfähig ist, hat die Fähigkeit, durch seine Handlungen Rechte und Pflichten zu begründen.

Art. 131A. Persönlichkeit im Allgemeinen / II. Handlungsfähigkeit / 2. Voraussetzungen / a. Im Allgemeinen

2. Voraussetzungen

a. Im Allgemeinen

Die Handlungsfähigkeit besitzt, wer volljährig und urteilsfähig ist.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 141A. Persönlichkeit im Allgemeinen / II. Handlungsfähigkeit / 2. Voraussetzungen / b. Volljährigkeit

b. Volljährigkeit

Volljährig ist, wer das 18. Lebensjahr zurückgelegt hat.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 151A. Persönlichkeit im Allgemeinen / II. Handlungsfähigkeit / 2. Voraussetzungen / c. ...

c. ...


1 Aufgehoben durch Ziff. I des BG vom 7. Okt. 1994, mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 1996 (AS 1995 1126; BBl 1993 I 1169).

Art. 161A. Persönlichkeit im Allgemeinen / II. Handlungsfähigkeit / 2. Voraussetzungen / d. Urteilsfähigkeit

d. Urteilsfähigkeit

Urteilsfähig im Sinne dieses Gesetzes ist jede Person, der nicht wegen ihres Kindesalters, infolge geistiger Behinderung, psychischer Störung, Rausch oder ähnlicher Zustände die Fähigkeit mangelt, vernunftgemäss zu handeln.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 171A. Persönlichkeit im Allgemeinen / III. Handlungsunfähigkeit / 1. Im Allgemeinen

III. Handlungsunfähigkeit

1. Im Allgemeinen

Handlungsunfähig sind urteilsunfähige Personen, Minderjährige sowie Personen unter umfassender Beistandschaft.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 18 A. Persönlichkeit im Allgemeinen / III. Handlungsunfähigkeit / 2. Fehlen der Urteilsfähigkeit

2. Fehlen der Urteilsfähigkeit

Wer nicht urteilsfähig ist, vermag unter Vorbehalt der gesetzlichen Ausnahmen durch seine Handlungen keine rechtliche Wirkung herbeizuführen.

Art. 19 A. Persönlichkeit im Allgemeinen / III. Handlungsunfähigkeit / 3. Urteilsfähige handlungsunfähige Personen / a. Grundsatz

3. Urteilsfähige handlungsunfähige Personen

a. Grundsatz1

1 Urteilsfähige handlungsunfähige Personen können nur mit Zustimmung ihres gesetzlichen Vertreters Verpflichtungen eingehen oder Rechte aufgeben.2

2 Ohne diese Zustimmung vermögen sie Vorteile zu erlangen, die unentgeltlich sind, sowie geringfügige Angelegenheiten des täglichen Lebens zu besorgen.3

3 Sie werden aus unerlaubten Handlungen schadenersatzpflichtig.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 19a1A. Persönlichkeit im Allgemeinen / III. Handlungsunfähigkeit / 3. Urteilsfähige handlungsunfähige Personen / b. Zustimmung des gesetzlichen Vertreters

b. Zustimmung des gesetzlichen Vertreters

1 Sofern das Gesetz nichts anderes bestimmt, kann der gesetzliche Vertreter die Zustimmung ausdrücklich oder stillschweigend im Voraus geben oder das Geschäft nachträglich genehmigen.

2 Der andere Teil wird frei, wenn die Genehmigung nicht innerhalb einer angemessenen Frist erfolgt, die er selber ansetzt oder durch das Gericht ansetzen lässt.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 19b1A. Persönlichkeit im Allgemeinen / III. Handlungsunfähigkeit / 3. Urteilsfähige handlungsunfähige Personen / c. Fehlen der Zustimmung

c. Fehlen der Zustimmung

1 Erfolgt die Genehmigung des gesetzlichen Vertreters nicht, so kann jeder Teil die vollzogenen Leistungen zurückfordern. Die handlungsunfähige Person haftet jedoch nur insoweit, als die Leistung in ihrem Nutzen verwendet worden ist oder als sie zur Zeit der Rückforderung noch bereichert ist oder sich böswillig der Bereicherung entäussert hat.

2 Hat die handlungsunfähige Person den andern Teil zur irrtümlichen Annahme ihrer Handlungsfähigkeit verleitet, so ist sie ihm für den verursachten Schaden verantwortlich.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 19c1A. Persönlichkeit im Allgemeinen / III. Handlungsunfähigkeit / 4. Höchstpersönliche Rechte

4. Höchstpersönliche Rechte

1 Urteilsfähige handlungsunfähige Personen üben die Rechte, die ihnen um ihrer Persönlichkeit willen zustehen, selbstständig aus; vorbehalten bleiben Fälle, in welchen das Gesetz die Zustimmung des gesetzlichen Vertreters vorsieht.

2 Für urteilsunfähige Personen handelt der gesetzliche Vertreter, sofern nicht ein Recht so eng mit der Persönlichkeit verbunden ist, dass jede Vertretung ausgeschlossen ist.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 19d1A. Persönlichkeit im Allgemeinen / IIIbis. Einschränkung der Handlungsfähigkeit

IIIbis. Einschränkung der Handlungsfähigkeit

Die Handlungsfähigkeit kann durch eine Massnahme des Erwachsenenschutzes eingeschränkt werden.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 20 A. Persönlichkeit im Allgemeinen / IV. Verwandtschaft und Schwägerschaft / 1. Verwandtschaft

IV.1 Verwandtschaft und Schwägerschaft

1. Verwandtschaft

1 Der Grad der Verwandtschaft2 bestimmt sich nach der Zahl der sie vermittelnden Geburten.

2 In gerader Linie sind zwei Personen miteinander verwandt, wenn die eine von der andern abstammt, und in der Seitenlinie, wenn sie von einer dritten Person abstammen und unter sich nicht in gerader Linie verwandt sind.


1 Fassung des Randtit. gemäss Ziff. I 3 des BG vom 30. Juni 1972, in Kraft seit 1. April 1973 (AS 1972 2819, 1973 92; BBl 1971 I 1200).
2 Fassung dieses Wortes gemäss Ziff. I 3 des BG vom 30. Juni 1972, in Kraft seit 1. April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 211A. Persönlichkeit im Allgemeinen / IV. Verwandtschaft und Schwägerschaft / 2. Schwägerschaft

2. Schwägerschaft

1 Wer mit einer Person verwandt ist, ist mit deren Ehegatten, deren eingetragener Partnerin oder deren eingetragenem Partner in der gleichen Linie und in dem gleichen Grade verschwägert.

2 Die Schwägerschaft wird durch die Auflösung der Ehe oder der eingetragenen Partnerschaft, die sie begründet hat, nicht aufgehoben.


1 Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 8 des Partnerschaftsgesetzes vom 18. Juni 2004, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2007 (AS 2005 5685; BBl 2003 1288).

Art. 22 A. Persönlichkeit im Allgemeinen / V. Heimat und Wohnsitz / 1. Heimatangehörigkeit

V. Heimat und Wohnsitz

1. Heimatangehörigkeit

1 Die Heimat einer Person bestimmt sich nach ihrem Bürgerrecht.

2 Das Bürgerrecht wird durch das öffentliche Recht bestimmt.

3 Wenn einer Person das Bürgerrecht an mehreren Orten zusteht, so ist für ihre Heimatangehörigkeit der Ort entscheidend, wo sie zugleich ihren Wohnsitz hat oder zuletzt gehabt hat, und mangels eines solchen Wohnsitzes der Ort, dessen Bürgerrecht von ihr oder ihren Vorfahren zuletzt erworben worden ist.

Art. 23 A. Persönlichkeit im Allgemeinen / V. Heimat und Wohnsitz / 2. Wohnsitz / a. Begriff

2. Wohnsitz

a. Begriff

1 Der Wohnsitz einer Person befindet sich an dem Orte, wo sie sich mit der Absicht dauernden Verbleibens aufhält; der Aufenthalt zum Zweck der Ausbildung oder die Unterbringung einer Person in einer Erziehungs- oder Pflegeeinrichtung, einem Spital oder einer Strafanstalt begründet für sich allein keinen Wohnsitz.1

2 Niemand kann an mehreren Orten zugleich seinen Wohnsitz haben.

3 Die geschäftliche Niederlassung wird von dieser Bestimmung nicht betroffen.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 24 A. Persönlichkeit im Allgemeinen / V. Heimat und Wohnsitz / 2. Wohnsitz / b. Wechsel im Wohnsitz oder Aufenthalt

b. Wechsel im Wohnsitz oder Aufenthalt

1 Der einmal begründete Wohnsitz einer Person bleibt bestehen bis zum Erwerbe eines neuen Wohnsitzes.

2 Ist ein früher begründeter Wohnsitz nicht nachweisbar oder ist ein im Ausland begründeter Wohnsitz aufgegeben und in der Schweiz kein neuer begründet worden, so gilt der Aufenthaltsort als Wohnsitz.

Art. 251A. Persönlichkeit im Allgemeinen / V. Heimat und Wohnsitz / 2. Wohnsitz / c. Wohnsitz Minderjähriger

c. Wohnsitz Minderjähriger2

1 Als Wohnsitz des Kindes unter elterlicher Sorge3 gilt der Wohnsitz der Eltern oder, wenn die Eltern keinen gemeinsamen Wohnsitz haben, der Wohnsitz des Elternteils, unter dessen Obhut das Kind steht; in den übrigen Fällen gilt sein Aufenthaltsort als Wohnsitz.

2 Bevormundete Kinder haben ihren Wohnsitz am Sitz der Kindesschutzbehörde.4


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 5. Okt. 1984, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 Ausdruck gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 26. Juni 1998, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1). Diese Änd. ist im ganzen Erlass berücksichtigt.
4 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 261A. Persönlichkeit im Allgemeinen / V. Heimat und Wohnsitz / 2. Wohnsitz / d. Wohnsitz Volljähriger unter umfassender Beistandschaft

d. Wohnsitz Volljähriger unter umfassender Beistandschaft

Volljährige unter umfassender Beistandschaft haben ihren Wohnsitz am Sitz der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 27 B. Schutz der Persönlichkeit / I. Vor übermässiger Bindung

B. Schutz der Persönlichkeit

I. Vor übermässiger Bindung1

1 Auf die Rechts- und Handlungsfähigkeit kann niemand ganz oder zum Teil verzichten.

2 Niemand kann sich seiner Freiheit entäussern oder sich in ihrem Gebrauch in einem das Recht oder die Sittlichkeit verletzenden Grade beschränken.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 16. Dez. 1983, in Kraft seit 1. Juli 1985 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636).

Art. 281B. Schutz der Persönlichkeit / II. Gegen Verletzungen / 1. Grundsatz

II. Gegen Verletzungen

1. Grundsatz

1 Wer in seiner Persönlichkeit widerrechtlich verletzt wird, kann zu seinem Schutz gegen jeden, der an der Verletzung mitwirkt, das Gericht anrufen.

2 Eine Verletzung ist widerrechtlich, wenn sie nicht durch Einwilligung des Verletzten, durch ein überwiegendes privates oder öffentliches Interesse oder durch Gesetz gerechtfertigt ist.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 16. Dez. 1983, in Kraft seit 1. Juli 1985 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636).

Art. 28a1B. Schutz der Persönlichkeit / II. Gegen Verletzungen / 2. Klage / a. Im Allgemeinen

2. Klage

a. Im Allgemeinen2

1 Der Kläger kann dem Gericht beantragen:

1.
eine drohende Verletzung zu verbieten;
2.
eine bestehende Verletzung zu beseitigen;
3.
die Widerrechtlichkeit einer Verletzung festzustellen, wenn sich diese weiterhin störend auswirkt.

2 Er kann insbesondere verlangen, dass eine Berichtigung oder das Urteil Dritten mitgeteilt oder veröffentlicht wird.

3 Vorbehalten bleiben die Klagen auf Schadenersatz und Genugtuung sowie auf Herausgabe eines Gewinns entsprechend den Bestimmungen über die Geschäftsführung ohne Auftrag.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 16. Dez. 1983, in Kraft seit 1. Juli 1985 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 23. Juni 2006 (Schutz der Persönlichkeit gegen Gewalt, Drohungen oder Nachstellungen), in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2007 (AS 2007 137; BBl 2005 6871 6897).

Art. 28b1B. Schutz der Persönlichkeit / II. Gegen Verletzungen / 2. Klage / b. Gewalt, Drohungen oder Nachstellungen

b. Gewalt, Drohungen oder Nachstellungen

1 Zum Schutz gegen Gewalt, Drohungen oder Nachstellungen kann die klagende Person dem Gericht beantragen, der verletzenden Person insbesondere zu verbieten:

1.
sich ihr anzunähern oder sich in einem bestimmten Umkreis ihrer Wohnung aufzuhalten;
2.
sich an bestimmten Orten, namentlich bestimmten Strassen, Plätzen oder Quartieren, aufzuhalten;
3.
mit ihr Kontakt aufzunehmen, namentlich auf telefonischem, schriftlichem oder elektronischem Weg, oder sie in anderer Weise zu belästigen.

2 Lebt die klagende Person mit der verletzenden Person in einer Wohnung zusammen, so kann sie dem Gericht zudem beantragen, die verletzende Person für eine bestimmte Zeit aus der Wohnung auszuweisen. Aus wichtigen Gründen kann diese Frist einmal verlängert werden.

3 Das Gericht kann, sofern dies nach den gesamten Umständen als gerechtfertigt erscheint, der klagenden Person:

1.
für die ausschliessliche Benützung der Wohnung eine angemessene Entschädigung der verletzenden Person auferlegen; oder
2.
mit Zustimmung des Vermieters die Rechte und Pflichten aus einem Mietvertrag allein übertragen.

3bis Es teilt seinen Entscheid den zuständigen Kindes- und Erwachsenenschutzbehörden und der zuständigen kantonalen Stelle nach Absatz 4 sowie weiteren Behörden und Dritten mit, soweit dies zu deren Aufgabenerfüllung oder zum Schutz der klagenden Person notwendig erscheint oder der Vollstreckung des Entscheides dient.2

4 Die Kantone bezeichnen eine Stelle, die im Krisenfall die sofortige Ausweisung der verletzenden Person aus der gemeinsamen Wohnung verfügen kann, und regeln das Verfahren.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 16. Dez. 1983 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636). Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 23. Juni 2006 (Schutz der Persönlichkeit gegen Gewalt, Drohungen oder Nachstellungen), in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2007 (AS 2007 137; BBl 2005 6871 6897).
2 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 14. Dez. 2018 über die Verbesserung des Schutzes gewaltbetroffener Personen, in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2020 (AS 2019 2273; BBl 2017 7307).

Art. 28c–28f1B. Schutz der Persönlichkeit / II. Gegen Verletzungen / 3. ...

3. ...


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 16. Dez. 1983 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636). Aufgehoben durch Anhang 1 Ziff. II 3 der Zivilprozessordnung vom 19. Dez. 2008, mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 28g1B. Schutz der Persönlichkeit / II. Gegen Verletzungen / 4. Recht auf Gegendarstellung / a. Grundsatz

4. Recht auf Gegendarstellung

a. Grundsatz2

1 Wer durch Tatsachendarstellungen in periodisch erscheinenden Medien, insbesondere Presse, Radio und Fernsehen, in seiner Persönlichkeit unmittelbar betroffen ist, hat Anspruch auf Gegendarstellung.

2 Kein Anspruch auf Gegendarstellung besteht, wenn über öffentliche Verhandlungen einer Behörde wahrheitsgetreu berichtet wurde und die betroffene Person an den Verhandlungen teilgenommen hat.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 16. Dez. 1983, in Kraft seit 1. Juli 1985 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 23. Juni 2006 (Schutz der Persönlichkeit gegen Gewalt, Drohungen oder Nachstellungen), in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2007 (AS 2007 137; BBl 2005 6871 6897).

Art. 28h1B. Schutz der Persönlichkeit / II. Gegen Verletzungen / 4. Recht auf Gegendarstellung / b. Form und Inhalt

b. Form und Inhalt

1 Der Text der Gegendarstellung ist in knapper Form auf den Gegenstand der beanstandeten Darstellung zu beschränken.

2 Die Gegendarstellung kann verweigert werden, wenn sie offensichtlich unrichtig ist oder wenn sie gegen das Recht oder die guten Sitten verstösst.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 16. Dez. 1983, in Kraft seit 1. Juli 1985 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636).

Art. 28i1B. Schutz der Persönlichkeit / II. Gegen Verletzungen / 4. Recht auf Gegendarstellung / c. Verfahren

c. Verfahren

1 Der Betroffene muss den Text der Gegendarstellung innert 20 Tagen, nachdem er von der beanstandeten Tatsachendarstellung Kenntnis erhalten hat, spätestens jedoch drei Monate nach der Verbreitung, an das Medienunternehmen absenden.

2 Das Medienunternehmen teilt dem Betroffenen unverzüglich mit, wann es die Gegendarstellung veröffentlicht oder weshalb es sie zurückweist.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 16. Dez. 1983, in Kraft seit 1. Juli 1985 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636).

Art. 28k1B. Schutz der Persönlichkeit / II. Gegen Verletzungen / 4. Recht auf Gegendarstellung / d. Veröffentlichung

d. Veröffentlichung

1 Die Gegendarstellung ist sobald als möglich zu veröffentlichen, und zwar so, dass sie den gleichen Personenkreis wie die beanstandete Tatsachendarstellung erreicht.

2 Die Gegendarstellung ist als solche zu kennzeichnen; das Medienunternehmen darf dazu nur die Erklärung beifügen, ob es an seiner Tatsachendarstellung festhält oder auf welche Quellen es sich stützt.

3 Die Veröffentlichung der Gegendarstellung erfolgt kostenlos.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 16. Dez. 1983, in Kraft seit 1. Juli 1985 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636).

Art. 28l1B. Schutz der Persönlichkeit / II. Gegen Verletzungen / 4. Recht auf Gegendarstellung / e. Anrufung des Gerichts

e. Anrufung des Gerichts

1 Verhindert das Medienunternehmen die Ausübung des Gegendarstellungsrechts, verweigert es die Gegendarstellung oder veröffentlicht es diese nicht korrekt, so kann der Betroffene das Gericht anrufen.

2 ...2

3 und 4 ...3


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 16. Dez. 1983, in Kraft seit 1. Juli 1985 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636).
2 Aufgehoben durch Anhang Ziff. 2 des Gerichtsstandsgesetzes vom 24. März 2000, mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).
3 Aufgehoben durch Anhang 1 Ziff. II 3 der Zivilprozessordnung vom 19. Dez. 2008, mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 29 B. Schutz der Persönlichkeit / III. Recht auf den Namen / 1. Namensschutz

III. Recht auf den Namen

1. Namensschutz

1 Wird jemandem die Führung seines Namens bestritten, so kann er auf Feststellung seines Rechtes klagen.

2 Wird jemand dadurch beeinträchtigt, dass ein anderer sich seinen Namen anmasst, so kann er auf Unterlassung dieser Anmassung sowie bei Verschulden auf Schadenersatz und, wo die Art der Beeinträchtigung es rechtfertigt, auf Leistung einer Geldsumme als Genugtuung klagen.

Art. 30 B. Schutz der Persönlichkeit / III. Recht auf den Namen / 2. Namensänderung / a. Im Allgemeinen

2. Namensänderung

a. Im Allgemeinen1

1 Die Regierung des Wohnsitzkantons kann einer Person die Änderung des Namens bewilligen, wenn achtenswerte Gründe vorliegen.2

2 ...3

3 Wer durch Namensänderung verletzt wird, kann sie binnen Jahresfrist, nachdem er von ihr Kenntnis erlangt hat, gerichtlich anfechten.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 30. Sept. 2011 (Name und Bürgerrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 30. Sept. 2011 (Name und Bürgerrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).
3 Aufgehoben durch Ziff. I des BG vom 30. Sept. 2011 (Name und Bürgerrecht), mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 30a1B. Schutz der Persönlichkeit / III. Recht auf den Namen / 2. Namensänderung / b. Bei Tod eines Ehegatten

b. Bei Tod eines Ehegatten

Stirbt ein Ehegatte, so kann der andere, wenn er bei der Eheschliessung seinen Namen geändert hat, jederzeit gegenüber der Zivilstandsbeamtin oder dem Zivilstandsbeamten erklären, dass er wieder seinen Ledignamen tragen will.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 30. Sept. 2011 (Name und Bürgerrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 31 C. Anfang und Ende der Persönlichkeit / I. Geburt und Tod

C. Anfang und Ende der Persönlichkeit

I. Geburt und Tod

1 Die Persönlichkeit beginnt mit dem Leben nach der vollendeten Geburt und endet mit dem Tode.

2 Vor der Geburt ist das Kind unter dem Vorbehalt rechtsfähig, dass es lebendig geboren wird.

Art. 32 C. Anfang und Ende der Persönlichkeit / II. Beweis / 1. Beweislast

II. Beweis

1. Beweislast

1 Wer zur Ausübung eines Rechtes sich darauf beruft, dass eine Person lebe oder gestorben sei oder zu einer bestimmten Zeit gelebt oder eine andere Person überlebt habe, hat hiefür den Beweis zu erbringen.

2 Kann nicht bewiesen werden, dass von mehreren gestorbenen Personen die eine die andere überlebt habe, so gelten sie als gleichzeitig gestorben.

Art. 33 C. Anfang und Ende der Persönlichkeit / II. Beweis / 2. Beweismittel / a. Im Allgemeinen

2. Beweismittel

a. Im Allgemeinen

1 Der Beweis für die Geburt oder den Tod einer Person wird mit den Zivilstandsurkunden geführt.

2 Fehlen solche oder sind die vorhandenen als unrichtig erwiesen, so kann der Beweis auf andere Weise erbracht werden.

Art. 34 C. Anfang und Ende der Persönlichkeit / II. Beweis / 2. Beweismittel / b. Anzeichen des Todes

b. Anzeichen des Todes

Der Tod einer Person kann, auch wenn niemand die Leiche gesehen hat, als erwiesen betrachtet werden, sobald die Person unter Umständen verschwunden ist, die ihren Tod als sicher erscheinen lassen.

Art. 35 C. Anfang und Ende der Persönlichkeit / III. Verschollenerklärung / 1. Im Allgemeinen

III. Verschollenerklärung

1. Im Allgemeinen

1 Ist der Tod einer Person höchst wahrscheinlich, weil sie in hoher Todesgefahr verschwunden oder seit langem nachrichtlos abwesend ist, so kann sie das Gericht auf das Gesuch derer, die aus ihrem Tode Rechte ableiten, für verschollen erklären.

2 ...1


1 Aufgehoben durch Anhang Ziff. 2 des Gerichtsstandsgesetzes vom 24. März 2000, mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).

Art. 36 C. Anfang und Ende der Persönlichkeit / III. Verschollenerklärung / 2. Verfahren

2. Verfahren

1 Das Gesuch kann nach Ablauf von mindestens einem Jahre seit dem Zeitpunkte der Todesgefahr oder von fünf Jahren seit der letzten Nachricht angebracht werden.

2 Das Gericht hat jedermann, der Nachrichten über den Verschwundenen oder Abwesenden geben kann, in angemessener Weise öffentlich aufzufordern, sich binnen einer bestimmten Frist zu melden.

3 Diese Frist ist auf mindestens ein Jahr seit der erstmaligen Auskündung anzusetzen.

Art. 37 C. Anfang und Ende der Persönlichkeit / III. Verschollenerklärung / 3. Wegfallen des Gesuches

3. Wegfallen des Gesuches

Meldet sich innerhalb der Frist der Verschwundene oder Abwesende, oder laufen Nachrichten über ihn ein, oder wird der Zeitpunkt seines Todes nachgewiesen, so fällt das Gesuch dahin.

Art. 38 C. Anfang und Ende der Persönlichkeit / III. Verschollenerklärung / 4. Wirkung

4. Wirkung

1 Läuft während der angesetzten Zeit keine Meldung ein, so wird der Verschwundene oder Abwesende für verschollen erklärt, und es können die aus seinem Tode abgeleiteten Rechte geltend gemacht werden, wie wenn der Tod bewiesen wäre.

2 Die Wirkung der Verschollenerklärung wird auf den Zeitpunkt der Todesgefahr oder der letzten Nachricht zurückbezogen.

3 Die Verschollenerklärung löst die Ehe auf.1


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 4 des BG vom 26. Juni 1998, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).


  Zweiter Abschnitt:1  Die Beurkundung des Personenstandes

Art. 391A. Register / I. Allgemeines

A. Register

I. Allgemeines

1 Der Personenstand wird in einem elektronischen Register beurkundet (Personenstandsregister).

2 Zum Personenstand gehören insbesondere:

1.
die Zivilstandstatsachen wie die Geburt, die Heirat, die Beurkundung einer eingetragenen Partnerschaft, der Tod;
2.
die personen- und familienrechtliche Stellung wie die Volljährigkeit, die Abstammung, die Ehe, die eingetragene Partnerschaft;
3.
die Namen;
4.
die Kantons- und Gemeindebürgerrechte;
5.
die Staatsangehörigkeit.

1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 15. Dez. 2017 (Beurkundung des Personenstands und Grundbuch), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 4017; BBl 2014 3551).

Art. 40 A. Register / II. Meldepflicht

II. Meldepflicht1

1 Der Bundesrat bestimmt die Personen und Behörden, die verpflichtet sind, die zur Beurkundung des Personenstandes nötigen Angaben zu melden.

2 Er kann vorsehen, dass Verstösse gegen die Meldepflicht mit Busse geahndet werden.

3 ...2


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 5. Okt. 2001 (Elektronische Führung der Personenstandsregister), in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2004 (AS 2004 2911; BBl 2001 1639).
2 Aufgehoben durch Ziff. I des BG vom 5. Okt. 2001 (Elektronische Führung der Personenstandsregister), mit Wirkung seit 1. Juli 2004 (AS 2004 2911; BBl 2001 1639).

Art. 41 A. Register / III. Nachweis nicht streitiger Angaben

III. Nachweis nicht streitiger Angaben

1 Wenn Angaben über den Personenstand durch Urkunden zu belegen sind, kann die kantonale Aufsichtsbehörde den Nachweis durch Abgabe einer Erklärung vor der Zivilstandsbeamtin oder dem Zivilstandsbeamten bewilligen, sofern es sich nach hinreichenden Bemühungen als unmöglich oder unzumutbar erweist, die Urkunden zu beschaffen, und die Angaben nicht streitig sind.

2 Die Zivilstandsbeamtin oder der Zivilstandsbeamte ermahnt die erklärende Person zur Wahrheit und weist sie auf die Straffolgen einer falschen Erklärung hin.

Art. 42 A. Register / IV. Bereinigung / 1. Durch das Gericht

IV. Bereinigung

1. Durch das Gericht

1 Wer ein schützenswertes persönliches Interesse glaubhaft macht, kann beim Gericht auf Eintragung von streitigen Angaben über den Personenstand, auf Berichtigung oder auf Löschung einer Eintragung klagen. Das Gericht hört die betroffenen kantonalen Aufsichtsbehörden an und stellt ihnen das Urteil zu.

2 Die kantonalen Aufsichtsbehörden sind ebenfalls klageberechtigt.

Art. 43 A. Register / IV. Bereinigung / 2. Durch die Zivilstandsbehörden

2. Durch die Zivilstandsbehörden

Die Zivilstandsbehörden beheben von Amtes wegen Fehler, die auf einem offensichtlichen Versehen oder Irrtum beruhen.

Art. 43a1A. Register / V. Datenschutz und Bekanntgabe der Daten

V. Datenschutz und Bekanntgabe der Daten

1 Der Bundesrat sorgt auf dem Gebiet der Beurkundung des Personenstandes für den Schutz der Persönlichkeit und der Grundrechte der Personen, über die Daten bearbeitet werden.

2 Er regelt die Bekanntgabe von Daten an Private, die ein unmittelbares schutzwürdiges Interesse nachweisen können.

3 Er bestimmt die Behörden ausserhalb des Zivilstandswesens, denen die zur Erfüllung ihrer gesetzlichen Aufgaben nötigen Daten regelmässig oder auf Anfrage bekannt gegeben werden. Vorbehalten bleiben die Vorschriften über die Bekanntgabe nach einem kantonalen Gesetz.

3bis Die Zivilstandsbehörden sind verpflichtet, alle Straftaten, die sie bei ihrer amtlichen Tätigkeit feststellen, der zuständigen Behörde anzuzeigen.2

4 Auf Daten, die für die Überprüfung der Identität einer Person notwendig sind, haben im Abrufverfahren Zugriff:

1.
die ausstellenden Behörden nach dem Bundesgesetz vom 22. Juni 20013 über die Ausweise für Schweizer Staatsangehörige;
2.4
die für die Führung des automatisierten Polizeifahndungssystem nach Artikel 15 des Bundesgesetzes vom 13. Juni 20085 über die polizeilichen Informationssysteme des Bundes zuständige Stelle des Bundes und die Filtrierstellen der im Fahndungssystem ausschreibenden kantonalen und städtischen Polizeikorps;
3.
die für die Führung des automatisierten Strafregisters nach Artikel 3596 des Strafgesetzbuches zuständige Stelle des Bundes;
4.
die für die Nachforschungen nach vermissten Personen zuständige Stelle des Bundes7;
5.8
der Nachrichtendienst des Bundes für das frühzeitige Erkennen und Verhindern von Bedrohungen für die innere oder äussere Sicherheit nach Artikel 6 Absatz 1 Buchstabe a des Nachrichtendienstgesetzes vom 25. September 20159;
6.10
die für die Führung der kantonalen und kommunalen Einwohnerregister nach dem Registerharmonisierungsgesetz vom 23. Juni 200611 zuständigen Behörden;
7. 12
die für die Führung des zentralen Versichertenregisters nach Artikel 71 Absatz 4 Buchstabe a des Bundesgesetzes vom 20. Dezember 194613 über die Alters- und Hinterlassenenversicherung zuständige Stelle des Bundes;
8. 14
die für die Führung des Auslandschweizerregisters nach Artikel 4 Absatz 1 des Bundesgesetzes vom 24. März 200015 über die Bearbeitung von Personendaten im Eidgenössischen Departement für auswärtige Angelegenheiten zuständigen Stellen des Bundes.

1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 5. Okt. 2001 (Elektronische Führung der Personenstandsregister), in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2004 (AS 2004 2911; BBl 2001 1639).
2 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 3 des BG vom 15. Juni 2012 über Massnahmen gegen Zwangs— heiraten, in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2013 (AS 2013 1035; BBl 2011 2185).
3 SR 143.1
4 Fassung gemäss Anhang 1 Ziff. 4 des BG vom 13. Juni 2008 über die polizeilichen Informationssysteme des Bundes, in Kraft seit 5. Dez. 2008 (AS 2008 4989; BBl 2006 5061).
5 SR 361
6 Heute: Art. 365.
7 Zurzeit das Bundesamt für Polizei.
8 Eingefügt durch Anhang Ziff. II 4 des Nachrichtendienstgesetzes vom 25. Sept. 2015, in Kraft seit 1. Sept. 2017 (AS 2017 4095; BBl 2014 2105).
9 SR 121
10 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 15. Dez. 2017 (Beurkundung des Personenstands und Grundbuch), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 4017; BBl 2014 3551).
11 SR 431.02
12 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 15. Dez. 2017 (Beurkundung des Personenstands und Grundbuch), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 4017; BBl 2014 3551).
13 SR 831.10
14 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 15. Dez. 2017 (Beurkundung des Personenstands und Grundbuch), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 4017; BBl 2014 3551).
15 SR 235.2

Art. 44 B. Organisation / I. Zivilstandsbehörden / 1. Zivilstandsbeamtinnen und Zivilstandsbeamte

B. Organisation

I. Zivilstandsbehörden

1. Zivilstandsbeamtinnen und Zivilstandsbeamte

1 Die Zivilstandsbeamtinnen und Zivilstandsbeamten erfüllen insbesondere folgende Aufgaben:

1.
Sie führen die Register.
2.
Sie erstellen die Mitteilungen und Auszüge.
3.
Sie führen das Vorbereitungsverfahren der Eheschliessung durch und vollziehen die Trauung.
4.
Sie nehmen Erklärungen zum Personenstand entgegen.

2 Der Bundesrat kann ausnahmsweise eine Vertreterin oder einen Vertreter der Schweiz im Ausland mit diesen Aufgaben betrauen.

Art. 45 B. Organisation / I. Zivilstandsbehörden / 2. Aufsichtsbehörden

2. Aufsichtsbehörden

1 Jeder Kanton bestellt die Aufsichtsbehörde.

2 Diese Behörde erfüllt insbesondere folgende Aufgaben:

1.
Sie beaufsichtigt die Zivilstandsämter.
2.
Sie unterstützt und berät die Zivilstandsämter.
3.
Sie wirkt bei der Registerführung und beim Vorbereitungsverfahren der Eheschliessung mit.
4.
Sie erlässt Verfügungen über die Anerkennung und die Eintragung im Ausland eingetretener Zivilstandstatsachen sowie ausländischer Entscheidungen, die den Personenstand betreffen.
5.
Sie sorgt für die Aus- und Weiterbildung der im Zivilstandswesen tätigen Personen.

3 Der Bund übt die Oberaufsicht aus. Er kann gegen Verfügungen der Zivilstandsbeamtinnen und Zivilstandsbeamten sowie der Aufsichtsbehörden die kantonalen Rechtsmittel einlegen.1


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 5. Okt. 2001 (Elektronische Führung der Personenstandsregister), in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2004 (AS 2004 2911; BBl 2001 1639).

Art. 45a1B. Organisation / Ia. Zentrales Personen-Informationssystem

Ia. Zentrales Personen-Informationssystem

1 Der Bund betreibt und entwickelt für die Führung des Personenstandsregisters ein zentrales Personen-Informationssystem.

2 Er trägt die Betriebs- und die Entwicklungskosten.

3 Die Kantone bezahlen dem Bund jährlich eine Gebühr für die Anwendung des Systems für Zwecke des Zivilstandswesens.

4 Der Bund bezieht die Kantone in die Entwicklung des Systems ein. Er unterstützt sie fachlich bei dessen Anwendung.

5 Der Bundesrat regelt unter Mitwirkung der Kantone:

1.
die Einzelheiten des Einbezuges der Kantone in die Entwicklung des Systems;
2.
die Höhe der Gebühr der Kantone für die Anwendung;
3.
die Zugriffsrechte der Zivilstandsbehörden und der weiteren Stellen, die Zugriff haben;
4.
die betriebliche Zusammenarbeit zwischen Bund und Kantonen;
5.
die zur Sicherstellung des Datenschutzes und der Datensicherheit erforderlichen technischen und organisatorischen Massnahmen;
6.
die Archivierung der Daten.

6 Er kann vorsehen, dass Kosten von Dienstleistungen für Dritte für Zwecke ausserhalb des Zivilstandswesens diesen Dritten in Rechnung gestellt werden.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 5. Okt. 2001 (Elektronische Führung der Personenstandsregister (AS 2004 2911; BBl 2001 1639). Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 15. Dez. 2017, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 4017; BBl 2014 3551).

Art. 46 B. Organisation / II. Haftung

II. Haftung

1 Wer durch die im Zivilstandswesen tätigen Personen in Ausübung ihrer amtlichen Tätigkeit widerrechtlich verletzt wird, hat Anspruch auf Schadenersatz und, wo die Schwere der Verletzung es rechtfertigt, auf Genugtuung.

2 Haftbar ist der Kanton; er kann auf die Personen, welche die Verletzung absichtlich oder grobfahrlässig verursacht haben, Rückgriff nehmen.

3 Auf Personen, die vom Bund angestellt sind, findet das Verantwortlichkeitsgesetz vom 14. März 19581 Anwendung.


Art. 47 B. Organisation / III. Disziplinarmassnahmen

III. Disziplinarmassnahmen

1 Vorsätzliche oder fahrlässige Amtspflichtverletzungen der auf den Zivilstandsämtern tätigen Personen werden von der kantonalen Aufsichtsbehörde mit Disziplinarmassnahmen geahndet.

2 Die Disziplinarmassnahme besteht in einem Verweis, in Busse bis zu 1000 Franken oder, in schweren Fällen, in Amtsenthebung.

3 Vorbehalten bleibt die strafrechtliche Verfolgung.

Art. 48 C. Ausführungsbestimmungen / I. Bundesrecht

C. Ausführungsbestimmungen

I. Bundesrecht

1 Der Bundesrat erlässt die Ausführungsbestimmungen.

2 Er regelt namentlich:

1.
die zu führenden Register und die einzutragenden Angaben;
2.
die Verwendung der Versichertennummer nach Artikel 50c des Bundesgesetzes vom 20. Dezember 19461 über die Alters- und Hinterlassenenversicherung zum Zweck des elektronischen Datenaustauschs zwischen amtlichen Personenregistern;
3.
die Registerführung;
4.
die Aufsicht.2

3 Zur Sicherstellung eines fachlich zuverlässigen Vollzugs kann der Bundesrat Mindestanforderungen an die Aus- und Weiterbildung der im Zivilstandswesen tätigen Personen sowie an den Beschäftigungsgrad der Zivilstandsbeamtinnen und Zivilstandsbeamten erlassen.

4 Er legt die im Zivilstandswesen zu erhebenden Gebühren fest.

5 Er bestimmt, unter welchen Voraussetzungen es zulässig ist, auf elektronischem Weg:

1.
Zivilstandsfälle zu melden;
2.
Erklärungen zum Personenstand abzugeben;
3.
Mitteilungen und Registerauszüge zuzustellen.3

1 SR 831.10
2 Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 2 des Registerharmonisierungsgesetzes vom 23. Juni 2006, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2008 (AS 2006 4165; BBl 2006 427).
3 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 5. Okt. 2001 (Elektronische Führung der Personenstandsregister), in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2004 (AS 2004 2911; BBl 2001 1639).

Art. 49 C. Ausführungsbestimmungen / II. Kantonales Recht

II. Kantonales Recht

1 Die Kantone legen die Zivilstandskreise fest.

2 Sie erlassen im Rahmen des Bundesrechts die nötigen Ausführungsbestimmungen.

3 Die kantonalen Vorschriften, ausgenommen diejenigen über die Besoldung der im Zivilstandswesen tätigen Personen, bedürfen zu ihrer Gültigkeit der Genehmigung des Bundes.

Art. 50 und 51

Aufgehoben


  Zweiter Titel: Die juristischen Personen

  Erster Abschnitt: Allgemeine Bestimmungen

Art. 52 A. Persönlichkeit

A. Persönlichkeit

1 Die körperschaftlich organisierten Personenverbindungen und die einem besondern Zwecke gewidmeten und selbständigen Anstalten erlangen das Recht der Persönlichkeit durch die Eintragung in das Handelsregister.

2 Keiner Eintragung bedürfen die öffentlich-rechtlichen Körperschaften und Anstalten sowie die Vereine, die nicht wirtschaftliche Zwecke verfolgen.1

3 Personenverbindungen und Anstalten zu unsittlichen oder widerrechtlichen Zwecken können das Recht der Persönlichkeit nicht erlangen.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 12. Dez. 2014 zur Umsetzung der 2012 revidierten Empfehlungen der Groupe d’action financière, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2016 (AS 2015 1389; BBl 2014 605).

Art. 53 B. Rechtsfähigkeit

B. Rechtsfähigkeit

Die juristischen Personen sind aller Rechte und Pflichten fähig, die nicht die natürlichen Eigenschaften des Menschen, wie das Geschlecht, das Alter oder die Verwandtschaft zur notwendigen Voraussetzung haben.

Art. 54 C. Handlungsfähigkeit / I. Voraussetzung

C. Handlungsfähigkeit

I. Voraussetzung

Die juristischen Personen sind handlungsfähig, sobald die nach Gesetz und Statuten hiefür unentbehrlichen Organe bestellt sind.

Art. 55 C. Handlungsfähigkeit / II. Betätigung

II. Betätigung

1 Die Organe sind berufen, dem Willen der juristischen Person Ausdruck zu geben.

2 Sie verpflichten die juristische Person sowohl durch den Abschluss von Rechtsgeschäften als durch ihr sonstiges Verhalten.

3 Für ihr Verschulden sind die handelnden Personen ausserdem persönlich verantwortlich.

Art. 561D. Sitz

D. Sitz

Der Sitz der juristischen Personen befindet sich, wenn ihre Statuten es nicht anders bestimmen, an dem Orte, wo ihre Verwaltung geführt wird.


1 Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 1 des BG vom 16. Dez. 2005 (GmbH-Recht sowie Anpassungen im Aktien-, Genossenschafts-, Handelsregister- und Firmenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).

Art. 57 E. Aufhebung / I. Vermögensverwendung

E. Aufhebung

I. Vermögensverwendung

1 Wird eine juristische Person aufgehoben, so fällt ihr Vermögen, wenn das Gesetz, die Statuten, die Stiftungsurkunde oder die zuständigen Organe es nicht anders bestimmen, an das Gemeinwesen (Bund, Kanton, Gemeinde), dem sie nach ihrer Bestimmung angehört hat.

2 Das Vermögen ist dem bisherigen Zwecke möglichst entsprechend zu verwenden.

3 Wird eine juristische Person wegen Verfolgung unsittlicher oder widerrechtlicher Zwecke aufgehoben, so fällt das Vermögen an das Gemeinwesen, auch wenn etwas anderes bestimmt worden ist.1


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 8. Okt. 2004 (Stiftungsrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 58 E. Aufhebung / II. Liquidation

II. Liquidation

Das Verfahren bei der Liquidation des Vermögens der juristischen Personen richtet sich nach den Vorschriften, die für die Genossenschaften aufgestellt sind.

Art. 59 F. Vorbehalt des öffentlichen und des Gesellschafts- und Genossenschaftsrechtes

F. Vorbehalt des öffentlichen und des Gesellschafts- und Genossenschaftsrechtes

1 Für die öffentlich-rechtlichen und kirchlichen Körperschaften und Anstalten bleibt das öffentliche Recht des Bundes und der Kantone vorbehalten.

2 Personenverbindungen, die einen wirtschaftlichen Zweck verfolgen, stehen unter den Bestimmungen über die Gesellschaften und Genossenschaften.

3 Allmendgenossenschaften und ähnliche Körperschaften verbleiben unter den Bestimmungen des kantonalen Rechtes.


  Zweiter Abschnitt: Die Vereine

Art. 60 A. Gründung / I. Körperschaftliche Personenverbindung

A. Gründung

I. Körperschaftliche Personenverbindung

1 Vereine, die sich einer politischen, religiösen, wissenschaftlichen, künstlerischen, wohltätigen, geselligen oder andern nicht wirtschaftlichen Aufgabe widmen, erlangen die Persönlichkeit, sobald der Wille, als Körperschaft zu bestehen, aus den Statuten ersichtlich ist.

2 Die Statuten müssen in schriftlicher Form errichtet sein und über den Zweck des Vereins, seine Mittel und seine Organisation Aufschluss geben.

Art. 61 A. Gründung / II. Eintragung ins Handelsregister

II. Eintragung ins Handelsregister1

1 Sind die Vereinsstatuten angenommen und ist der Vorstand bestellt, so ist der Verein befugt, sich in das Handelsregister eintragen zu lassen.

2 Der Verein ist zur Eintragung verpflichtet, wenn er:

1.
für seinen Zweck ein nach kaufmännischer Art geführtes Gewerbe betreibt;
2.
revisionspflichtig ist.2

3 Der Anmeldung sind die Statuten und das Verzeichnis der Vorstandsmitglieder beizufügen.


1 Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 1 des BG vom 16. Dez. 2005 (GmbH-Recht sowie Anpassungen im Aktien-, Genossenschafts-, Handelsregister- und Firmenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).
2 Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 1 des BG vom 16. Dez. 2005 (GmbH-Recht sowie Anpassungen im Aktien-, Genossenschafts-, Handelsregister- und Firmenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).

Art. 62 A. Gründung / III. Vereine ohne Persönlichkeit

III. Vereine ohne Persönlichkeit

Vereine, denen die Persönlichkeit nicht zukommt, oder die sie noch nicht erlangt haben, sind den einfachen Gesellschaften gleichgestellt.

Art. 63 A. Gründung / IV. Verhältnis der Statuten zum Gesetz

IV. Verhältnis der Statuten zum Gesetz

1 Soweit die Statuten über die Organisation und über das Verhältnis des Vereins zu seinen Mitgliedern keine Vorschriften aufstellen, finden die nachstehenden Bestimmungen Anwendung.

2 Bestimmungen, deren Anwendung von Gesetzes wegen vorgeschrieben ist, können durch die Statuten nicht abgeändert werden.

Art. 64 B. Organisation / I. Vereinsversammlung / 1. Bedeutung und Einberufung

B. Organisation

I. Vereinsversammlung

1. Bedeutung und Einberufung

1 Die Versammlung der Mitglieder bildet das oberste Organ des Vereins.

2 Sie wird vom Vorstand einberufen.

3 Die Einberufung erfolgt nach Vorschrift der Statuten und überdies von Gesetzes wegen, wenn ein Fünftel der Mitglieder die Einberufung verlangt.

Art. 65 B. Organisation / I. Vereinsversammlung / 2. Zuständigkeit

2. Zuständigkeit

1 Die Vereinsversammlung beschliesst über die Aufnahme und den Ausschluss von Mitgliedern, wählt den Vorstand und entscheidet in allen Angelegenheiten, die nicht andern Organen des Vereins übertragen sind.

2 Sie hat die Aufsicht über die Tätigkeit der Organe und kann sie jederzeit abberufen, unbeschadet der Ansprüche, die den Abberufenen aus bestehenden Verträgen zustehen.

3 Das Recht der Abberufung besteht, wenn ein wichtiger Grund sie rechtfertigt, von Gesetzes wegen.

Art. 66 B. Organisation / I. Vereinsversammlung / 3. Vereinsbeschluss / a. Beschlussfassung

3. Vereinsbeschluss

a. Beschlussfassung

1 Vereinsbeschlüsse werden von der Vereinsversammlung gefasst.

2 Die schriftliche Zustimmung aller Mitglieder zu einem Antrag ist einem Beschlusse der Vereinsversammlung gleichgestellt.

Art. 67 B. Organisation / I. Vereinsversammlung / 3. Vereinsbeschluss / b. Stimmrecht und Mehrheit

b. Stimmrecht und Mehrheit

1 Alle Mitglieder haben in der Vereinsversammlung das gleiche Stimmrecht.

2 Die Vereinsbeschlüsse werden mit Mehrheit der Stimmen der anwesenden Mitglieder gefasst.

3 Über Gegenstände, die nicht gehörig angekündigt sind, darf ein Beschluss nur dann gefasst werden, wenn die Statuten es ausdrücklich gestatten.

Art. 68 B. Organisation / I. Vereinsversammlung / 3. Vereinsbeschluss / c. Ausschliessung vom Stimmrecht

c. Ausschliessung vom Stimmrecht

Jedes Mitglied ist von Gesetzes wegen vom Stimmrechte ausgeschlossen bei der Beschlussfassung über ein Rechtsgeschäft oder einen Rechtsstreit zwischen ihm, seinem Ehegatten oder einer mit ihm in gerader Linie verwandten Person einerseits und dem Vereine anderseits.

Art. 69 B. Organisation / II. Vorstand / 1. Rechte und Pflichten im Allgemeinen

II. Vorstand

1. Rechte und Pflichten im Allgemeinen1

Der Vorstand hat das Recht und die Pflicht, nach den Befugnissen, die die Statuten ihm einräumen, die Angelegenheiten des Vereins zu besorgen und den Verein zu vertreten.


1 Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 1 des BG vom 16. Dez. 2005 (GmbH-Recht sowie Anpassungen im Aktien-, Genossenschafts-, Handelsregister- und Firmenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).

Art. 69a1B. Organisation / II. Vorstand / 2. Buchführung

2. Buchführung

Der Vorstand führt die Geschäftsbücher des Vereins. Die Vorschriften des Obligationenrechts2 über die kaufmännische Buchführung und Rechnungslegung gelten sinngemäss.


1 Eingefügt durch Anhang Ziff. 1 des BG vom 16. Dez. 2005 (GmbH-Recht sowie Anpassungen im Aktien-, Genossenschafts-, Handelsregister- und Firmenrecht), (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969). Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 1 des BG vom 23. Dez. 2011 (Rechnungslegungsrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 6679; BBl 2008 1589).
2 SR 220

Art. 69b1B. Organisation / III. Revisionsstelle

III. Revisionsstelle

1 Der Verein muss seine Buchführung durch eine Revisionsstelle ordentlich prüfen lassen, wenn zwei der nachstehenden Grössen in zwei aufeinander folgenden Geschäftsjahren überschritten werden:

1.
Bilanzsumme von 10 Millionen Franken;
2.
Umsatzerlös von 20 Millionen Franken;
3.
50 Vollzeitstellen im Jahresdurchschnitt.

2 Der Verein muss seine Buchführung durch eine Revisionsstelle eingeschränkt prüfen lassen, wenn ein Vereinsmitglied, das einer persönlichen Haftung oder einer Nachschusspflicht unterliegt, dies verlangt.

3 Die Vorschriften des Obligationenrechts2 über die Revisionsstelle bei Aktiengesellschaften sind entsprechend anwendbar.

4 In den übrigen Fällen sind die Statuten und die Vereinsversammlung3 in der Ordnung der Revision frei.


1 Eingefügt durch Anhang Ziff. 1 des BG vom 16. Dez. 2005 (GmbH-Recht sowie Anpassungen im Aktien-, Genossenschafts-, Handelsregister- und Firmenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).
2 SR 220
3 Berichtigt von der Redaktionskommission der BVers (Art. 58 Abs. 1 ParlG – SR 171.10).

Art. 69c1B. Organisation / IV. Mängel in der Organisation

IV. Mängel in der Organisation

1 Fehlt dem Verein eines der vorgeschriebenen Organe oder verfügt er über kein Rechtsdomizil an seinem Sitz mehr, so kann ein Mitglied oder ein Gläubiger dem Gericht beantragen, die erforderlichen Massnahmen zu ergreifen.2

2 Das Gericht kann dem Verein insbesondere eine Frist zur Wiederherstellung des rechtmässigen Zustandes ansetzen und, wenn nötig, einen Sachwalter ernennen.

3 Der Verein trägt die Kosten der Massnahmen. Das Gericht kann den Verein verpflichten, den ernannten Personen einen Vorschuss zu leisten.

4 Liegt ein wichtiger Grund vor, so kann der Verein vom Gericht die Abberufung von Personen verlangen, die dieses eingesetzt hat.


1 Eingefügt durch Anhang Ziff. 1 des BG vom 16. Dez. 2005 (GmbH-Recht sowie Anpassungen im Aktien-, Genossenschafts-, Handelsregister- und Firmenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).
2 Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 1 des BG vom 17. März 2017 (Handelsregisterrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2021 (AS 2020 957; BBl 2015 3617).

Art. 70 C. Mitgliedschaft / I. Ein- und Austritt

C. Mitgliedschaft

I. Ein- und Austritt

1 Der Eintritt von Mitgliedern kann jederzeit erfolgen.

2 Der Austritt ist von Gesetzes wegen zulässig, wenn er mit Beobachtung einer halbjährigen Frist auf das Ende des Kalenderjahres oder, wenn eine Verwaltungsperiode vorgesehen ist, auf deren Ende angesagt wird.

3 Die Mitgliedschaft ist weder veräusserlich noch vererblich.

Art. 711C. Mitgliedschaft / II. Beitragspflicht

II. Beitragspflicht

Beiträge können von den Mitgliedern verlangt werden, sofern die Statuten dies vorsehen.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 17. Dez. 2004 (Festlegung der Beitragspflicht von Vereinsmitgliedern), in Kraft seit 1. Juni 2005 (AS 2005 2117; BBl 2004 4835 4843).

Art. 72 C. Mitgliedschaft / III. Ausschliessung

III. Ausschliessung

1 Die Statuten können die Gründe bestimmen, aus denen ein Mitglied ausgeschlossen werden darf, sie können aber auch die Ausschliessung ohne Angabe der Gründe gestatten.

2 Eine Anfechtung der Ausschliessung wegen ihres Grundes ist in diesen Fällen nicht statthaft.

3 Enthalten die Statuten hierüber keine Bestimmung, so darf die Ausschliessung nur durch Vereinsbeschluss und aus wichtigen Gründen erfolgen.

Art. 73 C. Mitgliedschaft / IV. Stellung ausgeschiedener Mitglieder

IV. Stellung ausgeschiedener Mitglieder

1 Mitglieder, die austreten oder ausgeschlossen werden, haben auf das Vereinsvermögen keinen Anspruch.

2 Für die Beiträge haften sie nach Massgabe der Zeit ihrer Mitgliedschaft.

Art. 74 C. Mitgliedschaft / V. Schutz des Vereinszweckes

V. Schutz des Vereinszweckes

Eine Umwandlung des Vereinszweckes kann keinem Mitgliede aufgenötigt werden.

Art. 75 C. Mitgliedschaft / VI. Schutz der Mitgliedschaft

VI. Schutz der Mitgliedschaft

Beschlüsse, die das Gesetz oder die Statuten verletzen, kann jedes Mitglied, das nicht zugestimmt hat, von Gesetzes wegen binnen Monatsfrist, nachdem es von ihnen Kenntnis erhalten hat, beim Gericht anfechten.

Art. 75a1Cbis. Haftung

Cbis. Haftung

Für die Verbindlichkeiten des Vereins haftet das Vereinsvermögen. Es haftet ausschliesslich, sofern die Statuten nichts anderes bestimmen.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 17. Dez. 2004 (Festlegung der Beitragspflicht von Vereinsmitgliedern), in Kraft seit 1. Juni 2005 (AS 2005 2117; BBl 2004 4835 4843).

Art. 76 D. Auflösung / I. Auflösungsarten / 1. Vereinsbeschluss

D. Auflösung

I. Auflösungsarten

1. Vereinsbeschluss

Die Auflösung des Vereins kann jederzeit durch Vereinsbeschluss herbeigeführt werden.

Art. 77 D. Auflösung / I. Auflösungsarten / 2. Von Gesetzes wegen

2. Von Gesetzes wegen

Die Auflösung erfolgt von Gesetzes wegen, wenn der Verein zahlungsunfähig ist, sowie wenn der Vorstand nicht mehr statutengemäss bestellt werden kann.

Art. 78 D. Auflösung / I. Auflösungsarten / 3. Urteil

3. Urteil

Die Auflösung erfolgt durch das Gericht auf Klage der zuständigen Behörde oder eines Beteiligten, wenn der Zweck des Vereins widerrechtlich oder unsittlich ist.

Art. 79 D. Auflösung / II. Löschung des Registereintrages

II. Löschung des Registereintrages

Ist der Verein im Handelsregister eingetragen, so hat der Vorstand oder das Gericht dem Registerführer die Auflösung behufs Löschung des Eintrages mitzuteilen.


  Dritter Abschnitt: Die Stiftungen

Art. 80 A. Errichtung / I. Im Allgemeinen

A. Errichtung

I. Im Allgemeinen

Zur Errichtung einer Stiftung bedarf es der Widmung eines Vermögens für einen besondern Zweck.

Art. 81 A. Errichtung / II. Form der Errichtung

II. Form der Errichtung

1 Die Stiftung wird durch eine öffentliche Urkunde oder durch eine Verfügung von Todes wegen errichtet.1

2 Die Eintragung in das Handelsregister erfolgt auf Grund der Stiftungsurkunde und nötigenfalls nach Anordnung der Aufsichtsbehörde unter Angabe der Mitglieder der Verwaltung.

3 Die Behörde, welche die Verfügung von Todes wegen eröffnet, teilt dem Handelsregisterführer die Errichtung der Stiftung mit.2


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 8. Okt. 2004 (Stiftungsrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).
2 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 8. Okt. 2004 (Stiftungsrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 82 A. Errichtung / III. Anfechtung

III. Anfechtung

Eine Stiftung kann von den Erben oder den Gläubigern des Stifters gleich einer Schenkung angefochten werden.

Art. 831B. Organisation / I. Im Allgemeinen

B. Organisation

I. Im Allgemeinen

Die Organe der Stiftung und die Art der Verwaltung werden durch die Stiftungsurkunde festgestellt.


1 Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 1 des BG vom 16. Dez. 2005 (GmbH-Recht sowie Anpassungen im Aktien-, Genossenschafts-, Handelsregister- und Firmenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).

Art. 83a1B. Organisation / II. Buchführung

II. Buchführung

Das oberste Stiftungsorgan führt die Geschäftsbücher der Stiftung. Die Vorschriften des Obligationenrechts2 über die kaufmännische Buchführung und Rechnungslegung gelten sinngemäss.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 8. Okt. 2004 (Stiftungsrecht) (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191). Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 1 des BG vom 23. Dez. 2011 (Rechnungslegungsrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 6679; BBl 2008 1589).
2 SR 220

Art. 83b1B. Organisation / III. Revisionsstelle / 1. Revisionspflicht und anwendbares Recht

III. Revisionsstelle

1. Revisionspflicht und anwendbares Recht

1 Das oberste Stiftungsorgan bezeichnet eine Revisionsstelle.

2 Die Aufsichtsbehörde kann eine Stiftung von der Pflicht befreien, eine Revisionsstelle zu bezeichnen. Der Bundesrat legt die Voraussetzungen der Befreiung fest.

3 Soweit für Stiftungen keine besonderen Vorschriften bestehen, sind die Vorschriften des Obligationenrechts2 über die Revisionsstelle bei Aktiengesellschaften entsprechend anwendbar.

Ist die Stiftung zu einer eingeschränkten Revision verpflichtet, so kann die Aufsichtsbehörde eine ordentliche Revision verlangen, wenn dies für die zuverlässige Beurteilung der Vermögens- und Ertragslage der Stiftung notwendig ist.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 8. Okt. 2004 (Stiftungsrecht) (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191). Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 1 des BG vom 16. Dez. 2005 (GmbH-Recht sowie Anpassungen im Aktien-, Genossenschafts-, Handelsregister- und Firmenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).
2 SR 220

Art. 83c1B. Organisation / III. Revisionsstelle / 2. Verhältnis zur Aufsichtsbehörde

2. Verhältnis zur Aufsichtsbehörde

Die Revisionsstelle übermittelt der Aufsichtsbehörde eine Kopie des Revisionsberichts sowie aller wichtigen Mitteilungen an die Stiftung.


1 Eingefügt durch Anhang Ziff. 1 des BG vom 16. Dez. 2005 (GmbH-Recht sowie Anpassungen im Aktien-, Genossenschafts-, Handelsregister- und Firmenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).

Art. 83d1B. Organisation / IV. Mängel in der Organisation

IV. Mängel in der Organisation

1 Ist die vorgesehene Organisation nicht genügend, fehlt der Stiftung eines der vorgeschriebenen Organe oder ist eines dieser Organe nicht rechtmässig zusammengesetzt oder verfügt die Stiftung über kein Rechtsdomizil an ihrem Sitz mehr, so muss die Aufsichtsbehörde die erforderlichen Massnahmen ergreifen. Sie kann insbesondere:2

1.
der Stiftung eine Frist ansetzen, binnen derer der rechtmässige Zustand wieder herzustellen ist; oder
2.
das fehlende Organ oder einen Sachwalter ernennen.

2 Kann eine zweckdienliche Organisation nicht gewährleistet werden, so hat die Aufsichtsbehörde das Vermögen einer anderen Stiftung mit möglichst gleichartigem Zweck zuzuwenden.

3 Die Stiftung trägt die Kosten der Massnahmen. Die Aufsichtsbehörde kann die Stiftung verpflichten, den ernannten Personen einen Vorschuss zu leisten.

4 Liegt ein wichtiger Grund vor, so kann die Stiftung von der Aufsichtsbehörde die Abberufung von Personen verlangen, die diese eingesetzt hat.


1 Eingefügt durch Anhang Ziff. 1 des BG vom 16. Dez. 2005 (GmbH-Recht sowie Anpassungen im Aktien-, Genossenschafts-, Handelsregister- und Firmenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).
2 Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 1 des BG vom 17. März 2017 (Handelsregisterrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2021 (AS 2020 957; BBl 2015 3617).

Art. 84 C. Aufsicht

C. Aufsicht

1 Die Stiftungen stehen unter der Aufsicht des Gemeinwesens (Bund, Kanton, Gemeinde), dem sie nach ihrer Bestimmung angehören.

1bis Die Kantone können die ihren Gemeinden angehörenden Stiftungen der kantonalen Aufsichtsbehörde unterstellen.1

2 Die Aufsichtsbehörde hat dafür zu sorgen, dass das Stiftungsvermögen seinen Zwecken gemäss verwendet wird.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 8. Okt. 2004 (Stiftungsrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 84a1Cbis. Massnahmen bei Überschuldung und Zahlungsunfähigkeit

Cbis. Massnahmen bei Überschuldung und Zahlungsunfähigkeit

1 Besteht begründete Besorgnis, dass die Stiftung überschuldet ist oder ihre Verbindlichkeiten längerfristig nicht mehr erfüllen kann, so stellt das oberste Stiftungsorgan auf Grund der Veräusserungswerte eine Zwischenbilanz auf und legt sie der Revisionsstelle zur Prüfung vor. Verfügt die Stiftung über keine Revisionsstelle, so legt das oberste Stiftungsorgan die Zwischenbilanz der Aufsichtsbehörde vor.

2 Stellt die Revisionsstelle fest, dass die Stiftung überschuldet ist oder ihre Verbindlichkeiten längerfristig nicht erfüllen kann, so legt sie die Zwischenbilanz der Aufsichtsbehörde vor.

3 Die Aufsichtsbehörde hält das oberste Stiftungsorgan zur Einleitung der erforderlichen Massnahmen an. Bleibt dieses untätig, so trifft die Aufsichtsbehörde die nötigen Massnahmen.

4 Nötigenfalls beantragt die Aufsichtsbehörde vollstreckungsrechtliche Massnahmen; die aktienrechtlichen Bestimmungen über die Eröffnung oder den Aufschub des Konkurses sind sinngemäss anwendbar.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 8. Okt. 2004 (Stiftungsrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 84b1

1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 8. Okt. 2004 (Stiftungsrecht) (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191). Aufgehoben durch Anhang Ziff. 1 des BG vom 16. Dez. 2005 (GmbH-Recht sowie Anpassungen im Aktien-, Genossenschafts-, Handelsregister- und Firmenrecht), mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).

Art. 851D. Umwandlung der Stiftung / I. Änderung der Organisation

D. Umwandlung der Stiftung

I. Änderung der Organisation

Die zuständige Bundes- oder Kantonsbehörde kann auf Antrag der Aufsichtsbehörde und nach Anhörung des obersten Stiftungsorgans die Organisation der Stiftung ändern, wenn die Erhaltung des Vermögens oder die Wahrung des Stiftungszwecks die Änderung dringend erfordert.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 8. Okt. 2004 (Stiftungsrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 86 D. Umwandlung der Stiftung / II. Änderung des Zwecks / 1. Auf Antrag der Aufsichtsbehörde oder des obersten Stiftungsorgans

II. Änderung des Zwecks

1. Auf Antrag der Aufsichtsbehörde oder des obersten Stiftungsorgans1

1 Die zuständige Bundes- oder Kantonsbehörde kann auf Antrag der Aufsichtsbehörde oder des obersten Stiftungsorgans den Zweck der Stiftung ändern, wenn deren ursprünglicher Zweck eine ganz andere Bedeutung oder Wirkung erhalten hat, so dass die Stiftung dem Willen des Stifters offenbar entfremdet worden ist.2

2 Unter den gleichen Voraussetzungen können Auflagen oder Bedingungen, die den Stiftungszweck beeinträchtigen, aufgehoben oder abgeändert werden.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 8. Okt. 2004 (Stiftungsrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 8. Okt. 2004 (Stiftungsrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 86a1D. Umwandlung der Stiftung / II. Änderung des Zwecks / 2. Auf Antrag des Stifters oder auf Grund seiner Verfügung von Todes wegen

2. Auf Antrag des Stifters oder auf Grund seiner Verfügung von Todes wegen

1 Die zuständige Bundes- oder Kantonsbehörde ändert den Zweck einer Stiftung auf Antrag des Stifters oder auf Grund von dessen Verfügung von Todes wegen, wenn in der Stiftungsurkunde eine Zweckänderung vorbehalten worden ist und seit der Errichtung der Stiftung oder seit der letzten vom Stifter verlangten Änderung mindestens zehn Jahre verstrichen sind.

2 Verfolgt die Stiftung einen öffentlichen oder gemeinnützigen Zweck nach Artikel 56 Buchstabe g des Bundesgesetzes vom 14. Dezember 19902 über die direkte Bundessteuer, so muss der geänderte Zweck ebenfalls öffentlich oder gemeinnützig sein.

3 Das Recht auf Änderung des Stiftungszwecks ist unvererblich und unübertragbar. Ist der Stifter eine juristische Person, so erlischt dieses Recht spätestens 20 Jahre nach der Errichtung der Stiftung.

4 Haben mehrere Personen die Stiftung errichtet, so können sie die Änderung des Stiftungszwecks nur gemeinsam verlangen.

5 Die Behörde, welche die Verfügung von Todes wegen eröffnet, teilt der zuständigen Aufsichtsbehörde die Anordnung zur Änderung des Stiftungszwecks mit.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 8. Okt. 2004 (Stiftungsrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).
2 SR 642.11

Art. 86b1D. Umwandlung der Stiftung / III. Unwesentliche Änderungen der Stiftungsurkunde

III. Unwesentliche Änderungen der Stiftungsurkunde

Die Aufsichtsbehörde kann nach Anhörung des obersten Stiftungsorgans unwesentliche Änderungen der Stiftungsurkunde vornehmen, sofern dies aus triftigen sachlichen Gründen als geboten erscheint und keine Rechte Dritter beeinträchtigt.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 8. Okt. 2004 (Stiftungsrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 87 E. Familienstiftungen und kirchliche Stiftungen

E. Familienstiftungen und kirchliche Stiftungen

1 Die Familienstiftungen und die kirchlichen Stiftungen sind unter Vorbehalt des öffentlichen Rechtes der Aufsichtsbehörde nicht unterstellt.

1bis Sie sind von der Pflicht befreit, eine Revisionsstelle zu bezeichnen.1

2 Über Anstände privatrechtlicher Natur entscheidet das Gericht.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 8. Okt. 2004 (Stiftungsrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 881F. Aufhebung und Löschung im Register / I. Aufhebung durch die zuständige Behörde

F. Aufhebung und Löschung im Register

I. Aufhebung durch die zuständige Behörde

1 Die zuständige Bundes- oder Kantonsbehörde hebt die Stiftung auf Antrag oder von Amtes wegen auf, wenn:

1.
deren Zweck unerreichbar geworden ist und die Stiftung durch eine Änderung der Stiftungsurkunde nicht aufrechterhalten werden kann; oder
2.
deren Zweck widerrechtlich oder unsittlich geworden ist.

2 Familienstiftungen und kirchliche Stiftungen werden durch das Gericht aufgehoben.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 8. Okt. 2004 (Stiftungsrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 891F. Aufhebung und Löschung im Register / II. Antrags- und Klagerecht, Löschung im Register

II. Antrags- und Klagerecht, Löschung im Register

1 Zur Antragsstellung oder zur Klage auf Aufhebung der Stiftung berechtigt ist jede Person, die ein Interesse hat.

2 Die Aufhebung ist dem Registerführer zur Löschung des Eintrags anzumelden.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 8. Okt. 2004 (Stiftungsrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 89a1G. Personalfürsorgestiftungen

G. Personalfürsorgestiftungen2

1 Für Personalfürsorgeeinrichtungen, die gemäss Artikel 331 des Obligationenrechts3 in Form der Stiftung errichtet worden sind, gelten überdies noch folgende Bestimmungen.4

2 Die Stiftungsorgane haben den Begünstigten über die Organisation, die Tätigkeit und die Vermögenslage der Stiftung den erforderlichen Aufschluss zu erteilen.

3 Leisten die Arbeitnehmer Beiträge an die Stiftung, so sind sie an der Verwaltung wenigstens nach Massgabe dieser Beiträge zu beteiligen; soweit möglich haben die Arbeitnehmer ihre Vertretung aus dem Personal des Arbeitgebers zu wählen.5

4 ...6

5 Die Begünstigten können auf Ausrichtung von Leistungen der Stiftung klagen, wenn sie Beiträge an diese entrichtet haben oder wenn ihnen nach den Stiftungsbestimmungen ein Rechtsanspruch auf Leistungen zusteht.

6 Für Personalfürsorgestiftungen, die auf dem Gebiet der Alters-, Hinterlassenen- und Invalidenvorsorge tätig sind und die dem Freizügigkeitsgesetz vom 17. Dezember 19937 (FZG) unterstellt sind, gelten überdies die folgenden Bestimmungen des Bundesgesetzes vom 25. Juni 19828 über die berufliche Alters-, Hinterlassenen- und Invalidenvorsorge (BVG) über:9

1.10
die Definition und Grundsätze der beruflichen Vorsorge sowie des versicherbaren Lohnes oder des versicherbaren Einkommens (Art. 1, 33a und 33b),
2.11
die Unterstellung der Personen unter die AHV (Art. 5 Abs. 1),
3.
die Begünstigten bei Hinterlassenenleistungen (Art. 20a),
3a.12
die Anpassung der Invalidenrente nach dem Vorsorgeausgleich (Art. 24 Abs. 5),
3b.13
die provisorische Weiterversicherung und Aufrechterhaltung des Leistungsanspruchs bei Herabsetzung oder Aufhebung der Rente der Invalidenversicherung (Art. 26a),
4.14
die Anpassung der reglementarischen Leistungen an die Preisentwicklung (Art. 36 Abs. 2–4),
4a.15 die Zustimmung bei Kapitalabfindung (Art. 37a),
5.
die Verjährung von Ansprüchen und die Aufbewahrung von Vorsorgeunterlagen (Art. 41),
5a.16 die Verwendung, Bearbeitung und Bekanntgabe der Versichertennummer der Alters- und Hinterlassenenversicherung (Art. 48 Abs. 4, Art. 85a Bst. f und Art. 86a Abs. 2 Bst. bbis),
6.
die Verantwortlichkeit (Art. 52),
7.17
die Zulassung und die Aufgaben der Kontrollorgane (Art. 52a–52e),
8.18
die Integrität und Loyalität der Verantwortlichen, die Rechtsgeschäfte mit Nahestehenden und die Interessenkonflikte (Art. 51b, 51c und 53a),
9.
die Teil- oder Gesamtliquidation (Art. 53b–53d),
10.19
 die Auflösung von Verträgen (Art. 53e und 53f),
11.
den Sicherheitsfonds (Art. 56 Abs. 1 Bst. c und Abs. 2–5, Art. 56a, 57 und 59),
12.20
die Aufsicht und die Oberaufsicht (Art. 61–62a und 64–64c),
13.21
...
14.22
die finanzielle Sicherheit (Art. 65 Abs. 1, 3 und 4, Art. 66 Abs. 4, Art. 67 und Art. 72a–72g),
15.
die Transparenz (Art. 65a),
16.
die Rückstellungen (Art. 65b),
17.
die Versicherungsverträge zwischen Vorsorgeeinrichtungen und Versicherungseinrichtungen (Art. 68 Abs. 3 und 4),
18.
die Vermögensverwaltung (Art. 71),
19.
die Rechtspflege (Art. 73 und 74),
20.
die Strafbestimmungen (Art. 75–79),
21.
den Einkauf (Art. 79b),
22.
den versicherbaren Lohn und das versicherbare Einkommen (Art. 79c),
23.
die Information der Versicherten (Art. 86b).23

7 Für Personalfürsorgestiftungen, die auf dem Gebiet der Alters-, Hinterlassenen- und Invalidenvorsorge tätig sind, aber nicht dem FZG unterstellt sind, wie sogenannte patronale Wohlfahrtsfonds mit Ermessensleistungen sowie Finanzierungsstiftungen, gelten von den Bestimmungen des BVG nur die folgenden:

1.
die Unterstellung der Personen unter die AHV (Art. 5 Abs. 1);
2.
die Verwendung, Bearbeitung und Bekanntgabe der Versichertennummer der AHV (Art. 48 Abs. 4, 85a Bst. f und 86a Abs. 2 Bst. bbis);
3.
die Verantwortlichkeit (Art. 52);
4.
die Zulassung und die Aufgaben der Revisionsstelle (Art. 52a, 52b und 52c Abs. 1 Bst. a–d und g, 2 und 3);
5.
die Integrität und Loyalität der Verantwortlichen, die Rechtsgeschäfte mit Nahestehenden und die Interessenkonflikte (Art. 51b, 51c und 53a);
6.
die Gesamtliquidation (Art. 53c);
7.
die Aufsicht und die Oberaufsicht (Art. 61–62a und 64–64b);
8.
die Rechtspflege (Art. 73 und 74);
9.
die Strafbestimmungen (Art. 75–79);
10.
die steuerliche Behandlung (Art. 80, 81 Abs. 1 und 83).24

8 Für Personalfürsorgestiftungen nach Absatz 7 gelten zudem die folgenden Bestimmungen:

1.
Sie verwalten ihr Vermögen so, dass Sicherheit, genügender Ertrag auf den Anlagen und die für ihre Aufgaben benötigten flüssigen Mittel gewährleistet sind.
2.
Über Teilliquidationssachverhalte von patronalen Wohlfahrtsfonds mit Ermessensleistungen verfügt die Aufsichtsbehörde auf Antrag des Stiftungsrats.
3.
Sie beachten die Grundsätze der Gleichbehandlung und der Angemessenheit sinngemäss.25

1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. II des BG vom 21. März 1958, in Kraft seit 1. Juli 1958 (AS 1958 379; BBl 1956 II 825). Bis zum Inkrafttreten des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht) am 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725): Art. 89bis.
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. II Art. 2 Ziff. 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1971, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1972 (AS 1971 1465; BBl 1967 II 241).
3 SR 220
4 Fassung gemäss Ziff. II Art. 2 Ziff. 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1971, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1972 (AS 1971 1465; BBl 1967 II 241).
5 Fassung gemäss Ziff. II Art. 2 Ziff. 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1971, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1972 (AS 1971 1465; BBl 1967 II 241).
6 Aufgehoben durch Ziff. III des BG vom 21. Juni 1996, mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 1997 (AS 1996 3067; BBl 1996 I 564 580).
7 SR 831.42
8 SR 831.40
9 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 25. Sept. 2015 (Personalfürsorgestiftungen), in Kraft seit 1. April 2016 (AS 2016 935; BBl 2014 6143 6649).
10 Fassung gemäss Ziff. II 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Massnahmen zur Erleichterung der Arbeitsmarktbeteiligung älterer Arbeitnehmender), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 4427; BBl 2007 5669).
11 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 25. Sept. 2015 (Personalfürsorgestiftungen), in Kraft seit 1. April 2016 (AS 2016 935; BBl 2014 6143 6649).
12 Eingefügt durch Anhang Ziff. 2 des BG vom 18. März 2011 (6. IV-Revision, erstes Massnahmepaket) (AS 2011 5659; BBl 2010 1817). Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 19. Juni 2015 (Vorsorgeausgleich bei Scheidung), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).
13 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 19. Juni 2015 (Vorsorgeausgleich bei Scheidung), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).
14 Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 1 des BG vom 18. Juni 2004, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2005 (AS 2004 4635; BBl 2003 6399).
15 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 19. Juni 2015 (Vorsorgeausgleich bei Scheidung), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).
16 Eingefügt durch Anhang Ziff. 1 des BG vom 23. Juni 2006 (Neue AHV-Versichertennummer), in Kraft seit 1. Dez. 2007 (AS 2007 5259; BBl 2006 501).
17 Fassung gemäss Ziff. II 1 des BG vom 19. März 2010 (Strukturreform BVG), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 3393; BBl 2007 5669).
18 Fassung gemäss Ziff. II 1 des BG vom 19. März 2010 (Strukturreform BVG), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 3393; BBl 2007 5669).
19 Fassung gemäss Ziff. II des BG vom 20. Dez. 2006 (Wechsel der Vorsorgeeinrichtung), in Kraft seit 1. Mai 2007 (AS 2007 1803; BBl 2005 5941 5953).
20 Fassung gemäss Ziff. II 1 des BG vom 19. März 2010 (Strukturreform BVG), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 3393; BBl 2007 5669).
21 Aufgehoben durch Ziff. II 1 des BG vom 19. März 2010 (Strukturreform BVG), mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 3393; BBl 2007 5669).
22 Fassung gemäss Ziff. II 1 des BG vom 17. Dez. 2010 (Finanzierung von Vorsorgeeinrichtungen öffentlich-rechtlicher Körperschaften), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 3385; BBl 2008 8411).
23 Eingefügt durch Anhang Ziff. 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1982 über die berufliche Alters-, Hinterlassenen- und Invalidenvorsorge (AS 1983 797; BBl 1976 I 149). Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 1 des BG vom 3. Okt. 2003 (1. BVG-Revision), Ziff. 6, 7, 10–12, 14 (mit Ausnahme von Art. 66 Abs. 4), 15, 17–20 und 23 in Kraft seit 1. April 2004, Ziff. 3–5, 8, 9, 13, 14 (Art. 66 Abs. 4) und 16 in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2005, Ziff. 1, 21 und 22 in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2006 (AS 2004 1677; BBl 2000 2637).
24 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 25. Sept. 2015 (Personalfürsorgestiftungen), in Kraft seit 1. April 2016 (AS 2016 935; BBl 2014 6143 6649).
25 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 25. Sept. 2015 (Personalfürsorgestiftungen), in Kraft seit 1. April 2016 (AS 2016 935; BBl 2014 6143 6649).


  Zweiter Titelbis:2  3  Die Sammelvermögen

Art. 89b A. Fehlende Verwaltung

A. Fehlende Verwaltung

1 Ist bei öffentlicher Sammlung für gemeinnützige Zwecke nicht für die Verwaltung oder Verwendung des Sammelvermögens gesorgt, so ordnet die zuständige Behörde das Erforderliche an.

2 Sie kann für das Sammelvermögen einen Sachwalter oder eine Sachwalterin ernennen oder es einem Verein oder einer Stiftung mit möglichst gleichartigem Zweck zuwenden.

3 Auf die Sachwalterschaft sind die Vorschriften über die Beistandschaften im Erwachsenenschutz sinngemäss anwendbar.

Art. 89c B. Zuständigkeit B. Zuständigkeit

B. Zuständigkeit

1 Zuständig ist der Kanton, in dem das Sammelvermögen in seinem Hauptbestandteil verwaltet worden ist.

2 Sofern der Kanton nichts anderes bestimmt, ist die Behörde zuständig, die die Stiftungen beaufsichtigt.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 26. Juni 1998, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).2 Berichtigt von der Redaktionskommission der BVers (Art. 58 Abs. 1 ParlG – SR 171.10).3 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

  Zweiter Teil: Das Familienrecht

  Erste Abteilung: Das Eherecht

  Dritter Titel:1  Die Eheschliessung

  Erster Abschnitt: Das Verlöbnis

Art. 90 A. Verlobung

A. Verlobung

1 Das Verlöbnis wird durch das Eheversprechen begründet.

2 Minderjährige werden ohne Zustimmung des gesetzlichen Vertreters durch ihre Verlobung nicht verpflichtet.1

3 Aus dem Verlöbnis entsteht kein klagbarer Anspruch auf Eingehung der Ehe.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 91 B. Auflösung des Verlöbnisses / I. Geschenke

B. Auflösung des Verlöbnisses

I. Geschenke

1 Mit Ausnahme der gewöhnlichen Gelegenheitsgeschenke können die Verlobten Geschenke, die sie einander gemacht haben, bei Auflösung des Verlöbnisses zurückfordern, es sei denn, das Verlöbnis sei durch Tod aufgelöst worden.

2 Sind die Geschenke nicht mehr vorhanden, so richtet sich die Rückerstattung nach den Bestimmungen über die ungerechtfertigte Bereicherung.

Art. 92 B. Auflösung des Verlöbnisses / II. Beitragspflicht

II. Beitragspflicht

Hat einer der Verlobten im Hinblick auf die Eheschliessung in guten Treuen Veranstaltungen getroffen, so kann er bei Auflösung des Verlöbnisses vom andern einen angemessenen Beitrag verlangen, sofern dies nach den gesamten Umständen nicht als unbillig erscheint.

Art. 93 B. Auflösung des Verlöbnisses / III. Verjährung

III. Verjährung

Die Ansprüche aus dem Verlöbnis verjähren mit Ablauf eines Jahres nach der Auflösung.


  Zweiter Abschnitt: Die Ehevoraussetzungen

Art. 94 A. Ehefähigkeit

A. Ehefähigkeit

1 Um die Ehe eingehen zu können, müssen die Brautleute das 18. Altersjahr zurückgelegt haben und urteilsfähig sein.

2 ...1


1 Aufgehoben durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 95 B. Ehehindernisse / I. Verwandtschaft

B. Ehehindernisse

I. Verwandtschaft1

1 Die Eheschliessung ist zwischen Verwandten in gerader Linie sowie zwischen Geschwistern oder Halbgeschwistern, gleichgültig ob sie miteinander durch Abstammung oder durch Adoption verwandt sind, verboten.2

2 Die Adoption hebt das Ehehindernis der Verwandtschaft zwischen dem Adoptivkind und seinen Nachkommen einerseits und seiner angestammten Familie anderseits nicht auf.


1 Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 8 des Partnerschaftsgesetzes vom 18. Juni 2004, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 5685; BBl 2003 1288).
2 Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 8 des Partnerschaftsgesetzes vom 18. Juni 2004, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 5685; BBl 2003 1288).

Art. 96 B. Ehehindernisse / II. Frühere Ehe

II. Frühere Ehe

Wer eine neue Ehe eingehen will, hat den Nachweis zu erbringen, dass die frühere Ehe für ungültig erklärt oder aufgelöst worden ist.


  Dritter Abschnitt: Vorbereitung der Eheschliessung und Trauung

Art. 97 A. Grundsätze

A. Grundsätze

1 Die Ehe wird nach dem Vorbereitungsverfahren vor der Zivilstandsbeamtin oder dem Zivilstandsbeamten geschlossen.

2 Die Verlobten können sich im Zivilstandskreis ihrer Wahl trauen lassen.

3 Eine religiöse Eheschliessung darf vor der Ziviltrauung nicht durchgeführt werden.

Art. 97a1Abis. Umgehung des Ausländerrechts

Abis. Umgehung des Ausländerrechts

1 Die Zivilstandsbeamtin oder der Zivilstandsbeamte tritt auf das Gesuch nicht ein, wenn die Braut oder der Bräutigam offensichtlich keine Lebensgemeinschaft begründen, sondern die Bestimmungen über Zulassung und Aufenthalt von Ausländerinnen und Ausländern umgehen will.

2 Die Zivilstandsbeamtin oder der Zivilstandsbeamte hört die Brautleute an und kann bei anderen Behörden oder bei Drittpersonen Auskünfte einholen.


1 Eingefügt durch Anhang Ziff. II 4 des BG vom 16. Dez. 2005 über Ausländerinnen und Ausländer, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 5437; BBl 2002 3709).

Art. 98 B. Vorbereitungsverfahren / I. Gesuch

B. Vorbereitungsverfahren

I. Gesuch

1 Die Verlobten stellen das Gesuch um Durchführung des Vorbereitungsverfahrens beim Zivilstandsamt des Wohnortes der Braut oder des Bräutigams.

2 Sie müssen persönlich erscheinen. Falls sie nachweisen, dass dies für sie offensichtlich unzumutbar ist, wird die schriftliche Durchführung des Vorbereitungsverfahrens bewilligt.

3 Sie haben ihre Personalien mittels Dokumenten zu belegen und beim Zivilstandsamt persönlich zu erklären, dass sie die Ehevoraussetzungen erfüllen; sie legen die nötigen Zustimmungen vor.

4 Verlobte, die nicht Schweizerbürgerinnen oder Schweizerbürger sind, müssen während des Vorbereitungsverfahrens ihren rechtmässigen Aufenthalt in der Schweiz nachweisen.1


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 12. Juni 2009 (Unterbindung von Ehen bei rechtswidrigem Aufenthalt), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 3057; BBl 2008 2467 2481).

Art. 99 B. Vorbereitungsverfahren / II. Durchführung und Abschluss des Vorbereitungsverfahrens

II. Durchführung und Abschluss des Vorbereitungsverfahrens

1 Das Zivilstandsamt prüft, ob:

1.
das Gesuch ordnungsgemäss eingereicht worden ist;
2.
die Identität der Verlobten feststeht; und
3.1
die Ehevoraussetzungen erfüllt sind, insbesondere ob keine Umstände vorliegen, die erkennen lassen, dass das Gesuch offensichtlich nicht dem freien Willen der Verlobten entspricht.

2 Sind diese Anforderungen erfüllt, so teilt es den Verlobten den Abschluss des Vorbereitungsverfahrens sowie die gesetzliche Frist für die Trauung mit.2

3 Es legt im Einvernehmen mit den Verlobten im Rahmen der kantonalen Vorschriften den Zeitpunkt der Trauung fest oder stellt auf Antrag eine Ermächtigung zur Trauung in einem andern Zivilstandskreis aus.

4 Das Zivilstandsamt teilt der zuständigen Behörde die Identität von Verlobten mit, die ihren rechtmässigen Aufenthalt in der Schweiz nicht nachgewiesen haben.3


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 3 des BG vom 15. Juni 2012 über Massnahmen gegen Zwangs— heiraten, in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2013 (AS 2013 1035; BBl 2011 2185).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 28. Sept. 2018, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2020 (AS 2019 3813; BBl 2017 6769).
3 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 12. Juni 2009 (Unterbindung von Ehen bei rechtswidrigem Aufenthalt), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 3057; BBl 2008 2467 2481).

Art. 1001B. Vorbereitungsverfahren / III. Fristen

III. Fristen

Die Trauung kann innerhalb von drei Monaten stattfinden, nachdem der Abschluss des Vorbereitungsverfahrens mitgeteilt wurde.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 28. Sept. 2018, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2020 (AS 2019 3813; BBl 2017 6769).

Art. 101 C. Trauung / I. Ort

C. Trauung

I. Ort

1 Die Trauung findet im Trauungslokal des Zivilstandskreises statt, den die Verlobten gewählt haben.

2 Ist das Vorbereitungsverfahren in einem andern Zivilstandskreis durchgeführt worden, so müssen die Verlobten eine Trauungsermächtigung vorlegen.

3 Weisen die Verlobten nach, dass es für sie offensichtlich unzumutbar ist, sich in das Trauungslokal zu begeben, so kann die Trauung an einem andern Ort stattfinden.

Art. 102 C. Trauung / II. Form

II. Form

1 Die Trauung ist öffentlich und findet in Anwesenheit von zwei volljährigen und urteilsfähigen Zeuginnen oder Zeugen statt.1

2 Die Zivilstandsbeamtin oder der Zivilstandsbeamte richtet an die Braut und an den Bräutigam einzeln die Frage, ob sie miteinander die Ehe eingehen wollen.

3 Bejahen die Verlobten die Frage, wird die Ehe durch ihre beidseitige Zustimmung als geschlossen erklärt.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 103 D. Ausführungsbestimmungen

D. Ausführungsbestimmungen

Der Bundesrat und, im Rahmen ihrer Zuständigkeit, die Kantone erlassen die nötigen Ausführungsbestimmungen.


  Vierter Abschnitt: Die Eheungültigkeit

Art. 104 A. Grundsatz

A. Grundsatz

Die vor der Zivilstandsbeamtin oder dem Zivilstandsbeamten geschlossene Ehe kann nur aus einem in diesem Abschnitt vorgesehenen Grund für ungültig erklärt werden.

Art. 105 B. Unbefristete Ungültigkeit / I. Gründe

B. Unbefristete Ungültigkeit

I. Gründe

Ein Ungültigkeitsgrund liegt vor, wenn:

1.
zur Zeit der Eheschliessung einer der Ehegatten1 bereits verheiratet ist und die frühere Ehe nicht durch Scheidung oder Tod des Partners aufgelöst worden ist;
2.
zur Zeit der Eheschliessung einer der Ehegatten nicht urteilsfähig ist und seither nicht wieder urteilsfähig geworden ist;
3.2
die Eheschliessung infolge Verwandtschaft unter den Ehegatten verboten ist;
4.3
einer der Ehegatten nicht eine Lebensgemeinschaft begründen, sondern die Bestimmungen über Zulassung und Aufenthalt von Ausländerinnen und Ausländern umgehen will;
5.4
ein Ehegatte die Ehe nicht aus freiem Willen geschlossen hat;
6.5
einer der Ehegatten minderjährig ist, es sei denn, die Weiterführung der Ehe entspricht den überwiegenden Interessen dieses Ehegatten.

1 Es handelt sich um einen feststehenden Rechtsbegriff, der sich auf Personen beider Geschlechter bezieht (im Gegensatz zu den Ausdrücken «Ehemann» und «Ehefrau»).
2 Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 8 des Partnerschaftsgesetzes vom 18. Juni 2004, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 5685; BBl 2003 1288).
3 Eingefügt durch Anhang Ziff. II 4 des BG vom 16. Dez. 2005 über Ausländerinnen und Ausländer, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 5437; BBl 2002 3709).
4 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 3 des BG vom 15. Juni 2012 über Massnahmen gegen Zwangs— heiraten, in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2013 (AS 2013 1035; BBl 2011 2185).
5 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 3 des BG vom 15. Juni 2012 über Massnahmen gegen Zwangs— heiraten, in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2013 (AS 2013 1035; BBl 2011 2185).

Art. 106 B. Unbefristete Ungültigkeit / II. Klage

II. Klage

1 Die Klage ist von der zuständigen kantonalen Behörde am Wohnsitz der Ehegatten von Amtes wegen zu erheben; überdies kann jedermann klagen, der ein Interesse hat. Soweit dies mit ihren Aufgaben vereinbar ist, melden die Behörden des Bundes und der Kantone der für die Klage zuständigen Behörde, wenn sie Anlass zur Annahme haben, dass ein Ungültigkeitsgrund vorliegt.1

2 Nach Auflösung der Ehe wird deren Ungültigkeit nicht mehr von Amtes wegen verfolgt; es kann aber jedermann, der ein Interesse hat, die Ungültigerklärung verlangen.

3 Die Klage kann jederzeit eingereicht werden.


1 Letzter Satz eingefügt durch Ziff. I 3 des BG vom 15. Juni 2012 über Massnahmen gegen Zwangsheiraten, in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2013 (AS 2013 1035; BBl 2011 2185).

Art. 107 C. Befristete Ungültigkeit / I. Gründe

C. Befristete Ungültigkeit

I. Gründe

Ein Ehegatte kann verlangen, dass die Ehe für ungültig erklärt wird, wenn er:

1.
bei der Trauung aus einem vorübergehenden Grund nicht urteilsfähig war;
2.
sich aus Irrtum hat trauen lassen, sei es, dass er die Ehe selbst oder die Trauung mit der betreffenden Person nicht gewollt hat;
3.
die Ehe geschlossen hat, weil er über wesentliche persönliche Eigenschaften des anderen absichtlich getäuscht worden ist;
4.1
...

1 Aufgehoben durch Ziff. I 3 des BG vom 15. Juni 2012 über Massnahmen gegen Zwangs— heiraten, mit Wirkung seit 1. Juli 2013 (AS 2013 1035; BBl 2011 2185).

Art. 108 C. Befristete Ungültigkeit / II. Klage

II. Klage

1 Die Ungültigkeitsklage ist innerhalb von sechs Monaten seit Kenntnis des Ungültigkeitsgrundes oder seit dem Wegfall der Drohung einzureichen, in jedem Fall aber vor Ablauf von fünf Jahren seit der Eheschliessung.

2 Das Klagerecht geht nicht auf die Erben über; ein Erbe kann jedoch an der bereits erhobenen Klage festhalten.

Art. 109 D. Wirkungen des Urteils

D. Wirkungen des Urteils

1 Die Ungültigkeit einer Ehe wird erst wirksam, nachdem das Gericht die Ungültigerklärung ausgesprochen hat; bis zum Urteil hat die Ehe mit Ausnahme der erbrechtlichen Ansprüche, die der überlebende Ehegatte in jedem Fall verliert, alle Wirkungen einer gültigen Ehe.

2 Für die Wirkungen der gerichtlichen Ungültigerklärung auf die Ehegatten und die Kinder gelten sinngemäss die Bestimmungen über die Scheidung.

3 Die Vaterschaftsvermutung des Ehemannes entfällt, wenn die Ehe für ungültig erklärt worden ist, weil sie dazu diente, die Bestimmungen über Zulassung und Aufenthalt von Ausländerinnen und Ausländern zu umgehen.1


1 Eingefügt durch Anhang Ziff. II 4 des BG vom 16. Dez. 2005 über Ausländerinnen und Ausländer, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 5437; BBl 2002 3709).

Art. 1101

1 Aufgehoben durch Anhang 1 Ziff. II 3 der Zivilprozessordnung vom 19. Dez. 2008, mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).


  Vierter Titel:2  Die Ehescheidung und die Ehetrennung

  Erster Abschnitt: Die Scheidungsvoraussetzungen

Art. 1111A. Scheidung auf gemeinsames Begehren / I. Umfassende Einigung

A. Scheidung auf gemeinsames Begehren

I. Umfassende Einigung

1 Verlangen die Ehegatten gemeinsam die Scheidung und reichen sie eine vollständige Vereinbarung über die Scheidungsfolgen mit den nötigen Belegen und mit gemeinsamen Anträgen hinsichtlich der Kinder ein, so hört das Gericht sie getrennt und zusammen an. Die Anhörung kann aus mehreren Sitzungen bestehen.

2 Hat sich das Gericht davon überzeugt, dass das Scheidungsbegehren und die Vereinbarung auf freiem Willen und reiflicher Überlegung beruhen und die Vereinbarung mit den Anträgen hinsichtlich der Kinder genehmigt werden kann, so spricht das Gericht die Scheidung aus.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 25. Sept. 2009 (Bedenkzeit im Scheidungsverfahren auf gemeinsames Begehren), in Kraft seit 1. Febr. 2010 (AS 2010 281; BBl 2008 1959 1975).

Art. 112 A. Scheidung auf gemeinsames Begehren / II. Teileinigung

II. Teileinigung

1 Die Ehegatten können gemeinsam die Scheidung verlangen und erklären, dass das Gericht die Scheidungsfolgen beurteilen soll, über die sie sich nicht einig sind.

2 Das Gericht hört sie wie bei der umfassenden Einigung zum Scheidungsbegehren, zu den Scheidungsfolgen, über die sie sich geeinigt haben, sowie zur Erklärung, dass die übrigen Folgen gerichtlich zu beurteilen sind, an.

3 ...1


1 Aufgehoben durch Anhang 1 Ziff. II 3 der Zivilprozessordnung vom 19. Dez. 2008, mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 1131

1 Aufgehoben durch Anhang 1 Ziff. II 3 der Zivilprozessordnung vom 19. Dez. 2008, mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 1141B. Scheidung auf Klage eines Ehegatten / I. Nach Getrenntleben

B. Scheidung auf Klage eines Ehegatten

I. Nach Getrenntleben

Ein Ehegatte kann die Scheidung verlangen, wenn die Ehegatten bei Eintritt der Rechtshängigkeit der Klage oder bei Wechsel zur Scheidung auf Klage mindestens zwei Jahre getrennt gelebt haben.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 19. Dez. 2003 (Trennungsfrist im Scheidungsrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Juni 2004 (AS 2004 2161; BBl 2003 3927 5825).

Art. 1151B. Scheidung auf Klage eines Ehegatten / II. Unzumutbarkeit

II. Unzumutbarkeit

Vor Ablauf der zweijährigen Frist kann ein Ehegatte die Scheidung verlangen, wenn ihm die Fortsetzung der Ehe aus schwerwiegenden Gründen, die ihm nicht zuzurechnen sind, nicht zugemutet werden kann.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 19. Dez. 2003 (Trennungsfrist im Scheidungsrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Juni 2004 (AS 2004 2161; BBl 2003 3927 5825).

Art. 1161

1 Aufgehoben durch Anhang 1 Ziff. II 3 der Zivilprozessordnung vom 19. Dez. 2008, mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).


  Zweiter Abschnitt: Die Ehetrennung

Art. 117 A. Voraussetzungen und Verfahren

A. Voraussetzungen und Verfahren

1 Die Ehegatten können die Trennung unter den gleichen Voraussetzungen wie bei der Scheidung verlangen.

2 ...1

3 Das Recht, die Scheidung zu verlangen, wird durch das Trennungsurteil nicht berührt.


1 Aufgehoben durch Anhang 1 Ziff. II 3 der Zivilprozessordnung vom 19. Dez. 2008, mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 118 B. Trennungsfolgen

B. Trennungsfolgen

1 Mit der Trennung tritt von Gesetzes wegen Gütertrennung ein.

2 Im Übrigen finden die Bestimmungen über Massnahmen zum Schutz der ehelichen Gemeinschaft sinngemäss Anwendung.


  Dritter Abschnitt: Die Scheidungsfolgen

Art. 1191A. Name

A. Name

Der Ehegatte, der seinen Namen bei der Eheschliessung geändert hat, behält diesen Namen nach der Scheidung; er kann aber jederzeit gegenüber der Zivilstandsbeamtin oder dem Zivilstandsbeamten erklären, dass er wieder seinen Ledignamen tragen will.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 30. Sept. 2011 (Name und Bürgerrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 120 B. Güterrecht und Erbrecht

B. Güterrecht und Erbrecht

1 Für die güterrechtliche Auseinandersetzung gelten die Bestimmungen über das Güterrecht.

2 Geschiedene Ehegatten haben zueinander kein gesetzliches Erbrecht und können aus Verfügungen von Todes wegen, die sie vor der Rechtshängigkeit des Scheidungsverfahrens errichtet haben, keine Ansprüche erheben.

Art. 121 C. Wohnung der Familie

C. Wohnung der Familie

1 Ist ein Ehegatte wegen der Kinder oder aus anderen wichtigen Gründen auf die Wohnung der Familie angewiesen, so kann das Gericht ihm die Rechte und Pflichten aus dem Mietvertrag allein übertragen, sofern dies dem anderen billigerweise zugemutet werden kann.

2 Der bisherige Mieter haftet solidarisch für den Mietzins bis zum Zeitpunkt, in dem das Mietverhältnis gemäss Vertrag oder Gesetz endet oder beendet werden kann, höchstens aber während zweier Jahre; wird er für den Mietzins belangt, so kann er den bezahlten Betrag ratenweise in der Höhe des monatlichen Mietzinses mit den Unterhaltsbeiträgen, die er dem anderen Ehegatten schuldet, verrechnen.

3 Gehört die Wohnung der Familie einem Ehegatten, so kann das Gericht dem anderen unter den gleichen Voraussetzungen und gegen angemessene Entschädigung oder unter Anrechnung auf Unterhaltsbeiträge ein befristetes Wohnrecht einräumen. Wenn wichtige neue Tatsachen es erfordern, ist das Wohnrecht einzuschränken oder aufzuheben.

Art. 1221D. Berufliche Vorsorge / I. Grundsatz

D. Berufliche Vorsorge

I. Grundsatz

Die während der Ehe bis zum Zeitpunkt der Einleitung des Scheidungsverfahrens erworbenen Ansprüche aus der beruflichen Vorsorge werden bei der Scheidung ausgeglichen.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 19. Juni 2015 (Vorsorgeausgleich bei Scheidung), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).

Art. 1231D. Berufliche Vorsorge / II. Ausgleich bei Austrittsleistungen

II. Ausgleich bei Austrittsleistungen

1 Die erworbenen Austrittsleistungen samt Freizügigkeitsguthaben und Vorbezügen für Wohneigentum werden hälftig geteilt.

2 Absatz 1 ist nicht anwendbar auf Einmaleinlagen aus Eigengut nach Gesetz.

3 Die zu teilenden Austrittsleistungen berechnen sich nach den Artikeln 15–17 und 22a oder 22b des Freizügigkeitsgesetzes vom 17. Dezember 19932.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 19. Juni 2015 (Vorsorgeausgleich bei Scheidung), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).
2 SR 831.42

Art. 1241D. Berufliche Vorsorge / III. Ausgleich bei Invalidenrenten vor dem reglementarischen Rentenalter

III. Ausgleich bei Invalidenrenten vor dem reglementarischen Rentenalter

1 Bezieht ein Ehegatte im Zeitpunkt der Einleitung des Scheidungsverfahrens eine Invalidenrente vor dem reglementarischen Rentenalter, so gilt der Betrag, der ihm nach Artikel 2 Absatz 1ter des Freizügigkeitsgesetzes vom 17. Dezember 19932 nach Aufhebung der Invalidenrente zukommen würde, als Austrittsleistung.

2 Die Bestimmungen über den Ausgleich bei Austrittsleistungen gelten sinngemäss.

3 Der Bundesrat regelt, in welchen Fällen der Betrag nach Absatz 1 wegen einer Überentschädigungskürzung der Invalidenrente nicht für den Ausgleich verwendet werden kann.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 19. Juni 2015 (Vorsorgeausgleich bei Scheidung), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).
2 SR 831.42

Art. 124a1D. Berufliche Vorsorge / IV. Ausgleich bei Invalidenrenten nach dem reglementarischen Rentenalter und bei Altersrenten

IV. Ausgleich bei Invalidenrenten nach dem reglementarischen Rentenalter und bei Altersrenten

1 Bezieht ein Ehegatte im Zeitpunkt der Einleitung des Scheidungsverfahrens eine Invalidenrente nach dem reglementarischen Rentenalter oder eine Altersrente, so entscheidet das Gericht nach Ermessen über die Teilung der Rente. Es beachtet dabei insbesondere die Dauer der Ehe und die Vorsorgebedürfnisse beider Ehegatten.

2 Der dem berechtigten Ehegatten zugesprochene Rentenanteil wird in eine lebenslange Rente umgerechnet. Diese wird ihm von der Vorsorgeeinrichtung des verpflichteten Ehegatten ausgerichtet oder in seine Vorsorge übertragen.

3 Der Bundesrat regelt:

1.
die versicherungstechnische Umrechnung des Rentenanteils in eine lebenslange Rente;
2.
das Vorgehen in Fällen, in denen die Altersleistung aufgeschoben oder die Invalidenrente wegen Überentschädigung gekürzt ist.

1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 19. Juni 2015 (Vorsorgeausgleich bei Scheidung), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).

Art. 124b1D. Berufliche Vorsorge / V. Ausnahmen

V. Ausnahmen

1 Die Ehegatten können in einer Vereinbarung über die Scheidungsfolgen von der hälftigen Teilung abweichen oder auf den Vorsorgeausgleich verzichten, wenn eine angemessene Alters- und Invalidenvorsorge gewährleistet bleibt.

2 Das Gericht spricht dem berechtigten Ehegatten weniger als die Hälfte der Austrittsleistung zu oder verweigert die Teilung ganz, wenn wichtige Gründe vorliegen. Ein wichtiger Grund liegt insbesondere vor, wenn die hälftige Teilung unbillig wäre:

1.
aufgrund der güterrechtlichen Auseinandersetzung oder der wirtschaftlichen Verhältnisse nach der Scheidung;
2.
aufgrund der Vorsorgebedürfnisse, insbesondere unter Berücksichtigung des Altersunterschiedes zwischen den Ehegatten.

3 Das Gericht kann dem berechtigten Ehegatten mehr als die Hälfte der Austrittsleistung zusprechen, wenn er nach der Scheidung gemeinsame Kinder betreut und der verpflichtete Ehegatte weiterhin über eine angemessene Alters- und Invalidenvorsorge verfügt.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 19. Juni 2015 (Vorsorgeausgleich bei Scheidung), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).

Art. 124c1D. Berufliche Vorsorge / VI. Verrechnung gegenseitiger Ansprüche

VI. Verrechnung gegenseitiger Ansprüche

1 Gegenseitige Ansprüche der Ehegatten auf Austrittsleistungen oder auf Rentenanteile werden verrechnet. Die Verrechnung der Rentenansprüche findet vor der Umrechnung des dem berechtigten Ehegatten zugesprochenen Rentenanteils in eine lebenslange Rente statt.

2 Austrittsleistungen können mit Rentenanteilen nur dann verrechnet werden, wenn die Ehegatten und die Einrichtungen der beruflichen Vorsorge einverstanden sind.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 19. Juni 2015 (Vorsorgeausgleich bei Scheidung), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).

Art. 124d1D. Berufliche Vorsorge / VII. Unzumutbarkeit

VII. Unzumutbarkeit

Ist aufgrund einer Abwägung der Vorsorgebedürfnisse beider Ehegatten ein Ausgleich aus Mitteln der beruflichen Vorsorge nicht zumutbar, so schuldet der verpflichtete Ehegatte dem berechtigten Ehegatten eine Kapitalabfindung.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 19. Juni 2015 (Vorsorgeausgleich bei Scheidung), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).

Art. 124e1D. Berufliche Vorsorge / VIII. Unmöglichkeit

VIII. Unmöglichkeit

1 Ist ein Ausgleich aus Mitteln der beruflichen Vorsorge nicht möglich, so schuldet der verpflichtete Ehegatte dem berechtigten Ehegatten eine angemessene Entschädigung in Form einer Kapitalabfindung oder einer Rente.

2 Ein schweizerisches Urteil kann auf Begehren des verpflichteten Ehegatten abgeändert werden, wenn im Ausland bestehende Vorsorgeansprüche durch eine angemessene Entschädigung nach Absatz 1 ausgeglichen wurden und diese Vorsorgeansprüche danach durch eine für den ausländischen Vorsorgeschuldner verbindliche ausländische Entscheidung geteilt werden.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 19. Juni 2015 (Vorsorgeausgleich bei Scheidung), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).

Art. 125 E. Nachehelicher Unterhalt / I. Voraussetzungen

E. Nachehelicher Unterhalt

I. Voraussetzungen

1 Ist einem Ehegatten nicht zuzumuten, dass er für den ihm gebührenden Unterhalt unter Einschluss einer angemessenen Altersvorsorge selbst aufkommt, so hat ihm der andere einen angemessenen Beitrag zu leisten.

2 Beim Entscheid, ob ein Beitrag zu leisten sei und gegebenenfalls in welcher Höhe und wie lange, sind insbesondere zu berücksichtigen:

1.
die Aufgabenteilung während der Ehe;
2.
die Dauer der Ehe;
3.
die Lebensstellung während der Ehe;
4.
das Alter und die Gesundheit der Ehegatten;
5.
Einkommen und Vermögen der Ehegatten;
6.
der Umfang und die Dauer der von den Ehegatten noch zu leistenden Betreuung der Kinder;
7.
die berufliche Ausbildung und die Erwerbsaussichten der Ehegatten sowie der mutmassliche Aufwand für die berufliche Eingliederung der anspruchsberechtigten Person;
8.
die Anwartschaften aus der eidgenössischen Alters- und Hinterlassenenversicherung und aus der beruflichen oder einer anderen privaten oder staatlichen Vorsorge einschliesslich des voraussichtlichen Ergebnisses der Teilung der Austrittsleistungen.

3 Ein Beitrag kann ausnahmsweise versagt oder gekürzt werden, wenn er offensichtlich unbillig wäre, insbesondere weil die berechtigte Person:

1.
ihre Pflicht, zum Unterhalt der Familie beizutragen, grob verletzt hat;
2.
ihre Bedürftigkeit mutwillig herbeigeführt hat;
3.
gegen die verpflichtete Person oder eine dieser nahe verbundenen Person eine schwere Straftat begangen hat.
Art. 126 E. Nachehelicher Unterhalt / II. Modalitäten des Unterhaltsbeitrages

II. Modalitäten des Unterhaltsbeitrages

1 Das Gericht setzt als Unterhaltsbeitrag eine Rente fest und bestimmt den Beginn der Beitragspflicht.

2 Rechtfertigen es besondere Umstände, so kann anstelle einer Rente eine Abfindung festgesetzt werden.

3 Das Gericht kann den Unterhaltsbeitrag von Bedingungen abhängig machen.

Art. 127 E. Nachehelicher Unterhalt / III. Rente / 1. Besondere Vereinbarungen

III. Rente

1. Besondere Vereinbarungen

Die Ehegatten können in der Vereinbarung die Änderung der darin festgesetzten Rente ganz oder teilweise ausschliessen.

Art. 128 E. Nachehelicher Unterhalt / III. Rente / 2. Anpassung an die Teuerung

2. Anpassung an die Teuerung

Das Gericht kann anordnen, dass der Unterhaltsbeitrag sich bei bestimmten Veränderungen der Lebenskosten ohne weiteres erhöht oder vermindert.

Art. 129 E. Nachehelicher Unterhalt / III. Rente / 3. Abänderung durch Urteil

3. Abänderung durch Urteil

1 Bei erheblicher und dauernder Veränderung der Verhältnisse kann die Rente herabgesetzt, aufgehoben oder für eine bestimmte Zeit eingestellt werden; eine Verbesserung der Verhältnisse der berechtigten Person ist nur dann zu berücksichtigen, wenn im Scheidungsurteil eine den gebührenden Unterhalt deckende Rente festgesetzt werden konnte.

2 Die berechtigte Person kann für die Zukunft eine Anpassung der Rente an die Teuerung verlangen, wenn das Einkommen der verpflichteten Person nach der Scheidung unvorhergesehenerweise gestiegen ist.

3 Die berechtigte Person kann innerhalb von fünf Jahren seit der Scheidung die Festsetzung einer Rente oder deren Erhöhung verlangen, wenn im Urteil festgehalten worden ist, dass keine zur Deckung des gebührenden Unterhalts ausreichende Rente festgesetzt werden konnte, die wirtschaftlichen Verhältnisse der verpflichteten Person sich aber entsprechend verbessert haben.

Art. 130 E. Nachehelicher Unterhalt / III. Rente / 4. Erlöschen von Gesetzes wegen

4. Erlöschen von Gesetzes wegen

1 Die Beitragspflicht erlischt mit dem Tod der berechtigten oder der verpflichteten Person.

2 Vorbehältlich einer anderen Vereinbarung entfällt sie auch bei Wiederverheiratung der berechtigten Person.

Art. 1311E. Nachehelicher Unterhalt / IV. Vollstreckung / 1. Inkassohilfe

IV. Vollstreckung

1. Inkassohilfe

1 Erfüllt die verpflichtete Person die Unterhaltspflicht nicht, so hilft eine vom kantonalen Recht bezeichnete Fachstelle der berechtigten Person auf Gesuch hin bei der Vollstreckung des Unterhaltsanspruchs in geeigneter Weise und in der Regel unentgeltlich.

2 Der Bundesrat legt die Leistungen der Inkassohilfe fest.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 20. März 2015 (Kindesunterhalt), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 131a1E. Nachehelicher Unterhalt / IV. Vollstreckung / 2. Vorschüsse

2. Vorschüsse

1 Dem öffentlichen Recht bleibt vorbehalten, die Ausrichtung von Vorschüssen zu regeln, wenn die verpflichtete Person ihrer Unterhaltspflicht nicht nachkommt.

2 Soweit das Gemeinwesen für den Unterhalt der berechtigten Person aufkommt, geht der Unterhaltsanspruch mit allen Rechten auf das Gemeinwesen über.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 20. März 2015 (Kindesunterhalt), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 132 E. Nachehelicher Unterhalt / IV. Vollstreckung / 3. Anweisungen an die Schuldner und Sicherstellung

3. Anweisungen an die Schuldner und Sicherstellung1

1 Vernachlässigt die verpflichtete Person die Erfüllung der Unterhaltspflicht, so kann das Gericht ihre Schuldner anweisen, die Zahlungen ganz oder teilweise an die berechtigte Person zu leisten.

2 Vernachlässigt die verpflichtete Person beharrlich die Erfüllung der Unterhaltspflicht oder ist anzunehmen, dass sie Anstalten zur Flucht trifft oder ihr Vermögen verschleudert oder beiseite schafft, so kann sie verpflichtet werden, für die künftigen Unterhaltsbeiträge angemessene Sicherheit zu leisten.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 20. März 2015 (Kindesunterhalt), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 1331F. Kinder / I. Elternrechte und -pflichten

F. Kinder

I. Elternrechte und -pflichten

1 Das Gericht regelt die Elternrechte und -pflichten nach den Bestimmungen über die Wirkungen des Kindesverhältnisses. Insbesondere regelt es:

1.
die elterliche Sorge;
2.
die Obhut;
3.
den persönlichen Verkehr (Art. 273) oder die Betreuungsanteile; und
4.
den Unterhaltsbeitrag.

2 Es beachtet alle für das Kindeswohl wichtigen Umstände. Es berücksichtigt einen gemeinsamen Antrag der Eltern und, soweit tunlich, die Meinung des Kindes.

3 Es kann den Unterhaltsbeitrag über den Eintritt der Volljährigkeit hinaus festlegen.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 21. Juni 2013 (Elterliche Sorge), in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 134 F. Kinder / II. Veränderung der Verhältnisse

II. Veränderung der Verhältnisse

1 Auf Begehren eines Elternteils, des Kindes oder der Kindesschutzbehörde ist die Zuteilung der elterlichen Sorge neu zu regeln, wenn dies wegen wesentlicher Veränderung der Verhältnisse zum Wohl des Kindes geboten ist.

2 Die Voraussetzungen für eine Änderung der übrigen Elternrechte und -pflichten richten sich nach den Bestimmungen über die Wirkungen des Kindesverhältnisses.1

3 Sind sich die Eltern einig, so ist die Kindesschutzbehörde für die Neuregelung der elterlichen Sorge, der Obhut und die Genehmigung eines Unterhaltsvertrages zuständig. In den übrigen Fällen entscheidet das für die Abänderung des Scheidungsurteils zuständige Gericht.2

4 Hat das Gericht über die Änderung der elterlichen Sorge, der Obhut oder des Unterhaltsbeitrages für das minderjährige Kind zu befinden, so regelt es nötigenfalls auch den persönlichen Verkehr oder die Betreuungsanteile neu; in den andern Fällen entscheidet die Kindesschutzbehörde über die Änderung des persönlichen Verkehrs oder der Betreuungsanteile.3


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 21. Juni 2013 (Elterliche Sorge), in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 21. Juni 2013 (Elterliche Sorge), in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).
3 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 21. Juni 2013 (Elterliche Sorge), in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 1351491

1 Aufgehoben durch Anhang 1 Ziff. II 3 der Zivilprozessordnung vom 19. Dez. 2008, mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 150–158

Aufgehoben


  Fünfter Titel:3  Die Wirkungen der Ehe im Allgemeinen

Art. 159 A. Eheliche Gemeinschaft; Rechte und Pflichten der Ehegatten

A. Eheliche Gemeinschaft; Rechte und Pflichten der Ehegatten

1 Durch die Trauung werden die Ehegatten zur ehelichen Gemeinschaft verbunden.

2 Sie verpflichten sich gegenseitig, das Wohl der Gemeinschaft in einträchtigem Zusammenwirken zu wahren und für die Kinder gemeinsam zu sorgen.

3 Sie schulden einander Treue und Beistand.

Art. 1601B. Name

B. Name

1 Jeder Ehegatte behält seinen Namen.

2 Die Brautleute können aber gegenüber der Zivilstandsbeamtin oder dem Zivilstandsbeamten erklären, dass sie den Ledignamen der Braut oder des Bräutigams als gemeinsamen Familiennamen tragen wollen.

3 Behalten die Brautleute ihren Namen, so bestimmen sie, welchen ihrer Ledignamen ihre Kinder tragen sollen. In begründeten Fällen kann die Zivilstandsbeamtin oder der Zivilstandsbeamte die Brautleute von dieser Pflicht befreien.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 30. Sept. 2011 (Name und Bürgerrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 1611C. Bürgerrecht

C. Bürgerrecht

Jeder Ehegatte behält sein Kantons- und Gemeindebürgerrecht.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 30. Sept. 2011 (Name und Bürgerrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 162 D. Eheliche Wohnung

D. Eheliche Wohnung

Die Ehegatten bestimmen gemeinsam die eheliche Wohnung.

Art. 163 E. Unterhalt der Familie / I. Im Allgemeinen

E. Unterhalt der Familie

I. Im Allgemeinen

1 Die Ehegatten sorgen gemeinsam, ein jeder nach seinen Kräften, für den gebührenden Unterhalt der Familie.

2 Sie verständigen sich über den Beitrag, den jeder von ihnen leistet, namentlich durch Geldzahlungen, Besorgen des Haushaltes, Betreuen der Kinder oder durch Mithilfe im Beruf oder Gewerbe des andern.

3 Dabei berücksichtigen sie die Bedürfnisse der ehelichen Gemeinschaft und ihre persönlichen Umstände.

Art. 164 E. Unterhalt der Familie / II. Betrag zur freien Verfügung

II. Betrag zur freien Verfügung

1 Der Ehegatte, der den Haushalt besorgt, die Kinder betreut oder dem andern im Beruf oder Gewerbe hilft, hat Anspruch darauf, dass der andere ihm regelmässig einen angemessenen Betrag zur freien Verfügung ausrichtet.

2 Bei der Festsetzung des Betrages sind eigene Einkünfte des berechtigten Ehegatten und eine verantwortungsbewusste Vorsorge für Familie, Beruf oder Gewerbe zu berücksichtigen.

Art. 165 E. Unterhalt der Familie / III. Ausserordentliche Beiträge eines Ehegatten

III. Ausserordentliche Beiträge eines Ehegatten

1 Hat ein Ehegatte im Beruf oder Gewerbe des andern erheblich mehr mitgearbeitet, als sein Beitrag an den Unterhalt der Familie verlangt, so hat er dafür Anspruch auf angemessene Entschädigung.

2 Dies gilt auch, wenn ein Ehegatte aus seinem Einkommen oder Vermögen an den Unterhalt der Familie bedeutend mehr beigetragen hat, als er verpflichtet war.

3 Ein Ehegatte kann aber keine Entschädigung fordern, wenn er seinen ausserordentlichen Beitrag aufgrund eines Arbeits—, Darlehens- oder Gesellschaftsvertrages oder eines andern Rechtsverhältnisses geleistet hat.

Art. 166 F. Vertretung der ehelichen Gemeinschaft

F. Vertretung der ehelichen Gemeinschaft

1 Jeder Ehegatte vertritt während des Zusammenlebens die eheliche Gemeinschaft für die laufenden Bedürfnisse der Familie.

2 Für die übrigen Bedürfnisse der Familie kann ein Ehegatte die eheliche Gemeinschaft nur vertreten:

1.
wenn er vom andern oder vom Gericht dazu ermächtigt worden ist;
2.
wenn das Interesse der ehelichen Gemeinschaft keinen Aufschub des Geschäftes duldet und der andere Ehegatte wegen Krankheit, Abwesenheit oder ähnlichen Gründen nicht zustimmen kann.

3 Jeder Ehegatte verpflichtet sich durch seine Handlungen persönlich und, soweit diese nicht für Dritte erkennbar über die Vertretungsbefugnis hinausgehen, solidarisch auch den andern Ehegatten.

Art. 167 G. Beruf und Gewerbe der Ehegatten

G. Beruf und Gewerbe der Ehegatten

Bei der Wahl und Ausübung seines Berufes oder Gewerbes nimmt jeder Ehegatte auf den andern und das Wohl der ehelichen Gemeinschaft Rücksicht.

Art. 168 H. Rechtsgeschäfte der Ehegatten / I. Im Allgemeinen

H. Rechtsgeschäfte der Ehegatten

I. Im Allgemeinen

Jeder Ehegatte kann mit dem andern oder mit Dritten Rechtsgeschäfte abschliessen, sofern das Gesetz nichts anderes bestimmt.

Art. 169 H. Rechtsgeschäfte der Ehegatten / II. Wohnung der Familie

II. Wohnung der Familie

1 Ein Ehegatte kann nur mit der ausdrücklichen Zustimmung des andern einen Mietvertrag kündigen, das Haus oder die Wohnung der Familie veräussern oder durch andere Rechtsgeschäfte die Rechte an den Wohnräumen der Familie beschränken.

2 Kann der Ehegatte diese Zustimmung nicht einholen oder wird sie ihm ohne triftigen Grund verweigert, so kann er das Gericht anrufen.

Art. 170 J. Auskunftspflicht

J. Auskunftspflicht

1 Jeder Ehegatte kann vom andern Auskunft über dessen Einkommen, Vermögen und Schulden verlangen.

2 Auf sein Begehren kann das Gericht den andern Ehegatten oder Dritte verpflichten, die erforderlichen Auskünfte zu erteilen und die notwendigen Urkunden vorzulegen.

3 Vorbehalten bleibt das Berufsgeheimnis der Rechtsanwälte, Notare, Ärzte, Geistlichen und ihrer Hilfspersonen.

Art. 171 K. Schutz der ehelichen Gemeinschaft / I. Beratungsstellen

K. Schutz der ehelichen Gemeinschaft

I. Beratungsstellen

Die Kantone sorgen dafür, dass sich die Ehegatten bei Eheschwierigkeiten gemeinsam oder einzeln an Ehe- oder Familienberatungsstellen wenden können.

Art. 172 K. Schutz der ehelichen Gemeinschaft / II. Gerichtliche Massnahmen / 1. Im Allgemeinen

II. Gerichtliche Massnahmen

1. Im Allgemeinen

1 Erfüllt ein Ehegatte seine Pflichten gegenüber der Familie nicht oder sind die Ehegatten in einer für die eheliche Gemeinschaft wichtigen Angelegenheit uneinig, so können sie gemeinsam oder einzeln das Gericht um Vermittlung anrufen.

2 Das Gericht mahnt die Ehegatten an ihre Pflichten und versucht, sie zu versöhnen; es kann mit ihrem Einverständnis Sachverständige beiziehen oder sie an eine Ehe- oder Familienberatungsstelle weisen.

3 Wenn nötig, trifft das Gericht auf Begehren eines Ehegatten die vom Gesetz vorgesehenen Massnahmen. Die Bestimmung über den Schutz der Persönlichkeit gegen Gewalt, Drohungen oder Nachstellungen ist sinngemäss anwendbar.1


1 Zweiter Satz eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 23. Juni 2006 (Schutz der Persönlichkeit gegen Gewalt, Drohungen oder Nachstellungen), in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2007 (AS 2007 137; BBl 2005 6871 6897).

Art. 173 K. Schutz der ehelichen Gemeinschaft / II. Gerichtliche Massnahmen / 2. Während des Zusammenlebens / a. Geldleistungen

2. Während des Zusammenlebens

a. Geldleistungen

1 Auf Begehren eines Ehegatten setzt das Gericht die Geldbeiträge an den Unterhalt der Familie fest.

2 Ebenso setzt es auf Begehren eines Ehegatten den Betrag für den Ehegatten fest, der den Haushalt besorgt, die Kinder betreut oder dem andern im Beruf oder Gewerbe hilft.

3 Die Leistungen können für die Zukunft und für das Jahr vor Einreichung des Begehrens gefordert werden.

Art. 174 K. Schutz der ehelichen Gemeinschaft / II. Gerichtliche Massnahmen / 2. Während des Zusammenlebens / b. Entzug der Vertretungsbefugnis

b. Entzug der Vertretungsbefugnis

1 Überschreitet ein Ehegatte seine Befugnis zur Vertretung der ehelichen Gemeinschaft oder erweist er sich als unfähig, sie auszuüben, so kann ihm das Gericht auf Begehren des andern die Vertretungsbefugnis ganz oder teilweise entziehen.

2 Der Ehegatte, der das Begehren stellt, darf Dritten den Entzug nur durch persönliche Mitteilung bekannt geben.

3 Gutgläubigen Dritten gegenüber ist der Entzug nur wirksam, wenn er auf Anordnung des Gerichts veröffentlicht worden ist.

Art. 175 K. Schutz der ehelichen Gemeinschaft / II. Gerichtliche Massnahmen / 3. Aufhebung des gemeinsamen Haushaltes / a. Gründe

3. Aufhebung des gemeinsamen Haushaltes

a. Gründe

Ein Ehegatte ist berechtigt, den gemeinsamen Haushalt für solange aufzuheben, als seine Persönlichkeit, seine wirtschaftliche Sicherheit oder das Wohl der Familie durch das Zusammenleben ernstlich gefährdet ist.

Art. 176 K. Schutz der ehelichen Gemeinschaft / II. Gerichtliche Massnahmen / 3. Aufhebung des gemeinsamen Haushaltes / b. Regelung des Getrenntlebens

b. Regelung des Getrenntlebens

1 Ist die Aufhebung des gemeinsamen Haushaltes begründet, so muss das Gericht auf Begehren eines Ehegatten:

1.1
die Unterhaltsbeiträge an die Kinder und den Unterhaltsbeitrag an den Ehegatten festlegen;
2.
die Benützung der Wohnung und des Hausrates regeln;
3.
die Gütertrennung anordnen, wenn es die Umstände rechtfertigen.

2 Diese Begehren kann ein Ehegatte auch stellen, wenn das Zusammenleben unmöglich ist, namentlich weil der andere es grundlos ablehnt.

3 Haben die Ehegatten minderjährige Kinder, so trifft das Gericht nach den Bestimmungen über die Wirkungen des Kindesverhältnisses die nötigen Massnahmen.2


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 20. März 2015 (Kindesunterhalt), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 176a1K. Schutz der ehelichen Gemeinschaft / II. Gerichtliche Massnahmen / 4. Vollstreckung / a. Inkassohilfe und Vorschüsse

4. Vollstreckung

a. Inkassohilfe und Vorschüsse

Die Bestimmungen über die Inkassohilfe und die Vorschüsse bei Scheidung und bei den Wirkungen des Kindesverhältnisses finden Anwendung.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 20. März 2015 (Kindesunterhalt), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 177 K. Schutz der ehelichen Gemeinschaft / II. Gerichtliche Massnahmen / 4. Vollstreckung / b. Anweisungen an die Schuldner

b. Anweisungen an die Schuldner1

Erfüllt ein Ehegatte seine Unterhaltspflicht gegenüber der Familie nicht, so kann das Gericht dessen Schuldner anweisen, ihre Zahlungen ganz oder teilweise dem andern Ehegatten zu leisten.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 20. März 2015 (Kindesunterhalt), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 178 K. Schutz der ehelichen Gemeinschaft / II. Gerichtliche Massnahmen / 5. Beschränkungen der Verfügungsbefugnis

5. Beschränkungen der Verfügungsbefugnis

1 Soweit es die Sicherung der wirtschaftlichen Grundlagen der Familie oder die Erfüllung einer vermögensrechtlichen Verpflichtung aus der ehelichen Gemeinschaft erfordert, kann das Gericht auf Begehren eines Ehegatten die Verfügung über bestimmte Vermögenswerte von dessen Zustimmung abhängig machen.

2 Das Gericht trifft die geeigneten sichernden Massnahmen.

3 Untersagt es einem Ehegatten, über ein Grundstück zu verfügen, lässt es dies von Amtes wegen im Grundbuch anmerken.

Art. 1791K. Schutz der ehelichen Gemeinschaft / II. Gerichtliche Massnahmen / 6. Änderung der Verhältnisse

6. Änderung der Verhältnisse2

1 Ändern sich die Verhältnisse, so passt das Gericht auf Begehren eines Ehegatten die Massnahmen an oder hebt sie auf, wenn ihr Grund weggefallen ist. Die Bestimmungen über die Änderung der Verhältnisse bei Scheidung gelten sinngemäss.3

2 Nehmen die Ehegatten das Zusammenleben wieder auf, so fallen die für das Getrenntleben angeordneten Massnahmen mit Ausnahme der Gütertrennung und der Kindesschutzmassnahmen dahin.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 4 des BG vom 26. Juni 1998, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 21. Juni 2013 (Elterliche Sorge), in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).
3 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 21. Juni 2013 (Elterliche Sorge), in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 1801

1 Aufgehoben durch Anhang Ziff. 2 des Gerichtsstandsgesetzes vom 24. März 2000, mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).


  Sechster Titel:4  Das Güterrecht der Ehegatten

  Erster Abschnitt: Allgemeine Vorschriften

Art. 181 A. Ordentlicher Güterstand

A. Ordentlicher Güterstand

Die Ehegatten unterstehen den Vorschriften über die Errungenschaftsbeteiligung, sofern sie nicht durch Ehevertrag etwas anderes vereinbaren oder der ausserordentliche Güterstand eingetreten ist.

Art. 182 B. Ehevertrag / I. Inhalt des Vertrages

B. Ehevertrag

I. Inhalt des Vertrages

1 Ein Ehevertrag kann vor oder nach der Heirat geschlossen werden.

2 Die Brautleute oder Ehegatten können ihren Güterstand nur innerhalb der gesetzlichen Schranken wählen, aufheben oder ändern.

Art. 183 B. Ehevertrag / II. Vertragsfähigkeit

II. Vertragsfähigkeit

1 Wer einen Ehevertrag schliessen will, muss urteilsfähig sein.

2 Minderjährige sowie volljährige Personen unter einer Beistandschaft, die den Abschluss eines Ehevertrags umfasst, bedürfen der Zustimmung ihres gesetzlichen Vertreters.1


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 184 B. Ehevertrag / III. Form des Vertrages

III. Form des Vertrages

Der Ehevertrag muss öffentlich beurkundet und von den vertragschliessenden Personen sowie gegebenenfalls vom gesetzlichen Vertreter unterzeichnet werden.

Art. 185 C. Ausserordentlicher Güterstand / I. Auf Begehren eines Ehegatten / 1. Anordnung

C. Ausserordentlicher Güterstand

I. Auf Begehren eines Ehegatten

1. Anordnung

1 Die Gütertrennung wird auf Begehren eines Ehegatten vom Gericht angeordnet, wenn ein wichtiger Grund dafür vorliegt.

2 Ein wichtiger Grund liegt namentlich vor:

1.
wenn der andere Ehegatte überschuldet ist oder sein Anteil am Gesamtgut gepfändet wird;
2.
wenn der andere Ehegatte die Interessen des Gesuchstellers oder der Gemeinschaft gefährdet;
3.
wenn der andere Ehegatte in ungerechtfertigter Weise die erforderliche Zustimmung zu einer Verfügung über das Gesamtgut verweigert;
4.
wenn der andere Ehegatte dem Gesuchsteller die Auskunft über sein Einkommen, sein Vermögen und seine Schulden oder über das Gesamtgut verweigert;
5.
wenn der andere Ehegatte dauernd urteilsunfähig ist.

3 Ist ein Ehegatte dauernd urteilsunfähig, so kann sein gesetzlicher Vertreter auch aus diesem Grund die Anordnung der Gütertrennung verlangen.

Art. 1861C. Ausserordentlicher Güterstand / I. Auf Begehren eines Ehegatten / 2. ...

2. ...


1 Aufgehoben durch Anhang Ziff. 2 des Gerichtsstandsgesetzes vom 24. März 2000, mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).

Art. 187 C. Ausserordentlicher Güterstand / I. Auf Begehren eines Ehegatten / 3. Aufhebung

3. Aufhebung

1 Die Ehegatten können jederzeit durch Ehevertrag wieder ihren früheren oder einen andern Güterstand vereinbaren.

2 Ist der Grund der Gütertrennung weggefallen, so kann das Gericht auf Begehren eines Ehegatten die Wiederherstellung des früheren Güterstandes anordnen.

Art. 188 C. Ausserordentlicher Güterstand / II. Bei Konkurs und Pfändung / 1. Bei Konkurs

II. Bei Konkurs und Pfändung

1. Bei Konkurs

Wird über einen Ehegatten, der in Gütergemeinschaft lebt, der Konkurs eröffnet, so tritt von Gesetzes wegen Gütertrennung ein.

Art. 189 C. Ausserordentlicher Güterstand / II. Bei Konkurs und Pfändung / 2. Bei Pfändung / a. Anordnung

2. Bei Pfändung

a. Anordnung

Ist ein Ehegatte, der in Gütergemeinschaft lebt, für eine Eigenschuld betrieben und sein Anteil am Gesamtgut gepfändet worden, so kann die Aufsichtsbehörde in Betreibungssachen beim Gericht die Anordnung der Gütertrennung verlangen.

Art. 190 C. Ausserordentlicher Güterstand / II. Bei Konkurs und Pfändung / 2. Bei Pfändung / b. Begehren

b. Begehren1

1 Das Begehren richtet sich gegen beide Ehegatten.

2 ...2


1 Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 2 des Gerichtsstandsgesetzes vom 24. März 2000, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).
2 Aufgehoben durch Anhang Ziff. 2 des Gerichtsstandsgesetzes vom 24. März 2000, mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).

Art. 191 C. Ausserordentlicher Güterstand / II. Bei Konkurs und Pfändung / 3. Aufhebung

3. Aufhebung

1 Sind die Gläubiger befriedigt, so kann das Gericht auf Begehren eines Ehegatten die Wiederherstellung der Gütergemeinschaft anordnen.

2 Die Ehegatten können durch Ehevertrag Errungenschaftsbeteiligung vereinbaren.

Art. 192 C. Ausserordentlicher Güterstand / III. Güterrechtliche Auseinandersetzung

III. Güterrechtliche Auseinandersetzung

Tritt Gütertrennung ein, so gelten für die güterrechtliche Auseinandersetzung die Bestimmungen des bisherigen Güterstandes, sofern das Gesetz nichts anderes bestimmt.

Art. 193 D. Schutz der Gläubiger

D. Schutz der Gläubiger

1 Durch Begründung oder Änderung des Güterstandes oder durch güterrechtliche Auseinandersetzungen kann ein Vermögen, aus dem bis anhin die Gläubiger eines Ehegatten oder der Gemeinschaft Befriedigung verlangen konnten, dieser Haftung nicht entzogen werden.

2 Ist ein solches Vermögen auf einen Ehegatten übergegangen, so hat er die Schulden zu bezahlen, kann sich aber von dieser Haftung so weit befreien, als er nachweist, dass das empfangene Vermögen hiezu nicht ausreicht.

Art. 1941E. ...

E. ...


1 Aufgehoben durch Anhang Ziff. 2 des Gerichtsstandsgesetzes vom 24. März 2000, mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).

Art. 195 F. Verwaltung des Vermögens eines Ehegatten durch den andern

F. Verwaltung des Vermögens eines Ehegatten durch den andern

1 Hat ein Ehegatte dem andern ausdrücklich oder stillschweigend die Verwaltung seines Vermögens überlassen, so gelten die Bestimmungen über den Auftrag, sofern nichts anderes vereinbart ist.

2 Die Bestimmungen über die Tilgung von Schulden zwischen Ehegatten bleiben vorbehalten.

Art. 195a G. Inventar

G. Inventar

1 Jeder Ehegatte kann jederzeit vom andern verlangen, dass er bei der Aufnahme eines Inventars ihrer Vermögenswerte mit öffentlicher Urkunde mitwirkt.

2 Ein solches Inventar wird als richtig vermutet, wenn es binnen eines Jahres seit Einbringen der Vermögenswerte errichtet wurde.


  Zweiter Abschnitt: Der ordentliche Güterstand der Errungenschaftsbeteiligung

Art. 196 A. Eigentumsverhältnisse / I. Zusammensetzung

A. Eigentumsverhältnisse

I. Zusammensetzung

Der Güterstand der Errungenschaftsbeteiligung umfasst die Errungenschaft und das Eigengut jedes Ehegatten.

Art. 197 A. Eigentumsverhältnisse / II. Errungenschaft

II. Errungenschaft

1 Errungenschaft sind die Vermögenswerte, die ein Ehegatte während der Dauer des Güterstandes entgeltlich erwirbt.

2 Die Errungenschaft eines Ehegatten umfasst insbesondere:

1.
seinen Arbeitserwerb;
2.
die Leistungen von Personalfürsorgeeinrichtungen, Sozialversicherungen und Sozialfürsorgeeinrichtungen;
3.
die Entschädigungen wegen Arbeitsunfähigkeit;
4.
die Erträge seines Eigengutes;
5.
Ersatzanschaffungen für Errungenschaft.
Art. 198 A. Eigentumsverhältnisse / III. Eigengut / 1. Nach Gesetz

III. Eigengut

1. Nach Gesetz

Eigengut sind von Gesetzes wegen:

1.
die Gegenstände, die einem Ehegatten ausschliesslich zum persönlichen Gebrauch dienen;
2.
die Vermögenswerte, die einem Ehegatten zu Beginn des Güterstandes gehören oder ihm später durch Erbgang oder sonstwie unentgeltlich zufallen;
3.
Genugtuungsansprüche;
4.
Ersatzanschaffungen für Eigengut.
Art. 199 A. Eigentumsverhältnisse / III. Eigengut / 2. Nach Ehevertrag

2. Nach Ehevertrag

1 Die Ehegatten können durch Ehevertrag Vermögenswerte der Errungenschaft, die für die Ausübung eines Berufes oder den Betrieb eines Gewerbes bestimmt sind, zu Eigengut erklären.

2 Überdies können die Ehegatten durch Ehevertrag vereinbaren, dass Erträge aus dem Eigengut nicht in die Errungenschaft fallen.

Art. 200 A. Eigentumsverhältnisse / IV. Beweis

IV. Beweis

1 Wer behauptet, ein bestimmter Vermögenswert sei Eigentum des einen oder andern Ehegatten, muss dies beweisen.

2 Kann dieser Beweis nicht erbracht werden, so wird Miteigentum beider Ehegatten angenommen.

3 Alles Vermögen eines Ehegatten gilt bis zum Beweis des Gegenteils als Errungenschaft.

Art. 201 B. Verwaltung, Nutzung und Verfügung

B. Verwaltung, Nutzung und Verfügung

1 Innerhalb der gesetzlichen Schranken verwaltet und nutzt jeder Ehegatte seine Errungenschaft und sein Eigengut und verfügt darüber.

2 Steht ein Vermögenswert im Miteigentum beider Ehegatten, so kann kein Ehegatte ohne Zustimmung des andern über seinen Anteil verfügen, sofern nichts anderes vereinbart ist.

Art. 202 C. Haftung gegenüber Dritten

C. Haftung gegenüber Dritten

Jeder Ehegatte haftet für seine Schulden mit seinem gesamten Vermögen.

Art. 203 D. Schulden zwischen Ehegatten

D. Schulden zwischen Ehegatten

1 Der Güterstand hat keinen Einfluss auf die Fälligkeit von Schulden zwischen Ehegatten.

2 Bereitet indessen die Zahlung von Geldschulden oder die Erstattung geschuldeter Sachen dem verpflichteten Ehegatten ernstliche Schwierigkeiten, welche die eheliche Gemeinschaft gefährden, so kann er verlangen, dass ihm Fristen eingeräumt werden; die Forderung ist sicherzustellen, wenn es die Umstände rechtfertigen.

Art. 204 E. Auflösung des Güterstandes und Auseinandersetzung / I. Zeitpunkt der Auflösung

E. Auflösung des Güterstandes und Auseinandersetzung

I. Zeitpunkt der Auflösung

1 Der Güterstand wird mit dem Tod eines Ehegatten oder mit der Vereinbarung eines andern Güterstandes aufgelöst.

2 Bei Scheidung, Trennung, Ungültigerklärung der Ehe oder gerichtlicher Anordnung der Gütertrennung wird die Auflösung des Güterstandes auf den Tag zurückbezogen, an dem das Begehren eingereicht worden ist.

Art. 205 E. Auflösung des Güterstandes und Auseinandersetzung / II. Rücknahme von Vermögenswerten und Regelung der Schulden / 1. Im Allgemeinen

II. Rücknahme von Vermögenswerten und Regelung der Schulden

1. Im Allgemeinen

1 Jeder Ehegatte nimmt seine Vermögenswerte zurück, die sich im Besitz des andern Ehegatten befinden.

2 Steht ein Vermögenswert im Miteigentum und weist ein Ehegatte ein überwiegendes Interesse nach, so kann er neben den übrigen gesetzlichen Massnahmen verlangen, dass ihm dieser Vermögenswert gegen Entschädigung des andern Ehegatten ungeteilt zugewiesen wird.

3 Die Ehegatten regeln ihre gegenseitigen Schulden.

Art. 206 E. Auflösung des Güterstandes und Auseinandersetzung / II. Rücknahme von Vermögenswerten und Regelung der Schulden / 2. Mehrwertanteil des Ehegatten

2. Mehrwertanteil des Ehegatten

1 Hat ein Ehegatte zum Erwerb, zur Verbesserung oder zur Erhaltung von Vermögensgegenständen des andern ohne entsprechende Gegenleistung beigetragen und besteht im Zeitpunkt der Auseinandersetzung ein Mehrwert, so entspricht seine Forderung dem Anteil seines Beitrages und wird nach dem gegenwärtigen Wert der Vermögensgegenstände berechnet; ist dagegen ein Minderwert eingetreten, so entspricht die Forderung dem ursprünglichen Beitrag.

2 Ist einer dieser Vermögensgegenstände vorher veräussert worden, so berechnet sich die Forderung nach dem bei der Veräusserung erzielten Erlös und wird sofort fällig.

3 Die Ehegatten können durch schriftliche Vereinbarung den Mehrwertanteil ausschliessen oder ändern.

Art. 207 E. Auflösung des Güterstandes und Auseinandersetzung / III. Berechnung des Vorschlages jedes Ehegatten / 1. Ausscheidung der Errungenschaft und des Eigengutes

III. Berechnung des Vorschlages jedes Ehegatten

1. Ausscheidung der Errungenschaft und des Eigengutes

1 Errungenschaft und Eigengut jedes Ehegatten werden nach ihrem Bestand im Zeitpunkt der Auflösung des Güterstandes ausgeschieden.

2 Die Kapitalleistung, die ein Ehegatte von einer Vorsorgeeinrichtung oder wegen Arbeitsunfähigkeit erhalten hat, wird im Betrag des Kapitalwertes der Rente, die dem Ehegatten bei Auflösung des Güterstandes zustünde, dem Eigengut zugerechnet.

Art. 208 E. Auflösung des Güterstandes und Auseinandersetzung / III. Berechnung des Vorschlages jedes Ehegatten / 2. Hinzurechnung

2. Hinzurechnung

1 Zur Errungenschaft hinzugerechnet werden:

1.
unentgeltliche Zuwendungen, die ein Ehegatte während der letzten fünf Jahre vor Auflösung des Güterstandes ohne Zustimmung des andern Ehegatten gemacht hat, ausgenommen die üblichen Gelegenheitsgeschenke;
2.
Vermögensentäusserungen, die ein Ehegatte während der Dauer des Güterstandes vorgenommen hat, um den Beteiligungsanspruch des andern zu schmälern.

2 ...1


1 Aufgehoben durch Anhang 1 Ziff. II 3 der Zivilprozessordnung vom 19. Dez. 2008, mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 209 E. Auflösung des Güterstandes und Auseinandersetzung / III. Berechnung des Vorschlages jedes Ehegatten / 3. Ersatzforderungen zwischen Errungenschaft und Eigengut

3. Ersatzforderungen zwischen Errungenschaft und Eigengut

1 Sind Schulden der Errungenschaft aus dem Eigengut oder Schulden des Eigengutes aus der Errungenschaft eines Ehegatten bezahlt worden, so besteht bei der güterrechtlichen Auseinandersetzung eine Ersatzforderung.

2 Eine Schuld belastet die Vermögensmasse, mit welcher sie sachlich zusammenhängt, im Zweifel aber die Errungenschaft.

3 Haben Mittel der einen Vermögensmasse zum Erwerb, zur Verbesserung oder zur Erhaltung von Vermögensgegenständen der andern beigetragen und ist ein Mehr- oder ein Minderwert eingetreten, so entspricht die Ersatzforderung dem Anteil des Beitrages und wird nach dem Wert der Vermögensgegenstände im Zeitpunkt der Auseinandersetzung oder der Veräusserung berechnet.

Art. 210 E. Auflösung des Güterstandes und Auseinandersetzung / III. Berechnung des Vorschlages jedes Ehegatten / 4. Vorschlag

4. Vorschlag

1 Was vom Gesamtwert der Errungenschaft, einschliesslich der hinzugerechneten Vermögenswerte und der Ersatzforderungen, nach Abzug der auf ihr lastenden Schulden verbleibt, bildet den Vorschlag.

2 Ein Rückschlag wird nicht berücksichtigt.

Art. 211 E. Auflösung des Güterstandes und Auseinandersetzung / IV. Wertbestimmung / 1. Verkehrswert

IV. Wertbestimmung

1. Verkehrswert

Bei der güterrechtlichen Auseinandersetzung sind die Vermögensgegenstände zu ihrem Verkehrswert einzusetzen.

Art. 212 E. Auflösung des Güterstandes und Auseinandersetzung / IV. Wertbestimmung / 2. Ertragswert / a. Im Allgemeinen

2. Ertragswert

a. Im Allgemeinen

1 Ein landwirtschaftliches Gewerbe, das ein Ehegatte als Eigentümer selber weiterbewirtschaftet oder für das der überlebende Ehegatte oder ein Nachkomme begründet Anspruch auf ungeteilte Zuweisung erhebt, ist bei Berechnung des Mehrwertanteils und der Beteiligungsforderung zum Ertragswert einzusetzen.

2 Der Eigentümer des landwirtschaftlichen Gewerbes oder seine Erben können gegenüber dem andern Ehegatten als Mehrwertanteil oder als Beteiligungsforderung nur den Betrag geltend machen, den sie bei Anrechnung des Gewerbes zum Verkehrswert erhielten.

3 Die erbrechtlichen Bestimmungen über die Bewertung und über den Anteil der Miterben am Gewinn gelten sinngemäss.

Art. 213 E. Auflösung des Güterstandes und Auseinandersetzung / IV. Wertbestimmung / 2. Ertragswert / b. Besondere Umstände

b. Besondere Umstände

1 Der Anrechnungswert kann angemessen erhöht werden, wenn besondere Umstände es rechtfertigen.

2 Als besondere Umstände gelten insbesondere die Unterhaltsbedürfnisse des überlebenden Ehegatten, der Ankaufspreis des landwirtschaftlichen Gewerbes einschliesslich der Investitionen oder die Vermögensverhältnisse des Ehegatten, dem das landwirtschaftliche Gewerbe gehört.

Art. 214 E. Auflösung des Güterstandes und Auseinandersetzung / IV. Wertbestimmung / 3. Massgebender Zeitpunkt

3. Massgebender Zeitpunkt

1 Massgebend für den Wert der bei der Auflösung des Güterstandes vorhandenen Errungenschaft ist der Zeitpunkt der Auseinandersetzung.

2 Für Vermögenswerte, die zur Errungenschaft hinzugerechnet werden, ist der Zeitpunkt massgebend, in dem sie veräussert worden sind.

Art. 215 E. Auflösung des Güterstandes und Auseinandersetzung / V. Beteiligung am Vorschlag / 1. Nach Gesetz

V. Beteiligung am Vorschlag

1. Nach Gesetz

1 Jedem Ehegatten oder seinen Erben steht die Hälfte des Vorschlages des andern zu.

2 Die Forderungen werden verrechnet.

Art. 216 E. Auflösung des Güterstandes und Auseinandersetzung / V. Beteiligung am Vorschlag / 2. Nach Vertrag / a. Im Allgemeinen

2. Nach Vertrag

a. Im Allgemeinen

1 Durch Ehevertrag kann eine andere Beteiligung am Vorschlag vereinbart werden.

2 Solche Vereinbarungen dürfen die Pflichtteilsansprüche der nichtgemeinsamen Kinder und deren Nachkommen nicht beeinträchtigen.

Art. 217 E. Auflösung des Güterstandes und Auseinandersetzung / V. Beteiligung am Vorschlag / 2. Nach Vertrag / b. Bei Scheidung, Trennung, Ungültigerklärung der Ehe oder gerichtlicher Gütertrennung

b. Bei Scheidung, Trennung, Ungültigerklärung der Ehe oder gerichtlicher Gütertrennung

Bei Scheidung, Trennung, Ungültigerklärung der Ehe oder gerichtlicher Anordnung der Gütertrennung gelten Vereinbarungen über die Änderung der gesetzlichen Beteiligung am Vorschlag nur, wenn der Ehevertrag dies ausdrücklich vorsieht.

Art. 218 E. Auflösung des Güterstandes und Auseinandersetzung / VI. Bezahlung der Beteiligungsforderung und des Mehrwertanteils / 1. Zahlungsaufschub

VI. Bezahlung der Beteiligungsforderung und des Mehrwertanteils

1. Zahlungsaufschub

1 Bringt die sofortige Bezahlung der Beteiligungsforderung und des Mehrwertanteils den verpflichteten Ehegatten in ernstliche Schwierigkeiten, so kann er verlangen, dass ihm Zahlungsfristen eingeräumt werden.

2 Die Beteiligungsforderung und der Mehrwertanteil sind, soweit die Parteien nichts anderes vereinbaren, vom Abschluss der Auseinandersetzung an zu verzinsen und, wenn es die Umstände rechtfertigen, sicherzustellen.

Art. 219 E. Auflösung des Güterstandes und Auseinandersetzung / VI. Bezahlung der Beteiligungsforderung und des Mehrwertanteils / 2. Wohnung und Hausrat

2. Wohnung und Hausrat

1 Damit der überlebende Ehegatte seine bisherige Lebensweise beibehalten kann, wird ihm auf sein Verlangen am Haus oder an der Wohnung, worin die Ehegatten gelebt haben und die dem verstorbenen Ehegatten gehört hat, die Nutzniessung oder ein Wohnrecht auf Anrechnung zugeteilt; vorbehalten bleibt eine andere ehevertragliche Regelung.

2 Unter den gleichen Voraussetzungen kann er die Zuteilung des Eigentums am Hausrat verlangen.

3 Wo die Umstände es rechtfertigen, kann auf Verlangen des überlebenden Ehegatten oder der andern gesetzlichen Erben des Verstorbenen statt der Nutzniessung oder des Wohnrechts das Eigentum am Haus oder an der Wohnung eingeräumt werden.

4 An Räumlichkeiten, in denen der Erblasser einen Beruf ausübte oder ein Gewerbe betrieb und die ein Nachkomme zu dessen Weiterführung benötigt, kann der überlebende Ehegatte diese Rechte nicht beanspruchen; die Vorschriften des bäuerlichen Erbrechts bleiben vorbehalten.

Art. 220 E. Auflösung des Güterstandes und Auseinandersetzung / VI. Bezahlung der Beteiligungsforderung und des Mehrwertanteils / 3. Klage gegen Dritte

3. Klage gegen Dritte

1 Deckt das Vermögen des verpflichteten Ehegatten oder seine Erbschaft bei der güterrechtlichen Auseinandersetzung die Beteiligungsforderung nicht, so können der berechtigte Ehegatte oder seine Erben Zuwendungen, die der Errungenschaft hinzuzurechnen sind, bis zur Höhe des Fehlbetrages bei den begünstigten Dritten einfordern.

2 Das Klagerecht erlischt ein Jahr nachdem der Ehegatte oder seine Erben von der Verletzung ihrer Rechte Kenntnis erhalten haben, in jedem Fall aber zehn Jahre nach der Auflösung des Güterstandes.

3 Im Übrigen gelten die Bestimmungen über die erbrechtliche Herabsetzungsklage sinngemäss.1


1 Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 2 des Gerichtsstandsgesetzes vom 24. März 2000, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).


  Dritter Abschnitt: Die Gütergemeinschaft

Art. 221 A. Eigentumsverhältnisse / I. Zusammensetzung

A. Eigentumsverhältnisse

I. Zusammensetzung

Der Güterstand der Gütergemeinschaft umfasst das Gesamtgut und das Eigengut jedes Ehegatten.

Art. 222 A. Eigentumsverhältnisse / II. Gesamtgut / 1. Allgemeine Gütergemeinschaft

II. Gesamtgut

1. Allgemeine Gütergemeinschaft

1 Die allgemeine Gütergemeinschaft vereinigt das Vermögen und die Einkünfte der Ehegatten zu einem Gesamtgut, mit Ausnahme der Gegenstände, die von Gesetzes wegen Eigengut sind.

2 Das Gesamtgut gehört beiden Ehegatten ungeteilt.

3 Kein Ehegatte kann über seinen Anteil am Gesamtgut verfügen.

Art. 223 A. Eigentumsverhältnisse / II. Gesamtgut / 2. Beschränkte Gütergemeinschaften / a. Errungenschaftsgemeinschaft

2. Beschränkte Gütergemeinschaften

a. Errungenschaftsgemeinschaft

1 Die Ehegatten können durch Ehevertrag die Gemeinschaft auf die Errungenschaft beschränken.

2 Die Erträge des Eigengutes fallen in das Gesamtgut.

Art. 224 A. Eigentumsverhältnisse / II. Gesamtgut / 2. Beschränkte Gütergemeinschaften / b. Andere Gütergemeinschaften

b. Andere Gütergemeinschaften

1 Die Ehegatten können durch Ehevertrag bestimmte Vermögenswerte oder Arten von Vermögenswerten, wie Grundstücke, den Arbeitserwerb eines Ehegatten oder Vermögenswerte, mit denen dieser einen Beruf ausübt oder ein Gewerbe betreibt, von der Gemeinschaft ausschliessen.

2 Sofern nichts anderes vereinbart ist, fallen die Erträge dieser Vermögenswerte nicht in das Gesamtgut.

Art. 225 A. Eigentumsverhältnisse / III. Eigengut

III. Eigengut

1 Eigengut entsteht durch Ehevertrag, durch Zuwendung Dritter oder von Gesetzes wegen.

2 Von Gesetzes wegen umfasst das Eigengut jedes Ehegatten die Gegenstände, die ihm ausschliesslich zum persönlichen Gebrauch dienen, sowie die Genugtuungsansprüche.

3 Was ein Ehegatte als Pflichtteil zu beanspruchen hat, kann ihm von seinen Verwandten nicht als Eigengut zugewendet werden, sofern der Ehevertrag vorsieht, dass diese Vermögenswerte Gesamtgut sind.

Art. 226 A. Eigentumsverhältnisse / IV. Beweis

IV. Beweis

Alle Vermögenswerte gelten als Gesamtgut, solange nicht bewiesen ist, dass sie Eigengut eines Ehegatten sind.

Art. 227 B. Verwaltung und Verfügung / I. Gesamtgut / 1. Ordentliche Verwaltung

B. Verwaltung und Verfügung

I. Gesamtgut

1. Ordentliche Verwaltung

1 Die Ehegatten verwalten das Gesamtgut im Interesse der ehelichen Gemeinschaft.

2 Jeder Ehegatte kann in den Schranken der ordentlichen Verwaltung die Gemeinschaft verpflichten und über das Gesamtgut verfügen.

Art. 228 B. Verwaltung und Verfügung / I. Gesamtgut / 2. Ausserordentliche Verwaltung

2. Ausserordentliche Verwaltung

1 Die Ehegatten können ausser für die ordentliche Verwaltung nur gemeinsam oder der eine nur mit Einwilligung des andern die Gemeinschaft verpflichten und über das Gesamtgut verfügen.

2 Dritte dürfen diese Einwilligung voraussetzen, sofern sie nicht wissen oder wissen sollten, dass sie fehlt.

3 Die Bestimmungen über die Vertretung der ehelichen Gemeinschaft bleiben vorbehalten.

Art. 229 B. Verwaltung und Verfügung / I. Gesamtgut / 3. Beruf oder Gewerbe der Gemeinschaft

3. Beruf oder Gewerbe der Gemeinschaft

Übt ein Ehegatte mit Zustimmung des andern mit Mitteln des Gesamtgutes allein einen Beruf aus oder betreibt er allein ein Gewerbe, so kann er alle Rechtsgeschäfte vornehmen, die diese Tätigkeiten mit sich bringen.

Art. 230 B. Verwaltung und Verfügung / I. Gesamtgut / 4. Ausschlagung und Annahme von Erbschaften

4. Ausschlagung und Annahme von Erbschaften

1 Ohne Zustimmung des andern kann ein Ehegatte weder eine Erbschaft, die ins Gesamtgut fallen würde, ausschlagen noch eine überschuldete Erbschaft annehmen.

2 Kann der Ehegatte diese Zustimmung nicht einholen oder wird sie ihm ohne triftigen Grund verweigert, so kann er das Gericht anrufen.1


1 Fassung gemäss Anhang 1 Ziff. II 3 der Zivilprozessordnung vom 19. Dez. 2008, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 231 B. Verwaltung und Verfügung / I. Gesamtgut / 5. Verantwortlichkeit und Verwaltungskosten

5. Verantwortlichkeit und Verwaltungskosten

1 Für Handlungen, die das Gesamtgut betreffen, ist jeder Ehegatte bei Auflösung des Güterstandes gleich einem Beauftragten verantwortlich.

2 Die Kosten der Verwaltung werden dem Gesamtgut belastet.

Art. 232 B. Verwaltung und Verfügung / II. Eigengut

II. Eigengut

1 Innerhalb der gesetzlichen Schranken verwaltet jeder Ehegatte sein Eigengut und verfügt darüber.

2 Fallen die Erträge in das Eigengut, werden die Kosten der Verwaltung diesem belastet.

Art. 233 C. Haftung gegenüber Dritten / I. Vollschulden

C. Haftung gegenüber Dritten

I. Vollschulden

Jeder Ehegatte haftet mit seinem Eigengut und dem Gesamtgut:

1.
für Schulden, die er in Ausübung seiner Befugnisse zur Vertretung der ehelichen Gemeinschaft oder zur Verwaltung des Gesamtgutes eingeht;
2.
für Schulden, die er in Ausübung eines Berufes oder Gewerbes eingeht, sofern für diese Mittel des Gesamtgutes verwendet werden oder deren Erträge ins Gesamtgut fallen;
3.
für Schulden, für die auch der andere Ehegatte persönlich einzustehen hat;
4.
für Schulden, bei welchen die Ehegatten mit dem Dritten vereinbart haben, dass das Gesamtgut neben dem Eigengut des Schuldners haftet.
Art. 234 C. Haftung gegenüber Dritten / II. Eigenschulden

II. Eigenschulden

1 Für alle übrigen Schulden haftet ein Ehegatte nur mit seinem Eigengut und der Hälfte des Wertes des Gesamtgutes.

2 Vorbehalten bleiben die Ansprüche wegen Bereicherung der Gemeinschaft.

Art. 235 D. Schulden zwischen Ehegatten

D. Schulden zwischen Ehegatten

1 Der Güterstand hat keinen Einfluss auf die Fälligkeit von Schulden zwischen Ehegatten.

2 Bereitet indessen die Zahlung von Geldschulden oder die Erstattung geschuldeter Sachen dem verpflichteten Ehegatten ernstliche Schwierigkeiten, welche die eheliche Gemeinschaft gefährden, so kann er verlangen, dass ihm Fristen eingeräumt werden; die Forderung ist sicherzustellen, wenn es die Umstände rechtfertigen.

Art. 236 E. Auflösung des Güterstandes und Auseinandersetzung / I. Zeitpunkt der Auflösung

E. Auflösung des Güterstandes und Auseinandersetzung

I. Zeitpunkt der Auflösung

1 Der Güterstand wird mit dem Tod eines Ehegatten, mit der Vereinbarung eines andern Güterstandes oder mit der Konkurseröffnung über einen Ehegatten aufgelöst.

2 Bei Scheidung, Trennung, Ungültigerklärung der Ehe oder gerichtlicher Anordnung der Gütertrennung wird die Auflösung des Güterstandes auf den Tag zurückbezogen, an dem das Begehren eingereicht worden ist.

3 Für die Zusammensetzung des Gesamtgutes und des Eigengutes ist der Zeitpunkt der Auflösung des Güterstandes massgebend.

Art. 237 E. Auflösung des Güterstandes und Auseinandersetzung / II. Zuweisung zum Eigengut

II. Zuweisung zum Eigengut

Die Kapitalleistung, die ein Ehegatte von einer Vorsorgeeinrichtung oder wegen Arbeitsunfähigkeit erhalten hat und die Gesamtgut geworden ist, wird im Betrag des Kapitalwertes der Rente, die dem Ehegatten bei Auflösung des Güterstandes zustünde, dem Eigengut zugerechnet.

Art. 238 E. Auflösung des Güterstandes und Auseinandersetzung / III. Ersatzforderungen zwischen Gesamtgut und Eigengut

III. Ersatzforderungen zwischen Gesamtgut und Eigengut

1 Bei der güterrechtlichen Auseinandersetzung bestehen zwischen dem Gesamtgut und dem Eigengut jedes Ehegatten Ersatzforderungen, wenn Schulden, die die eine Vermögensmasse belasten, mit Mitteln der andern bezahlt worden sind.

2 Eine Schuld belastet die Vermögensmasse, mit welcher sie zusammenhängt, im Zweifel aber das Gesamtgut.

Art. 239 E. Auflösung des Güterstandes und Auseinandersetzung / IV. Mehrwertanteil

IV. Mehrwertanteil

Hat das Eigengut eines Ehegatten oder das Gesamtgut zum Erwerb, zur Verbesserung oder zur Erhaltung eines Vermögensgegenstandes einer andern Vermögensmasse beigetragen, so gelten sinngemäss die Bestimmungen über den Mehrwertanteil bei der Errungenschaftsbeteiligung.

Art. 240 E. Auflösung des Güterstandes und Auseinandersetzung / V. Wertbestimmung

V. Wertbestimmung

Massgebend für den Wert des bei Auflösung des Güterstandes vorhandenen Gesamtgutes ist der Zeitpunkt der Auseinandersetzung.

Art. 241 E. Auflösung des Güterstandes und Auseinandersetzung / VI. Teilung / 1. Bei Tod oder Vereinbarung eines andern Güterstandes

VI. Teilung

1. Bei Tod oder Vereinbarung eines andern Güterstandes

1 Wird die Gütergemeinschaft durch Tod eines Ehegatten oder durch Vereinbarung eines andern Güterstandes aufgelöst, so steht jedem Ehegatten oder seinen Erben die Hälfte des Gesamtgutes zu.

2 Durch Ehevertrag kann eine andere Teilung vereinbart werden.

3 Solche Vereinbarungen dürfen die Pflichtteilsansprüche der Nachkommen nicht beeinträchtigen.

Art. 242 E. Auflösung des Güterstandes und Auseinandersetzung / VI. Teilung / 2. In den übrigen Fällen

2. In den übrigen Fällen

1 Bei Scheidung, Trennung, Ungültigerklärung der Ehe oder Eintritt der gesetzlichen oder gerichtlichen Gütertrennung nimmt jeder Ehegatte vom Gesamtgut zurück, was unter der Errungenschaftsbeteiligung sein Eigengut wäre.

2 Das übrige Gesamtgut fällt den Ehegatten je zur Hälfte zu.

3 Vereinbarungen über die Änderung der gesetzlichen Teilung gelten nur, wenn der Ehevertrag dies ausdrücklich vorsieht.

Art. 243 E. Auflösung des Güterstandes und Auseinandersetzung / VII. Durchführung der Teilung / 1. Eigengut

VII. Durchführung der Teilung

1. Eigengut

Wird die Gütergemeinschaft durch Tod eines Ehegatten aufgelöst, so kann der überlebende Ehegatte verlangen, dass ihm auf Anrechnung überlassen wird, was unter der Errungenschaftsbeteiligung sein Eigengut wäre.

Art. 244 E. Auflösung des Güterstandes und Auseinandersetzung / VII. Durchführung der Teilung / 2. Wohnung und Hausrat

2. Wohnung und Hausrat

1 Gehören das Haus oder die Wohnung, worin die Ehegatten gelebt haben, oder Hausratsgegenstände zum Gesamtgut, so kann der überlebende Ehegatte verlangen, dass ihm das Eigentum daran auf Anrechnung zugeteilt wird.

2 Wo die Umstände es rechtfertigen, kann auf Verlangen des überlebenden Ehegatten oder der andern gesetzlichen Erben des Verstorbenen statt des Eigentums die Nutzniessung oder ein Wohnrecht eingeräumt werden.

3 Wird die Gütergemeinschaft nicht durch Tod aufgelöst, kann jeder Ehegatte diese Begehren stellen, wenn er ein überwiegendes Interesse nachweist.

Art. 245 E. Auflösung des Güterstandes und Auseinandersetzung / VII. Durchführung der Teilung / 3. Andere Vermögenswerte

3. Andere Vermögenswerte

Weist ein Ehegatte ein überwiegendes Interesse nach, so kann er verlangen, dass ihm auch andere Vermögenswerte auf Anrechnung zugeteilt werden.

Art. 246 E. Auflösung des Güterstandes und Auseinandersetzung / VII. Durchführung der Teilung / 4. Andere Teilungsvorschriften

4. Andere Teilungsvorschriften

Im Übrigen gelten die Bestimmungen über die Teilung von Miteigentum und die Durchführung der Erbteilung sinngemäss.


  Vierter Abschnitt: Die Gütertrennung

Art. 247 A. Verwaltung, Nutzung und Verfügung / I. Im Allgemeinen

A. Verwaltung, Nutzung und Verfügung

I. Im Allgemeinen

Innerhalb der gesetzlichen Schranken verwaltet und nutzt jeder Ehegatte sein Vermögen und verfügt darüber.

Art. 248 A. Verwaltung, Nutzung und Verfügung / II. Beweis

II. Beweis

1 Wer behauptet, ein bestimmter Vermögenswert sei Eigentum des einen oder andern Ehegatten, muss dies beweisen.

2 Kann dieser Beweis nicht erbracht werden, so wird Miteigentum beider Ehegatten angenommen.

Art. 249 B. Haftung gegenüberDritten

B. Haftung gegenüberDritten

Jeder Ehegatte haftet für seine Schulden mit seinem gesamten Vermögen.

Art. 250 C. Schulden zwischen Ehegatten

C. Schulden zwischen Ehegatten

1 Der Güterstand hat keinen Einfluss auf die Fälligkeit von Schulden zwischen Ehegatten.

2 Bereitet indessen die Zahlung von Geldschulden oder die Erstattung geschuldeter Sachen dem verpflichteten Ehegatten ernstliche Schwierigkeiten, welche die eheliche Gemeinschaft gefährden, so kann er verlangen, dass ihm Fristen eingeräumt werden; die Forderung ist sicherzustellen, wenn es die Umstände rechtfertigen.

Art. 251 D. Zuweisung bei Miteigentum

D. Zuweisung bei Miteigentum

Steht ein Vermögenswert im Miteigentum und weist ein Ehegatte ein überwiegendes Interesse nach, so kann er bei Auflösung des Güterstandes neben den übrigen gesetzlichen Massnahmen verlangen, dass ihm dieser Vermögenswert gegen Entschädigung des andern Ehegatten ungeteilt zugewiesen wird.


  Zweite Abteilung: Die Verwandtschaft

  Siebenter Titel: Die Entstehung des Kindesverhältnisses5 

  Erster Abschnitt: Allgemeine Bestimmungen6 

Art. 2521A. Entstehung des Kindesverhältnisses im Allgemeinen

A. Entstehung des Kindesverhältnisses im Allgemeinen

1 Das Kindesverhältnis entsteht zwischen dem Kind und der Mutter mit der Geburt.

2 Zwischen dem Kind und dem Vater wird es kraft der Ehe der Mutter begründet oder durch Anerkennung oder durch das Gericht festgestellt.

3 Ausserdem entsteht das Kindesverhältnis durch Adoption.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2531B. ...

B. ...


1 Aufgehoben durch Anhang Ziff. 2 des Gerichtsstandsgesetzes vom 24. März 2000, mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).

Art. 2541

1 Aufgehoben durch Anhang 1 Ziff. II 3 der Zivilprozessordnung vom 19. Dez. 2008, mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).


  Zweiter Abschnitt: Die Vaterschaft des Ehemannes7 

Art. 2551A. Vermutung

A. Vermutung

1 Ist ein Kind während der Ehe geboren, so gilt der Ehemann als Vater.

2 Stirbt der Ehemann, so gilt er als Vater, wenn das Kind innert 300 Tagen nach seinem Tod geboren wird oder bei späterer Geburt nachgewiesenermassen vor dem Tod des Ehemannes gezeugt worden ist.

3 Wird der Ehemann für verschollen erklärt, so gilt er als Vater, wenn das Kind vor Ablauf von 300 Tagen seit dem Zeitpunkt der Todesgefahr oder der letzten Nachricht geboren worden ist.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 4 des BG vom 26. Juni 1998, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

Art. 2561B. Anfechtung / I. Klagerecht

B. Anfechtung

I. Klagerecht

1 Die Vermutung der Vaterschaft kann beim Gericht angefochten werden:

1.
vom Ehemann;
2.2
vom Kind, wenn während seiner Minderjährigkeit der gemeinsame Haushalt der Ehegatten aufgehört hat.

2 Die Klage des Ehemannes richtet sich gegen das Kind und die Mutter, die Klage des Kindes gegen den Ehemann und die Mutter.

3 Der Ehemann hat keine Klage, wenn er der Zeugung durch einen Dritten zugestimmt hat. Für das Anfechtungsrecht des Kindes bleibt das Fortpflanzungsmedizingesetz vom 18. Dezember 19983 vorbehalten.4


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 SR 810.11
4 Fassung gemäss Art. 39 des Fortpflanzungsmedizingesetzes vom 18. Dez. 1998, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 3055; BBl 1996 III 205).

Art. 256a1B. Anfechtung / II. Klagegrund / 1. Bei Zeugung während der Ehe

II. Klagegrund

1. Bei Zeugung während der Ehe

1 Ist ein Kind während der Ehe gezeugt worden, so hat der Kläger nachzuweisen, dass der Ehemann nicht der Vater ist.

2 Ist das Kind frühestens 180 Tage nach Abschluss und spätestens 300 Tage nach Auflösung der Ehe durch Tod geboren, so wird vermutet, dass es während der Ehe gezeugt worden ist.2


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 4 des BG vom 26. Juni 1998, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

Art. 256b1B. Anfechtung / II. Klagegrund / 2. Bei Zeugung vor der Ehe oder während Aufhebung des Haushaltes

2. Bei Zeugung vor der Ehe oder während Aufhebung des Haushaltes

1 Ist ein Kind vor Abschluss der Ehe oder zu einer Zeit gezeugt worden, da der gemeinsame Haushalt aufgehoben war, so ist die Anfechtung nicht weiter zu begründen.

2 Die Vaterschaft des Ehemannes wird jedoch auch in diesem Fall vermutet, wenn glaubhaft gemacht wird, dass er um die Zeit der Empfängnis der Mutter beigewohnt hat.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 256c1B. Anfechtung / III. Klagefrist

III. Klagefrist

1 Der Ehemann hat die Klage binnen Jahresfrist einzureichen, seitdem er die Geburt und die Tatsache erfahren hat, dass er nicht der Vater ist oder dass ein Dritter der Mutter um die Zeit der Empfängnis beigewohnt hat, in jedem Fall aber vor Ablauf von fünf Jahren seit der Geburt.

2 Die Klage des Kindes ist spätestens ein Jahr nach Erreichen der Volljährigkeit zu erheben.2

3 Nach Ablauf der Frist wird eine Anfechtung zugelassen, wenn die Verspätung mit wichtigen Gründen entschuldigt wird.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 2571C. Zusammentreffen zweier Vermutungen

C. Zusammentreffen zweier Vermutungen

1 Ist ein Kind vor Ablauf von 300 Tagen seit der Auflösung der Ehe durch Tod geboren und hat die Mutter inzwischen eine neue Ehe geschlossen, so gilt der zweite Ehemann als Vater.2

2 Wird diese Vermutung beseitigt, so gilt der erste Ehemann als Vater.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 4 des BG vom 26. Juni 1998, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

Art. 2581D. Klage der Eltern

D. Klage der Eltern

1 Ist der Ehemann vor Ablauf der Klagefrist gestorben oder urteilsunfähig geworden, so kann die Anfechtungsklage von seinem Vater oder seiner Mutter erhoben werden.

2 Die Bestimmungen über die Anfechtung durch den Ehemann finden entsprechende Anwendung.

3 Die einjährige Klagefrist beginnt frühestens mit der Kenntnis des Todes oder der Urteilsunfähigkeit des Ehemannes.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2591E. Heirat der Eltern

E. Heirat der Eltern

1 Heiraten die Eltern einander, so finden auf das vorher geborene Kind die Bestimmungen über das während der Ehe geborene entsprechende Anwendung, sobald die Vaterschaft des Ehemannes durch Anerkennung oder Urteil festgestellt ist.

2 Die Anerkennung kann angefochten werden:

1.
von der Mutter;
2.2
vom Kind, oder nach seinem Tode von den Nachkommen, wenn während seiner Minderjährigkeit der gemeinsame Haushalt der Ehegatten aufgehört hat oder die Anerkennung erst nach Vollendung seines zwölften Altersjahres ausgesprochen worden ist;
3.
von der Heimat- oder Wohnsitzgemeinde des Ehemannes;
4.
vom Ehemann.

3 Die Vorschriften über die Anfechtung der Anerkennung finden entsprechende Anwendung.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).


  Dritter Abschnitt: Anerkennung und Vaterschaftsurteil8 

Art. 2601A. Anerkennung / I. Zulässigkeit und Form

A. Anerkennung

I. Zulässigkeit und Form

1 Besteht das Kindesverhältnis nur zur Mutter, so kann der Vater das Kind anerkennen.

2 Ist der Anerkennende minderjährig, steht er unter umfassender Beistandschaft oder hat die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde eine entsprechende Anordnung getroffen, so ist die Zustimmung seines gesetzlichen Vertreters notwendig.2

3 Die Anerkennung erfolgt durch Erklärung vor dem Zivilstandsbeamten oder durch letztwillige Verfügung oder, wenn eine Klage auf Feststellung der Vaterschaft hängig ist, vor dem Gericht.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 260a1A. Anerkennung / II. Anfechtung / 1. Klagerecht

II. Anfechtung

1. Klagerecht

1 Die Anerkennung kann von jedermann, der ein Interesse hat, beim Gericht angefochten werden, namentlich von der Mutter, vom Kind und nach seinem Tode von den Nachkommen sowie von der Heimat- oder Wohnsitzgemeinde des Anerkennenden.

2 Dem Anerkennenden steht diese Klage nur zu, wenn er das Kind unter dem Einfluss einer Drohung mit einer nahen und erheblichen Gefahr für das Leben, die Gesundheit, die Ehre oder das Vermögen seiner selbst oder einer ihm nahe stehenden Person oder in einem Irrtum über seine Vaterschaft anerkannt hat.

3 Die Klage richtet sich gegen den Anerkennenden und das Kind, soweit diese nicht selber klagen.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 260b1A. Anerkennung / II. Anfechtung / 2. Klagegrund

2. Klagegrund

1 Der Kläger hat zu beweisen, dass der Anerkennende nicht der Vater des Kindes ist.

2 Mutter und Kind haben diesen Beweis jedoch nur zu erbringen, wenn der Anerkennende glaubhaft macht, dass er der Mutter um die Zeit der Empfängnis beigewohnt habe.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 260c1A. Anerkennung / II. Anfechtung / 3. Klagefrist

3. Klagefrist

1 Die Klage ist binnen Jahresfrist einzureichen, seitdem der Kläger von der Anerkennung und von der Tatsache Kenntnis erhielt, dass der Anerkennende nicht der Vater ist oder dass ein Dritter der Mutter um die Zeit der Empfängnis beigewohnt hat, oder seitdem er den Irrtum entdeckte oder seitdem die Drohung wegfiel, in jedem Fall aber vor Ablauf von fünf Jahren seit der Anerkennung.

2 Die Klage des Kindes kann in jedem Fall bis zum Ablauf eines Jahres nach Erreichen der Volljährigkeit erhoben werden.2

3 Nach Ablauf der Frist wird eine Anfechtung zugelassen, wenn die Verspätung mit wichtigen Gründen entschuldigt wird.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 2611B. Vaterschaftsklage / I. Klagerecht

B. Vaterschaftsklage

I. Klagerecht

1 Sowohl die Mutter als das Kind können auf Feststellung des Kindesverhältnisses zwischen dem Kind und dem Vater klagen.

2 Die Klage richtet sich gegen den Vater oder, wenn er gestorben ist, nacheinander gegen seine Nachkommen, Eltern oder Geschwister oder, wenn solche fehlen, gegen die zuständige Behörde seines letzten Wohnsitzes.

3 Ist der Vater gestorben, so wird seiner Ehefrau zur Wahrung ihrer Interessen die Einreichung der Klage vom Gericht mitgeteilt.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2621B. Vaterschaftsklage / II. Vermutung

II. Vermutung

1 Hat der Beklagte in der Zeit vom 300. bis zum 180. Tag vor der Geburt des Kindes der Mutter beigewohnt, so wird seine Vaterschaft vermutet.

2 Diese Vermutung gilt auch, wenn das Kind vor dem 300. oder nach dem 180. Tag vor der Geburt gezeugt worden ist und der Beklagte der Mutter um die Zeit der Empfängnis beigewohnt hat.

3 Die Vermutung fällt weg, wenn der Beklagte nachweist, dass seine Vaterschaft ausgeschlossen oder weniger wahrscheinlich ist als die eines Dritten.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2631B. Vaterschaftsklage / III. Klagefrist

III. Klagefrist

1 Die Klage kann vor oder nach der Niederkunft angebracht werden, ist aber einzureichen:

1.
von der Mutter vor Ablauf eines Jahres seit der Geburt;
2.2
vom Kind vor Ablauf eines Jahres nach Erreichen der Volljährigkeit.

2 Besteht schon ein Kindesverhältnis zu einem andern Mann, so kann die Klage in jedem Fall innerhalb eines Jahres seit dem Tag, da es beseitigt ist, angebracht werden.

3 Nach Ablauf der Frist wird eine Klage zugelassen, wenn die Verspätung mit wichtigen Gründen entschuldigt wird.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).


  Vierter Abschnitt9 : Die Adoption

Art. 2641A. Adoption Minderjähriger / I. Allgemeine Voraussetzungen

A. Adoption Minderjähriger

I. Allgemeine Voraussetzungen

1 Ein minderjähriges Kind darf adoptiert werden, wenn die adoptionswilligen Personen während mindestens eines Jahres für Pflege und Erziehung des Kindes gesorgt haben und nach den gesamten Umständen zu erwarten ist, die Begründung eines Kindesverhältnisses diene seinem Wohl, ohne andere Kinder dieser Personen in unbilliger Weise zurückzusetzen.

2 Eine Adoption ist nur möglich, wenn die adoptionswilligen Personen aufgrund ihres Alters und ihrer persönlichen Verhältnisse für das Kind voraussichtlich bis zu dessen Volljährigkeit sorgen können.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 17. Juni 2016 (Adoption), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 264a1A. Adoption Minderjähriger / II. Gemeinschaftliche Adoption

II. Gemeinschaftliche Adoption

1 Ehegatten dürfen ein Kind gemeinschaftlich adoptieren, wenn sie seit mindestens drei Jahren einen gemeinsamen Haushalt führen und beide mindestens 28 Jahre alt sind.

2 Vom Mindestalter kann abgewichen werden, wenn dies zur Wahrung des Kindeswohls nötig ist. Die Ehegatten haben die Abweichung zu begründen.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 30. Juni 1972 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200). Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 17. Juni 2016 (Adoption), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 264b1A. Adoption Minderjähriger / III. Einzeladoption

III. Einzeladoption

1 Eine Person, die nicht verheiratet ist und nicht in eingetragener Partnerschaft lebt, darf ein Kind allein adoptieren, wenn sie mindestens 28 Jahre alt ist.

2 Eine verheiratete Person, die mindestens 28 Jahre alt ist, darf ein Kind allein adoptieren, wenn der Ehegatte dauernd urteilsunfähig oder seit mehr als zwei Jahren mit unbekanntem Aufenthalt abwesend ist oder wenn die Ehe seit mehr als drei Jahren gerichtlich getrennt ist.

3 Eine in eingetragener Partnerschaft lebende Person, die mindestens 28 Jahre alt ist, darf ein Kind allein adoptieren, wenn ihre eingetragene Partnerin oder ihr eingetragener Partner dauernd urteilsunfähig oder seit mehr als zwei Jahren mit unbekanntem Aufenthalt abwesend ist.

4 Vom Mindestalter kann abgewichen werden, wenn dies zur Wahrung des Kindeswohls nötig ist. Die adoptionswillige Person hat die Abweichung zu begründen.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 30. Juni 1972 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200). Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 17. Juni 2016 (Adoption), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 264c1A. Adoption Minderjähriger / IV. Stiefkindadoption

IV. Stiefkindadoption

1 Eine Person darf das Kind adoptieren, mit dessen Mutter oder Vater sie:

1.
verheiratet ist;
2.
in eingetragener Partnerschaft lebt;
3.
eine faktische Lebensgemeinschaft führt.

2 Das Paar muss seit mindestens drei Jahren einen gemeinsamen Haushalt führen.

3 Personen in einer faktischen Lebensgemeinschaft dürfen weder verheiratet noch durch eine eingetragene Partnerschaft gebunden sein.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 17. Juni 2016 (Adoption), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 264d1A. Adoption Minderjähriger / V. Altersunterschied

V. Altersunterschied

1 Der Altersunterschied zwischen dem Kind und den adoptionswilligen Personen darf nicht weniger als 16 Jahre und nicht mehr als 45 Jahre betragen.

2 Davon kann abgewichen werden, wenn dies zur Wahrung des Kindeswohls nötig ist. Die adoptionswilligen Personen haben die Abweichung zu begründen.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 17. Juni 2016 (Adoption), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 2651A. Adoption Minderjähriger / VI. Zustimmung des Kindes und der Kindesschutzbehörde

VI. Zustimmung des Kindes und der Kindesschutzbehörde

1 Ist das Kind urteilsfähig, so bedarf die Adoption seiner Zustimmung.

2 Ist es bevormundet oder verbeiständet, so kann, auch wenn es urteilsfähig ist, die Adoption nur mit Zustimmung der Kindesschutzbehörde erfolgen.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 17. Juni 2016 (Adoption), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 265a1A. Adoption Minderjähriger / VII. Zustimmung der Eltern / 1. Form

VII. Zustimmung der Eltern2

1. Form

1 Die Adoption bedarf der Zustimmung des Vaters und der Mutter des Kindes.

2 Die Zustimmung ist bei der Kindesschutzbehörde am Wohnsitz oder Aufenthaltsort der Eltern oder des Kindes mündlich oder schriftlich zu erklären und im Protokoll vorzumerken.

3 Sie ist gültig, selbst wenn die adoptionswilligen Personen nicht genannt oder noch nicht bestimmt sind.3


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 30. Juni 1972, in Kraft seit 1. April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 17. Juni 2016 (Adoption), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).
3 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 17. Juni 2016 (Adoption), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 265b1A. Adoption Minderjähriger / VII. Zustimmung der Eltern / 2. Zeitpunkt

2. Zeitpunkt

1 Die Zustimmung darf nicht vor Ablauf von sechs Wochen seit der Geburt des Kindes erteilt werden.

2 Sie kann binnen sechs Wochen seit ihrer Entgegennahme widerrufen werden.

3 Wird sie nach einem Widerruf erneuert, so ist sie endgültig.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 30. Juni 1972, in Kraft seit 1. April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 265c1A. Adoption Minderjähriger / VII. Zustimmung der Eltern / 3. Absehen von der Zustimmung / a. Voraussetzungen

3. Absehen von der Zustimmung

a. Voraussetzungen

Von der Zustimmung eines Elternteils kann abgesehen werden, wenn er unbekannt, mit unbekanntem Aufenthalt länger abwesend oder dauernd urteilsunfähig ist.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 30. Juni 1972 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200). Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 17. Juni 2016 (Adoption), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 265d1A. Adoption Minderjähriger / VII. Zustimmung der Eltern / 3. Absehen von der Zustimmung / b. Entscheid

b. Entscheid

1 Wird das Kind adoptionswilligen Personen zum Zweck der späteren Adoption anvertraut und fehlt die Zustimmung eines Elternteils, so entscheidet die Kindesschutzbehörde am Wohnsitz des Kindes auf Gesuch der mit der Vormundschaft oder Beistandschaft betrauten Person, einer Vermittlungsstelle oder der adoptionswilligen Personen und in der Regel vorgängig, ob von dieser Zustimmung abgesehen werden kann.2

2 In den andern Fällen ist hierüber anlässlich der Adoption zu entscheiden.

3 ...3


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 30. Juni 1972, in Kraft seit 1. April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 17. Juni 2016 (Adoption), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).
3 Aufgehoben durch Ziff. I des BG vom 17. Juni 2016 (Adoption), mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 2661B. Adoption einer volljährigen Person

B. Adoption einer volljährigen Person

1 Eine volljährige Person darf adoptiert werden, wenn:

1.
sie aus körperlichen, geistigen oder psychischen Gründen dauernd hilfsbedürftig ist und die adoptionswilligen Personen ihr während mindestens eines Jahres Pflege erwiesen haben;
2.
die adoptionswilligen Personen ihr während ihrer Minderjährigkeit mindestens ein Jahr lang Pflege und Erziehung erwiesen haben; oder
3.
andere wichtige Gründe vorliegen und sie während mindestens eines Jahres mit den adoptionswilligen Personen im gleichen Haushalt gelebt hat.

2 Im Übrigen sind die Bestimmungen über die Adoption Minderjähriger sinngemäss anwendbar; ausgenommen davon ist die Bestimmung über die Zustimmung der Eltern.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 17. Juni 2016 (Adoption), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 2671C. Wirkungen / I. Im Allgemeinen

C. Wirkungen

I. Im Allgemeinen

1 Das Adoptivkind erhält die Rechtsstellung eines Kindes der adoptierenden Personen.

2 Das bisherige Kindesverhältnis erlischt.

3 Das Kindesverhältnis erlischt nicht zum Elternteil, der mit der adoptierenden Person:

1.
verheiratet ist;
2.
in eingetragener Partnerschaft lebt;
3.
eine faktische Lebensgemeinschaft führt.

1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 17. Juni 2016 (Adoption), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 267a1C. Wirkungen / II. Name

II. Name

1 Bei der gemeinschaftlichen Adoption und bei der Einzeladoption kann dem minderjährigen Kind ein neuer Vorname gegeben werden, wenn achtenswerte Gründe vorliegen. Vorher wird das Kind durch die zuständige Behörde oder eine beauftragte Drittperson in geeigneter Weise persönlich angehört, sofern sein Alter oder andere wichtige Gründe nicht dagegen sprechen. Ist das Kind mindestens zwölf Jahre alt, so bedarf die Änderung seiner Zustimmung.

2 Der Name des Kindes bestimmt sich nach den Bestimmungen über die Wirkungen des Kindesverhältnisses. Diese gelten bei der Adoption des Kindes durch die eingetragene Partnerin seiner Mutter oder den eingetragenen Partner seines Vaters sinngemäss.

3 Die zuständige Behörde kann einer zu adoptierenden volljährigen Person die Weiterführung des bisherigen Namens bewilligen, wenn achtenswerte Gründe vorliegen.

4 Die Namensänderung einer zu adoptierenden volljährigen Person hat keine Auswirkungen auf die Namensführung von Personen, deren Name sich aus dem bisherigen Namen der zu adoptierenden Person ableitet, es sei denn, diese stimmen einer Namensänderung ausdrücklich zu.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 30. Juni 1972 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200). Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 17. Juni 2016 (Adoption), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 267b1C. Wirkungen / III. Bürgerrecht

III. Bürgerrecht

Das Bürgerrecht des minderjährigen Kindes bestimmt sich nach den Bestimmungen über die Wirkungen des Kindesverhältnisses.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 17. Juni 2016 (Adoption), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 2681D. Verfahren / I. Im Allgemeinen

D. Verfahren

I. Im Allgemeinen

1 Die Adoption wird von der zuständigen kantonalen Behörde am Wohnsitz der Adoptiveltern ausgesprochen.

2 Die Adoptionsvoraussetzungen müssen bereits bei der Einreichung des Gesuchs erfüllt sein.2

3 Ist das Gesuch eingereicht, so hindert Tod oder Eintritt der Urteilsunfähigkeit der adoptierenden Person die Adoption nicht, sofern die anderen Voraussetzungen weiterhin erfüllt sind.3

4 Wird das Kind nach Einreichung des Gesuchs volljährig, so bleiben die Bestimmungen über die Adoption Minderjähriger anwendbar, wenn deren Voraussetzungen vorher erfüllt waren.4

5 Der Adoptionsentscheid enthält alle für die Eintragung in das Personenstandsregister erforderlichen Angaben betreffend den Vornamen, den Namen und das Bürgerrecht der adoptierten Person.5


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 30. Juni 1972, in Kraft seit 1. April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 17. Juni 2016 (Adoption), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).
3 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 17. Juni 2016 (Adoption), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).
4 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 17. Juni 2016 (Adoption), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).
5 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 17. Juni 2016 (Adoption), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 268a1D. Verfahren / II. Untersuchung

II. Untersuchung

1 Die Adoption darf erst nach umfassender Untersuchung aller wesentlichen Umstände, nötigenfalls unter Beizug von Sachverständigen, ausgesprochen werden.

2 Namentlich sind die Persönlichkeit und die Gesundheit der adoptionswilligen Personen und des Kindes, ihre gegenseitige Beziehung, die erzieherische Eignung, die wirtschaftliche Lage, die Beweggründe und die Familienverhältnisse der adoptionswilligen Personen sowie die Entwicklung des Pflegeverhältnisses abzuklären.2

3 ...3


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 30. Juni 1972, in Kraft seit 1. April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 17. Juni 2016 (Adoption), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).
3 Aufgehoben durch Ziff. I des BG vom 17. Juni 2016 (Adoption), mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 268abis1D. Verfahren / III. Anhörung des Kindes

III. Anhörung des Kindes

1 Das Kind wird durch die für das Adoptionsverfahren zuständige kantonale Behörde oder durch eine beauftragte Drittperson in geeigneter Weise persönlich angehört, sofern sein Alter oder andere wichtige Gründe nicht dagegen sprechen.

2 Über die Anhörung ist Protokoll zu führen.

3 Das urteilsfähige Kind kann die Verweigerung der Anhörung mit Beschwerde anfechten.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 17. Juni 2016 (Adoption), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 268ater1D. Verfahren / IV. Vertretung des Kindes

IV. Vertretung des Kindes

1 Die für das Adoptionsverfahren zuständige kantonale Behörde ordnet wenn nötig die Vertretung des Kindes an und bezeichnet als Vertretung eine in fürsorgerischen und rechtlichen Fragen erfahrene Person.

2 Stellt das urteilsfähige Kind Antrag auf eine Vertretung, so ist diese anzuordnen.

3 Das urteilsfähige Kind kann die Nichtanordnung mit Beschwerde anfechten.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 17. Juni 2016 (Adoption), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 268aquater1D. Verfahren / V. Würdigung der Einstellung von Angehörigen

V. Würdigung der Einstellung von Angehörigen

1 Haben die adoptionswilligen Personen Nachkommen, so ist deren Einstellung zur Adoption zu würdigen.

2 Vor der Adoption einer volljährigen Person zusätzlich zu würdigen ist die Einstellung:

1.
des Ehegatten oder der eingetragenen Partnerin oder des eingetragenen Partners der zu adoptierenden Person;
2.
der leiblichen Eltern der zu adoptierenden Person; und
3.
der Nachkommen der zu adoptierenden Person, sofern nicht ihr Alter oder andere wichtige Gründe dagegen sprechen.

3 Der Adoptionsentscheid ist diesen Personen, sofern möglich, mitzuteilen.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 17. Juni 2016 (Adoption), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 268b1Dbis.Adoptionsgeheimnis

Dbis.Adoptionsgeheimnis

1 Das Adoptivkind und die Adoptiveltern haben Anspruch auf Wahrung des Adoptionsgeheimnisses.

2 Identifizierende Informationen über das minderjährige Kind oder über seine Adoptiveltern dürfen den leiblichen Eltern nur bekannt gegeben werden, wenn das Kind urteilsfähig ist und die Adoptiveltern sowie das Kind der Bekanntgabe zugestimmt haben.

3 Identifizierende Informationen über das volljährige Kind dürfen den leiblichen Eltern sowie deren direkten Nachkommen bekannt gegeben werden, wenn das Kind der Bekanntgabe zugestimmt hat.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 30. Juni 1972 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200). Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 17. Juni 2016 (Adoption), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 268c1Dter. Auskunft über die Adoption und die leiblichen Eltern und deren Nachkommen

Dter. Auskunft über die Adoption und die leiblichen Eltern und deren Nachkommen

1 Die Adoptiveltern haben das Kind entsprechend seinem Alter und seiner Reife über die Tatsache seiner Adoption in Kenntnis zu setzen.

2 Das minderjährige Kind hat Anspruch auf Auskunft über seine leiblichen Eltern, soweit dadurch keine Rückschlüsse auf deren Identität möglich sind. Identifizierende Informationen erhält es nur, wenn es ein schutzwürdiges Interesse nachweisen kann.

3 Das volljährige Kind kann jederzeit verlangen, dass ihm die Personalien seiner leiblichen Eltern und weitere Informationen über diese bekannt gegeben werden. Ausserdem kann es verlangen, dass ihm Informationen über direkte Nachkommen seiner leiblichen Eltern bekannt gegeben werden, wenn die Nachkommen volljährig sind und der Bekanntgabe zugestimmt haben.


1 Eingefügt durch Anhang Ziff. 2 des BG vom 22. Juni 2001 zum Haager Adoptionsübereinkommen und über Massnahmen zum Schutz des Kindes bei internationalen Adoptionen (AS 2002 3988; BBl 1999 5795). Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 17. Juni 2016 (Adoption), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 268d1Dquater. Kantonale Auskunftsstelle und Suchdienste

Dquater. Kantonale Auskunftsstelle und Suchdienste

1 Auskunft über die leiblichen Eltern, über deren direkte Nachkommen sowie über das Kind erteilt die für das Adoptionsverfahren zuständige kantonale Behörde.

2 Die Behörde informiert die vom Auskunftsgesuch betroffene Person über das Gesuch und holt, wo nötig, deren Zustimmung zur Kontaktaufnahme mit der gesuchstellenden Person ein. Sie kann diese Aufgaben an einen spezialisierten Suchdienst übertragen.

3 Lehnt die vom Auskunftsgesuch betroffene Person den persönlichen Kontakt ab, so informiert die Behörde oder der beauftragte Suchdienst die gesuchstellende Person darüber und macht diese auf die Persönlichkeitsrechte der vom Auskunftsgesuch betroffenen Person aufmerksam.

4 Die Kantone bezeichnen eine Stelle, welche die leiblichen Eltern, deren direkte Nachkommen sowie das Kind auf Wunsch beratend unterstützt.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 17. Juni 2016 (Adoption), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 268e1Dquinquies. Persönlicher Verkehr mit den leiblichen Eltern

Dquinquies. Persönlicher Verkehr mit den leiblichen Eltern

1 Die Adoptiveltern und die leiblichen Eltern können vereinbaren, dass den leiblichen Eltern ein Anspruch auf angemessenen persönlichen Verkehr mit dem minderjährigen Kind eingeräumt wird. Diese Vereinbarung sowie ihre Änderung sind der Kindesschutzbehörde am Wohnsitz des Kindes zur Genehmigung zu unterbreiten. Die Kindesschutzbehörde oder eine beauftragte Drittperson hört das Kind vor dem Entscheid in geeigneter Weise persönlich an, sofern dessen Alter oder andere wichtige Gründe nicht dagegen sprechen. Ist das Kind urteilsfähig, so bedarf die Vereinbarung seiner Zustimmung.

2 Ist das Kindeswohl gefährdet oder besteht Uneinigkeit über die Umsetzung der Vereinbarung, so entscheidet die Kindesschutzbehörde.

3 Das Kind kann den Kontakt zu den leiblichen Eltern jederzeit verweigern. Gegen seinen Willen dürfen die Adoptiveltern auch keine Informationen an die leiblichen Eltern weitergeben.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 17. Juni 2016 (Adoption), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 2691E. Anfechtung / I. Gründe / 1. Fehlen der Zustimmung

E. Anfechtung

I. Gründe

1. Fehlen der Zustimmung

1 Ist eine Zustimmung ohne gesetzlichen Grund nicht eingeholt worden, so können die Zustimmungsberechtigten die Adoption beim Gericht anfechten, sofern dadurch das Wohl des Kindes nicht ernstlich beeinträchtigt wird.

2 Den Eltern steht diese Klage jedoch nicht zu, wenn sie den Entscheid ans Bundesgericht weiterziehen können.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 30. Juni 1972, in Kraft seit 1. April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 269a1E. Anfechtung / I. Gründe / 2. Andere Mängel

2. Andere Mängel

1 Leidet die Adoption an anderen schwerwiegenden Mängeln, so kann jedermann, der ein Interesse hat, namentlich auch die Heimat- oder Wohnsitzgemeinde, sie anfechten.

2 Die Anfechtung ist jedoch ausgeschlossen, wenn der Mangel inzwischen behoben ist oder ausschliesslich Verfahrensvorschriften betrifft.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 30. Juni 1972, in Kraft seit 1. April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 269b1E. Anfechtung / II. Klagefrist

II. Klagefrist

Die Klage ist binnen sechs Monaten seit Entdeckung des Anfechtungsgrundes und in jedem Falle binnen zwei Jahren seit der Adoption zu erheben.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 30. Juni 1972, in Kraft seit 1. April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 269c1F. Adoptivkindervermittlung

F. Adoptivkindervermittlung

1 Der Bund übt die Aufsicht über die Vermittlung von Kindern zur Adoption aus.

2 Wer diese Vermittlung berufsmässig oder im Zusammenhang mit seinem Beruf betreibt, bedarf einer Bewilligung; die Vermittlung durch die Kindesschutzbehörde bleibt vorbehalten.2

3 Der Bundesrat erlässt die Ausführungsbestimmungen und regelt die Mitwirkung der für die Aufnahme von Kindern zum Zweck späterer Adoption zuständigen kantonalen Behörde bei der Abklärung der Bewilligungsvoraussetzungen und bei der Aufsicht.

4 ...3


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 3 des BG vom 30. Juni 1972 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200). Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 2 des BG vom 22. Juni 2001 zum Haager Adoptionsübereinkommen und über Massnahmen zum Schutz des Kindes bei internationalen Adoptionen, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2003 (AS 2002 3988; BBl 1999 5795).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 Aufgehoben durch Anhang Ziff. 15 des Verwaltungsgerichtsgesetzes vom 17. Juni 2005, mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2007 (AS 2006 2197; BBl 2001 4202).


  Achter Titel: Die Wirkungen des Kindesverhältnisses10 

  Erster Abschnitt: Die Gemeinschaft der Eltern und Kinder11 

Art. 2701A. Name / I. Kind verheirateter Eltern

A. Name

I. Kind verheirateter Eltern

1 Sind die Eltern miteinander verheiratet und tragen sie verschiedene Namen, so erhält das Kind denjenigen ihrer Ledignamen, den sie bei der Eheschliessung zum Namen ihrer gemeinsamen Kinder bestimmt haben.

2 Die Eltern können innerhalb eines Jahres seit der Geburt des ersten Kindes gemeinsam verlangen, dass das Kind den Ledignamen des andern Elternteils trägt.

3 Tragen die Eltern einen gemeinsamen Familiennamen, so erhält das Kind diesen Namen.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 30. Sept. 2011 (Name und Bürgerrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 270a1A. Name / II. Kind unverheirateter Eltern

II. Kind unverheirateter Eltern

1 Steht die elterliche Sorge einem Elternteil zu, so erhält das Kind dessen Ledignamen. Steht die elterliche Sorge den Eltern gemeinsam zu, so bestimmen sie, welchen ihrer Ledignamen ihre Kinder tragen sollen.

2 Wird die gemeinsame elterliche Sorge nach der Geburt des ersten Kindes begründet, so können die Eltern innerhalb eines Jahres seit deren Begründung gegenüber der Zivilstandsbeamtin oder dem Zivilstandsbeamten erklären, dass das Kind den Ledignamen des anderen Elternteils trägt. Diese Erklärung gilt für alle gemeinsamen Kinder, unabhängig von der Zuteilung der elterlichen Sorge.

3 Steht die elterliche Sorge keinem Elternteil zu, so erhält das Kind den Ledignamen der Mutter.

4 Änderungen bei der Zuteilung der elterlichen Sorge bleiben ohne Auswirkungen auf den Namen. Vorbehalten bleiben die Bestimmungen über die Namensänderung.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 30. Sept. 2011 (Name und Bürgerrecht) (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581). Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 21. Juni 2013 (Elterliche Sorge), in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 270b1A. Name / III. Zustimmung des Kindes

III. Zustimmung des Kindes

Hat das Kind das zwölfte Altersjahr vollendet, so kann sein Name nur geändert werden, wenn es zustimmt.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 30. Sept. 2011 (Name und Bürgerrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 2711B. Bürgerrecht

B. Bürgerrecht

1 Das Kind erhält das Kantons- und Gemeindebürgerrecht des Elternteils, dessen Namen es trägt.

2 Erwirbt das Kind während der Minderjährigkeit den Namen des anderen Elternteils, so erhält es dessen Kantons- und Gemeindebürgerrecht anstelle des bisherigen.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 30. Sept. 2011 (Name und Bürgerrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 2721C. Beistand und Gemeinschaft

C. Beistand und Gemeinschaft

Eltern und Kinder sind einander allen Beistand, alle Rücksicht und Achtung schuldig, die das Wohl der Gemeinschaft erfordert.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2731D. Persönlicher Verkehr / I. Eltern und Kinder / 1. Grundsatz

D. Persönlicher Verkehr

I. Eltern und Kinder

1. Grundsatz

1 Eltern, denen die elterliche Sorge oder Obhut nicht zusteht, und das minderjährige Kind haben gegenseitig Anspruch auf angemessenen persönlichen Verkehr.2

2 Die Kindesschutzbehörde kann Eltern, Pflegeeltern oder das Kind ermahnen und ihnen Weisungen erteilen, wenn sich die Ausübung oder Nichtausübung des persönlichen Verkehrs für das Kind nachteilig auswirkt oder wenn eine Ermahnung oder eine Weisung aus anderen Gründen geboten ist.

3 Der Vater oder die Mutter können verlangen, dass ihr Anspruch auf persönlichen Verkehr geregelt wird.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 4 des BG vom 26. Juni 1998, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 2741D. Persönlicher Verkehr / I. Eltern und Kinder / 2. Schranken

2. Schranken

1 Der Vater und die Mutter haben alles zu unterlassen, was das Verhältnis des Kindes zum anderen Elternteil beeinträchtigt oder die Aufgabe der erziehenden Person erschwert.2

2 Wird das Wohl des Kindes durch den persönlichen Verkehr gefährdet, üben die Eltern ihn pflichtwidrig aus, haben sie sich nicht ernsthaft um das Kind gekümmert oder liegen andere wichtige Gründe vor, so kann ihnen das Recht auf persönlichen Verkehr verweigert oder entzogen werden.

3 Haben die Eltern der Adoption ihres Kindes zugestimmt oder kann von ihrer Zustimmung abgesehen werden, so erlischt das Recht auf persönlichen Verkehr, sobald das Kind zum Zwecke künftiger Adoption untergebracht wird.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 4 des BG vom 26. Juni 1998, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

Art. 274a1D. Persönlicher Verkehr / II. Dritte

II. Dritte

1 Liegen ausserordentliche Umstände vor, so kann der Anspruch auf persönlichen Verkehr auch andern Personen, insbesondere Verwandten, eingeräumt werden, sofern dies dem Wohle des Kindes dient.

2 Die für die Eltern aufgestellten Schranken des Besuchsrechtes gelten sinngemäss.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2751D. Persönlicher Verkehr / III. Zuständigkeit

III. Zuständigkeit

1 Für Anordnungen über den persönlichen Verkehr ist die Kindesschutzbehörde am Wohnsitz des Kindes zuständig und, sofern sie Kindesschutzmassnahmen getroffen hat oder trifft, diejenige an seinem Aufenthaltsort.

2 Regelt das Gericht nach den Bestimmungen über die Ehescheidung und den Schutz der ehelichen Gemeinschaft die elterliche Sorge, die Obhut oder den Unterhaltsbeitrag, so regelt es auch den persönlichen Verkehr.2

3 Bestehen noch keine Anordnungen über den Anspruch von Vater und Mutter, so kann der persönliche Verkehr nicht gegen den Willen der Person ausgeübt werden, welcher die elterliche Sorge oder Obhut zusteht.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 4 des BG vom 26. Juni 1998, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 21. Juni 2013 (Elterliche Sorge), in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 275a1E. Information und Auskunft

E. Information und Auskunft

1 Eltern ohne elterliche Sorge sollen über besondere Ereignisse im Leben des Kindes benachrichtigt und vor Entscheidungen, die für die Entwicklung des Kindes wichtig sind, angehört werden.

2 Sie können bei Drittpersonen, die an der Betreuung des Kindes beteiligt sind, wie namentlich bei Lehrkräften, Ärztinnen und Ärzten, in gleicher Weise wie der Inhaber der elterlichen Sorge Auskünfte über den Zustand und die Entwicklung des Kindes einholen.

3 Die Bestimmungen über die Schranken des persönlichen Verkehrs und die Zuständigkeit gelten sinngemäss.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 4 des BG vom 26. Juni 1998, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).


  Zweiter Abschnitt: Die Unterhaltspflicht der Eltern12 

Art. 2761A. Allgemeines / I. Gegenstand und Umfang

A. Allgemeines

I. Gegenstand und Umfang2

1 Der Unterhalt wird durch Pflege, Erziehung und Geldzahlung geleistet.3

2 Die Eltern sorgen gemeinsam, ein jeder Elternteil nach seinen Kräften, für den gebührenden Unterhalt des Kindes und tragen insbesondere die Kosten von Betreuung, Erziehung, Ausbildung und Kindesschutzmassnahmen.4

3 Die Eltern sind von der Unterhaltspflicht in dem Mass befreit, als dem Kinde zugemutet werden kann, den Unterhalt aus seinem Arbeitserwerb oder andern Mitteln zu bestreiten.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 20. März 2015 (Kindesunterhalt), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).
3 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 20. März 2015 (Kindesunterhalt), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).
4 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 20. März 2015 (Kindesunterhalt), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 276a1A. Allgemeines / II. Vorrang der Unterhaltspflicht gegenüber einem minderjährigen Kind

II. Vorrang der Unterhaltspflicht gegenüber einem minderjährigen Kind

1 Die Unterhaltspflicht gegenüber dem minderjährigen Kind geht den anderen familienrechtlichen Unterhaltspflichten vor.

2 In begründeten Fällen kann das Gericht von dieser Regel absehen, insbesondere um eine Benachteiligung des unterhaltsberechtigten volljährigen Kindes zu vermeiden.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 20. März 2015 (Kindesunterhalt), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 2771B. Dauer

B. Dauer

1 Die Unterhaltspflicht der Eltern dauert bis zur Volljährigkeit des Kindes.2

2 Hat es dann noch keine angemessene Ausbildung, so haben die Eltern, soweit es ihnen nach den gesamten Umständen zugemutet werden darf, für seinen Unterhalt aufzukommen, bis eine entsprechende Ausbildung ordentlicherweise abgeschlossen werden kann.3


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 7. Okt. 1994, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1996 (AS 1995 1126; BBl 1993 I 1169).

Art. 2781C. Verheiratete Eltern

C. Verheiratete Eltern

1 Während der Ehe tragen die Eltern die Kosten des Unterhaltes nach den Bestimmungen des Eherechts.

2 Jeder Ehegatte hat dem andern in der Erfüllung der Unterhaltspflicht gegenüber vorehelichen Kindern in angemessener Weise beizustehen.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2791D. Klage / I. Klagerecht

D. Klage

I. Klagerecht2

1 Das Kind kann gegen den Vater oder die Mutter oder gegen beide klagen auf Leistung des Unterhalts für die Zukunft und für ein Jahr vor Klageerhebung.

2–3 ...3


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 2 des Gerichtsstandsgesetzes vom 24. März 2000, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).
3 Aufgehoben durch Anhang Ziff. 2 des Gerichtsstandsgesetzes vom 24. März 2000, mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).

Art. 2802841D. Klage / II. und III. ...

II. und III. ...


1 Aufgehoben durch Anhang 1 Ziff. II 3 der Zivilprozessordnung vom 19. Dez. 2008, mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 2851D. Klage / IV. Bemessung des Unterhalts-beitrages / 1. Beitrag der Eltern

IV. Bemessung des Unterhalts-beitrages

1. Beitrag der Eltern

1 Der Unterhaltsbeitrag soll den Bedürfnissen des Kindes sowie der Lebensstellung und Leistungsfähigkeit der Eltern entsprechen; dabei sind das Vermögen und die Einkünfte des Kindes zu berücksichtigen.

2 Der Unterhaltsbeitrag dient auch der Gewährleistung der Betreuung des Kindes durch die Eltern oder Dritte.

3 Er ist zum Voraus zu entrichten. Das Gericht setzt die Zahlungstermine fest.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 20. März 2015 (Kindesunterhalt), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 285a1D. Klage / IV. Bemessung des Unterhalts-beitrages / 2. Andere für den Unterhalt des Kindes bestimmte Leistungen

2. Andere für den Unterhalt des Kindes bestimmte Leistungen

1 Familienzulagen, die dem unterhaltspflichtigen Elternteil ausgerichtet werden, sind zusätzlich zum Unterhaltsbeitrag zu zahlen.

2 Sozialversicherungsrenten und ähnliche für den Unterhalt des Kindes bestimmte Leistungen, die dem unterhaltspflichtigen Elternteil zustehen, sind zusätzlich zum Unterhaltsbeitrag zu zahlen, soweit das Gericht es nicht anders bestimmt.

3 Erhält der unterhaltspflichtige Elternteil infolge Alter oder Invalidität nachträglich Sozialversicherungsrenten oder ähnliche für den Unterhalt des Kindes bestimmte Leistungen, die Erwerbseinkommen ersetzen, so hat er diese Beträge an das Kind zu zahlen; der bisherige Unterhaltsbeitrag vermindert sich von Gesetzes wegen im Umfang dieser neuen Leistungen.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 20. März 2015 (Kindesunterhalt), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 2861D. Klage / V. Veränderung der Verhältnisse / 1. Im Allgemeinen

V. Veränderung der Verhältnisse

1. Im Allgemeinen2

1 Das Gericht kann anordnen, dass der Unterhaltsbeitrag sich bei bestimmten Veränderungen der Bedürfnisse des Kindes oder der Leistungsfähigkeit der Eltern oder der Lebenskosten ohne weiteres erhöht oder vermindert.

2 Bei erheblicher Veränderung der Verhältnisse setzt das Gericht den Unterhaltsbeitrag auf Antrag eines Elternteils oder des Kindes neu fest oder hebt ihn auf.

3 Bei nicht vorhergesehenen ausserordentlichen Bedürfnissen des Kindes kann das Gericht die Eltern zur Leistung eines besonderen Beitrags verpflichten.3


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 20. März 2015 (Kindesunterhalt), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).
3 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 4 des BG vom 26. Juni 1998, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

Art. 286a1D. Klage / V. Veränderung der Verhältnisse / 2. Mankofälle

2. Mankofälle

1 Wurde in einem genehmigten Unterhaltsvertrag oder in einem Entscheid festgestellt, dass kein Unterhaltsbeitrag festgelegt werden konnte, der den gebührenden Unterhalt des Kindes deckt, und haben sich seither die Verhältnisse des unterhaltspflichtigen Elternteils ausserordentlich verbessert, so hat das Kind Anspruch darauf, dass dieser Elternteil diejenigen Beträge zahlt, die während der letzten fünf Jahre, in denen der Unterhaltsbeitrag geschuldet war, zur Deckung des gebührenden Unterhalts fehlten.

2 Der Anspruch muss innerhalb eines Jahres seit Kenntnis der ausserordentlichen Verbesserung geltend gemacht werden.

3 Dieser Anspruch geht mit allen Rechten auf den anderen Elternteil oder auf das Gemeinwesen über, soweit dieser Elternteil oder das Gemeinwesen für den fehlenden Anteil des gebührenden Unterhalts aufgekommen ist.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 20. März 2015 (Kindesunterhalt), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 2871E. Verträge über die Unterhaltspflicht / I. Periodische Leistungen

E. Verträge über die Unterhaltspflicht

I. Periodische Leistungen

1 Unterhaltsverträge werden für das Kind erst mit der Genehmigung durch die Kindesschutzbehörde verbindlich.

2 Vertraglich festgelegte Unterhaltsbeiträge können geändert werden, soweit dies nicht mit Genehmigung der Kindesschutzbehörde ausgeschlossen worden ist.

3 Wird der Vertrag in einem gerichtlichen Verfahren geschlossen, so ist für die Genehmigung das Gericht zuständig.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 287a1E. Verträge über die Unterhaltspflicht / II. Inhalt des Unterhalts-vertrages

II. Inhalt des Unterhalts-vertrages

Werden im Unterhaltsvertrag Unterhaltsbeiträge festgelegt, so ist darin anzugeben:

a.
von welchem Einkommen und Vermögen jedes Elternteils und jedes Kindes ausgegangen wird;
b.
welcher Betrag für jedes Kind bestimmt ist;
c.
welcher Betrag zur Deckung des gebührenden Unterhalts jedes Kindes fehlt;
d.
ob und in welchem Ausmass die Unterhaltsbeiträge den Veränderungen der Lebenskosten angepasst werden.

1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 20. März 2015 (Kindesunterhalt), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 2881E. Verträge über die Unterhaltspflicht / III. Abfindung

III. Abfindung2

1 Die Abfindung des Kindes für seinen Unterhaltsanspruch kann vereinbart werden, wenn sein Interesse es rechtfertigt.

2 Die Vereinbarung wird für das Kind erst verbindlich:

1.
wenn die Kindesschutzbehörde, oder bei Abschluss in einem gerichtlichen Verfahren, das Gericht die Genehmigung erteilt hat, und
2.
wenn die Abfindungssumme an die dabei bezeichnete Stelle entrichtet worden ist.

1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Ursprünglich Ziff. II.

Art. 2891F. Erfüllung / I. Gläubiger

F. Erfüllung

I. Gläubiger

1 Der Anspruch auf Unterhaltsbeiträge steht dem Kind zu und wird, solange das Kind minderjährig ist, durch Leistung an dessen gesetzlichen Vertreter oder den Inhaber der Obhut erfüllt, soweit das Gericht es nicht anders bestimmt.2

2 Kommt jedoch das Gemeinwesen für den Unterhalt auf, so geht der Unterhaltsanspruch mit allen Rechten auf das Gemeinwesen über.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 20. März 2015 (Kindesunterhalt), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 2901F. Erfüllung / II. Vollstreckung / 1. Inkassohilfe

II. Vollstreckung

1. Inkassohilfe

1 Erfüllt der Vater oder die Mutter die Unterhaltspflicht nicht, so hilft eine vom kantonalen Recht bezeichnete Fachstelle auf Gesuch hin dem Kind sowie dem anderen Elternteil bei der Vollstreckung des Unterhaltsanspruches in geeigneter Weise und unentgeltlich.

2 Der Bundesrat legt die Leistungen der Inkassohilfe fest.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 20. März 2015 (Kindesunterhalt), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 2911F. Erfüllung / II. Vollstreckung / 2. Anweisungen an die Schuldner

2. Anweisungen an die Schuldner

Wenn die Eltern die Sorge für das Kind vernachlässigen, kann das Gericht ihre Schuldner anweisen, die Zahlungen ganz oder zum Teil an den gesetzlichen Vertreter des Kindes zu leisten.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2921F. Erfüllung / III. Sicherstellung

III. Sicherstellung

Vernachlässigen die Eltern beharrlich die Erfüllung ihrer Unterhaltspflicht, oder ist anzunehmen, dass sie Anstalten zur Flucht treffen oder ihr Vermögen verschleudern oder beiseite schaffen, so kann das Gericht sie verpflichten, für die künftigen Unterhaltsbeiträge angemessene Sicherheit zu leisten.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2931G. Öffentliches Recht

G. Öffentliches Recht

1 Das öffentliche Recht bestimmt, unter Vorbehalt der Unterstützungspflicht der Verwandten, wer die Kosten des Unterhaltes zu tragen hat, wenn weder die Eltern noch das Kind sie bestreiten können.

2 Ausserdem regelt das öffentliche Recht die Ausrichtung von Vorschüssen für den Unterhalt des Kindes, wenn die Eltern ihrer Unterhaltspflicht nicht nachkommen.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2941H. Pflegeeltern

H. Pflegeeltern

1 Pflegeeltern haben Anspruch auf ein angemessenes Pflegegeld, sofern nichts Abweichendes vereinbart ist oder sich eindeutig aus den Umständen ergibt.

2 Unentgeltlichkeit ist zu vermuten, wenn Kinder von nahen Verwandten oder zum Zweck späterer Adoption aufgenommen werden.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2951J. Ansprüche der unverheirateten Mutter

J. Ansprüche der unverheirateten Mutter

1 Die Mutter kann spätestens bis ein Jahr nach der Geburt gegen den Vater oder dessen Erben auf Ersatz klagen:2

1.
für die Entbindungskosten;
2.
für die Kosten des Unterhaltes während mindestens vier Wochen vor und mindestens acht Wochen nach der Geburt;
3.
für andere infolge der Schwangerschaft oder der Entbindung notwendig gewordene Auslagen unter Einschluss der ersten Ausstattung des Kindes.

2 Aus Billigkeit kann das Gericht teilweisen oder vollständigen Ersatz der entsprechenden Kosten zusprechen, wenn die Schwangerschaft vorzeitig beendigt wird.

3 Leistungen Dritter, auf welche die Mutter nach Gesetz oder Vertrag Anspruch hat, sind anzurechnen, soweit es die Umstände rechtfertigen.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Fassung gemäss Anhang 1 Ziff. II 3 der Zivilprozessordnung vom 19. Dez. 2008, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).


  Dritter Abschnitt: Die elterliche Sorge13 

Art. 2961A. Grundsätze

A. Grundsätze

1 Die elterliche Sorge dient dem Wohl des Kindes.

2 Die Kinder stehen, solange sie minderjährig sind, unter der gemeinsamen elterlichen Sorge von Vater und Mutter.

3 Minderjährigen Eltern sowie Eltern unter umfassender Beistandschaft steht keine elterliche Sorge zu. Werden die Eltern volljährig, so kommt ihnen die elterliche Sorge zu. Wird die umfassende Beistandschaft aufgehoben, so entscheidet die Kindesschutzbehörde entsprechend dem Kindeswohl über die Zuteilung der elterlichen Sorge.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 21. Juni 2013 (Elterliche Sorge), in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 2971Abis. Tod eines Elternteils

Abis. Tod eines Elternteils

1 Üben die Eltern die elterliche Sorge gemeinsam aus und stirbt ein Elternteil, so steht die elterliche Sorge dem überlebenden Elternteil zu.

2 Stirbt der Elternteil, dem die elterliche Sorge allein zustand, so überträgt die Kindesschutzbehörde die elterliche Sorge auf den überlebenden Elternteil oder bestellt dem Kind einen Vormund, je nachdem, was zur Wahrung des Kindeswohls besser geeignet ist.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 21. Juni 2013 (Elterliche Sorge), in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 2981Ater. Scheidung und andere eherechtliche Verfahren

Ater. Scheidung und andere eherechtliche Verfahren

1 In einem Scheidungs- oder Eheschutzverfahren überträgt das Gericht einem Elternteil die alleinige elterliche Sorge, wenn dies zur Wahrung des Kindeswohls nötig ist.

2 Es kann sich auch auf eine Regelung der Obhut, des persönlichen Verkehrs oder der Betreuungsanteile beschränken, wenn keine Aussicht besteht, dass sich die Eltern diesbezüglich einigen.

2bis Es berücksichtigt beim Entscheid über die Obhut, den persönlichen Verkehr oder die Betreuungsanteile das Recht des Kindes, regelmässige persönliche Beziehungen zu beiden Elternteilen zu pflegen.2

2ter Bei gemeinsamer elterlicher Sorge prüft es im Sinne des Kindeswohls die Möglichkeit einer alternierenden Obhut, wenn ein Elternteil oder das Kind dies verlangt.3

3 Es fordert die Kindesschutzbehörde auf, dem Kind einen Vormund zu bestellen, wenn weder die Mutter noch der Vater für die Übernahme der elterlichen Sorge in Frage kommt.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 21. Juni 2013 (Elterliche Sorge), in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).
2 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 20. März 2015 (Kindesunterhalt), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).
3 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 20. März 2015 (Kindesunterhalt), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 298a1Aquater. Anerkennung und Vaterschaftsurteil / I. Gemeinsame Erklärung der Eltern

Aquater. Anerkennung und Vaterschaftsurteil

I. Gemeinsame Erklärung der Eltern

1 Sind die Eltern nicht miteinander verheiratet und anerkennt der Vater das Kind oder wird das Kindesverhältnis durch Urteil festgestellt und die gemeinsame elterliche Sorge nicht bereits im Zeitpunkt des Urteils verfügt, so kommt die gemeinsame elterliche Sorge aufgrund einer gemeinsamen Erklärung der Eltern zustande.

2 In der Erklärung bestätigen die Eltern, dass sie:

1.
bereit sind, gemeinsam die Verantwortung für das Kind zu übernehmen; und
2.
sich über die Obhut und den persönlichen Verkehr oder die Betreuungsanteile sowie über den Unterhaltsbeitrag für das Kind verständigt haben.

3 Vor der Abgabe der Erklärung können sich die Eltern von der Kindesschutzbehörde beraten lassen.

4 Geben die Eltern die Erklärung zusammen mit der Anerkennung ab, so richten sie sie an das Zivilstandsamt. Eine spätere Erklärung haben sie an die Kindesschutzbehörde am Wohnsitz des Kindes zu richten.

5 Bis die Erklärung vorliegt, steht die elterliche Sorge allein der Mutter zu.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 4 des BG vom 26. Juni 1998 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1). Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 21. Juni 2013 (Elterliche Sorge), in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 298b1Aquater. Anerkennung und Vaterschaftsurteil / II. Entscheid der Kindesschutzbehörde

II. Entscheid der Kindesschutzbehörde

1 Weigert sich ein Elternteil, die Erklärung über die gemeinsame elterliche Sorge abzugeben, so kann der andere Elternteil die Kindesschutzbehörde am Wohnsitz des Kindes anrufen.

2 Die Kindesschutzbehörde verfügt die gemeinsame elterliche Sorge, sofern nicht zur Wahrung des Kindeswohls an der alleinigen elterlichen Sorge der Mutter festzuhalten oder die alleinige elterliche Sorge dem Vater zu übertragen ist.

3 Zusammen mit dem Entscheid über die elterliche Sorge regelt die Kindesschutzbehörde die übrigen strittigen Punkte. Vorbehalten bleibt die Klage auf Leistung des Unterhalts an das zuständige Gericht; in diesem Fall entscheidet das Gericht auch über die elterliche Sorge sowie die weiteren Kinderbelange.2

3bis Die Kindesschutzbehörde berücksichtigt beim Entscheid über die Obhut, den persönlichen Verkehr oder die Betreuungsanteile das Recht des Kindes, regelmässige persönliche Beziehungen zu beiden Elternteilen zu pflegen.3

3ter Bei gemeinsamer elterlicher Sorge prüft sie im Sinne des Kindeswohls die Möglichkeit einer alternierenden Obhut, wenn ein Elternteil oder das Kind dies verlangt.4

4 Ist die Mutter minderjährig oder steht sie unter umfassender Beistandschaft, so weist die Kindesschutzbehörde die elterliche Sorge dem Vater zu oder bestellt dem Kind einen Vormund, je nachdem, was zur Wahrung des Kindeswohls besser geeignet ist.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 21. Juni 2013 (Elterliche Sorge), in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).
2 Fassung des zweiten Satzes gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 20. März 2015 (Kindesunterhalt), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).
3 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 20. März 2015 (Kindesunterhalt), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).
4 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 20. März 2015 (Kindesunterhalt), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 298c1Aquater. Anerkennung und Vaterschaftsurteil / III. Vaterschaftsklage

III. Vaterschaftsklage

Heisst das Gericht eine Vaterschaftsklage gut, so verfügt es die gemeinsame elterliche Sorge, sofern nicht zur Wahrung des Kindeswohls an der alleinigen elterlichen Sorge der Mutter festzuhalten oder die alleinige elterliche Sorge dem Vater zu übertragen ist.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 21. Juni 2013 (Elterliche Sorge), in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 298d1Aquater. Anerkennung und Vaterschaftsurteil / IV. Veränderung der Verhältnisse

IV. Veränderung der Verhältnisse

1 Auf Begehren eines Elternteils, des Kindes oder von Amtes wegen regelt die Kindesschutzbehörde die Zuteilung der elterlichen Sorge neu, wenn dies wegen wesentlicher Änderung der Verhältnisse zur Wahrung des Kindeswohls nötig ist.

2 Sie kann sich auf die Regelung der Obhut, des persönlichen Verkehrs oder der Betreuungsanteile beschränken.

3 Vorbehalten bleibt die Klage auf Änderung des Unterhaltsbeitrags an das zuständige Gericht; in diesem Fall regelt das Gericht nötigenfalls die elterliche Sorge sowie die weiteren Kinderbelange neu.2


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 21. Juni 2013 (Elterliche Sorge), in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).
2 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 20. März 2015 (Kindesunterhalt), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 298e1Aquinquies. Veränderung der Verhältnisse nach Stiefkindadoption in faktischen Lebensgemeinschaften

Aquinquies. Veränderung der Verhältnisse nach Stiefkindadoption in faktischen Lebensgemeinschaften

Hat eine Person das Kind adoptiert, mit dessen Mutter oder Vater sie eine faktische Lebensgemeinschaft führt, und tritt eine wesentliche Änderung der Verhältnisse ein, so ist die Bestimmung über die Veränderung der Verhältnisse bei Anerkennung und Vaterschaftsurteil sinngemäss anwendbar.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 17. Juni 2016 (Adoption), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 2991Asexies. Stiefeltern

Asexies. Stiefeltern2

Jeder Ehegatte hat dem andern in der Ausübung der elterlichen Sorge gegenüber dessen Kindern in angemessener Weise beizustehen und ihn zu vertreten, wenn es die Umstände erfordern.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 17. Juni 2016 (Adoption), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 3001Asepties. Pflegeeltern

Asepties. Pflegeeltern2

1 Wird ein Kind Dritten zur Pflege anvertraut, so vertreten sie, unter Vorbehalt abweichender Anordnungen, die Eltern in der Ausübung der elterlichen Sorge, soweit es zur gehörigen Erfüllung ihrer Aufgabe angezeigt ist.

2 Vor wichtigen Entscheidungen sollen die Pflegeeltern angehört werden.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 17. Juni 2016 (Adoption), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 3011B. Inhalt / I. Im Allgemeinen

B. Inhalt

I. Im Allgemeinen

1 Die Eltern leiten im Blick auf das Wohl des Kindes seine Pflege und Erziehung und treffen unter Vorbehalt seiner eigenen Handlungsfähigkeit die nötigen Entscheidungen.

1bis Der Elternteil, der das Kind betreut, kann allein entscheiden, wenn:

1.
die Angelegenheit alltäglich oder dringlich ist;
2.
der andere Elternteil nicht mit vernünftigem Aufwand zu erreichen ist.2

2 Das Kind schuldet den Eltern Gehorsam; die Eltern gewähren dem Kind die seiner Reife entsprechende Freiheit der Lebensgestaltung und nehmen in wichtigen Angelegenheiten, soweit tunlich, auf seine Meinung Rücksicht.

3 Das Kind darf ohne Einwilligung der Eltern die häusliche Gemeinschaft nicht verlassen; es darf ihnen auch nicht widerrechtlich entzogen werden.

4 Die Eltern geben dem Kind den Vornamen.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 21. Juni 2013 (Elterliche Sorge), in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 301a1B. Inhalt / II. Bestimmung des Aufenthaltsortes

II. Bestimmung des Aufenthaltsortes

1 Die elterliche Sorge schliesst das Recht ein, den Aufenthaltsort des Kindes zu bestimmen.

2 Üben die Eltern die elterliche Sorge gemeinsam aus und will ein Elternteil den Aufenthaltsort des Kindes wechseln, so bedarf dies der Zustimmung des andern Elternteils oder der Entscheidung des Gerichts oder der Kindesschutzbehörde, wenn:

a.
der neue Aufenthaltsort im Ausland liegt; oder
b.
der Wechsel des Aufenthaltsortes erhebliche Auswirkungen auf die Ausübung der elterlichen Sorge und den persönlichen Verkehr durch den andern Elternteil hat.

3 Übt ein Elternteil die elterliche Sorge allein aus und will er den Aufenthaltsort des Kindes wechseln, so muss er den anderen Elternteil rechtzeitig darüber informieren.

4 Dieselbe Informationspflicht hat ein Elternteil, der seinen eigenen Wohnsitz wechseln will.

5 Soweit dies erforderlich ist, verständigen sich die Eltern unter Wahrung des Kindeswohls über eine Anpassung der Regelung der elterlichen Sorge, der Obhut, des persönlichen Verkehrs und des Unterhaltsbeitrages. Können sie sich nicht einigen, entscheidet das Gericht oder die Kindesschutzbehörde.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 21. Juni 2013 (Elterliche Sorge), in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 3021B. Inhalt / III. Erziehung

III. Erziehung2

1 Die Eltern haben das Kind ihren Verhältnissen entsprechend zu erziehen und seine körperliche, geistige und sittliche Entfaltung zu fördern und zu schützen.

2 Sie haben dem Kind, insbesondere auch dem körperlich oder geistig gebrechlichen, eine angemessene, seinen Fähigkeiten und Neigungen soweit möglich entsprechende allgemeine und berufliche Ausbildung zu verschaffen.

3 Zu diesem Zweck sollen sie in geeigneter Weise mit der Schule und, wo es die Umstände erfordern, mit der öffentlichen und gemeinnützigen Jugendhilfe zusammenarbeiten.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 21. Juni 2013 (Elterliche Sorge), in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 3031B. Inhalt / IV. Religiöse Erziehung

IV. Religiöse Erziehung2

1 Über die religiöse Erziehung verfügen die Eltern.

2 Ein Vertrag, der diese Befugnis beschränkt, ist ungültig.

3 Hat ein Kind das 16. Altersjahr zurückgelegt, so entscheidet es selbständig über sein religiöses Bekenntnis.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 21. Juni 2013 (Elterliche Sorge), in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 3041B. Inhalt / V. Vertretung / 1. Dritten gegenüber / a. Im Allgemeinen

V. Vertretung

1. Dritten gegenüber

a. Im Allgemeinen2

1 Die Eltern haben von Gesetzes wegen die Vertretung des Kindes gegenüber Drittpersonen im Umfang der ihnen zustehenden elterlichen Sorge.3

2 Sind beide Eltern Inhaber der elterlichen Sorge, so dürfen gutgläubige Drittpersonen voraussetzen, dass jeder Elternteil im Einvernehmen mit dem andern handelt.4

3 Die Eltern dürfen in Vertretung des Kindes keine Bürgschaften eingehen, keine Stiftungen errichten und keine Schenkungen vornehmen, mit Ausnahme der üblichen Gelegenheitsgeschenke.5


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 21. Juni 2013 (Elterliche Sorge), in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).
3 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 4 des BG vom 26. Juni 1998, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
4 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 4 des BG vom 26. Juni 1998, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
5 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 3051B. Inhalt / V. Vertretung / 1. Dritten gegenüber / b. Rechtsstellung des Kindes

b. Rechtsstellung des Kindes2

1 Das urteilsfähige Kind unter elterlicher Sorge kann im Rahmen des Personenrechts durch eigenes Handeln Rechte und Pflichten begründen und höchstpersönliche Rechte ausüben.3

2 Für Verpflichtungen des Kindes haftet sein Vermögen ohne Rücksicht auf die elterlichen Vermögensrechte.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 3061B. Inhalt / V. Vertretung / 2. Innerhalb der Gemeinschaft

2. Innerhalb der Gemeinschaft

1 Urteilsfähige Kinder, die unter elterlicher Sorge stehen, können mit Zustimmung der Eltern für die Gemeinschaft handeln, verpflichten damit aber nicht sich selbst, sondern die Eltern.2

2 Sind die Eltern am Handeln verhindert oder haben sie in einer Angelegenheit Interessen, die denen des Kindes widersprechen, so ernennt die Kindesschutzbehörde einen Beistand oder regelt diese Angelegenheit selber.3

3 Bei Interessenkollision entfallen von Gesetzes wegen die Befugnisse der Eltern in der entsprechenden Angelegenheit.4


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 4 des BG vom 26. Juni 1998, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
3 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
4 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 3071C. Kindesschutz / I. Geeignete Massnahmen

C. Kindesschutz

I. Geeignete Massnahmen

1 Ist das Wohl des Kindes gefährdet und sorgen die Eltern nicht von sich aus für Abhilfe oder sind sie dazu ausserstande, so trifft die Kindesschutzbehörde die geeigneten Massnahmen zum Schutz des Kindes.

2 Die Kindesschutzbehörde ist dazu auch gegenüber Kindern verpflichtet, die bei Pflegeeltern untergebracht sind oder sonst ausserhalb der häuslichen Gemeinschaft der Eltern leben.

3 Sie kann insbesondere die Eltern, die Pflegeeltern oder das Kind ermahnen, ihnen bestimmte Weisungen für die Pflege, Erziehung oder Ausbildung erteilen und eine geeignete Person oder Stelle bestimmen, der Einblick und Auskunft zu geben ist.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 3081C. Kindesschutz / II. Beistandschaft

II. Beistandschaft2

1 Erfordern es die Verhältnisse, so ernennt die Kindesschutzbehörde dem Kind einen Beistand, der die Eltern in ihrer Sorge um das Kind mit Rat und Tat unterstützt.

2 Sie kann dem Beistand besondere Befugnisse übertragen, namentlich die Vertretung des Kindes bei der Feststellung der Vaterschaft, bei der Wahrung seines Unterhaltsanspruches und anderer Rechte und die Überwachung des persönlichen Verkehrs.3

3 Die elterliche Sorge kann entsprechend beschränkt werden.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 21. Juni 2013 (Elterliche Sorge), in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).
3 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 21. Juni 2013 (Elterliche Sorge), in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 3091

1 Aufgehoben durch Ziff. I des BG vom 21. Juni 2013 (Elterliche Sorge), mit Wirkung seit 1. Juli 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 3101C. Kindesschutz / III. Aufhebung des Aufenthaltsbestimmungsrechts

III. Aufhebung des Aufenthaltsbestimmungsrechts2

1 Kann der Gefährdung des Kindes nicht anders begegnet werden, so hat die Kindesschutzbehörde es den Eltern oder, wenn es sich bei Dritten befindet, diesen wegzunehmen und in angemessener Weise unterzubringen.

2 Die gleiche Anordnung trifft die Kindesschutzbehörde auf Begehren der Eltern oder des Kindes, wenn das Verhältnis so schwer gestört ist, dass das Verbleiben des Kindes im gemeinsamen Haushalt unzumutbar geworden ist und nach den Umständen nicht anders geholfen werden kann.

3 Hat ein Kind längere Zeit bei Pflegeeltern gelebt, so kann die Kindesschutzbehörde den Eltern seine Rücknahme untersagen, wenn diese die Entwicklung des Kindes ernstlich zu gefährden droht.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 21. Juni 2013 (Elterliche Sorge), in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 3111C. Kindesschutz / IV. Entziehung der elterlichen Sorge / 1. Von Amtes wegen

IV. Entziehung der elterlichen Sorge

1. Von Amtes wegen2

1 Sind andere Kindesschutzmassnahmen erfolglos geblieben oder erscheinen sie von vornherein als ungenügend, so entzieht die Kindesschutzbehörde die elterliche Sorge:3

1.4
wenn die Eltern wegen Unerfahrenheit, Krankheit, Gebrechen, Abwesenheit, Gewalttätigkeit oder ähnlichen Gründen ausserstande sind, die elterliche Sorge pflichtgemäss auszuüben;
2.
wenn die Eltern sich um das Kind nicht ernstlich gekümmert oder ihre Pflichten gegenüber dem Kinde gröblich verletzt haben.

2 Wird beiden Eltern die Sorge entzogen, so erhalten die Kinder einen Vormund.

3 Die Entziehung ist, wenn nicht ausdrücklich das Gegenteil angeordnet wird, gegenüber allen, auch den später geborenen Kindern wirksam.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
4 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 21. Juni 2013 (Elterliche Sorge), in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 3121C. Kindesschutz / IV. Entziehung der elterlichen Sorge / 2. Mit Einverständnis der Eltern

2. Mit Einverständnis der Eltern2

Die Kindesschutzbehörde entzieht die elterliche Sorge:3

1.
wenn die Eltern aus wichtigen Gründen darum nachsuchen;
2.
wenn sie in eine künftige Adoption des Kindes durch ungenannte Dritte eingewilligt haben.

1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 3131C. Kindesschutz / V. Änderung der Verhältnisse

V. Änderung der Verhältnisse

1 Verändern sich die Verhältnisse, so sind die Massnahmen zum Schutz des Kindes der neuen Lage anzupassen.

2 Die elterliche Sorge darf in keinem Fall vor Ablauf eines Jahres nach ihrer Entziehung wiederhergestellt werden.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 3141C. Kindesschutz / VI. Verfahren / 1. Im Allgemeinen

VI. Verfahren

1. Im Allgemeinen

1 Die Bestimmungen über das Verfahren vor der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde sind sinngemäss anwendbar.

2 Die Kindesschutzbehörde kann in geeigneten Fällen die Eltern zu einem Mediationsversuch auffordern.

3 Errichtet die Kindesschutzbehörde eine Beistandschaft, so hält sie im Entscheiddispositiv die Aufgaben des Beistandes und allfällige Beschränkungen der elterlichen Sorge fest.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 314a1C. Kindesschutz / VI. Verfahren / 2. Anhörung des Kindes

2. Anhörung des Kindes

1 Das Kind wird durch die Kindesschutzbehörde oder durch eine beauftragte Drittperson in geeigneter Weise persönlich angehört, soweit nicht sein Alter oder andere wichtige Gründe dagegen sprechen.

2 Im Protokoll der Anhörung werden nur die für den Entscheid wesentlichen Ergebnisse festgehalten. Die Eltern werden über diese Ergebnisse informiert.

3 Das urteilsfähige Kind kann die Verweigerung der Anhörung mit Beschwerde anfechten.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. II des BG vom 6. Okt. 1978 (AS 1980 31; BBl 1977 III 1). Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 314abis1C. Kindesschutz / VI. Verfahren / 3. Vertretung des Kindes

3. Vertretung des Kindes

1 Die Kindesschutzbehörde ordnet wenn nötig die Vertretung des Kindes an und bezeichnet als Beistand eine in fürsorgerischen und rechtlichen Fragen erfahrene Person.

2 Die Kindesschutzbehörde prüft die Anordnung der Vertretung insbesondere, wenn:

1.
die Unterbringung des Kindes Gegenstand des Verfahrens ist;
2.
die Beteiligten bezüglich der Regelung der elterlichen Sorge oder bezüglich wichtiger Fragen des persönlichen Verkehrs unterschiedliche Anträge stellen.

3 Der Beistand des Kindes kann Anträge stellen und Rechtsmittel einlegen.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 314b1C. Kindesschutz / VI. Verfahren / 4. Unterbringung in einer geschlossenen Einrichtung oder psychiatrischen Klinik

4. Unterbringung in einer geschlossenen Einrichtung oder psychiatrischen Klinik

1 Muss das Kind in einer geschlossenen Einrichtung oder in einer psychiatrischen Klinik untergebracht werden, so sind die Bestimmungen des Erwachsenenschutzes über die fürsorgerische Unterbringung sinngemäss anwendbar.

2 Ist das Kind urteilsfähig, so kann es selber das Gericht anrufen.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 314c1C. Kindesschutz / VI. Verfahren / 5. Melderechte

1 Jede Person kann der Kindesschutzbehörde Meldung erstatten, wenn die körperliche, psychische oder sexuelle Integrität eines Kindes gefährdet erscheint.

5. Melderechte

2 Liegt eine Meldung im Interesse des Kindes, so sind auch Personen meldeberechtigt, die dem Berufsgeheimnis nach dem Strafgesetzbuch2 unterstehen. Diese Bestimmung gilt nicht für die nach dem Strafgesetzbuch an das Berufsgeheimnis gebundenen Hilfspersonen.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 15. Dez. 2017 (Kindesschutz), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 2947; BBl 2015 3431).
2 SR 311.0

Art. 314d1C. Kindesschutz / VI. Verfahren / 6. Meldepflichten

6. Meldepflichten

1 Folgende Personen, soweit sie nicht dem Berufsgeheimnis nach dem Strafgesetzbuch2 unterstehen, sind zur Meldung verpflichtet, wenn konkrete Hinweise dafür bestehen, dass die körperliche, psychische oder sexuelle Integrität eines Kindes gefährdet ist und sie der Gefährdung nicht im Rahmen ihrer Tätigkeit Abhilfe schaffen können:

1.
Fachpersonen aus den Bereichen Medizin, Psychologie, Pflege, Betreuung, Erziehung, Bildung, Sozialberatung, Religion und Sport, die beruflich regelmässig Kontakt zu Kindern haben;
2.
wer in amtlicher Tätigkeit von einem solchen Fall erfährt.

2 Die Meldepflicht erfüllt auch, wer die Meldung an die vorgesetzte Person richtet.

3 Die Kantone können weitere Meldepflichten vorsehen.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 15. Dez. 2017 (Kindesschutz), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 2947; BBl 2015 3431).
2 SR 311.0

Art. 314e1C. Kindesschutz / VI. Verfahren / 7. Mitwirkung und Amtshilfe

7. Mitwirkung und Amtshilfe

1 Die am Verfahren beteiligten Personen und Dritte sind zur Mitwirkung bei der Abklärung des Sachverhalts verpflichtet. Die Kindesschutzbehörde trifft die zur Wahrung schutzwürdiger Interessen erforderlichen Anordnungen. Nötigenfalls ordnet sie die zwangsweise Durchsetzung der Mitwirkungspflicht an.

2 Personen, die dem Berufsgeheimnis nach dem Strafgesetzbuch2 unterstehen, sind zur Mitwirkung berechtigt, ohne sich vorgängig vom Berufsgeheimnis entbinden zu lassen. Diese Bestimmung gilt nicht für die nach dem Strafgesetzbuch an das Berufsgeheimnis gebundenen Hilfspersonen.

3 Personen, die dem Berufsgeheimnis nach dem Strafgesetzbuch unterstehen, sind zur Mitwirkung verpflichtet, wenn die geheimnisberechtigte Person sie dazu ermächtigt hat oder die vorgesetzte Behörde oder die Aufsichtsbehörde sie auf Gesuch der Kindesschutzbehörde vom Berufsgeheimnis entbunden hat. Artikel 13 des Anwaltsgesetzes vom 23. Juni 20003 bleibt vorbehalten.

4 Verwaltungsbehörden und Gerichte geben die notwendigen Akten heraus, erstatten Bericht und erteilen Auskünfte, soweit nicht schutzwürdige Interessen entgegenstehen.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 15. Dez. 2017 (Kindesschutz), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 2947; BBl 2015 3431).
2 SR 311.0
3 SR 935.61

Art. 3151C. Kindesschutz / VII. Zuständigkeit / 1. Im Allgemeinen

VII. Zuständigkeit

1. Im Allgemeinen2

1 Die Kindesschutzmassnahmen werden von der Kindesschutzbehörde am Wohnsitz des Kindes angeordnet.3

2 Lebt das Kind bei Pflegeeltern oder sonst ausserhalb der häuslichen Gemeinschaft der Eltern oder liegt Gefahr im Verzug, so sind auch die Behörden am Ort zuständig, wo sich das Kind aufhält.

3 Trifft die Behörde am Aufenthaltsort eine Kindesschutzmassnahme, so benachrichtigt sie die Wohnsitzbehörde.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 4 des BG vom 26. Juni 1998, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
3 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 315a1C. Kindesschutz / VII. Zuständigkeit / 2. In eherechtlichen Verfahren / a. Zuständigkeit des Gerichts

2. In eherechtlichen Verfahren

a. Zuständigkeit des Gerichts

1 Hat das Gericht, das für die Ehescheidung oder den Schutz der ehelichen Gemeinschaft zuständig ist, die Beziehungen der Eltern zu den Kindern zu gestalten, so trifft es auch die nötigen Kindesschutzmassnahmen und betraut die Kindesschutzbehörde mit dem Vollzug.2

2 Bestehende Kindesschutzmassnahmen können auch vom Gericht den neuen Verhältnissen angepasst werden.

3 Die Kindesschutzbehörde bleibt jedoch befugt:3

1.
ein vor dem gerichtlichen Verfahren eingeleitetes Kindesschutzverfahren weiterzuführen;
2.
die zum Schutz des Kindes sofort notwendigen Massnahmen anzuordnen, wenn sie das Gericht voraussichtlich nicht rechtzeitig treffen kann.

1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1). Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 4 des BG vom 26. Juni 1998, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 315b1C. Kindesschutz / VII. Zuständigkeit / 2. In eherechtlichen Verfahren / b. Abänderung gerichtlicher Anordnungen

b. Abänderung gerichtlicher Anordnungen

1 Zur Abänderung gerichtlicher Anordnungen über die Kindeszuteilung und den Kindesschutz ist das Gericht zuständig:

1.
während des Scheidungsverfahrens;
2.
im Verfahren zur Abänderung des Scheidungsurteils gemäss den Vorschriften über die Ehescheidung;
3.
im Verfahren zur Änderung von Eheschutzmassnahmen; die Vorschriften über die Ehescheidung sind sinngemäss anwendbar.

2 In den übrigen Fällen ist die Kindesschutzbehörde zuständig.2


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 4 des BG vom 26. Juni 1998, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 3161C. Kindesschutz / VIII. Pflegekinderaufsicht

VIII. Pflegekinderaufsicht

1 Wer Pflegekinder aufnimmt, bedarf einer Bewilligung der Kindesschutzbehörde oder einer andern vom kantonalen Recht bezeichneten Stelle seines Wohnsitzes und steht unter deren Aufsicht.

1bis Wird ein Pflegekind zum Zweck der späteren Adoption aufgenommen, so ist eine einzige kantonale Behörde zuständig.2

2 Der Bundesrat erlässt Ausführungsvorschriften.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Eingefügt durch Anhang Ziff. 2 des BG vom 22. Juni 2001 zum Haager Adoptionsübereinkommen und über Massnahmen zum Schutz des Kindes bei internationalen Adoptionen, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2003 (AS 2002 3988; BBl 1999 5795).

Art. 3171C. Kindesschutz / IX. Zusammenarbeit in der Jugendhilfe

IX. Zusammenarbeit in der Jugendhilfe

Die Kantone sichern durch geeignete Vorschriften die zweckmässige Zusammenarbeit der Behörden und Stellen auf dem Gebiet des zivilrechtlichen Kindesschutzes, des Jugendstrafrechts und der übrigen Jugendhilfe.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).


  Vierter Abschnitt: Das Kindesvermögen14 

Art. 3181A. Verwaltung

A. Verwaltung

1 Die Eltern haben, solange ihnen die elterliche Sorge zusteht, das Recht und die Pflicht, das Kindesvermögen zu verwalten.

2 Stirbt ein Elternteil, so hat der überlebende Elternteil der Kindesschutzbehörde ein Inventar über das Kindesvermögen einzureichen.2

3 Erachtet es die Kindesschutzbehörde nach Art und Grösse des Kindesvermögens und nach den persönlichen Verhältnissen der Eltern für angezeigt, so ordnet sie die Inventaraufnahme oder die periodische Rechnungsstellung und Berichterstattung an.3


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 3191B. Verwendung der Erträge

B. Verwendung der Erträge

1 Die Eltern dürfen die Erträge des Kindesvermögens für Unterhalt, Erziehung und Ausbildung des Kindes und, soweit es der Billigkeit entspricht, auch für die Bedürfnisse des Haushaltes verwenden.

2 Ein Überschuss fällt ins Kindesvermögen.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 3201C. Anzehrung des Kindesvermögens

C. Anzehrung des Kindesvermögens

1 Abfindungen, Schadenersatz und ähnliche Leistungen dürfen in Teilbeträgen entsprechend den laufenden Bedürfnissen für den Unterhalt des Kindes verbraucht werden.

2 Erweist es sich für die Bestreitung der Kosten des Unterhalts, der Erziehung oder der Ausbildung als notwendig, so kann die Kindesschutzbehörde den Eltern gestatten, auch das übrige Kindesvermögen in bestimmten Beträgen anzugreifen.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 3211D. Freies Kindesvermögen / I. Zuwendungen

D. Freies Kindesvermögen

I. Zuwendungen

1 Die Eltern dürfen Erträge des Kindesvermögens nicht verbrauchen, wenn es dem Kind mit dieser ausdrücklichen Auflage oder unter der Bestimmung zinstragender Anlage oder als Spargeld zugewendet worden ist.

2 Die Verwaltung durch die Eltern ist nur dann ausgeschlossen, wenn dies bei der Zuwendung ausdrücklich bestimmt wird.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 3221D. Freies Kindesvermögen / II. Pflichtteil

II. Pflichtteil

1 Durch Verfügung von Todes wegen kann auch der Pflichtteil des Kindes von der elterlichen Verwaltung ausgenommen werden.

2 Überträgt der Erblasser die Verwaltung einem Dritten, so kann die Kindesschutzbehörde diesen zur periodischen Rechnungsstellung und Berichterstattung anhalten.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 3231D. Freies Kindesvermögen / III. Arbeitserwerb, Berufs- und Gewerbevermögen

III. Arbeitserwerb, Berufs- und Gewerbevermögen

1 Was das Kind durch eigene Arbeit erwirbt und was es von den Eltern aus seinem Vermögen zur Ausübung eines Berufes oder eines eigenen Gewerbes herausbekommt, steht unter seiner Verwaltung und Nutzung.

2 Lebt das Kind mit den Eltern in häuslicher Gemeinschaft, so können sie verlangen, dass es einen angemessenen Beitrag an seinen Unterhalt leistet.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 3241E. Schutz des Kindesvermögens / I. Geeignete Massnahmen

E. Schutz des Kindesvermögens

I. Geeignete Massnahmen

1 Ist die sorgfältige Verwaltung nicht hinreichend gewährleistet, so trifft die Kindesschutzbehörde die geeigneten Massnahmen zum Schutz des Kindesvermögens.

2 Sie kann namentlich Weisungen für die Verwaltung erteilen und, wenn die periodische Rechnungsstellung und Berichterstattung nicht ausreichen, die Hinterlegung oder Sicherheitsleistung anordnen.

3 Auf das Verfahren und die Zuständigkeit finden die Bestimmungen über den Kindesschutz entsprechende Anwendung.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 3251E. Schutz des Kindesvermögens / II. Entziehung der Verwaltung

II. Entziehung der Verwaltung

1 Kann der Gefährdung des Kindesvermögens auf andere Weise nicht begegnet werden, so überträgt die Kindesschutzbehörde die Verwaltung einem Beistand.

2 Die Kindesschutzbehörde trifft die gleiche Anordnung, wenn Kindesvermögen, das nicht von den Eltern verwaltet wird, gefährdet ist.

3 Ist zu befürchten, dass die Erträge oder die für den Verbrauch bestimmten oder freigegebenen Beträge des Kindesvermögens nicht bestimmungsgemäss verwendet werden, so kann die Kindesschutzbehörde auch deren Verwaltung einem Beistand übertragen.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 3261F. Ende der Verwaltung / I. Rückerstattung

F. Ende der Verwaltung

I. Rückerstattung

Endet die elterliche Sorge oder Verwaltung, so haben die Eltern das Kindesvermögen aufgrund einer Abrechnung dem volljährigen Kind oder seinem gesetzlichen Vertreter herauszugeben.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 3271F. Ende der Verwaltung / II. Verantwortlichkeit

II. Verantwortlichkeit

1 Für die Rückleistung sind die Eltern gleich einem Beauftragten verantwortlich.

2 Für das, was sie in guten Treuen veräussert haben, ist der Erlös zu erstatten.

3 Für die Beträge, die sie befugtermassen für das Kind oder den Haushalt verwendet haben, schulden sie keinen Ersatz.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).


  Fünfter Abschnitt:15  Minderjährige unter Vormundschaft

Art. 327a A. Grundsatz

A. Grundsatz

Steht ein Kind nicht unter elterlicher Sorge, so ernennt ihm die Kindesschutzbehörde einen Vormund.

Art. 327b B. Rechtsstellung / I. Des Kindes

B. Rechtsstellung

I. Des Kindes

Das Kind unter Vormundschaft hat die gleiche Rechtsstellung wie das Kind unter elterlicher Sorge.

Art. 327c B. Rechtsstellung / II. Des Vormunds

II. Des Vormunds

1 Dem Vormund stehen die gleichen Rechte zu wie den Eltern.

2 Die Bestimmungen des Erwachsenenschutzes, namentlich über die Ernennung des Beistands, die Führung der Beistandschaft und die Mitwirkung der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde, sind sinngemäss anwendbar.

3 Muss das Kind in einer geschlossenen Einrichtung oder in einer psychiatrischen Klinik untergebracht werden, so sind die Bestimmungen des Erwachsenenschutzes über die fürsorgerische Unterbringung sinngemäss anwendbar.


  Neunter Titel: Die Familiengemeinschaft

  Erster Abschnitt: Die Unterstützungspflicht

Art. 3281A. Unterstützungspflichtige

A. Unterstützungspflichtige

1 Wer in günstigen Verhältnissen lebt, ist verpflichtet, Verwandte in auf- und absteigender Linie zu unterstützen, die ohne diesen Beistand in Not geraten würden.

2 Die Unterhaltspflicht der Eltern und des Ehegatten, der eingetragenen Partnerin oder des eingetragenen Partners bleibt vorbehalten.2


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 4 des BG vom 26. Juni 1998, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
2 Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 8 des Partnerschaftsgesetzes vom 18. Juni 2004, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2007 (AS 2005 5685; BBl 2003 1288).

Art. 329 B. Umfang und Geltendmachung des Anspruches

B. Umfang und Geltendmachung des Anspruches1

1 Der Anspruch auf Unterstützung ist gegen die Pflichtigen in der Reihenfolge ihrer Erbberechtigung geltend zu machen und geht auf die Leistung, die zum Lebensunterhalt des Bedürftigen erforderlich und den Verhältnissen des Pflichtigen angemessen ist.

1bis Kein Anspruch auf Unterstützung kann geltend gemacht werden, wenn die Notlage auf einer Einschränkung der Erwerbstätigkeit zur Betreuung eigener Kinder beruht.2

2 Erscheint die Heranziehung eines Pflichtigen wegen besonderer Umstände als unbillig, so kann das Gericht die Unterstützungspflicht ermässigen oder aufheben.3

3 Die Bestimmungen über die Unterhaltsklage des Kindes und über den Übergang seines Unterhaltsanspruches auf das Gemeinwesen finden entsprechende Anwendung.4


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 20. März 2015 (Kindesunterhalt), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).
3 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
4 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 330 C. Unterhalt von Findelkindern

C. Unterhalt von Findelkindern

1 Findelkinder werden von der Gemeinde unterhalten, in der sie eingebürgert worden sind.

2 Wird die Abstammung eines Findelkindes festgestellt, so kann diese Gemeinde die unterstützungspflichtigen Verwandten und in letzter Linie das unterstützungspflichtige Gemeinwesen zum Ersatz der Auslagen anhalten, die sein Unterhalt ihr verursacht hat.


  Zweiter Abschnitt: Die Hausgewalt

Art. 331 A. Voraussetzung

A. Voraussetzung

1 Haben Personen, die in gemeinsamem Haushalte leben, nach Vorschrift des Gesetzes oder nach Vereinbarung oder Herkommen ein Familienhaupt, so steht diesem die Hausgewalt zu.

2 Die Hausgewalt erstreckt sich auf alle Personen, die als Verwandte1 und Verschwägerte oder auf Grund eines Vertragsverhältnisses als Arbeitnehmer oder in ähnlicher Stellung in dem gemeinsamen Haushalte leben.2


1 Fassung dieses Wortes gemäss Ziff. I 3 des BG vom 30. Juni 1972, in Kraft seit 1. April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. II Art. 2 Ziff. 2 des BG vom 25. Juni 1971, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1972 (AS 1971 1465; BBl 1967 II 241).

Art. 332 B. Wirkung / I. Hausordnung und Fürsorge

B. Wirkung

I. Hausordnung und Fürsorge

1 Die Ordnung, der die Hausgenossen unterstellt sind, hat auf die Interessen aller Beteiligten in billiger Weise Rücksicht zu nehmen.

2 Insbesondere soll den Hausgenossen für ihre Ausbildung, ihre Berufsarbeit und für die Pflege der religiösen Bedürfnisse die nötige Freiheit gewährt werden.

3 Die von den Hausgenossen eingebrachten Sachen hat das Familienhaupt mit der gleichen Sorgfalt zu verwahren und gegen Schaden sicherzustellen wie die eigenen.

Art. 333 B. Wirkung / II. Verantwortlichkeit

II. Verantwortlichkeit

1 Verursacht ein Hausgenosse, der minderjährig oder geistig behindert ist, unter umfassender Beistandschaft steht oder an einer psychischen Störung leidet, einen Schaden, so ist das Familienhaupt dafür haftbar, insofern es nicht darzutun vermag, dass es das übliche und durch die Umstände gebotene Mass von Sorgfalt in der Beaufsichtigung beobachtet hat.1

2 Das Familienhaupt ist verpflichtet, dafür zu sorgen, dass aus dem Zustand eines Hausgenossen mit einer geistigen Behinderung oder einer psychischen Störung weder für diesen selbst noch für andere Gefahr oder Schaden erwächst.2

3 Nötigenfalls soll es bei der zuständigen Behörde zwecks Anordnung der erforderlichen Vorkehrungen Anzeige machen.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 3341B. Wirkung / III. Forderung der Kinder und Grosskinder / 1. Voraussetzungen

III. Forderung der Kinder und Grosskinder

1. Voraussetzungen

1 Volljährige Kinder oder Grosskinder, die ihren Eltern oder Grosseltern in gemeinsamem Haushalt ihre Arbeit oder ihre Einkünfte zugewendet haben, können hierfür eine angemessene Entschädigung verlangen.2

2 Im Streitfalle entscheidet das Gericht über die Höhe der Entschädigung, ihre Sicherung und die Art und Weise der Bezahlung.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 6. Okt. 1972, in Kraft seit 15. Febr. 1973 (AS 1973 93; BBl 1970 I 805, 1971 I 737).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 334bis1B. Wirkung / III. Forderung der Kinder und Grosskinder / 2. Geltendmachung

2. Geltendmachung

1 Die den Kindern oder Grosskindern zustehende Entschädigung kann mit dem Tode des Schuldners geltend gemacht werden.

2 Schon zu Lebzeiten des Schuldners kann sie geltend gemacht werden, wenn gegen ihn eine Pfändung erfolgt oder über ihn der Konkurs eröffnet wird, wenn der gemeinsame Haushalt aufgehoben wird oder wenn der Betrieb in andere Hände übergeht.

3 Sie unterliegt keiner Verjährung, muss aber spätestens bei der Teilung der Erbschaft des Schuldners geltend gemacht werden.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 6. Okt. 1972, in Kraft seit 15. Febr. 1973 (AS 1973 93; BBl 1970 I 805, 1971 I 737).


  Dritter Abschnitt: Das Familienvermögen

Art. 335 A. Familienstiftungen

A. Familienstiftungen

1 Ein Vermögen kann mit einer Familie dadurch verbunden werden, dass zur Bestreitung der Kosten der Erziehung, Ausstattung oder Unterstützung von Familienangehörigen oder zu ähnlichen Zwecken eine Familienstiftung nach den Regeln des Personenrechts oder des Erbrechts errichtet wird.

2 Die Errichtung von Familienfideikommissen ist nicht mehr gestattet.

Art. 336 B. Gemeinderschaften / I. Begründung / 1. Befugnis

B. Gemeinderschaften

I. Begründung

1. Befugnis

Ein Vermögen kann mit einer Familie dadurch verbunden werden, dass Verwandte entweder eine Erbschaft ganz oder zum Teil als Gemeinderschaftsgut fortbestehen lassen, oder dass sie Vermögen zu einer Gemeinderschaft zusammenlegen.

Art. 337 B. Gemeinderschaften / I. Begründung / 2. Form

2. Form

Der Vertrag über die Begründung einer Gemeinderschaft bedarf zu seiner Gültigkeit der öffentlichen Beurkundung und der Unterschrift aller Gemeinder oder ihrer Vertreter.

Art. 338 B. Gemeinderschaften / II. Dauer

II. Dauer

1 Die Gemeinderschaft kann auf bestimmte oder unbestimmte Zeit geschlossen werden.

2 Ist sie auf unbestimmte Zeit geschlossen, so kann sie jeder Gemeinder auf sechs Monate kündigen.

3 Bei landwirtschaftlichem Betriebe des Gesamtgutes ist eine Kündigung nur auf einen dem Ortsgebrauch entsprechenden Frühjahrs- oder Herbsttermin zulässig.

Art. 339 B. Gemeinderschaften / III. Wirkung / 1. Art der Gemeinderschaft

III. Wirkung

1. Art der Gemeinderschaft

1 Die Gemeinderschaft verbindet die Gemeinder zu gemeinsamer wirtschaftlicher Tätigkeit.

2 Sie sind mangels anderer Anordnung zu gleichen Rechten an der Gemeinderschaft beteiligt.

3 Sie können während der Gemeinderschaft weder eine Teilung beanspruchen noch über ihre Gemeinschaftsanteile verfügen.

Art. 340 B. Gemeinderschaften / III. Wirkung / 2. Leitung und Vertretung / a. Im Allgemeinen

2. Leitung und Vertretung

a. Im Allgemeinen

1 Die Angelegenheiten der Gemeinderschaft werden von allen Gemeindern gemeinsam geordnet.

2 Jeder von ihnen kann ohne Mitwirkung der übrigen gewöhnliche Verwaltungshandlungen vornehmen.

Art. 341 B. Gemeinderschaften / III. Wirkung / 2. Leitung und Vertretung / b. Befugnis des Hauptes

b. Befugnis des Hauptes

1 Die Gemeinder können eines der Glieder als Haupt der Gemeinderschaft bezeichnen.

2 Das Haupt der Gemeinderschaft hat die Vertretung im Umfang ihrer Angelegenheiten und leitet deren wirtschaftliche Tätigkeit.

3 Die Ausschliessung der andern von der Vertretung ist jedoch gutgläubigen Dritten gegenüber nur dann wirksam, wenn der Vertreter im Handelsregister eingetragen ist.

Art. 342 B. Gemeinderschaften / III. Wirkung / 3. Gemeinschaftsgut und persönliches Vermögen

3. Gemeinschaftsgut und persönliches Vermögen

1 Die Vermögenswerte der Gemeinderschaft stehen im Gesamteigentum aller Gemeinder.

2 Für die Schulden haften die Gemeinder solidarisch.

3 Was ein einzelner Gemeinder neben dem Gemeinschaftsgut an Vermögen besitzt oder während der Gemeinschaft durch Erbgang oder auf andere Weise unentgeltlich für sich allein erwirbt, ist, wenn es nicht anders verabredet wird, sein persönliches Vermögen.

Art. 343 B. Gemeinderschaften / IV. Aufhebung / 1. Gründe

IV. Aufhebung

1. Gründe

Die Aufhebung der Gemeinderschaft erfolgt:

1.
nach Vereinbarung oder Kündigung;
2.
mit Ablauf der Zeit, für die eine Gemeinderschaft begründet worden ist, insofern sie nicht stillschweigend fortgesetzt wird;
3.
wenn der gepfändete Anteil eines Gemeinders am Gemeinschaftsgute zur Verwertung gelangt ist;
4.
wenn ein Gemeinder in Konkurs geraten ist;
5.
auf Verlangen eines Gemeinders aus wichtigen Gründen.
Art. 344 B. Gemeinderschaften / IV. Aufhebung / 2. Kündigung, Zahlungsunfähigkeit, Heirat

2. Kündigung, Zahlungsunfähigkeit, Heirat

1 Kündigt ein Gemeinder die Gemeinderschaft, oder ist einer der Gemeinder in Konkurs geraten, oder gelangt der gepfändete Anteil eines Gemeinders zur Verwertung, so können die übrigen die Gemeinderschaft miteinander fortsetzen, indem sie den Ausscheidenden oder seine Gläubiger abfinden.

2 Verheiratet sich ein Gemeinder, so kann er ohne Kündigung die Abfindung beanspruchen.

Art. 345 B. Gemeinderschaften / IV. Aufhebung / 3. Tod eines Gemeinders

3. Tod eines Gemeinders

1 Stirbt ein Gemeinder, so können die Erben, die nicht in der Gemeinderschaft stehen, nur die Abfindung beanspruchen.

2 Hinterlässt er erbberechtigte Nachkommen, so können diese mit Zustimmung der übrigen Gemeinder an Stelle des Erblassers in die Gemeinderschaft eintreten.

Art. 346 B. Gemeinderschaften / IV. Aufhebung / 4. Teilungsregel

4. Teilungsregel

1 Die Teilung des Gemeinschaftsgutes oder die Abfindung eines ausscheidenden Gemeinders findet nach der Vermögenslage statt, wie sie beim Eintritt des Aufhebungsgrundes vorhanden ist.

2 Ihre Durchführung darf nicht zur Unzeit verlangt werden.

Art. 347 B. Gemeinderschaften / V. Ertragsgemeinderschaft / 1. Inhalt

V. Ertragsgemeinderschaft

1. Inhalt

1 Die Gemeinder können die Bewirtschaftung des Gemeinschaftsgutes und die Vertretung einem einzigen unter ihnen übertragen, mit der Bestimmung, dass dieser jedem der Gemeinder jährlich einen Anteil vom Reingewinn zu entrichten hat.

2 Dieser Anteil ist, wenn keine andere Abrede getroffen wird, nach dem Durchschnittsertrage des Gemeinschaftsgutes für eine angemessene längere Periode in billiger Weise festzusetzen, unter Berücksichtigung der Leistungen des Übernehmers.

Art. 348 B. Gemeinderschaften / V. Ertragsgemeinderschaft / 2. Besondere Aufhebungsgründe

2. Besondere Aufhebungsgründe

1 Wird das Gemeinschaftsgut von dem Übernehmer nicht ordentlich bewirtschaftet, oder kommt dieser seinen Verpflichtungen gegenüber den Gemeindern nicht nach, so kann die Gemeinderschaft aufgehoben werden.

2 Auf Verlangen eines Gemeinders kann das Gericht aus wichtigen Gründen dessen Eintritt in die Wirtschaft des Übernehmers verfügen, unter Berücksichtigung der Vorschriften über die erbrechtliche Teilung.

3 Im Übrigen steht die Ertragsgemeinderschaft unter den Regeln der Gemeinderschaft mit gemeinsamer Wirtschaft.

Art. 349–3581

1 Aufgehoben durch Ziff. I 4 des BG vom 26. Juni 1998, mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

Art. 3591

1 Aufgehoben durch Ziff. II 21 des BG vom 15. Dez. 1989 über die Genehmigung kantonaler Erlasse durch den Bund, mit Wirkung seit 1. Febr. 1991 (AS 1991 362; BBl 1988 II 1333).


  Dritte Abteilung:16  Der Erwachsenenschutz

  Zehnter Titel: Die eigene Vorsorge und Massnahmen von Gesetzes wegen

  Erster Abschnitt: Die eigene Vorsorge

  Erster Unterabschnitt: Der Vorsorgeauftrag

Art. 360 A. Grundsatz

A. Grundsatz

1 Eine handlungsfähige Person kann eine natürliche oder juristische Person beauftragen, im Fall ihrer Urteilsunfähigkeit die Personensorge oder die Vermögenssorge zu übernehmen oder sie im Rechtsverkehr zu vertreten.

2 Sie muss die Aufgaben, die sie der beauftragten Person übertragen will, umschreiben und kann Weisungen für die Erfüllung der Aufgaben erteilen.

3 Sie kann für den Fall, dass die beauftragte Person für die Aufgaben nicht geeignet ist, den Auftrag nicht annimmt oder ihn kündigt, Ersatzverfügungen treffen.

Art. 361 B. Errichtung und Widerruf / I. Errichtung

B. Errichtung und Widerruf

I. Errichtung

1 Der Vorsorgeauftrag ist eigenhändig zu errichten oder öffentlich zu beurkunden.

2 Der eigenhändige Vorsorgeauftrag ist von der auftraggebenden Person von Anfang bis Ende von Hand niederzuschreiben, zu datieren und zu unterzeichnen.

3 Das Zivilstandsamt trägt auf Antrag die Tatsache, dass eine Person einen Vorsorgeauftrag errichtet hat, und den Hinterlegungsort in die zentrale Datenbank ein. Der Bundesrat erlässt die nötigen Bestimmungen, namentlich über den Zugang zu den Daten.

Art. 362 B. Errichtung und Widerruf / II. Widerruf

II. Widerruf

1 Die auftraggebende Person kann ihren Vorsorgeauftrag jederzeit in einer der Formen widerrufen, die für die Errichtung vorgeschrieben sind.

2 Sie kann den Vorsorgeauftrag auch dadurch widerrufen, dass sie die Urkunde vernichtet.

3 Errichtet sie einen neuen Vorsorgeauftrag, ohne einen früheren ausdrücklich aufzuheben, so tritt der neue Vorsorgeauftrag an die Stelle des früheren, sofern er nicht zweifellos eine blosse Ergänzung darstellt.

Art. 363 C. Feststellung der Wirksamkeit und Annahme

C. Feststellung der Wirksamkeit und Annahme

1 Erfährt die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde, dass eine Person urteilsunfähig geworden ist, und ist ihr nicht bekannt, ob ein Vorsorgeauftrag vorliegt, so erkundigt sie sich beim Zivilstandsamt.

2 Liegt ein Vorsorgeauftrag vor, so prüft die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde, ob:

1.
dieser gültig errichtet worden ist;
2.
die Voraussetzungen für seine Wirksamkeit eingetreten sind;
3.
die beauftragte Person für ihre Aufgaben geeignet ist; und
4.
weitere Massnahmen des Erwachsenenschutzes erforderlich sind.

3 Nimmt die beauftragte Person den Vorsorgeauftrag an, so weist die Behörde sie auf ihre Pflichten nach den Bestimmungen des Obligationenrechts1 über den Auftrag hin und händigt ihr eine Urkunde aus, die ihre Befugnisse wiedergibt.


1 SR 220

Art. 364 D. Auslegung und Ergänzung

D. Auslegung und Ergänzung

Die beauftragte Person kann die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde um Auslegung des Vorsorgeauftrags und dessen Ergänzung in Nebenpunkten ersuchen.

Art. 365 E. Erfüllung

E. Erfüllung

1 Die beauftragte Person vertritt im Rahmen des Vorsorgeauftrags die auftraggebende Person und nimmt ihre Aufgaben nach den Bestimmungen des Obligationenrechts1 über den Auftrag sorgfältig wahr.

2 Müssen Geschäfte besorgt werden, die vom Vorsorgeauftrag nicht erfasst sind, oder hat die beauftragte Person in einer Angelegenheit Interessen, die denen der betroffenen Person widersprechen, so benachrichtigt die beauftragte Person unverzüglich die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde.

3 Bei Interessenkollision entfallen von Gesetzes wegen die Befugnisse der beauftragten Person.


1 SR 220

Art. 366 F. Entschädigung und Spesen

F. Entschädigung und Spesen

1 Enthält der Vorsorgeauftrag keine Anordnung über die Entschädigung der beauftragten Person, so legt die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde eine angemessene Entschädigung fest, wenn dies mit Rücksicht auf den Umfang der Aufgaben als gerechtfertigt erscheint oder wenn die Leistungen der beauftragten Person üblicherweise entgeltlich sind.

2 Die Entschädigung und die notwendigen Spesen werden der auftraggebenden Person belastet.

Art. 367 G. Kündigung

G. Kündigung

1 Die beauftragte Person kann den Vorsorgeauftrag jederzeit mit einer zweimonatigen Kündigungsfrist durch schriftliche Mitteilung an die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde kündigen.

2 Aus wichtigen Gründen kann sie den Auftrag fristlos kündigen.

Art. 368 H. Einschreiten der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde

H. Einschreiten der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde

1 Sind die Interessen der auftraggebenden Person gefährdet oder nicht mehr gewahrt, so trifft die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde von Amtes wegen oder auf Antrag einer nahestehenden Person die erforderlichen Massnahmen.

2 Sie kann insbesondere der beauftragten Person Weisungen erteilen, diese zur Einreichung eines Inventars, zur periodischen Rechnungsablage und zur Berichterstattung verpflichten oder ihr die Befugnisse teilweise oder ganz entziehen.

Art. 369 I. Wiedererlangen der Urteilsfähigkeit

I. Wiedererlangen der Urteilsfähigkeit

1 Wird die auftraggebende Person wieder urteilsfähig, so verliert der Vorsorgeauftrag seine Wirksamkeit von Gesetzes wegen.

2 Werden dadurch die Interessen der auftraggebenden Person gefährdet, so ist die beauftragte Person verpflichtet, so lange für die Fortführung der ihr übertragenen Aufgaben zu sorgen, bis die auftraggebende Person ihre Interessen selber wahren kann.

3 Aus Geschäften, welche die beauftragte Person vornimmt, bevor sie vom Erlöschen ihres Auftrags erfährt, wird die auftraggebende Person verpflichtet, wie wenn der Auftrag noch bestehen würde.


  Zweiter Unterabschnitt: Die Patientenverfügung

Art. 370 A. Grundsatz

A. Grundsatz

1 Eine urteilsfähige Person kann in einer Patientenverfügung festlegen, welchen medizinischen Massnahmen sie im Fall ihrer Urteilsunfähigkeit zustimmt oder nicht zustimmt.

2 Sie kann auch eine natürliche Person bezeichnen, die im Fall ihrer Urteilsunfähigkeit mit der behandelnden Ärztin oder dem behandelnden Arzt die medizinischen Massnahmen besprechen und in ihrem Namen entscheiden soll. Sie kann dieser Person Weisungen erteilen.

3 Sie kann für den Fall, dass die bezeichnete Person für die Aufgaben nicht geeignet ist, den Auftrag nicht annimmt oder ihn kündigt, Ersatzverfügungen treffen.

Art. 371 B. Errichtung und Widerruf

B. Errichtung und Widerruf

1 Die Patientenverfügung ist schriftlich zu errichten, zu datieren und zu unterzeichnen.

2 Wer eine Patientenverfügung errichtet hat, kann diese Tatsache und den Hinterlegungsort auf der Versichertenkarte eintragen lassen. Der Bundesrat erlässt die nötigen Bestimmungen, namentlich über den Zugang zu den Daten.

3 Die Bestimmung über den Widerruf des Vorsorgeauftrags ist sinngemäss anwendbar.

Art. 372 C. Eintritt der Urteilsunfähigkeit

C. Eintritt der Urteilsunfähigkeit

1 Ist die Patientin oder der Patient urteilsunfähig und ist nicht bekannt, ob eine Patientenverfügung vorliegt, so klärt die behandelnde Ärztin oder der behandelnde Arzt dies anhand der Versichertenkarte ab. Vorbehalten bleiben dringliche Fälle.

2 Die Ärztin oder der Arzt entspricht der Patientenverfügung, ausser wenn diese gegen gesetzliche Vorschriften verstösst oder wenn begründete Zweifel bestehen, dass sie auf freiem Willen beruht oder noch dem mutmasslichen Willen der Patientin oder des Patienten entspricht.

3 Die Ärztin oder der Arzt hält im Patientendossier fest, aus welchen Gründen der Patientenverfügung nicht entsprochen wird.

Art. 373 D. Einschreiten der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde

D. Einschreiten der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde

1 Jede der Patientin oder dem Patienten nahestehende Person kann schriftlich die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde anrufen und geltend machen, dass:

1.
der Patientenverfügung nicht entsprochen wird;
2.
die Interessen der urteilsunfähigen Person gefährdet oder nicht mehr gewahrt sind;
3.
die Patientenverfügung nicht auf freiem Willen beruht.

2 Die Bestimmung über das Einschreiten der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde beim Vorsorgeauftrag ist sinngemäss anwendbar.


  Zweiter Abschnitt: Massnahmen von Gesetzes wegen für urteilsunfähige Personen

  Erster Unterabschnitt: Vertretung durch den Ehegatten, die eingetragene Partnerin oder den eingetragenen Partner

Art. 374 A. Voraussetzungen und Umfang des Vertretungs-rechts

A. Voraussetzungen und Umfang des Vertretungs-rechts

1 Wer als Ehegatte, eingetragene Partnerin oder eingetragener Partner mit einer Person, die urteilsunfähig wird, einen gemeinsamen Haushalt führt oder ihr regelmässig und persönlich Beistand leistet, hat von Gesetzes wegen ein Vertretungsrecht, wenn weder ein Vorsorgeauftrag noch eine entsprechende Beistandschaft besteht.

2 Das Vertretungsrecht umfasst:

1.
alle Rechtshandlungen, die zur Deckung des Unterhaltsbedarfs üblicherweise erforderlich sind;
2.
die ordentliche Verwaltung des Einkommens und der übrigen Vermögenswerte; und
3.
nötigenfalls die Befugnis, die Post zu öffnen und zu erledigen.

3 Für Rechtshandlungen im Rahmen der ausserordentlichen Vermögensverwaltung muss der Ehegatte, die eingetragene Partnerin oder der eingetragene Partner die Zustimmung der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde einholen.

Art. 375 B. Ausübung des Vertretungsrechts

B. Ausübung des Vertretungsrechts

Auf die Ausübung des Vertretungsrechts sind die Bestimmungen des Obligationenrechts1 über den Auftrag sinngemäss anwendbar.


1 SR 220

Art. 376 C. Einschreiten der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde

C. Einschreiten der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde

1 Bestehen Zweifel, ob die Voraussetzungen für eine Vertretung erfüllt sind, so entscheidet die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde über das Vertretungsrecht und händigt gegebenenfalls dem Ehegatten, der eingetragenen Partnerin oder dem eingetragenen Partner eine Urkunde aus, welche die Befugnisse wiedergibt.

2 Sind die Interessen der urteilsunfähigen Person gefährdet oder nicht mehr gewahrt, so entzieht die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde dem Ehegatten, der eingetragenen Partnerin oder dem eingetragenen Partner auf Antrag einer nahestehenden Person oder von Amtes wegen die Vertretungsbefugnisse teilweise oder ganz oder errichtet eine Beistandschaft.


  Zweiter Unterabschnitt: Vertretung bei medizinischen Massnahmen

Art. 377 A. Behandlungsplan

A. Behandlungsplan

1 Hat sich eine urteilsunfähige Person zur Behandlung nicht in einer Patientenverfügung geäussert, so plant die behandelnde Ärztin oder der behandelnde Arzt unter Beizug der zur Vertretung bei medizinischen Massnahmen berechtigten Person die erforderliche Behandlung.

2 Die Ärztin oder der Arzt informiert die vertretungsberechtigte Person über alle Umstände, die im Hinblick auf die vorgesehenen medizinischen Massnahmen wesentlich sind, insbesondere über deren Gründe, Zweck, Art, Modalitäten, Risiken, Nebenwirkungen und Kosten, über Folgen eines Unterlassens der Behandlung sowie über allfällige alternative Behandlungsmöglichkeiten.

3 Soweit möglich wird auch die urteilsunfähige Person in die Entscheidfindung einbezogen.

4 Der Behandlungsplan wird der laufenden Entwicklung angepasst.

Art. 378 B. Vertretungsberechtigte Person

B. Vertretungsberechtigte Person

1 Die folgenden Personen sind der Reihe nach berechtigt, die urteilsunfähige Person zu vertreten und den vorgesehenen ambulanten oder stationären Massnahmen die Zustimmung zu erteilen oder zu verweigern:

1.
die in einer Patientenverfügung oder in einem Vorsorgeauftrag bezeichnete Person;
2.
der Beistand oder die Beiständin mit einem Vertretungsrecht bei medizinischen Massnahmen;
3.
wer als Ehegatte, eingetragene Partnerin oder eingetragener Partner einen gemeinsamen Haushalt mit der urteilsunfähigen Person führt oder ihr regelmässig und persönlich Beistand leistet;
4.
die Person, die mit der urteilsunfähigen Person einen gemeinsamen Haushalt führt und ihr regelmässig und persönlich Beistand leistet;
5.
die Nachkommen, wenn sie der urteilsunfähigen Person regelmässig und persönlich Beistand leisten;
6.
die Eltern, wenn sie der urteilsunfähigen Person regelmässig und persönlich Beistand leisten;
7.
die Geschwister, wenn sie der urteilsunfähigen Person regelmässig und persönlich Beistand leisten.

2 Sind mehrere Personen vertretungsberechtigt, so dürfen die gutgläubige Ärztin oder der gutgläubige Arzt voraussetzen, dass jede im Einverständnis mit den anderen handelt.

3 Fehlen in einer Patientenverfügung Weisungen, so entscheidet die vertretungsberechtigte Person nach dem mutmasslichen Willen und den Interessen der urteilsunfähigen Person.

Art. 379 C. Dringliche Fälle

C. Dringliche Fälle

In dringlichen Fällen ergreift die Ärztin oder der Arzt medizinische Massnahmen nach dem mutmasslichen Willen und den Interessen der urteilsunfähigen Person.

Art. 380 D. Behandlung einer psychischen Störung

D. Behandlung einer psychischen Störung

Die Behandlung einer psychischen Störung einer urteilsunfähigen Person in einer psychiatrischen Klinik richtet sich nach den Bestimmungen über die fürsorgerische Unterbringung.

Art. 381 E. Einschreiten der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde

E. Einschreiten der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde

1 Die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde errichtet eine Vertretungsbeistandschaft, wenn keine vertretungsberechtigte Person vorhanden ist oder das Vertretungsrecht ausüben will.

2 Sie bestimmt die vertretungsberechtigte Person oder errichtet eine Vertretungsbeistandschaft, wenn:

1.
unklar ist, wer vertretungsberechtigt ist;
2.
die vertretungsberechtigten Personen unterschiedliche Auffassungen haben; oder
3.
die Interessen der urteilsunfähigen Person gefährdet oder nicht mehr gewahrt sind.

3 Sie handelt auf Antrag der Ärztin oder des Arztes oder einer anderen nahestehenden Person oder von Amtes wegen.


  Dritter Unterabschnitt: Aufenthalt in Wohn- oder Pflegeeinrichtungen

Art. 382 A. Betreuungsvertrag

A. Betreuungsvertrag

1 Wird eine urteilsunfähige Person für längere Dauer in einer Wohn- oder Pflegeeinrichtung betreut, so muss schriftlich in einem Betreuungsvertrag festgelegt werden, welche Leistungen die Einrichtung erbringt und welches Entgelt dafür geschuldet ist.

2 Bei der Festlegung der von der Einrichtung zu erbringenden Leistungen werden die Wünsche der betroffenen Person so weit wie möglich berücksichtigt.

3 Die Zuständigkeit für die Vertretung der urteilsunfähigen Person beim Abschluss, bei der Änderung oder bei der Aufhebung des Betreuungsvertrags richtet sich sinngemäss nach den Bestimmungen über die Vertretung bei medizinischen Massnahmen.

Art. 383 B. Einschränkung der Bewegungsfreiheit / I. Voraussetzungen

B. Einschränkung der Bewegungsfreiheit

I. Voraussetzungen

1 Die Wohn- oder Pflegeeinrichtung darf die Bewegungsfreiheit der urteilsunfähigen Person nur einschränken, wenn weniger einschneidende Massnahmen nicht ausreichen oder von vornherein als ungenügend erscheinen und die Massnahme dazu dient:

1.
eine ernsthafte Gefahr für das Leben oder die körperliche Integrität der betroffenen Person oder Dritter abzuwenden; oder
2.
eine schwerwiegende Störung des Gemeinschaftslebens zu beseitigen.

2 Vor der Einschränkung der Bewegungsfreiheit wird der betroffenen Person erklärt, was geschieht, warum die Massnahme angeordnet wurde, wie lange diese voraussichtlich dauert und wer sich während dieser Zeit um sie kümmert. Vorbehalten bleiben Notfallsituationen.

3 Die Einschränkung der Bewegungsfreiheit wird so bald wie möglich wieder aufgehoben und auf jeden Fall regelmässig auf ihre Berechtigung hin überprüft.

Art. 384 B. Einschränkung der Bewegungsfreiheit / II. Protokollierung und Information

II. Protokollierung und Information

1 Über jede Massnahme zur Einschränkung der Bewegungsfreiheit wird Protokoll geführt. Dieses enthält insbesondere den Namen der anordnenden Person, den Zweck, die Art und die Dauer der Massnahme.

2 Die zur Vertretung bei medizinischen Massnahmen berechtigte Person wird über die Massnahme zur Einschränkung der Bewegungsfreiheit informiert und kann das Protokoll jederzeit einsehen.

3 Ein Einsichtsrecht steht auch den Personen zu, welche die Wohn- oder Pflegeeinrichtung beaufsichtigen.

Art. 385 B. Einschränkung der Bewegungsfreiheit / III. Einschreiten der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde

III. Einschreiten der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde

1 Die betroffene oder eine ihr nahestehende Person kann gegen eine Massnahme zur Einschränkung der Bewegungsfreiheit jederzeit schriftlich die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde am Sitz der Einrichtung anrufen.

2 Stellt die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde fest, dass die Massnahme nicht den gesetzlichen Vorgaben entspricht, so ändert sie die Massnahme, hebt sie auf oder ordnet eine behördliche Massnahme des Erwachsenenschutzes an. Nötigenfalls benachrichtigt sie die Aufsichtsbehörde der Einrichtung.

3 Jedes Begehren um Beurteilung durch die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde wird dieser unverzüglich weitergeleitet.

Art. 386 C. Schutz der Persönlichkeit

C. Schutz der Persönlichkeit

1 Die Wohn- oder Pflegeeinrichtung schützt die Persönlichkeit der urteilsunfähigen Person und fördert so weit wie möglich Kontakte zu Personen ausserhalb der Einrichtung.

2 Kümmert sich niemand von ausserhalb der Einrichtung um die betroffene Person, so benachrichtigt die Wohn- oder Pflegeeinrichtung die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde.

3 Die freie Arztwahl ist gewährleistet, soweit nicht wichtige Gründe dagegen sprechen.

Art. 387 D. Aufsicht über Wohn- und Pflegeeinrichtungen

D. Aufsicht über Wohn- und Pflegeeinrichtungen

Die Kantone unterstellen Wohn- und Pflegeeinrichtungen, in denen urteilsunfähige Personen betreut werden, einer Aufsicht, soweit nicht durch bundesrechtliche Vorschriften bereits eine Aufsicht gewährleistet ist.


  Elfter Titel: Die behördlichen Massnahmen

  Erster Abschnitt: Allgemeine Grundsätze

Art. 388 A. Zweck

A. Zweck

1 Die behördlichen Massnahmen des Erwachsenenschutzes stellen das Wohl und den Schutz hilfsbedürftiger Personen sicher.

2 Sie sollen die Selbstbestimmung der betroffenen Person so weit wie möglich erhalten und fördern.

Art. 389 B. Subsidiarität und Verhältnismässigkeit

B. Subsidiarität und Verhältnismässigkeit

1 Die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde ordnet eine Massnahme an, wenn:

1.
die Unterstützung der hilfsbedürftigen Person durch die Familie, andere nahestehende Personen oder private oder öffentliche Dienste nicht ausreicht oder von vornherein als ungenügend erscheint;
2.
bei Urteilsunfähigkeit der hilfsbedürftigen Person keine oder keine ausreichende eigene Vorsorge getroffen worden ist und die Massnahmen von Gesetzes wegen nicht genügen.

2 Jede behördliche Massnahme muss erforderlich und geeignet sein.


  Zweiter Abschnitt: Die Beistandschaften

  Erster Unterabschnitt: Allgemeine Bestimmungen

Art. 390 A. Voraussetzungen

A. Voraussetzungen

1 Die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde errichtet eine Beistandschaft, wenn eine volljährige Person:

1.
wegen einer geistigen Behinderung, einer psychischen Störung oder eines ähnlichen in der Person liegenden Schwächezustands ihre Angelegenheiten nur teilweise oder gar nicht besorgen kann;
2.
wegen vorübergehender Urteilsunfähigkeit oder Abwesenheit in Angelegenheiten, die erledigt werden müssen, weder selber handeln kann noch eine zur Stellvertretung berechtigte Person bezeichnet hat.

2 Die Belastung und der Schutz von Angehörigen und Dritten sind zu berücksichtigen.

3 Die Beistandschaft wird auf Antrag der betroffenen oder einer nahestehenden Person oder von Amtes wegen errichtet.

Art. 391 B. Aufgabenbereiche

B. Aufgabenbereiche

1 Die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde umschreibt die Aufgabenbereiche der Beistandschaft entsprechend den Bedürfnissen der betroffenen Person.

2 Die Aufgabenbereiche betreffen die Personensorge, die Vermögenssorge oder den Rechtsverkehr.

3 Ohne Zustimmung der betroffenen Person darf der Beistand oder die Beiständin nur dann deren Post öffnen oder deren Wohnräume betreten, wenn die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde die Befugnis dazu ausdrücklich erteilt hat.

Art. 392 C. Verzicht auf eine Beistandschaft

C. Verzicht auf eine Beistandschaft

Erscheint die Errichtung einer Beistandschaft wegen des Umfangs der Aufgaben als offensichtlich unverhältnismässig, so kann die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde:

1.
von sich aus das Erforderliche vorkehren, namentlich die Zustimmung zu einem Rechtsgeschäft erteilen;
2.
einer Drittperson für einzelne Aufgaben einen Auftrag erteilen; oder
3.
eine geeignete Person oder Stelle bezeichnen, der für bestimmte Bereiche Einblick und Auskunft zu geben sind.

  Zweiter Unterabschnitt: Die Arten von Beistandschaften

Art. 393 A. Begleitbeistandschaft

A. Begleitbeistandschaft

1 Eine Begleitbeistandschaft wird mit Zustimmung der hilfsbedürftigen Person errichtet, wenn diese für die Erledigung bestimmter Angelegenheiten begleitende Unterstützung braucht.

2 Die Begleitbeistandschaft schränkt die Handlungsfähigkeit der betroffenen Person nicht ein.

Art. 394 B. Vertretungsbeistandschaft / I. Im Allgemeinen

B. Vertretungsbeistandschaft

I. Im Allgemeinen

1 Eine Vertretungsbeistandschaft wird errichtet, wenn die hilfsbedürftige Person bestimmte Angelegenheiten nicht erledigen kann und deshalb vertreten werden muss.

2 Die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde kann die Handlungsfähigkeit der betroffenen Person entsprechend einschränken.

3 Auch wenn die Handlungsfähigkeit nicht eingeschränkt ist, muss die betroffene Person sich die Handlungen des Beistands oder der Beiständin anrechnen oder gefallen lassen.

Art. 395 B. Vertretungsbeistandschaft / II. Vermögensverwaltung

II. Vermögensverwaltung

1 Errichtet die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde eine Vertretungsbeistandschaft für die Vermögensverwaltung, so bestimmt sie die Vermögenswerte, die vom Beistand oder von der Beiständin verwaltet werden sollen. Sie kann Teile des Einkommens oder das gesamte Einkommen, Teile des Vermögens oder das gesamte Vermögen oder das gesamte Einkommen und Vermögen unter die Verwaltung stellen.

2 Die Verwaltungsbefugnisse umfassen auch die Ersparnisse aus dem verwalteten Einkommen oder die Erträge des verwalteten Vermögens, wenn die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde nichts anderes verfügt.

3 Ohne die Handlungsfähigkeit der betroffenen Person einzuschränken, kann ihr die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde den Zugriff auf einzelne Vermögenswerte entziehen.

4 Untersagt die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde der betroffenen Person, über ein Grundstück zu verfügen, so lässt sie dies im Grundbuch anmerken.

Art. 396 C. Mitwirkungsbeistandschaft

C. Mitwirkungsbeistandschaft

1 Eine Mitwirkungsbeistandschaft wird errichtet, wenn bestimmte Handlungen der hilfsbedürftigen Person zu deren Schutz der Zustimmung des Beistands oder der Beiständin bedürfen.

2 Die Handlungsfähigkeit der betroffenen Person wird von Gesetzes wegen entsprechend eingeschränkt.

Art. 397 D. Kombination von Beistandschaften

D. Kombination von Beistandschaften

Die Begleit-, die Vertretungs- und die Mitwirkungsbeistandschaft können miteinander kombiniert werden.

Art. 398 E. Umfassende Beistandschaft

E. Umfassende Beistandschaft

1 Eine umfassende Beistandschaft wird errichtet, wenn eine Person, namentlich wegen dauernder Urteilsunfähigkeit, besonders hilfsbedürftig ist.

2 Sie bezieht sich auf alle Angelegenheiten der Personensorge, der Vermögenssorge und des Rechtsverkehrs.

3 Die Handlungsfähigkeit der betroffenen Person entfällt von Gesetzes wegen.


  Dritter Unterabschnitt: Ende der Beistandschaft

Art. 399

1 Die Beistandschaft endet von Gesetzes wegen mit dem Tod der betroffenen Person.

2 Die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde hebt eine Beistandschaft auf Antrag der betroffenen oder einer nahestehenden Person oder von Amtes wegen auf, sobald für die Fortdauer kein Grund mehr besteht.


  Vierter Unterabschnitt: Der Beistand oder die Beiständin

Art. 400 A. Ernennung / I. Allgemeine Voraussetzungen

A. Ernennung

I. Allgemeine Voraussetzungen

1 Die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde ernennt als Beistand oder Beiständin eine natürliche Person, die für die vorgesehenen Aufgaben persönlich und fachlich geeignet ist, die dafür erforderliche Zeit einsetzen kann und die Aufgaben selber wahrnimmt. Bei besonderen Umständen können mehrere Personen ernannt werden.

2 Die Person darf nur mit ihrem Einverständnis ernannt werden.1

3 Die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde sorgt dafür, dass der Beistand oder die Beiständin die erforderliche Instruktion, Beratung und Unterstützung erhält.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 29. Sept. 2017, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 2801; BBl 2017 1811 3205).

Art. 401 A. Ernennung / II. Wünsche der betroffenen Person oder ihr nahestehender Personen

II. Wünsche der betroffenen Person oder ihr nahestehender Personen

1 Schlägt die betroffene Person eine Vertrauensperson als Beistand oder Beiständin vor, so entspricht die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde ihrem Wunsch, wenn die vorgeschlagene Person für die Beistandschaft geeignet und zu deren Übernahme bereit ist.

2 Sie berücksichtigt, soweit tunlich, Wünsche der Angehörigen oder anderer nahestehender Personen.

3 Lehnt die betroffene Person eine bestimmte Person als Beistand oder Beiständin ab, so entspricht die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde, soweit tunlich, diesem Wunsch.

Art. 402 A. Ernennung / III. Übertragung des Amtes auf mehrere Personen

III. Übertragung des Amtes auf mehrere Personen

1 Überträgt die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde eine Beistandschaft mehreren Personen, so legt sie fest, ob das Amt gemeinsam ausgeübt wird oder wer für welche Aufgaben zuständig ist.

2 Die gemeinsame Führung einer Beistandschaft wird mehreren Personen nur mit ihrem Einverständnis übertragen.

Art. 403 B. Verhinderung und Interessenkollision

B. Verhinderung und Interessenkollision

1 Ist der Beistand oder die Beiständin am Handeln verhindert oder widersprechen die Interessen des Beistands oder der Beiständin in einer Angelegenheit denjenigen der betroffenen Person, so ernennt die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde einen Ersatzbeistand oder eine Ersatzbeiständin oder regelt diese Angelegenheit selber.

2 Bei Interessenkollision entfallen von Gesetzes wegen die Befugnisse des Beistands oder der Beiständin in der entsprechenden Angelegenheit.

Art. 404 C. Entschädigung und Spesen

C. Entschädigung und Spesen

1 Der Beistand oder die Beiständin hat Anspruch auf eine angemessene Entschädigung und auf Ersatz der notwendigen Spesen aus dem Vermögen der betroffenen Person. Bei einem Berufsbeistand oder einer Berufsbeiständin fallen die Entschädigung und der Spesenersatz an den Arbeitgeber.

2 Die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde legt die Höhe der Entschädigung fest. Sie berücksichtigt dabei insbesondere den Umfang und die Komplexität der dem Beistand oder der Beiständin übertragenen Aufgaben.

3 Die Kantone erlassen Ausführungsbestimmungen und regeln die Entschädigung und den Spesenersatz, wenn diese nicht aus dem Vermögen der betroffenen Person bezahlt werden können.


  Fünfter Unterabschnitt: Die Führung der Beistandschaft

Art. 405 A. Übernahme des Amtes

A. Übernahme des Amtes

1 Der Beistand oder die Beiständin verschafft sich die zur Erfüllung der Aufgaben nötigen Kenntnisse und nimmt persönlich mit der betroffenen Person Kontakt auf.

2 Umfasst die Beistandschaft die Vermögensverwaltung, so nimmt der Beistand oder die Beiständin in Zusammenarbeit mit der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde unverzüglich ein Inventar der zu verwaltenden Vermögenswerte auf.

3 Wenn die Umstände es rechtfertigen, kann die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde die Aufnahme eines öffentlichen Inventars anordnen. Dieses hat für die Gläubiger die gleiche Wirkung wie das öffentliche Inventar des Erbrechts.

4 Dritte sind verpflichtet, alle für die Aufnahme des Inventars erforderlichen Auskünfte zu erteilen.

Art. 406 B. Verhältnis zur betroffenen Person

B. Verhältnis zur betroffenen Person

1 Der Beistand oder die Beiständin erfüllt die Aufgaben im Interesse der betroffenen Person, nimmt, soweit tunlich, auf deren Meinung Rücksicht und achtet deren Willen, das Leben entsprechend ihren Fähigkeiten nach eigenen Wünschen und Vorstellungen zu gestalten.

2 Der Beistand oder die Beiständin strebt danach, ein Vertrauensverhältnis mit der betroffenen Person aufzubauen und den Schwächezustand zu lindern oder eine Verschlimmerung zu verhüten.

Art. 407 C. Eigenes Handeln der betroffenen Person

C. Eigenes Handeln der betroffenen Person

Die urteilsfähige betroffene Person kann, auch wenn ihr die Handlungsfähigkeit entzogen worden ist, im Rahmen des Personenrechts durch eigenes Handeln Rechte und Pflichten begründen und höchstpersönliche Rechte ausüben.

Art. 408 D. Vermögensverwaltung / I. Aufgaben

D. Vermögensverwaltung

I. Aufgaben

1 Der Beistand oder die Beiständin verwaltet die Vermögenswerte sorgfältig und nimmt alle Rechtsgeschäfte vor, die mit der Verwaltung zusammenhängen.

2 Insbesondere kann der Beistand oder die Beiständin:

1.
mit befreiender Wirkung die von Dritten geschuldete Leistung für die betroffene Person entgegennehmen;
2.
soweit angezeigt Schulden bezahlen;
3.
die betroffene Person nötigenfalls für die laufenden Bedürfnisse vertreten.

3 Der Bundesrat erlässt Bestimmungen über die Anlage und die Aufbewahrung des Vermögens.

Art. 409 D. Vermögensverwaltung / II. Beträge zur freien Verfügung

II. Beträge zur freien Verfügung

Der Beistand oder die Beiständin stellt der betroffenen Person aus deren Vermögen angemessene Beträge zur freien Verfügung.

Art. 410 D. Vermögensverwaltung / III. Rechnung

III. Rechnung

1 Der Beistand oder die Beiständin führt Rechnung und legt sie der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde in den von ihr angesetzten Zeitabständen, mindestens aber alle zwei Jahre, zur Genehmigung vor.

2 Der Beistand oder die Beiständin erläutert der betroffenen Person die Rechnung und gibt ihr auf Verlangen eine Kopie.

Art. 411 E. Berichterstattung

E. Berichterstattung

1 Der Beistand oder die Beiständin erstattet der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde so oft wie nötig, mindestens aber alle zwei Jahre, einen Bericht über die Lage der betroffenen Person und die Ausübung der Beistandschaft.

2 Der Beistand oder die Beiständin zieht bei der Erstellung des Berichts die betroffene Person, soweit tunlich, bei und gibt ihr auf Verlangen eine Kopie.

Art. 412 F. Besondere Geschäfte

F. Besondere Geschäfte

1 Der Beistand oder die Beiständin darf in Vertretung der betroffenen Person keine Bürgschaften eingehen, keine Stiftungen errichten und keine Schenkungen vornehmen, mit Ausnahme der üblichen Gelegenheitsgeschenke.

2 Vermögenswerte, die für die betroffene Person oder für ihre Familie einen besonderen Wert haben, werden wenn immer möglich nicht veräussert.

Art. 413 G. Sorgfalts- und Verschwiegenheitspflicht

G. Sorgfalts- und Verschwiegenheitspflicht

1 Der Beistand oder die Beiständin hat bei der Erfüllung der Aufgaben die gleiche Sorgfaltspflicht wie eine beauftragte Person nach den Bestimmungen des Obligationenrechts1.

2 Der Beistand oder die Beiständin ist zur Verschwiegenheit verpflichtet, soweit nicht überwiegende Interessen entgegenstehen.

3 Dritte sind über die Beistandschaft zu orientieren, soweit dies zur gehörigen Erfüllung der Aufgaben des Beistands oder der Beiständin erforderlich ist.


1 SR 220

Art. 414 H. Änderung der Verhältnisse

H. Änderung der Verhältnisse

Der Beistand oder die Beiständin informiert die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde unverzüglich über Umstände, die eine Änderung der Massnahme erfordern oder eine Aufhebung der Beistandschaft ermöglichen.


  Sechster Unterabschnitt: Die Mitwirkung der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde

Art. 415 A. Prüfung der Rechnung und des Berichts

A. Prüfung der Rechnung und des Berichts

1 Die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde prüft die Rechnung und erteilt oder verweigert die Genehmigung; wenn nötig, verlangt sie eine Berichtigung.

2 Sie prüft den Bericht und verlangt, wenn nötig, dessen Ergänzung.

3 Sie trifft nötigenfalls Massnahmen, die zur Wahrung der Interessen der betroffenen Person angezeigt sind.

Art. 416 B. Zustimmungsbedürftige Geschäfte / I. Von Gesetzes wegen

B. Zustimmungsbedürftige Geschäfte

I. Von Gesetzes wegen

1 Für folgende Geschäfte, die der Beistand oder die Beiständin in Vertretung der betroffenen Person vornimmt, ist die Zustimmung der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde erforderlich:

1.
Liquidation des Haushalts, Kündigung des Vertrags über Räumlichkeiten, in denen die betroffene Person wohnt;
2.
Dauerverträge über die Unterbringung der betroffenen Person;
3.
Annahme oder Ausschlagung einer Erbschaft, wenn dafür eine ausdrückliche Erklärung erforderlich ist, sowie Erbverträge und Erbteilungsverträge;
4.
Erwerb, Veräusserung, Verpfändung und andere dingliche Belastung von Grundstücken sowie Erstellen von Bauten, das über ordentliche Verwaltungshandlungen hinausgeht;
5.
Erwerb, Veräusserung und Verpfändung anderer Vermögenswerte sowie Errichtung einer Nutzniessung daran, wenn diese Geschäfte nicht unter die Führung der ordentlichen Verwaltung und Bewirtschaftung fallen;
6.
Aufnahme und Gewährung von erheblichen Darlehen, Eingehung von wechselrechtlichen Verbindlichkeiten;
7.
Leibrenten- und Verpfründungsverträge sowie Lebensversicherungen, soweit diese nicht im Rahmen der beruflichen Vorsorge mit einem Arbeitsvertrag zusammenhängen;
8.
Übernahme oder Liquidation eines Geschäfts, Eintritt in eine Gesellschaft mit persönlicher Haftung oder erheblicher Kapitalbeteiligung;
9.
Erklärung der Zahlungsunfähigkeit, Prozessführung, Abschluss eines Vergleichs, eines Schiedsvertrags oder eines Nachlassvertrags, unter Vorbehalt vorläufiger Massnahmen des Beistands oder der Beiständin in dringenden Fällen.

2 Die Zustimmung der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde ist nicht erforderlich, wenn die urteilsfähige betroffene Person ihr Einverständnis erteilt und ihre Handlungsfähigkeit durch die Beistandschaft nicht eingeschränkt ist.

3 Immer der Zustimmung der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde bedürfen Verträge zwischen dem Beistand oder der Beiständin und der betroffenen Person, ausser diese erteilt einen unentgeltlichen Auftrag.

Art. 417 B. Zustimmungsbedürftige Geschäfte / II. Auf Anordnung

II. Auf Anordnung

Die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde kann aus wichtigen Gründen anordnen, dass ihr weitere Geschäfte zur Zustimmung unterbreitet werden.

Art. 418 B. Zustimmungsbedürftige Geschäfte / III. Fehlen der Zustimmung

III. Fehlen der Zustimmung

Ist ein Geschäft ohne die erforderliche Zustimmung der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde abgeschlossen worden, so hat es für die betroffene Person nur die Wirkung, die nach der Bestimmung des Personenrechts über das Fehlen der Zustimmung des gesetzlichen Vertreters vorgesehen ist.


  Siebter Unterabschnitt: Einschreiten der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde

Art. 419

Gegen Handlungen oder Unterlassungen des Beistands oder der Beiständin sowie einer Drittperson oder Stelle, der die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde einen Auftrag erteilt hat, kann die betroffene oder eine ihr nahestehende Person und jede Person, die ein rechtlich geschütztes Interesse hat, die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde anrufen.


  Achter Unterabschnitt: Besondere Bestimmungen für Angehörige

Art. 420

Werden der Ehegatte, die eingetragene Partnerin oder der eingetragene Partner, die Eltern, ein Nachkomme, ein Geschwister, die faktische Lebenspartnerin oder der faktische Lebenspartner der betroffenen Person als Beistand oder Beiständin eingesetzt, so kann die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde sie von der Inventarpflicht, der Pflicht zur periodischen Berichterstattung und Rechnungsablage und der Pflicht, für bestimmte Geschäfte die Zustimmung einzuholen, ganz oder teilweise entbinden, wenn die Umstände es rechtfertigen.


  Neunter Unterabschnitt: Das Ende des Amtes des Beistands oder der Beiständin

Art. 421 A. Von Gesetzes wegen

A. Von Gesetzes wegen

Das Amt des Beistands oder der Beiständin endet von Gesetzes wegen:

1.
mit Ablauf einer von der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde festgelegten Amtsdauer, sofern keine Bestätigung im Amt erfolgt;
2.
mit dem Ende der Beistandschaft;
3.
mit dem Ende des Arbeitsverhältnisses als Berufsbeistand oder Berufsbeiständin;
4.
im Zeitpunkt, in dem der Beistand oder die Beiständin verbeiständet oder urteilsunfähig wird oder stirbt.
Art. 422 B. Entlassung / I. Auf Begehren des Beistands oder der Beiständin

B. Entlassung

I. Auf Begehren des Beistands oder der Beiständin

1 Der Beistand oder die Beiständin hat frühestens nach vier Jahren Amtsdauer Anspruch auf Entlassung.

2 Vorher kann der Beistand oder die Beiständin die Entlassung aus wichtigen Gründen verlangen.

Art. 423 B. Entlassung / II. Übrige Fälle

II. Übrige Fälle

1 Die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde entlässt den Beistand oder die Beiständin, wenn:

1.
die Eignung für die Aufgaben nicht mehr besteht;
2.
ein anderer wichtiger Grund für die Entlassung vorliegt.

2 Die Entlassung kann von der betroffenen oder einer ihr nahestehenden Person beantragt werden.

Art. 424 C. Weiterführung der Geschäfte

C. Weiterführung der Geschäfte

Der Beistand oder die Beiständin ist verpflichtet, nicht aufschiebbare Geschäfte weiterzuführen, bis der Nachfolger oder die Nachfolgerin das Amt übernimmt, sofern die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde nichts anderes anordnet. Diese Bestimmung gilt nicht für den Berufsbeistand oder die Berufsbeiständin.

Art. 425 D. Schlussbericht und Schlussrechnung

D. Schlussbericht und Schlussrechnung

1 Endet das Amt, so erstattet der Beistand oder die Beiständin der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde den Schlussbericht und reicht gegebenenfalls die Schlussrechnung ein. Die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde kann den Berufsbeistand oder die Berufsbeiständin von dieser Pflicht entbinden, wenn das Arbeitsverhältnis endet.

2 Die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde prüft und genehmigt den Schlussbericht und die Schlussrechnung auf die gleiche Weise wie die periodischen Berichte und Rechnungen.

3 Sie stellt den Schlussbericht und die Schlussrechnung der betroffenen Person oder deren Erben und gegebenenfalls der neuen Beiständin oder dem neuen Beistand zu und weist diese Personen gleichzeitig auf die Bestimmungen über die Verantwortlichkeit hin.

4 Sie teilt ihnen zudem mit, ob sie den Beistand oder die Beiständin entlastet oder die Genehmigung des Schlussberichts oder der Schlussrechnung verweigert hat.


  Dritter Abschnitt: Die fürsorgerische Unterbringung

Art. 426 A. Die Massnahmen / I. Unterbringung zur Behandlung oder Betreuung

A. Die Massnahmen

I. Unterbringung zur Behandlung oder Betreuung

1 Eine Person, die an einer psychischen Störung oder an geistiger Behinderung leidet oder schwer verwahrlost ist, darf in einer geeigneten Einrichtung untergebracht werden, wenn die nötige Behandlung oder Betreuung nicht anders erfolgen kann.

2 Die Belastung und der Schutz von Angehörigen und Dritten sind zu berücksichtigen.

3 Die betroffene Person wird entlassen, sobald die Voraussetzungen für die Unterbringung nicht mehr erfüllt sind.

4 Die betroffene oder eine ihr nahestehende Person kann jederzeit um Entlassung ersuchen. Über dieses Gesuch ist ohne Verzug zu entscheiden.

Art. 427 A. Die Massnahmen / II. Zurückbehaltung freiwillig Eingetretener

II. Zurückbehaltung freiwillig Eingetretener

1 Will eine Person, die an einer psychischen Störung leidet und freiwillig in eine Einrichtung eingetreten ist, diese wieder verlassen, so kann sie von der ärztlichen Leitung der Einrichtung für höchstens drei Tage zurückbehalten werden, wenn sie:

1.
sich selbst an Leib und Leben gefährdet; oder
2.
das Leben oder die körperliche Integrität Dritter ernsthaft gefährdet.

2 Nach Ablauf der Frist kann die betroffene Person die Einrichtung verlassen, wenn nicht ein vollstreckbarer Unterbringungsentscheid vorliegt.

3 Die betroffene Person wird schriftlich darauf aufmerksam gemacht, dass sie das Gericht anrufen kann.

Art. 428 B. Zuständigkeit für die Unterbringung und die Entlassung / I. Erwachsenenschutzbehörde

B. Zuständigkeit für die Unterbringung und die Entlassung

I. Erwachsenenschutzbehörde

1 Für die Anordnung der Unterbringung und die Entlassung ist die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde zuständig.

2 Sie kann im Einzelfall die Zuständigkeit für die Entlassung der Einrichtung übertragen.

Art. 429 B. Zuständigkeit für die Unterbringung und die Entlassung / II. Ärztinnen und Ärzte / 1. Zuständigkeit

II. Ärztinnen und Ärzte

1. Zuständigkeit

1 Die Kantone können Ärzte und Ärztinnen bezeichnen, die neben der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde eine Unterbringung während einer vom kantonalen Recht festgelegten Dauer anordnen dürfen. Die Dauer darf höchstens sechs Wochen betragen.

2 Die ärztliche Unterbringung fällt spätestens nach Ablauf der festgelegten Dauer dahin, sofern nicht ein vollstreckbarer Unterbringungsentscheid der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde vorliegt.

3 Über die Entlassung entscheidet die Einrichtung.

Art. 430 B. Zuständigkeit für die Unterbringung und die Entlassung / II. Ärztinnen und Ärzte / 2. Verfahren

2. Verfahren

1 Die Ärztin oder der Arzt untersucht persönlich die betroffene Person und hört sie an.

2 Der Unterbringungsentscheid enthält mindestens folgende Angaben:

1.
Ort und Datum der Untersuchung;
2.
Name der Ärztin oder des Arztes;
3.
Befund, Gründe und Zweck der Unterbringung;
4.
die Rechtsmittelbelehrung.

3 Das Rechtsmittel hat keine aufschiebende Wirkung, sofern die Ärztin oder der Arzt oder das zuständige Gericht nichts anderes verfügt.

4 Ein Exemplar des Unterbringungsentscheids wird der betroffenen Person ausgehändigt; ein weiteres Exemplar wird der Einrichtung bei der Aufnahme der betroffenen Person vorgelegt.

5 Die Ärztin oder der Arzt informiert, sofern möglich, eine der betroffenen Person nahestehende Person schriftlich über die Unterbringung und die Befugnis, das Gericht anzurufen.

Art. 431 C. Periodische Überprüfung

C. Periodische Überprüfung

1 Die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde überprüft spätestens sechs Monate nach Beginn der Unterbringung, ob die Voraussetzungen noch erfüllt sind und ob die Einrichtung weiterhin geeignet ist.

2 Sie führt innerhalb von weiteren sechs Monaten eine zweite Überprüfung durch. Anschliessend führt sie die Überprüfung so oft wie nötig, mindestens aber jährlich durch.

Art. 432 D. Vertrauensperson

D. Vertrauensperson

Jede Person, die in einer Einrichtung untergebracht wird, kann eine Person ihres Vertrauens beiziehen, die sie während des Aufenthalts und bis zum Abschluss aller damit zusammenhängenden Verfahren unterstützt.

Art. 433 E. Medizinische Massnahmen bei einer psychischen Störung / I. Behandlungsplan

E. Medizinische Massnahmen bei einer psychischen Störung

I. Behandlungsplan

1 Wird eine Person zur Behandlung einer psychischen Störung in einer Einrichtung untergebracht, so erstellt die behandelnde Ärztin oder der behandelnde Arzt unter Beizug der betroffenen Person und gegebenenfalls ihrer Vertrauensperson einen schriftlichen Behandlungsplan.

2 Die Ärztin oder der Arzt informiert die betroffene Person und deren Vertrauensperson über alle Umstände, die im Hinblick auf die in Aussicht genommenen medizinischen Massnahmen wesentlich sind, insbesondere über deren Gründe, Zweck, Art, Modalitäten, Risiken und Nebenwirkungen, über Folgen eines Unterlassens der Behandlung sowie über allfällige alternative Behandlungsmöglichkeiten.

3 Der Behandlungsplan wird der betroffenen Person zur Zustimmung unterbreitet. Bei einer urteilsunfähigen Person ist eine allfällige Patientenverfügung zu berücksichtigen.

4 Der Behandlungsplan wird der laufenden Entwicklung angepasst.

Art. 434 E. Medizinische Massnahmen bei einer psychischen Störung / II. Behandlung ohne Zustimmung

II. Behandlung ohne Zustimmung

1 Fehlt die Zustimmung der betroffenen Person, so kann die Chefärztin oder der Chefarzt der Abteilung die im Behandlungsplan vorgesehenen medizinischen Massnahmen schriftlich anordnen, wenn:

1.
ohne Behandlung der betroffenen Person ein ernsthafter gesundheitlicher Schaden droht oder das Leben oder die körperliche Integrität Dritter ernsthaft gefährdet ist;
2.
die betroffene Person bezüglich ihrer Behandlungsbedürftigkeit urteilsunfähig ist; und
3.
keine angemessene Massnahme zur Verfügung steht, die weniger einschneidend ist.

2 Die Anordnung wird der betroffenen Person und ihrer Vertrauensperson verbunden mit einer Rechtsmittelbelehrung schriftlich mitgeteilt.

Art. 435 E. Medizinische Massnahmen bei einer psychischen Störung / III. Notfälle

III. Notfälle

1 In einer Notfallsituation können die zum Schutz der betroffenen Person oder Dritter unerlässlichen medizinischen Massnahmen sofort ergriffen werden.

2 Ist der Einrichtung bekannt, wie die Person behandelt werden will, so wird deren Wille berücksichtigt.

Art. 436 E. Medizinische Massnahmen bei einer psychischen Störung / IV. Austrittsgespräch

IV. Austrittsgespräch

1 Besteht eine Rückfallgefahr, so versucht die behandelnde Ärztin oder der behandelnde Arzt mit der betroffenen Person vor deren Entlassung Behandlungsgrundsätze für den Fall einer erneuten Unterbringung in der Einrichtung zu vereinbaren.

2 Das Austrittsgespräch ist zu dokumentieren.

Art. 437 E. Medizinische Massnahmen bei einer psychischen Störung / V. Kantonales Recht

V. Kantonales Recht

1 Die Kantone regeln die Nachbetreuung.

2 Sie können ambulante Massnahmen vorsehen.

Art. 438 F. Massnahmen zur Einschränkung der Bewegungsfreiheit

F. Massnahmen zur Einschränkung der Bewegungsfreiheit

Auf Massnahmen, die die Bewegungsfreiheit der betroffenen Personen in der Einrichtung einschränken, sind die Bestimmungen über die Einschränkung der Bewegungsfreiheit in Wohn- oder Pflegeeinrichtungen sinngemäss anwendbar. Vorbehalten bleibt die Anrufung des Gerichts.

Art. 439 G. Anrufung des Gerichts

G. Anrufung des Gerichts

1 Die betroffene oder eine ihr nahestehende Person kann in folgenden Fällen schriftlich das zuständige Gericht anrufen:

1.
bei ärztlich angeordneter Unterbringung;
2.
bei Zurückbehaltung durch die Einrichtung;
3.
bei Abweisung eines Entlassungsgesuchs durch die Einrichtung;
4.
bei Behandlung einer psychischen Störung ohne Zustimmung;
5.
bei Massnahmen zur Einschränkung der Bewegungsfreiheit.

2 Die Frist zur Anrufung des Gerichts beträgt zehn Tage seit Mitteilung des Entscheids. Bei Massnahmen zur Einschränkung der Bewegungsfreiheit kann das Gericht jederzeit angerufen werden.

3 Das Verfahren richtet sich sinngemäss nach den Bestimmungen über das Verfahren vor der gerichtlichen Beschwerdeinstanz.

4 Jedes Begehren um gerichtliche Beurteilung ist unverzüglich an das zuständige Gericht weiterzuleiten.


  Zwölfter Titel: Organisation

  Erster Abschnitt: Behörden und örtliche Zuständigkeit

Art. 440 A. Erwachsenenschutzbehörde

A. Erwachsenenschutzbehörde

1 Die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde ist eine Fachbehörde. Sie wird von den Kantonen bestimmt.

2 Sie fällt ihre Entscheide mit mindestens drei Mitgliedern. Die Kantone können für bestimmte Geschäfte Ausnahmen vorsehen.

3 Sie hat auch die Aufgaben der Kindesschutzbehörde.

Art. 441 B. Aufsichtsbehörde

B. Aufsichtsbehörde

1 Die Kantone bestimmen die Aufsichtsbehörden.

2 Der Bundesrat kann Bestimmungen über die Aufsicht erlassen.

Art. 442 C. Örtliche Zuständigkeit

C. Örtliche Zuständigkeit

1 Zuständig ist die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde am Wohnsitz der betroffenen Person. Ist ein Verfahren rechtshängig, so bleibt die Zuständigkeit bis zu dessen Abschluss auf jeden Fall erhalten.

2 Ist Gefahr im Verzug, so ist auch die Behörde am Ort zuständig, wo sich die betroffene Person aufhält. Trifft diese Behörde eine Massnahme, so benachrichtigt sie die Wohnsitzbehörde.

3 Für eine Beistandschaft wegen Abwesenheit ist auch die Behörde des Ortes zuständig, wo das Vermögen in seinem Hauptbestandteil verwaltet worden oder der betroffenen Person zugefallen ist.

4 Die Kantone sind berechtigt, für ihre Bürgerinnen und Bürger, die Wohnsitz im Kanton haben, statt der Wohnsitzbehörde die Behörde des Heimatortes zuständig zu erklären, sofern auch die Unterstützung bedürftiger Personen ganz oder teilweise der Heimatgemeinde obliegt.

5 Wechselt eine Person, für die eine Massnahme besteht, ihren Wohnsitz, so übernimmt die Behörde am neuen Ort die Massnahme ohne Verzug, sofern keine wichtigen Gründe dagegen sprechen.


  Zweiter Abschnitt: Verfahren

  Erster Unterabschnitt: Vor der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde

Art. 443 A. Melderechte und -pflichten

A. Melderechte und -pflichten

1 Jede Person kann der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde Meldung erstatten, wenn eine Person hilfsbedürftig erscheint. Vorbehalten bleiben die Bestimmungen über das Berufsgeheimnis.

2 Wer in amtlicher Tätigkeit von einer solchen Person erfährt und der Hilfsbedürftigkeit im Rahmen seiner Tätigkeit nicht Abhilfe schaffen kann, ist meldepflichtig. Vorbehalten bleiben die Bestimmungen über das Berufsgeheimnis.1

3 Die Kantone können weitere Meldepflichten vorsehen.2


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 15. Dez. 2017 (Kindesschutz), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 2947; BBl 2015 3431).
2 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 15. Dez. 2017 (Kindesschutz), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 2947; BBl 2015 3431).

Art. 444 B. Prüfung der Zuständigkeit

B. Prüfung der Zuständigkeit

1 Die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde prüft ihre Zuständigkeit von Amtes wegen.

2 Hält sie sich nicht für zuständig, so überweist sie die Sache unverzüglich der Behörde, die sie als zuständig erachtet.

3 Zweifelt sie an ihrer Zuständigkeit, so pflegt sie einen Meinungsaustausch mit der Behörde, deren Zuständigkeit in Frage kommt.

4 Kann im Meinungsaustausch keine Einigung erzielt werden, so unterbreitet die zuerst befasste Behörde die Frage ihrer Zuständigkeit der gerichtlichen Beschwerdeinstanz.

Art. 445 C. Vorsorgliche Massnahmen

C. Vorsorgliche Massnahmen

1 Die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde trifft auf Antrag einer am Verfahren beteiligten Person oder von Amtes wegen alle für die Dauer des Verfahrens notwendigen vorsorglichen Massnahmen. Sie kann insbesondere eine Massnahme des Erwachsenenschutzes vorsorglich anordnen.

2 Bei besonderer Dringlichkeit kann sie vorsorgliche Massnahmen sofort ohne Anhörung der am Verfahren beteiligten Personen treffen. Gleichzeitig gibt sie diesen Gelegenheit zur Stellungnahme; anschliessend entscheidet sie neu.

3 Gegen Entscheide über vorsorgliche Massnahmen kann innert zehn Tagen nach deren Mitteilung Beschwerde erhoben werden.

Art. 446 D. Verfahrensgrundsätze

D. Verfahrensgrundsätze

1 Die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde erforscht den Sachverhalt von Amtes wegen.

2 Sie zieht die erforderlichen Erkundigungen ein und erhebt die notwendigen Beweise. Sie kann eine geeignete Person oder Stelle mit Abklärungen beauftragen. Nötigenfalls ordnet sie das Gutachten einer sachverständigen Person an.

3 Sie ist nicht an die Anträge der am Verfahren beteiligten Personen gebunden.

4 Sie wendet das Recht von Amtes wegen an.

Art. 447 E. Anhörung

E. Anhörung

1 Die betroffene Person wird persönlich angehört, soweit dies nicht als unverhältnismässig erscheint.

2 Im Fall einer fürsorgerischen Unterbringung hört die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde die betroffene Person in der Regel als Kollegium an.

Art. 448 F. Mitwirkungspflichten und Amtshilfe

F. Mitwirkungspflichten und Amtshilfe

1 Die am Verfahren beteiligten Personen und Dritte sind zur Mitwirkung bei der Abklärung des Sachverhalts verpflichtet. Die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde trifft die zur Wahrung schutzwürdiger Interessen erforderlichen Anordnungen. Nötigenfalls ordnet sie die zwangsweise Durchsetzung der Mitwirkungspflicht an.

2 Ärztinnen und Ärzte, Zahnärztinnen und Zahnärzte, Apothekerinnen und Apotheker, Hebammen und Entbindungspfleger, Chiropraktoren, Psychologen sowie ihre Hilfspersonen sind nur dann zur Mitwirkung verpflichtet, wenn die geheimnisberechtigte Person sie dazu ermächtigt hat oder die vorgesetzte Behörde oder die Aufsichtsbehörde sie auf eigenes Gesuch oder auf Gesuch der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde vom Berufsgeheimnis entbunden hat.1

3 Nicht zur Mitwirkung verpflichtet sind Geistliche, Rechtsanwältinnen und Rechtsanwälte, Verteidigerinnen und Verteidiger, Mediatorinnen und Mediatoren sowie ehemalige Beiständinnen und Beistände, die für das Verfahren ernannt wurden.

4 Verwaltungsbehörden und Gerichte geben die notwendigen Akten heraus, erstatten Bericht und erteilen Auskünfte, soweit nicht schutzwürdige Interessen entgegenstehen.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 15. Dez. 2017 (Kindesschutz), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 2947; BBl 2015 3431).

Art. 449 G. Begutachtung in einer Einrichtung

G. Begutachtung in einer Einrichtung

1 Ist eine psychiatrische Begutachtung unerlässlich und kann diese nicht ambulant durchgeführt werden, so weist die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde die betroffene Person zur Begutachtung in eine geeignete Einrichtung ein.

2 Die Bestimmungen über das Verfahren bei fürsorgerischer Unterbringung sind sinngemäss anwendbar.

Art. 449a H. Anordnung einer Vertretung

H. Anordnung einer Vertretung

Die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde ordnet wenn nötig die Vertretung der betroffenen Person an und bezeichnet als Beistand oder Beiständin eine in fürsorgerischen und rechtlichen Fragen erfahrene Person.

Art. 449b I. Akteneinsicht

I. Akteneinsicht

1 Die am Verfahren beteiligten Personen haben Anspruch auf Akteneinsicht, soweit nicht überwiegende Interessen entgegenstehen.

2 Wird einer am Verfahren beteiligten Person die Einsichtnahme in ein Aktenstück verweigert, so wird auf dieses nur abgestellt, wenn ihr die Behörde von seinem für die Sache wesentlichen Inhalt mündlich oder schriftlich Kenntnis gegeben hat.

Art. 449c J. Mitteilungspflicht

J. Mitteilungspflicht

Die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde macht dem Zivilstandsamt Mitteilung, wenn:

1.
sie eine Person wegen dauernder Urteilsunfähigkeit unter umfassende Beistandschaft stellt;
2.
für eine dauernd urteilsunfähige Person ein Vorsorgeauftrag wirksam wird.

  Zweiter Unterabschnitt: Vor der gerichtlichen Beschwerdeinstanz

Art. 450 A. Beschwerdeobjekt und Beschwerdebefugnis

A. Beschwerdeobjekt und Beschwerdebefugnis

1 Gegen Entscheide der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde kann Beschwerde beim zuständigen Gericht erhoben werden.

2 Zur Beschwerde befugt sind:

1.
die am Verfahren beteiligten Personen;
2.
die der betroffenen Person nahestehenden Personen;
3.
Personen, die ein rechtlich geschütztes Interesse an der Aufhebung oder Änderung des angefochtenen Entscheids haben.

3 Die Beschwerde ist beim Gericht schriftlich und begründet einzureichen.

Art. 450a B. Beschwerdegründe

B. Beschwerdegründe

1 Mit der Beschwerde kann gerügt werden:

1.
Rechtsverletzung;
2.
unrichtige oder unvollständige Feststellung des rechtserheblichen Sachverhalts;
3.
Unangemessenheit.

2 Ferner kann wegen Rechtsverweigerung und Rechtsverzögerung Beschwerde geführt werden.

Art. 450b C. Beschwerdefrist

C. Beschwerdefrist

1 Die Beschwerdefrist beträgt dreissig Tage seit Mitteilung des Entscheids. Diese Frist gilt auch für beschwerdeberechtigte Personen, denen der Entscheid nicht mitgeteilt werden muss.

2 Bei einem Entscheid auf dem Gebiet der fürsorgerischen Unterbringung beträgt die Beschwerdefrist zehn Tage seit Mitteilung des Entscheids.

3 Wegen Rechtsverweigerung und Rechtsverzögerung kann jederzeit Beschwerde geführt werden.

Art. 450c D. Aufschiebende Wirkung

D. Aufschiebende Wirkung

Die Beschwerde hat aufschiebende Wirkung, sofern die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde oder die gerichtliche Beschwerdeinstanz nichts anderes verfügt.

Art. 450d E. Vernehmlassung der Vorinstanz und Wiedererwägung

E. Vernehmlassung der Vorinstanz und Wiedererwägung

1 Die gerichtliche Beschwerdeinstanz gibt der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde Gelegenheit zur Vernehmlassung.

2 Statt eine Vernehmlassung einzureichen, kann die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde den Entscheid in Wiedererwägung ziehen.

Art. 450e F. Besondere Bestimmungen bei fürsorgerischer Unterbringung

F. Besondere Bestimmungen bei fürsorgerischer Unterbringung

1 Die Beschwerde gegen einen Entscheid auf dem Gebiet der fürsorgerischen Unterbringung muss nicht begründet werden.

2 Die Beschwerde hat keine aufschiebende Wirkung, sofern die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde oder die gerichtliche Beschwerdeinstanz nichts anderes verfügt.

3 Bei psychischen Störungen muss gestützt auf das Gutachten einer sachverständigen Person entschieden werden.

4 Die gerichtliche Beschwerdeinstanz hört die betroffene Person in der Regel als Kollegium an. Sie ordnet wenn nötig deren Vertretung an und bezeichnet als Beistand oder Beiständin eine in fürsorgerischen und rechtlichen Fragen erfahrene Person.

5 Sie entscheidet in der Regel innert fünf Arbeitstagen seit Eingang der Beschwerde.


  Dritter Unterabschnitt: Gemeinsame Bestimmung

Art. 450f

Im Übrigen sind die Bestimmungen der Zivilprozessordnung sinngemäss anwendbar, soweit die Kantone nichts anderes bestimmen.


  Vierter Unterabschnitt: Vollstreckung

Art. 450g

1 Die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde vollstreckt die Entscheide auf Antrag oder von Amtes wegen.

2 Hat die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde oder die gerichtliche Beschwerdeinstanz im Entscheid bereits Vollstreckungsmassnahmen angeordnet, so kann dieser direkt vollstreckt werden.

3 Die mit der Vollstreckung betraute Person kann nötigenfalls polizeiliche Hilfe beanspruchen. Unmittelbare Zwangsmassnahmen sind in der Regel vorgängig anzudrohen.


  Dritter Abschnitt: Verhältnis zu Dritten und Zusammenarbeitspflicht

Art. 451 A. Verschwiegenheitspflicht und Auskunft

A. Verschwiegenheitspflicht und Auskunft

1 Die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde ist zur Verschwiegenheit verpflichtet, soweit nicht überwiegende Interessen entgegenstehen.

2 Wer ein Interesse glaubhaft macht, kann von der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde Auskunft über das Vorliegen und die Wirkungen einer Massnahme des Erwachsenenschutzes verlangen.

Art. 452 B. Wirkung der Massnahmen gegenüber Dritten

B. Wirkung der Massnahmen gegenüber Dritten

1 Eine Massnahme des Erwachsenenschutzes kann Dritten, auch wenn sie gutgläubig sind, entgegengehalten werden.

2 Schränkt die Beistandschaft die Handlungsfähigkeit der betroffenen Person ein, so ist den Schuldnern mitzuteilen, dass ihre Leistung nur befreiende Wirkung hat, wenn sie diese dem Beistand oder der Beiständin erbringen. Vorher kann die Beistandschaft gutgläubigen Schuldnern nicht entgegengehalten werden.

3 Hat eine Person, für die eine Massnahme des Erwachsenenschutzes besteht, andere zur irrtümlichen Annahme ihrer Handlungsfähigkeit verleitet, so ist sie ihnen für den dadurch verursachten Schaden verantwortlich.

Art. 453 C. Zusammenarbeitspflicht

C. Zusammenarbeitspflicht

1 Besteht die ernsthafte Gefahr, dass eine hilfsbedürftige Person sich selbst gefährdet oder ein Verbrechen oder Vergehen begeht, mit dem sie jemanden körperlich, seelisch oder materiell schwer schädigt, so arbeiten die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde, die betroffenen Stellen und die Polizei zusammen.

2 Personen, die dem Amts- oder Berufsgeheimnis unterstehen, sind in einem solchen Fall berechtigt, der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde Mitteilung zu machen.


  Vierter Abschnitt: Verantwortlichkeit

Art. 454 A. Grundsatz

A. Grundsatz

1 Wer im Rahmen der behördlichen Massnahmen des Erwachsenenschutzes durch widerrechtliches Handeln oder Unterlassen verletzt wird, hat Anspruch auf Schadenersatz und, sofern die Schwere der Verletzung es rechtfertigt, auf Genugtuung.

2 Der gleiche Anspruch besteht, wenn sich die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde oder die Aufsichtsbehörde in den anderen Bereichen des Erwachsenenschutzes widerrechtlich verhalten hat.

3 Haftbar ist der Kanton; gegen die Person, die den Schaden verursacht hat, steht der geschädigten Person kein Ersatzanspruch zu.

4 Für den Rückgriff des Kantons auf die Person, die den Schaden verursacht hat, ist das kantonale Recht massgebend.

Art. 455 B. Verjährung

B. Verjährung

1 Der Anspruch auf Schadenersatz oder Genugtuung verjährt nach den Bestimmungen des Obligationenrechts1 über die unerlaubten Handlungen.2

2 Hat die Person, die den Schaden verursacht hat, durch ihr Verhalten eine strafbare Handlung begangen, so verjährt der Anspruch auf Schadenersatz oder Genugtuung frühestens mit Eintritt der strafrechtlichen Verfolgungsverjährung. Tritt diese infolge eines erstinstanzlichen Strafurteils nicht mehr ein, so verjährt der Anspruch frühestens mit Ablauf von drei Jahren seit Eröffnung des Urteils.3

3 Beruht die Verletzung auf der Anordnung oder Durchführung einer Dauermassnahme, so beginnt die Verjährung des Anspruchs gegenüber dem Kanton nicht vor dem Wegfall der Dauermassnahme oder ihrer Weiterführung durch einen anderen Kanton.


1 SR 220
2 Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 3 des BG vom 15. Juni 2018 (Revision des Verjährungsrechts), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2020 (AS 2018 5343; BBl 2014 235).
3 Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 3 des BG vom 15. Juni 2018 (Revision des Verjährungsrechts), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2020 (AS 2018 5343; BBl 2014 235).

Art. 456 C. Haftung nach Auftragsrecht C. Haftung nach Auftragsrecht

C. Haftung nach Auftragsrecht

Die Haftung der vorsorgebeauftragten Person sowie diejenige des Ehegatten, der eingetragenen Partnerin oder des eingetragenen Partners einer urteilsunfähigen Person oder des Vertreters oder der Vertreterin bei medizinischen Massnahmen, soweit es sich nicht um den Beistand oder die Beiständin handelt, richtet sich nach den Bestimmungen des Obligationenrechts1 über den Auftrag.


1 SR 220


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 26. Juni 1998, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 3 des BG vom 26. Juni 1998, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).3 Fassung des fünften Titels gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 5. Okt. 1984, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191). Siehe auch die Art. 8–8b des SchlT hiernach.4 Fassung des sechsten Titels gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 5. Okt. 1984, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191). Siehe auch die Art. 9–11a des SchlT hiernach.5 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).6 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).7 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).8 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).9 Ursprünglich Dritter Abschnitt.10 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).11 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).12 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).13 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1). Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 4 des BG vom 26. Juni 1998, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).14 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).15 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).16 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

  Dritter Teil: Das Erbrecht

  Erste Abteilung: Die Erben

  Dreizehnter Titel: Die gesetzlichen Erben

Art. 457 A. Verwandte Erben / I. Nachkommen

A. Verwandte1 Erben

I. Nachkommen

1 Die nächsten Erben eines Erblassers sind seine Nachkommen.

2 Die Kinder erben zu gleichen Teilen.

3 An die Stelle vorverstorbener Kinder treten ihre Nachkommen, und zwar in allen Graden nach Stämmen.


1 Fassung dieses Wortes gemäss Ziff. I 3 des BG vom 30. Juni 1972, in Kraft seit 1. April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 458 A. Verwandte Erben / II. Elterlicher Stamm

II. Elterlicher Stamm

1 Hinterlässt der Erblasser keine Nachkommen, so gelangt die Erbschaft an den Stamm der Eltern.

2 Vater und Mutter erben nach Hälften.

3 An die Stelle von Vater oder Mutter, die vorverstorben sind, treten ihre Nachkommen, und zwar in allen Graden nach Stämmen.

4 Fehlt es an Nachkommen auf einer Seite, so fällt die ganze Erbschaft an die Erben der andern Seite.

Art. 459 A. Verwandte Erben / III. Grosselterlicher Stamm

III. Grosselterlicher Stamm

1 Hinterlässt der Erblasser weder Nachkommen noch Erben des elterlichen Stammes, so gelangt die Erbschaft an den Stamm der Grosseltern.

2 Überleben die Grosseltern der väterlichen und die der mütterlichen Seite den Erblasser, so erben sie auf jeder Seite zu gleichen Teilen.

3 An die Stelle eines vorverstorbenen Grossvaters oder einer vorverstorbenen Grossmutter treten ihre Nachkommen, und zwar in allen Graden nach Stämmen.

4 Ist der Grossvater oder die Grossmutter auf der väterlichen oder der mütterlichen Seite vorverstorben, und fehlt es auch an Nachkommen des Vorverstorbenen, so fällt die ganze Hälfte an die vorhandenen Erben der gleichen Seite.

5 Fehlt es an Erben der väterlichen oder der mütterlichen Seite, so fällt die ganze Erbschaft an die Erben der andern Seite.

Art. 4601A. Verwandte Erben / IV. Umfang der Erbberechtigung

IV. Umfang der Erbberechtigung

Mit dem Stamm der Grosseltern hört die Erbberechtigung der Verwandten auf.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 5. Okt. 1984, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 4611

1 Aufgehoben durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 4621B. Überlebende Ehegatten und überlebende eingetragene Partnerinnen oder Partner

B. Überlebende Ehegatten und überlebende eingetragene Partnerinnen oder Partner

Überlebende Ehegatten und überlebende eingetragene Partnerinnen oder Partner erhalten:

1.
wenn sie mit Nachkommen zu teilen haben, die Hälfte der Erbschaft;
2.
wenn sie mit Erben des elterlichen Stammes zu teilen haben, drei Viertel der Erbschaft;
3.
wenn auch keine Erben des elterlichen Stammes vorhanden sind, die ganze Erbschaft.

1 Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 8 des Partnerschaftsgesetzes vom 18. Juni 2004, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2007 (AS 2005 5685; BBl 2003 1288).

Art. 463–4641

1 Aufgehoben durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 5. Okt. 1984, mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 4651C. ...

C. ...


1 Aufgehoben durch Ziff. I 3 des BG vom 30. Juni 1972, mit Wirkung seit 1. April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200). Siehe jedoch Art. 12a SchlT hiernach.

Art. 4661D. Gemeinwesen

D. Gemeinwesen

Hinterlässt der Erblasser keine Erben, so fällt die Erbschaft an den Kanton, in dem der Erblasser den letzten Wohnsitz gehabt hat, oder an die Gemeinde, die von der Gesetzgebung dieses Kantons als berechtigt bezeichnet wird.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 5. Okt. 1984, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).


  Vierzehnter Titel: Die Verfügungen von Todes wegen

  Erster Abschnitt: Die Verfügungsfähigkeit

Art. 467 A. Letztwillige Verfügung

A. Letztwillige Verfügung

Wer urteilsfähig ist und das 18. Altersjahr zurückgelegt hat, ist befugt, unter Beobachtung der gesetzlichen Schranken und Formen über sein Vermögen letztwillig zu verfügen.

Art. 4681B. Erbvertrag

B. Erbvertrag

1 Wer urteilsfähig ist und das 18. Altersjahr zurückgelegt hat, kann als Erblasser einen Erbvertrag abschliessen.

2 Personen unter einer Beistandschaft, die den Abschluss eines Erbvertrags umfasst, bedürfen der Zustimmung ihres gesetzlichen Vertreters.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 469 C. Mangelhafter Wille

C. Mangelhafter Wille

1 Verfügungen, die der Erblasser unter dem Einfluss von Irrtum, arglistiger Täuschung, Drohung oder Zwang errichtet hat, sind ungültig.

2 Sie erlangen jedoch Gültigkeit, wenn sie der Erblasser nicht binnen Jahresfrist aufhebt, nachdem er von dem Irrtum oder von der Täuschung Kenntnis erhalten hat oder der Einfluss von Zwang oder Drohung weggefallen ist.

3 Enthält eine Verfügung einen offenbaren Irrtum in Bezug auf Personen oder Sachen, und lässt sich der wirkliche Wille des Erblassers mit Bestimmtheit feststellen, so ist die Verfügung in diesem Sinne richtig zu stellen.


  Zweiter Abschnitt: Die Verfügungsfreiheit

Art. 470 A. Verfügbarer Teil / I. Umfang der Verfügungsbefugnis

A. Verfügbarer Teil

I. Umfang der Verfügungsbefugnis

1 Wer Nachkommen, Eltern, den Ehegatten, eine eingetragene Partnerin oder einen eingetragenen Partner hinterlässt, kann bis zu deren Pflichtteil über sein Vermögen von Todes wegen verfügen.1

2 Wer keine der genannten Erben hinterlässt, kann über sein ganzes Vermögen von Todes wegen verfügen.


1 Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 8 des Partnerschaftsgesetzes vom 18. Juni 2004, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2007 (AS 2005 5685; BBl 2003 1288).

Art. 4711A. Verfügbarer Teil / II. Pflichtteil

II. Pflichtteil

Der Pflichtteil beträgt:

1.
für einen Nachkommen drei Viertel des gesetzlichen Erbanspruches;
2.
für jedes der Eltern die Hälfte;
3.2
für den überlebenden Ehegatten, die eingetragene Partnerin oder den eingetragenen Partner die Hälfte.

1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 5. Okt. 1984, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).
2 Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 8 des Partnerschaftsgesetzes vom 18. Juni 2004, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2007 (AS 2005 5685; BBl 2003 1288).

Art. 4721A. Verfügbarer Teil / III. ...

III. ...


1 Aufgehoben durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 5. Okt. 1984, mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 473 A. Verfügbarer Teil / IV. Begünstigung des Ehegatten

IV. Begünstigung des Ehegatten

1 Der Erblasser kann dem überlebenden Ehegatten durch Verfügung von Todes wegen gegenüber den gemeinsamen Nachkommen die Nutzniessung an dem ganzen ihnen zufallenden Teil der Erbschaft zuwenden.1

2 Diese Nutzniessung tritt an die Stelle des dem Ehegatten neben diesen Nachkommen zustehenden gesetzlichen Erbrechts. Neben dieser Nutzniessung beträgt der verfügbare Teil einen Viertel des Nachlasses.2

3 Im Falle der Wiederverheiratung entfällt die Nutzniessung auf jenem Teil der Erbschaft, der im Zeitpunkt des Erbganges nach den ordentlichen Bestimmungen über den Pflichtteil der Nachkommen nicht hätte mit der Nutzniessung belastet werden können.3


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 5. Okt 2001, in Kraft seit 1. März 2002 (AS 2002 269; BBl 2001 1121 2011 2111).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 5. Okt 2001, in Kraft seit 1. März 2002 (AS 2002 269; BBl 2001 1121 2011 2111).
3 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 5. Okt. 1984, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 474 A. Verfügbarer Teil / V. Berechnung des verfügbaren Teils / 1. Schuldenabzug

V. Berechnung des verfügbaren Teils

1. Schuldenabzug

1 Der verfügbare Teil berechnet sich nach dem Stande des Vermögens zur Zeit des Todes des Erblassers.

2 Bei der Berechnung sind die Schulden des Erblassers, die Auslagen für das Begräbnis, für die Siegelung und Inventaraufnahme sowie die Ansprüche der Hausgenossen auf Unterhalt während eines Monats von der Erbschaft abzuziehen.

Art. 475 A. Verfügbarer Teil / V. Berechnung des verfügbaren Teils / 2. Zuwendungen unter Lebenden

2. Zuwendungen unter Lebenden

Die Zuwendungen unter Lebenden werden insoweit zum Vermögen hinzugerechnet, als sie der Herabsetzungsklage unterstellt sind.

Art. 476 A. Verfügbarer Teil / V. Berechnung des verfügbaren Teils / 3. Versicherungsansprüche

3. Versicherungsansprüche

Ist ein auf den Tod des Erblassers gestellter Versicherungsanspruch mit Verfügung unter Lebenden oder von Todes wegen zugunsten eines Dritten begründet oder bei Lebzeiten des Erblassers unentgeltlich auf einen Dritten übertragen worden, so wird der Rückkaufswert des Versicherungsanspruches im Zeitpunkt des Todes des Erblassers zu dessen Vermögen gerechnet.

Art. 477 B. Enterbung / I. Gründe

B. Enterbung

I. Gründe

Der Erblasser ist befugt, durch Verfügung von Todes wegen einem Erben den Pflichtteil zu entziehen:

1.1
wenn der Erbe gegen den Erblasser oder gegen eine diesem nahe verbundene Person eine schwere Straftat begangen hat;
2.
wenn er gegenüber dem Erblasser oder einem von dessen Angehörigen die ihm obliegenden familienrechtlichen Pflichten schwer verletzt hat.

1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 4 des BG vom 26. Juni 1998, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

Art. 478 B. Enterbung / II. Wirkung

II. Wirkung

1 Der Enterbte kann weder an der Erbschaft teilnehmen noch die Herabsetzungsklage geltend machen.

2 Der Anteil des Enterbten fällt, sofern der Erblasser nicht anders verfügt hat, an die gesetzlichen Erben des Erblassers, wie wenn der Enterbte den Erbfall nicht erlebt hätte.

3 Die Nachkommen des Enterbten behalten ihr Pflichtteilsrecht, wie wenn der Enterbte den Erbfall nicht erlebt hätte.

Art. 479 B. Enterbung / III. Beweislast

III. Beweislast

1 Eine Enterbung ist nur dann gültig, wenn der Erblasser den Enterbungsgrund in seiner Verfügung angegeben hat.

2 Ficht der Enterbte die Enterbung wegen Unrichtigkeit dieser Angabe an, so hat der Erbe oder Bedachte, der aus der Enterbung Vorteil zieht, deren Richtigkeit zu beweisen.

3 Kann dieser Nachweis nicht erbracht werden oder ist ein Enterbungsgrund nicht angegeben, so wird die Verfügung insoweit aufrecht erhalten, als sich dies mit dem Pflichtteil des Enterbten verträgt, es sei denn, dass der Erblasser die Verfügung in einem offenbaren Irrtum über den Enterbungsgrund getroffen hat.

Art. 480 B. Enterbung / IV. Enterbung eines Zahlungsunfähigen

IV. Enterbung eines Zahlungsunfähigen

1 Bestehen gegen einen Nachkommen des Erblassers Verlustscheine, so kann ihm der Erblasser die Hälfte seines Pflichtteils entziehen, wenn er diese den vorhandenen und später geborenen Kindern desselben zuwendet.

2 Diese Enterbung fällt jedoch auf Begehren des Enterbten dahin, wenn bei der Eröffnung des Erbganges Verlustscheine nicht mehr bestehen, oder wenn deren Gesamtbetrag einen Vierteil des Erbteils nicht übersteigt.


  Dritter Abschnitt: Die Verfügungsarten

Art. 481 A. Im Allgemeinen

A. Im Allgemeinen

1 Der Erblasser kann in den Schranken der Verfügungsfreiheit über sein Vermögen mit letztwilliger Verfügung oder mit Erbvertrag ganz oder teilweise verfügen.

2 Der Teil, über den er nicht verfügt hat, fällt an die gesetzlichen Erben.

Art. 482 B. Auflagen und Bedingungen

B. Auflagen und Bedingungen

1 Der Erblasser kann seinen Verfügungen Auflagen oder Bedingungen anfügen, deren Vollziehung, sobald die Verfügung zur Ausführung gelangt ist, jedermann verlangen darf, der an ihnen ein Interesse hat.

2 Unsittliche oder rechtswidrige Auflagen und Bedingungen machen die Verfügung ungültig.

3 Sind sie lediglich für andere Personen lästig oder sind sie unsinnig, so werden sie als nicht vorhanden betrachtet.

4 Wird ein Tier mit einer Zuwendung von Todes wegen bedacht, so gilt die entsprechende Verfügung als Auflage, für das Tier tiergerecht zu sorgen.1


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 4. Okt. 2002 (Grundsatzartikel Tiere), in Kraft seit 1. April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806).

Art. 483 C. Erbeinsetzung

C. Erbeinsetzung

1 Der Erblasser kann für die ganze Erbschaft oder für einen Bruchteil einen oder mehrere Erben einsetzen.

2 Als Erbeinsetzung ist jede Verfügung zu betrachten, nach der ein Bedachter die Erbschaft insgesamt oder zu einem Bruchteil erhalten soll.

Art. 484 D. Vermächtnis / I. Inhalt

D. Vermächtnis

I. Inhalt

1 Der Erblasser kann einem Bedachten, ohne ihn als Erben einzusetzen, einen Vermögensvorteil als Vermächtnis zuwenden.

2 Er kann ihm eine einzelne Erbschaftssache oder die Nutzniessung an der Erbschaft im ganzen oder zu einem Teil vermachen oder die Erben oder Vermächtnisnehmer beauftragen, ihm Leistungen aus dem Werte der Erbschaft zu machen oder ihn von Verbindlichkeiten zu befreien.

3 Vermacht der Erblasser eine bestimmte Sache, so wird der Beschwerte, wenn sich diese in der Erbschaft nicht vorfindet und kein anderer Wille des Erblassers aus der Verfügung ersichtlich ist, nicht verpflichtet.

Art. 485 D. Vermächtnis / II. Verpflichtung des Beschwerten

II. Verpflichtung des Beschwerten

1 Die Sache ist dem Bedachten in dem Zustande und in der Beschaffenheit, mit Schaden und mit Zuwachs, frei oder belastet auszuliefern, wie sie sich zur Zeit der Eröffnung des Erbganges vorfindet.

2 Für Aufwendungen, die der Beschwerte seit der Eröffnung des Erbganges auf die Sache gemacht hat, sowie für Verschlechterungen, die seither eingetreten sind, steht er in den Rechten und Pflichten eines Geschäftsführers ohne Auftrag.

Art. 486 D. Vermächtnis / III. Verhältnis zur Erbschaft

III. Verhältnis zur Erbschaft

1 Übersteigen die Vermächtnisse den Betrag der Erbschaft oder der Zuwendung an den Beschwerten oder den verfügbaren Teil, so kann ihre verhältnismässige Herabsetzung verlangt werden.

2 Erleben die Beschwerten den Tod des Erblassers nicht, oder sind sie erbunwürdig, oder erklären sie die Ausschlagung, so bleiben die Vermächtnisse gleichwohl in Kraft.

3 Hat der Erblasser ein Vermächtnis zugunsten eines der gesetzlichen oder eingesetzten Erben aufgestellt, so kann dieser es auch dann beanspruchen, wenn er die Erbschaft ausschlägt.

Art. 487 E. Ersatzverfügung

E. Ersatzverfügung

Der Erblasser kann in seiner Verfügung eine oder mehrere Personen bezeichnen, denen die Erbschaft oder das Vermächtnis für den Fall des Vorabsterbens oder der Ausschlagung des Erben oder Vermächtnisnehmers zufallen soll.

Art. 488 F. Nacherbeneinsetzung / I. Bezeichnung des Nacherben

F. Nacherbeneinsetzung

I. Bezeichnung des Nacherben

1 Der Erblasser ist befugt, in seiner Verfügung den eingesetzten Erben als Vorerben zu verpflichten, die Erbschaft einem andern als Nacherben auszuliefern.

2 Dem Nacherben kann eine solche Pflicht nicht auferlegt werden.

3 Die gleichen Bestimmungen gelten für das Vermächtnis.

Art. 489 F. Nacherbeneinsetzung / II. Zeitpunkt der Auslieferung

II. Zeitpunkt der Auslieferung

1 Als Zeitpunkt der Auslieferung ist, wenn die Verfügung es nicht anders bestimmt, der Tod des Vorerben zu betrachten.

2 Wird ein anderer Zeitpunkt genannt, und ist dieser zur Zeit des Todes des Vorerben noch nicht eingetreten, so geht die Erbschaft gegen Sicherstellung auf die Erben des Vorerben über.

3 Kann der Zeitpunkt aus irgendeinem Grunde nicht mehr eintreten, so fällt die Erbschaft vorbehaltlos an die Erben des Vorerben.

Art. 490 F. Nacherbeneinsetzung / III. Sicherungsmittel

III. Sicherungsmittel

1 In allen Fällen der Nacherbeneinsetzung hat die zuständige Behörde die Aufnahme eines Inventars anzuordnen.

2 Die Auslieferung der Erbschaft an den Vorerben erfolgt, sofern ihn der Erblasser nicht ausdrücklich von dieser Pflicht befreit hat, nur gegen Sicherstellung, die bei Grundstücken durch Vormerkung der Auslieferungspflicht im Grundbuch geleistet werden kann.

3 Vermag der Vorerbe diese Sicherstellung nicht zu leisten, oder gefährdet er die Anwartschaft des Nacherben, so ist die Erbschaftsverwaltung anzuordnen.

Art. 491 F. Nacherbeneinsetzung / IV. Rechtsstellung / 1. Des Vorerben

IV. Rechtsstellung

1. Des Vorerben

1 Der Vorerbe erwirbt die Erbschaft wie ein anderer eingesetzter Erbe.

2 Er wird Eigentümer der Erbschaft unter der Pflicht zur Auslieferung.

Art. 492 F. Nacherbeneinsetzung / IV. Rechtsstellung / 2. Des Nacherben

2. Des Nacherben

1 Der Nacherbe erwirbt die Erbschaft des Erblassers, wenn er den für die Auslieferung bestimmten Zeitpunkt erlebt hat.

2 Erlebt er diesen Zeitpunkt nicht, so verbleibt die Erbschaft, wenn der Erblasser nicht anders verfügt hat, dem Vorerben.

3 Erlebt der Vorerbe den Tod des Erblassers nicht, oder ist er erbunwürdig, oder schlägt er die Erbschaft aus, so fällt sie an den Nacherben.

Art. 492a1F. Nacherbeneinsetzung / V. Urteilsunfähige Nachkommen

V. Urteilsunfähige Nachkommen

1 Ist ein Nachkomme dauernd urteilsunfähig und hinterlässt er weder Nachkommen noch einen Ehegatten, so kann der Erblasser eine Nacherbeneinsetzung auf den Überrest anordnen.

2 Die Nacherbeneinsetzung fällt von Gesetzes wegen dahin, wenn der Nachkomme wider Erwarten urteilsfähig wird.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 493 G. Stiftungen

G. Stiftungen

1 Der Erblasser ist befugt, den verfügbaren Teil seines Vermögens ganz oder teilweise für irgendeinen Zweck als Stiftung zu widmen.

2 Die Stiftung ist jedoch nur dann gültig, wenn sie den gesetzlichen Vorschriften entspricht.

Art. 494 H. Erbverträge / I. Erbeinsetzungs- und Vermächtnisvertrag

H. Erbverträge

I. Erbeinsetzungs- und Vermächtnisvertrag

1 Der Erblasser kann sich durch Erbvertrag einem andern gegenüber verpflichten, ihm oder einem Dritten seine Erbschaft oder ein Vermächtnis zu hinterlassen.

2 Er kann über sein Vermögen frei verfügen.

3 Verfügungen von Todes wegen oder Schenkungen, die mit seinen Verpflichtungen aus dem Erbvertrag nicht vereinbar sind, unterliegen jedoch der Anfechtung.

Art. 495 H. Erbverträge / II. Erbverzicht / 1. Bedeutung

II. Erbverzicht

1. Bedeutung

1 Der Erblasser kann mit einem Erben einen Erbverzichtvertrag oder Erbauskauf abschliessen.

2 Der Verzichtende fällt beim Erbgang als Erbe ausser Betracht.

3 Wo der Vertrag nicht etwas anderes anordnet, wirkt der Erbverzicht auch gegenüber den Nachkommen des Verzichtenden.

Art. 496 H. Erbverträge / II. Erbverzicht / 2. Lediger Anfall

2. Lediger Anfall

1 Sind im Erbvertrag bestimmte Erben an Stelle des Verzichtenden eingesetzt, so fällt der Verzicht dahin, wenn diese die Erbschaft aus irgendeinem Grunde nicht erwerben.

2 Ist der Verzicht zugunsten von Miterben erfolgt, so wird vermutet, dass er nur gegenüber den Erben des Stammes, der sich vom nächsten ihnen gemeinsamen Vorfahren ableitet, ausgesprochen sei und gegenüber entfernteren Erben nicht bestehe.

Art. 497 H. Erbverträge / II. Erbverzicht / 3. Rechte der Erbschaftsgläubiger

3. Rechte der Erbschaftsgläubiger

Ist der Erblasser zur Zeit der Eröffnung des Erbganges zahlungsunfähig, und werden seine Gläubiger von den Erben nicht befriedigt, so können der Verzichtende und seine Erben insoweit in Anspruch genommen werden, als sie für den Erbverzicht innerhalb der letzten fünf Jahre vor dem Tode des Erblassers aus dessen Vermögen eine Gegenleistung erhalten haben und hieraus zur Zeit des Erbganges noch bereichert sind.


  Vierter Abschnitt: Die Verfügungsformen

Art. 498 A. Letztwillige Verfügungen / I. Errichtung / 1. Im Allgemeinen

A. Letztwillige Verfügungen

I. Errichtung

1. Im Allgemeinen

Der Erblasser kann eine letztwillige Verfügung entweder mit öffentlicher Beurkundung oder eigenhändig oder durch mündliche Erklärung errichten.

Art. 499 A. Letztwillige Verfügungen / I. Errichtung / 2. Öffentliche Verfügung / a. Errichtungsform

2. Öffentliche Verfügung

a. Errichtungsform

Die öffentliche letztwillige Verfügung erfolgt unter Mitwirkung von zwei Zeugen vor dem Beamten, Notar oder einer anderen Urkundsperson, die nach kantonalem Recht mit diesen Geschäften betraut sind.

Art. 500 A. Letztwillige Verfügungen / I. Errichtung / 2. Öffentliche Verfügung / b. Mitwirkung des Beamten

b. Mitwirkung des Beamten

1 Der Erblasser hat dem Beamten seinen Willen mitzuteilen, worauf dieser die Urkunde aufsetzt oder aufsetzen lässt und dem Erblasser zu lesen gibt.

2 Die Urkunde ist vom Erblasser zu unterschreiben.

3 Der Beamte hat die Urkunde zu datieren und ebenfalls zu unterschreiben.

Art. 501 A. Letztwillige Verfügungen / I. Errichtung / 2. Öffentliche Verfügung / c. Mitwirkung der Zeugen

c. Mitwirkung der Zeugen

1 Der Erblasser hat unmittelbar nach der Datierung und Unterzeichnung den zwei Zeugen in Gegenwart des Beamten zu erklären, dass er die Urkunde gelesen habe und dass sie seine letztwillige Verfügung enthalte.

2 Die Zeugen haben auf der Urkunde mit ihrer Unterschrift zu bestätigen, dass der Erblasser vor ihnen diese Erklärung abgegeben und dass er sich nach ihrer Wahrnehmung dabei im Zustande der Verfügungsfähigkeit befunden habe.

3 Es ist nicht erforderlich, dass die Zeugen vom Inhalt der Urkunde Kenntnis erhalten.

Art. 502 A. Letztwillige Verfügungen / I. Errichtung / 2. Öffentliche Verfügung / d. Errichtung ohne Lesen und Unterschrift des Erblassers

d. Errichtung ohne Lesen und Unterschrift des Erblassers

1 Wenn der Erblasser die Urkunde nicht selbst liest und unterschreibt, so hat sie ihm der Beamte in Gegenwart der beiden Zeugen vorzulesen, und der Erblasser hat daraufhin zu erklären, die Urkunde enthalte seine Verfügung.

2 Die Zeugen haben in diesem Falle nicht nur die Erklärung des Erblassers und ihre Wahrnehmung über seine Verfügungsfähigkeit zu bezeugen, sondern auch mit ihrer Unterschrift zu bestätigen, dass die Urkunde in ihrer Gegenwart dem Erblasser vom Beamten vorgelesen worden sei.

Art. 503 A. Letztwillige Verfügungen / I. Errichtung / 2. Öffentliche Verfügung / e. Mitwirkende Personen

e. Mitwirkende Personen

1 Personen, die nicht handlungsfähig sind, die sich infolge eines strafgerichtlichen Urteils nicht im Besitz der bürgerlichen Ehren und Rechte1 befinden, oder die des Schreibens und Lesens unkundig sind, sowie die Verwandten2 in gerader Linie und Geschwister des Erblassers und deren Ehegatten und der Ehegatte des Erblassers selbst können bei der Errichtung der öffentlichen Verfügung weder als beurkundender Beamter noch als Zeugen mitwirken.

2 Der beurkundende Beamte und die Zeugen sowie die Verwandten in gerader Linie und die Geschwister oder Ehegatten dieser Personen dürfen in der Verfügung nicht bedacht werden.


1 Die Einstellung in der bürgerlichen Ehrenfähigkeit infolge eines strafgerichtlichen Urteils ist abgeschafft (siehe AS 1971 777; BBl 1965 I 561 und AS 1974 55; BBl 1974 I 1457).
2 Fassung dieses Wortes gemäss Ziff. I 3 des BG vom 30. Juni 1972, in Kraft seit 1. April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 504 A. Letztwillige Verfügungen / I. Errichtung / 2. Öffentliche Verfügung / f. Aufbewahrung der Verfügung

f. Aufbewahrung der Verfügung

Die Kantone haben dafür zu sorgen, dass die mit der Beurkundung betrauten Beamten die Verfügungen im Original oder in einer Abschrift entweder selbst aufbewahren oder einer Amtsstelle zur Aufbewahrung übergeben.

Art. 505 A. Letztwillige Verfügungen / I. Errichtung / 3. Eigenhändige Verfügung

3. Eigenhändige Verfügung

1 Die eigenhändige letztwillige Verfügung ist vom Erblasser von Anfang bis zu Ende mit Einschluss der Angabe von Jahr, Monat und Tag der Errichtung von Hand niederzuschreiben sowie mit seiner Unterschrift zu versehen.1

2 Die Kantone haben dafür zu sorgen, dass solche Verfügungen offen oder verschlossen einer Amtsstelle zur Aufbewahrung übergeben werden können.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 23. Juni 1995, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1996 (AS 1995 4882; BBl 1994 III 516, V 607).

Art. 506 A. Letztwillige Verfügungen / I. Errichtung / 4. Mündliche Verfügung / a. Verfügung

4. Mündliche Verfügung

a. Verfügung

1 Ist der Erblasser infolge ausserordentlicher Umstände, wie nahe Todesgefahr, Verkehrssperre, Epidemien oder Kriegsereignisse verhindert, sich einer der andern Errichtungsformen zu bedienen, so ist er befugt, eine mündliche letztwillige Verfügung zu errichten.

2 Zu diesem Zwecke hat er seinen letzten Willen vor zwei Zeugen zu erklären und sie zu beauftragen, seiner Verfügung die nötige Beurkundung zu verschaffen.

3 Für die Zeugen gelten die gleichen Ausschliessungsvorschriften wie bei der öffentlichen Verfügung.

Art. 507 A. Letztwillige Verfügungen / I. Errichtung / 4. Mündliche Verfügung / b. Beurkundung

b. Beurkundung

1 Die mündliche Verfügung ist sofort von einem der Zeugen unter Angabe von Ort, Jahr, Monat und Tag der Errichtung in Schrift zu verfassen, von beiden Zeugen zu unterschreiben und hierauf mit der Erklärung, dass der Erblasser ihnen im Zustande der Verfügungsfähigkeit unter den obwaltenden besonderen Umständen diesen seinen letzten Willen mitgeteilt habe, ohne Verzug bei einer Gerichtsbehörde niederzulegen.

2 Die beiden Zeugen können stattdessen die Verfügung mit der gleichen Erklärung bei einer Gerichtsbehörde zu Protokoll geben.

3 Errichtet der Erblasser die mündliche Verfügung im Militärdienst, so kann ein Offizier mit Hauptmanns- oder höherem Rang die Gerichtsbehörde ersetzen.

Art. 508 A. Letztwillige Verfügungen / I. Errichtung / 4. Mündliche Verfügung / c. Verlust der Gültigkeit

c. Verlust der Gültigkeit

Wird es dem Erblasser nachträglich möglich, sich einer der andern Verfügungsformen zu bedienen, so verliert nach 14 Tagen, von diesem Zeitpunkt an gerechnet, die mündliche Verfügung ihre Gültigkeit.

Art. 509 A. Letztwillige Verfügungen / II. Widerruf und Vernichtung / 1. Widerruf

II. Widerruf und Vernichtung

1. Widerruf

1 Der Erblasser kann seine letztwillige Verfügung jederzeit in einer der Formen widerrufen, die für die Errichtung vorgeschrieben sind.

2 Der Widerruf kann die Verfügung ganz oder zum Teil beschlagen.

Art. 510 A. Letztwillige Verfügungen / II. Widerruf und Vernichtung / 2. Vernichtung

2. Vernichtung

1 Der Erblasser kann seine letztwillige Verfügung dadurch widerrufen, dass er die Urkunde vernichtet.

2 Wird die Urkunde durch Zufall oder aus Verschulden anderer vernichtet, so verliert die Verfügung unter Vorbehalt der Ansprüche auf Schadenersatz gleichfalls ihre Gültigkeit, insofern ihr Inhalt nicht genau und vollständig festgestellt werden kann.

Art. 511 A. Letztwillige Verfügungen / II. Widerruf und Vernichtung / 3. Spätere Verfügung

3. Spätere Verfügung

1 Errichtet der Erblasser eine letztwillige Verfügung, ohne eine früher errichtete ausdrücklich aufzuheben, so tritt sie an die Stelle der früheren Verfügung, soweit sie sich nicht zweifellos als deren blosse Ergänzung darstellt.

2 Ebenso wird eine letztwillige Verfügung über eine bestimmte Sache dadurch aufgehoben, dass der Erblasser über die Sache nachher eine Verfügung trifft, die mit jener nicht vereinbar ist.

Art. 512 B. Erbverträge / I. Errichtung

B. Erbverträge

I. Errichtung

1 Der Erbvertrag bedarf zu seiner Gültigkeit der Form der öffentlichen letztwilligen Verfügung.

2 Die Vertragschliessenden haben gleichzeitig dem Beamten ihren Willen zu erklären und die Urkunde vor ihm und den zwei Zeugen zu unterschreiben.

Art. 513 B. Erbverträge / II. Aufhebung / 1. Unter Lebenden / a. Durch Vertrag und letztwillige Verfügung

II. Aufhebung

1. Unter Lebenden

a. Durch Vertrag und letztwillige Verfügung

1 Der Erbvertrag kann von den Vertragschliessenden jederzeit durch schriftliche Übereinkunft aufgehoben werden.

2 Der Erblasser kann einseitig einen Erbeinsetzungs- oder Vermächtnisvertrag aufheben, wenn sich der Erbe oder Bedachte nach dem Abschluss des Vertrages dem Erblasser gegenüber eines Verhaltens schuldig macht, das einen Enterbungsgrund darstellt.

3 Die einseitige Aufhebung hat in einer der Formen zu erfolgen, die für die Errichtung der letztwilligen Verfügungen vorgeschrieben sind.

Art. 514 B. Erbverträge / II. Aufhebung / 1. Unter Lebenden / b. Durch Rücktritt vom Vertrag

b. Durch Rücktritt vom Vertrag

Wer auf Grund eines Erbvertrages Leistungen unter Lebenden zu fordern hat, kann, wenn sie nicht vertragsgemäss erfüllt oder sichergestellt werden, nach den Bestimmungen des Obligationenrechtes1 den Rücktritt erklären.


1 SR 220

Art. 515 B. Erbverträge / II. Aufhebung / 2. Vorabsterben des Erben

2. Vorabsterben des Erben

1 Erlebt der Erbe oder Vermächtnisnehmer den Tod des Erblassers nicht, so fällt der Vertrag dahin.

2 Ist der Erblasser zur Zeit des Todes des Erben aus dem Vertrage bereichert, so können die Erben des Verstorbenen, wenn es nicht anders bestimmt ist, diese Bereicherung herausverlangen.

Art. 516 C. Verfügungsbeschränkung

C. Verfügungsbeschränkung

Tritt für den Erblasser nach Errichtung einer Verfügung von Todes wegen eine Beschränkung der Verfügungsfreiheit ein, so wird die Verfügung nicht aufgehoben, wohl aber der Herabsetzungsklage unterstellt.


  Fünfter Abschnitt: Die Willensvollstrecker

Art. 517 A. Erteilung des Auftrages

A. Erteilung des Auftrages

1 Der Erblasser kann in einer letztwilligen Verfügung eine oder mehrere handlungsfähige Personen mit der Vollstreckung seines Willens beauftragen.

2 Dieser Auftrag ist ihnen von Amtes wegen mitzuteilen, und sie haben sich binnen 14 Tagen, von dieser Mitteilung an gerechnet, über die Annahme des Auftrages zu erklären, wobei ihr Stillschweigen als Annahme gilt.

3 Sie haben Anspruch auf angemessene Vergütung für ihre Tätigkeit.

Art. 518 B. Inhalt des Auftrages

B. Inhalt des Auftrages

1 Die Willensvollstrecker stehen, soweit der Erblasser nichts anderes verfügt, in den Rechten und Pflichten des amtlichen Erbschaftsverwalters.

2 Sie haben den Willen des Erblassers zu vertreten und gelten insbesondere als beauftragt, die Erbschaft zu verwalten, die Schulden des Erblassers zu bezahlen, die Vermächtnisse auszurichten und die Teilung nach den vom Erblasser getroffenen Anordnungen oder nach Vorschrift des Gesetzes auszuführen.

3 Sind mehrere Willensvollstrecker bestellt, so stehen ihnen diese Befugnisse unter Vorbehalt einer anderen Anordnung des Erblassers gemeinsam zu.


  Sechster Abschnitt: Die Ungültigkeit und Herabsetzung der Verfügungen

Art. 519 A. Ungültigkeitsklage / I. Bei Verfügungsunfähigkeit, mangelhaftem Willen, Rechtswidrigkeit und Unsittlichkeit

A. Ungültigkeitsklage

I. Bei Verfügungsunfähigkeit, mangelhaftem Willen, Rechtswidrigkeit und Unsittlichkeit

1 Eine Verfügung von Todes wegen wird auf erhobene Klage für ungültig erklärt:

1.
wenn sie vom Erblasser zu einer Zeit errichtet worden ist, da er nicht verfügungsfähig war;
2.
wenn sie aus mangelhaftem Willen hervorgegangen ist;
3.
wenn ihr Inhalt oder eine ihr angefügte Bedingung unsittlich oder rechtswidrig ist.

2 Die Ungültigkeitsklage kann von jedermann erhoben werden, der als Erbe oder Bedachter ein Interesse daran hat, dass die Verfügung für ungültig erklärt werde.

Art. 520 A. Ungültigkeitsklage / II. Bei Formmangel / 1. Im Allgemeinen

II. Bei Formmangel

1. Im Allgemeinen1

1 Leidet die Verfügung an einem Formmangel, so wird sie auf erhobene Klage für ungültig erklärt.

2 Liegt die Formwidrigkeit in der Mitwirkung von Personen, die selber oder deren Angehörige in der Verfügung bedacht sind, so werden nur diese Zuwendungen für ungültig erklärt.

3 Für das Recht zur Klage gelten die gleichen Vorschriften wie im Falle der Verfügungsunfähigkeit.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 23. Juni 1995, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1996 (AS 1995 4882; BBl 1994 III 516, V 607).

Art. 520a1A. Ungültigkeitsklage / II. Bei Formmangel / 2. Bei eigenhändiger letztwilliger Verfügung

2. Bei eigenhändiger letztwilliger Verfügung

Liegt der Mangel einer eigenhändigen letztwilligen Verfügung darin, dass Jahr, Monat oder Tag nicht oder unrichtig angegeben sind, so kann sie nur dann für ungültig erklärt werden, wenn sich die erforderlichen zeitlichen Angaben nicht auf andere Weise feststellen lassen und das Datum für die Beurteilung der Verfügungsfähigkeit, der Reihenfolge mehrerer Verfügungen oder einer anderen, die Gültigkeit der Verfügung betreffenden Frage notwendig ist.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 23. Juni 1995, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1996 (AS 1995 4882; BBl 1994 III 516, V 607).

Art. 521 A. Ungültigkeitsklage / III. Verjährung

III. Verjährung

1 Die Ungültigkeitsklage verjährt mit Ablauf eines Jahres, von dem Zeitpunkt an gerechnet, da der Kläger von der Verfügung und dem Ungültigkeitsgrund Kenntnis erhalten hat, und in jedem Falle mit Ablauf von zehn Jahren, vom Tage der Eröffnung der Verfügung an gerechnet.

2 Gegenüber einem bösgläubigen Bedachten verjährt sie im Falle der Verfügungsunfähigkeit des Erblassers oder der Rechtswidrigkeit oder Unsittlichkeit unter allen Umständen erst mit dem Ablauf von 30 Jahren.

3 Einredeweise kann die Ungültigkeit einer Verfügung jederzeit geltend gemacht werden.

Art. 522 B. Herabsetzungsklage / I. Voraussetzungen / 1. Im Allgemeinen

B. Herabsetzungsklage

I. Voraussetzungen

1. Im Allgemeinen

1 Hat der Erblasser seine Verfügungsbefugnis überschritten, so können die Erben, die nicht dem Werte nach ihren Pflichtteil erhalten, die Herabsetzung der Verfügung auf das erlaubte Mass verlangen.

2 Enthält die Verfügung Bestimmungen über die Teile der gesetzlichen Erben, so sind sie, wenn kein anderer Wille des Erblassers aus der Verfügung ersichtlich ist, als blosse Teilungsvorschriften aufzufassen.

Art. 523 B. Herabsetzungsklage / I. Voraussetzungen / 2. Begünstigung der Pflichtteilsberechtigten

2. Begünstigung der Pflichtteilsberechtigten

Enthält eine Verfügung von Todes wegen Zuwendungen an mehrere pflichtteilsberechtigte Erben im Sinne einer Begünstigung, so findet bei Überschreitung der Verfügungsbefugnis unter den Miterben eine Herabsetzung im Verhältnis der Beträge statt, die ihnen über ihren Pflichtteil hinaus zugewendet sind.

Art. 524 B. Herabsetzungsklage / I. Voraussetzungen / 3. Rechte der Gläubiger

3. Rechte der Gläubiger

1 Die Konkursverwaltung eines Erben oder dessen Gläubiger die zur Zeit des Erbganges Verlustscheine besitzen, können, wenn der Erblasser den verfügbaren Teil zum Nachteil des Erben überschritten hat und dieser auf ihre Aufforderung hin die Herabsetzungsklage nicht anhebt, innerhalb der dem Erben gegebenen Frist die Herabsetzung verlangen, soweit dies zu ihrer Deckung erforderlich ist.

2 Die gleiche Befugnis besteht auch gegenüber einer Enterbung, die der Enterbte nicht anficht.

Art. 525 B. Herabsetzungsklage / II. Wirkung / 1. Herabsetzung im Allgemeinen

II. Wirkung

1. Herabsetzung im Allgemeinen

1 Die Herabsetzung erfolgt für alle eingesetzten Erben und Bedachten im gleichen Verhältnis, soweit nicht aus der Verfügung ein anderer Wille des Erblassers ersichtlich ist.

2 Wird die Zuwendung an einen Bedachten, der zugleich mit Vermächtnissen beschwert ist, herabgesetzt, so kann er unter dem gleichen Vorbehalt verlangen, dass auch diese Vermächtnisse verhältnismässig herabgesetzt werden.

Art. 526 B. Herabsetzungsklage / II. Wirkung / 2. Vermächtnis einer einzelnen Sache

2. Vermächtnis einer einzelnen Sache

Gelangt das Vermächtnis einer einzelnen Sache, die ohne Schädigung ihres Wertes nicht geteilt werden kann, zur Herabsetzung, so kann der Bedachte entweder gegen Vergütung des Mehrbetrages die Sache selbst oder anstatt der Sache den verfügbaren Betrag beanspruchen.

Art. 527 B. Herabsetzungsklage / II. Wirkung / 3. Bei Verfügungen unter Lebenden / a. Fälle

3. Bei Verfügungen unter Lebenden

a. Fälle

Der Herabsetzung unterliegen wie die Verfügungen von Todes wegen:

1.
die Zuwendungen auf Anrechnung an den Erbteil, als Heiratsgut, Ausstattung oder Vermögensabtretung, wenn sie nicht der Ausgleichung unterworfen sind;
2.
die Erbabfindungen und Auskaufsbeträge;
3.
die Schenkungen, die der Erblasser frei widerrufen konnte, oder die er während der letzten fünf Jahre vor seinem Tode ausgerichtet hat, mit Ausnahme der üblichen Gelegenheitsgeschenke;
4.
die Entäusserung von Vermögenswerten, die der Erblasser offenbar zum Zwecke der Umgehung der Verfügungsbeschränkung vorgenommen hat.
Art. 528 B. Herabsetzungsklage / II. Wirkung / 3. Bei Verfügungen unter Lebenden / b. Rückleistung

b. Rückleistung

1 Wer sich in gutem Glauben befindet, ist zu Rückleistungen nur insoweit verbunden, als er zur Zeit des Erbganges aus dem Rechtsgeschäfte mit dem Erblasser noch bereichert ist.

2 Muss sich der durch Erbvertrag Bedachte eine Herabsetzung gefallen lassen, so ist er befugt, von der dem Erblasser gemachten Gegenleistung einen entsprechenden Betrag zurückzufordern.

Art. 529 B. Herabsetzungsklage / II. Wirkung / 4. Versicherungsansprüche

4. Versicherungsansprüche

Versicherungsansprüche auf den Tod des Erblassers, die durch Verfügung unter Lebenden oder von Todes wegen zugunsten eines Dritten begründet oder bei Lebzeiten des Erblassers unentgeltlich auf einen Dritten übertragen worden sind, unterliegen der Herabsetzung mit ihrem Rückkaufswert.

Art. 530 B. Herabsetzungsklage / II. Wirkung / 5. Bei Nutzniessung und Renten

5. Bei Nutzniessung und Renten

Hat der Erblasser seine Erbschaft mit Nutzniessungsansprüchen und Renten derart beschwert, dass deren Kapitalwert nach der mutmasslichen Dauer der Leistungspflicht den verfügbaren Teil der Erbschaft übersteigt, so können die Erben entweder eine verhältnismässige Herabsetzung der Ansprüche oder, unter Überlassung des verfügbaren Teiles der Erbschaft an die Bedachten, deren Ablösung verlangen.

Art. 5311B. Herabsetzungsklage / II. Wirkung / 6. Bei Nacherbeneinsetzung

6. Bei Nacherbeneinsetzung

Eine Nacherbeneinsetzung ist gegenüber einem pflichtteilsberechtigten Erben im Umfang des Pflichtteils ungültig; vorbehalten bleibt die Bestimmung über urteilsunfähige Nachkommen.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 532 B. Herabsetzungsklage / III. Durchführung

III. Durchführung

Der Herabsetzung unterliegen in erster Linie die Verfügungen von Todes wegen und sodann die Zuwendungen unter Lebenden, und zwar diese in der Weise, dass die spätern vor den frühern herabgesetzt werden, bis der Pflichtteil hergestellt ist.

Art. 533 B. Herabsetzungsklage / IV. Verjährung

IV. Verjährung

1 Die Herabsetzungsklage verjährt mit Ablauf eines Jahres von dem Zeitpunkt an gerechnet, da die Erben von der Verletzung ihrer Rechte Kenntnis erhalten haben, und in jedem Fall mit Ablauf von zehn Jahren, die bei den letztwilligen Verfügungen von dem Zeitpunkte der Eröffnung, bei den andern Zuwendungen aber vom Tode des Erblassers an gerechnet werden.

2 Ist durch Ungültigerklärung einer späteren Verfügung eine frühere gültig geworden, so beginnen die Fristen mit diesem Zeitpunkte.

3 Einredeweise kann der Herabsetzungsanspruch jederzeit geltend gemacht werden.


  Siebenter Abschnitt: Klagen aus Erbverträgen

Art. 534 A. Ansprüche bei Ausrichtung zu Lebzeiten des Erblassers

A. Ansprüche bei Ausrichtung zu Lebzeiten des Erblassers

1 Überträgt der Erblasser sein Vermögen bei Lebzeiten auf den Vertragserben, so kann dieser ein öffentliches Inventar aufnehmen lassen.

2 Hat der Erblasser nicht alles Vermögen übertragen oder nach der Übertragung Vermögen erworben, so bezieht sich der Vertrag unter Vorbehalt einer anderen Anordnung nur auf das übertragene Vermögen.

3 Soweit die Übergabe bei Lebzeiten stattgefunden hat, gehen Rechte und Pflichten aus dem Vertrag unter Vorbehalt einer anderen Anordnung auf die Erben des eingesetzten Erben über.

Art. 535 B. Ausgleichung beim Erbverzicht / I. Herabsetzung

B. Ausgleichung beim Erbverzicht

I. Herabsetzung

1 Hat der Erblasser dem verzichtenden Erben bei Lebzeiten Leistungen gemacht, die den verfügbaren Teil seiner Erbschaft übersteigen, so können die Miterben die Herabsetzung verlangen.

2 Der Herabsetzung unterliegt die Verfügung jedoch nur für den Betrag, um den sie den Pflichtteil des Verzichtenden übersteigt.

3 Die Anrechnung der Leistungen erfolgt nach den gleichen Vorschriften wie bei der Ausgleichung.

Art. 536 B. Ausgleichung beim Erbverzicht / II. Rückleistung

II. Rückleistung

Wird der Verzichtende auf Grund der Herabsetzung zu einer Rückleistung an die Erbschaft verpflichtet, so hat er die Wahl, entweder diese Rückleistung auf sich zu nehmen oder die ganze Leistung in die Teilung einzuwerfen und an dieser teilzunehmen, als ob er nicht verzichtet hätte.


  Zweite Abteilung: Der Erbgang

  Fünfzehnter Titel: Die Eröffnung des Erbganges

Art. 537 A. Voraussetzung auf Seite des Erblassers

A. Voraussetzung auf Seite des Erblassers

1 Der Erbgang wird durch den Tod des Erblassers eröffnet.

2 Insoweit den Zuwendungen und Teilungen, die bei Lebzeiten des Erblassers erfolgt sind, erbrechtliche Bedeutung zukommt, werden sie nach dem Stande der Erbschaft berücksichtigt, wie er beim Tode des Erblassers vorhanden ist.

Art. 538 B. Ort der Eröffnung

B. Ort der Eröffnung1

1 Die Eröffnung des Erbganges erfolgt für die Gesamtheit des Vermögens am letzten Wohnsitze des Erblassers.

2 ...2


1 Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 2 des Gerichtsstandsgesetzes vom 24. März 2000, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).
2 Aufgehoben durch Anhang Ziff. 2 des Gerichtsstandsgesetzes vom 24. März 2000, mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).

Art. 539 C. Voraussetzungen auf Seite des Erben / I. Fähigkeit / 1. Rechtsfähigkeit

C. Voraussetzungen auf Seite des Erben

I. Fähigkeit

1. Rechtsfähigkeit

1 Jedermann ist fähig, Erbe zu sein und aus Verfügungen von Todes wegen zu erwerben, sobald er nicht nach Vorschrift des Gesetzes erbunfähig ist.

2 Zuwendungen mit Zweckbestimmung an eine Mehrheit von Personen insgesamt werden, wenn dieser das Recht der Persönlichkeit nicht zukommt, von allen Zugehörigen unter der vom Erblasser aufgestellten Zweckbestimmung erworben oder gelten, wo dieses nicht angeht, als Stiftung.

Art. 540 C. Voraussetzungen auf Seite des Erben / I. Fähigkeit / 2. Erbunwürdigkeit / a. Gründe

2. Erbunwürdigkeit

a. Gründe

1 Unwürdig, Erbe zu sein oder aus einer Verfügung von Todes wegen irgendetwas zu erwerben, ist:

1.
wer vorsätzlich und rechtswidrig den Tod des Erblassers herbeigeführt oder herbeizuführen versucht hat;
2.
wer den Erblasser vorsätzlich und rechtswidrig in einen Zustand bleibender Verfügungsunfähigkeit gebracht hat;
3.
wer den Erblasser durch Arglist, Zwang oder Drohung dazu gebracht oder daran verhindert hat, eine Verfügung von Todes wegen zu errichten oder zu widerrufen;
4.
wer eine Verfügung von Todes wegen vorsätzlich und rechtswidrig unter Umständen, die dem Erblasser deren Erneuerung nicht mehr ermöglichten, beseitigt oder ungültig gemacht hat.

2 Durch Verzeihung des Erblassers wird die Erbunwürdigkeit aufgehoben.

Art. 541 C. Voraussetzungen auf Seite des Erben / I. Fähigkeit / 2. Erbunwürdigkeit / b. Wirkung auf Nachkommen

b. Wirkung auf Nachkommen

1 Die Unfähigkeit besteht nur für den Unwürdigen selbst.

2 Seine Nachkommen beerben den Erblasser, wie wenn er vor dem Erblasser gestorben wäre.

Art. 542 C. Voraussetzungen auf Seite des Erben / II. Erleben des Erbganges / 1. Als Erbe

II. Erleben des Erbganges

1. Als Erbe

1 Um die Erbschaft erwerben zu können, muss der Erbe den Erbgang in erbfähigem Zustand erleben.

2 Stirbt ein Erbe, nachdem er den Erbgang erlebt hat, so vererbt sich sein Recht an der Erbschaft auf seine Erben.

Art. 543 C. Voraussetzungen auf Seite des Erben / II. Erleben des Erbganges / 2. Als Vermächtnisnehmer

2. Als Vermächtnisnehmer

1 Der Vermächtnisnehmer erwirbt den Anspruch auf das Vermächtnis, wenn er den Erbgang in erbfähigem Zustand erlebt hat.

2 Stirbt er vor dem Erblasser, so fällt sein Vermächtnis, wenn kein anderer Wille aus der Verfügung nachgewiesen werden kann, zugunsten desjenigen weg, der zur Ausrichtung verpflichtet gewesen wäre.

Art. 544 C. Voraussetzungen auf Seite des Erben / II. Erleben des Erbganges / 3. Das Kind vor der Geburt

3. Das Kind vor der Geburt

1 Das Kind ist vom Zeitpunkt der Empfängnis an unter dem Vorbehalt erbfähig, dass es lebendig geboren wird.

1bis Erfordert es die Wahrung seiner Interessen, so errichtet die Kindesschutzbehörde eine Beistandschaft.1

2 Wird das Kind tot geboren, so fällt es für den Erbgang ausser Betracht.2


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 545 C. Voraussetzungen auf Seite des Erben / II. Erleben des Erbganges / 4. Nacherben

4. Nacherben

1 Auf dem Wege der Nacherbeneinsetzung oder des Nachvermächtnisses kann die Erbschaft oder eine Erbschaftssache einer Person zugewendet werden, die zur Zeit des Erbfalles noch nicht lebt.

2 Ist kein Vorerbe genannt, so gelten die gesetzlichen Erben als Vorerben.

Art. 546 D. Verschollenheit / I. Beerbung eines Verschollenen / 1. Erbgang gegen Sicherstellung

D. Verschollenheit

I. Beerbung eines Verschollenen

1. Erbgang gegen Sicherstellung

1 Wird jemand für verschollen erklärt, so haben die Erben oder Bedachten vor der Auslieferung der Erbschaft für die Rückgabe des Vermögens an besser Berechtigte oder an den Verschollenen selbst Sicherheit zu leisten.

2 Diese Sicherheit ist im Falle des Verschwindens in hoher Todesgefahr auf fünf Jahre und im Falle der nachrichtlosen Abwesenheit auf 15 Jahre zu leisten, in keinem Falle aber länger als bis zu dem Tage, an dem der Verschollene 100 Jahre alt wäre.

3 Die fünf Jahre werden vom Zeitpunkte der Auslieferung der Erbschaft und die 15 Jahre von der letzten Nachricht an gerechnet.

Art. 547 D. Verschollenheit / I. Beerbung eines Verschollenen / 2. Aufhebung der Verschollenheit und Rückerstattung

2. Aufhebung der Verschollenheit und Rückerstattung

1 Kehrt der Verschollene zurück, oder machen besser Berechtigte ihre Ansprüche geltend, so haben die Eingewiesenen die Erbschaft nach den Besitzesregeln herauszugeben.

2 Den besser Berechtigten haften sie, wenn sie in gutem Glauben sind, nur während der Frist der Erbschaftsklage.

Art. 548 D. Verschollenheit / II. Erbrecht des Verschollenen

II. Erbrecht des Verschollenen

1 Kann für den Zeitpunkt des Erbganges Leben oder Tod eines Erben nicht nachgewiesen werden, weil dieser verschwunden ist, so wird sein Anteil unter amtliche Verwaltung gestellt.

2 Die Personen, denen bei Nichtvorhandensein des Verschwundenen sein Erbteil zugefallen wäre, haben das Recht, ein Jahr seit dem Verschwinden in hoher Todesgefahr oder fünf Jahre seit der letzten Nachricht über den Verschwundenen beim Gericht um die Verschollenerklärung und, nachdem diese erfolgt ist, um die Aushändigung des Anteils nachzusuchen.

3 Die Auslieferung des Anteils erfolgt nach den Vorschriften über die Auslieferung an die Erben eines Verschollenen.

Art. 549 D. Verschollenheit / III. Verhältnis der beiden Fälle zueinander

III. Verhältnis der beiden Fälle zueinander

1 Haben die Erben des Verschollenen die Einweisung in sein Vermögen bereits erwirkt, so können sich seine Miterben, wenn ihm eine Erbschaft anfällt, hierauf berufen und die angefallenen Vermögenswerte herausverlangen, ohne dass es einer neuen Verschollenerklärung bedarf.

2 Ebenso können die Erben des Verschollenen sich auf die Verschollenerklärung berufen, die von seinen Miterben erwirkt worden ist.

Art. 550 D. Verschollenheit / IV. Verfahren von Amtes wegen

IV. Verfahren von Amtes wegen

1 Stand das Vermögen oder der Erbteil eines Verschwundenen während zehn Jahren in amtlicher Verwaltung, oder hätte dieser ein Alter von 100 Jahren erreicht, so wird auf Verlangen der zuständigen Behörde die Verschollenerklärung von Amtes wegen durchgeführt.

2 Melden sich alsdann innerhalb der Auskündungsfrist keine Berechtigten, so fallen die Vermögenswerte an das erbberechtigte Gemeinwesen oder, wenn der Verschollene niemals in der Schweiz gewohnt hat, an den Heimatkanton.

3 Gegenüber dem Verschollenen selbst und den besser Berechtigten besteht die gleiche Pflicht zur Rückerstattung wie für die eingewiesenen Erben.


  Sechzehnter Titel: Die Wirkung des Erbganges

  Erster Abschnitt: Die Sicherungsmassregeln

Art. 551 A. Im Allgemeinen

A. Im Allgemeinen

1 Die zuständige Behörde hat von Amtes wegen die zur Sicherung des Erbganges nötigen Massregeln zu treffen.1

2 Solche Massregeln sind insbesondere in den vom Gesetze vorgesehenen Fällen die Siegelung der Erbschaft, die Aufnahme des Inventars, die Anordnung der Erbschaftsverwaltung und die Eröffnung der letztwilligen Verfügungen.

3 ...2


1 Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 2 des Gerichtsstandsgesetzes vom 24. März 2000, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).
2 Aufgehoben durch Anhang Ziff. 2 des Gerichtsstandsgesetzes vom 24. März 2000, mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).

Art. 552 B. Siegelung der Erbschaft

B. Siegelung der Erbschaft

Die Siegelung der Erbschaft wird in den Fällen angeordnet, für die das kantonale Recht sie vorsieht.

Art. 553 C. Inventar

C. Inventar

1 Die Aufnahme eines Inventars wird angeordnet, wenn:

1.
ein minderjähriger Erbe unter Vormundschaft steht oder zu stellen ist;
2.
ein Erbe dauernd und ohne Vertretung abwesend ist;
3.
einer der Erben oder die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde es verlangt;
4.
ein volljähriger Erbe unter umfassender Beistandschaft steht oder unter sie zu stellen ist.1

2 Sie erfolgt nach den Vorschriften des kantonalen Rechtes und ist in der Regel binnen zwei Monaten seit dem Tode des Erblassers durchzuführen.

3 Die Aufnahme eines Inventars kann durch die kantonale Gesetzgebung für weitere Fälle vorgeschrieben werden.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 554 D. Erbschaftsverwaltung / I. Im Allgemeinen

D. Erbschaftsverwaltung

I. Im Allgemeinen

1 Die Erbschaftsverwaltung wird angeordnet:

1.
wenn ein Erbe dauernd und ohne Vertretung abwesend ist, sofern es seine Interessen erfordern;
2.
wenn keiner der Ansprecher sein Erbrecht genügend nachzuweisen vermag oder das Vorhandensein eines Erben ungewiss ist;
3.
wenn nicht alle Erben des Erblassers bekannt sind;
4.
wo das Gesetz sie für besondere Fälle vorsieht.

2 Hat der Erblasser einen Willensvollstrecker bezeichnet, so ist diesem die Verwaltung zu übergeben.

3 Stand die verstorbene Person unter einer Beistandschaft, welche die Vermögensverwaltung umfasst, so obliegt dem Beistand auch die Erbschaftsverwaltung, sofern nichts anderes angeordnet wird.1


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 555 D. Erbschaftsverwaltung / II. Bei unbekannten Erben

II. Bei unbekannten Erben

1 Ist die Behörde im ungewissen, ob der Erblasser Erben hinterlassen hat oder nicht, oder ob ihr alle Erben bekannt sind, so sind die Berechtigten in angemessener Weise öffentlich aufzufordern, sich binnen Jahresfrist zum Erbgange zu melden.

2 Erfolgt während dieser Frist keine Anmeldung und sind der Behörde keine Erben bekannt, so fällt die Erbschaft unter Vorbehalt der Erbschaftsklage an das erbberechtigte Gemeinwesen.

Art. 556 E. Eröffnung der letztwilligen Verfügung / I. Pflicht zur Einlieferung

E. Eröffnung der letztwilligen Verfügung

I. Pflicht zur Einlieferung

1 Findet sich beim Tode des Erblassers eine letztwillige Verfügung vor, so ist sie der Behörde unverweilt einzuliefern, und zwar auch dann, wenn sie als ungültig erachtet wird.

2 Der Beamte, bei dem die Verfügung protokolliert oder hinterlegt ist, sowie jedermann, der eine Verfügung in Verwahrung genommen oder unter den Sachen des Erblassers vorgefunden hat, ist bei persönlicher Verantwortlichkeit verbunden, dieser Pflicht nachzukommen, sobald er vom Tode des Erblassers Kenntnis erhalten hat.

3 Nach der Einlieferung hat die Behörde, soweit tunlich nach Anhörung der Beteiligten, entweder die Erbschaft einstweilen den gesetzlichen Erben zu überlassen oder die Erbschaftsverwaltung anzuordnen.

Art. 557 E. Eröffnung der letztwilligen Verfügung / II. Eröffnung

II. Eröffnung

1 Die Verfügung des Erblassers muss binnen Monatsfrist nach der Einlieferung von der zuständigen Behörde eröffnet werden.

2 Zu der Eröffnung werden die Erben, soweit sie den Behörden bekannt sind, vorgeladen.

3 Hinterlässt der Erblasser mehr als eine Verfügung, so sind sie alle der Behörde einzuliefern und von ihr zu eröffnen.

Art. 558 E. Eröffnung der letztwilligen Verfügung / III. Mitteilung an die Beteiligten

III. Mitteilung an die Beteiligten

1 Alle an der Erbschaft Beteiligten erhalten auf Kosten der Erbschaft eine Abschrift der eröffneten Verfügung, soweit diese sie angeht.

2 An Bedachte unbekannten Aufenthalts erfolgt die Mitteilung durch eine angemessene öffentliche Auskündung.

Art. 559 E. Eröffnung der letztwilligen Verfügung / IV. Auslieferung der Erbschaft

IV. Auslieferung der Erbschaft

1 Nach Ablauf eines Monats seit der Mitteilung an die Beteiligten wird den eingesetzten Erben, wenn die gesetzlichen Erben oder die aus einer früheren Verfügung Bedachten nicht ausdrücklich deren Berechtigung bestritten haben, auf ihr Verlangen von der Behörde eine Bescheinigung darüber ausgestellt, dass sie unter Vorbehalt der Ungültigkeitsklage und der Erbschaftsklage als Erben anerkannt seien.

2 Zugleich wird gegebenen Falles der Erbschaftsverwalter angewiesen, ihnen die Erbschaft auszuliefern.


  Zweiter Abschnitt: Der Erwerb der Erbschaft

Art. 560 A. Erwerb / I. Erben

A. Erwerb

I. Erben

1 Die Erben erwerben die Erbschaft als Ganzes mit dem Tode des Erblassers kraft Gesetzes.

2 Mit Vorbehalt der gesetzlichen Ausnahmen gehen die Forderungen, das Eigentum, die beschränkten dinglichen Rechte und der Besitz des Erblassers ohne weiteres auf sie über, und die Schulden des Erblassers werden zu persönlichen Schulden der Erben.

3 Der Erwerb der eingesetzten Erben wird auf den Zeitpunkt der Eröffnung des Erbganges zurückbezogen, und es haben die gesetzlichen Erben ihnen die Erbschaft nach den Besitzesregeln herauszugeben.

Art. 5611A. Erwerb / II. ...

II. ...


1 Aufgehoben durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 5. Okt. 1984, mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 562 A. Erwerb / III. Vermächtnisnehmer / 1. Erwerb

III. Vermächtnisnehmer

1. Erwerb

1 Die Vermächtnisnehmer haben gegen die Beschwerten oder, wenn solche nicht besonders genannt sind, gegen die gesetzlichen oder eingesetzten Erben einen persönlichen Anspruch.

2 Wenn aus der Verfügung nichts anderes hervorgeht, so wird der Anspruch fällig, sobald der Beschwerte die Erbschaft angenommen hat oder sie nicht mehr ausschlagen kann.

3 Kommen die Erben ihrer Verpflichtung nicht nach, so können sie zur Auslieferung der vermachten Erbschaftssachen, oder wenn irgendeine Handlung den Gegenstand der Verfügung bildet, zu Schadenersatz angehalten werden.

Art. 563 A. Erwerb / III. Vermächtnisnehmer / 2. Gegenstand

2. Gegenstand

1 Ist dem Bedachten eine Nutzniessung oder eine Rente oder eine andere zeitlich wiederkehrende Leistung vermacht, so bestimmt sich sein Anspruch, wo es nicht anders angeordnet ist, nach den Vorschriften des Sachen- und Obligationenrechtes.

2 Ist ein Versicherungsanspruch auf den Tod des Erblassers vermacht, so kann ihn der Bedachte unmittelbar geltend machen.

Art. 564 A. Erwerb / III. Vermächtnisnehmer / 3. Verhältnis von Gläubiger und Vermächtnisnehmer

3. Verhältnis von Gläubiger und Vermächtnisnehmer

1 Die Gläubiger des Erblassers gehen mit ihren Ansprüchen den Vermächtnisnehmern vor.

2 Die Gläubiger des Erben stehen, wenn dieser die Erbschaft vorbehaltlos erworben hat, den Gläubigern des Erblassers gleich.

Art. 565 A. Erwerb / III. Vermächtnisnehmer / 4. Herabsetzung

4. Herabsetzung

1 Zahlen die Erben nach Ausrichtung der Vermächtnisse Erbschaftsschulden, von denen sie vorher keine Kenntnis hatten, so sind sie befugt, die Vermächtnisnehmer insoweit zu einer verhältnismässigen Rückleistung anzuhalten, als sie die Herabsetzung der Vermächtnisse hätten beanspruchen können.

2 Die Vermächtnisnehmer können jedoch höchstens im Umfange der zur Zeit der Rückforderung noch vorhandenen Bereicherung in Anspruch genommen werden.

Art. 566 B. Ausschlagung / I. Erklärung / 1. Befugnis

B. Ausschlagung

I. Erklärung

1. Befugnis

1 Die gesetzlichen und die eingesetzten Erben haben die Befugnis, die Erbschaft, die ihnen zugefallen ist, auszuschlagen.

2 Ist die Zahlungsunfähigkeit des Erblassers im Zeitpunkt seines Todes amtlich festgestellt oder offenkundig, so wird die Ausschlagung vermutet.

Art. 567 B. Ausschlagung / I. Erklärung / 2. Befristung / a. Im Allgemeinen

2. Befristung

a. Im Allgemeinen

1 Die Frist zur Ausschlagung beträgt drei Monate.

2 Sie beginnt für die gesetzlichen Erben, soweit sie nicht nachweisbar erst später von dem Erbfall Kenntnis erhalten haben, mit dem Zeitpunkte, da ihnen der Tod des Erblassers bekannt geworden, und für die eingesetzten Erben mit dem Zeitpunkte, da ihnen die amtliche Mitteilung von der Verfügung des Erblassers zugekommen ist.

Art. 568 B. Ausschlagung / I. Erklärung / 2. Befristung / b. Bei Inventaraufnahme

b. Bei Inventaraufnahme

Ist ein Inventar als Sicherungsmassregel aufgenommen worden, so beginnt die Frist zur Ausschlagung für alle Erben mit dem Tage, an dem die Behörde ihnen von dem Abschlusse des Inventars Kenntnis gegeben hat.

Art. 569 B. Ausschlagung / I. Erklärung / 3. Übergang der Ausschlagungsbefugnis

3. Übergang der Ausschlagungsbefugnis

1 Stirbt ein Erbe vor der Ausschlagung oder Annahme der Erbschaft, so geht die Befugnis zur Ausschlagung auf seine Erben über.

2 Die Frist zur Ausschlagung beginnt für diese Erben mit dem Zeitpunkte, da sie von dem Anfall der Erbschaft an ihren Erblasser Kenntnis erhalten, und endigt frühestens mit dem Ablauf der Frist, die ihnen gegenüber ihrem eigenen Erblasser für die Ausschlagung gegeben ist.

3 Schlagen die Erben aus und gelangt die Erbschaft an andere Erben, die vorher nicht berechtigt waren, so beginnt für diese die Frist mit dem Zeitpunkte, da sie von der Ausschlagung Kenntnis erhalten haben.

Art. 570 B. Ausschlagung / I. Erklärung / 4. Form

4. Form

1 Die Ausschlagung ist von dem Erben bei der zuständigen Behörde mündlich oder schriftlich zu erklären.

2 Sie muss unbedingt und vorbehaltlos geschehen.

3 Die Behörde hat über die Ausschlagungen ein Protokoll zu führen.

Art. 571 B. Ausschlagung / II. Verwirkung der Ausschlagungsbefugnis

II. Verwirkung der Ausschlagungsbefugnis

1 Erklärt der Erbe während der angesetzten Frist die Ausschlagung nicht, so hat er die Erbschaft vorbehaltlos erworben.

2 Hat ein Erbe sich vor Ablauf der Frist in die Angelegenheiten der Erbschaft eingemischt oder Handlungen vorgenommen, die nicht durch die blosse Verwaltung der Erbschaft und durch den Fortgang der Geschäfte des Erblassers gefordert waren, oder hat er Erbschaftssachen sich angeeignet oder verheimlicht, so kann er die Erbschaft nicht mehr ausschlagen.

Art. 572 B. Ausschlagung / III. Ausschlagung eines Miterben

III. Ausschlagung eines Miterben

1 Hinterlässt der Erblasser keine Verfügung von Todes wegen und schlägt einer unter mehreren Erben die Erbschaft aus, so vererbt sich sein Anteil, wie wenn er den Erbfall nicht erlebt hätte.

2 Hinterlässt der Erblasser eine Verfügung von Todes wegen, so gelangt der Anteil, den ein eingesetzter Erbe ausschlägt, wenn kein anderer Wille des Erblassers aus der Verfügung ersichtlich ist, an dessen nächsten gesetzlichen Erben.

Art. 573 B. Ausschlagung / IV. Ausschlagung aller nächsten Erben / 1. Im Allgemeinen

IV. Ausschlagung aller nächsten Erben

1. Im Allgemeinen

1 Wird die Erbschaft von allen nächsten gesetzlichen Erben ausgeschlagen, so gelangt sie zur Liquidation durch das Konkursamt.

2 Ergibt sich in der Liquidation nach Deckung der Schulden ein Überschuss, so wird dieser den Berechtigten überlassen, wie wenn keine Ausschlagung stattgefunden hätte.

Art. 574 B. Ausschlagung / IV. Ausschlagung aller nächsten Erben / 2. Befugnis der überlebenden Ehegatten

2. Befugnis der überlebenden Ehegatten

Haben die Nachkommen die Erbschaft ausgeschlagen, so wird der überlebende Ehegatte von der Behörde hievon in Kenntnis gesetzt und kann binnen Monatsfrist die Annahme erklären.

Art. 575 B. Ausschlagung / IV. Ausschlagung aller nächsten Erben / 3. Ausschlagung zugunsten nachfolgender Erben

3. Ausschlagung zugunsten nachfolgender Erben

1 Die Erben können bei der Ausschlagung verlangen, dass die auf sie folgenden Erben noch angefragt werden, bevor die Erbschaft liquidiert wird.

2 In diesem Falle ist seitens der Behörde den folgenden Erben von der Ausschlagung der vorgehenden Kenntnis zu geben, und wenn darauf jene Erben nicht binnen Monatsfrist die Annahme der Erbschaft erklären, so ist sie auch von ihnen ausgeschlagen.

Art. 576 B. Ausschlagung / V. Fristverlängerung

V. Fristverlängerung

Aus wichtigen Gründen kann die zuständige Behörde den gesetzlichen und den eingesetzten Erben eine Fristverlängerung gewähren oder eine neue Frist ansetzen.

Art. 577 B. Ausschlagung / VI. Ausschlagung eines Vermächtnisses

VI. Ausschlagung eines Vermächtnisses

Schlägt ein Vermächtnisnehmer das Vermächtnis aus, so fällt es zugunsten des Beschwerten weg, wenn kein anderer Wille des Erblassers aus der Verfügung ersichtlich ist.

Art. 578 B. Ausschlagung / VII. Sicherung für die Gläubiger des Erben

VII. Sicherung für die Gläubiger des Erben

1 Hat ein überschuldeter Erbe die Erbschaft zu dem Zwecke ausgeschlagen, dass sie seinen Gläubigern entzogen bleibe, so können diese oder die Konkursverwaltung die Ausschlagung binnen sechs Monaten anfechten, wenn ihre Forderungen nicht sichergestellt werden.

2 Wird ihre Anfechtung gutgeheissen, so gelangt die Erbschaft zur amtlichen Liquidation.

3 Ein Überschuss dient in erster Linie zur Befriedigung der anfechtenden Gläubiger und fällt nach Deckung der übrigen Schulden an die Erben, zu deren Gunsten ausgeschlagen wurde.

Art. 579 B. Ausschlagung / VIII. Haftung im Falle der Ausschlagung

VIII. Haftung im Falle der Ausschlagung

1 Schlagen die Erben eines zahlungsunfähigen Erblassers die Erbschaft aus, so haften sie dessen Gläubigern gleichwohl insoweit, als sie vom Erblasser innerhalb der letzten fünf Jahre vor seinem Tode Vermögenswerte empfangen haben, die bei der Erbteilung der Ausgleichung unterworfen sein würden.

2 Die landesübliche Ausstattung bei der Verheiratung sowie die Kosten der Erziehung und Ausbildung werden von dieser Haftung nicht getroffen.

3 Gutgläubige Erben haften nur, soweit sie noch bereichert sind.


  Dritter Abschnitt: Das öffentliche Inventar

Art. 580 A. Voraussetzung

A. Voraussetzung

1 Jeder Erbe, der die Befugnis hat, die Erbschaft auszuschlagen, ist berechtigt, ein öffentliches Inventar zu verlangen.

2 Das Begehren muss binnen Monatsfrist in der gleichen Form wie die Ausschlagung bei der zuständigen Behörde angebracht werden.

3 Wird es von einem der Erben gestellt, so gilt es auch für die übrigen.

Art. 581 B. Verfahren / I. Inventar

B. Verfahren

I. Inventar

1 Das öffentliche Inventar wird durch die zuständige Behörde nach den Vorschriften des kantonalen Rechtes errichtet und besteht in der Anlegung eines Verzeichnisses der Vermögenswerte und Schulden der Erbschaft, wobei alle Inventarstücke mit einer Schätzung zu versehen sind.

2 Wer über die Vermögensverhältnisse des Erblassers Auskunft geben kann, ist bei seiner Verantwortlichkeit verpflichtet, der Behörde alle von ihr verlangten Aufschlüsse zu erteilen.

3 Insbesondere haben die Erben der Behörde die ihnen bekannten Schulden des Erblassers mitzuteilen.

Art. 582 B. Verfahren / II. Rechnungsruf

II. Rechnungsruf

1 Mit der Aufnahme des Inventars verbindet die Behörde einen Rechnungsruf, durch den auf dem Wege angemessener öffentlicher Auskündung die Gläubiger und Schuldner des Erblassers mit Einschluss der Bürgschaftsgläubiger aufgefordert werden, binnen einer bestimmten Frist ihre Forderungen und Schulden anzumelden.

2 Die Gläubiger sind dabei auf die Folgen der Nichtanmeldung aufmerksam zu machen.

3 Die Frist ist auf mindestens einen Monat, vom Tage der ersten Auskündung an gerechnet, anzusetzen.

Art. 583 B. Verfahren / III. Aufnahme von Amtes wegen

III. Aufnahme von Amtes wegen

1 Forderungen und Schulden, die aus öffentlichen Büchern oder aus den Papieren des Erblassers ersichtlich sind, werden von Amtes wegen in das Inventar aufgenommen.

2 Die Aufnahme ist den Schuldnern und Gläubigern anzuzeigen.

Art. 584 B. Verfahren / IV. Ergebnis

IV. Ergebnis

1 Nach Ablauf der Auskündungsfrist wird das Inventar geschlossen und hierauf während wenigstens eines Monats zur Einsicht der Beteiligten aufgelegt.

2 Die Kosten werden von der Erbschaft und, wo diese nicht ausreicht, von den Erben getragen, die das Inventar verlangt haben.

Art. 585 C. Verhältnis der Erben während des Inventars / I. Verwaltung

C. Verhältnis der Erben während des Inventars

I. Verwaltung

1 Während der Dauer des Inventars dürfen nur die notwendigen Verwaltungshandlungen vorgenommen werden.

2 Gestattet die Behörde die Fortsetzung des Geschäftes des Erblassers durch einen Erben, so sind dessen Miterben befugt, Sicherstellung zu verlangen.

Art. 586 C. Verhältnis der Erben während des Inventars / II. Betreibung, Prozesse, Verjährung

II. Betreibung, Prozesse, Verjährung

1 Die Betreibung für die Schulden des Erblassers ist während der Dauer des Inventars ausgeschlossen.

2 ...1

3 Prozesse können mit Ausnahme von dringenden Fällen weder fortgesetzt noch angehoben werden.


1 Aufgehoben durch Anhang Ziff. 3 des BG vom 15. Juni 2018 (Revision des Verjährungsrechts), mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2020 (AS 2018 5343; BBl 2014 235).

Art. 587 D. Wirkung / I. Frist zur Erklärung

D. Wirkung

I. Frist zur Erklärung

1 Nach Abschluss des Inventars wird jeder Erbe aufgefordert, sich binnen Monatsfrist über den Erwerb der Erbschaft zu erklären.

2 Wo die Umstände es rechtfertigen, kann die zuständige Behörde zur Einholung von Schätzungen, zur Erledigung von streitigen Ansprüchen u. dgl. eine weitere Frist einräumen.

Art. 588 D. Wirkung / II. Erklärung

II. Erklärung

1 Der Erbe kann während der angesetzten Frist ausschlagen oder die amtliche Liquidation verlangen oder die Erbschaft unter öffentlichem Inventar oder vorbehaltlos annehmen.

2 Gibt er keine Erklärung ab, so hat er die Erbschaft unter öffentlichem Inventar angenommen.

Art. 589 D. Wirkung / III. Folgen der Annahme unter öffentlichem Inventar / 1. Haftung nach Inventar

III. Folgen der Annahme unter öffentlichem Inventar

1. Haftung nach Inventar

1 Übernimmt ein Erbe die Erbschaft unter öffentlichem Inventar, so gehen die Schulden des Erblassers, die im Inventar verzeichnet sind, und die Vermögenswerte auf ihn über.

2 Der Erwerb der Erbschaft mit Rechten und Pflichten wird auf den Zeitpunkt der Eröffnung des Erbganges zurückbezogen.

3 Für die Schulden, die im Inventar verzeichnet sind, haftet der Erbe sowohl mit der Erbschaft als mit seinem eigenen Vermögen.

Art. 590 D. Wirkung / III. Folgen der Annahme unter öffentlichem Inventar / 2. Haftung ausser Inventar

2. Haftung ausser Inventar

1 Den Gläubigern des Erblassers, deren Forderungen aus dem Grunde nicht in das Inventar aufgenommen worden sind, weil sie deren Anmeldung versäumt haben, sind die Erben weder persönlich noch mit der Erbschaft haftbar.

2 Haben die Gläubiger ohne eigene Schuld die Anmeldung zum Inventar unterlassen, oder sind deren Forderungen trotz Anmeldung in das Verzeichnis nicht aufgenommen worden, so haftet der Erbe, soweit er aus der Erbschaft bereichert ist.

3 In allen Fällen können die Gläubiger ihre Forderungen geltend machen, soweit sie durch Pfandrecht an Erbschaftssachen gedeckt sind.

Art. 591 E. Haftung für Bürgschaftsschulden

E. Haftung für Bürgschaftsschulden

Bürgschaftsschulden des Erblassers werden im Inventar besonders aufgezeichnet und können gegen den Erben, auch wenn er die Erbschaft annimmt, nur bis zu dem Betrage geltend gemacht werden, der bei der konkursmässigen Tilgung aller Schulden aus der Erbschaft auf die Bürgschaftsschulden fallen würde.

Art. 592 F. Erwerb durch das Gemeinwesen

F. Erwerb durch das Gemeinwesen

Fällt eine Erbschaft an das Gemeinwesen, so wird von Amtes wegen ein Rechnungsruf vorgenommen, und es haftet das Gemeinwesen für die Schulden der Erbschaft nur im Umfange der Vermögenswerte, die es aus der Erbschaft erworben hat.


  Vierter Abschnitt: Die amtliche Liquidation

Art. 593 A. Voraussetzung / I. Begehren eines Erben

A. Voraussetzung

I. Begehren eines Erben

1 Jeder Erbe ist befugt, anstatt die Erbschaft auszuschlagen oder unter öffentlichem Inventar anzunehmen, die amtliche Liquidation zu verlangen.

2 Solange jedoch ein Miterbe die Annahme erklärt, kann dem Begehren keine Folge gegeben werden.

3 Im Falle der amtlichen Liquidation werden die Erben für die Schulden der Erbschaft nicht haftbar.

Art. 594 A. Voraussetzung / II. Begehren der Gläubiger des Erblassers

II. Begehren der Gläubiger des Erblassers

1 Haben die Gläubiger des Erblassers begründete Besorgnis, dass ihre Forderungen nicht bezahlt werden, und werden sie auf ihr Begehren nicht befriedigt oder sichergestellt, so können sie binnen drei Monaten, vom Tode des Erblassers oder der Eröffnung der Verfügung an gerechnet, die amtliche Liquidation der Erbschaft verlangen.

2 Die Vermächtnisnehmer können unter der gleichen Voraussetzung zu ihrer Sicherstellung vorsorgliche Massregeln verlangen.

Art. 595 B. Verfahren / I. Verwaltung

B. Verfahren

I. Verwaltung

1 Die amtliche Liquidation wird von der zuständigen Behörde oder in deren Auftrag von einem oder mehreren Erbschaftsverwaltern durchgeführt.

2 Sie beginnt mit der Aufnahme eines Inventars, womit ein Rechnungsruf verbunden wird.

3 Der Erbschaftsverwalter steht unter der Aufsicht der Behörde, und die Erben sind befugt, bei dieser gegen die von ihm beabsichtigten oder getroffenen Massregeln Beschwerde zu erheben.

Art. 596 B. Verfahren / II. Ordentliche Liquidation

II. Ordentliche Liquidation

1 Zum Zwecke der Liquidation sind die laufenden Geschäfte des Erblassers zu beendigen, seine Verpflichtungen zu erfüllen, seine Forderungen einzuziehen, die Vermächtnisse nach Möglichkeit auszurichten, die Rechte und Pflichten des Erblassers, soweit nötig, gerichtlich festzustellen und sein Vermögen zu versilbern.

2 Die Veräusserung von Grundstücken des Erblassers erfolgt durch öffentliche Versteigerung und darf nur mit Zustimmung aller Erben aus freier Hand stattfinden.

3 Die Erben können verlangen, dass ihnen die Sachen und Gelder der Erbschaft, die für die Liquidation entbehrlich sind, schon während derselben ganz oder teilweise ausgeliefert werden.

Art. 597 B. Verfahren / III. Konkursamtliche Liquidation

III. Konkursamtliche Liquidation

Ist die Erbschaft überschuldet, so erfolgt die Liquidation durch das Konkursamt nach den Vorschriften des Konkursrechtes.


  Fünfter Abschnitt: Die Erbschaftsklage

Art. 598 A. Voraussetzung

A. Voraussetzung

1 Wer auf eine Erbschaft oder auf Erbschaftssachen als gesetzlicher oder eingesetzter Erbe ein besseres Recht zu haben glaubt als der Besitzer, ist befugt, sein Recht mit der Erbschaftsklage geltend zu machen.

2 ...1


1 Aufgehoben durch Anhang 1 Ziff. II 3 der Zivilprozessordnung vom 19. Dez. 2008, mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 599 B. Wirkung

B. Wirkung

1 Wird die Klage gutgeheissen, so hat der Besitzer die Erbschaft oder die Erbschaftssachen nach den Besitzesregeln an den Kläger herauszugeben.

2 Auf die Ersitzung an Erbschaftssachen kann sich der Beklagte gegenüber der Erbschaftsklage nicht berufen.

Art. 600 C. Verjährung

C. Verjährung

1 Die Erbschaftsklage verjährt gegenüber einem gutgläubigen Beklagten mit Ablauf eines Jahres, von dem Zeitpunkte an gerechnet, da der Kläger von dem Besitz des Beklagten und von seinem eigenen bessern Recht Kenntnis erhalten hat, in allen Fällen aber mit dem Ablauf von zehn Jahren, vom Tode des Erblassers oder dem Zeitpunkte der Eröffnung seiner letztwilligen Verfügung an gerechnet.

2 Gegenüber einem bösgläubigen Beklagten beträgt die Verjährungsfrist stets 30 Jahre.

Art. 601 D. Klage der Vermächtnisnehmer

D. Klage der Vermächtnisnehmer

Die Klage des Vermächtnisnehmers verjährt mit dem Ablauf von zehn Jahren, von der Mitteilung der Verfügung oder vom Zeitpunkt an gerechnet, auf den das Vermächtnis später fällig wird.


  Siebenzehnter Titel: Die Teilung der Erbschaft

  Erster Abschnitt: Die Gemeinschaft vor der Teilung

Art. 602 A. Wirkung des Erbganges / I. Erbengemeinschaft

A. Wirkung des Erbganges

I. Erbengemeinschaft

1 Beerben mehrere Erben den Erblasser, so besteht unter ihnen, bis die Erbschaft geteilt wird, infolge des Erbganges eine Gemeinschaft aller Rechte und Pflichten der Erbschaft.

2 Sie werden Gesamteigentümer der Erbschaftsgegenstände und verfügen unter Vorbehalt der vertraglichen oder gesetzlichen Vertretungs- und Verwaltungsbefugnisse über die Rechte der Erbschaft gemeinsam.

3 Auf Begehren eines Miterben kann die zuständige Behörde für die Erbengemeinschaft bis zur Teilung eine Vertretung bestellen.

Art. 603 A. Wirkung des Erbganges / II. Haftung der Erben

II. Haftung der Erben

1 Für die Schulden des Erblassers werden die Erben solidarisch haftbar.

2 Die angemessene Entschädigung, die den Kindern oder Grosskindern für Zuwendungen an den mit dem Erblasser gemeinsam geführten Haushalt geschuldet wird, ist zu den Erbschaftsschulden zu rechnen, soweit dadurch nicht eine Überschuldung der Erbschaft entsteht.1


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 6. Okt. 1972, in Kraft seit 15. Febr. 1973 (AS 1973 93; BBl 1970 I 805, 1971 I 737).

Art. 604 B. Teilungsanspruch

B. Teilungsanspruch

1 Jeder Miterbe kann zu beliebiger Zeit die Teilung der Erbschaft verlangen, soweit er nicht durch Vertrag oder Vorschrift des Gesetzes zur Gemeinschaft verpflichtet ist.

2 Auf Ansuchen eines Erben kann das Gericht vorübergehend eine Verschiebung der Teilung der Erbschaft oder einzelner Erbschaftssachen anordnen, wenn deren sofortige Vornahme den Wert der Erbschaft erheblich schädigen würde.

3 Den Miterben eines zahlungsunfähigen Erben steht die Befugnis zu, zur Sicherung ihrer Ansprüche sofort nach dem Erbgange vorsorgliche Massregeln zu verlangen.

Art. 605 C. Verschiebung der Teilung

C. Verschiebung der Teilung

1 Ist beim Erbgang auf ein noch nicht geborenes Kind Rücksicht zu nehmen, so muss die Teilung bis zum Zeitpunkte seiner Geburt verschoben werden.

2 Ebenso lange hat die Mutter, soweit dies für ihren Unterhalt erforderlich ist, Anspruch auf den Genuss am Gemeinschaftsvermögen.

Art. 606 D. Anspruch der Hausgenossen

D. Anspruch der Hausgenossen

Erben, die zur Zeit des Todes des Erblassers in dessen Haushaltung ihren Unterhalt erhalten haben, können verlangen, dass ihnen nach dem Tode des Erblassers der Unterhalt noch während eines Monats auf Kosten der Erbschaft zuteil werde.


  Zweiter Abschnitt: Die Teilungsart

Art. 607 A. Im Allgemeinen

A. Im Allgemeinen

1 Gesetzliche Erben haben sowohl unter sich als mit eingesetzten Erben nach den gleichen Grundsätzen zu teilen.

2 Sie können, wo es nicht anders angeordnet ist, die Teilung frei vereinbaren.

3 Miterben, die sich im Besitze von Erbschaftssachen befinden oder Schuldner des Erblassers sind, haben hierüber bei der Teilung genauen Aufschluss zu geben.

Art. 608 B. Ordnung der Teilung / I. Verfügung des Erblassers

B. Ordnung der Teilung

I. Verfügung des Erblassers

1 Der Erblasser ist befugt, durch Verfügung von Todes wegen seinen Erben Vorschriften über die Teilung und Bildung der Teile zu machen.

2 Unter Vorbehalt der Ausgleichung bei einer Ungleichheit der Teile, die der Erblasser nicht beabsichtigt hat, sind diese Vorschriften für die Erben verbindlich.

3 Ist nicht ein anderer Wille des Erblassers aus der Verfügung ersichtlich, so gilt die Zuweisung einer Erbschaftssache an einen Erben als eine blosse Teilungsvorschrift und nicht als Vermächtnis.

Art. 609 B. Ordnung der Teilung / II. Mitwirkung der Behörde

II. Mitwirkung der Behörde

1 Auf Verlangen eines Gläubigers, der den Anspruch eines Erben auf eine angefallene Erbschaft erworben oder gepfändet hat, oder der gegen ihn Verlustscheine besitzt, hat die Behörde an Stelle dieses Erben bei der Teilung mitzuwirken.

2 Dem kantonalen Recht bleibt es vorbehalten, noch für weitere Fälle eine amtliche Mitwirkung bei der Teilung vorzusehen.

Art. 610 C. Durchführung der Teilung / I. Gleichberechtigung der Erben

C. Durchführung der Teilung

I. Gleichberechtigung der Erben

1 Die Erben haben bei der Teilung, wenn keine andern Vorschriften Platz greifen, alle den gleichen Anspruch auf die Gegenstände der Erbschaft.

2 Sie haben einander über ihr Verhältnis zum Erblasser alles mitzuteilen, was für die gleichmässige und gerechte Verteilung der Erbschaft in Berücksichtigung fällt.

3 Jeder Miterbe kann verlangen, dass die Schulden des Erblassers vor der Teilung der Erbschaft getilgt oder sichergestellt werden.

Art. 611 C. Durchführung der Teilung / II. Bildung von Losen

II. Bildung von Losen

1 Die Erben bilden aus den Erbschaftssachen so viele Teile oder Lose, als Erben oder Erbstämme sind.

2 Können sie sich nicht einigen, so hat auf Verlangen eines der Erben die zuständige Behörde unter Berücksichtigung des Ortsgebrauches, der persönlichen Verhältnisse und der Wünsche der Mehrheit der Miterben die Lose zu bilden.

3 Die Verteilung der Lose erfolgt nach Vereinbarung oder durch Losziehung unter den Erben.

Art. 612 C. Durchführung der Teilung / III. Zuweisung und Verkauf einzelner Sachen

III. Zuweisung und Verkauf einzelner Sachen

1 Eine Erbschaftssache, die durch Teilung an ihrem Werte wesentlich verlieren würde, soll einem der Erben ungeteilt zugewiesen werden.

2 Können die Erben sich über die Teilung oder Zuweisung einer Sache nicht einigen, so ist die Sache zu verkaufen und der Erlös zu teilen.

3 Auf Verlangen eines Erben hat der Verkauf auf dem Wege der Versteigerung stattzufinden, wobei, wenn die Erben sich nicht einigen, die zuständige Behörde entscheidet, ob die Versteigerung öffentlich oder nur unter den Erben stattfinden soll.

Art. 612a1C. Durchführung der Teilung / IV. Zuweisung der Wohnung und des Hausrates an den überlebenden Ehegatten

IV. Zuweisung der Wohnung und des Hausrates an den überlebenden Ehegatten

1 Befinden sich das Haus oder die Wohnung, worin die Ehegatten gelebt haben, oder Hausratsgegenstände in der Erbschaft, so kann der überlebende Ehegatte verlangen, dass ihm das Eigentum daran auf Anrechnung zugeteilt wird.

2 Wo die Umstände es rechtfertigen, kann auf Verlangen des überlebenden Ehegatten oder der andern gesetzlichen Erben des Verstorbenen statt des Eigentums die Nutzniessung oder ein Wohnrecht eingeräumt werden.

3 An Räumlichkeiten, in denen der Erblasser einen Beruf ausübte oder ein Gewerbe betrieb und die ein Nachkomme zu dessen Weiterführung benötigt, kann der überlebende Ehegatte diese Rechte nicht beanspruchen; die Vorschriften des bäuerlichen Erbrechts bleiben vorbehalten.

4 Die gleiche Regelung gilt bei eingetragener Partnerschaft sinngemäss.2


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 5. Okt. 1984, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).
2 Eingefügt durch Anhang Ziff. 8 des Partnerschaftsgesetzes vom 18. Juni 2004, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2007 (AS 2005 5685; BBl 2003 1288).

Art. 613 D. Besondere Gegenstände / I. Zusammengehörende Sachen, Familienschriften

D. Besondere Gegenstände

I. Zusammengehörende Sachen, Familienschriften

1 Gegenstände, die ihrer Natur nach zusammengehören, sollen, wenn einer der Erben gegen die Teilung Einspruch erhebt, nicht von einander getrennt werden.

2 Familienschriften und Gegenstände, die für die Familie einen besonderen Erinnerungswert haben, sollen, sobald ein Erbe widerspricht, nicht veräussert werden.

3 Können sich die Erben nicht einigen, so entscheidet die zuständige Behörde über die Veräusserung oder die Zuweisung mit oder ohne Anrechnung, unter Berücksichtigung des Ortsgebrauches und, wo ein solcher nicht besteht, der persönlichen Verhältnisse der Erben.

Art. 613a1D. Besondere Gegenstände / I.bis Landwirtschaftliches Inventar

I.bis Landwirtschaftliches Inventar

Stirbt der Pächter eines landwirtschaftlichen Gewerbes und führt einer seiner Erben die Pacht allein weiter, so kann dieser verlangen, dass ihm das gesamte Inventar (Vieh, Gerätschaften, Vorräte usw.) unter Anrechnung auf seinen Erbteil zum Nutzwert zugewiesen wird.


1 Eingefügt durch Art. 92 Ziff. 1 des BG vom 4. Okt. 1991 über das bäuerliche Bodenrecht, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1410; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 614 D. Besondere Gegenstände / II. Forderungen des Erblassers an Erben

II. Forderungen des Erblassers an Erben

Forderungen, die der Erblasser an einen der Erben gehabt hat, sind bei der Teilung diesem anzurechnen.

Art. 615 D. Besondere Gegenstände / III. Verpfändete Erbschaftssachen

III. Verpfändete Erbschaftssachen

Erhält ein Erbe bei der Teilung eine Erbschaftssache, die für Schulden des Erblassers verpfändet ist, so wird ihm auch die Pfandschuld überbunden.

Art. 6161

1 Aufgehoben durch Art. 92 Ziff. 1 des BG vom 4. Okt 1991 über das bäuerliche Bodenrecht, mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1410; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 6171D. Besondere Gegenstände / IV. Grundstücke / 1. Übernahme / a. Anrechnungswert

IV. Grundstücke

1. Übernahme

a. Anrechnungswert

Grundstücke sind den Erben zum Verkehrswert anzurechnen, der ihnen im Zeitpunkt der Teilung zukommt.


1 Fassung gemäss Art. 92 Ziff. 1 des BG vom 4. Okt. 1991 über das bäuerliche Bodenrecht, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1410; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 618 D. Besondere Gegenstände / IV. Grundstücke / 1. Übernahme / b. Schatzungsverfahren

b. Schatzungsverfahren

1 Können sich die Erben über den Anrechnungswert nicht verständigen, so wird er durch amtlich bestellte Sachverständige geschätzt.1

2 ...2


1 Fassung gemäss Anhang 1 Ziff. II 3 der Zivilprozessordnung vom 19. Dez. 2008, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).
2 Aufgehoben durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 6. Okt. 1972, mit Wirkung seit 15. Febr. 1973 (AS 1973 93; BBl 1970 I 805, 1971 I 737).

Art. 6191D. Besondere Gegenstände / V. Landwirtschaftliche Gewerbe und Grundstücke

V. Landwirtschaftliche Gewerbe und Grundstücke

Für die Übernahme und Anrechnung von landwirtschaftlichen Gewerben und Grundstücken gilt das Bundesgesetz vom 4. Oktober 19912 über das bäuerliche Bodenrecht.


1 Fassung gemäss Art. 92 Ziff. 1 des BG vom 4. Okt. 1991 über das bäuerliche Bodenrecht, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1410; BBl 1988 III 953).
2 SR 211.412.11

Art. 620–6251

1 Aufgehoben durch Art. 92 Ziff. 1 des BG vom 4. Okt 1991 über das bäuerliche Bodenrecht, mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1410; BBl 1988 III 953).


  Dritter Abschnitt: Die Ausgleichung

Art. 626 A. Ausgleichungspflicht der Erben

A. Ausgleichungspflicht der Erben

1 Die gesetzlichen Erben sind gegenseitig verpflichtet, alles zur Ausgleichung zu bringen, was ihnen der Erblasser bei Lebzeiten auf Anrechnung an ihren Erbanteil zugewendet hat.

2 Was der Erblasser seinen Nachkommen als Heiratsgut, Ausstattung oder durch Vermögensabtretung, Schulderlass u. dgl. zugewendet hat, steht, sofern der Erblasser nicht ausdrücklich das Gegenteil verfügt, unter der Ausgleichungspflicht.

Art. 627 B. Ausgleichung bei Wegfallen von Erben

B. Ausgleichung bei Wegfallen von Erben

1 Fällt ein Erbe vor oder nach dem Erbgang weg, so geht seine Ausgleichungspflicht auf die Erben über, die an seine Stelle treten.

2 Nachkommen eines Erben sind in Bezug auf die Zuwendungen, die dieser erhalten hat, auch dann zur Ausgleichung verpflichtet, wenn die Zuwendungen nicht auf sie übergegangen sind.

Art. 628 C. Berechnungsart / I. Einwerfung oder Anrechnung

C. Berechnungsart

I. Einwerfung oder Anrechnung

1 Die Erben haben die Wahl, die Ausgleichung durch Einwerfung in Natur oder durch Anrechnung dem Werte nach vorzunehmen, und zwar auch dann, wenn die Zuwendungen den Betrag des Erbanteils übersteigen.

2 Vorbehalten bleiben abweichende Anordnungen des Erblassers sowie die Ansprüche der Miterben auf Herabsetzung der Zuwendungen.

Art. 629 C. Berechnungsart / II. Verhältnis zum Erbanteil

II. Verhältnis zum Erbanteil

1 Übersteigen die Zuwendungen den Betrag eines Erbanteiles, so ist der Überschuss unter Vorbehalt des Herabsetzungsanspruches der Miterben nicht auszugleichen, wenn nachweisbar der Erblasser den Erben damit begünstigen wollte.

2 Diese Begünstigung wird vermutet bei den Ausstattungen, die den Nachkommen bei ihrer Verheiratung in üblichem Umfange zugewendet worden sind.

Art. 630 C. Berechnungsart / III. Ausgleichungswert

III. Ausgleichungswert

1 Die Ausgleichung erfolgt nach dem Werte der Zuwendungen zur Zeit des Erbganges oder, wenn die Sache vorher veräussert worden ist, nach dem dafür erzielten Erlös.

2 Verwendungen und Schaden sowie bezogene Früchte sind unter den Erben nach den Besitzesregeln in Anschlag zu bringen.

Art. 631 D. Erziehungskosten

D. Erziehungskosten

1 Die Auslagen des Erblassers für die Erziehung und Ausbildung einzelner Kinder sind, wenn kein anderer Wille des Erblassers nachgewiesen wird, der Ausgleichungspflicht nur insoweit unterworfen, als sie das übliche Mass übersteigen.

2 Kindern, die noch in der Ausbildung stehen oder die gebrechlich sind, ist bei der Teilung ein angemessener Vorausbezug einzuräumen.1


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 5. Okt. 1984, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 632 E. Gelegenheitsgeschenke

E. Gelegenheitsgeschenke

Übliche Gelegenheitsgeschenke stehen nicht unter der Ausgleichungspflicht.

Art. 6331

1 Aufgehoben durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 6. Okt. 1972, mit Wirkung seit 15. Febr. 1973 (AS 1973 93; BBl 1970 I 805, 1971 I 737).


  Vierter Abschnitt: Abschluss und Wirkung der Teilung

Art. 634 A. Abschluss des Vertrages / I. Teilungsvertrag

A. Abschluss des Vertrages

I. Teilungsvertrag

1 Die Teilung wird für die Erben verbindlich mit der Aufstellung und Entgegennahme der Lose oder mit dem Abschluss des Teilungsvertrages.

2 Der Teilungsvertrag bedarf zu seiner Gültigkeit der schriftlichen Form.

Art. 635 A. Abschluss des Vertrages / II. Vertrag über angefallene Erbanteile

II. Vertrag über angefallene Erbanteile

1 Verträge unter den Miterben über Abtretung der Erbanteile bedürfen zu ihrer Gültigkeit der schriftlichen Form.1

2 Werden sie von einem Erben mit einem Dritten abgeschlossen, so geben sie diesem kein Recht auf Mitwirkung bei der Teilung, sondern nur einen Anspruch auf den Anteil, der dem Erben aus der Teilung zugewiesen wird.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 5. Okt. 1984, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 636 A. Abschluss des Vertrages / III. Verträge vor dem Erbgang

III. Verträge vor dem Erbgang

1 Verträge, die ein Erbe über eine noch nicht angefallene Erbschaft ohne Mitwirkung und Zustimmung des Erblassers mit einem Miterben oder einem Dritten abschliesst, sind nicht verbindlich.

2 Leistungen, die auf Grund solcher Verträge gemacht worden sind, können zurückgefordert werden.

Art. 637 B. Haftung der Miterben unter sich / I. Gewährleistung

B. Haftung der Miterben unter sich

I. Gewährleistung

1 Nach Abschluss der Teilung haften die Miterben einander für die Erbschaftssachen wie Käufer und Verkäufer.

2 Sie haben einander den Bestand der Forderungen, die ihnen bei der Teilung zugewiesen werden, zu gewährleisten und haften einander, soweit es sich nicht um Wertpapiere mit Kurswert handelt, für die Zahlungsfähigkeit des Schuldners im angerechneten Forderungsbetrag wie einfache Bürgen.

3 Die Klage aus der Gewährleistungspflicht verjährt mit Ablauf eines Jahres nach der Teilung oder nach dem Zeitpunkt, auf den die Forderungen später fällig werden.

Art. 638 B. Haftung der Miterben unter sich / II. Anfechtung der Teilung

II. Anfechtung der Teilung

Die Anfechtung des Teilungsvertrages erfolgt nach den Vorschriften über die Anfechtung der Verträge im Allgemeinen.

Art. 639 C. Haftung gegenüber Dritten / I. Solidare Haftung

C. Haftung gegenüber Dritten

I. Solidare Haftung

1 Für die Schulden des Erblassers sind die Erben den Gläubigern auch nach der Teilung solidarisch und mit ihrem ganzen Vermögen haftbar, solange die Gläubiger in eine Teilung oder Übernahme der Schulden nicht ausdrücklich oder stillschweigend eingewilligt haben.

2 Die solidare Haftung der Miterben verjährt mit Ablauf von fünf Jahren nach der Teilung oder nach dem Zeitpunkt, auf den die Forderung später fällig geworden ist.

Art. 640 C. Haftung gegenüber Dritten / II. Rückgriff auf die Miterben C. Haftung gegenüber Dritten / II. Rückgriff auf die Miterben

II. Rückgriff auf die Miterben

1 Hat ein Erbe eine Schuld des Erblassers bezahlt, die ihm bei der Teilung nicht zugewiesen worden ist, oder hat er von einer Schuld mehr bezahlt, als er übernommen, so ist er befugt, auf seine Miterben Rückgriff zu nehmen.

2 Dieser Rückgriff richtet sich zunächst gegen den, der die bezahlte Schuld bei der Teilung übernommen hat.

3 Im Übrigen haben die Erben mangels anderer Abrede die Schulden unter sich im Verhältnis der Erbanteile zu tragen.

  Vierter Teil: Das Sachenrecht

  Erste Abteilung: Das Eigentum

  Achtzehnter Titel: Allgemeine Bestimmungen

Art. 641 A. Inhalt des Eigentums / I. Im Allgemeinen

A. Inhalt des Eigentums

I. Im Allgemeinen1

1 Wer Eigentümer einer Sache ist, kann in den Schranken der Rechtsordnung über sie nach seinem Belieben verfügen.

2 Er hat das Recht, sie von jedem, der sie ihm vorenthält, herauszuverlangen und jede ungerechtfertigte Einwirkung abzuwehren.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 4. Okt. 2002 (Grundsatzartikel Tiere), in Kraft seit 1. April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806).

Art. 641a1A. Inhalt des Eigentums / II. Tiere

II. Tiere

1 Tiere sind keine Sachen.

2 Soweit für Tiere keine besonderen Regelungen bestehen, gelten für sie die auf Sachen anwendbaren Vorschriften.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 4. Okt. 2002 (Grundsatzartikel Tiere), in Kraft seit 1. April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806).

Art. 642 B. Umfang des Eigentums / I. Bestandteile

B. Umfang des Eigentums

I. Bestandteile

1 Wer Eigentümer einer Sache ist, hat das Eigentum an allen ihren Bestandteilen.

2 Bestandteil einer Sache ist alles, was nach der am Orte üblichen Auffassung zu ihrem Bestande gehört und ohne ihre Zerstörung, Beschädigung oder Veränderung nicht abgetrennt werden kann.

Art. 643 B. Umfang des Eigentums / II. Natürliche Früchte

II. Natürliche Früchte

1 Wer Eigentümer einer Sache ist, hat das Eigentum auch an ihren natürlichen Früchten.

2 Natürliche Früchte sind die zeitlich wiederkehrenden Erzeugnisse und die Erträgnisse, die nach der üblichen Auffassung von einer Sache ihrer Bestimmung gemäss gewonnen werden.

3 Bis zur Trennung sind die natürlichen Früchte Bestandteil der Sache.

Art. 644 B. Umfang des Eigentums / III. Zugehör / 1. Umschreibung

III. Zugehör

1. Umschreibung

1 Die Verfügung über eine Sache bezieht sich, wenn keine Ausnahme gemacht wird, auch auf ihre Zugehör.

2 Zugehör sind die beweglichen Sachen, die nach der am Orte üblichen Auffassung oder nach dem klaren Willen des Eigentümers der Hauptsache dauernd für deren Bewirtschaftung, Benutzung oder Verwahrung bestimmt und durch Verbindung, Anpassung oder auf andere Weise in die Beziehung zur Hauptsache gebracht sind, in der sie ihr zu dienen haben.

3 Ist eine Sache Zugehör, so vermag eine vorübergehende Trennung von der Hauptsache ihr diese Eigenschaft nicht zu nehmen.

Art. 645 B. Umfang des Eigentums / III. Zugehör / 2. Ausschluss

2. Ausschluss

Zugehör sind niemals solche bewegliche Sachen, die dem Besitzer der Hauptsache nur zum vorübergehenden Gebrauche oder zum Verbrauche dienen, oder die zu der Eigenart der Hauptsache in keiner Beziehung stehen, sowie solche, die nur zur Aufbewahrung oder zum Verkauf oder zur Vermietung mit der Hauptsache in Verbindung gebracht sind.

Art. 646 C. Gemeinschaftliches Eigentum / I. Miteigentum / 1. Verhältnis der Miteigentümer

C. Gemeinschaftliches Eigentum

I. Miteigentum

1. Verhältnis der Miteigentümer

1 Haben mehrere Personen eine Sache nach Bruchteilen und ohne äusserliche Abteilung in ihrem Eigentum, so sind sie Miteigentümer.

2 Ist es nicht anders festgestellt, so sind sie Miteigentümer zu gleichen Teilen.

3 Jeder Miteigentümer hat für seinen Anteil die Rechte und Pflichten eines Eigentümers, und es kann dieser Anteil von ihm veräussert und verpfändet und von seinen Gläubigern gepfändet werden.

Art. 6471C. Gemeinschaftliches Eigentum / I. Miteigentum / 2. Nutzungs- und Verwaltungsordnung

2. Nutzungs- und Verwaltungsordnung

1 Die Miteigentümer können eine von den gesetzlichen Bestimmungen abweichende Nutzungs- und Verwaltungsordnung vereinbaren und darin vorsehen, dass diese mit Zustimmung der Mehrheit aller Miteigentümer geändert werden kann.2

1bis Eine Änderung von Bestimmungen der Nutzungs- und Verwaltungsordnung über die Zuteilung ausschliesslicher Nutzungsrechte bedarf zudem der Zustimmung der direkt betroffenen Miteigentümer.3

2 Nicht aufheben oder beschränken können sie die jedem Miteigentümer zustehenden Befugnisse:

1.
zu verlangen, dass die für die Erhaltung des Wertes und der Gebrauchsfähigkeit der Sache notwendigen Verwaltungshandlungen durchgeführt und nötigenfalls vom Gericht angeordnet werden;
2.
von sich aus auf Kosten aller Miteigentümer die Massnahmen zu ergreifen, die sofort getroffen werden müssen, um die Sache vor drohendem oder wachsendem Schaden zu bewahren.

1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 19. Dez. 1963, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
3 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 647a1C. Gemeinschaftliches Eigentum / I. Miteigentum / 3. Gewöhnliche Verwaltungshandlungen

3. Gewöhnliche Verwaltungshandlungen

1 Zu den gewöhnlichen Verwaltungshandlungen ist jeder Miteigentümer befugt, insbesondere zur Vornahme von Ausbesserungen, Anbau- und Erntearbeiten, zur kurzfristigen Verwahrung und Aufsicht sowie zum Abschluss der dazu dienenden Verträge und zur Ausübung der Befugnisse, die sich aus ihnen und aus den Miet—, Pacht- und Werkverträgen ergeben, einschliesslich der Bezahlung und Entgegennahme von Geldbeträgen für die Gesamtheit.

2 Mit Zustimmung der Mehrheit aller Miteigentümer kann die Zuständigkeit zu diesen Verwaltungshandlungen unter Vorbehalt der Bestimmungen des Gesetzes über die notwendigen und dringlichen Massnahmen anders geregelt werden.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 19. Dez. 1963, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 647b1C. Gemeinschaftliches Eigentum / I. Miteigentum / 4. Wichtigere Verwaltungshandlungen

4. Wichtigere Verwaltungshandlungen

1 Mit Zustimmung der Mehrheit aller Miteigentümer, die zugleich den grösseren Teil der Sache vertritt, können wichtigere Verwaltungshandlungen durchgeführt werden, insbesondere die Änderung der Kulturart oder Benutzungsweise, der Abschluss und die Auflösung von Miet- und Pachtverträgen, die Beteiligung an Bodenverbesserungen und die Bestellung eines Verwalters, dessen Zuständigkeit nicht auf gewöhnliche Verwaltungshandlungen beschränkt ist.

2 Vorbehalten bleiben die Bestimmungen über die notwendigen baulichen Massnahmen.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 19. Dez. 1963, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 647c1C. Gemeinschaftliches Eigentum / I. Miteigentum / 5. Bauliche Massnahmen / a. Notwendige

5. Bauliche Massnahmen

a. Notwendige

Unterhalts-, Wiederherstellungs- und Erneuerungsarbeiten, die für die Erhaltung des Wertes und der Gebrauchsfähigkeit der Sache nötig sind, können mit Zustimmung der Mehrheit aller Miteigentümer ausgeführt werden, soweit sie nicht als gewöhnliche Verwaltungshandlungen von jedem einzelnen vorgenommen werden dürfen.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 19. Dez. 1963, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 647d1C. Gemeinschaftliches Eigentum / I. Miteigentum / 5. Bauliche Massnahmen / b. Nützliche

b. Nützliche

1 Erneuerungs- und Umbauarbeiten, die eine Wertsteigerung oder Verbesserung der Wirtschaftlichkeit oder Gebrauchsfähigkeit der Sache bezwecken, bedürfen der Zustimmung der Mehrheit aller Miteigentümer, die zugleich den grösseren Teil der Sache vertritt.

2 Änderungen, die einem Miteigentümer den Gebrauch oder die Benutzung der Sache zum bisherigen Zweck erheblich und dauernd erschweren oder unwirtschaftlich machen, können nicht ohne seine Zustimmung durchgeführt werden.

3 Verlangt die Änderung von einem Miteigentümer Aufwendungen, die ihm nicht zumutbar sind, insbesondere weil sie in einem Missverhältnis zum Vermögenswert seines Anteils stehen, so kann sie ohne seine Zustimmung nur durchgeführt werden, wenn die übrigen Miteigentümer seinen Kostenanteil auf sich nehmen, soweit er den ihm zumutbaren Betrag übersteigt.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 19. Dez. 1963, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 647e1C. Gemeinschaftliches Eigentum / I. Miteigentum / 5. Bauliche Massnahmen / c. Der Verschönerung und Bequemlichkeit dienende

c. Der Verschönerung und Bequemlichkeit dienende

1 Bauarbeiten, die lediglich der Verschönerung, der Ansehnlichkeit der Sache oder der Bequemlichkeit im Gebrauch dienen, dürfen nur mit Zustimmung aller Miteigentümer ausgeführt werden.

2 Werden solche Arbeiten mit Zustimmung der Mehrheit aller Miteigentümer, die zugleich den grösseren Teil der Sache vertritt, angeordnet, so können sie auch gegen den Willen eines nicht zustimmenden Miteigentümers ausgeführt werden, sofern dieser durch sie in seinem Nutzungs- und Gebrauchsrecht nicht dauernd beeinträchtigt wird, und die übrigen Miteigentümer ihm für eine bloss vorübergehende Beeinträchtigung Ersatz leisten und seinen Kostenanteil übernehmen.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 19. Dez. 1963, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 6481C. Gemeinschaftliches Eigentum / I. Miteigentum / 6. Verfügung über die Sache

6. Verfügung über die Sache

1 Jeder Miteigentümer ist befugt, die Sache insoweit zu vertreten, zu gebrauchen und zu nutzen, als es mit den Rechten der andern verträglich ist.

2 Zur Veräusserung oder Belastung der Sache sowie zur Veränderung ihrer Zweckbestimmung bedarf es der Übereinstimmung aller Miteigentümer, soweit diese nicht einstimmig eine andere Ordnung vereinbart haben.

3 Bestehen Grundpfandrechte oder Grundlasten an Miteigentumsanteilen, so können die Miteigentümer die Sache selbst nicht mehr mit solchen Rechten belasten.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 19. Dez. 1963, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 6491C. Gemeinschaftliches Eigentum / I. Miteigentum / 7. Tragung der Kosten und Lasten

7. Tragung der Kosten und Lasten

1 Die Verwaltungskosten, Steuern und anderen Lasten, die aus dem Miteigentum erwachsen oder auf der gemeinschaftlichen Sache ruhen, werden von den Miteigentümern, wo es nicht anders bestimmt ist, im Verhältnis ihrer Anteile getragen.

2 Hat ein Miteigentümer solche Ausgaben über diesen Anteil hinaus getragen, so kann er von den anderen nach dem gleichen Verhältnis Ersatz verlangen.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 19. Dez. 1963, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 649a1C. Gemeinschaftliches Eigentum / I. Miteigentum / 8. Verbindlichkeit von Regelungen und Anmerkung im Grundbuch

8. Verbindlichkeit von Regelungen und Anmerkung im Grundbuch2

1 Die von den Miteigentümern vereinbarte Nutzungs- und Verwaltungsordnung und die von ihnen gefassten Verwaltungsbeschlüsse sowie die gerichtlichen Urteile und Verfügungen sind auch für den Rechtsnachfolger eines Miteigentümers und für den Erwerber eines dinglichen Rechtes an einem Miteigentumsanteil verbindlich.

2 Sie können bei Miteigentumsanteilen an Grundstücken im Grundbuch angemerkt werden.3


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 19. Dez. 1963, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
3 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 649b1C. Gemeinschaftliches Eigentum / I. Miteigentum / 9. Ausschluss aus der Gemeinschaft / a. Miteigentümer

9. Ausschluss aus der Gemeinschaft

a. Miteigentümer

1 Der Miteigentümer kann durch gerichtliches Urteil aus der Gemeinschaft ausgeschlossen werden, wenn durch sein Verhalten oder das Verhalten von Personen, denen er den Gebrauch der Sache überlassen oder für die er einzustehen hat, Verpflichtungen gegenüber allen oder einzelnen Mitberechtigten so schwer verletzt werden, dass diesen die Fortsetzung der Gemeinschaft nicht zugemutet werden kann.

2 Umfasst die Gemeinschaft nur zwei Miteigentümer, so steht jedem das Klagerecht zu; im übrigen bedarf es zur Klage, wenn nichts anderes vereinbart ist, der Ermächtigung durch einen Mehrheitsbeschluss aller Miteigentümer mit Ausnahme des Beklagten.

3 Erkennt das Gericht auf Ausschluss des Beklagten, so verurteilt es ihn zur Veräusserung seines Anteils und ordnet für den Fall, dass der Anteil nicht binnen der angesetzten Frist veräussert wird, dessen öffentliche Versteigerung nach den Vorschriften über die Zwangsverwertung von Grundstücken an unter Ausschluss der Bestimmungen über die Auflösung des Miteigentumsverhältnisses.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 19. Dez. 1963, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 649c1C. Gemeinschaftliches Eigentum / I. Miteigentum / 9. Ausschluss aus der Gemeinschaft / b. Andere Berechtigte

b. Andere Berechtigte

Die Bestimmungen über den Ausschluss eines Miteigentümers sind auf den Nutzniesser und auf den Inhaber eines anderen dinglichen oder vorgemerkten persönlichen Nutzungsrechtes an einem Miteigentumsanteil sinngemäss anwendbar.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 19. Dez. 1963, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 6501C. Gemeinschaftliches Eigentum / I. Miteigentum / 10. Aufhebung / a. Anspruch auf Teilung

10. Aufhebung

a. Anspruch auf Teilung

1 Jeder Miteigentümer hat das Recht, die Aufhebung des Miteigentums zu verlangen, wenn sie nicht durch ein Rechtsgeschäft, durch Aufteilung zu Stockwerkeigentum oder durch die Bestimmung der Sache für einen dauernden Zweck ausgeschlossen ist.

2 Die Aufhebung kann auf höchstens 50 Jahre durch eine Vereinbarung ausgeschlossen werden; diese bedarf für Grundstücke zu ihrer Gültigkeit der öffentlichen Beurkundung und kann im Grundbuch vorgemerkt werden.2

3 Die Aufhebung darf nicht zur Unzeit verlangt werden.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 19. Dez. 1963, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 651 C. Gemeinschaftliches Eigentum / I. Miteigentum / 10. Aufhebung / b. Art der Teilung

b. Art der Teilung

1 Die Aufhebung erfolgt durch körperliche Teilung, durch Verkauf aus freier Hand oder auf dem Wege der Versteigerung mit Teilung des Erlöses oder durch Übertragung der ganzen Sache auf einen oder mehrere der Miteigentümer unter Auskauf der übrigen.

2 Können sich die Miteigentümer über die Art der Aufhebung nicht einigen, so wird nach Anordnung des Gerichts die Sache körperlich geteilt oder, wenn dies ohne wesentliche Verminderung ihres Wertes nicht möglich ist, öffentlich oder unter den Miteigentümern versteigert.

3 Mit der körperlichen Teilung kann bei ungleichen Teilen eine Ausgleichung der Teile in Geld verbunden werden.

Art. 651a1C. Gemeinschaftliches Eigentum / I. Miteigentum / 10. Aufhebung / c. Tiere des häuslichen Bereichs

c. Tiere des häuslichen Bereichs

1 Bei Tieren, die im häuslichen Bereich und nicht zu Vermögens- oder Erwerbszwecken gehalten werden, spricht das Gericht im Streitfall das Alleineigentum derjenigen Partei zu, die in tierschützerischer Hinsicht dem Tier die bessere Unterbringung gewährleistet.

2 Das Gericht kann die Person, die das Tier zugesprochen erhält, zur Leistung einer angemessenen Entschädigung an die Gegenpartei verpflichten; es bestimmt deren Höhe nach freiem Ermessen.

3 Es trifft die nötigen vorsorglichen Massnahmen, namentlich in Bezug auf die vorläufige Unterbringung des Tieres.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 4. Okt. 2002 (Grundsatzartikel Tiere), in Kraft seit 1. April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806).

Art. 652 C. Gemeinschaftliches Eigentum / II. Gesamteigentum / 1. Voraussetzung

II. Gesamteigentum

1. Voraussetzung

Haben mehrere Personen, die durch Gesetzesvorschrift oder Vertrag zu einer Gemeinschaft verbunden sind, eine Sache kraft ihrer Gemeinschaft zu Eigentum, so sind sie Gesamteigentümer, und es geht das Recht eines jeden auf die ganze Sache.

Art. 653 C. Gemeinschaftliches Eigentum / II. Gesamteigentum / 2. Wirkung

2. Wirkung

1 Die Rechte und Pflichten der Gesamteigentümer richten sich nach den Regeln, unter denen ihre gesetzliche oder vertragsmässige Gemeinschaft steht.

2 Besteht keine andere Vorschrift, so bedarf es zur Ausübung des Eigentums und insbesondere zur Verfügung über die Sache des einstimmigen Beschlusses aller Gesamteigentümer.

3 Solange die Gemeinschaft dauert, ist ein Recht auf Teilung oder die Verfügung über einen Bruchteil der Sache ausgeschlossen.

Art. 654 C. Gemeinschaftliches Eigentum / II. Gesamteigentum / 3. Aufhebung

3. Aufhebung

1 Die Aufhebung erfolgt mit der Veräusserung der Sache oder dem Ende der Gemeinschaft.

2 Die Teilung geschieht, wo es nicht anders bestimmt ist, nach den Vorschriften über das Miteigentum.

Art. 654a1C. Gemeinschaftliches Eigentum / III. Gemeinschaftliches Eigentum an landwirtschaftlichen Gewerben und Grundstücken

III. Gemeinschaftliches Eigentum an landwirtschaftlichen Gewerben und Grundstücken

Für die Aufhebung von gemeinschaftlichem Eigentum an landwirtschaftlichen Gewerben und Grundstücken gilt zudem das Bundesgesetz vom 4. Oktober 19912 über das bäuerliche Bodenrecht.


1 Eingefügt durch Art. 92 Ziff. 1 des BG vom 4. Okt. 1991 über das bäuerliche Bodenrecht, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1410; BBl 1988 III 953).
2 SR 211.412.11


  Neunzehnter Titel: Das Grundeigentum

  Erster Abschnitt: Gegenstand, Erwerb und Verlust des Grundeigentums

Art. 6551A. Gegenstand / I. Grundstücke

A. Gegenstand

I. Grundstücke2

1 Gegenstand des Grundeigentums sind die Grundstücke.

2 Grundstücke im Sinne dieses Gesetzes sind:

1.
die Liegenschaften;
2.
die in das Grundbuch aufgenommenen selbständigen und dauernden Rechte;
3.
die Bergwerke;
4.
die Miteigentumsanteile an Grundstücken.

3 Als selbstständiges und dauerndes Recht kann eine Dienstbarkeit an einem Grundstück in das Grundbuch aufgenommen werden, wenn sie:

1.
weder zugunsten eines berechtigten Grundstücks noch ausschliesslich zugunsten einer bestimmten Person errichtet ist; und
2.
auf wenigstens 30 Jahre oder auf unbestimmte Zeit begründet ist.3

1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 19. Dez. 1963, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
3 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 655a1A. Gegenstand / II. Unselbstständiges Eigentum

II. Unselbstständiges Eigentum

1 Ein Grundstück kann mit einem anderen Grundstück derart verknüpft werden, dass der jeweilige Eigentümer des Hauptgrundstücks auch Eigentümer des dazugehörenden Grundstücks ist. Dieses teilt das rechtliche Schicksal des Hauptgrundstücks und kann nicht gesondert veräussert, verpfändet oder belastet werden.

2 Erfolgt die Verknüpfung zu einem dauernden Zweck, so können das gesetzliche Vorkaufsrecht der Miteigentümer und der Aufhebungsanspruch nicht geltend gemacht werden.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 656 B. Erwerb / I. Eintragung

B. Erwerb

I. Eintragung

1 Zum Erwerbe des Grundeigentums bedarf es der Eintragung in das Grundbuch.

2 Bei Aneignung, Erbgang, Enteignung, Zwangsvollstreckung oder gerichtlichem Urteil erlangt indessen der Erwerber schon vor der Eintragung das Eigentum, kann aber im Grundbuch erst dann über das Grundstück verfügen, wenn die Eintragung erfolgt ist.

Art. 657 B. Erwerb / II. Erwerbsarten / 1. Übertragung

II. Erwerbsarten

1. Übertragung

1 Der Vertrag auf Eigentumsübertragung bedarf zu seiner Verbindlichkeit der öffentlichen Beurkundung.

2 Die Verfügung von Todes wegen und der Ehevertrag bedürfen der im Erbrecht und im ehelichen Güterrecht vorgeschriebenen Formen.

Art. 658 B. Erwerb / II. Erwerbsarten / 2. Aneignung

2. Aneignung

1 Die Aneignung eines im Grundbuch eingetragenen Grundstückes kann nur stattfinden, wenn dieses nach Ausweis des Grundbuches herrenlos ist.

2 Die Aneignung von Land, das nicht im Grundbuch aufgenommen ist, steht unter den Bestimmungen über die herrenlosen Sachen.

Art. 659 B. Erwerb / II. Erwerbsarten / 3. Bildung neuen Landes

3. Bildung neuen Landes

1 Entsteht durch Anschwemmung, Anschüttung, Bodenverschiebung, Veränderungen im Lauf oder Stand eines öffentlichen Gewässers oder in anderer Weise aus herrenlosem Boden der Ausbeutung fähiges Land, so gehört es dem Kanton, in dessen Gebiet es liegt.

2 Es steht den Kantonen frei, solches Land den Anstössern zu überlassen.

3 Vermag jemand nachzuweisen, dass Bodenteile seinem Eigentume entrissen worden sind, so kann er sie binnen angemessener Frist zurückholen.

Art. 660 B. Erwerb / II. Erwerbsarten / 4. Bodenverschiebung / a. im Allgemeinen

4. Bodenverschiebung

a. im Allgemeinen1

1 Bodenverschiebungen von einem Grundstück auf ein anderes bewirken keine Veränderung der Grenzen.

2 Bodenteile und andere Gegenstände, die hiebei von dem einen Grundstück auf das andere gelangt sind, unterliegen den Bestimmungen über die zugeführten Sachen oder die Sachverbindungen.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 4. Okt. 1991 über die Teilrevision des Zivilgesetzbuches (Immobiliarsachenrecht) und des Obligationenrechts (Grundstückkauf), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 660a1B. Erwerb / II. Erwerbsarten / 4. Bodenverschiebung / b. dauernde

b. dauernde

1 Der Grundsatz, wonach Bodenverschiebungen keine Änderung der Grenzen bewirken, gilt nicht für Gebiete mit dauernden Bodenverschiebungen, wenn diese Gebiete vom Kanton als solche bezeichnet worden sind.

2 Bei der Bezeichnung der Gebiete ist die Beschaffenheit der betroffenen Grundstücke zu berücksichtigen.

3 Die Zugehörigkeit eines Grundstücks zu einem solchen Gebiet ist in geeigneter Weise den Beteiligten mitzuteilen und im Grundbuch anzumerken.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 4. Okt. 1991 über die Teilrevision des Zivilgesetzbuches (Immobiliarsachenrecht) und des Obligationenrechts (Grundstückkauf), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 660b1B. Erwerb / II. Erwerbsarten / 4. Bodenverschiebung / c. Neufestsetzung der Grenze

c. Neufestsetzung der Grenze

1 Wird eine Grenze wegen einer Bodenverschiebung unzweckmässig, so kann jeder betroffene Grundeigentümer verlangen, dass sie neu festgesetzt wird.

2 Ein Mehr- oder Minderwert ist auszugleichen.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 4. Okt. 1991 über die Teilrevision des Zivilgesetzbuches (Immobiliarsachenrecht) und des Obligationenrechts (Grundstückkauf), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 661 B. Erwerb / II. Erwerbsarten / 5. Ersitzung / a. Ordentliche Ersitzung

5. Ersitzung

a. Ordentliche Ersitzung

Ist jemand ungerechtfertigt im Grundbuch als Eigentümer eingetragen, so kann sein Eigentum, nachdem er das Grundstück in gutem Glauben zehn Jahre lang ununterbrochen und unangefochten besessen hat, nicht mehr angefochten werden.

Art. 662 B. Erwerb / II. Erwerbsarten / 5. Ersitzung / b. Ausserordentliche Ersitzung

b. Ausserordentliche Ersitzung

1 Besitzt jemand ein Grundstück, das nicht im Grundbuch aufgenommen ist, ununterbrochen und unangefochten während 30 Jahren als sein Eigentum, so kann er verlangen, dass er als Eigentümer eingetragen werde.

2 Unter den gleichen Voraussetzungen steht dieses Recht dem Besitzer eines Grundstückes zu, dessen Eigentümer aus dem Grundbuch nicht ersichtlich ist oder bei Beginn der Ersitzungsfrist von 30 Jahren tot oder für verschollen erklärt war.

3 Die Eintragung darf jedoch nur auf Verfügung des Gerichts erfolgen, nachdem binnen einer durch amtliche Auskündung angesetzten Frist kein Einspruch erhoben oder der erfolgte Einspruch abgewiesen worden ist.

Art. 663 B. Erwerb / II. Erwerbsarten / 5. Ersitzung / c. Fristen

c. Fristen

Für die Berechnung der Fristen, die Unterbrechung und den Stillstand der Ersitzung finden die Vorschriften über die Verjährung von Forderungen entsprechende Anwendung.

Art. 664 B. Erwerb / II. Erwerbsarten / 6. Herrenlose und öffentliche Sachen

6. Herrenlose und öffentliche Sachen

1 Die herrenlosen und die öffentlichen Sachen stehen unter der Hoheit des Staates, in dessen Gebiet sie sich befinden.

2 An den öffentlichen Gewässern sowie an dem der Kultur nicht fähigen Lande, wie Felsen und Schutthalden, Firnen und Gletschern, und den daraus entspringenden Quellen besteht unter Vorbehalt anderweitigen Nachweises kein Privateigentum.

3 Das kantonale Recht stellt über die Aneignung des herrenlosen Landes, die Ausbeutung und den Gemeingebrauch der öffentlichen Sachen, wie der Strassen und Plätze, Gewässer und Flussbetten die erforderlichen Bestimmungen auf.

Art. 665 B. Erwerb / III. Recht auf Eintragung

III. Recht auf Eintragung

1 Der Erwerbsgrund gibt dem Erwerber gegen den Eigentümer einen persönlichen Anspruch auf Eintragung und bei Weigerung des Eigentümers das Recht auf gerichtliche Zusprechung des Eigentums.

2 Bei Aneignung, Erbgang, Enteignung, Zwangsvollstreckung oder Urteil des Gerichts kann der Erwerber die Eintragung von sich aus erwirken.

3 Änderungen am Grundeigentum, die von Gesetzes wegen durch Gütergemeinschaft oder deren Auflösung eintreten, werden auf Anmeldung eines Ehegatten hin im Grundbuch eingetragen.1


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 5. Okt. 1984, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 666 C. Verlust

C. Verlust

1 Das Grundeigentum geht unter mit der Löschung des Eintrages sowie mit dem vollständigen Untergang des Grundstückes.

2 Der Zeitpunkt, auf den im Falle der Enteignung der Verlust eintritt, wird durch das Enteignungsrecht des Bundes und der Kantone bestimmt.

Art. 666a1D. Richterliche Massnahmen / I. Bei unauffindbarem Eigentümer

D. Richterliche Massnahmen

I. Bei unauffindbarem Eigentümer

1 Lässt sich der im Grundbuch eingetragene Eigentümer nicht identifizieren, ist sein Wohnort unbekannt oder ist von einem oder mehreren seiner Erben der Name oder Wohnort unbekannt, so kann das Gericht auf Antrag die erforderlichen Massnahmen anordnen.
2 Insbesondere kann das Gericht einen Vertreter ernennen. Es legt auf Antrag den Umfang der Vertretungsmacht fest. Bestimmt es nichts anderes, so beschränkt sich diese auf erhaltende Massnahmen.

3 Antrag auf Anordnung von Massnahmen stellen kann:

1.
jede Person, die ein schutzwürdiges Interesse hat;
2.
das Grundbuchamt am Ort des Grundstücks.

4 Die Anordnung von Massnahmen unterbricht die Frist für eine ausserordentliche Ersitzung nicht.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 666b1D. Richterliche Massnahmen / II. Bei Fehlen der vorgeschriebenen Organe

II. Bei Fehlen der vorgeschriebenen Organe

Verfügt eine im Grundbuch als Eigentümerin eingetragene juristische Person oder andere Rechtsträgerin nicht mehr über die vorgeschriebenen Organe, so kann jede Person, die ein schutzwürdiges Interesse hat, oder das Grundbuchamt am Ort des Grundstücks dem Gericht beantragen, die erforderlichen grundstücksbezogenen Massnahmen anzuordnen.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).


  Zweiter Abschnitt: Inhalt und Beschränkung des Grundeigentums

Art. 667 A. Inhalt / I. Umfang

A. Inhalt

I. Umfang

1 Das Eigentum an Grund und Boden erstreckt sich nach oben und unten auf den Luftraum und das Erdreich, soweit für die Ausübung des Eigentums ein Interesse besteht.

2 Es umfasst unter Vorbehalt der gesetzlichen Schranken alle Bauten und Pflanzen sowie die Quellen.

Art. 668 A. Inhalt / II. Abgrenzung / 1. Art der Abgrenzung

II. Abgrenzung

1. Art der Abgrenzung

1 Die Grenzen werden durch die Grundbuchpläne und durch die Abgrenzungen auf dem Grundstücke selbst angegeben.

2 Widersprechen sich die bestehenden Grundbuchpläne und die Abgrenzungen, so wird die Richtigkeit der Grundbuchpläne vermutet.

3 Die Vermutung gilt nicht für die vom Kanton bezeichneten Gebiete mit Bodenverschiebungen.1


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 4. Okt. 1991 über die Teilrevision des Zivilgesetzbuches (Immobiliarsachenrecht) und des Obligationenrechts (Grundstückkauf), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 669 A. Inhalt / II. Abgrenzung / 2. Abgrenzungspflicht

2. Abgrenzungspflicht

Jeder Grundeigentümer ist verpflichtet, auf das Begehren seines Nachbarn zur Feststellung einer ungewissen Grenze mitzuwirken, sei es bei Berichtigung der Grundbuchpläne oder bei Anbringung von Grenzzeichen.

Art. 670 A. Inhalt / II. Abgrenzung / 3. Miteigentum an Vorrichtungen zur Abgrenzung

3. Miteigentum an Vorrichtungen zur Abgrenzung

Stehen Vorrichtungen zur Abgrenzung zweier Grundstücke, wie Mauern, Hecken, Zäune, auf der Grenze, so wird Miteigentum der beiden Nachbarn vermutet.

Art. 671 A. Inhalt / III. Bauten auf dem Grundstück / 1. Boden- und Baumaterial / a. Eigentumsverhältnis

III. Bauten auf dem Grundstück

1. Boden- und Baumaterial

a. Eigentumsverhältnis

1 Verwendet jemand zu einem Bau auf seinem Boden fremdes Material oder eigenes Material auf fremdem Boden, so wird es Bestandteil des Grundstückes.

2 Der Eigentümer des Materials ist jedoch, wenn die Verwendung ohne seinen Willen stattgefunden hat, berechtigt, auf Kosten des Grundeigentümers die Trennung des Materials und dessen Herausgabe zu verlangen, insoweit dies ohne unverhältnismässige Schädigung möglich ist.

3 Unter der gleichen Voraussetzung kann der Grundeigentümer, wenn die Verwendung ohne seinen Willen stattgefunden hat, auf Kosten des Bauenden die Wegschaffung des Materials verlangen.

Art. 672 A. Inhalt / III. Bauten auf dem Grundstück / 1. Boden- und Baumaterial / b. Ersatz

b. Ersatz

1 Findet keine Trennung des Materials vom Boden statt, so hat der Grundeigentümer für das Material eine angemessene Entschädigung zu leisten.

2 Bei bösem Glauben des bauenden Grundeigentümers kann das Gericht auf vollen Schadenersatz erkennen.

3 Bei bösem Glauben des bauenden Materialeigentümers kann es auch nur dasjenige zusprechen, was der Bau für den Grundeigentümer allermindestens wert ist.

Art. 673 A. Inhalt / III. Bauten auf dem Grundstück / 1. Boden- und Baumaterial / c. Zuweisung des Grundeigentums

c. Zuweisung des Grundeigentums

Übersteigt der Wert des Baues offenbar den Wert des Bodens, so kann derjenige, der sich in gutem Glauben befindet, verlangen, dass das Eigentum an Bau und Boden gegen angemessene Entschädigung dem Materialeigentümer zugewiesen werde.

Art. 674 A. Inhalt / III. Bauten auf dem Grundstück / 2. Überragende Bauten

2. Überragende Bauten

1 Bauten und andere Vorrichtungen, die von einem Grundstücke auf ein anderes überragen, verbleiben Bestandteil des Grundstückes, von dem sie ausgehen, wenn dessen Eigentümer auf ihren Bestand ein dingliches Recht hat.

2 Das Recht auf den Überbau kann als Dienstbarkeit in das Grundbuch eingetragen werden.

3 Ist ein Überbau unberechtigt, und erhebt der Verletzte, trotzdem dies für ihn erkennbar geworden ist, nicht rechtzeitig Einspruch, so kann, wenn es die Umstände rechtfertigen, dem Überbauenden, der sich in gutem Glauben befindet, gegen angemessene Entschädigung das dingliche Recht auf den Überbau oder das Eigentum am Boden zugewiesen werden.

Art. 675 A. Inhalt / III. Bauten auf dem Grundstück / 3. Baurecht

3. Baurecht

1 Bauwerke und andere Vorrichtungen, die auf fremdem Boden eingegraben, aufgemauert oder sonstwie dauernd auf oder unter der Bodenfläche mit dem Grundstücke verbunden sind, können einen besonderen Eigentümer haben, wenn ihr Bestand als Dienstbarkeit in das Grundbuch eingetragen ist.

2 Die Bestellung eines Baurechtes an einzelnen Stockwerken eines Gebäudes ist ausgeschlossen.

Art. 676 A. Inhalt / III. Bauten auf dem Grundstück / 4. Leitungen

4. Leitungen

1 Leitungen zur Versorgung und Entsorgung, die sich ausserhalb des Grundstücks befinden, dem sie dienen, gehören, wo es nicht anders geordnet ist, dem Eigentümer des Werks und zum Werk, von dem sie ausgehen oder dem sie zugeführt werden.1

2 Soweit nicht das Nachbarrecht Anwendung findet, erfolgt die dingliche Belastung der fremden Grundstücke mit solchen Leitungen durch die Errichtung einer Dienstbarkeit.

3 Die Dienstbarkeit entsteht mit der Erstellung der Leitung, wenn diese äusserlich wahrnehmbar ist. Andernfalls entsteht sie mit der Eintragung in das Grundbuch.2


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 677 A. Inhalt / III. Bauten auf dem Grundstück / 5. Fahrnisbauten

5. Fahrnisbauten

1 Hütten, Buden, Baracken u. dgl. behalten, wenn sie ohne Absicht bleibender Verbindung auf fremdem Boden aufgerichtet sind, ihren besondern Eigentümer.

2 Ihr Bestand wird nicht in das Grundbuch eingetragen.

Art. 678 A. Inhalt / IV. Einpflanzungen auf dem Grundstück

IV. Einpflanzungen auf dem Grundstück

1 Verwendet jemand fremde Pflanzen auf eigenem Grundstücke, oder eigene Pflanzen auf fremdem Grundstücke, so entstehen die gleichen Rechte und Pflichten, wie beim Verwenden von Baumaterial oder bei Fahrnisbauten.

2 Eine dem Baurecht entsprechende Dienstbarkeit für einzelne Pflanzen und Anlagen von Pflanzen kann auf mindestens zehn und auf höchstens 100 Jahre errichtet werden.1

3 Der belastete Eigentümer kann vor Ablauf der vereinbarten Dauer die Ablösung der Dienstbarkeit verlangen, wenn er mit dem Dienstbarkeitsberechtigten einen Pachtvertrag über die Nutzung des Bodens abgeschlossen hat und dieser Vertrag beendigt wird. Das Gericht bestimmt die vermögensrechtlichen Folgen unter Würdigung aller Umstände.2


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 20. Juni 2003, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2004 (AS 2003 4121; BBl 2002 4721).
2 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 20. Juni 2003, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2004 (AS 2003 4121; BBl 2002 4721).

Art. 679 A. Inhalt / V. Verantwortlichkeit des Grundeigentümers / 1. Bei Überschreitung des Eigentumsrechts

V. Verantwortlichkeit des Grundeigentümers

1. Bei Überschreitung des Eigentumsrechts1

1 Wird jemand dadurch, dass ein Grundeigentümer sein Eigentumsrecht überschreitet, geschädigt oder mit Schaden bedroht, so kann er auf Beseitigung der Schädigung oder auf Schutz gegen drohenden Schaden und auf Schadenersatz klagen.

2 Entzieht eine Baute oder eine Einrichtung einem Nachbargrundstück bestimmte Eigenschaften, so bestehen die vorstehend genannten Ansprüche nur, wenn bei der Erstellung der Baute oder Einrichtung die damals geltenden Vorschriften nicht eingehalten wurden.2


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 679a1A. Inhalt / V. Verantwortlichkeit des Grundeigentümers / 2. Bei rechtmässiger Bewirtschaftung des Grundstücks

2. Bei rechtmässiger Bewirtschaftung des Grundstücks

Fügt ein Grundeigentümer bei rechtmässiger Bewirtschaftung seines Grundstücks, namentlich beim Bauen, einem Nachbarn vorübergehend übermässige und unvermeidliche Nachteile zu und verursacht er dadurch einen Schaden, so kann der Nachbar vom Grundeigentümer lediglich Schadenersatz verlangen.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 680 B. Beschränkungen / I. Im Allgemeinen

B. Beschränkungen

I. Im Allgemeinen

1 Die gesetzlichen Eigentumsbeschränkungen bestehen ohne Eintrag im Grundbuch.

2 Ihre Aufhebung oder Abänderung durch Rechtsgeschäft bedarf zur Gültigkeit der öffentlichen Beurkundung und der Eintragung in das Grundbuch.

3 Ausgeschlossen ist die Aufhebung oder Abänderung von Eigentumsbeschränkungen öffentlich-rechtlichen Charakters.

Art. 6811B. Beschränkungen / II. Veräusserungsbeschränkungen; gesetzliche Vorkaufsrechte / 1. Grundsätze

II. Veräusserungsbeschränkungen; gesetzliche Vorkaufsrechte

1. Grundsätze

1 Gesetzliche Vorkaufsrechte können auch bei der Zwangsversteigerung ausgeübt werden, aber nur an der Steigerung selbst und zu den Bedingungen, zu welchen das Grundstück dem Ersteigerer zugeschlagen wird; im übrigen können die gesetzlichen Vorkaufsrechte unter den Voraussetzungen geltend gemacht werden, die für die vertraglichen Vorkaufsrechte gelten.

2 Das Vorkaufsrecht entfällt, wenn das Grundstück an eine Person veräussert wird, der ein Vorkaufsrecht im gleichen oder in einem vorderen Rang zusteht.

3 Gesetzliche Vorkaufsrechte können weder vererbt noch abgetreten werden. Sie gehen den vertraglichen Vorkaufsrechten vor.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 4. Okt. 1991 über die Teilrevision des Zivilgesetzbuches (Immobiliarsachenrecht) und des Obligationenrechts (Grundstückkauf), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 681a1B. Beschränkungen / II. Veräusserungsbeschränkungen; gesetzliche Vorkaufsrechte / 2. Ausübung

2. Ausübung

1 Der Verkäufer muss die Vorkaufsberechtigten über den Abschluss und den Inhalt des Kaufvertrags in Kenntnis setzen.

2 Will der Vorkaufsberechtigte sein Recht ausüben, so muss er es innert dreier Monate seit Kenntnis von Abschluss und Inhalt des Vertrages geltend machen. Nach Ablauf von zwei Jahren seit der Eintragung des neuen Eigentümers in das Grundbuch kann das Recht nicht mehr geltend gemacht werden.

3 Der Vorkaufsberechtigte kann seinen Anspruch innerhalb dieser Fristen gegenüber jedem Eigentümer des Grundstücks geltend machen.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 4. Okt. 1991 über die Teilrevision des Zivilgesetzbuches (Immobiliarsachenrecht) und des Obligationenrechts (Grundstückkauf), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 681b1B. Beschränkungen / II. Veräusserungsbeschränkungen; gesetzliche Vorkaufsrechte / 3. Abänderung, Verzicht

3. Abänderung, Verzicht

1 Die Vereinbarung, mit welcher ein gesetzliches Vorkaufsrecht ausgeschlossen oder abgeändert wird, bedarf zu ihrer Gültigkeit der öffentlichen Beurkundung. Sie kann im Grundbuch vorgemerkt werden, wenn das Vorkaufsrecht dem jeweiligen Eigentümer eines andern Grundstücks zusteht.

2 Nach Eintritt des Vorkaufsfalls kann der Berechtigte schriftlich auf die Ausübung eines gesetzlichen Vorkaufsrechts verzichten.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 4. Okt. 1991 über die Teilrevision des Zivilgesetzbuches (Immobiliarsachenrecht) und des Obligationenrechts (Grundstückkauf), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 6821B. Beschränkungen / II. Veräusserungsbeschränkungen; gesetzliche Vorkaufsrechte / 4. Im Miteigentums- und im Baurechtsverhältnis

4. Im Miteigentums- und im Baurechtsverhältnis2

1 Miteigentümer haben ein Vorkaufsrecht gegenüber jedem Nichtmiteigentümer, der einen Anteil erwirbt. Machen mehrere Miteigentümer ihr Vorkaufsrecht geltend, so wird ihnen der Anteil im Verhältnis ihrer bisherigen Miteigentumsanteile zugewiesen.3

2 Ein Vorkaufsrecht gegenüber jedem Erwerber haben auch der Eigentümer eines Grundstückes, das mit einem selbständigen und dauernden Baurecht belastet ist, an diesem Recht und der Inhaber dieses Rechts am belasteten Grundstück, soweit dieses durch die Ausübung seines Rechtes in Anspruch genommen wird.

3...4


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 19. Dez. 1963, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 4. Okt. 1991 über die Teilrevision des Zivilgesetzbuches (Immobiliarsachenrecht) und des Obligationenrechts (Grundstückkauf), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).
3 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 4. Okt. 1991 über die Teilrevision des Zivilgesetzbuches (Immobiliarsachenrecht) und des Obligationenrechts (Grundstückkauf), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).
4 Aufgehoben durch Ziff. I des BG vom 4. Okt. 1991 über die Teilrevision des Zivilgesetzbuches (Immobiliarsachenrecht) und des Obligationenrechts (Grundstückkauf), mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 682a1B. Beschränkungen / II. Veräusserungsbeschränkungen; gesetzliche Vorkaufsrechte / 5. Vorkaufsrecht an landwirtschaftlichen Gewerben und Grundstücken

5. Vorkaufsrecht an landwirtschaftlichen Gewerben und Grundstücken

Für die Vorkaufsrechte an landwirtschaftlichen Gewerben und Grundstücken gilt zudem das Bundesgesetz vom 4. Oktober 19912 über das bäuerliche Bodenrecht.


1 Eingefügt durch Art. 92 Ziff. 1 des BG vom 4. Okt. 1991 über das bäuerliche Bodenrecht, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1410; BBl 1988 III 953).
2 SR 211.412.11

Art. 6831

1 Aufgehoben durch Ziff. I des BG vom 4. Okt. 1991 über die Teilrevision des Zivilgesetzbuches (Immobiliarsachenrecht) und des Obligationenrechts (Grundstückkauf), mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 684 B. Beschränkungen / III. Nachbarrecht / 1. Übermässige Einwirkungen

III. Nachbarrecht

1. Übermässige Einwirkungen1

1 Jedermann ist verpflichtet, bei der Ausübung seines Eigentums, wie namentlich bei dem Betrieb eines Gewerbes auf seinem Grundstück, sich aller übermässigen Einwirkung auf das Eigentum der Nachbarn zu enthalten.

2 Verboten sind insbesondere alle schädlichen und nach Lage und Beschaffenheit der Grundstücke oder nach Ortsgebrauch nicht gerechtfertigten Einwirkungen durch Luftverunreinigung, üblen Geruch, Lärm, Schall, Erschütterung, Strahlung oder durch den Entzug von Besonnung oder Tageslicht.2


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 685 B. Beschränkungen / III. Nachbarrecht / 2. Graben und Bauen / a. Regel

2. Graben und Bauen

a. Regel

1 Bei Grabungen und Bauten darf der Eigentümer die nachbarlichen Grundstücke nicht dadurch schädigen, dass er ihr Erdreich in Bewegung bringt oder gefährdet oder vorhandene Vorrichtungen beeinträchtigt.

2 Auf Bauten, die den Vorschriften des Nachbarrechtes zuwiderlaufen, finden die Bestimmungen betreffend überragende Bauten Anwendung.

Art. 686 B. Beschränkungen / III. Nachbarrecht / 2. Graben und Bauen / b. Kantonale Vorschriften

b. Kantonale Vorschriften

1 Die Kantone sind befugt, die Abstände festzusetzen, die bei Grabungen und Bauten zu beobachten sind.

2 Es bleibt ihnen vorbehalten, weitere Bauvorschriften aufzustellen.

Art. 687 B. Beschränkungen / III. Nachbarrecht / 3. Pflanzen / a. Regel

3. Pflanzen

a. Regel

1 Überragende Äste und eindringende Wurzeln kann der Nachbar, wenn sie sein Eigentum schädigen und auf seine Beschwerde hin nicht binnen angemessener Frist beseitigt werden, kappen und für sich behalten.

2 Duldet ein Grundeigentümer das Überragen von Ästen auf bebauten oder überbauten Boden, so hat er ein Recht auf die an ihnen wachsenden Früchte (Anries).

3 Auf Waldgrundstücke, die aneinander grenzen, finden diese Vorschriften keine Anwendung.

Art. 688 B. Beschränkungen / III. Nachbarrecht / 3. Pflanzen / b. Kantonale Vorschriften

b. Kantonale Vorschriften

Die Kantone sind befugt, für Anpflanzungen je nach der Art des Grundstückes und der Pflanzen bestimmte Abstände vom nachbarlichen Grundstück vorzuschreiben oder den Grundeigentümer zu verpflichten, das Übergreifen von Ästen oder Wurzeln fruchttragender Bäume zu gestatten und für diese Fälle das Anries zu regeln oder aufzuheben.

Art. 689 B. Beschränkungen / III. Nachbarrecht / 4. Wasserablauf

4. Wasserablauf

1 Jeder Grundeigentümer ist verpflichtet, das Wasser, das von dem oberhalb liegenden Grundstück natürlicherweise abfliesst, aufzunehmen, wie namentlich Regenwasser, Schneeschmelze und Wasser von Quellen, die nicht gefasst sind.

2 Keiner darf den natürlichen Ablauf zum Schaden des Nachbarn verändern.

3 Das für das untere Grundstück nötige Abwasser darf diesem nur insoweit entzogen werden, als es für das obere Grundstück unentbehrlich ist.

Art. 690 B. Beschränkungen / III. Nachbarrecht / 5. Entwässerungen

5. Entwässerungen

1 Bei Entwässerungen hat der Eigentümer des unterhalb liegenden Grundstückes das Wasser, das ihm schon vorher auf natürliche Weise zugeflossen ist, ohne Entschädigung abzunehmen.

2 Wird er durch die Zuleitung geschädigt, so kann er verlangen, dass der obere Eigentümer die Leitung auf eigene Kosten durch das untere Grundstück weiter führe.

Art. 691 B. Beschränkungen / III. Nachbarrecht / 6. Durchleitungen / a. Pflicht zur Duldung

6. Durchleitungen

a. Pflicht zur Duldung

1 Jeder Grundeigentümer ist verpflichtet, die Durchleitung von Röhren und Leitungen zur Versorgung und Entsorgung gegen volle Entschädigung zu gestatten, wenn ein anderes Grundstück sonst nicht oder nur mit unverhältnismässigen Kosten erschlossen werden kann.1

2 Das Recht auf Durchleitung aus Nachbarrecht kann in den Fällen nicht beansprucht werden, in denen das kantonale Recht oder das Bundesrecht auf den Weg der Enteignung verweist.

3 Verlangt es der Berechtigte oder der Belastete, so werden die Durchleitungen auf Kosten des Berechtigten als Dienstbarkeit in das Grundbuch eingetragen. Das Durchleitungsrecht kann einem gutgläubigen Erwerber auch ohne Eintragung entgegengehalten werden.2


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 692 B. Beschränkungen / III. Nachbarrecht / 6. Durchleitungen / b. Wahrung der Interessen des Belasteten

b. Wahrung der Interessen des Belasteten

1 Der belastete Grundeigentümer hat Anspruch darauf, dass auf seine Interessen in billiger Weise Rücksicht genommen werde.

2 Wo ausserordentliche Umstände es rechtfertigen, kann er bei oberirdischen Leitungen verlangen, dass ihm das Stück Land, über das diese Leitungen geführt werden sollen, in angemessenem Umfange gegen volle Entschädigung abgenommen werde.

Art. 693 B. Beschränkungen / III. Nachbarrecht / 6. Durchleitungen / c. Änderung der Verhältnisse

c. Änderung der Verhältnisse

1 Ändern sich die Verhältnisse, so kann der Belastete eine seinen Interessen entsprechende Verlegung der Leitung verlangen.

2 Die Kosten der Verlegung hat in der Regel der Berechtigte zu tragen.

3 Wo besondere Umstände es rechtfertigen, kann jedoch ein angemessener Teil der Kosten dem Belasteten auferlegt werden.

Art. 694 B. Beschränkungen / III. Nachbarrecht / 7. Wegrechte / a. Notweg

7. Wegrechte

a. Notweg

1 Hat ein Grundeigentümer keinen genügenden Weg von seinem Grundstück auf eine öffentliche Strasse, so kann er beanspruchen, dass ihm die Nachbarn gegen volle Entschädigung einen Notweg einräumen.

2 Der Anspruch richtet sich in erster Linie gegen den Nachbarn, dem die Gewährung des Notweges der früheren Eigentums- und Wegeverhältnisse wegen am ehesten zugemutet werden darf, und im weitern gegen denjenigen, für den der Notweg am wenigsten schädlich ist.

3 Bei der Festsetzung des Notweges ist auf die beidseitigen Interessen Rücksicht zu nehmen.

Art. 695 B. Beschränkungen / III. Nachbarrecht / 7. Wegrechte / b. Andere Wegrechte

b. Andere Wegrechte

Den Kantonen bleibt es vorbehalten, über die Befugnis des Grundeigentümers, zum Zwecke der Bewirtschaftung oder Vornahme von Ausbesserungen und Bauten das nachbarliche Grundstück zu betreten, sowie über das Streck- oder Tretrecht, den Tränkweg, Winterweg, Brachweg, Holzlass, Reistweg u. dgl. nähere Vorschriften aufzustellen.

Art. 696 B. Beschränkungen / III. Nachbarrecht / 7. Wegrechte / c. Anmerkung im Grundbuch

c. Anmerkung im Grundbuch

1 Wegrechte, die das Gesetz unmittelbar begründet, bestehen ohne Eintragung zu Recht.

2 Sie werden jedoch, wenn sie von bleibendem Bestande sind, im Grundbuche angemerkt.

Art. 697 B. Beschränkungen / III. Nachbarrecht / 8. Einfriedigung

8. Einfriedigung

1 Die Kosten der Einfriedigung eines Grundstückes trägt dessen Eigentümer, unter Vorbehalt der Bestimmungen über das Miteigentum an Grenzvorrichtungen.

2 In Bezug auf die Pflicht und die Art der Einfriedigung bleibt das kantonale Recht vorbehalten.

Art. 698 B. Beschränkungen / III. Nachbarrecht / 9. Unterhaltspflicht

9. Unterhaltspflicht

An die Kosten der Vorrichtungen zur Ausübung der nachbarrechtlichen Befugnisse haben die Grundeigentümer im Verhältnis ihres Interesses beizutragen.

Art. 699 B. Beschränkungen / IV. Recht auf Zutritt und Abwehr / 1. Zutritt

IV. Recht auf Zutritt und Abwehr

1. Zutritt

1 Das Betreten von Wald und Weide und die Aneignung wildwachsender Beeren, Pilze u. dgl. sind in ortsüblichem Umfange jedermann gestattet, soweit nicht im Interesse der Kulturen seitens der zuständigen Behörde einzelne bestimmt umgrenzte Verbote erlassen werden.

2 Über das Betreten fremden Eigentums zur Ausübung von Jagd und Fischerei kann das kantonale Recht nähere Vorschriften aufstellen.

Art. 700 B. Beschränkungen / IV. Recht auf Zutritt und Abwehr / 2. Wegschaffung zugeführter Sachen u. dgl.

2. Wegschaffung zugeführter Sachen u. dgl.

1 Werden Sachen durch Wasser, Wind, Lawinen oder andere Naturgewalt oder zufällige Ereignisse auf ein fremdes Grundstück gebracht, oder geraten Tiere, wie Gross- und Kleinvieh, Bienenschwärme, Geflügel und Fische auf fremden Boden, so hat der Grundeigentümer dem Berechtigten deren Aufsuchung und Wegschaffung zu gestatten.

2 Für den hieraus entstehenden Schaden kann er Ersatz verlangen und hat hiefür an diesen Sachen ein Retentionsrecht.

Art. 701 B. Beschränkungen / IV. Recht auf Zutritt und Abwehr / 3. Abwehr von Gefahr und Schaden

3. Abwehr von Gefahr und Schaden

1 Kann jemand einen drohenden Schaden oder eine gegenwärtige Gefahr nur dadurch von sich oder andern abwenden, dass er in das Grundeigentum eines Dritten eingreift, so ist dieser verpflichtet, den Eingriff zu dulden, sobald Gefahr oder Schaden ungleich grösser sind als die durch den Eingriff entstehende Beeinträchtigung.

2 Für den hieraus entstehenden Schaden ist angemessener Ersatz zu leisten.

Art. 702 B. Beschränkungen / V. Öffentlichrechtliche Beschränkungen / 1. Im Allgemeinen

V. Öffentlichrechtliche Beschränkungen

1. Im Allgemeinen

Dem Bunde, den Kantonen und den Gemeinden bleibt es vorbehalten, Beschränkungen des Grundeigentums zum allgemeinen Wohl aufzustellen, wie namentlich betreffend die Bau—, Feuer- und Gesundheitspolizei, das Forst- und Strassenwesen, den Reckweg, die Errichtung von Grenzmarken und Vermessungszeichen, die Bodenverbesserungen, die Zerstückelung der Güter, die Zusammenlegung von ländlichen Fluren und von Baugebiet, die Erhaltung von Altertümern und Naturdenkmälern, die Sicherung der Landschaften und Aussichtspunkte vor Verunstaltung und den Schutz von Heilquellen.

Art. 7031B. Beschränkungen / V. Öffentlichrechtliche Beschränkungen / 2. Bodenverbesserungen

2. Bodenverbesserungen

1 Können Bodenverbesserungen, wie Gewässerkorrektionen, Entwässerungen, Bewässerungen, Aufforstungen, Weganlagen, Güterzusammenlegungen u. dgl. nur durch ein gemeinschaftliches Unternehmen ausgeführt werden, und hat die Mehrheit der beteiligten Grundeigentümer, denen zugleich mehr als die Hälfte des beteiligten Bodens gehört, dem Unternehmen zugestimmt, so sind die übrigen Grundeigentümer zum Beitritt verpflichtet. Die an der Beschlussfassung nicht mitwirkenden Grundeigentümer gelten als zustimmend. Der Beitritt ist im Grundbuch anzumerken.

2 Die Kantone ordnen das Verfahren. Sie haben insbesondere für Güterzusammenlegungen eine einlässliche Ordnung zu treffen.

3 Die kantonale Gesetzgebung kann die Durchführung solcher Bodenverbesserungen noch weiter erleichtern und die entsprechenden Vorschriften auf Baugebiete und Gebiete mit dauernden Bodenverschiebungen anwendbar erklären.2


1 Fassung gemäss Art. 121 des Landwirtschaftsgesetzes, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1954 (AS 1953 1073; BBl 1951 I 130).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 4. Okt. 1991 über die Teilrevision des Zivilgesetzbuches (Immobiliarsachenrecht) und des Obligationenrechts (Grundstückkauf), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 704 C. Rechte an Quellen und Brunnen / I. Quelleneigentum und Quellenrecht

C. Rechte an Quellen und Brunnen

I. Quelleneigentum und Quellenrecht

1 Quellen sind Bestandteile der Grundstücke und können nur zugleich mit dem Boden, dem sie entspringen, zu Eigentum erworben werden.

2 Das Recht an Quellen auf fremdem Boden wird als Dienstbarkeit durch Eintragung in das Grundbuch begründet.

3 Das Grundwasser ist den Quellen gleichgestellt.

Art. 705 C. Rechte an Quellen und Brunnen / II. Ableitung von Quellen

II. Ableitung von Quellen

1 Durch das kantonale Recht kann zur Wahrung des allgemeinen Wohles die Fortleitung von Quellen geordnet, beschränkt oder untersagt werden.

2 Ergeben sich hieraus Anstände unter Kantonen, so entscheidet darüber endgültig der Bundesrat.

Art. 706 C. Rechte an Quellen und Brunnen / III. Abgraben von Quellen / 1. Schadenersatz

III. Abgraben von Quellen

1. Schadenersatz

1 Werden Quellen und Brunnen, die in erheblicher Weise benutzt oder zum Zwecke der Verwertung gefasst worden sind, zum Nachteil des Eigentümers oder Nutzungsberechtigten durch Bauten, Anlagen oder Vorkehrungen anderer Art abgegraben, beeinträchtigt oder verunreinigt, so kann dafür Schadenersatz verlangt werden.

2 Ist der Schaden weder absichtlich noch fahrlässig zugefügt oder trifft den Beschädigten selbst ein Verschulden, so bestimmt das Gericht nach seinem Ermessen, ob, in welchem Umfange und in welcher Weise Ersatz zu leisten ist.

Art. 707 C. Rechte an Quellen und Brunnen / III. Abgraben von Quellen / 2. Wiederherstellung

2. Wiederherstellung

1 Werden Quellen und Brunnen, die für die Bewirtschaftung oder Bewohnung eines Grundstückes oder für Trinkwasserversorgungen unentbehrlich sind, abgegraben oder verunreinigt, so kann, soweit überhaupt möglich, die Wiederherstellung des früheren Zustandes verlangt werden.

2 In den andern Fällen kann diese Wiederherstellung nur verlangt werden, wo besondere Umstände sie rechtfertigen.

Art. 708 C. Rechte an Quellen und Brunnen / IV. Quellengemeinschaft

IV. Quellengemeinschaft

1 Bilden benachbarte Quellen verschiedener Eigentümer als Ausfluss eines gemeinsamen Sammelgebietes zusammen eine Quellengruppe, so kann jeder Eigentümer beantragen, dass sie gemeinschaftlich gefasst und den Berechtigten im Verhältnis der bisherigen Quellenstärke zugeleitet werden.

2 Die Kosten der gemeinschaftlichen Anlage tragen die Berechtigten im Verhältnis ihres Interesses.

3 Widersetzt sich einer der Berechtigten, so ist jeder von ihnen zur ordnungsgemässen Fassung und Ableitung seiner Quelle auch dann befugt, wenn die Stärke der anderen Quellen dadurch beeinträchtigt wird, und hat hiefür nur insoweit Ersatz zu leisten, als seine Quelle durch die neuen Vorrichtungen verstärkt worden ist.

Art. 709 C. Rechte an Quellen und Brunnen / V. Benutzung von Quellen

V. Benutzung von Quellen

Den Kantonen bleibt es vorbehalten, zu bestimmen, in welchem Umfange Quellen, Brunnen und Bäche, die sich in Privateigentum befinden, auch von den Nachbarn und von andern Personen zum Wasserholen, Tränken u. dgl. benutzt werden dürfen.

Art. 710 C. Rechte an Quellen und Brunnen / VI. Notbrunnen

VI. Notbrunnen

1 Entbehrt ein Grundstück des für Haus und Hof notwendigen Wassers und lässt sich dieses ohne ganz unverhältnismässige Mühe und Kosten nicht von anderswo herleiten, so kann der Eigentümer vom Nachbarn, der ohne eigene Not ihm solches abzugeben vermag, gegen volle Entschädigung die Abtretung eines Anteils an Brunnen oder Quellen verlangen.

2 Bei der Festsetzung des Notbrunnens ist vorzugsweise auf das Interesse des zur Abgabe Verpflichteten Rücksicht zu nehmen.

3 Ändern sich die Verhältnisse, so kann eine Abänderung der getroffenen Ordnung verlangt werden.

Art. 711 C. Rechte an Quellen und Brunnen / VII. Pflicht zur Abtretung / 1. Des Wassers

VII. Pflicht zur Abtretung

1. Des Wassers

1 Sind Quellen, Brunnen oder Bäche ihrem Eigentümer von keinem oder im Verhältnis zu ihrer Verwertbarkeit von ganz geringem Nutzen, so kann vom Eigentümer verlangt werden, dass er sie gegen volle Entschädigung für Trinkwasserversorgungen, Hydrantenanlagen oder andere Unternehmungen des allgemeinen Wohles abtrete.

2 Diese Entschädigung kann in der Zuleitung von Wasser aus der neuen Anlage bestehen.

Art. 712 C. Rechte an Quellen und Brunnen / VII. Pflicht zur Abtretung / 2. Des Bodens

2. Des Bodens

Eigentümer von Trinkwasserversorgungen können auf dem Wege der Enteignung die Abtretung des umliegenden Bodens verlangen, soweit es zum Schutz ihrer Quellen gegen Verunreinigung notwendig ist.


  Dritter Abschnitt:1  Das Stockwerkeigentum

Art. 712a A. Inhalt und Gegenstand / I. Inhalt

A. Inhalt und Gegenstand

I. Inhalt

1 Stockwerkeigentum ist der Miteigentumsanteil an einem Grundstück, der dem Miteigentümer das Sonderrecht gibt, bestimmte Teile eines Gebäudes ausschliesslich zu benutzen und innen auszubauen.

2 Der Stockwerkeigentümer ist in der Verwaltung, Benutzung und baulichen Ausgestaltung seiner eigenen Räume frei, darf jedoch keinem anderen Stockwerkeigentümer die Ausübung des gleichen Rechtes erschweren und die gemeinschaftlichen Bauteile, Anlagen und Einrichtungen in keiner Weise beschädigen oder in ihrer Funktion und äusseren Erscheinung beeinträchtigen.

3 Er ist verpflichtet, seine Räume so zu unterhalten, wie es zur Erhaltung des Gebäudes in einwandfreiem Zustand und gutem Aussehen erforderlich ist.

Art. 712b A. Inhalt und Gegenstand / II. Gegenstand

II. Gegenstand

1 Gegenstand des Sonderrechts können einzelne Stockwerke oder Teile von Stockwerken sein, die als Wohnungen oder als Einheiten von Räumen zu geschäftlichen oder anderen Zwecken mit eigenem Zugang in sich abgeschlossen sein müssen, aber getrennte Nebenräume umfassen können.

2 Dem Stockwerkeigentümer können nicht zu Sonderrecht zugeschieden werden:

1.
der Boden der Liegenschaft und das Baurecht, kraft dessen gegebenenfalls das Gebäude erstellt wird;
2.
die Bauteile, die für den Bestand, die konstruktive Gliederung und Festigkeit des Gebäudes oder der Räume anderer Stockwerkeigentümer von Bedeutung sind oder die äussere Gestalt und das Aussehen des Gebäudes bestimmen;
3.
die Anlagen und Einrichtungen, die auch den andern Stockwerkeigentümern für die Benutzung ihrer Räume dienen.

3 Andere Bestandteile des Gebäudes können im Begründungsakt und in gleicher Form auch durch nachherige Vereinbarung der Stockwerkeigentümer als gemeinschaftlich erklärt werden; ist dies nicht geschehen, so gilt die Vermutung, dass sie zu Sonderrecht ausgeschieden sind.

Art. 712c A. Inhalt und Gegenstand / III. Verfügung

III. Verfügung

1 Von Gesetzes wegen hat der Stockwerkeigentümer kein Vorkaufsrecht gegenüber jedem Dritten, der einen Anteil erwirbt, doch kann es im Begründungsakt oder durch nachherige Vereinbarung errichtet und im Grundbuch vorgemerkt werden.

2 In gleicher Weise kann bestimmt werden, dass die Veräusserung eines Stockwerkes, dessen Belastung mit einer Nutzniessung oder einem Wohnrecht sowie die Vermietung nur rechtsgültig ist, wenn die übrigen Stockwerkeigentümer dagegen nicht auf Grund eines von ihnen gefassten Beschlusses binnen 14 Tagen seit der ihnen gemachten Mitteilung Einsprache erhoben haben.

3 Die Einsprache ist unwirksam, wenn sie ohne wichtigen Grund erhoben worden ist.1


1 Fassung gemäss Anhang 1 Ziff. II 3 der Zivilprozessordnung vom 19. Dez. 2008, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 712d B. Begründung und Untergang / I. Begründungsakt

B. Begründung und Untergang

I. Begründungsakt

1 Das Stockwerkeigentum wird durch Eintragung im Grundbuch begründet.

2 Die Eintragung kann verlangt werden:

1.
auf Grund eines Vertrages der Miteigentümer über die Ausgestaltung ihrer Anteile zu Stockwerkeigentum;
2.
auf Grund einer Erklärung des Eigentümers der Liegenschaft oder des Inhabers eines selbständigen und dauernden Baurechtes über die Bildung von Miteigentumsanteilen und deren Ausgestaltung zu Stockwerkeigentum.

3 Das Rechtsgeschäft bedarf zu seiner Gültigkeit der öffentlichen Beurkundung oder, wenn es eine Verfügung von Todes wegen oder ein Erbteilungsvertrag ist, der im Erbrecht vorgeschriebenen Form.

Art. 712e B. Begründung und Untergang / II. Räumliche Ausscheidung und Wertquoten

II. Räumliche Ausscheidung und Wertquoten1

1 Im Begründungsakt sind die räumliche Ausscheidung und der Anteil jedes Stockwerks am Wert der Liegenschaft oder des Baurechts in Bruchteilen mit einem gemeinsamen Nenner anzugeben.2

2 Änderungen der Wertquoten bedürfen der Zustimmung aller unmittelbar Beteiligten und der Genehmigung der Versammlung der Stockwerkeigentümer; doch hat jeder Stockwerkeigentümer Anspruch auf Berichtigung, wenn seine Quote aus Irrtum unrichtig festgesetzt wurde oder infolge von baulichen Veränderungen des Gebäudes oder seiner Umgebung unrichtig geworden ist.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 712f B. Begründung und Untergang / III. Untergang

III. Untergang

1 Das Stockwerkeigentum endigt mit dem Untergang der Liegenschaft oder des Baurechtes und mit der Löschung im Grundbuch.

2 Die Löschung kann auf Grund einer Aufhebungsvereinbarung und ohne solche von einem Stockwerkeigentümer, der alle Anteile in seiner Hand vereinigt, verlangt werden, bedarf jedoch der Zustimmung der an den einzelnen Stockwerken dinglich berechtigten Personen, deren Rechte nicht ohne Nachteil auf das ganze Grundstück übertragen werden können.

3 Die Aufhebung kann von jedem Stockwerkeigentümer verlangt werden, wenn das Gebäude:

1.
zu mehr als der Hälfte des Wertes zerstört und der Wiederaufbau nicht ohne eine für ihn schwer tragbare Belastung möglich ist; oder
2.
seit mehr als 50 Jahren in Stockwerkeigentum aufgeteilt ist und wegen des schlechten baulichen Zustandes nicht mehr bestimmungsgemäss genutzt werden kann.1

4 Die Stockwerkeigentümer, welche die Gemeinschaft fortsetzen wollen, können die Aufhebung durch Abfindung der übrigen abwenden.2


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 712g C. Verwaltung und Benutzung / I. Die anwendbaren Bestimmungen

C. Verwaltung und Benutzung

I. Die anwendbaren Bestimmungen

1 Für die Zuständigkeit zu Verwaltungshandlungen und baulichen Massnahmen gelten die Bestimmungen über das Miteigentum.

2 Soweit diese Bestimmungen es nicht selber ausschliessen, können sie durch eine andere Ordnung ersetzt werden, jedoch nur im Begründungsakt oder mit einstimmigem Beschluss aller Stockwerkeigentümer.

3 Im übrigen kann jeder Stockwerkeigentümer verlangen, dass ein Reglement über die Verwaltung und Benutzung aufgestellt und im Grundbuch angemerkt werde, das zu seiner Verbindlichkeit der Annahme durch Beschluss mit der Mehrheit der Stockwerkeigentümer, die zugleich zu mehr als der Hälfte anteilsberechtigt ist, bedarf und mit dieser Mehrheit, auch wenn es im Begründungsvertrag aufgestellt worden ist, geändert werden kann.

4 Eine Änderung der reglementarischen Zuteilung ausschliesslicher Nutzungsrechte bedarf zudem der Zustimmung der direkt betroffenen Stockwerkeigentümer.1


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 712h C. Verwaltung und Benutzung / II. Gemeinschaftliche Kosten und Lasten / 1. Bestand und Verteilung

II. Gemeinschaftliche Kosten und Lasten

1. Bestand und Verteilung

1 Die Stockwerkeigentümer haben an die Lasten des gemeinschaftlichen Eigentums und an die Kosten der gemeinschaftlichen Verwaltung Beiträge nach Massgabe ihrer Wertquoten zu leisten.

2 Solche Lasten und Kosten sind namentlich:

1.
die Auslagen für den laufenden Unterhalt, für Reparaturen und Erneuerungen der gemeinschaftlichen Teile des Grundstückes und Gebäudes sowie der gemeinschaftlichen Anlagen und Einrichtungen;
2.
die Kosten der Verwaltungstätigkeit einschliesslich der Entschädigung des Verwalters;
3.
die den Stockwerkeigentümern insgesamt auferlegten öffentlich-rechtlichen Beiträge und Steuern;
4.
die Zins- und Amortisationszahlungen an Pfandgläubiger, denen die Liegenschaft haftet oder denen sich die Stockwerkeigentümer solidarisch verpflichtet haben.

3 Dienen bestimmte gemeinschaftliche Bauteile, Anlagen oder Einrichtungen einzelnen Stockwerkeinheiten nicht oder nur in ganz geringem Masse, so ist dies bei der Verteilung der Kosten zu berücksichtigen.

Art. 712i C. Verwaltung und Benutzung / II. Gemeinschaftliche Kosten und Lasten / 2. Haftung für Beiträge / a. Gesetzliches Pfandrecht

2. Haftung für Beiträge

a. Gesetzliches Pfandrecht

1 Die Gemeinschaft hat für die auf die letzten drei Jahre entfallenden Beitragsforderungen Anspruch gegenüber jedem jeweiligen Stockwerkeigentümer auf Errichtung eines Pfandrechtes an dessen Anteil.

2 Die Eintragung kann vom Verwalter oder, wenn ein solcher nicht bestellt ist, von jedem dazu durch Mehrheitsbeschluss oder durch das Gericht ermächtigten Stockwerkeigentümer und vom Gläubiger, für den die Beitragsforderung gepfändet ist, verlangt werden.

3 Im Übrigen sind die Bestimmungen über die Errichtung des Bauhandwerkerpfandrechts sinngemäss anwendbar.

Art. 712k C. Verwaltung und Benutzung / II. Gemeinschaftliche Kosten und Lasten / 2. Haftung für Beiträge / b. Retentionsrecht

b. Retentionsrecht

Die Gemeinschaft hat für die auf die letzten drei Jahre entfallenden Beitragsforderungen an den beweglichen Sachen, die sich in den Räumen eines Stockwerkeigentümers befinden und zu deren Einrichtung oder Benutzung gehören, ein Retentionsrecht wie ein Vermieter.

Art. 712l C. Verwaltung und Benutzung / III. Handlungsfähigkeit der Gemeinschaft

III. Handlungsfähigkeit der Gemeinschaft

1 Unter ihrem eigenen Namen erwirbt die Gemeinschaft das sich aus ihrer Verwaltungstätigkeit ergebende Vermögen, wie namentlich die Beitragsforderungen und die aus ihnen erzielten verfügbaren Mittel, wie den Erneuerungsfonds.

2 Die Gemeinschaft der Stockwerkeigentümer kann unter ihrem Namen klagen und betreiben sowie beklagt und betrieben werden.1


1 Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 2 des Gerichtsstandsgesetzes vom 24. März 2000, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).

Art. 712m D. Organisation / I. Versammlung der Stockwerkeigentümer / 1. Zuständigkeit und rechtliche Stellung

D. Organisation

I. Versammlung der Stockwerkeigentümer

1. Zuständigkeit und rechtliche Stellung

1 Ausser den in andern Bestimmungen genannten hat die Versammlung der Stockwerkeigentümer insbesondere die folgenden Befugnisse:

1.
in allen Verwaltungsangelegenheiten, die nicht dem Verwalter zustehen, zu entscheiden;
2.
den Verwalter zu bestellen und die Aufsicht über dessen Tätigkeit zu führen;
3.
einen Ausschuss oder einen Abgeordneten zu wählen, dem sie Verwaltungsangelegenheiten übertragen kann, wie namentlich die Aufgabe, dem Verwalter beratend zur Seite zu stehen, dessen Geschäftsführung zu prüfen und der Versammlung darüber Bericht zu erstatten und Antrag zu stellen;
4.
jährlich den Kostenvoranschlag, die Rechnung und die Verteilung der Kosten unter den Eigentümern zu genehmigen;
5.
über die Schaffung eines Erneuerungsfonds für Unterhalts- und Erneuerungsarbeiten zu befinden;
6.
das Gebäude gegen Feuer und andere Gefahren zu versichern und die üblichen Haftpflichtversicherungen abzuschliessen, ferner den Stockwerkeigentümer, der seine Räume mit ausserordentlichen Aufwendungen baulich ausgestaltet hat, zur Leistung eines zusätzlichen Prämienanteils zu verpflichten, wenn er nicht eine Zusatzversicherung auf eigene Rechnung abschliesst.

2 Soweit das Gesetz nicht besondere Bestimmungen enthält, finden auf die Versammlung der Stockwerkeigentümer und auf den Ausschuss die Vorschriften über die Organe des Vereins und über die Anfechtung von Vereinsbeschlüssen Anwendung.

Art. 712n D. Organisation / I. Versammlung der Stockwerkeigentümer / 2. Einberufung und Leitung

2. Einberufung und Leitung

1 Die Versammlung der Stockwerkeigentümer wird vom Verwalter einberufen und geleitet, wenn sie nicht anders beschlossen hat.

2 Die Beschlüsse sind zu protokollieren, und das Protokoll ist vom Verwalter oder von dem den Vorsitz führenden Stockwerkeigentümer aufzubewahren.

Art. 712o D. Organisation / I. Versammlung der Stockwerkeigentümer / 3. Ausübung des Stimmrechtes

3. Ausübung des Stimmrechtes

1 Mehrere Personen, denen ein Stockwerk gemeinschaftlich zusteht, haben nur eine Stimme, die sie durch einen Vertreter abgeben.

2 Ebenso haben sich der Eigentümer und der Nutzniesser eines Stockwerkes über die Ausübung des Stimmrechtes zu verständigen, ansonst der Nutzniesser in allen Fragen der Verwaltung mit Ausnahme der bloss nützlichen oder der Verschönerung und Bequemlichkeit dienenden baulichen Massnahmen als stimmberechtigt gilt.

Art. 712p D. Organisation / I. Versammlung der Stockwerkeigentümer / 4. Beschlussfähigkeit

4. Beschlussfähigkeit

1 Die Versammlung der Stockwerkeigentümer ist beschlussfähig, wenn die Hälfte aller Stockwerkeigentümer, die zugleich zur Hälfte anteilsberechtigt ist, mindestens aber zwei Stockwerkeigentümer, anwesend oder vertreten sind.

2 Für den Fall der ungenügenden Beteiligung ist eine zweite Versammlung einzuberufen, die nicht vor Ablauf von zehn Tagen seit der ersten stattfinden darf.

3 Die zweite Versammlung ist beschlussfähig, wenn der dritte Teil aller Stockwerkeigentümer, mindestens aber zwei, anwesend oder vertreten sind.

Art. 712q D. Organisation / II. Der Verwalter / 1. Bestellung

II. Der Verwalter

1. Bestellung

1 Kommt die Bestellung des Verwalters durch die Versammlung der Stockwerkeigentümer nicht zustande, so kann jeder Stockwerkeigentümer die Ernennung des Verwalters durch das Gericht verlangen.

2 Das gleiche Recht steht auch demjenigen zu, der ein berechtigtes Interesse daran hat, wie dem Pfandgläubiger und dem Versicherer.

Art. 712r D. Organisation / II. Der Verwalter / 2. Abberufung

2. Abberufung

1 Durch Beschluss der Versammlung der Stockwerkeigentümer kann der Verwalter unter Vorbehalt allfälliger Entschädigungsansprüche jederzeit abberufen werden.

2 Lehnt die Versammlung der Stockwerkeigentümer die Abberufung des Verwalters unter Missachtung wichtiger Gründe ab, so kann jeder Stockwerkeigentümer binnen Monatsfrist die gerichtliche Abberufung verlangen.

3 Ein Verwalter, der vom Gericht eingesetzt wurde, kann ohne dessen Bewilligung vor Ablauf der Zeit, für die er eingesetzt ist, nicht abberufen werden.

Art. 712s D. Organisation / II. Der Verwalter / 3. Aufgaben / a. Ausführung der Bestimmungen und Beschlüsse über die Verwaltung und Benutzung

3. Aufgaben

a. Ausführung der Bestimmungen und Beschlüsse über die Verwaltung und Benutzung

1 Der Verwalter vollzieht alle Handlungen der gemeinschaftlichen Verwaltung gemäss den Vorschriften des Gesetzes und des Reglementes sowie gemäss den Beschlüssen der Versammlung der Stockwerkeigentümer und trifft von sich aus alle dringlichen Massnahmen zur Abwehr oder Beseitigung von Schädigungen.

2 Er verteilt die gemeinschaftlichen Kosten und Lasten auf die einzelnen Stockwerkeigentümer, stellt ihnen Rechnung, zieht ihre Beiträge ein und besorgt die Verwaltung und bestimmungsgemässe Verwendung der vorhandenen Geldmittel.

3 Er wacht darüber, dass in der Ausübung der Sonderrechte und in der Benutzung der gemeinschaftlichen Teile des Grundstückes und Gebäudes sowie der gemeinschaftlichen Einrichtungen die Vorschriften des Gesetzes, des Reglementes und der Hausordnung befolgt werden.

Art. 712t D. Organisation / II. Der Verwalter / 3. Aufgaben / b. Vertretung nach aussen

b. Vertretung nach aussen

1 Der Verwalter vertritt in allen Angelegenheiten der gemeinschaftlichen Verwaltung, die in den Bereich seiner gesetzlichen Aufgaben fallen, sowohl die Gemeinschaft als auch die Stockwerkeigentümer nach aussen.

2 Zur Führung eines anzuhebenden oder vom Gegner eingeleiteten Zivilprozesses bedarf der Verwalter ausserhalb des summarischen Verfahrens der vorgängigen Ermächtigung durch die Versammlung der Stockwerkeigentümer, unter Vorbehalt dringender Fälle, in denen die Ermächtigung nachgeholt werden kann.

3 An die Stockwerkeigentümer insgesamt gerichtete Erklärungen, Aufforderungen, Urteile und Verfügungen können durch Zustellung an den Verwalter an seinem Wohnsitz oder am Ort der gelegenen Sache wirksam mitgeteilt werden.


  Zwanzigster Titel: Das Fahrniseigentum

Art. 713 A. Gegenstand

A. Gegenstand

Gegenstand des Fahrniseigentums sind die ihrer Natur nach beweglichen körperlichen Sachen sowie die Naturkräfte, die der rechtlichen Herrschaft unterworfen werden können und nicht zu den Grundstücken gehören.

Art. 714 B. Erwerbsarten / I. Übertragung / 1. Besitzübergang

B. Erwerbsarten

I. Übertragung

1. Besitzübergang

1 Zur Übertragung des Fahrniseigentums bedarf es des Überganges des Besitzes auf den Erwerber.

2 Wer in gutem Glauben eine bewegliche Sache zu Eigentum übertragen erhält, wird, auch wenn der Veräusserer zur Eigentumsübertragung nicht befugt ist, deren Eigentümer, sobald er nach den Besitzesregeln im Besitze der Sache geschützt ist.

Art. 715 B. Erwerbsarten / I. Übertragung / 2. Eigentumsvorbehalt / a. Im Allgemeinen

2. Eigentumsvorbehalt

a. Im Allgemeinen

1 Der Vorbehalt des Eigentums an einer dem Erwerber übertragenen beweglichen Sache ist nur dann wirksam, wenn er an dessen jeweiligem Wohnort in einem vom Betreibungsbeamten zu führenden öffentlichen Register eingetragen ist.

2 Beim Viehhandel ist jeder Eigentumsvorbehalt ausgeschlossen.

Art. 716 B. Erwerbsarten / I. Übertragung / 2. Eigentumsvorbehalt / b. Bei Abzahlungsgeschäften

b. Bei Abzahlungsgeschäften

Gegenstände, die mit Eigentumsvorbehalt übertragen worden sind, kann der Eigentümer nur unter der Bedingung zurückverlangen, dass er die vom Erwerber geleisteten Abzahlungen unter Abzug eines angemessenen Mietzinses und einer Entschädigung für Abnützung zurückerstattet.

Art. 717 B. Erwerbsarten / I. Übertragung / 3. Erwerb ohne Besitz

3. Erwerb ohne Besitz

1 Bleibt die Sache infolge eines besondern Rechtsverhältnisses beim Veräusserer, so ist der Eigentumsübergang Dritten gegenüber unwirksam, wenn damit ihre Benachteiligung oder eine Umgehung der Bestimmungen über das Faustpfand beabsichtigt worden ist.

2 Das Gericht entscheidet hierüber nach seinem Ermessen.

Art. 718 B. Erwerbsarten / II. Aneignung / 1. Herrenlose Sachen

II. Aneignung

1. Herrenlose Sachen

Eine herrenlose Sache wird dadurch zu Eigentum erworben, dass jemand sie mit dem Willen, ihr Eigentümer zu werden, in Besitz nimmt.

Art. 719 B. Erwerbsarten / II. Aneignung / 2. Herrenlos werdende Tiere

2. Herrenlos werdende Tiere

1 Gefangene Tiere werden herrenlos, wenn sie die Freiheit wieder erlangen und ihr Eigentümer ihnen nicht unverzüglich und ununterbrochen nachforscht und sie wieder einzufangen bemüht ist.

2 Gezähmte Tiere werden herrenlos, sobald sie wieder in den Zustand der Wildheit geraten und nicht mehr zu ihrem Herrn zurückkehren.

3 Bienenschwärme werden dadurch, dass sie auf fremden Boden gelangen, nicht herrenlos.

Art. 720 B. Erwerbsarten / III. Fund / 1. Bekanntmachung, Nachfrage / a. Im Allgemeinen

III. Fund

1. Bekanntmachung, Nachfrage

a. Im Allgemeinen1

1 Wer eine verlorene Sache findet, hat den Eigentümer davon zu benachrichtigen und, wenn er ihn nicht kennt, entweder der Polizei den Fund anzuzeigen oder selbst für eine den Umständen angemessene Bekanntmachung und Nachfrage zu sorgen.

2 Zur Anzeige an die Polizei ist er verpflichtet, wenn der Wert der Sache offenbar 10 Franken übersteigt.

3 Wer eine Sache in einem bewohnten Hause oder in einer dem öffentlichen Gebrauch oder Verkehr dienenden Anstalt findet, hat sie dem Hausherrn, Mieter oder den mit der Aufsicht betrauten Personen abzuliefern.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 4. Okt. 2002 (Grundsatzartikel Tiere), in Kraft seit 1. April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806).

Art. 720a1B. Erwerbsarten / III. Fund / 1. Bekanntmachung, Nachfrage / b. Bei Tieren

b. Bei Tieren

1 Wer ein verlorenes Tier findet, hat unter Vorbehalt von Artikel 720 Absatz 3 den Eigentümer davon zu benachrichtigen und, wenn er ihn nicht kennt, den Fund anzuzeigen.

2 Die Kantone bezeichnen die Stelle, welcher der Fund anzuzeigen ist.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 4. Okt. 2002 (Grundsatzartikel Tiere), in Kraft seit 1. April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806). Abs. 2 wird auf den 1. April 2004 in Kraft gesetzt.

Art. 721 B. Erwerbsarten / III. Fund / 2. Aufbewahrung, Versteigerung

2. Aufbewahrung, Versteigerung

1 Die gefundene Sache ist in angemessener Weise aufzubewahren.

2 Sie darf mit Genehmigung der zuständigen Behörde nach vorgängiger Auskündung öffentlich versteigert werden, wenn sie einen kostspieligen Unterhalt erfordert oder raschem Verderben ausgesetzt ist, oder wenn die Polizei oder eine öffentliche Anstalt sie schon länger als ein Jahr aufbewahrt hat.

3 Der Steigerungserlös tritt an die Stelle der Sache.

Art. 722 B. Erwerbsarten / III. Fund / 3. Eigentumserwerb, Herausgabe

3. Eigentumserwerb, Herausgabe

1 Wer seinen Pflichten als Finder nachkommt, erwirbt, wenn während fünf Jahren von der Bekanntmachung oder Anzeige an der Eigentümer nicht festgestellt werden kann, die Sache zu Eigentum.

1bis Bei Tieren, die im häuslichen Bereich und nicht zu Vermögens- oder Erwerbszwecken gehalten werden, beträgt die Frist zwei Monate.1

1ter Vertraut der Finder das Tier einem Tierheim mit dem Willen an, den Besitz daran endgültig aufzugeben, so kann das Tierheim nach Ablauf von zwei Monaten, seitdem ihm das Tier anvertraut wurde, frei über das Tier verfügen.2

2 Wird die Sache zurückgegeben, so hat der Finder Anspruch auf Ersatz aller Auslagen sowie auf einen angemessenen Finderlohn.

3 Bei Fund in einem bewohnten Hause oder in einer dem öffentlichen Gebrauch oder Verkehr dienenden Anstalt wird der Hausherr, der Mieter oder die Anstalt als Finder betrachtet, hat aber keinen Finderlohn zu beanspruchen.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 4. Okt. 2002 (Grundsatzartikel Tiere), in Kraft seit 1. April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806).
2 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 4. Okt. 2002 (Grundsatzartikel Tiere), in Kraft seit 1. April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806).

Art. 723 B. Erwerbsarten / III. Fund / 4. Schatz

4. Schatz

1 Wird ein Wertgegenstand aufgefunden, von dem nach den Umständen mit Sicherheit anzunehmen ist, dass er seit langer Zeit vergraben oder verborgen war und keinen Eigentümer mehr hat, so wird er als Schatz angesehen.

2 Der Schatz fällt unter Vorbehalt der Bestimmung über Gegenstände von wissenschaftlichem Wert an den Eigentümer des Grundstückes oder der beweglichen Sache, in der er aufgefunden worden ist.

3 Der Finder hat Anspruch auf eine angemessene Vergütung, die jedoch die Hälfte des Wertes des Schatzes nicht übersteigen darf.

Art. 724 B. Erwerbsarten / III. Fund / 5. Wissenschaftliche Gegenstände

5. Wissenschaftliche Gegenstände

1 Herrenlose Naturkörper oder Altertümer von wissenschaftlichem Wert sind Eigentum des Kantons, in dessen Gebiet sie gefunden worden sind.1

1bis Ohne Genehmigung der zuständigen kantonalen Behörden können solche Sachen nicht veräussert werden. Sie können weder ersessen noch gutgläubig erworben werden. Der Herausgabeanspruch verjährt nicht.2

2 Der Eigentümer, in dessen Grundstück solche Gegenstände aufgefunden werden, ist verpflichtet, ihre Ausgrabung zu gestatten gegen Ersatz des dadurch verursachten Schadens.

3 Der Finder und im Falle des Schatzes auch der Eigentümer haben Anspruch auf eine angemessene Vergütung, die jedoch den Wert der Gegenstände nicht übersteigen soll.


1 Fassung gemäss Art. 32 Ziff. 1 des Kulturgütertransfergesetzes vom 20. Juni 2003, in Kraft seit 1. Juni 2005 (AS 2005 1869; BBl 2002 535).
2 Eingefügt durch Art. 32 Ziff. 1 des Kulturgütertransfergesetzes vom 20. Juni 2003, in Kraft seit 1. Juni 2005 (AS 2005 1869; BBl 2002 535).

Art. 725 B. Erwerbsarten / IV. Zuführung

IV. Zuführung

1 Werden jemandem durch Wasser, Wind, Lawinen oder andere Naturgewalt oder zufällige Ereignisse bewegliche Sachen zugeführt, oder geraten fremde Tiere in seinen Gewahrsam, so hat er die Rechte und Pflichten eines Finders.

2 Fliegt ein Bienenschwarm in einen fremden bevölkerten Bienenstock, so fällt er ohne Entschädigungspflicht dem Eigentümer dieses Stockes zu.

Art. 726 B. Erwerbsarten / V. Verarbeitung

V. Verarbeitung

1 Hat jemand eine fremde Sache verarbeitet oder umgebildet, so gehört die neue Sache, wenn die Arbeit kostbarer ist als der Stoff, dem Verarbeiter, andernfalls dem Eigentümer des Stoffes.

2 Hat der Verarbeiter nicht in gutem Glauben gehandelt, so kann das Gericht, auch wenn die Arbeit kostbarer ist, die neue Sache dem Eigentümer des Stoffes zusprechen.

3 Vorbehalten bleiben die Ansprüche auf Schadenersatz und aus Bereicherung.

Art. 727 B. Erwerbsarten / VI. Verbindung und Vermischung

VI. Verbindung und Vermischung

1 Werden bewegliche Sachen verschiedener Eigentümer so miteinander vermischt oder verbunden, dass sie ohne wesentliche Beschädigung oder unverhältnismässige Arbeit und Auslagen nicht mehr getrennt werden können, so entsteht für die Beteiligten Miteigentum an der neuen Sache, und zwar nach dem Werte, den die einzelnen Teile zur Zeit der Verbindung haben.

2 Wird eine bewegliche Sache mit einer andern derart vermischt oder verbunden, dass sie als deren nebensächlicher Bestandteil erscheint, so gehört die ganze Sache dem Eigentümer des Hauptbestandteiles.

3 Vorbehalten bleiben die Ansprüche auf Schadenersatz und aus Bereicherung.

Art. 728 B. Erwerbsarten / VII. Ersitzung

VII. Ersitzung

1 Hat jemand eine fremde bewegliche Sache ununterbrochen und unangefochten während fünf Jahren in gutem Glauben als Eigentum in seinem Besitze, so wird er durch Ersitzung Eigentümer.

1bis Bei Tieren, die im häuslichen Bereich und nicht zu Vermögens- oder Erwerbszwecken gehalten werden, beträgt die Frist zwei Monate.1

1ter Unter Vorbehalt gesetzlicher Ausnahmen beträgt die Ersitzungsfrist für Kulturgüter im Sinne von Artikel 2 Absatz 1 des Kulturgütertransfergesetzes vom 20. Juni 20032 30 Jahre.3

2 Unfreiwilliger Verlust des Besitzes unterbricht die Ersitzung nicht, wenn der Besitzer binnen Jahresfrist oder mittels einer während dieser Frist erhobenen Klage die Sache wieder erlangt.

3 Für die Berechnung der Fristen, die Unterbrechung und den Stillstand der Ersitzung finden die Vorschriften über die Verjährung von Forderungen entsprechende Anwendung.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 4. Okt. 2002 (Grundsatzartikel Tiere), in Kraft seit 1. April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806).
2 SR 444.1
3 Eingefügt durch Art. 32 Ziff. 1 des Kulturgütertransfergesetzes vom 20. Juni 2003, in Kraft seit 1. Juni 2005 (AS 2005 1869; BBl 2002 535).

Art. 729 C. Verlust

C. Verlust

Das Fahrniseigentum geht, trotz Verlust des Besitzes, erst dadurch unter, dass der Eigentümer sein Recht aufgibt, oder dass in der Folge ein anderer das Eigentum erwirbt.


  Zweite Abteilung: Die beschränkten dinglichen Rechte

  Einundzwanzigster Titel: Die Dienstbarkeiten und Grundlasten

  Erster Abschnitt: Die Grunddienstbarkeiten

Art. 730 A. Gegenstand

A. Gegenstand

1 Ein Grundstück kann zum Vorteil eines andern Grundstückes in der Weise belastet werden, dass sein Eigentümer sich bestimmte Eingriffe des Eigentümers dieses andern Grundstückes gefallen lassen muss oder zu dessen Gunsten nach gewissen Richtungen sein Eigentumsrecht nicht ausüben darf.

2 Eine Verpflichtung zur Vornahme von Handlungen kann mit der Grunddienstbarkeit nur nebensächlich verbunden sein. Für den Erwerber des berechtigten oder belasteten Grundstücks ist eine solche Verpflichtung nur verbindlich, wenn sie sich aus dem Eintrag im Grundbuch ergibt.1


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 731 B. Errichtung und Untergang / I. Errichtung / 1. Eintragung

B. Errichtung und Untergang

I. Errichtung

1. Eintragung

1 Zur Errichtung einer Grunddienstbarkeit bedarf es der Eintragung in das Grundbuch.

2 Für Erwerb und Eintragung gelten, soweit es nicht anders geordnet ist, die Bestimmungen über das Grundeigentum.

3 Die Ersitzung ist nur zu Lasten von Grundstücken möglich, an denen das Eigentum ersessen werden kann.

Art. 7321B. Errichtung und Untergang / I. Errichtung / 2. Rechtsgeschäft

2. Rechtsgeschäft

1 Das Rechtsgeschäft über Errichtung einer Grunddienstbarkeit bedarf zu seiner Gültigkeit der öffentlichen Beurkundung.

2 Beschränkt sich die Ausübung einer Dienstbarkeit auf einen Teil des Grundstücks und ist die örtliche Lage im Rechtsgrundausweis nicht genügend bestimmbar umschrieben, so ist sie in einem Auszug des Planes für das Grundbuch zeichnerisch darzustellen.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 733 B. Errichtung und Untergang / I. Errichtung / 3. Errichtung zu eigenen Lasten

3. Errichtung zu eigenen Lasten

Der Eigentümer ist befugt, auf seinem Grundstück zugunsten eines andern ihm gehörigen Grundstückes eine Dienstbarkeit zu errichten.

Art. 734 B. Errichtung und Untergang / II. Untergang / 1. Im Allgemeinen

II. Untergang

1. Im Allgemeinen

Jede Grunddienstbarkeit geht unter mit der Löschung des Eintrages sowie mit dem vollständigen Untergang des belasteten oder des berechtigten Grundstückes.

Art. 735 B. Errichtung und Untergang / II. Untergang / 2. Vereinigung

2. Vereinigung

1 Wird der Berechtigte Eigentümer des belasteten Grundstückes, so kann er die Dienstbarkeit löschen lassen.

2 Solange die Löschung nicht erfolgt ist, bleibt die Dienstbarkeit als dingliches Recht bestehen.

Art. 736 B. Errichtung und Untergang / II. Untergang / 3. Ablösung durch das Gericht

3. Ablösung durch das Gericht

1 Hat eine Dienstbarkeit für das berechtigte Grundstück alles Interesse verloren, so kann der Belastete ihre Löschung verlangen.

2 Ist ein Interesse des Berechtigten zwar noch vorhanden, aber im Vergleich zur Belastung von unverhältnismässig geringer Bedeutung, so kann die Dienstbarkeit gegen Entschädigung ganz oder teilweise abgelöst werden.

Art. 737 C. Inhalt / I. Umfang / 1. Im Allgemeinen

C. Inhalt

I. Umfang

1. Im Allgemeinen

1 Der Berechtigte ist befugt, alles zu tun, was zur Erhaltung und Ausübung der Dienstbarkeit nötig ist.

2 Er ist jedoch verpflichtet, sein Recht in möglichst schonender Weise auszuüben.

3 Der Belastete darf nichts vornehmen, was die Ausübung der Dienstbarkeit verhindert oder erschwert.

Art. 738 C. Inhalt / I. Umfang / 2. Nach dem Eintrag

2. Nach dem Eintrag

1 Soweit sich Rechte und Pflichten aus dem Eintrage deutlich ergeben, ist dieser für den Inhalt der Dienstbarkeit massgebend.

2 Im Rahmen des Eintrages kann sich der Inhalt der Dienstbarkeit aus ihrem Erwerbsgrund oder aus der Art ergeben, wie sie während längerer Zeit unangefochten und in gutem Glauben ausgeübt worden ist.

Art. 739 C. Inhalt / I. Umfang / 3. Bei verändertem Bedürfnis

3. Bei verändertem Bedürfnis

Ändern sich die Bedürfnisse des berechtigten Grundstückes, so darf dem Verpflichteten eine Mehrbelastung nicht zugemutet werden.

Art. 740 C. Inhalt / I. Umfang / 4. Nach kantonalem Recht und Ortsgebrauch

4. Nach kantonalem Recht und Ortsgebrauch

Der Inhalt der Wegrechte, wie Fussweg, gebahnter Weg, Fahrweg, Zelgweg, Winterweg, Holzweg, ferner der Weiderechte, Holzungsrechte, Tränkerechte, Wässerungsrechte u. dgl. wird, soweit sie für den einzelnen Fall nicht geordnet sind, durch das kantonale Recht und den Ortsgebrauch bestimmt.

Art. 740a1C. Inhalt / I. Umfang / 5. Bei mehreren Berechtigten

5. Bei mehreren Berechtigten

1 Sind mehrere Berechtigte gestützt auf dieselbe Dienstbarkeit an einer gemeinschaftlichen Vorrichtung beteiligt und ist nichts anderes vereinbart, so sind die für Miteigentümer geltenden Regelungen sinngemäss anwendbar.

2 Das Recht, durch Verzicht auf die Dienstbarkeit aus der Gemeinschaft auszuscheiden, kann durch Vereinbarung in der für den Dienstbarkeitsvertrag vorgesehenen Form auf höchstens 30 Jahre ausgeschlossen werden. Die Vereinbarung kann im Grundbuch vorgemerkt werden.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 741 C. Inhalt / II. Last des Unterhaltes

II. Last des Unterhaltes

1 Gehört zur Ausübung der Dienstbarkeit eine Vorrichtung, so hat sie der Berechtigte zu unterhalten.

2 Dient die Vorrichtung auch den Interessen des Belasteten, so tragen beide die Last des Unterhalts im Verhältnis ihrer Interessen. Eine abweichende Vereinbarung ist für den Erwerber des berechtigten und den Erwerber des belasteten Grundstücks verbindlich, wenn sie sich aus den Belegen des Grundbuchs erschliessen lässt.1


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 742 C. Inhalt / III. Verlegung der Belastung

III. Verlegung der Belastung1

1 Wird durch die Ausübung der Grunddienstbarkeit nur ein Teil des Grundstückes in Anspruch genommen, so kann der Eigentümer, wenn er ein Interesse nachweist und die Kosten übernimmt, die Verlegung auf eine andere, für den Berechtigten nicht weniger geeignete Stelle verlangen.

2 Hiezu ist er auch dann befugt, wenn die Dienstbarkeit im Grundbuch auf eine bestimmte Stelle gelegt worden ist.

3 ...2


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Aufgehoben durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 7431C. Inhalt / IV. Teilung eines Grundstücks

IV. Teilung eines Grundstücks

1 Wird das berechtigte oder das belastete Grundstück geteilt, so besteht die Dienstbarkeit auf allen Teilen weiter.

2 Beschränkt sich die Ausübung der Dienstbarkeit nach den Belegen oder den Umständen auf einzelne Teile, so ist sie auf den nicht betroffenen Teilen zu löschen.

3 Das Bereinigungsverfahren richtet sich nach den Vorschriften über die Löschung und Änderung der Grundbucheinträge.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 7441

1 Aufgehoben durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).


  Zweiter Abschnitt: Nutzniessung und andere Dienstbarkeiten

Art. 745 A. Nutzniessung / I. Gegenstand

A. Nutzniessung

I. Gegenstand

1 Die Nutzniessung kann an beweglichen Sachen, an Grundstücken, an Rechten oder an einem Vermögen bestellt werden.

2 Sie verleiht dem Berechtigten, wo es nicht anders bestimmt ist, den vollen Genuss des Gegenstandes.

3 Die Ausübung der Nutzniessung an einem Grundstück kann auf einen bestimmten Teil eines Gebäudes oder auf einen bestimmten Teil des Grundstücks beschränkt werden.1


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 20. Juni 2003, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2004 (AS 2003 4121; BBl 2002 4721).

Art. 746 A. Nutzniessung / II. Entstehung / 1. Im Allgemeinen

II. Entstehung

1. Im Allgemeinen

1 Zur Bestellung einer Nutzniessung ist bei beweglichen Sachen oder Forderungen die Übertragung auf den Erwerber und bei Grundstücken die Eintragung in das Grundbuch erforderlich.

2 Für den Erwerb bei beweglichen Sachen und bei Grundstücken sowie für die Eintragung gelten, soweit es nicht anders geordnet ist, die Bestimmungen über das Eigentum.

Art. 7471A. Nutzniessung / II. Entstehung / 2. ...

2. ...


1 Aufgehoben durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 5. Okt. 1984, mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 748 A. Nutzniessung / III. Untergang / 1. Gründe

III. Untergang

1. Gründe

1 Die Nutzniessung geht unter mit dem vollständigen Untergang ihres Gegenstandes und überdies bei Grundstücken mit der Löschung des Eintrages, wo dieser zur Bestellung notwendig war.

2 Andere Untergangsgründe, wie Zeitablauf, Verzicht oder Tod des Berechtigten, geben bei Grundstücken dem Eigentümer nur einen Anspruch auf Löschung des Eintrages.

3 Die gesetzliche Nutzniessung hört auf mit dem Wegfall ihres Grundes.

Art. 749 A. Nutzniessung / III. Untergang / 2. Dauer

2. Dauer

1 Die Nutzniessung endigt mit dem Tode des Berechtigten und für juristische Personen mit deren Auflösung.

2 Sie kann jedoch für diese höchstens 100 Jahre dauern.

Art. 750 A. Nutzniessung / III. Untergang / 3. Ersatz bei Untergang

3. Ersatz bei Untergang

1 Der Eigentümer ist nicht verpflichtet, die untergegangene Sache wieder herzustellen.

2 Stellt er sie her, so ist auch die Nutzniessung wieder hergestellt.

3 Wird für die untergegangene Sache ein Ersatz geleistet, wie bei der Enteignung und der Versicherung, so besteht die Nutzniessung an dem Ersatzgegenstande weiter.

Art. 751 A. Nutzniessung / III. Untergang / 4. Rückleistung / a. Pflicht

4. Rückleistung

a. Pflicht

Ist die Nutzniessung beendigt, so hat der Besitzer dem Eigentümer den Gegenstand zurückzugeben.

Art. 752 A. Nutzniessung / III. Untergang / 4. Rückleistung / b. Verantwortlichkeit

b. Verantwortlichkeit

1 Der Nutzniesser haftet für den Untergang und den Minderwert der Sache, insofern er nicht nachweist, dass dieser Schaden ohne sein Verschulden eingetreten ist.

2 Aufgebrauchte Gegenstände, deren Verbrauch nicht zur Nutzung gehört, hat er zu ersetzen.

3 Den Minderwert der Gegenstände, der durch den ordnungsgemässen Gebrauch der Sache eingetreten ist, hat er nicht zu ersetzen.

Art. 753 A. Nutzniessung / III. Untergang / 4. Rückleistung / c. Verwendungen

c. Verwendungen

1 Hat der Nutzniesser Verwendungen gemacht oder Neuerungen vorgenommen, zu denen er nicht verpflichtet war, so kann er bei der Rückleistung Ersatz verlangen wie ein Geschäftsführer ohne Auftrag.

2 Vorrichtungen, die er erstellt hat, für die ihm aber der Eigentümer keinen Ersatz leisten will, kann er wegnehmen, ist aber verpflichtet, den vorigen Stand wieder herzustellen.

Art. 754 A. Nutzniessung / III. Untergang / 5. Verjährung der Ersatzansprüche

5. Verjährung der Ersatzansprüche

Die Ersatzansprüche des Eigentümers wegen Veränderung oder Wertverminderung der Sache sowie die Ansprüche des Nutzniessers auf Ersatz von Verwendungen oder auf Wegnahme von Vorrichtungen verjähren mit Ablauf eines Jahres seit der Rückleistung der Sache.

Art. 755 A. Nutzniessung / IV. Inhalt / 1. Rechte des Nutzniessers / a. Im Allgemeinen

IV. Inhalt

1. Rechte des Nutzniessers

a. Im Allgemeinen

1 Der Nutzniesser hat das Recht auf den Besitz, den Gebrauch und die Nutzung der Sache.

2 Er besorgt deren Verwaltung.

3 Bei der Ausübung dieses Rechtes hat er nach den Regeln einer sorgfältigen Wirtschaft zu verfahren.

Art. 756 A. Nutzniessung / IV. Inhalt / 1. Rechte des Nutzniessers / b. Natürliche Früchte

b. Natürliche Früchte

1 Natürliche Früchte gehören dem Nutzniesser, wenn sie während der Zeit seiner Berechtigung reif geworden sind.

2 Wer das Feld bestellt, hat für seine Verwendungen gegen den, der die reifen Früchte erhält, einen Anspruch auf angemessene Entschädigung, die jedoch den Wert der reifen Früchte nicht übersteigen soll.

3 Bestandteile, die nicht Erzeugnisse oder Erträgnisse sind, verbleiben dem Eigentümer der Sache.

Art. 757 A. Nutzniessung / IV. Inhalt / 1. Rechte des Nutzniessers / c. Zinse

c. Zinse

Zinse von Nutzniessungskapitalien und andere periodische Leistungen gehören dem Nutzniesser von dem Tage an, da sein Recht beginnt, bis zu dem Zeitpunkte, da es aufhört, auch wenn sie erst später fällig werden.

Art. 758 A. Nutzniessung / IV. Inhalt / 1. Rechte des Nutzniessers / d. Übertragbarkeit

d. Übertragbarkeit

1 Die Nutzniessung kann, wenn es sich nicht um ein höchst persönliches Recht handelt, zur Ausübung auf einen andern übertragen werden.

2 Der Eigentümer ist befugt, seine Rechte diesem gegenüber unmittelbar geltend zu machen.

Art. 759 A. Nutzniessung / IV. Inhalt / 2. Rechte des Eigentümers / a. Aufsicht

2. Rechte des Eigentümers

a. Aufsicht

Der Eigentümer kann gegen jeden widerrechtlichen oder der Sache nicht angemessenen Gebrauch Einspruch erheben.

Art. 760 A. Nutzniessung / IV. Inhalt / 2. Rechte des Eigentümers / b. Sicherstellung

b. Sicherstellung

1 Der Eigentümer ist befugt, von dem Nutzniesser Sicherheit zu verlangen, sobald er eine Gefährdung seiner Rechte nachweist.

2 Ohne diesen Nachweis und schon vor der Übergabe der Sache kann er Sicherheit verlangen, wenn verbrauchbare Sachen oder Wertpapiere den Gegenstand der Nutzniessung bilden.

3 Für die Sicherstellung bei Wertpapieren genügt deren Hinterlegung.

Art. 761 A. Nutzniessung / IV. Inhalt / 2. Rechte des Eigentümers / c. Sicherstellung bei Schenkung und gesetzlicher Nutzniessung

c. Sicherstellung bei Schenkung und gesetzlicher Nutzniessung

1 Der Anspruch auf Sicherstellung besteht nicht gegenüber demjenigen, der den Gegenstand dem Eigentümer unter Vorbehalt der Nutzniessung geschenkt hat.

2 Bei der gesetzlichen Nutzniessung steht der Anspruch unter der besondern Ordnung des Rechtsverhältnisses.

Art. 762 A. Nutzniessung / IV. Inhalt / 2. Rechte des Eigentümers / d. Folge der Nichtleistung der Sicherheit

d. Folge der Nichtleistung der Sicherheit

Leistet der Nutzniesser während einer ihm hiefür angesetzten angemessenen Frist die Sicherheit nicht oder lässt er trotz Einspruches des Eigentümers von einem widerrechtlichen Gebrauch der Sache nicht ab, so hat das Gericht ihm den Besitz des Gegenstandes bis auf weiteres zu entziehen und eine Beistandschaft anzuordnen.

Art. 763 A. Nutzniessung / IV. Inhalt / 3. Inventarpflicht

3. Inventarpflicht

Der Eigentümer und der Nutzniesser haben das Recht, jederzeit zu verlangen, dass über die Gegenstände der Nutzniessung auf gemeinsame Kosten ein Inventar mit öffentlicher Beurkundung aufgenommen werde.

Art. 764 A. Nutzniessung / IV. Inhalt / 4. Lasten / a. Erhaltung der Sache

4. Lasten

a. Erhaltung der Sache

1 Der Nutzniesser hat den Gegenstand in seinem Bestande zu erhalten und Ausbesserungen und Erneuerungen, die zum gewöhnlichen Unterhalte gehören, von sich aus vorzunehmen.

2 Werden wichtigere Arbeiten oder Vorkehrungen zum Schutze des Gegenstandes nötig, so hat der Nutzniesser den Eigentümer davon zu benachrichtigen und ihre Vornahme zu gestatten.

3 Schafft der Eigentümer nicht Abhilfe, so ist der Nutzniesser befugt, auf Kosten des Eigentümers sich selbst zu helfen.

Art. 765 A. Nutzniessung / IV. Inhalt / 4. Lasten / b. Unterhalt und Bewirtschaftung

b. Unterhalt und Bewirtschaftung

1 Die Auslagen für den gewöhnlichen Unterhalt und die Bewirtschaftung der Sache, die Zinse für die darauf haftenden Kapitalschulden sowie die Steuern und Abgaben trägt im Verhältnisse zu der Dauer seiner Berechtigung der Nutzniesser.

2 Werden die Steuern und Abgaben beim Eigentümer erhoben, so hat ihm der Nutzniesser in dem gleichen Umfange Ersatz zu leisten.

3 Alle andern Lasten trägt der Eigentümer, er darf aber, falls der Nutzniesser ihm auf Verlangen die nötigen Geldmittel nicht unentgeltlich vorschiesst, Gegenstände der Nutzniessung hiefür verwerten.

Art. 766 A. Nutzniessung / IV. Inhalt / 4. Lasten / c. Zinspflicht bei Nutzniessung an einem Vermögen

c. Zinspflicht bei Nutzniessung an einem Vermögen

Steht ein Vermögen in Nutzniessung, so hat der Nutzniesser die Kapitalschulden zu verzinsen, kann aber, wo die Umstände es rechtfertigen, verlangen, von dieser Zinspflicht dadurch befreit zu werden, dass nach Tilgung der Schulden die Nutzniessung auf den verbleibenden Überschuss der Vermögenswerte beschränkt wird.

Art. 767 A. Nutzniessung / IV. Inhalt / 4. Lasten / d. Versicherung

d. Versicherung

1 Der Nutzniesser hat den Gegenstand zugunsten des Eigentümers gegen Feuer und andere Gefahren zu versichern, soweit diese Versicherung nach ortsüblicher Auffassung zu den Pflichten einer sorgfältigen Wirtschaft gerechnet wird.

2 Die Versicherungsprämien hat in diesem Falle, sowie wenn eine bereits versicherte Sache in Nutzniessung kommt, für die Zeit seiner Nutzniessung der Nutzniesser zu tragen.

Art. 768 A. Nutzniessung / V. Besondere Fälle / 1. Grundstücke / a. Früchte

V. Besondere Fälle

1. Grundstücke

a. Früchte

1 Der Nutzniesser eines Grundstückes hat darauf zu achten, dass es durch die Art der Nutzniessung nicht über das gewöhnliche Mass in Anspruch genommen wird.

2 Soweit Früchte über dieses Mass hinaus bezogen worden sind, gehören sie dem Eigentümer.

Art. 769 A. Nutzniessung / V. Besondere Fälle / 1. Grundstücke / b. Wirtschaftliche Bestimmung

b. Wirtschaftliche Bestimmung

1 Der Nutzniesser darf an der wirtschaftlichen Bestimmung des Grundstückes keine Veränderungen vornehmen, die für den Eigentümer von erheblichem Nachteil sind.

2 Die Sache selbst darf er weder umgestalten noch wesentlich verändern.

3 Die Neuanlage von Steinbrüchen, Mergelgruben, Torfgräbereien u. dgl. ist ihm nur nach vorgängiger Anzeige an den Eigentümer und unter der Voraussetzung gestattet, dass die wirtschaftliche Bestimmung des Grundstückes dadurch nicht wesentlich verändert wird.

Art. 770 A. Nutzniessung / V. Besondere Fälle / 1. Grundstücke / c. Wald

c. Wald

1 Ist ein Wald Gegenstand der Nutzniessung, so kann der Nutzniesser die Nutzung insoweit beanspruchen, als ein ordentlicher Wirtschaftsplan dies rechtfertigt.

2 Sowohl der Eigentümer als der Nutzniesser können die Einhaltung eines Planes verlangen, der ihre Rechte nicht beeinträchtigt.

3 Erfolgt im Falle von Sturm, Schneeschaden, Brand, Insektenfrass oder aus andern Gründen eine erhebliche Übernutzung, so soll sie allmählich wieder eingespart oder der Wirtschaftsplan den neuen Verhältnissen angepasst werden, der Erlös der Übernutzung aber wird zinstragend angelegt und dient zur Ausgleichung des Ausfalles.

Art. 771 A. Nutzniessung / V. Besondere Fälle / 1. Grundstücke / d. Bergwerke

d. Bergwerke

Auf die Nutzniessung an Gegenständen, deren Nutzung in der Gewinnung von Bodenbestandteilen besteht, wie namentlich an Bergwerken, finden die Bestimmungen über die Nutzniessung am Walde entsprechende Anwendung.

Art. 772 A. Nutzniessung / V. Besondere Fälle / 2. Verbrauchbare und geschätzte Sachen

2. Verbrauchbare und geschätzte Sachen

1 An verbrauchbaren Sachen erhält der Nutzniesser, wenn es nicht anders bestimmt ist, das Eigentum, wird aber für den Wert, den sie bei Beginn der Nutzniessung hatten, ersatzpflichtig.

2 Werden andere bewegliche Sachen unter einer Schätzung übergeben, so kann der Nutzniesser, wenn es nicht anders bestimmt ist, frei über sie verfügen, wird aber, wenn er von diesem Rechte Gebrauch macht, ersatzpflichtig.

3 Der Ersatz kann bei landwirtschaftlichen Einrichtungen, Herden, Warenlagern u. dgl. in Gegenständen gleicher Art und Güte geleistet werden.

Art. 773 A. Nutzniessung / V. Besondere Fälle / 3. Forderungen / a. Inhalt

3. Forderungen

a. Inhalt

1 Stehen Forderungen in Nutzniessung, so kann der Nutzniesser deren Ertrag einziehen.

2 Kündigungen an den Schuldner sowie Verfügungen über Wertpapiere müssen vom Gläubiger und vom Nutzniesser ausgehen, Kündigungen des Schuldners gegenüber beiden erfolgen.

3 Der Gläubiger und der Nutzniesser haben gegeneinander ein Recht auf Zustimmung zu den Massregeln, die im Falle der Gefährdung der Forderung zu einer sorgfältigen Verwaltung gehören.

Art. 774 A. Nutzniessung / V. Besondere Fälle / 3. Forderungen / b. Rückzahlungen und Neuanlage

b. Rückzahlungen und Neuanlage

1 Ist der Schuldner nicht ermächtigt, dem Gläubiger oder dem Nutzniesser die Rückzahlung zu leisten, so hat er entweder an beide gemeinsam zu zahlen oder zu hinterlegen.

2 Der Gegenstand der Leistung, wie namentlich zurückbezahltes Kapital, unterliegt der Nutzniessung.

3 Sowohl der Gläubiger als der Nutzniesser haben Anspruch auf sichere und zinstragende Neuanlage der Kapitalien.

Art. 775 A. Nutzniessung / V. Besondere Fälle / 3. Forderungen / c. Recht auf Abtretung

c. Recht auf Abtretung

1 Der Nutzniesser hat das Recht, binnen drei Monaten nach Beginn der Nutzniessung die Abtretung der seiner Nutzniessung unterstellten Forderungen und Wertpapiere zu verlangen.

2 Erfolgt deren Abtretung, so wird er dem bisherigen Gläubiger für den Wert, den sie zur Zeit der Abtretung haben, ersatzpflichtig und hat in diesem Betrage Sicherheit zu leisten, insofern nicht hierauf verzichtet wird.

3 Der Übergang erfolgt, wenn kein Verzicht vorliegt, erst mit der Sicherstellung.

Art. 776 B. Wohnrecht / I. Im Allgemeinen

B. Wohnrecht

I. Im Allgemeinen

1 Das Wohnrecht besteht in der Befugnis, in einem Gebäude oder in einem Teile eines solchen Wohnung zu nehmen.

2 Es ist unübertragbar und unvererblich.

3 Es steht, soweit das Gesetz es nicht anders ordnet, unter den Bestimmungen über die Nutzniessung.

Art. 777 B. Wohnrecht / II. Ansprüche des Wohnungsberechtigten

II. Ansprüche des Wohnungsberechtigten

1 Das Wohnrecht wird im Allgemeinen nach den persönlichen Bedürfnissen des Berechtigten bemessen.

2 Er darf aber, falls das Recht nicht ausdrücklich auf seine Person beschränkt ist, seine Familienangehörigen und Hausgenossen zu sich in die Wohnung aufnehmen.

3 Ist das Wohnrecht auf einen Teil eines Gebäudes beschränkt, so kann der Berechtigte die zum gemeinschaftlichen Gebrauch bestimmten Einrichtungen mitbenutzen.

Art. 778 B. Wohnrecht / III. Lasten

III. Lasten

1 Steht dem Berechtigten ein ausschliessliches Wohnrecht zu, so trägt er die Lasten des gewöhnlichen Unterhaltes.

2 Hat er nur ein Mitbenutzungsrecht, so fallen die Unterhaltskosten dem Eigentümer zu.

Art. 779 C. Baurecht / I. Gegenstand und Aufnahme in das Grundbuch

C. Baurecht

I. Gegenstand und Aufnahme in das Grundbuch1

1 Ein Grundstück kann mit der Dienstbarkeit belastet werden, dass jemand das Recht erhält, auf oder unter der Bodenfläche ein Bauwerk zu errichten oder beizubehalten.

2 Dieses Recht ist, wenn es nicht anders vereinbart wird, übertragbar und vererblich.

3 Ist das Baurecht selbständig und dauernd, so kann es als Grundstück in das Grundbuch aufgenommen werden.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 19. März 1965, in Kraft seit 1. Juli 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).

Art. 779a1C. Baurecht / II. Rechtsgeschäft

II. Rechtsgeschäft

1 Das Rechtsgeschäft über die Errichtung eines Baurechts bedarf zu seiner Gültigkeit der öffentlichen Beurkundung.

2 Sollen der Baurechtszins und allfällige weitere vertragliche Bestimmungen im Grundbuch vorgemerkt werden, so bedürfen sie zu ihrer Gültigkeit ebenfalls der öffentlichen Beurkundung.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 19. März 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969). Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 779b1C. Baurecht / III. Inhalt, Umfang und Vormerkung

III. Inhalt, Umfang und Vormerkung2

1 Die vertraglichen Bestimmungen über den Inhalt und Umfang des Baurechtes, wie namentlich über Lage, Gestalt, Ausdehnung und Zweck der Bauten sowie über die Benutzung nicht überbauter Flächen, die mit seiner Ausübung in Anspruch genommen werden, sind für jeden Erwerber des Baurechtes und des belasteten Grundstückes verbindlich.

2 Weitere vertragliche Bestimmungen können im Grundbuch vorgemerkt werden, falls die Parteien dies vereinbaren.3


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 19. März 1965, in Kraft seit 1. Juli 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
3 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 779c1C. Baurecht / IV. Folgen des Ablaufs der Dauer / 1. Heimfall

IV. Folgen des Ablaufs der Dauer

1. Heimfall

Geht das Baurecht unter, so fallen die bestehenden Bauwerke dem Grundeigentümer heim, indem sie zu Bestandteilen seines Grundstückes werden.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 19. März 1965, in Kraft seit 1. Juli 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).

Art. 779d1C. Baurecht / IV. Folgen des Ablaufs der Dauer / 2. Entschädigung

2. Entschädigung

1 Der Grundeigentümer hat dem bisherigen Bauberechtigten für die heimfallenden Bauwerke eine angemessene Entschädigung zu leisten, die jedoch den Gläubigern, denen das Baurecht verpfändet war, für ihre noch bestehenden Forderungen haftet und ohne ihre Zustimmung dem bisherigen Bauberechtigten nicht ausbezahlt werden darf.

2 Wird die Entschädigung nicht bezahlt oder sichergestellt, so kann der bisherige Bauberechtigte oder ein Gläubiger, dem das Baurecht verpfändet war, verlangen, dass an Stelle des gelöschten Baurechtes ein Grundpfandrecht mit demselben Rang zur Sicherung der Entschädigungsforderung eingetragen werde.

3 Die Eintragung muss spätestens drei Monate nach dem Untergang des Baurechtes erfolgen.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 19. März 1965, in Kraft seit 1. Juli 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).

Art. 779e1

1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 19. März 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969). Aufgehoben durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 779f1C. Baurecht / V. Vorzeitiger Heimfall / 1. Voraussetzungen

V. Vorzeitiger Heimfall

1. Voraussetzungen

Wenn der Bauberechtigte in grober Weise sein dingliches Recht überschreitet oder vertragliche Verpflichtungen verletzt, so kann der Grundeigentümer den vorzeitigen Heimfall herbeiführen, indem er die Übertragung des Baurechts mit allen Rechten und Lasten auf sich selber verlangt.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 19. März 1965, in Kraft seit 1. Juli 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).

Art. 779g1C. Baurecht / V. Vorzeitiger Heimfall / 2. Ausübung des Heimfallsrechtes

2. Ausübung des Heimfallsrechtes

1 Das Heimfallsrecht kann nur ausgeübt werden, wenn für die heimfallenden Bauwerke eine angemessene Entschädigung geleistet wird, bei deren Bemessung das schuldhafte Verhalten des Bauberechtigten als Herabsetzungsgrund berücksichtigt werden kann.

2 Die Übertragung des Baurechtes auf den Grundeigentümer erfolgt erst, wenn die Entschädigung bezahlt oder sichergestellt ist.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 19. März 1965, in Kraft seit 1. Juli 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).

Art. 779h1C. Baurecht / V. Vorzeitiger Heimfall / 3. Andere Anwendungsfälle

3. Andere Anwendungsfälle

Den Vorschriften über die Ausübung des Heimfallsrechtes unterliegt jedes Recht, das sich der Grundeigentümer zur vorzeitigen Aufhebung oder Rückübertragung des Baurechtes wegen Pflichtverletzung des Bauberechtigten vorbehalten hat.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 19. März 1965, in Kraft seit 1. Juli 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).

Art. 779i1C. Baurecht / VI. Haftung für den Baurechtszins / 1. Anspruch auf Errichtung eines Pfandrechts

VI. Haftung für den Baurechtszins

1. Anspruch auf Errichtung eines Pfandrechts

1 Zur Sicherung des Baurechtszinses hat der Grundeigentümer gegenüber dem jeweiligen Bauberechtigten Anspruch auf Errichtung eines Pfandrechtes an dem in das Grundbuch aufgenommenen Baurecht im Höchstbetrag von drei Jahresleistungen.

2 Ist die Gegenleistung nicht in gleichmässigen Jahresleistungen festgesetzt, so besteht der Anspruch auf das gesetzliche Pfandrecht für den Betrag, der bei gleichmässiger Verteilung auf drei Jahre entfällt.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 19. März 1965, in Kraft seit 1. Juli 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).

Art. 779k1C. Baurecht / VI. Haftung für den Baurechtszins / 2. Eintragung

2. Eintragung

1 Das Pfandrecht kann jederzeit eingetragen werden, solange das Baurecht besteht, und ist von der Löschung im Zwangsverwertungsverfahren ausgenommen.

2 Im Übrigen sind die Bestimmungen über die Errichtung des Bauhandwerkerpfandrechtes sinngemäss anwendbar.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 19. März 1965, in Kraft seit 1. Juli 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).

Art. 779l1C. Baurecht / VII. Höchstdauer

VII. Höchstdauer

1 Das Baurecht kann als selbständiges Recht auf höchstens 100 Jahre begründet werden.

2 Es kann jederzeit in der für die Begründung vorgeschriebenen Form auf eine neue Dauer von höchstens 100 Jahren verlängert werden, doch ist eine zum voraus eingegangene Verpflichtung hiezu nicht verbindlich.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 19. März 1965, in Kraft seit 1. Juli 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).

Art. 780 D. Quellenrecht

D. Quellenrecht

1 Das Recht an einer Quelle auf fremdem Grundstück belastet das Quellengrundstück mit der Dienstbarkeit der Aneignung und Ableitung des Quellwassers.

2 Es ist, wenn es nicht anders vereinbart wird, übertragbar und vererblich.

3 Ist das Quellenrecht selbständig und dauernd, so kann es als Grundstück in das Grundbuch aufgenommen werden.

Art. 781 E. Andere Dienstbarkeiten

E. Andere Dienstbarkeiten

1 Dienstbarkeiten anderen Inhaltes können zugunsten einer beliebigen Person oder Gemeinschaft an Grundstücken bestellt werden, so oft diese in bestimmter Hinsicht jemandem zum Gebrauch dienen können, wie für die Abhaltung von Schiessübungen oder für Weg und Steg.

2 Sie sind, soweit es nicht anders vereinbart wird, unübertragbar, und es bestimmt sich ihr Inhalt nach den gewöhnlichen Bedürfnissen der Berechtigten.

3 Im Übrigen stehen sie unter den Bestimmungen über die Grunddienstbarkeiten.

Art. 781a1F. Richterliche Massnahmen

F. Richterliche Massnahmen

Für im Grundbuch eingetragene Berechtigte einer Dienstbarkeit gelten die Bestimmungen über die richterlichen Massnahmen bei Unauffindbarkeit des Eigentümers oder bei Fehlen der vorgeschriebenen Organe einer juristischen Person oder anderen Rechtsträgerin sinngemäss.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).


  Dritter Abschnitt: Die Grundlasten

Art. 782 A. Gegenstand

A. Gegenstand

1 Durch die Grundlast wird der jeweilige Eigentümer eines Grundstückes zu einer Leistung an einen Berechtigten verpflichtet, für die er ausschliesslich mit dem Grundstücke haftet.

2 Als Berechtiger kann der jeweilige Eigentümer eines andern Grundstückes bezeichnet sein.

3 Unter Vorbehalt der öffentlich-rechtlichen Grundlasten kann eine Grundlast nur eine Leistung zum Inhalt haben, die sich aus der wirtschaftlichen Natur des belasteten Grundstücks ergibt oder die für die wirtschaftlichen Bedürfnisse eines berechtigten Grundstücks bestimmt ist.1


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 783 B. Errichtung und Untergang / I. Errichtung / 1. Eintragung und Erwerbsart

B. Errichtung und Untergang

I. Errichtung

1. Eintragung und Erwerbsart

1 Die Grundlast bedarf zu ihrer Errichtung der Eintragung in das Grundbuch.

2 Bei der Eintragung ist ein bestimmter Betrag als ihr Gesamtwert in Landesmünze anzugeben, und zwar bei zeitlich wiederkehrenden Leistungen mangels anderer Abrede der zwanzigfache Betrag der Jahresleistung.

3 Für Erwerb und Eintragung gelten, wo es nicht anders geordnet ist, die Bestimmungen über das Grundeigentum.

Art. 7841B. Errichtung und Untergang / I. Errichtung / 2. Öffentlich-rechtliche Grundlasten

2. Öffentlich-rechtliche Grundlasten

Für die Entstehung der öffentlich-rechtlichen Grundlasten und deren Wirkung gegenüber gutgläubigen Dritten sind die Bestimmungen über die gesetzlichen Pfandrechte des kantonalen Rechts sinngemäss anwendbar.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 7851

1 Aufgehoben durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 786 B. Errichtung und Untergang / II. Untergang / 1. Im Allgemeinen

II. Untergang

1. Im Allgemeinen

1 Die Grundlast geht unter mit der Löschung des Eintrages sowie mit dem vollständigen Untergang des belasteten Grundstückes.

2 Aus Verzicht oder Ablösung oder aus andern Untergangsgründen erhält der Belastete gegenüber dem Berechtigten einen Anspruch auf Löschung des Eintrages.

Art. 787 B. Errichtung und Untergang / II. Untergang / 2. Ablösung / a. Durch den Gläubiger

2. Ablösung

a. Durch den Gläubiger

1 Der Gläubiger kann die Ablösung der Grundlast verlangen nach Abrede und ferner:1

1.2
wenn das belastete Grundstück geteilt wird und er die Verlegung der Schuld auf die Teilstücke nicht akzeptiert;
2.
wenn der Eigentümer den Wert des Grundstückes vermindert und zum Ersatz dafür keine andern Sicherheiten bietet;
3.
wenn der Schuldner mit drei Jahresleistungen im Rückstand ist.

2 Verlangt er die Ablösung wegen Teilung des Grundstücks, so muss er die Grundlast innert Monatsfrist, nachdem die Verlegung rechtskräftig geworden ist, auf ein Jahr kündigen.3


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
3 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 788 B. Errichtung und Untergang / II. Untergang / 2. Ablösung / b. Durch den Schuldner

b. Durch den Schuldner

1 Der Schuldner kann die Ablösung verlangen nach Abrede und ferner:

1.
wenn der Vertrag, auf dem die Grundlast beruht, vom Berechtigten nicht innegehalten wird;
2.
nach dreissigjährigem Bestande der Grundlast, und zwar auch dann, wenn eine längere Dauer oder die Unablösbarkeit verabredet worden ist.

2 Erfolgt die Ablösung nach dreissigjährigem Bestande, so hat ihr in allen Fällen eine Kündigung auf Jahresfrist voranzugehen.

3 Ausgeschlossen ist diese Ablösung, wenn die Grundlast mit einer unablösbaren Grunddienstbarkeit verbunden ist.

Art. 789 B. Errichtung und Untergang / II. Untergang / 2. Ablösung / c. Ablösungsbetrag

c. Ablösungsbetrag

Die Ablösung erfolgt um den Betrag, der im Grundbuch als Gesamtwert der Grundlast eingetragen ist, unter Vorbehalt des Nachweises, dass die Grundlast in Wirklichkeit einen geringeren Wert hat.

Art. 790 B. Errichtung und Untergang / II. Untergang / 3. Verjährung

3. Verjährung

1 Die Grundlast ist keiner Verjährung unterworfen.

2 Die einzelne Leistung unterliegt der Verjährung von dem Zeitpunkte an, da sie zur persönlichen Schuld des Pflichtigen wird.

Art. 791 C. Inhalt / I. Gläubigerrecht

C. Inhalt

I. Gläubigerrecht

1 Der Gläubiger der Grundlast hat keine persönliche Forderung gegen den Schuldner, sondern nur ein Recht auf Befriedigung aus dem Werte des belasteten Grundstückes.

2 Die einzelne Leistung wird jedoch mit Ablauf von drei Jahren seit Eintritt ihrer Fälligkeit zur persönlichen Schuld, für die das Grundstück nicht mehr haftet.

Art. 792 C. Inhalt / II. Schuldpflicht

II. Schuldpflicht

1 Wechselt das Grundstück den Eigentümer, so wird der Erwerber ohne weiteres Schuldner der Grundlast.

2 Wird das Grundstück geteilt, so werden die Eigentümer der Teilstücke Schuldner der Grundlast. Die Schuld wird nach den Bestimmungen über die Grundpfandverschreibung auf die Teilstücke verlegt.1


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).


  Zweiundzwanzigster Titel: Das Grundpfand

  Erster Abschnitt: Allgemeine Bestimmungen

Art. 793 A. Voraussetzungen / I. Arten

A. Voraussetzungen

I. Arten

1 Das Grundpfand wird als Grundpfandverschreibung oder als Schuldbrief bestellt.1

2 Die Bestellung anderer Arten des Grundpfandes ist nicht gestattet.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 794 A. Voraussetzungen / II. Gestalt der Forderung / 1. Betrag

II. Gestalt der Forderung

1. Betrag

1 Bei der Bestellung des Grundpfandes ist in allen Fällen ein bestimmter Betrag der Forderung in Landesmünze anzugeben.

2 Ist der Betrag der Forderung unbestimmt, so wird ein Höchstbetrag angegeben, bis zu dem das Grundstück für alle Ansprüche des Gläubigers haftet.

Art. 795 A. Voraussetzungen / II. Gestalt der Forderung / 2. Zinse

2. Zinse

1 Die Zinspflicht kann innerhalb der gegen Missbräuche im Zinswesen aufgestellten Schranken in beliebiger Weise festgesetzt werden.

2 Die kantonale Gesetzgebung kann den Höchstbetrag des Zinsfusses bestimmen, der für Forderungen zulässig ist, für die ein Grundstück zu Pfand gesetzt wird.

Art. 796 A. Voraussetzungen / III. Grundstück / 1. Verpfändbarkeit

III. Grundstück

1. Verpfändbarkeit

1 Das Grundpfand wird nur auf Grundstücke errichtet, die in das Grundbuch aufgenommen sind.

2 Die Kantone sind befugt, die Verpfändung von öffentlichem Grund und Boden, von Allmenden oder Weiden, die sich im Eigentum von Körperschaften befinden, sowie von damit verbundenen Nutzungsrechten besonderen Vorschriften zu unterstellen oder sie zu untersagen.

Art. 797 A. Voraussetzungen / III. Grundstück / 2. Bestimmtheit / a. Bei einem Grundstück

2. Bestimmtheit

a. Bei einem Grundstück

1 Bei der Errichtung des Grundpfandes ist das Grundstück, das verpfändet wird, bestimmt anzugeben.

2 Teile eines Grundstückes können, solange dessen Teilung im Grundbuch nicht erfolgt ist, nicht verpfändet werden.

Art. 798 A. Voraussetzungen / III. Grundstück / 2. Bestimmtheit / b. Bei mehreren Grundstücken

b. Bei mehreren Grundstücken

1 Auf mehrere Grundstücke kann für eine Forderung ein Grundpfandrecht errichtet werden, wenn sie dem nämlichen Eigentümer gehören oder im Eigentum solidarisch verpflichteter Schuldner stehen.

2 In allen andern Fällen ist bei der Verpfändung mehrerer Grundstücke für die nämliche Forderung ein jedes von ihnen mit einem bestimmten Teilbetrag zu belasten.

3 Diese Belastung erfolgt, wenn es nicht anders vereinbart ist, nach dem Wertverhältnis der Grundstücke.

Art. 798a1A. Voraussetzungen / III. Grundstück / 3. Landwirtschaftliche Grundstücke

3. Landwirtschaftliche Grundstücke

Für die Verpfändung von landwirtschaftlichen Grundstücken gilt zudem das Bundesgesetz vom 4. Oktober 19912 über das bäuerliche Bodenrecht.


1 Eingefügt durch Art. 92 Ziff. 1 des BG vom 4. Okt. 1991 über das bäuerliche Bodenrecht, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1410; BBl 1988 III 953).
2 SR 211.412.11

Art. 799 B. Errichtung und Untergang / I. Errichtung / 1. Eintragung

B. Errichtung und Untergang

I. Errichtung

1. Eintragung

1 Das Grundpfand entsteht unter Vorbehalt der gesetzlichen Ausnahmen mit der Eintragung in das Grundbuch.

2 Das Rechtsgeschäft auf Errichtung eines Grundpfandes bedarf zu seiner Gültigkeit der öffentlichen Beurkundung.1


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 800 B. Errichtung und Untergang / I. Errichtung / 2. Bei gemeinschaftlichem Eigentum

2. Bei gemeinschaftlichem Eigentum

1 Steht ein Grundstück in Miteigentum, so kann jeder Eigentümer seinen Anteil verpfänden.

2 Steht ein Grundstück in Gesamteigentum, so kann es nur insgesamt und im Namen aller Eigentümer verpfändet werden.

Art. 801 B. Errichtung und Untergang / II. Untergang

II. Untergang

1 Das Grundpfand geht unter mit der Löschung des Eintrages sowie mit dem vollständigen Untergang des Grundstückes.

2 Der Untergang infolge von Enteignung steht unter dem Enteignungsrecht des Bundes und der Kantone.

Art. 802 B. Errichtung und Untergang / III. Grundpfänder bei Güterzusammenlegung / 1. Verlegung der Pfandrechte

III. Grundpfänder bei Güterzusammenlegung

1. Verlegung der Pfandrechte

1 Bei Güterzusammenlegungen, die unter Mitwirkung oder Aufsicht öffentlicher Behörden durchgeführt werden, sind die Grundpfandrechte, die auf den abzutretenden Grundstücken lasten, im bisherigen Range auf die zum Ersatze zugewiesenen Grundstücke zu übertragen.

2 Tritt ein Grundstück an die Stelle von mehreren einzelnen, die für verschiedene Forderungen verpfändet oder von denen nicht alle belastet sind, so werden die Pfandrechte unter tunlichster Wahrung ihres bisherigen Ranges auf das Grundstück in seinem neuen Umfange gelegt.

Art. 803 B. Errichtung und Untergang / III. Grundpfänder bei Güterzusammenlegung / 2. Kündigung durch den Schuldner

2. Kündigung durch den Schuldner

Der Schuldner ist befugt, Pfandrechte auf Grundstücken, die in eine Güterzusammenlegung einbezogen sind, auf den Zeitpunkt der Durchführung dieser Unternehmung mit einer Kündigungsfrist von drei Monaten abzulösen.

Art. 804 B. Errichtung und Untergang / III. Grundpfänder bei Güterzusammenlegung / 3. Entschädigung in Geld

3. Entschädigung in Geld

1 Wird für verpfändete Grundstücke eine Entschädigung in Geld entrichtet, so ist der Betrag an die Gläubiger nach ihrer Rangordnung, oder bei gleicher Rangordnung nach der Grösse ihrer Forderung abzutragen.

2 An den Schuldner dürfen solche Beträge ohne Zustimmung der Gläubiger nicht ausbezahlt werden, sobald sie mehr als den zwanzigsten Teil der Pfandforderung betragen, oder sobald das neue Grundstück nicht mehr hinreichende Sicherheit darbietet.

Art. 805 C. Wirkung / I. Umfang der Pfandhaft

C. Wirkung

I. Umfang der Pfandhaft

1 Das Grundpfandrecht belastet das Grundstück mit Einschluss aller Bestandteile und aller Zugehör.

2 Werden bei der Verpfändung Sachen als Zugehör ausdrücklich angeführt und im Grundbuch angemerkt, wie Maschinen und Hotelmobiliar, so gelten sie als Zugehör, solange nicht dargetan ist, dass ihnen diese Eigenschaft nach Vorschrift des Gesetzes nicht zukommen kann.

3 Vorbehalten bleiben die Rechte Dritter an der Zugehör.

Art. 806 C. Wirkung / II. Miet- und Pachtzinse

II. Miet- und Pachtzinse

1 Ist das verpfändete Grundstück vermietet oder verpachtet, so erstreckt sich die Pfandhaft auch auf die Miet- oder Pachtzinsforderungen, die seit Anhebung der Betreibung auf Verwertung des Grundpfandes oder seit der Eröffnung des Konkurses über den Schuldner bis zur Verwertung auflaufen.

2 Den Zinsschuldnern gegenüber ist diese Pfandhaft erst wirksam, nachdem ihnen von der Betreibung Mitteilung gemacht oder der Konkurs veröffentlicht worden ist.

3 Rechtsgeschäfte des Grundeigentümers über noch nicht verfallene Miet- oder Pachtzinsforderungen sowie die Pfändung durch andere Gläubiger sind gegenüber einem Grundpfandgläubiger, der vor der Fälligkeit der Zinsforderung Betreibung auf Verwertung des Unterpfandes angehoben hat, nicht wirksam.

Art. 807 C. Wirkung / III. Verjährung

III. Verjährung

Forderungen, für die ein Grundpfand eingetragen ist, unterliegen keiner Verjährung.

Art. 808 C. Wirkung / IV. Sicherungsbefugnisse / 1. Massregeln bei Wertverminderung / a. Untersagung und Selbsthilfe

IV. Sicherungsbefugnisse

1. Massregeln bei Wertverminderung

a. Untersagung und Selbsthilfe

1 Vermindert der Eigentümer den Wert der Pfandsache, so kann ihm der Gläubiger durch das Gericht jede weitere schädliche Einwirkung untersagen lassen.

2 Der Gläubiger kann vom Gericht ermächtigt werden, die zweckdienlichen Vorkehrungen zu treffen, und kann solche auch ohne Ermächtigung vornehmen, wenn Gefahr im Verzug ist.

3 Er kann für die Kosten der Vorkehrungen vom Eigentümer Ersatz verlangen und hat dafür an dem Grundstück ein Pfandrecht. Dieses Pfandrecht entsteht ohne Eintragung im Grundbuch und geht jeder eingetragenen Belastung vor.1

4 Ist der Betrag des Pfandrechts höher als 1000 Franken und wird dieses nicht innert vier Monaten nach Abschluss der Vorkehrungen in das Grundbuch eingetragen, so kann es Dritten, die sich in gutem Glauben auf das Grundbuch verlassen, nicht entgegengehalten werden.2


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 809 C. Wirkung / IV. Sicherungsbefugnisse / 1. Massregeln bei Wertverminderung / b. Sicherung, Wiederherstellung, Abzahlung

b. Sicherung, Wiederherstellung, Abzahlung

1 Ist eine Wertverminderung eingetreten, so kann der Gläubiger vom Schuldner die Sicherung seiner Ansprüche oder die Wiederherstellung des früheren Zustandes verlangen.

2 Droht die Gefahr einer Wertverminderung, so kann er die Sicherung verlangen.

3 Wird dem Verlangen innerhalb einer vom Gericht angesetzten Frist nicht entsprochen, so kann der Gläubiger eine zu seiner Sicherung ausreichende Abzahlung der Schuld beanspruchen.

Art. 810 C. Wirkung / IV. Sicherungsbefugnisse / 2. Unverschuldete Wertverminderung

2. Unverschuldete Wertverminderung

1 Wertverminderungen, die ohne Verschulden des Eigentümers eintreten, geben dem Gläubiger nur insoweit ein Recht auf Sicherstellung oder Abzahlung, als der Eigentümer für den Schaden gedeckt wird.

2 Der Gläubiger kann jedoch Vorkehrungen zur Beseitigung oder Abwehr der Wertverminderung treffen. Er hat für deren Kosten an dem Grundstück ohne Schuldpflicht des Eigentümers ein Pfandrecht. Dieses Pfandrecht entsteht ohne Eintragung im Grundbuch und geht jeder eingetragenen Belastung vor.1

3 Ist der Betrag des Pfandrechts höher als 1000 Franken und wird dieses nicht innert vier Monaten nach Abschluss der Vorkehrungen in das Grundbuch eingetragen, so kann es Dritten, die sich in gutem Glauben auf das Grundbuch verlassen, nicht entgegengehalten werden.2


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 811 C. Wirkung / IV. Sicherungsbefugnisse / 3. Abtrennung kleiner Stücke

3. Abtrennung kleiner Stücke

Wird ein Teil des Grundstückes, der auf weniger als den zwanzigsten Teil der Pfandforderung zu werten ist, veräussert, so kann der Gläubiger die Entlassung dieses Stückes aus der Pfandhaft nicht verweigern, sobald eine verhältnismässige Abzahlung geleistet wird oder der Rest des Grundstückes ihm hinreichende Sicherheit bietet.

Art. 812 C. Wirkung / V. Weitere Belastung

V. Weitere Belastung

1 Ein Verzicht des Eigentümers auf das Recht, weitere Lasten auf das verpfändete Grundstück zu legen, ist unverbindlich.

2 Wird nach der Errichtung des Grundpfandrechtes eine Dienstbarkeit oder Grundlast auf das Grundstück gelegt, ohne dass der Pfandgläubiger zugestimmt hat, so geht das Grundpfandrecht der späteren Belastung vor, und diese wird gelöscht, sobald bei der Pfandverwertung ihr Bestand den vorgehenden Pfandgläubiger schädigt.

3 Der aus der Dienstbarkeit oder Grundlast Berechtigte hat jedoch gegenüber nachfolgenden Eingetragenen für den Wert der Belastung Anspruch auf vorgängige Befriedigung aus dem Erlöse.

Art. 813 C. Wirkung / VI. Pfandstelle / 1. Wirkung der Pfandstellen

VI. Pfandstelle

1. Wirkung der Pfandstellen

1 Die pfandrechtliche Sicherung ist auf die Pfandstelle beschränkt, die bei der Eintragung angegeben wird.

2 Grundpfandrechte können in zweitem oder beliebigem Rang errichtet werden, sobald ein bestimmter Betrag als Vorgang bei der Eintragung vorbehalten wird.

Art. 814 C. Wirkung / VI. Pfandstelle / 2. Pfandstellen untereinander

2. Pfandstellen untereinander

1 Sind Grundpfandrechte verschiedenen Ranges auf ein Grundstück errichtet, so hat bei Löschung eines Grundpfandes der nachfolgende Grundpfandgläubiger keinen Anspruch darauf, in die Lücke nachzurücken.

2 An Stelle des getilgten vorgehenden Grundpfandes darf ein anderes errichtet werden.

3 Vereinbarungen über das Nachrücken von Grundpfandgläubigern haben nur dann dingliche Wirkung, wenn sie vorgemerkt sind.

Art. 815 C. Wirkung / VI. Pfandstelle / 3. Leere Pfandstellen

3. Leere Pfandstellen

Ist ein Grundpfandrecht ohne Vorhandensein eines vorgehenden in späterem Rang errichtet, hat der Schuldner über einen vorgehenden Pfandtitel nicht verfügt, oder beträgt die vorgehende Forderung weniger, als eingetragen ist, so wird bei der Pfandverwertung der Erlös aus dem Pfande ohne Rücksicht auf die leeren Pfandstellen den wirklichen Pfandgläubigern nach ihrem Range zugewiesen.

Art. 816 C. Wirkung / VII. Befriedigung aus dem Pfande / 1. Art der Befriedigung

VII. Befriedigung aus dem Pfande

1. Art der Befriedigung

1 Der Gläubiger hat ein Recht darauf, im Falle der Nichtbefriedigung sich aus dem Erlöse des Grundstückes bezahlt zu machen.

2 Die Abrede, wonach das Grundpfand dem Gläubiger, wenn er nicht befriedigt wird, als Eigentum zufallen soll, ist ungültig.

3 Sind mehrere Grundstücke für die gleiche Forderung verpfändet, so ist die Betreibung auf Pfandverwertung gleichzeitig gegen alle zu richten, die Verwertung aber nach Anordnung des Betreibungsamtes nur soweit nötig durchzuführen.

Art. 817 C. Wirkung / VII. Befriedigung aus dem Pfande / 2. Verteilung des Erlöses

2. Verteilung des Erlöses

1 Der Erlös aus dem Verkaufe des Grundstückes wird unter die Grundpfandgläubiger nach ihrem Range verteilt.

2 Gläubiger gleichen Ranges haben unter sich Anspruch auf gleichmässige Befriedigung.

Art. 818 C. Wirkung / VII. Befriedigung aus dem Pfande / 3. Umfang der Sicherung

3. Umfang der Sicherung

1 Das Grundpfandrecht bietet dem Gläubiger Sicherheit:

1.
für die Kapitalforderung;
2.
für die Kosten der Betreibung und die Verzugszinse;
3.1
für drei zur Zeit der Konkurseröffnung oder des Pfandverwertungsbegehrens verfallene Jahreszinse und den seit dem letzten Zinstag laufenden Zins; beim Schuldbrief sind nur die tatsächlich geschuldeten Zinsen pfandgesichert.

2 Der ursprünglich vereinbarte Zins darf nicht zum Nachteil nachgehender Grundpfandgläubiger über fünf vom Hundert erhöht werden.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 8191C. Wirkung / VII. Befriedigung aus dem Pfande / 4. Sicherung für erhaltende Auslagen

4. Sicherung für erhaltende Auslagen

1 Hat der Pfandgläubiger zur Erhaltung der Pfandsache notwendige Auslagen gemacht, insbesondere die vom Eigentümer geschuldeten Versicherungsprämien bezahlt, so hat er dafür an dem Grundstück ein Pfandrecht. Dieses Pfandrecht entsteht ohne Eintragung im Grundbuch und geht jeder eingetragenen Belastung vor.

2 Ist der Betrag des Pfandrechts höher als 1000 Franken und wird dieses nicht innert vier Monaten nach Vornahme der Ersatzhandlung in das Grundbuch eingetragen, so kann es Dritten, die sich in gutem Glauben auf das Grundbuch verlassen, nicht entgegengehalten werden.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 820 C. Wirkung / VIII. Pfandrecht bei Bodenverbesserungen / 1. Vorrang

VIII. Pfandrecht bei Bodenverbesserungen

1. Vorrang

1 Wird ein ländliches Grundstück durch eine Bodenverbesserung, die unter Mitwirkung öffentlicher Behörden zur Durchführung gelangt, im Werte erhöht, so kann der Eigentümer für seinen Kostenanteil zur Sicherung seines Gläubigers ein Pfandrecht in das Grundbuch eintragen lassen, das allen andern eingetragenen Belastungen vorgeht.

2 Wird eine solche Bodenverbesserung ohne staatliche Subvention durchgeführt, so kann der Eigentümer dieses Pfandrecht für höchstens zwei Dritteile seines Kostenanteiles eintragen lassen.

Art. 821 C. Wirkung / VIII. Pfandrecht bei Bodenverbesserungen / 2. Tilgung der Schuld und des Pfandrechtes

2. Tilgung der Schuld und des Pfandrechtes

1 Wird die Bodenverbesserung ohne staatliche Subvention durchgeführt, so ist die Pfandschuld durch Annuitäten von wenigstens 5 Prozent der eingetragenen Pfandsumme zu tilgen.

2 Das Pfandrecht erlischt für die Forderung und für jede Annuität nach Ablauf von drei Jahren seit Eintritt der Fälligkeit, und es rücken die nachfolgenden Pfandgläubiger nach.

Art. 822 C. Wirkung / IX. Anspruch auf die Versicherungssumme

IX. Anspruch auf die Versicherungssumme

1 Eine fällig gewordene Versicherungssumme darf nur mit Zustimmung aller Grundpfandgläubiger an den Eigentümer des versicherten Grundstückes ausbezahlt werden.

2 Gegen angemessene Sicherstellung ist sie jedoch dem Eigentümer zum Zwecke der Wiederherstellung des Unterpfandes herauszugeben.

3 Im Übrigen bleiben die Vorschriften der Kantone über die Feuerversicherung vorbehalten.

Art. 8231C. Wirkung / X. Unauffindbarer Gläubiger

X. Unauffindbarer Gläubiger

Lässt sich ein Grundpfandgläubiger nicht identifizieren oder ist sein Wohnort unbekannt, so kann das Gericht in den Fällen, in denen das Gesetz eine persönliche Betätigung des Gläubigers vorsieht und eine solche dringend erforderlich ist, auf Antrag des Schuldners oder anderer Beteiligter die erforderlichen Massnahmen anordnen.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).


  Zweiter Abschnitt: Die Grundpfandverschreibung

Art. 824 A. Zweck und Gestalt

A. Zweck und Gestalt

1 Durch die Grundpfandverschreibung kann eine beliebige, gegenwärtige oder zukünftige oder bloss mögliche Forderung pfandrechtlich sichergestellt werden.

2 Das verpfändete Grundstück braucht nicht Eigentum des Schuldners zu sein.

Art. 825 B. Errichtung und Untergang / I. Errichtung

B. Errichtung und Untergang

I. Errichtung

1 Die Grundpfandverschreibung wird auch bei Forderungen mit unbestimmtem oder wechselndem Betrage auf eine bestimmte Pfandstelle errichtet und behält ungeachtet aller Schwankungen ihren Rang nach dem Eintrag.

2 Über die errichtete Pfandverschreibung wird auf Verlangen des Gläubigers ein Auszug aus dem Grundbuch ausgestellt, dem jedoch nur die Eigenschaft eines Beweismittels und nicht eines Wertpapiers zukommt.

3 An Stelle dieses Beweismittels kann die Bescheinigung der Eintragung auf der Vertragsurkunde treten.

Art. 826 B. Errichtung und Untergang / II. Untergang / 1. Recht auf Löschung

II. Untergang

1. Recht auf Löschung

Ist die Forderung untergegangen, so kann der Eigentümer des belasteten Grundstückes vom Gläubiger verlangen dass er die Löschung des Eintrages bewillige.

Art. 827 B. Errichtung und Untergang / II. Untergang / 2. Stellung des Eigentümers

2. Stellung des Eigentümers

1 Ist der Grundeigentümer nicht Schuldner der Pfandforderung, so kann er das Pfandrecht unter den gleichen Voraussetzungen ablösen, unter denen der Schuldner zur Tilgung der Forderung befugt ist.

2 Befriedigt er den Gläubiger, so geht das Forderungsrecht auf ihn über.

Art. 828 B. Errichtung und Untergang / II. Untergang / 3. Einseitige Ablösung / a. Voraussetzung und Geltendmachung

3. Einseitige Ablösung

a. Voraussetzung und Geltendmachung

1 Das kantonale Recht kann den Erwerber eines Grundstückes, der nicht persönlich für die darauf lastenden Schulden haftbar ist, ermächtigen, solange keine Betreibung erfolgt ist, die Grundpfandrechte, wenn sie den Wert des Grundstückes übersteigen, abzulösen, indem er den Gläubigern den Erwerbspreis oder bei unentgeltlichem Erwerbe den Betrag herausbezahlt, auf den er das Grundstück wertet.

2 Er hat die beabsichtigte Ablösung den Gläubigern schriftlich mit halbjähriger Kündigung mitzuteilen.

3 Der Ablösungsbetrag wird unter die Gläubiger nach ihrem Range verteilt.

Art. 829 B. Errichtung und Untergang / II. Untergang / 3. Einseitige Ablösung / b. Öffentliche Versteigerung

b. Öffentliche Versteigerung

1 Bei dieser Ablösung haben die Gläubiger das Recht, binnen Monatsfrist nach der Mitteilung des Erwerbes gegen Vorschuss der Kosten eine öffentliche Versteigerung des Unterpfandes zu verlangen, die nach öffentlicher Bekanntmachung binnen eines weitern Monats, nachdem sie verlangt wurde, vorzunehmen ist.

2 Wird hiebei ein höherer Preis erzielt, so gilt dieser als Ablösungsbetrag.

3 Die Kosten der Versteigerung hat im Falle der Erzielung eines höheren Preises der Erwerber, andernfalls der Gläubiger, der sie verlangt hat, zu tragen.

Art. 830 B. Errichtung und Untergang / II. Untergang / 3. Einseitige Ablösung / c. Amtliche Schätzung

c. Amtliche Schätzung

Das kantonale Recht kann an Stelle der öffentlichen Versteigerung eine amtliche Schätzung vorsehen, deren Betrag als Ablösungssumme zu gelten hat.

Art. 831 B. Errichtung und Untergang / II. Untergang / 4. Kündigung

4. Kündigung

Eine Kündigung der Forderung durch den Gläubiger ist gegenüber dem Eigentümer der Pfandsache, der nicht Schuldner ist, nur dann wirksam, wenn sie gegenüber Schuldner und Eigentümer erfolgt.

Art. 832 C. Wirkung / I. Eigentum und Schuldnerschaft / 1. Veräusserung

C. Wirkung

I. Eigentum und Schuldnerschaft

1. Veräusserung

1 Wird das mit einer Grundpfandverschreibung belastete Grundstück veräussert, so bleibt die Haftung des Grundpfandes und des Schuldners, wenn es nicht anders verabredet ist, unverändert.

2 Hat aber der neue Eigentümer die Schuldpflicht für die Pfandforderung übernommen, so wird der frühere Schuldner frei, wenn der Gläubiger diesem gegenüber nicht binnen Jahresfrist schriftlich erklärt, ihn beibehalten zu wollen.

Art. 833 C. Wirkung / I. Eigentum und Schuldnerschaft / 2. Zerstückelung

2. Zerstückelung

1 Wird ein Teil des mit einem Grundpfande belasteten Grundstückes oder eines von mehreren verpfändeten Grundstücken desselben Eigentümers veräussert, oder das Unterpfand zerstückelt, so ist die Pfandhaft mangels anderer Abrede derart zu verteilen, dass jeder der Teile nach seinem Werte verhältnismässig belastet wird.

2 Will ein Gläubiger diese Verteilung nicht annehmen, so kann er binnen Monatsfrist, nachdem sie rechtskräftig geworden ist, verlangen, dass seine Pfandforderung innerhalb eines Jahres getilgt werde.

3 Haben die Erwerber die Schuldpflicht für die auf ihren Grundstücken lastenden Pfandforderungen übernommen, so wird der frühere Schuldner frei, wenn der Gläubiger diesem gegenüber nicht binnen Jahresfrist schriftlich erklärt, ihn beibehalten zu wollen.

Art. 834 C. Wirkung / I. Eigentum und Schuldnerschaft / 3. Anzeige der Schuldübernahme

3. Anzeige der Schuldübernahme

1 Von der Übernahme der Schuld durch den Erwerber hat der Grundbuchverwalter dem Gläubiger Kenntnis zu geben.

2 Die Jahresfrist für die Erklärung des Gläubigers läuft von dieser Mitteilung an.

Art. 835 C. Wirkung / II. Übertragung der Forderung

II. Übertragung der Forderung

Die Übertragung der Forderung, für die eine Grundpfandverschreibung errichtet ist, bedarf zu ihrer Gültigkeit keiner Eintragung in das Grundbuch.

Art. 8361D. Gesetzliches Grundpfandrecht / I. Des kantonalen Rechts

D. Gesetzliches Grundpfandrecht

I. Des kantonalen Rechts

1 Räumt das kantonale Recht dem Gläubiger für Forderungen, die in unmittelbarem Zusammenhang mit dem belasteten Grundstück stehen, einen Anspruch auf ein Pfandrecht ein, so entsteht dieses mit der Eintragung in das Grundbuch.

2 Entstehen gesetzliche Pfandrechte im Betrag von über 1000 Franken aufgrund des kantonalen Rechts ohne Eintragung im Grundbuch und werden sie nicht innert vier Monaten nach der Fälligkeit der zugrunde liegenden Forderung, spätestens jedoch innert zwei Jahren seit der Entstehung der Forderung in das Grundbuch eingetragen, so können sie nach Ablauf der Eintragungsfrist Dritten, die sich in gutem Glauben auf das Grundbuch verlassen, nicht mehr entgegengehalten werden.

3 Einschränkendere Regelungen des kantonalen Rechts bleiben vorbehalten.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 8371D. Gesetzliches Grundpfandrecht / II. Des Bundesprivatrechts / 1. Fälle

II. Des Bundesprivatrechts

1. Fälle

1 Der Anspruch auf Errichtung eines gesetzlichen Grundpfandrechtes besteht:

1.
für die Forderung des Verkäufers an dem verkauften Grundstück;
2.
für die Forderung der Miterben und Gemeinder aus Teilung an den Grundstücken, die der Gemeinschaft gehörten;
3.
für die Forderungen der Handwerker oder Unternehmer, die auf einem Grundstück zu Bauten oder anderen Werken, zu Abbrucharbeiten, zum Gerüstbau, zur Baugrubensicherung oder dergleichen Material und Arbeit oder Arbeit allein geliefert haben, an diesem Grundstück, sei es, dass sie den Grundeigentümer, einen Handwerker oder Unternehmer, einen Mieter, einen Pächter oder eine andere am Grundstück berechtigte Person zum Schuldner haben.

2 Ist ein Mieter, ein Pächter oder eine andere am Grundstück berechtigte Person Schuldner von Forderungen der Handwerker oder Unternehmer, so besteht der Anspruch nur, wenn der Grundeigentümer seine Zustimmung zur Ausführung der Arbeiten erteilt hat.

3 Auf gesetzliche Grundpfandrechte nach diesem Artikel kann der Berechtigte nicht zum Voraus verzichten.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 838 D. Gesetzliches Grundpfandrecht / II. Des Bundesprivatrechts / 2. Verkäufer, Miterben und Gemeinder

2. Verkäufer, Miterben und Gemeinder

Die Eintragung des Pfandrechtes des Verkäufers, der Miterben oder Gemeinder muss spätestens drei Monate nach der Übertragung des Eigentums erfolgen.

Art. 8391D. Gesetzliches Grundpfandrecht / II. Des Bundesprivatrechts / 3. Handwerker und Unternehmer / a. Eintragung

3. Handwerker und Unternehmer

a. Eintragung

1 Das Pfandrecht der Handwerker und Unternehmer kann von dem Zeitpunkte an, da sie sich zur Arbeitsleistung verpflichtet haben, in das Grundbuch eingetragen werden.

2 Die Eintragung hat bis spätestens vier Monate nach der Vollendung der Arbeit zu erfolgen.

3 Sie darf nur erfolgen, wenn die Pfandsumme vom Eigentümer anerkannt oder gerichtlich festgestellt ist, und kann nicht verlangt werden, wenn der Eigentümer für die angemeldete Forderung hinreichende Sicherheit leistet.

4 Handelt es sich beim Grundstück unbestrittenermassen um Verwaltungsvermögen und ergibt sich die Schuldpflicht des Eigentümers nicht aus vertraglichen Verpflichtungen, so haftet er den Handwerkern oder Unternehmern für die anerkannten oder gerichtlich festgestellten Forderungen nach den Bestimmungen über die einfache Bürgschaft, sofern die Forderung ihm gegenüber spätestens vier Monate nach Vollendung der Arbeit schriftlich unter Hinweis auf die gesetzliche Bürgschaft geltend gemacht worden war.

5 Ist strittig, ob es sich um ein Grundstück im Verwaltungsvermögen handelt, so kann der Handwerker oder Unternehmer bis spätestens vier Monate nach der Vollendung seiner Arbeit eine vorläufige Eintragung des Pfandrechts im Grundbuch verlangen.

6 Steht aufgrund eines Urteils fest, dass das Grundstück zum Verwaltungsvermögen gehört, so ist die vorläufige Eintragung des Pfandrechts zu löschen. An seine Stelle tritt die gesetzliche Bürgschaft, sofern die Voraussetzungen nach Absatz 4 erfüllt sind. Die Frist gilt mit der vorläufigen Eintragung des Pfandrechts als gewahrt.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 840 D. Gesetzliches Grundpfandrecht / II. Des Bundesprivatrechts / 3. Handwerker und Unternehmer / b. Rang

b. Rang

Gelangen mehrere gesetzliche Pfandrechte der Handwerker und Unternehmer zur Eintragung, so haben sie, auch wenn sie von verschiedenem Datum sind, untereinander den gleichen Anspruch auf Befriedigung aus dem Pfande.

Art. 841 D. Gesetzliches Grundpfandrecht / II. Des Bundesprivatrechts / 3. Handwerker und Unternehmer / c. Vorrecht

c. Vorrecht

1 Kommen die Forderungen der Handwerker und Unternehmer bei der Pfandverwertung zu Verlust, so ist der Ausfall aus dem den Wert des Bodens übersteigenden Verwertungsanteil der vorgehenden Pfandgläubiger zu ersetzen, sofern das Grundstück durch ihre Pfandrechte in einer für sie erkennbaren Weise zum Nachteil der Handwerker und Unternehmer belastet worden ist.

2 Veräussert der vorgehende Pfandgläubiger seinen Pfandtitel, so hat er den Handwerkern und Unternehmern für dasjenige, was ihnen dadurch entzogen wird, Ersatz zu leisten.

3 Sobald der Beginn des Werkes auf Anzeige eines Berechtigten im Grundbuch angemerkt ist, dürfen bis zum Ablauf der Eintragungsfrist Pfandrechte nur als Grundpfandverschreibungen eingetragen werden.


  Dritter Abschnitt:2  Der Schuldbrief

Art. 842 A. Allgemeine Vorschriften / I. Zweck; Verhältnis zur Forderung aus dem Grundverhältnis

A. Allgemeine Vorschriften

I. Zweck; Verhältnis zur Forderung aus dem Grundverhältnis

1 Durch den Schuldbrief wird eine persönliche Forderung begründet, die grundpfändlich sichergestellt ist.

2 Die Schuldbriefforderung tritt neben die zu sichernde Forderung, die dem Gläubiger gegenüber dem Schuldner aus dem Grundverhältnis gegebenenfalls zusteht, wenn nichts anderes vereinbart ist.

3 Der Schuldner kann sich bezüglich der Schuldbriefforderung gegenüber dem Gläubiger sowie gegenüber Rechtsnachfolgern, die sich nicht in gutem Glauben befinden, auf die sich aus dem Grundverhältnis ergebenden persönlichen Einreden berufen.

Art. 843 A. Allgemeine Vorschriften / II. Arten

II. Arten

Der Schuldbrief wird entweder als Register-Schuldbrief oder als Papier-Schuldbrief ausgestaltet.

Art. 844 A. Allgemeine Vorschriften / III. Stellung des Eigentümers

III. Stellung des Eigentümers

1 Die Stellung des Eigentümers der Pfandsache, der nicht Schuldner ist, bestimmt sich nach den Vorschriften über die Grundpfandverschreibung.

2 Die Einreden des Schuldners stehen beim Schuldbrief auch dem Eigentümer der Pfandsache zu.

Art. 845 A. Allgemeine Vorschriften / IV. Veräusserung. Teilung

IV. Veräusserung. Teilung

Für die Folgen der Veräusserung und der Teilung des Grundstücks gelten die Bestimmungen über die Grundpfandverschreibung.

Art. 846 A. Allgemeine Vorschriften / V. Schuldbriefforderung und Nebenvereinbarungen / 1. Im Allgemeinen

V. Schuldbriefforderung und Nebenvereinbarungen

1. Im Allgemeinen

1 Die Schuldbriefforderung darf sich weder auf das Grundverhältnis beziehen noch Bedingungen oder Gegenleistungen enthalten.

2 Der Schuldbrief kann schuldrechtliche Nebenvereinbarungen über Verzinsung, Abzahlung und Kündigung sowie andere die Schuldbriefforderung betreffende Nebenbestimmungen enthalten. Eine Verweisung auf eine separate Vereinbarung ist zulässig.

Art. 847 A. Allgemeine Vorschriften / V. Schuldbriefforderung und Nebenvereinbarungen / 2. Kündigung

2. Kündigung

1 Der Schuldbrief kann vom Gläubiger oder vom Schuldner mit halbjährlicher Kündigungsfrist auf Ende jeden Monats gekündigt werden, wenn nichts anderes vereinbart ist.

2 Eine solche Vereinbarung darf für den Gläubiger keine kürzere Kündigungsfrist als drei Monate vorsehen, ausser wenn sich der Schuldner mit der Zahlung der Amortisationen oder der Zinsen in Verzug befindet.

Art. 848 A. Allgemeine Vorschriften / VI. Schutz des guten Glaubens

VI. Schutz des guten Glaubens

Die Schuldbriefforderung und das Pfandrecht bestehen dem Eintrag gemäss für jede Person zu Recht, die sich in gutem Glauben auf das Grundbuch verlassen hat.

Art. 849 A. Allgemeine Vorschriften / VII. Einreden des Schuldners

VII. Einreden des Schuldners

1 Der Schuldner kann nur Einreden geltend machen, die sich aus dem Eintrag im Grundbuch ergeben, ihm persönlich gegen den ihn belangenden Gläubiger zustehen oder aus dem Pfandtitel beim Papierschuldbrief hervorgehen.

2 Vereinbarungen, die Nebenbestimmungen zur Schuldbriefforderung enthalten, können einem gutgläubigen Erwerber des Schuldbriefs nur entgegengehalten werden, wenn sie sich aus dem Grundbuch und beim Papier-Schuldbrief zudem aus dem Titel ergeben.

Art. 850 A. Allgemeine Vorschriften / VIII. Bevollmächtigte Person

VIII. Bevollmächtigte Person

1 Bei der Errichtung eines Schuldbriefs kann einer Person eine Vollmacht erteilt werden. Diese Person hat die Zahlungen zu leisten und zu empfangen, Mitteilungen entgegenzunehmen, Pfandentlassungen zu gewähren und im Allgemeinen die Rechte der Gläubiger wie des Schuldners und Eigentümers mit aller Sorgfalt und Unparteilichkeit zu wahren.

2 Der Name der bevollmächtigten Person ist im Grundbuch und auf dem Pfandtitel aufzuführen.

3 Fällt die Vollmacht dahin und können sich die Beteiligten nicht einigen, so trifft das Gericht die nötigen Anordnungen.

Art. 851 A. Allgemeine Vorschriften / IX. Zahlungsort

IX. Zahlungsort

1 Der Schuldner hat alle Zahlungen am Wohnsitz des Gläubigers zu leisten, wenn nichts anderes vereinbart ist.

2 Ist der Wohnsitz des Gläubigers nicht bekannt oder zum Nachteil des Schuldners verlegt worden, so kann sich dieser durch Hinterlegung bei der zuständigen Behörde am eigenen Wohnsitz oder am früheren Wohnsitz des Gläubigers befreien.

Art. 852 A. Allgemeine Vorschriften / X. Änderungen im Rechtsverhältnis

X. Änderungen im Rechtsverhältnis

1 Ändert sich das Rechtsverhältnis zugunsten des Schuldners, namentlich durch Abzahlung der Schuld, so kann der Schuldner vom Gläubiger verlangen, dass dieser der Einschreibung der Änderung in das Grundbuch zustimmt.

2 Beim Papier-Schuldbrief vermerkt das Grundbuchamt diese Änderung auf dem Titel.

3 Ohne diese Einschreibung oder diesen Vermerk auf dem Titel muss sich ein gutgläubiger Erwerber des Schuldbriefs die Wirkung der Änderung im Rechtsverhältnis nicht entgegenhalten lassen.

Art. 853 A. Allgemeine Vorschriften / XI. Tilgung

XI. Tilgung

Ist die Schuldbriefforderung getilgt, so kann der Schuldner vom Gläubiger verlangen, dass dieser:

1.
der Übertragung des Register-Schuldbriefs auf den Namen des Schuldners zustimmt; oder
2.
den Pfandtitel des Papier-Schuldbriefs unentkräftet herausgibt.
Art. 854 A. Allgemeine Vorschriften / XII. Untergang / 1. Wegfall des Gläubigers

XII. Untergang

1. Wegfall des Gläubigers

1 Ist kein Gläubiger vorhanden oder verzichtet der Gläubiger auf das Pfandrecht, so hat der Schuldner die Wahl, den Eintrag im Grundbuch löschen oder stehen zu lassen.

2 Der Schuldner ist auch befugt, den Schuldbrief weiterzuverwenden.

Art. 855 A. Allgemeine Vorschriften / XII. Untergang / 2. Löschung

2. Löschung

Der Papier-Schuldbrief darf im Grundbuch nicht gelöscht werden, bevor der Pfandtitel entkräftet oder durch das Gericht für kraftlos erklärt worden ist.

Art. 856 A. Allgemeine Vorschriften / XIII. Aufrufung des Gläubigers

XIII. Aufrufung des Gläubigers

1 Ist der Gläubiger eines Schuldbriefs seit zehn Jahren unbekannt und sind während dieser Zeit keine Zinse gefordert worden, so kann der Eigentümer des verpfändeten Grundstücks verlangen, dass der Gläubiger durch das Gericht öffentlich aufgefordert wird, sich innert sechs Monaten zu melden.

2 Meldet sich der Gläubiger nicht innert dieser Frist und ergibt die Untersuchung mit hoher Wahrscheinlichkeit, dass die Forderung nicht mehr zu Recht besteht, so wird auf Anordnung des Gerichts:

1.
beim Register-Schuldbrief das Pfandrecht im Grundbuch gelöscht; oder
2.
der Papier-Schuldbrief für kraftlos erklärt und das Pfandrecht im Grundbuch gelöscht.
Art. 857 B. Register-Schuldbrief / I. Errichtung

B. Register-Schuldbrief

I. Errichtung

1 Der Register-Schuldbrief entsteht mit der Eintragung in das Grundbuch.

2 Er wird auf den Namen des Gläubigers oder des Grundeigentümers eingetragen.

Art. 858 B. Register-Schuldbrief / II. Übertragung

II. Übertragung

1 Die Übertragung des Register-Schuldbriefs erfolgt durch Eintragung des neuen Gläubigers in das Grundbuch aufgrund einer schriftlichen Erklärung des bisherigen Gläubigers.

2 Befreiende Wirkung haben nur Leistungen des Schuldners an die Person, die im Zeitpunkt der Zahlung als Gläubiger im Grundbuch eingetragen ist.

Art. 859 B. Register-Schuldbrief / III. Verpfändung, Pfändung und Nutzniessung

III. Verpfändung, Pfändung und Nutzniessung

1 Die Verpfändung des Register-Schuldbriefs erfolgt durch Eintragung des Fahrnispfandgläubigers in das Grundbuch aufgrund einer schriftlichen Erklärung des im Grundbuch eingetragenen Gläubigers.

2 Die Pfändung erfolgt durch Einschreibung der Verfügungsbeschränkung in das Grundbuch.

3 Die Nutzniessung entsteht mit der Einschreibung in das Grundbuch.

Art. 860 C. Papier-Schuldbrief / I. Errichtung / 1. Eintragung

C. Papier-Schuldbrief

I. Errichtung

1. Eintragung

1 Bei der Errichtung eines Papier-Schuldbriefs wird neben der Eintragung in das Grundbuch stets ein Pfandtitel ausgestellt.

2 Als Gläubiger des Papier-Schuldbriefs kann der Inhaber oder eine bestimmte Person, namentlich der Grundeigentümer selbst, bezeichnet werden.

3 Der Eintrag hat schon vor der Ausstellung des Pfandtitels Schuldbriefwirkung.

Art. 861 C. Papier-Schuldbrief / I. Errichtung / 2. Pfandtitel

2. Pfandtitel

1 Der Papier-Schuldbrief wird durch das Grundbuchamt ausgestellt.

2 Er bedarf zu seiner Gültigkeit der Unterschrift des Grundbuchverwalters. Im Übrigen wird seine Form durch den Bundesrat bestimmt.

3 Er darf dem Gläubiger oder dessen Beauftragtem nur mit ausdrücklicher Einwilligung des Schuldners und des Eigentümers des belasteten Grundstücks ausgehändigt werden.

Art. 862 C. Papier-Schuldbrief / II. Schutz des guten Glaubens

II. Schutz des guten Glaubens

1 Der formrichtig als Papier-Schuldbrief erstellte Pfandtitel besteht seinem Wortlaut gemäss für jede Person zu Recht, die sich in gutem Glauben auf ihn verlassen hat.

2 Entspricht der Wortlaut des Pfandtitels nicht dem Eintrag oder fehlt ein Eintrag, so ist das Grundbuch massgebend.

3 Der gutgläubige Erwerber des Titels hat jedoch nach den Vorschriften über das Grundbuch Anspruch auf Schadenersatz.

Art. 863 C. Papier-Schuldbrief / III. Rechte des Gläubigers / 1. Geltendmachung

III. Rechte des Gläubigers

1. Geltendmachung

1 Die Schuldbriefforderung kann nur in Verbindung mit dem Besitz des Pfandtitels veräussert, verpfändet oder überhaupt geltend gemacht werden.

2 Vorbehalten bleibt die Geltendmachung der Forderung in den Fällen, in denen der Titel für kraftlos erklärt wird oder noch gar nicht ausgestellt worden ist.

Art. 864 C. Papier-Schuldbrief / III. Rechte des Gläubigers / 2. Übertragung

2. Übertragung

1 Zur Übertragung der Schuldbriefforderung bedarf es der Übergabe des Pfandtitels an den Erwerber.

2 Lautet der Titel auf den Namen einer Person, so bedarf es ausserdem des Übertragungsvermerkes auf dem Titel unter Angabe des Erwerbers.

Art. 865 C. Papier-Schuldbrief / IV. Kraftloserklärung

IV. Kraftloserklärung

1 Ist ein Pfandtitel abhanden gekommen oder ohne Tilgungsabsicht vernichtet worden, so kann der Gläubiger verlangen, dass das Gericht den Pfandtitel für kraftlos erklärt und der Schuldner zur Zahlung verpflichtet wird oder für die noch nicht fällige Forderung ein neuer Titel ausgefertigt wird.

2 Die Kraftloserklärung erfolgt mit Auskündung auf sechs Monate nach den Vorschriften über die Amortisation der Inhaberpapiere.

3 In gleicher Weise kann der Schuldner die Kraftloserklärung verlangen, wenn ein abbezahlter Titel vermisst wird.

Art. 866–874

Aufgehoben


  Vierter Abschnitt: Ausgabe von Anleihenstiteln mit Grundpfandrecht

Art. 875 A. Obligationen für Anleihen mit Pfandrecht

A. Obligationen für Anleihen mit Pfandrecht

Anleihensobligationen, die auf den Namen der Gläubiger oder auf den Inhaber lauten, können mit einem Grundpfand sichergestellt werden:

1.
durch Errichtung einer Grundpfandverschreibung oder eines Schuldbriefes für das ganze Anleihen und die Bezeichnung eines Stellvertreters für die Gläubiger und den Schuldner;
2.
durch die Errichtung eines Grundpfandrechtes für das ganze Anleihen zugunsten der Ausgabestelle und Bestellung eines Pfandrechtes an dieser Grundpfandforderung für die Obligationsgläubiger.
Art. 876–8831

1 Aufgehoben durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).


  Dreiundzwanzigster Titel: Das Fahrnispfand

  Erster Abschnitt: Faustpfand und Retentionsrecht

Art. 884 A. Faustpfand / I. Bestellung / 1. Besitz des Gläubigers

A. Faustpfand

I. Bestellung

1. Besitz des Gläubigers

1 Fahrnis kann, wo das Gesetz keine Ausnahme macht, nur dadurch verpfändet werden, dass dem Pfandgläubiger der Besitz an der Pfandsache übertragen wird.

2 Der gutgläubige Empfänger der Pfandsache erhält das Pfandrecht, soweit nicht Dritten Rechte aus früherem Besitze zustehen, auch dann, wenn der Verpfänder nicht befugt war, über die Sache zu verfügen.

3 Das Pfandrecht ist nicht begründet, solange der Verpfänder die ausschliessliche Gewalt über die Sache behält.

Art. 885 A. Faustpfand / I. Bestellung / 2. Viehverpfändung

2. Viehverpfändung

1 Zur Sicherung von Forderungen von Geldinstituten und Genossenschaften, die von der zuständigen Behörde ihres Wohnsitzkantons ermächtigt sind, solche Geschäfte abzuschliessen, kann ein Pfandrecht an Vieh ohne Übertragung des Besitzes bestellt werden durch Eintragung in ein Verschreibungsprotokoll und Anzeige an das Betreibungsamt.

2 Der Bundesrat regelt die Führung des Protokolls.1

3 Für die Eintragungen im Protokoll und die damit verbundenen Verrichtungen können die Kantone Gebühren erheben; sie bezeichnen die Kreise, in denen die Protokolle geführt werden, und die Beamten, die mit deren Führung betraut sind.2


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 4. Okt. 1991 über die Teilrevision des Zivilgesetzbuches (Immobiliarsachenrecht) und des Obligationenrechts (Grundstückkauf), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 4. Okt. 1991 über die Teilrevision des Zivilgesetzbuches (Immobiliarsachenrecht) und des Obligationenrechts (Grundstückkauf), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 886 A. Faustpfand / I. Bestellung / 3. Nachverpfändung

3. Nachverpfändung

Ein nachgehendes Faustpfand wird dadurch bestellt, dass der Faustpfandgläubiger schriftlich von der Nachverpfändung benachrichtigt und angewiesen wird, nach seiner Befriedigung das Pfand an den nachfolgenden Gläubiger herauszugeben.

Art. 887 A. Faustpfand / I. Bestellung / 4. Verpfändung durch den Pfandgläubiger

4. Verpfändung durch den Pfandgläubiger

Der Gläubiger kann die Pfandsache nur mit Zustimmung des Verpfänders weiter verpfänden.

Art. 888 A. Faustpfand / II. Untergang / 1. Besitzesverlust

II. Untergang

1. Besitzesverlust

1 Das Faustpfandrecht geht unter, sobald der Gläubiger die Pfandsache nicht mehr besitzt und auch von dritten Besitzern nicht zurückverlangen kann.

2 Es hat keine Wirkung, solange sich das Pfand mit Willen des Gläubigers in der ausschliesslichen Gewalt des Verpfänders befindet.

Art. 889 A. Faustpfand / II. Untergang / 2. Rückgabepflicht

2. Rückgabepflicht

1 Ist das Pfandrecht infolge der Tilgung der Forderung oder aus anderem Grunde untergegangen, so hat der Gläubiger die Pfandsache an den Berechtigten herauszugeben.

2 Vor seiner vollen Befriedigung ist er nicht verpflichtet, das Pfand ganz oder zum Teil herauszugeben.

Art. 890 A. Faustpfand / II. Untergang / 3. Haftung des Gläubigers

3. Haftung des Gläubigers

1 Der Gläubiger haftet für den aus der Wertverminderung oder aus dem Untergang der verpfändeten Sache entstandenen Schaden, sofern er nicht nachweist, dass dieser ohne sein Verschulden eingetreten ist.

2 Hat der Gläubiger das Pfand eigenmächtig veräussert oder weiter verpfändet, so haftet er für allen hieraus entstandenen Schaden.

Art. 891 A. Faustpfand / III. Wirkung / 1. Rechte des Gläubigers

III. Wirkung

1. Rechte des Gläubigers

1 Der Gläubiger hat im Falle der Nichtbefriedigung ein Recht darauf, sich aus dem Erlös des Pfandes bezahlt zu machen.

2 Das Pfandrecht bietet ihm Sicherheit für die Forderung mit Einschluss der Vertragszinse, der Betreibungskosten und der Verzugszinse.

Art. 892 A. Faustpfand / III. Wirkung / 2. Umfang der Pfandhaft

2. Umfang der Pfandhaft

1 Das Pfandrecht belastet die Pfandsache mit Einschluss der Zugehör.

2 Die natürlichen Früchte der Pfandsache hat der Gläubiger, wenn es nicht anders verabredet ist, an den Eigentümer herauszugeben, sobald sie aufhören, Bestandteil der Sache zu sein.

3 Früchte, die zur Zeit der Pfandverwertung Bestandteil der Pfandsache sind, unterliegen der Pfandhaft.

Art. 893 A. Faustpfand / III. Wirkung / 3. Rang der Pfandrechte

3. Rang der Pfandrechte

1 Haften mehrere Pfandrechte auf der gleichen Sache, so werden die Gläubiger nach ihrem Range befriedigt.

2 Der Rang der Pfandrechte wird durch die Zeit ihrer Errichtung bestimmt.

Art. 894 A. Faustpfand / III. Wirkung / 4. Verfallsvertrag

4. Verfallsvertrag

Jede Abrede, wonach die Pfandsache dem Gläubiger, wenn er nicht befriedigt wird, als Eigentum zufallen soll, ist ungültig.

Art. 895 B. Retentionsrecht / I. Voraussetzungen

B. Retentionsrecht

I. Voraussetzungen

1 Bewegliche Sachen und Wertpapiere, die sich mit Willen des Schuldners im Besitze des Gläubigers befinden, kann dieser bis zur Befriedigung für seine Forderung zurückbehalten, wenn die Forderung fällig ist und ihrer Natur nach mit dem Gegenstande der Retention in Zusammenhang steht.

2 Unter Kaufleuten besteht dieser Zusammenhang, sobald der Besitz sowohl als die Forderung aus ihrem geschäftlichen Verkehr herrühren.

3 Der Gläubiger hat das Retentionsrecht, soweit nicht Dritten Rechte aus früherem Besitze zustehen, auch dann, wenn die Sache, die er in gutem Glauben empfangen hat, nicht dem Schuldner gehört.

Art. 896 B. Retentionsrecht / II. Ausnahmen

II. Ausnahmen

1 An Sachen, deren Natur eine Verwertung nicht zulässt, kann das Retentionsrecht nicht ausgeübt werden.

2 Ebenso ist die Retention ausgeschlossen, wenn ihr eine vom Gläubiger übernommene Verpflichtung, oder eine vom Schuldner vor oder bei der Übergabe der Sache erteilte Vorschrift oder die öffentliche Ordnung entgegensteht.

Art. 897 B. Retentionsrecht / III. Bei Zahlungsunfähigkeit

III. Bei Zahlungsunfähigkeit

1 Bei Zahlungsunfähigkeit des Schuldners hat der Gläubiger das Retentionsrecht auch dann, wenn seine Forderung nicht fällig ist.

2 Ist die Zahlungsunfähigkeit erst nach der Übergabe der Sache eingetreten oder dem Gläubiger bekannt geworden, so kann dieser die Retention auch dann ausüben, wenn ihr eine von ihm vorher übernommene Verpflichtung oder eine besondere Vorschrift des Schuldners entgegensteht.

Art. 898 B. Retentionsrecht / IV. Wirkung

IV. Wirkung

1 Kommt der Schuldner seiner Verpflichtung nicht nach, so kann der Gläubiger, wenn er nicht hinreichend sichergestellt wird, die zurückbehaltene Sache nach vorgängiger Benachrichtigung des Schuldners wie ein Faustpfand verwerten.

2 Zur Verwertung zurückbehaltener Namenpapiere hat in Vertretung des Schuldners der Betreibungs- oder der Konkursbeamte das Erforderliche vorzunehmen.


  Zweiter Abschnitt: Das Pfandrecht an Forderungen und andern Rechten

Art. 899 A. Im Allgemeinen

A. Im Allgemeinen

1 Forderungen und andere Rechte können verpfändet werden, wenn sie übertragbar sind.

2 Das Pfandrecht an ihnen steht, wo es nicht anders geordnet ist, unter den Bestimmungen über das Faustpfand.

Art. 900 B. Errichtung / I. Bei Forderungen mit oder ohne Schuldschein

B. Errichtung

I. Bei Forderungen mit oder ohne Schuldschein

1 Zur Verpfändung einer Forderung, für die keine Urkunde oder nur ein Schuldschein besteht, bedarf es der schriftlichen Abfassung des Pfandvertrages und gegebenenfalls der Übergabe des Schuldscheines.

2 Der Pfandgläubiger und der Verpfänder können den Schuldner von der Pfandbestellung benachrichtigen.

3 Zur Verpfändung anderer Rechte bedarf es neben einem schriftlichen Pfandvertrag der Beobachtung der Form, die für die Übertragung vorgesehen ist.

Art. 901 B. Errichtung / II. Bei Wertpapieren

II. Bei Wertpapieren

1 Bei Inhaberpapieren genügt zur Verpfändung die Übertragung der Urkunde an den Pfandgläubiger.

2 Bei andern Wertpapieren bedarf es der Übergabe der Urkunde in Verbindung mit einem Indossament oder mit einer Abtretungserklärung.

3 Die Verpfändung von Bucheffekten richtet sich ausschliesslich nach dem Bucheffektengesetz vom 3. Oktober 20081.2


1 SR 957.1
2 Eingefügt durch Anhang Ziff. 1 des Bucheffektengesetzes vom 3. Okt. 2008, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2010 (AS 2009 3577; BBl 2006 9315).

Art. 902 B. Errichtung / III. Bei Warenpapieren

III. Bei Warenpapieren

1 Bestehen für Waren Wertpapiere, die sie vertreten, so wird durch Verpfändung der Wertpapiere ein Pfandrecht an der Ware bestellt.

2 Besteht neben einem Warenpapier noch ein besonderer Pfandschein (Warrant), so genügt zur Pfandbestellung die Verpfändung des Pfandscheines, sobald auf dem Warenpapier selbst die Verpfändung mit Forderungsbetrag und Verfalltag eingetragen ist.

Art. 903 B. Errichtung / IV. Nachverpfändung

IV. Nachverpfändung

Ein nachgehendes Forderungspfandrecht ist nur gültig, wenn der vorgehende Pfandgläubiger vom Gläubiger der Forderung oder vom nachgehenden Pfandgläubiger von der Nachverpfändung schriftlich benachrichtigt wird.

Art. 904 C. Wirkung / I. Umfang der Pfandhaft

C. Wirkung

I. Umfang der Pfandhaft

1 Beim Pfandrecht an einer verzinslichen Forderung oder an einer Forderung mit andern zeitlich wiederkehrenden Nebenleistungen, wie Dividenden, gilt, wenn es nicht anders vereinbart ist, nur der laufende Anspruch als mitverpfändet, und der Gläubiger hat keinen Anspruch auf die verfallenen Leistungen.

2 Bestehen jedoch besondere Papiere für solche Nebenrechte, so gelten diese, wenn es nicht anders vereinbart ist, insoweit für mitverpfändet, als das Pfandrecht an ihnen formrichtig bestellt ist.

Art. 905 C. Wirkung / II. Vertretung verpfändeter Aktien und Stammanteile von Gesellschaften mit beschränkter Haftung

II. Vertretung verpfändeter Aktien und Stammanteile von Gesellschaften mit beschränkter Haftung1

1 Verpfändete Aktien werden in der Generalversammlung durch die Aktionäre und nicht durch die Pfandgläubiger vertreten.

2 Verpfändete Stammanteile einer Gesellschaft mit beschränkter Haftung werden in der Gesellschafterversammlung durch die Gesellschafter und nicht durch die Pfandgläubiger vertreten.2


1 Eingefügt durch Anhang Ziff. 1 des BG vom 16. Dez. 2005 (GmbH-Recht sowie Anpassungen im Aktien-, Genossenschafts-, Handelsregister- und Firmenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).
2 Eingefügt durch Anhang Ziff. 1 des BG vom 16. Dez. 2005 (GmbH-Recht sowie Anpassungen im Aktien-, Genossenschafts-, Handelsregister- und Firmenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).

Art. 906 C. Wirkung / III. Verwaltung und Abzahlung

III. Verwaltung und Abzahlung

1 Erfordert die sorgfältige Verwaltung die Kündigung und Einziehung der verpfändeten Forderung, so darf deren Gläubiger sie vornehmen und der Pfandgläubiger verlangen, dass sie vorgenommen werde.

2 Zahlungen darf der Schuldner, sobald er von der Verpfändung benachrichtigt ist, an den einen nur mit Einwilligung des andern entrichten.

3 Wo diese fehlt, hat er den geschuldeten Betrag zu hinterlegen.


  Dritter Abschnitt: Das Versatzpfand

Art. 907 A. Versatzanstalt / I. Erteilung der Gewerbebefugnis

A. Versatzanstalt

I. Erteilung der Gewerbebefugnis

1 Wer das Pfandleihgewerbe betreiben will, bedarf hiezu einer Bewilligung der kantonalen Regierung.

2 Die Kantone können bestimmen, dass diese Bewilligung nur an öffentliche Anstalten des Kantons oder der Gemeinden sowie an gemeinnützige Unternehmungen erteilt werden soll.

3 Die Kantone können von den Anstalten Gebühren erheben.

Art. 908 A. Versatzanstalt / II. Dauer

II. Dauer

1 Die Bewilligung wird an private Anstalten nur auf eine bestimmte Zeit erteilt, kann aber erneuert werden.

2 Sie kann jederzeit widerrufen werden, wenn die Anstalt die Bestimmungen, denen ihr Betrieb unterstellt ist, nicht beobachtet.

Art. 909 B. Versatzpfandrecht / I. Errichtung

B. Versatzpfandrecht

I. Errichtung

Das Versatzpfand wird dadurch begründet, dass der Pfandgegenstand der Anstalt übergeben und hiefür ein Versatzschein ausgestellt wird.

Art. 910 B. Versatzpfandrecht / II. Wirkung / 1. Verkauf des Pfandes

II. Wirkung

1. Verkauf des Pfandes

1 Ist das Pfand auf den vereinbarten Termin nicht ausgelöst worden, so kann die Anstalt nach vorgängiger öffentlicher Aufforderung zur Einlösung den Pfandgegenstand amtlich verkaufen lassen.

2 Eine persönliche Forderung kann die Anstalt nicht geltend machen.

Art. 911 B. Versatzpfandrecht / II. Wirkung / 2. Recht auf den Überschuss

2. Recht auf den Überschuss

1 Ergibt sich aus dem Kauferlös ein Überschuss über die Pfandsumme, so hat der Berechtigte Anspruch auf dessen Herausgabe.

2 Mehrere Forderungen gegen denselben Schuldner dürfen bei Berechnung des Überschusses als ein Ganzes behandelt werden.

3 Der Anspruch auf den Überschuss verjährt in fünf Jahren nach dem Verkauf der Sache.

Art. 912 B. Versatzpfandrecht / III. Auslösung des Pfandes / 1. Recht auf Auslösung

III. Auslösung des Pfandes

1. Recht auf Auslösung

1 Das Pfand kann von dem Berechtigten gegen Rückgabe des Versatzscheines ausgelöst werden, solange der Verkauf nicht stattgefunden hat.

2 Kann er den Schein nicht beibringen, so ist er nach Eintritt der Fälligkeit zur Auslösung des Pfandes befugt, wenn er sich über sein Recht ausweist.

3 Diese Befugnis steht dem Berechtigten nach Ablauf von sechs Monaten seit der Fälligkeit auch dann zu, wenn die Anstalt sich ausdrücklich vorbehalten hat, das Pfand nur gegen Rückgabe des Scheines auszulösen.

Art. 913 B. Versatzpfandrecht / III. Auslösung des Pfandes / 2. Rechte der Anstalt

2. Rechte der Anstalt

1 Die Anstalt ist berechtigt, bei jeder Auslösung den Zins für den ganzen laufenden Monat zu verlangen.

2 Hat die Anstalt sich ausdrücklich vorbehalten, das Pfand gegen Rückgabe des Scheines an jedermann herauszugeben, so ist sie zu dieser Herausgabe befugt, solange sie nicht weiss oder wissen sollte, dass der Inhaber auf unredliche Weise in den Besitz des Scheines gelangt ist.

Art. 914 C. Kauf auf Rückkauf

C. Kauf auf Rückkauf

Der gewerbsmässige Kauf auf Rückkauf wird dem Versatzpfande gleichgestellt.

Art. 915 D. Ordnung des Gewerbes

D. Ordnung des Gewerbes

1 Die Kantone können zur Ordnung des Pfandleihgewerbes weitere Vorschriften aufstellen.

2 ...1


1 Aufgehoben durch Ziff. II 21 des BG vom 15. Dez. 1989 über die Genehmigung kantonaler Erlasse durch den Bund, mit Wirkung seit 1. Febr. 1991 (AS 1991 362; BBl 1988 II 1333).


  Vierter Abschnitt: ...

Art. 9169181

1 Aufgehoben durch Art. 52 Abs. 2 des Pfandbriefgesetzes vom 25. Juni 1930, mit Wirkung seit 1. Febr. 1931 (BS 2 747; BBl 1925 III 527).


  Dritte Abteilung: Besitz und Grundbuch

  Vierundzwanzigster Titel: Der Besitz

Art. 919 A. Begriff und Arten / I. Begriff

A. Begriff und Arten

I. Begriff

1 Wer die tatsächliche Gewalt über eine Sache hat, ist ihr Besitzer.

2 Dem Sachbesitz wird bei Grunddienstbarkeiten und Grundlasten die tatsächliche Ausübung des Rechtes gleichgestellt.

Art. 920 A. Begriff und Arten / II. Selbständiger und unselbständiger Besitz

II. Selbständiger und unselbständiger Besitz

1 Hat ein Besitzer die Sache einem andern zu einem beschränkten dinglichen oder einem persönlichen Recht übertragen, so sind sie beide Besitzer.

2 Wer eine Sache als Eigentümer besitzt, hat selbständigen, der andere unselbständigen Besitz.

Art. 921 A. Begriff und Arten / III. Vorübergehende Unterbrechung

III. Vorübergehende Unterbrechung

Eine ihrer Natur nach vorübergehende Verhinderung oder Unterlassung der Ausübung der tatsächlichen Gewalt hebt den Besitz nicht auf.

Art. 922 B. Übertragung / I. Unter Anwesenden

B. Übertragung

I. Unter Anwesenden

1 Der Besitz wird übertragen durch die Übergabe der Sache selbst oder der Mittel, die dem Empfänger die Gewalt über die Sache verschaffen.

2 Die Übergabe ist vollzogen, sobald sich der Empfänger mit Willen des bisherigen Besitzers in der Lage befindet, die Gewalt über die Sache auszuüben.

Art. 923 B. Übertragung / II. Unter Abwesenden

II. Unter Abwesenden

Geschieht die Übergabe unter Abwesenden, so ist sie mit der Übergabe der Sache an den Empfänger oder dessen Stellvertreter vollzogen.

Art. 924 B. Übertragung / III. Ohne Übergabe

III. Ohne Übergabe

1 Ohne Übergabe kann der Besitz einer Sache erworben werden, wenn ein Dritter oder der Veräusserer selbst auf Grund eines besonderen Rechtsverhältnisses im Besitz der Sache verbleibt.

2 Gegenüber dem Dritten ist dieser Besitzesübergang erst dann wirksam, wenn ihm der Veräusserer davon Anzeige gemacht hat.

3 Der Dritte kann dem Erwerber die Herausgabe aus den gleichen Gründen verweigern, aus denen er sie dem Veräusserer hätte verweigern können.

Art. 925 B. Übertragung / IV. Bei Warenpapieren

IV. Bei Warenpapieren

1 Werden für Waren, die einem Frachtführer oder einem Lagerhaus übergeben sind, Wertpapiere ausgestellt, die sie vertreten, so gilt die Übertragung einer solchen Urkunde als Übertragung der Ware selbst.

2 Steht jedoch dem gutgläubigen Empfänger des Warenpapiers ein gutgläubiger Empfänger der Ware gegenüber, so geht dieser jenem vor.

Art. 926 C. Bedeutung / I. Besitzesschutz / 1. Abwehr von Angriffen

C. Bedeutung

I. Besitzesschutz

1. Abwehr von Angriffen

1 Jeder Besitzer darf sich verbotener Eigenmacht mit Gewalt erwehren.

2 Er darf sich, wenn ihm die Sache durch Gewalt oder heimlich entzogen wird, sofort des Grundstückes durch Vertreibung des Täters wieder bemächtigen und die bewegliche Sache dem auf frischer Tat betroffenen und unmittelbar verfolgten Täter wieder abnehmen.

3 Er hat sich dabei jeder nach den Umständen nicht gerechtfertigten Gewalt zu enthalten.

Art. 927 C. Bedeutung / I. Besitzesschutz / 2. Klage aus Besitzesentziehung

2. Klage aus Besitzesentziehung

1 Wer einem andern eine Sache durch verbotene Eigenmacht entzogen hat, ist verpflichtet, sie zurückzugeben, auch wenn er ein besseres Recht auf die Sache behauptet.

2 Wenn der Beklagte sofort sein besseres Recht nachweist und auf Grund desselben dem Kläger die Sache wieder abverlangen könnte, so kann er die Rückgabe verweigern.

3 Die Klage geht auf Rückgabe der Sache und Schadenersatz.

Art. 928 C. Bedeutung / I. Besitzesschutz / 3. Klage aus Besitzesstörung

3. Klage aus Besitzesstörung

1 Wird der Besitz durch verbotene Eigenmacht gestört, so kann der Besitzer gegen den Störenden Klage erheben, auch wenn dieser ein Recht zu haben behauptet.

2 Die Klage geht auf Beseitigung der Störung, Unterlassung fernerer Störung und Schadenersatz.

Art. 929 C. Bedeutung / I. Besitzesschutz / 4. Zulässigkeit und Verjährung der Klage

4. Zulässigkeit und Verjährung der Klage

1 Die Klage aus verbotener Eigenmacht ist nur zulässig, wenn der Besitzer sofort, nachdem ihm der Eingriff und der Täter bekannt geworden sind, die Sache zurückfordert oder Beseitigung der Störung verlangt.

2 Die Klage verjährt nach Ablauf eines Jahres; das mit der Entziehung oder Störung zu laufen beginnt, auch wenn der Besitzer erst später von dem Eingriff und dem Täter Kenntnis erhalten hat.

Art. 930 C. Bedeutung / II. Rechtsschutz / 1. Vermutung des Eigentums

II. Rechtsschutz

1. Vermutung des Eigentums

1 Vom Besitzer einer beweglichen Sache wird vermutet, dass er ihr Eigentümer sei.

2 Für jeden früheren Besitzer besteht die Vermutung, dass er in der Zeit seines Besitzes Eigentümer der Sache gewesen ist.

Art. 931 C. Bedeutung / II. Rechtsschutz / 2. Vermutung bei unselbständigem Besitz

2. Vermutung bei unselbständigem Besitz

1 Besitzt jemand eine bewegliche Sache, ohne Eigentümer sein zu wollen, so kann er die Vermutung des Eigentums dessen geltend machen, von dem er sie in gutem Glauben empfangen hat.

2 Besitzt jemand eine bewegliche Sache mit dem Anspruche eines beschränkten dinglichen oder eines persönlichen Rechtes, so wird der Bestand dieses Rechtes vermutet, er kann aber demjenigen gegenüber, von dem er die Sache erhalten hat, diese Vermutung nicht geltend machen.

Art. 932 C. Bedeutung / II. Rechtsschutz / 3. Klage gegen den Besitzer

3. Klage gegen den Besitzer

Der Besitzer einer beweglichen Sache kann sich gegenüber jeder Klage auf die Vermutung zugunsten seines besseren Rechtes berufen, unter Vorbehalt der Bestimmungen über eigenmächtige Entziehung oder Störung des Besitzes.

Art. 933 C. Bedeutung / II. Rechtsschutz / 4. Verfügungs- und Rückforderungsrecht / a. Bei anvertrauten Sachen

4. Verfügungs- und Rückforderungsrecht

a. Bei anvertrauten Sachen

Wer eine bewegliche Sache in gutem Glauben zu Eigentum oder zu einem beschränkten dinglichen Recht übertragen erhält, ist in seinem Erwerbe auch dann zu schützen, wenn sie dem Veräusserer ohne jede Ermächtigung zur Übertragung anvertraut worden war.

Art. 934 C. Bedeutung / II. Rechtsschutz / 4. Verfügungs- und Rückforderungsrecht / b. Bei abhanden gekommenen Sachen

b. Bei abhanden gekommenen Sachen

1 Der Besitzer, dem eine bewegliche Sache gestohlen wird oder verloren geht oder sonst wider seinen Willen abhanden kommt, kann sie während fünf Jahren jedem Empfänger abfordern. Vorbehalten bleibt Artikel 722.1

1bis Das Rückforderungsrecht für Kulturgüter im Sinne von Artikel 2 Absatz 1 des Kulturgütertransfergesetzes vom 20. Juni 20032, die gegen den Willen des Eigentümers abhanden gekommen sind, verjährt ein Jahr, nachdem der Eigentümer Kenntnis erlangt hat, wo und bei wem sich das Kulturgut befindet, spätestens jedoch 30 Jahre nach dem Abhandenkommen.3

2 Ist die Sache öffentlich versteigert oder auf dem Markt oder durch einen Kaufmann, der mit Waren der gleichen Art handelt, übertragen worden, so kann sie dem ersten und jedem spätern gutgläubigen Empfänger nur gegen Vergütung des von ihm bezahlten Preises abgefordert werden.

3 Die Rückleistung erfolgt im Übrigen nach den Vorschriften über die Ansprüche des gutgläubigen Besitzers.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 4. Okt. 2002 (Grundsatzartikel Tiere), in Kraft seit 1. April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806).
2 SR 444.1
3 Eingefügt durch Art. 32 Ziff. 1 des Kulturgütertransfergesetzes vom 20. Juni 2003, in Kraft seit 1. Juni 2005 (AS 2005 1869; BBl 2002 535).

Art. 935 C. Bedeutung / II. Rechtsschutz / 4. Verfügungs- und Rückforderungsrecht / c. Bei Geld- und Inhaberpapieren

c. Bei Geld- und Inhaberpapieren

Geld und Inhaberpapiere können, auch wenn sie dem Besitzer gegen seinen Willen abhanden gekommen sind, dem gutgläubigen Empfänger nicht abgefordert werden.

Art. 936 C. Bedeutung / II. Rechtsschutz / 4. Verfügungs- und Rückforderungsrecht / d. Bei bösem Glauben

d. Bei bösem Glauben

1 Wer den Besitz einer beweglichen Sache nicht in gutem Glauben erworben hat, kann von dem früheren Besitzer jederzeit auf Herausgabe belangt werden.

2 Hatte jedoch auch der frühere Besitzer nicht in gutem Glauben erworben, so kann er einem spätern Besitzer die Sache nicht abfordern.

Art. 937 C. Bedeutung / II. Rechtsschutz / 5. Vermutung bei Grundstücken

5. Vermutung bei Grundstücken

1 Hinsichtlich der in das Grundbuch aufgenommenen Grundstücke besteht eine Vermutung des Rechtes und eine Klage aus dem Besitze nur für denjenigen, der eingetragen ist.

2 Wer jedoch über das Grundstück die tatsächliche Gewalt hat, kann wegen eigenmächtiger Entziehung oder Störung des Besitzes Klage erheben.

Art. 938 C. Bedeutung / III. Verantwortlichkeit / 1. Gutgläubiger Besitzer / a. Nutzung

III. Verantwortlichkeit

1. Gutgläubiger Besitzer

a. Nutzung

1 Wer eine Sache in gutem Glauben besitzt, wird dadurch, dass er sie seinem vermuteten Rechte gemäss gebraucht und nutzt, dem Berechtigten nicht ersatzpflichtig.

2 Was hiebei untergeht oder Schaden leidet, braucht er nicht zu ersetzen.

Art. 939 C. Bedeutung / III. Verantwortlichkeit / 1. Gutgläubiger Besitzer / b. Ersatzforderungen

b. Ersatzforderungen

1 Verlangt der Berechtigte die Auslieferung der Sache, so kann der gutgläubige Besitzer für die notwendigen und nützlichen Verwendungen Ersatz beanspruchen und die Auslieferung bis zur Ersatzleistung verweigern.

2 Für andere Verwendungen kann er keinen Ersatz verlangen, darf aber, wenn ihm ein solcher nicht angeboten wird, vor der Rückgabe der Sache, was er verwendet hat, wieder wegnehmen, soweit dies ohne Beschädigung der Sache selbst geschehen kann.

3 Die vom Besitzer bezogenen Früchte sind auf die Forderung für die Verwendungen anzurechnen.

Art. 940 C. Bedeutung / III. Verantwortlichkeit / 2. Bösgläubiger Besitzer

2. Bösgläubiger Besitzer

1 Wer eine Sache in bösem Glauben besitzt, muss sie dem Berechtigten herausgeben und für allen durch die Vorenthaltung verursachten Schaden sowie für die bezogenen oder versäumten Früchte Ersatz leisten.

2 Für Verwendungen hat er eine Forderung nur, wenn solche auch für den Berechtigten notwendig gewesen wären.

3 Solange der Besitzer nicht weiss, an wen er die Sache herausgeben soll, haftet er nur für den Schaden, den er verschuldet hat.

Art. 941 C. Bedeutung / IV. Ersitzung

IV. Ersitzung

Der zur Ersitzung berechtigte Besitzer darf sich den Besitz seines Vorgängers anrechnen, insofern auch dessen Besitz zur Ersitzung tauglich gewesen ist.


  Fünfundzwanzigster Titel: Das Grundbuch

Art. 942 A. Einrichtung / I. Bestand / 1. Im Allgemeinen

A. Einrichtung

I. Bestand

1. Im Allgemeinen

1 Über die Rechte an den Grundstücken wird ein Grundbuch geführt.

2 Das Grundbuch besteht aus dem Hauptbuch und den das Hauptbuch ergänzenden Plänen, Liegenschaftsverzeichnissen, Belegen, Liegenschaftsbeschreibungen und dem Tagebuche.

3 Das Grundbuch kann auf Papier oder mittels Informatik geführt werden.1

4 Bei der Grundbuchführung mittels Informatik kommen die Rechtswirkungen den im System ordnungsgemäss gespeicherten und auf den Geräten des Grundbuchamtes durch technische Hilfsmittel in Schrift und Zahlen lesbaren oder in Plänen dargestellten Daten zu.2


1 Eingefügt durch Anhang Ziff. 1 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2003 über die elektronische Signatur, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2005 (AS 2004 5085; BBl 2001 5679).
2 Eingefügt durch Anhang Ziff. 1 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2003 über die elektronische Signatur, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2005 (AS 2004 5085; BBl 2001 5679).

Art. 9431A. Einrichtung / I. Bestand / 2. Aufnahme / a. Gegenstand

2. Aufnahme

a. Gegenstand

1 Als Grundstücke werden in das Grundbuch aufgenommen:

1.
die Liegenschaften;
2.
die selbständigen und dauernden Rechte an Grundstücken;
3.
die Bergwerke;
4.
die Miteigentumsanteile an Grundstücken.

2 Über die Voraussetzungen und über die Art der Aufnahme der selbständigen und dauernden Rechte, der Bergwerke und der Miteigentumsanteile an Grundstücken setzt eine Verordnung des Bundesrates das Nähere fest.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. III des BG vom 19. Dez. 1963, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 944 A. Einrichtung / I. Bestand / 2. Aufnahme / b. Ausnahmen

b. Ausnahmen

1 Die nicht im Privateigentum stehenden und die dem öffentlichen Gebrauche dienenden Grundstücke werden in das Grundbuch nur aufgenommen, wenn dingliche Rechte daran zur Eintragung gebracht werden sollen oder die Kantone deren Aufnahme vorschreiben.

2 Verwandelt sich ein aufgenommenes Grundstück in ein solches, das nicht aufzunehmen ist, so wird es vom Grundbuch ausgeschlossen.

3 ...1


1 Aufgehoben durch Ziff. I des BG vom 4. Okt. 1991 über die Teilrevision des Zivilgesetzbuches (Immobiliarsachenrecht) und des Obligationenrechts (Grundstückkauf), mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 945 A. Einrichtung / I. Bestand / 3. Bücher / a. Hauptbuch

3. Bücher

a. Hauptbuch

1 Jedes Grundstück erhält im Hauptbuch ein eigenes Blatt und eine eigene Nummer.

2 Das Verfahren, das bei Teilung eines Grundstückes oder bei Vereinigung mehrerer zu beobachten ist, wird durch eine Verordnung des Bundesrates festgesetzt.

Art. 946 A. Einrichtung / I. Bestand / 3. Bücher / b. Grundbuchblatt

b. Grundbuchblatt

1 Auf jedem Blatt werden in besondern Abteilungen eingetragen:

1.
das Eigentum;
2.
die Dienstbarkeiten und Grundlasten, die mit dem Grundstück verbunden sind, oder die darauf ruhen;
3.
die Pfandrechte, mit denen es belastet ist.

2 Die Zugehör wird auf Begehren des Eigentümers angemerkt und darf, wenn dies erfolgt ist, nur mit Zustimmung aller aus dem Grundbuche ersichtlichen Berechtigten gestrichen werden.

Art. 947 A. Einrichtung / I. Bestand / 3. Bücher / c. Kollektivblätter

c. Kollektivblätter

1 Mit Einwilligung des Eigentümers können mehrere Grundstücke, auch wenn sie nicht unter sich zusammenhangen, auf ein einziges Blatt genommen werden.

2 Die Eintragungen auf diesem Blatt gelten mit Ausnahme der Grunddienstbarkeiten für alle Grundstücke gemeinsam.

3 Der Eigentümer kann jederzeit die Ausscheidung einzelner Grundstücke aus einem Kollektivblatte verlangen, unter Vorbehalt der daran bestehenden Rechte.

Art. 948 A. Einrichtung / I. Bestand / 3. Bücher / d. Tagebuch, Belege

d. Tagebuch, Belege

1 Die Anmeldungen zur Eintragung in das Grundbuch werden nach ihrer zeitlichen Reihenfolge ohne Aufschub in das Tagebuch eingeschrieben, unter Angabe der anmeldenden Person und ihres Begehrens.

2 Die Belege, auf deren Vorlegung hin die Eintragungen in das Grundbuch vorgenommen werden, sind zweckmässig zu ordnen und aufzubewahren.

3 An die Stelle der Belege kann in den Kantonen, die eine öffentliche Beurkundung durch den Grundbuchverwalter vornehmen lassen, ein Urkundenprotokoll treten, dessen Einschreibungen die öffentliche Beurkundung herstellen.

Art. 949 A. Einrichtung / I. Bestand / 4. Verordnungen / a. Im Allgemeinen

4. Verordnungen

a. Im Allgemeinen1

1 Der Bundesrat stellt die Formulare für das Grundbuch auf, erlässt die nötigen Verordnungen und kann zur Regelung des Grundbuchwesens die Führung von Hilfsregistern vorschreiben.

2 Die Kantone sind ermächtigt, über die Eintragung der dinglichen Rechte an Grundstücken, die dem kantonalen Rechte unterstellt bleiben, besondere Vorschriften aufzustellen, die jedoch zu ihrer Gültigkeit der Genehmigung des Bundes bedürfen.


1 Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 1 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2003 über die elektronische Signatur, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2005 (AS 2004 5085; BBl 2001 5679).

Art. 949a1A. Einrichtung / I. Bestand / 4. Verordnungen / b. Bei Führung des Grundbuchs mittels Informatik

b. Bei Führung des Grundbuchs mittels Informatik

1 Ein Kanton, der das Grundbuch mittels Informatik führen will, bedarf einer Ermächtigung des Eidgenössischen Justiz- und Polizeidepartements.

2 Der Bundesrat regelt:

1.
das Ermächtigungsverfahren;
2.
den Umfang und die technischen Einzelheiten der Grundbuchführung mittels Informatik, insbesondere den Vorgang, durch welchen die Eintragungen rechtswirksam werden;
3.
ob und unter welchen Voraussetzungen der Geschäftsverkehr mit dem Grundbuchamt auf elektronischem Weg zulässig ist;
4.
ob und unter welchen Voraussetzungen die ohne Interessennachweis einsehbaren Daten des Hauptbuches der Öffentlichkeit zur Verfügung gestellt werden;
5.
den Zugriff auf die Daten, die Aufzeichnung der Abfragen sowie die Voraussetzungen für den Entzug der Zugriffsberechtigung bei missbräuchlicher Anwendung;
6.
den Datenschutz;
7.
die langfristige Sicherung und die Archivierung von Daten.

3 Das Eidgenössische Justiz- und Polizeidepartement sowie das Eidgenössische Departement für Verteidigung, Bevölkerungsschutz und Sport legen für das Grundbuch und für die amtliche Vermessung Datenmodelle und einheitliche Schnittstellen fest.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 4. Okt. 1991 über die Teilrevision des Zivilgesetzbuches (Immobiliarsachenrecht) und des Obligationenrechts (Grundstückkauf) (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953). Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 1 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2003 über die elektronische Signatur, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2005 (AS 2004 5085; BBl 2001 5679).

Art. 949b1A. Einrichtung / I. Bestand / 4a. ...

4a. ...


1 Noch nicht in Kraft (AS 2018 4017).

Art. 949c1A. Einrichtung / I. Bestand / 4b. ...

4b. ...


1 Noch nicht in Kraft (AS 2018 4017).

Art. 949d1A. Einrichtung / I. Bestand / 4c. Beizug Privater zur Nutzung des informatisierten Grundbuchs

4c. Beizug Privater zur Nutzung des informatisierten Grundbuchs

1 Die Kantone, die das Grundbuch mittels Informatik führen, können private Aufgabenträger einsetzen, um:

1.
den Zugriff auf die Daten des Grundbuchs im Abrufverfahren zu gewährleisten;
2.
den öffentlichen Zugang zu den ohne Interessennachweis einsehbaren Daten des Hauptbuchs zu gewährleisten;
3.
den elektronischen Geschäftsverkehr mit dem Grundbuchamt abzuwickeln.

2 Die privaten Aufgabenträger unterstehen der Aufsicht der Kantone und der Oberaufsicht des Bundes.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 15. Dez. 2017 (Beurkundung des Personenstands und Grundbuch), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 4017; BBl 2014 3551).

Art. 9501A. Einrichtung / I. Bestand / 5. Amtliche Vermessung

5. Amtliche Vermessung

1 Die Aufnahme und Beschreibung der einzelnen Grundstücke im Grundbuch erfolgt auf der Grundlage der amtlichen Vermessung, namentlich eines Plans für das Grundbuch.

2 Das Geoinformationsgesetz vom 5. Oktober 20072 regelt die qualitativen und technischen Anforderungen an die amtliche Vermessung.


1 Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. II des BG vom 5. Okt. 2007 über Geoinformation, in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2008 (AS 2008 2793; BBl 2006 7817).
2 SR 510.62

Art. 951 A. Einrichtung / II. Grundbuchführung / 1. Kreise / a. Zugehörigkeit

II. Grundbuchführung

1. Kreise

a. Zugehörigkeit

1 Zur Führung des Grundbuches werden Kreise gebildet.

2 Die Grundstücke werden in das Grundbuch des Kreises aufgenommen, in dem sie liegen.

Art. 952 A. Einrichtung / II. Grundbuchführung / 1. Kreise / b. Grundstücke in mehreren Kreisen

b. Grundstücke in mehreren Kreisen

1 Liegt ein Grundstück in mehreren Kreisen, so ist es in jedem Kreise in das Grundbuch aufzunehmen mit Verweisung auf das Grundbuch der übrigen Kreise.

2 Die Anmeldungen und rechtsbegründenden Eintragungen erfolgen in dem Grundbuche des Kreises, in dem der grössere Teil des Grundstückes liegt.

3 Die Eintragungen in diesem Grundbuch sind den andern Ämtern vom Grundbuchverwalter mitzuteilen.

Art. 953 A. Einrichtung / II. Grundbuchführung / 2. Grundbuchämter

2. Grundbuchämter

1 Die Einrichtung der Grundbuchämter, die Umschreibung der Kreise, die Ernennung und Besoldung der Beamten sowie die Ordnung der Aufsicht erfolgt durch die Kantone.

2 Die kantonalen Vorschriften, ausgenommen jene über die Ernennung und die Besoldung der Beamten, bedürfen der Genehmigung des Bundes.1


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. II 21 des BG vom 15. Dez. 1989 über die Genehmigung kantonaler Erlasse durch den Bund, in Kraft seit 1. Febr. 1991 (AS 1991 362; BBl 1988 II 1333).

Art. 954 A. Einrichtung / II. Grundbuchführung / 3. Gebühren

3. Gebühren

1 Für die Eintragungen in das Grundbuch und für die damit verbundenen Vermessungsarbeiten dürfen die Kantone Gebühren erheben.

2 Für Eintragungen, die mit Bodenverbesserungen oder mit Bodenaustausch zum Zwecke der Abrundung landwirtschaftlicher Betriebe zusammenhangen, dürfen keine Gebühren erhoben werden.

Art. 955 A. Einrichtung / III. Haftung

III. Haftung1

1 Die Kantone sind für allen Schaden verantwortlich, der aus der Führung des Grundbuches entsteht.

2 Sie haben Rückgriff auf die Beamten und Angestellten der Grundbuchverwaltung sowie die Organe der unmittelbaren Aufsicht, denen ein Verschulden zur Last fällt.

3 Sie können von den Beamten und Angestellten Sicherstellung verlangen.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 9561A. Einrichtung / IV. Administrative Aufsicht

IV. Administrative Aufsicht

1 Die Geschäftsführung der Grundbuchämter unterliegt der administrativen Aufsicht der Kantone.

2 Der Bund übt die Oberaufsicht aus.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 956a1A. Einrichtung / V. Rechtsschutz / 1. Beschwerdebefugnis

V. Rechtsschutz

1. Beschwerdebefugnis

1 Gegen eine vom Grundbuchamt erlassene Verfügung kann bei der vom Kanton bezeichneten Behörde Beschwerde geführt werden; als Verfügung gilt auch das unrechtmässige Verweigern oder Verzögern einer Amtshandlung.

2 Zur Beschwerde berechtigt sind:

1.
jede Person, die von einer Verfügung des Grundbuchamts besonders berührt ist und ein schutzwürdiges Interesse an deren Aufhebung oder Änderung hat;
2.
die kantonale administrative Aufsichtsbehörde, sofern ihr das kantonale Recht die Beschwerdebefugnis einräumt;
3.
die Oberaufsichtsbehörde des Bundes.

3 Gegen eine im Hauptbuch vollzogene Eintragung, Änderung oder Löschung von dinglichen Rechten oder Vormerkungen kann keine Beschwerde mehr geführt werden.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 956b1A. Einrichtung / V. Rechtsschutz / 2. Beschwerdeverfahren

2. Beschwerdeverfahren

1 Die Frist für Beschwerden an die kantonalen Beschwerdeinstanzen beträgt 30 Tage.

2 Verweigert oder verzögert das Grundbuchamt eine bestimmte Amtshandlung, so kann dagegen jederzeit Beschwerde geführt werden.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 9571

1 Aufgehoben durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 958 B. Eintragung / I. Grundbucheinträge / 1. Eigentum und dingliche Rechte

B. Eintragung

I. Grundbucheinträge

1. Eigentum und dingliche Rechte

In das Grundbuch werden folgende Rechte an Grundstücken eingetragen:

1.
das Eigentum;
2.
die Dienstbarkeiten und Grundlasten;
3.
die Pfandrechte.
Art. 959 B. Eintragung / I. Grundbucheinträge / 2. Vormerkungen / a. Persönliche Rechte

2. Vormerkungen

a. Persönliche Rechte

1 Persönliche Rechte können im Grundbuche vorgemerkt werden, wenn deren Vormerkung durch das Gesetz ausdrücklich vorgesehen ist, wie bei Vor- und Rückkauf, Kaufsrecht, Pacht und Miete.

2 Sie erhalten durch die Vormerkung Wirkung gegenüber jedem später erworbenen Rechte.

Art. 960 B. Eintragung / I. Grundbucheinträge / 2. Vormerkungen / b. Verfügungsbeschränkungen

b. Verfügungsbeschränkungen

1 Verfügungsbeschränkungen können für einzelne Grundstücke vorgemerkt werden:

1.
auf Grund einer amtlichen Anordnung zur Sicherung streitiger oder vollziehbarer Ansprüche;
2.1
auf Grund einer Pfändung;
3.2
auf Grund eines Rechtsgeschäftes, für das diese Vormerkung im Gesetz vorgesehen ist, wie für die Anwartschaft des Nacherben.

2 Die Verfügungsbeschränkungen erhalten durch die Vormerkung Wirkung gegenüber jedem später erworbenen Rechte.


1 Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 4 des BG vom 16. Dez. 1994, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1997 (AS 1995 1227; BBl 1991 III 1).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 4 des BG vom 26. Juni 1998, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

Art. 961 B. Eintragung / I. Grundbucheinträge / 2. Vormerkungen / c. Vorläufige Eintragung

c. Vorläufige Eintragung

1 Vorläufige Eintragungen können vorgemerkt werden:

1.
zur Sicherung behaupteter dinglicher Rechte;
2.
im Falle der vom Gesetze zugelassenen Ergänzung des Ausweises.

2 Sie geschehen mit Einwilligung aller Beteiligten oder auf Anordnung des Gerichts mit der Folge, dass das Recht für den Fall seiner späteren Feststellung vom Zeitpunkte der Vormerkung an dinglich wirksam wird.

3 Über das Begehren entscheidet das Gericht und bewilligt, nachdem der Ansprecher seine Berechtigung glaubhaft gemacht hat, die Vormerkung, indem es deren Wirkung zeitlich und sachlich genau feststellt und nötigenfalls zur gerichtlichen Geltendmachung der Ansprüche eine Frist ansetzt.1


1 Fassung gemäss Anhang 1 Ziff. II 3 der Zivilprozessordnung vom 19. Dez. 2008, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 961a1B. Eintragung / I. Grundbucheinträge / 2. Vormerkungen / d. Eintragung nachgehender Rechte

d. Eintragung nachgehender Rechte

Eine Vormerkung hindert die Eintragung eines im Rang nachgehenden Rechts nicht.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 4. Okt. 1991 über die Teilrevision des Zivilgesetzbuches (Immobiliarsachenrecht) und des Obligationenrechts (Grundstückkauf), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 9621B. Eintragung / II. Anmerkungen / 1. Von öffentlich-rechtlichen Beschränkungen

II. Anmerkungen

1. Von öffentlich-rechtlichen Beschränkungen

1 Das Gemeinwesen oder ein anderer Träger einer öffentlichen Aufgabe muss eine für ein bestimmtes Grundstück verfügte Eigentumsbeschränkung des öffentlichen Rechts, die dem Eigentümer eine dauerhafte Nutzungs- oder Verfügungsbeschränkung oder grundstücksbezogene Pflicht auferlegt, im Grundbuch anmerken lassen.

2 Fällt die Eigentumsbeschränkung dahin, so muss das Gemeinwesen oder der andere Träger einer öffentlichen Aufgabe die Löschung der Anmerkung im Grundbuch veranlassen. Bleibt das Gemeinwesen oder der andere Träger einer öffentlichen Aufgabe untätig, so kann das Grundbuchamt die Anmerkung von Amtes wegen löschen.

3 Der Bundesrat legt fest, in welchen Gebieten des kantonalen Rechts die Eigentumsbeschränkungen im Grundbuch angemerkt werden müssen. Die Kantone können weitere Anmerkungen vorsehen. Sie erstellen eine Liste der Anmerkungstatbestände und teilen sie dem Bund mit.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 962a1B. Eintragung / II. Anmerkungen / 2. Von Vertretungen

2. Von Vertretungen

Im Grundbuch können angemerkt werden:

1.
der gesetzliche Vertreter auf sein Begehren oder auf Begehren der zuständigen Behörde;
2.
der Erbschaftsverwalter, der Erbenvertreter, der amtliche Liquidator und der Willensvollstrecker auf ihr Begehren oder auf Begehren eines Erben oder der zuständigen Behörde;
3.
der Vertreter eines unauffindbaren Eigentümers, Grundpfandgläubigers oder Dienstbarkeitsberechtigten auf sein Begehren oder auf Begehren des Gerichts;
4.
der Vertreter einer juristischen Person oder anderen Rechtsträgerin bei Fehlen der vorgeschriebenen Organe auf sein Begehren oder auf Begehren des Gerichts;
5.
der Verwalter der Stockwerkeigentümergemeinschaft auf sein Begehren oder auf Begehren der Stockwerkeigentümerversammlung oder des Gerichts.

1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 963 B. Eintragung / III. Voraussetzung der Eintragung / 1. Anmeldungen / a. Bei Eintragungen

III. Voraussetzung der Eintragung

1. Anmeldungen

a. Bei Eintragungen

1 Die Eintragungen erfolgen auf Grund einer schriftlichen Erklärung des Eigentümers des Grundstückes, auf das sich die Verfügung bezieht.

2 Keiner Erklärung des Eigentümers bedarf es, wenn der Erwerber sich auf eine Gesetzesvorschrift, auf ein rechtskräftiges Urteil oder eine dem Urteil gleichwertige Urkunde zu berufen vermag.

3 Die mit der öffentlichen Beurkundung beauftragten Beamten können durch die Kantone angewiesen werden, die von ihnen beurkundeten Geschäfte zur Eintragung anzumelden.

Art. 964 B. Eintragung / III. Voraussetzung der Eintragung / 1. Anmeldungen / b. Bei Löschungen

b. Bei Löschungen

1 Zur Löschung oder Abänderung eines Eintrages bedarf es einer schriftlichen Erklärung der aus dem Eintrage berechtigten Personen.

2 Diese Erklärung kann mit der Unterzeichnung im Tagebuch abgegeben werden.

Art. 965 B. Eintragung / III. Voraussetzung der Eintragung / 2. Ausweise / a. Gültiger Ausweis

2. Ausweise

a. Gültiger Ausweis

1 Grundbuchliche Verfügungen, wie Eintragung, Änderung, Löschung dürfen in allen Fällen nur auf Grund eines Ausweises über das Verfügungsrecht und den Rechtsgrund vorgenommen werden.

2 Der Ausweis über das Verfügungsrecht liegt in dem Nachweise, dass der Gesuchsteller die nach Massgabe des Grundbuches verfügungsberechtigte Person ist oder von dieser eine Vollmacht erhalten hat.

3 Der Ausweis über den Rechtsgrund liegt in dem Nachweise, dass die für dessen Gültigkeit erforderliche Form erfüllt ist.

Art. 966 B. Eintragung / III. Voraussetzung der Eintragung / 2. Ausweise / b. Ergänzung des Ausweises

b. Ergänzung des Ausweises

1 Werden die Ausweise für eine grundbuchliche Verfügung nicht beigebracht, so ist die Anmeldung abzuweisen.

2 Wenn jedoch der Rechtsgrund hergestellt ist und es sich nur um eine Ergänzung des Ausweises über das Verfügungsrecht handelt, so kann mit Einwilligung des Eigentümers oder auf gerichtliche Verfügung eine vorläufige Eintragung stattfinden.

Art. 967 B. Eintragung / IV. Art der Eintragung / 1. Im Allgemeinen

IV. Art der Eintragung

1. Im Allgemeinen

1 Die Eintragungen im Hauptbuche finden nach der Reihenfolge statt, in der die Anmeldungen angebracht oder die Beurkundungen oder Erklärungen vor dem Grundbuchverwalter unterzeichnet worden sind.

2 Über alle Eintragungen wird den Beteiligten auf ihr Verlangen ein Auszug ausgefertigt.

3 Die Form der Eintragung und der Löschung sowie der Auszüge wird durch eine Verordnung des Bundesrates festgestellt.

Art. 968 B. Eintragung / IV. Art der Eintragung / 2. Bei Dienstbarkeiten

2. Bei Dienstbarkeiten

Die Eintragung und Löschung der Grunddienstbarkeiten erfolgt auf dem Blatt des berechtigten und des belasteten Grundstückes.

Art. 969 B. Eintragung / V. Anzeigepflicht

V. Anzeigepflicht

1 Der Grundbuchverwalter hat den Beteiligten von den grundbuchlichen Verfügungen, die ohne ihr Wissen erfolgen, Anzeige zu machen; insbesondere teilt er den Berechtigten, deren Vorkaufsrecht im Grundbuch vorgemerkt ist oder von Gesetzes wegen besteht und aus dem Grundbuch hervorgeht, den Erwerb des Eigentums durch einen Dritten mit.1

2 Die Fristen, die für die Anfechtung solcher Verfügungen aufgestellt sind, nehmen ihren Anfang mit der Zustellung dieser Anzeige.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 4. Okt. 1991 über die Teilrevision des Zivilgesetzbuches (Immobiliarsachenrecht) und des Obligationenrechts (Grundstückkauf), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 9701C. Öffentlichkeit des Grundbuchs / I. Auskunftserteilung und Einsichtnahme

C. Öffentlichkeit des Grundbuchs

I. Auskunftserteilung und Einsichtnahme

1 Wer ein Interesse glaubhaft macht, hat Anspruch darauf, dass ihm Einsicht in das Grundbuch gewährt oder dass ihm daraus ein Auszug erstellt wird.

2 Ohne ein solches Interesse ist jede Person berechtigt, Auskunft über folgende Daten des Hauptbuches zu erhalten:

1.
die Bezeichnung des Grundstücks und die Grundstücksbeschreibung;
2.
den Namen und die Identifikation des Eigentümers;
3.
die Eigentumsform und das Erwerbsdatum.

3 Der Bundesrat bezeichnet weitere Angaben betreffend Dienstbarkeiten, Grundlasten und Anmerkungen, die ohne das Glaubhaftmachen eines Interesses öffentlich gemacht werden dürfen. Er beachtet dabei den Schutz der Persönlichkeit.

4 Die Einwendung, dass jemand eine Grundbucheintragung nicht gekannt habe, ist ausgeschlossen.


1 Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 1 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2003 über die elektronische Signatur, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2005 (AS 2004 5085; BBl 2001 5679).

Art. 970a1C. Öffentlichkeit des Grundbuchs / II. Veröffentlichungen

II. Veröffentlichungen

1 Die Kantone können die Veröffentlichung des Erwerbs des Eigentums an Grundstücken vorsehen.

2 Nicht veröffentlichen dürfen sie die Gegenleistung bei einer Erbteilung, einem Erbvorbezug, einem Ehevertrag oder einer güterrechtlichen Auseinandersetzung.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 4. Okt. 1991 über die Teilrevision des Zivilgesetzbuches (Immobiliarsachenrecht) und des Obligationenrechts (Grundstückkauf), (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953). Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 1 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2003 über die elektronische Signatur, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2005 (AS 2004 5085; BBl 2001 5679).

Art. 971 D. Wirkung / I. Bedeutung der Nichteintragung

D. Wirkung

I. Bedeutung der Nichteintragung

1 Soweit für die Begründung eines dinglichen Rechtes die Eintragung in das Grundbuch vorgesehen ist, besteht dieses Recht als dingliches nur, wenn es aus dem Grundbuche ersichtlich ist.

2 Im Rahmen des Eintrages kann der Inhalt eines Rechtes durch die Belege oder auf andere Weise nachgewiesen werden.

Art. 972 D. Wirkung / II. Bedeutung der Eintragung / 1. Im Allgemeinen

II. Bedeutung der Eintragung

1. Im Allgemeinen

1 Die dinglichen Rechte entstehen und erhalten ihren Rang und ihr Datum durch die Eintragung in das Hauptbuch.

2 Ihre Wirkung wird auf den Zeitpunkt der Einschreibung in das Tagebuch zurückbezogen, vorausgesetzt, dass die gesetzlichen Ausweise der Anmeldung beigefügt oder bei den vorläufigen Eintragungen nachträglich rechtzeitig beigebracht werden.

3 Wo nach kantonalem Recht die öffentliche Beurkundung durch den Grundbuchverwalter vermittelst Einschreibung in das Urkundenprotokoll erfolgt, tritt diese an die Stelle der Einschreibung in das Tagebuch.

Art. 973 D. Wirkung / II. Bedeutung der Eintragung / 2. Gegenüber gutgläubigen Dritten

2. Gegenüber gutgläubigen Dritten

1 Wer sich in gutem Glauben auf einen Eintrag im Grundbuch verlassen und daraufhin Eigentum oder andere dingliche Rechte erworben hat, ist in diesem Erwerbe zu schützen.

2 Diese Bestimmung gilt nicht für Grenzen von Grundstücken in den vom Kanton bezeichneten Gebieten mit Bodenverschiebungen.1


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 4. Okt. 1991 über die Teilrevision des Zivilgesetzbuches (Immobiliarsachenrecht) und des Obligationenrechts (Grundstückkauf), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 974 D. Wirkung / II. Bedeutung der Eintragung / 3. Gegenüber bösgläubigen Dritten

3. Gegenüber bösgläubigen Dritten

1 Ist der Eintrag eines dinglichen Rechtes ungerechtfertigt, so kann sich der Dritte, der den Mangel kennt oder kennen sollte, auf den Eintrag nicht berufen.

2 Ungerechtfertigt ist der Eintrag, der ohne Rechtsgrund oder aus einem unverbindlichen Rechtsgeschäft erfolgt ist.

3 Wer durch einen solchen Eintrag in einem dinglichen Recht verletzt ist, kann sich unmittelbar gegenüber dem bösgläubigen Dritten auf die Mangelhaftigkeit des Eintrages berufen.

Art. 974a1E. Löschung und Änderung der Einträge / I. Bereinigung / 1. Bei der Teilung des Grundstücks

E. Löschung und Änderung der Einträge

I. Bereinigung

1. Bei der Teilung des Grundstücks

1 Wird ein Grundstück geteilt, so müssen für jedes Teilstück die Dienstbarkeiten, Vormerkungen und Anmerkungen bereinigt werden.

2 Der Eigentümer des zu teilenden Grundstücks muss dem Grundbuchamt beantragen, welche Einträge zu löschen und welche auf die Teilstücke zu übertragen sind. Andernfalls ist die Anmeldung abzuweisen.

3 Betrifft ein Eintrag nach den Belegen oder den Umständen ein Teilstück nicht, so ist er darauf zu löschen. Das Verfahren richtet sich nach den Vorschriften über die Löschung eines Eintrags.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 974b1E. Löschung und Änderung der Einträge / I. Bereinigung / 2. Bei der Vereinigung von Grundstücken

2. Bei der Vereinigung von Grundstücken

1 Mehrere Grundstücke eines Eigentümers können nur vereinigt werden, wenn keine Grundpfandrechte oder Grundlasten von den einzelnen Grundstücken auf das vereinigte Grundstück übertragen werden müssen oder die Gläubiger dazu einwilligen.

2 Sind Dienstbarkeiten, Vormerkungen oder Anmerkungen zulasten der Grundstücke eingetragen, so können diese nur vereinigt werden, wenn die Berechtigten dazu einwilligen oder nach der Art der Belastung dadurch in ihren Rechten nicht beeinträchtigt werden.

3 Sind Dienstbarkeiten, Vormerkungen oder Anmerkungen zugunsten der Grundstücke eingetragen, so können diese nur vereinigt werden, wenn die Eigentümer der belasteten Grundstücke dazu einwilligen oder sich die Belastung durch die Vereinigung nicht vergrössert.

4 Die Bestimmungen über die Bereinigung bei der Teilung des Grundstücks sind sinngemäss anwendbar.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 975 E. Löschung und Änderung der Einträge / II. Bei ungerechtfertigtem Eintrag

II. Bei ungerechtfertigtem Eintrag1

1 Ist der Eintrag eines dinglichen Rechtes ungerechtfertigt oder ein richtiger Eintrag in ungerechtfertigter Weise gelöscht oder verändert worden, so kann jedermann, der dadurch in seinen dinglichen Rechten verletzt ist, auf Löschung oder Abänderung des Eintrages klagen.

2 Vorbehalten bleiben die von gutgläubigen Dritten durch Eintragung erworbenen dinglichen Rechte und die Ansprüche auf Schadenersatz.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 9761E. Löschung und Änderung der Einträge / III. Erleichterte Löschung / 1. Zweifelsfrei bedeutungslose Einträge

III. Erleichterte Löschung

1. Zweifelsfrei bedeutungslose Einträge

Das Grundbuchamt kann einen Eintrag von Amtes wegen löschen, wenn dieser:

1.
befristet ist und infolge Ablaufs der Frist seine rechtliche Bedeutung verloren hat;
2.
ein unübertragbares oder unvererbliches Recht einer verstorbenen Person betrifft;
3.
das Grundstück wegen der örtlichen Lage nicht betreffen kann;
4.
ein untergegangenes Grundstück betrifft.

1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 976a1E. Löschung und Änderung der Einträge / III. Erleichterte Löschung / 2. Andere Einträge / a. Im Allgemeinen

2. Andere Einträge

a. Im Allgemeinen

1 Hat ein Eintrag höchstwahrscheinlich keine rechtliche Bedeutung, insbesondere weil er nach den Belegen oder den Umständen das Grundstück nicht betrifft, so kann jede dadurch belastete Person die Löschung verlangen.

2 Hält das Grundbuchamt das Begehren für begründet, so teilt es der berechtigten Person mit, dass es den Eintrag löschen wird, wenn sie nicht innert 30 Tagen beim Grundbuchamt dagegen Einspruch erhebt.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 976b1E. Löschung und Änderung der Einträge / III. Erleichterte Löschung / 2. Andere Einträge / b. Bei Einspruch

b. Bei Einspruch

1 Erhebt die berechtigte Person Einspruch, so prüft das Grundbuchamt das Begehren um Löschung auf Antrag der belasteten Person erneut.

2 Kommt das Grundbuchamt zum Schluss, dass dem Begehren trotz Einspruchs zu entsprechen ist, so teilt es der berechtigten Person mit, dass es den Eintrag im Hauptbuch löschen wird, wenn sie nicht innert drei Monaten beim Gericht auf Feststellung klagt, dass der Eintrag eine rechtliche Bedeutung hat.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 976c1E. Löschung und Änderung der Einträge / III. Erleichterte Löschung / 3. Öffentliches Bereinigungsverfahren

3. Öffentliches Bereinigungsverfahren

1 Haben sich in einem bestimmten Gebiet die Verhältnisse tatsächlich oder rechtlich verändert und ist deswegen eine grössere Zahl von Dienstbarkeiten, Vor- oder Anmerkungen ganz oder weitgehend hinfällig geworden oder ist die Lage nicht mehr bestimmbar, so kann die vom Kanton bezeichnete Behörde die Bereinigung in diesem Gebiet anordnen.

2 Diese Anordnung ist auf den entsprechenden Grundbuchblättern anzumerken.

3 Die Kantone regeln die Einzelheiten und das Verfahren. Sie können die Bereinigung weiter erleichtern oder vom Bundesrecht abweichende Vorschriften erlassen.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 977 E. Löschung und Änderung der Einträge / IV. Berichtigungen E. Löschung und Änderung der Einträge / IV. Berichtigungen

IV. Berichtigungen1

1 Berichtigungen darf der Grundbuchverwalter ohne schriftliche Einwilligung der Beteiligten nur auf Verfügung des Gerichts vornehmen.

2 Statt einer Berichtigung kann der unrichtige Eintrag gelöscht und ein neuer Eintrag erwirkt werden.

3 Die Berichtigung blosser Schreibfehler erfolgt von Amtes wegen nach Massgabe einer hierüber vom Bundesrate zu erlassenden Verordnung.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. II des BG vom 19. Dez. 1963, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

  Schlusstitel: Anwendungs- und Einführungsbestimmungen1 

  Erster Abschnitt: Die Anwendung bisherigen und neuen Rechts2 

Art. 1 A. Allgemeine Bestimmungen / I. Regel der Nichtrückwirkung

A. Allgemeine Bestimmungen

I. Regel der Nichtrückwirkung

1 Die rechtlichen Wirkungen von Tatsachen, die vor dem Inkrafttreten dieses Gesetzes eingetreten sind, werden auch nachher gemäss den Bestimmungen des eidgenössischen oder kantonalen Rechtes beurteilt, die zur Zeit des Eintrittes dieser Tatsachen gegolten haben.

2 Demgemäss unterliegen die vor diesem Zeitpunkte vorgenommenen Handlungen in Bezug auf ihre rechtliche Verbindlichkeit und ihre rechtlichen Folgen auch in Zukunft den bei ihrer Vornahme geltend gewesenen Bestimmungen.

3 Die nach diesem Zeitpunkte eingetretenen Tatsachen dagegen werden, soweit das Gesetz eine Ausnahme nicht vorgesehen hat, nach dem neuen Recht beurteilt.

Art. 2 A. Allgemeine Bestimmungen / II. Rückwirkung / 1. Öffentliche Ordnung und Sittlichkeit

II. Rückwirkung

1. Öffentliche Ordnung und Sittlichkeit

1 Die Bestimmungen dieses Gesetzes, die um der öffentlichen Ordnung und Sittlichkeit willen aufgestellt sind, finden mit dessen Inkrafttreten auf alle Tatsachen Anwendung, soweit das Gesetz eine Ausnahme nicht vorgesehen hat.

2 Demgemäss finden Vorschriften des bisherigen Rechtes, die nach der Auffassung des neuen Rechtes der öffentlichen Ordnung oder Sittlichkeit widersprechen, nach dessen Inkrafttreten keine Anwendung mehr.

Art. 3 A. Allgemeine Bestimmungen / II. Rückwirkung / 2. Inhalt der Rechtsverhältnisse kraft Gesetzes

2. Inhalt der Rechtsverhältnisse kraft Gesetzes

Rechtsverhältnisse, deren Inhalt unabhängig vom Willen der Beteiligten durch das Gesetz umschrieben wird, sind nach dem Inkrafttreten dieses Gesetzes nach dem neuen Recht zu beurteilen, auch wenn sie vor diesem Zeitpunkte begründet worden sind.

Art. 4 A. Allgemeine Bestimmungen / II. Rückwirkung / 3. Nicht erworbene Rechte

3. Nicht erworbene Rechte

Tatsachen, die zwar unter der Herrschaft des bisherigen Rechtes eingetreten sind, durch die aber zur Zeit des Inkrafttretens des neuen Rechtes ein rechtlich geschützter Anspruch nicht begründet gewesen ist, stehen nach diesem Zeitpunkt in Bezug auf ihre Wirkung unter dem neuen Recht.

Art. 5 B. Personenrecht / I. Handlungsfähigkeit

B. Personenrecht

I. Handlungsfähigkeit

1 Die Handlungsfähigkeit wird in allen Fällen nach den Bestimmungen dieses Gesetzes beurteilt.

2 Wer indessen nach dem bisherigen Recht zur Zeit des Inkrafttretens dieses Gesetzes handlungsfähig gewesen ist, nach den Bestimmungen des neuen Rechtes aber nicht handlungsfähig wäre, wird auch nach diesem Zeitpunkte als handlungsfähig anerkannt.

Art. 6 B. Personenrecht / II. Verschollenheit

II. Verschollenheit

1 Die Verschollenerklärung steht nach dem Inkrafttreten dieses Gesetzes unter den Bestimmungen des neuen Rechtes.

2 Die Todes- oder Abwesenheitserklärungen des bisherigen Rechtes haben nach dem Inkrafttreten dieses Gesetzes die gleichen Wirkungen wie die Verschollenerklärung des neuen Rechtes, wobei aber die vor diesem Zeitpunkte nach bisherigem Recht eingetretenen Folgen, wie Erbgang oder Auflösung der Ehe, bestehen bleiben.

3 Ein zur Zeit des Inkrafttretens des neuen Rechtes schwebendes Verfahren wird unter Anrechnung der abgelaufenen Zeit nach den Bestimmungen dieses Gesetzes neu begonnen oder auf Antrag der Beteiligten nach dem bisherigen Verfahren und unter Beobachtung der bisherigen Fristen zu Ende geführt.

Art. 6a1B. Personenrecht / IIa. Zentrale Datenbank im Zivilstandswesen

IIa. Zentrale Datenbank im Zivilstandswesen

1 Der Bundesrat regelt den Übergang von der bisherigen auf die elektronische Registerführung.

2 Der Bund übernimmt die Investitionskosten bis zu 5 Millionen Franken.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 5. Okt. 2001 (Elektronische Führung der Personenstandsregister), in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2004 (AS 2004 2911; BBl 2001 1639).

Art. 6b1B. Personenrecht / III. Juristische Personen / 1. Im Allgemeinen

III. Juristische Personen

1. Im Allgemeinen2

1 Personenverbände und Anstalten oder Stiftungen, die unter dem bisherigen Recht die Persönlichkeit erlangt haben, behalten sie unter dem neuen Recht bei, auch wenn sie nach dessen Bestimmungen die Persönlichkeit nicht erlangt hätten.

2 Die bereits bestehenden juristischen Personen, für deren Entstehung nach der Vorschrift dieses Gesetzes die Eintragung in das öffentliche Register erforderlich ist, müssen jedoch diese Eintragung, auch wenn sie nach dem bisherigen Recht nicht vorgesehen war, binnen fünf Jahren nach dem Inkrafttreten des neuen Rechtes nachholen und werden nach Ablauf dieser Frist ohne Eintragung nicht mehr als juristische Personen anerkannt.

2bis Kirchliche Stiftungen und Familienstiftungen, die beim Inkrafttreten der Änderung vom 12. Dezember 2014 (Art. 52 Abs. 2) nicht im Handelsregister eingetragen sind, bleiben als juristische Personen anerkannt. Sie müssen die Eintragung ins Handelsregister binnen fünf Jahren nach Inkrafttreten vornehmen. Der Bundesrat berücksichtigt bei den Anforderungen an die Eintragung ins Handelsregister die besonderen Verhältnisse der kirchlichen Stiftungen.3

3 Der Inhalt der Persönlichkeit bestimmt sich für alle juristischen Personen, sobald dieses Gesetz in Kraft getreten ist, nach dem neuen Recht.


1 Ursprünglich Art. 6a. Vorher Art. 7.
2 Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 1 des BG vom 16. Dez. 2005 (GmbH-Recht sowie Anpassungen im Aktien-, Genossenschafts-, Handelsregister- und Firmenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).
3 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 12. Dez. 2014 zur Umsetzung der 2012 revidierten Empfehlungen der Groupe d’action financière, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2016 (AS 2015 1389; BBl 2014 605).

Art. 6c1B. Personenrecht / III. Juristische Personen / 2. Buchführung und Revisionsstelle

2. Buchführung und Revisionsstelle

Die Bestimmungen der Änderung vom 16. Dezember 20052 betreffend die Buchführung und die Revisionsstelle gelten vom ersten Geschäftsjahr an, das mit dem Inkrafttreten dieses Gesetzes oder danach beginnt.


1 Eingefügt durch Anhang Ziff. 1 des BG vom 16. Dez. 2005 (GmbH-Recht sowie Anpassungen im Aktien-, Genossenschafts-, Handelsregister- und Firmenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).
2AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969

Art. 6d1B. Personenrecht / IV. Schutz der Persönlichkeit vor Gewalt, Drohungen oder Nachstellungen

IV. Schutz der Persönlichkeit vor Gewalt, Drohungen oder Nachstellungen

Auf Verfahren, die beim Inkrafttreten der Änderung vom 14. Dezember 2018 rechtshängig sind, findet das neue Recht Anwendung.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 14. Dez. 2018 über die Verbesserung des Schutzes gewaltbetroffener Personen, in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2020 (AS 2019 2273; BBl 2017 7307).

Art. 71C. Familienrecht / I. Eheschliessung

C. Familienrecht

I. Eheschliessung

1 Für die Eheschliessung gilt das neue Recht, sobald das Bundesgesetz vom 26. Juni 19982 in Kraft getreten ist.

2 Ehen, für die nach dem bisherigen Recht ein Ungültigkeitsgrund vorliegt, können, sobald das neue Recht in Kraft getreten ist, nur nach dessen Bestimmungen für ungültig erklärt werden, wobei jedoch die vor diesem Zeitpunkt abgelaufene Zeit bei der Fristbestimmung angerechnet wird.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 4 des BG vom 26. Juni 1998, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
2AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1

Art. 7a1C. Familienrecht / Ibis. Scheidung / 1. Grundsatz

Ibis. Scheidung

1. Grundsatz

1 Für die Scheidung gilt das neue Recht, sobald das Bundesgesetz vom 26. Juni 19982 in Kraft getreten ist.

2 Scheidungen, die unter dem bisherigen Recht rechtskräftig geworden sind, bleiben anerkannt; die neuen Bestimmungen über die Vollstreckung finden Anwendung auf Renten oder Abfindungen, die als Unterhaltsersatz oder als Unterhaltsbeitrag festgesetzt worden sind.

3 Die Abänderung des Scheidungsurteils erfolgt nach den Vorschriften des früheren Rechts unter Vorbehalt der Bestimmungen über die Kinder und das Verfahren.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 4 des BG vom 26. Juni 1998, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
2AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1

Art. 7b1C. Familienrecht / Ibis. Scheidung / 2. Rechtshängige Scheidungsprozesse

2. Rechtshängige Scheidungsprozesse

1 Auf die Scheidungsprozesse, die beim Inkrafttreten des Bundesgesetzes vom 26. Juni 19982 rechtshängig und die von einer kantonalen Instanz zu beurteilen sind, findet das neue Recht Anwendung.

2 Neue Rechtsbegehren, die durch den Wechsel des anwendbaren Rechts veranlasst werden, sind zulässig; nicht angefochtene Teile des Urteils bleiben verbindlich, sofern sie sachlich nicht derart eng mit noch zu beurteilenden Rechtsbegehren zusammenhängen, dass sinnvollerweise eine Gesamtbeurteilung stattfinden muss.

3 Das Bundesgericht entscheidet nach bisherigem Recht, wenn der angefochtene Entscheid vor dem Inkrafttreten des Bundesgesetzes vom 26. Juni 1998 ergangen ist; dies gilt auch bei einer allfälligen Rückweisung an die kantonale Instanz.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 4 des BG vom 26. Juni 1998, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
2AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1

Art. 7c1C. Familienrecht / Ibis. Scheidung / 3. Trennungsfrist bei rechtshängigen Scheidungsprozessen

3. Trennungsfrist bei rechtshängigen Scheidungsprozessen

Für Scheidungsprozesse, die beim Inkrafttreten der Änderung vom 19. Dezember 20032 rechtshängig und die von einer kantonalen Instanz zu beurteilen sind, gilt die Trennungsfrist nach dem neuen Recht.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 19. Dez. 2003 (Trennungsfrist im Scheidungsrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Juni 2004 (AS 2004 2161; BBl 2003 3927 5825).
2AS 2004 2161

Art. 7d1C. Familienrecht / Ibis. Scheidung / 4. Berufliche Vorsorge

4. Berufliche Vorsorge

1 Für die berufliche Vorsorge bei Scheidung gilt das neue Recht, sobald die Änderung vom 19. Juni 2015 in Kraft getreten ist.

2 Auf Scheidungsprozesse, die beim Inkrafttreten der Änderung vom 19. Juni 2015 vor einer kantonalen Instanz rechtshängig sind, findet das neue Recht Anwendung.

3 Das Bundesgericht entscheidet nach bisherigem Recht, wenn der angefochtene Entscheid vor dem Inkrafttreten der Änderung vom 19. Juni 2015 ergangen ist; dies gilt auch bei einer allfälligen Rückweisung an die kantonale Instanz.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 19. Juni 2015 (Vorsorgeausgleich bei Scheidung), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).

Art. 7e1C. Familienrecht / Ibis. Scheidung / 5. Umwandlung bestehender Renten

5. Umwandlung bestehender Renten

1 Hat das Gericht unter bisherigem Recht bei Scheidung nach Eintritt eines Vorsorgefalls dem berechtigten Ehegatten eine Entschädigung in Form einer Rente zugesprochen, die erst mit dem Tod des verpflichteten oder des berechtigten Ehegatten erlischt, so kann der berechtigte Ehegatte innerhalb eines Jahres nach dem Inkrafttreten der Änderung vom 19. Juni 2015 beim Gericht verlangen, dass ihm stattdessen eine lebenslange Rente nach Artikel 124a zugesprochen wird, wenn der verpflichtete Ehegatte eine Invalidenrente nach dem reglementarischen Rentenalter oder eine Altersrente bezieht.

2 Bei ausländischen Entscheidungen bestimmt sich die Zuständigkeit nach Artikel 64 des Bundesgesetzes vom 18. Dezember 19872 über das Internationale Privatrecht.

3 Die Rente nach bisherigem Recht gilt als zugesprochener Rentenanteil.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 19. Juni 2015 (Vorsorgeausgleich bei Scheidung), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).
2 SR 291

Art. 81C. Familienrecht / Iter. Wirkungen der Ehe im Allgemeinen / 1. Grundsatz

Iter. Wirkungen der Ehe im Allgemeinen

1. Grundsatz

Für die Wirkungen der Ehe im Allgemeinen gilt das neue Recht, sobald das Bundesgesetz vom 5. Oktober 1984 in Kraft getreten ist.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 4 des BG vom 26. Juni 1998, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

Art. 8a1C. Familienrecht / Iter. Wirkungen der Ehe im Allgemeinen / 2. Name

2. Name

Der Ehegatte, der vor dem Inkrafttreten der Änderung vom 30. September 2011 dieses Gesetzes seinen Namen bei der Eheschliessung geändert hat, kann jederzeit gegenüber der Zivilstandsbeamtin oder dem Zivilstandsbeamten erklären, dass er wieder seinen Ledignamen tragen will.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 5. Okt. 1984 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191). Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 30. Sept. 2011 (Name und Bürgerrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 8b1C. Familienrecht / Iter. Wirkungen der Ehe im Allgemeinen / 3. Bürgerrecht

3. Bürgerrecht

Die Schweizerin, die sich unter dem bisherigen Recht verheiratet hat, kann binnen Jahresfrist seit Inkrafttreten des neuen Rechts gegenüber der zuständigen Behörde ihres ehemaligen Heimatkantons erklären, sie nehme das Bürgerrecht, das sie als ledig hatte, wieder an.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 5. Okt. 1984, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 91C. Familienrecht / II. Güterrecht der vor 1. Januar 1912 geschlossenen Ehen

II. Güterrecht der vor 1. Januar 1912 geschlossenen Ehen2

Für die güterrechtlichen Wirkungen der Ehen, die vor dem 1. Januar 1912 geschlossen worden sind, gelten die an diesem Tag in Kraft getretenen Bestimmungen des Zivilgesetzbuches über die Anwendung bisherigen und neuen Rechts.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 5. Okt. 1984, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).
2 Für die Anwendung des Übergangsrechtes siehe auch die früheren Bestimmungen des sechsten Tit. am Schluss des ZGB.

Art. 9a1C. Familienrecht / IIbis. Güterrecht der nach 1. Januar 1912 geschlossenen Ehen / 1. Im Allgemeinen

IIbis. Güterrecht der nach 1. Januar 19122 geschlossenen Ehen

1. Im Allgemeinen

1 Für die Ehen, die beim Inkrafttreten des Bundesgesetzes vom 5. Oktober 1984 bestehen, gilt das neue Recht, soweit nichts anderes bestimmt ist.

2 Für die güterrechtlichen Wirkungen der Ehen, die vor Inkrafttreten des Bundesgesetzes vom 5. Oktober 1984 aufgelöst worden sind, gilt das bisherige Recht.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 5. Okt. 1984, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).
2 Siehe die bis zum 31. Dez. 1987 gültigen Bestimmungen am Schluss des vorliegenden Textes.

Art. 9b1C. Familienrecht / IIbis. Güterrecht der nach 1. Januar 1912 geschlossenen Ehen / 2. Wechsel von der Güterverbindung zur Errungenschaftsbeteiligung / a. Änderung der Vermögensmassen

2. Wechsel von der Güterverbindung zur Errungenschaftsbeteiligung

a. Änderung der Vermögensmassen

1 Für Ehegatten, die bisher unter dem Güterstand der Güterverbindung gestanden haben, gelten im Verhältnis untereinander und gegenüber Dritten die Vorschriften über die Errungenschaftsbeteiligung.

2 Die Vermögenswerte jedes Ehegatten werden sein Eigengut oder seine Errungenschaft gemäss den Vorschriften über die Errungenschaftsbeteiligung; durch Ehevertrag begründetes Sondergut wird Eigengut.

3 Die Frau nimmt ihr eingebrachtes Gut, das ins Eigentum des Mannes übergegangen ist, in ihr Eigentum zurück oder macht hierfür eine Ersatzforderung geltend.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 5. Okt. 1984, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 9c1C. Familienrecht / IIbis. Güterrecht der nach 1. Januar 1912 geschlossenen Ehen / 2. Wechsel von der Güterverbindung zur Errungenschaftsbeteiligung / b. Vorrecht

b. Vorrecht

Die bisherigen Bestimmungen über die Ersatzforderungen der Ehefrau für das eingebrachte und nicht mehr vorhandene Frauengut bei Konkurs und Pfändung von Vermögenswerten des Ehemannes bleiben nach Inkrafttreten des neuen Rechts noch zehn Jahre anwendbar.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 5. Okt. 1984, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 91C. Familienrecht / IIbis. Güterrecht der nach 1. Januar 1912 geschlossenen Ehen / 2. Wechsel von der Güterverbindung zur Errungenschaftsbeteiligung / c. Güterrechtliche Auseinandersetzung unter dem neuen Recht

c. Güterrechtliche Auseinandersetzung unter dem neuen Recht

1 Nach Inkrafttreten des neuen Rechts richtet sich die güterrechtliche Auseinandersetzung unter den Ehegatten für die ganze Dauer des früheren und des neuen ordentlichen Güterstandes nach den Vorschriften über die Errungenschaftsbeteiligung, es sei denn, die Ehegatten haben im Zeitpunkt des Inkrafttretens des neuen Rechts die güterrechtliche Auseinandersetzung nach den Bestimmungen über die Güterverbindung bereits abgeschlossen.

2 Vor Inkrafttreten des neuen Rechts kann jeder Ehegatte dem andern schriftlich bekannt geben, dass der bisherige Güterstand der Güterverbindung nach den Bestimmungen des früheren Rechts aufgelöst werden müsse.

3 Wird der Güterstand aufgelöst, weil eine vor dem Inkrafttreten des neuen Rechts erhobene Klage gutgeheissen worden ist, so richtet sich die güterrechtliche Auseinandersetzung nach dem bisherigen Recht.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 5. Okt. 1984, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 9e1C. Familienrecht / IIbis. Güterrecht der nach 1. Januar 1912 geschlossenen Ehen / 3. Beibehaltung der Güterverbindung

3. Beibehaltung der Güterverbindung

1 Ehegatten, die unter dem ordentlichen Güterstand der Güterverbindung stehen, ohne diesen Güterstand ehevertraglich geändert zu haben, können bis spätestens ein Jahr nach Inkrafttreten des neuen Rechts durch Einreichung einer gemeinsamen schriftlichen Erklärung beim Güterrechtsregisteramt an ihrem Wohnsitz vereinbaren, die Güterverbindung beizubehalten; das Güterrechtsregisteramt führt ein Verzeichnis der Beibehaltserklärungen, das jedermann einsehen kann.

2 Dritten kann der Güterstand nur entgegengehalten werden, wenn sie ihn kennen oder kennen sollten.

3 Für das Sondergut der Ehegatten gelten inskünftig die neuen Vorschriften über die Gütertrennung.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 5. Okt. 1984, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 91C. Familienrecht / IIbis. Güterrecht der nach 1. Januar 1912 geschlossenen Ehen / 4. Beibehaltung der gesetzlichen oder gerichtlichen Gütertrennung

4. Beibehaltung der gesetzlichen oder gerichtlichen Gütertrennung

Ist von Gesetzes wegen oder auf Anordnung des Richters Gütertrennung eingetreten, so gelten für die Ehegatten die neuen Bestimmungen über die Gütertrennung.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 5. Okt. 1984, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 101C. Familienrecht / IIbis. Güterrecht der nach 1. Januar 1912 geschlossenen Ehen / 5. Ehevertrag / a. Im Allgemeinen

5. Ehevertrag

a. Im Allgemeinen

1 Haben die Ehegatten nach den Bestimmungen des Zivilgesetzbuches einen Ehevertrag abgeschlossen, so gilt dieser Ehevertrag weiter, und ihr gesamter Güterstand bleibt unter Vorbehalt der Bestimmungen dieses Titels über das Sondergut, die Rechtskraft gegenüber Dritten und über die vertragliche Gütertrennung den bisherigen Bestimmungen unterstellt.

2 Für das Sondergut der Ehegatten gelten inskünftig die neuen Vorschriften über die Gütertrennung.

3 Vereinbarungen über die Vor- und Rückschlagsbeteiligung bei der Güterverbindung dürfen die Pflichtteilsansprüche der nichtgemeinsamen Kinder und deren Nachkommen nicht beeinträchtigen.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 5. Okt. 1984, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 10a1C. Familienrecht / IIbis. Güterrecht der nach 1. Januar 1912 geschlossenen Ehen / 5. Ehevertrag / b. Rechtskraft gegenüber Dritten

b. Rechtskraft gegenüber Dritten

1 Dritten kann der Güterstand nur entgegengehalten werden, wenn sie ihn kennen oder kennen sollten.

2 Hat der Ehevertrag keine Rechtskraft gegenüber Dritten, so gelten im Verhältnis zu ihnen fortan die Bestimmungen über die Errungenschaftsbeteiligung.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 5. Okt. 1984, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 10b1C. Familienrecht / IIbis. Güterrecht der nach 1. Januar 1912 geschlossenen Ehen / 5. Ehevertrag / c. Unterstellung unter das neue Recht

c. Unterstellung unter das neue Recht

1 Ehegatten, die unter Güterverbindung stehen, diesen Güterstand aber ehevertraglich geändert haben, können bis spätestens ein Jahr nach Inkrafttreten des neuen Rechts durch Einreichung einer gemeinsamen schriftlichen Erklärung beim Güterrechtsregisteramt an ihrem Wohnsitz vereinbaren, ihre Rechtsverhältnisse dem neuen ordentlichen Güterstand der Errungenschaftsbeteiligung zu unterstellen.

2 In diesem Falle gilt die vertragliche Beteiligung am Vorschlag inskünftig für die Gesamtsumme des Vorschlages beider Ehegatten, sofern nicht durch Ehevertrag etwas anderes vereinbart wird.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 5. Okt. 1984, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 10c1C. Familienrecht / IIbis. Güterrecht der nach 1. Januar 1912 geschlossenen Ehen / 5. Ehevertrag / d. Vertragliche Gütertrennung nach bisherigem Recht

d. Vertragliche Gütertrennung nach bisherigem Recht

Haben die Ehegatten unter dem bisherigen Recht Gütertrennung vereinbart, so gelten für sie inskünftig die neuen Bestimmungen über die Gütertrennung.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 5. Okt. 1984, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 101C. Familienrecht / IIbis. Güterrecht der nach 1. Januar 1912 geschlossenen Ehen / 5. Ehevertrag / e. Im Hinblick auf das Inkrafttreten des neuen Rechts abgeschlossene Eheverträge

e. Im Hinblick auf das Inkrafttreten des neuen Rechts abgeschlossene Eheverträge

Eheverträge, die vor dem Inkrafttreten des Bundesgesetzes vom 5. Oktober 1984 geschlossen werden, aber erst unter dem neuen Recht ihre Wirkungen entfalten sollen, bedürfen nicht der Genehmigung der Vormundschaftsbehörde.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 5. Okt. 1984, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 10e1C. Familienrecht / IIbis. Güterrecht der nach 1. Januar 1912 geschlossenen Ehen / 5. Ehevertrag / f. Güterrechtsregister

f. Güterrechtsregister

1 Mit Inkrafttreten des Bundesgesetzes vom 5. Oktober 1984 werden keine neuen Eintragungen im Güterrechtsregister mehr vorgenommen.

2 Das Recht, ins Register Einsicht zu nehmen, bleibt gewahrt.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 5. Okt. 1984, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 111C. Familienrecht / IIbis. Güterrecht der nach 1. Januar 1912 geschlossenen Ehen / 6. Tilgung von Schulden bei der güterrechtlichen Auseinandersetzung

6. Tilgung von Schulden bei der güterrechtlichen Auseinandersetzung

Bereitet bei einer güterrechtlichen Auseinandersetzung im Zusammenhang mit dem Inkrafttreten des neuen Rechts die Zahlung von Geldschulden oder die Erstattung geschuldeter Sachen dem verpflichteten Ehegatten ernstliche Schwierigkeiten, so kann er verlangen, dass ihm Zahlungsfristen eingeräumt werden; die Forderung ist sicherzustellen, wenn es die Umstände rechtfertigen.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 5. Okt. 1984, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 11a1C. Familienrecht / IIbis. Güterrecht der nach 1. Januar 1912 geschlossenen Ehen / 7. Schutz der Gläubiger

7. Schutz der Gläubiger

Ändert sich das eheliche Güterrecht mit dem Inkrafttreten des Bundesgesetzes vom 5. Oktober 1984, so gelten für die Haftung die Bestimmungen über den Schutz der Gläubiger bei Änderung des Güterstandes.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 5. Okt. 1984, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 121C. Familienrecht / III. Das Kindesverhältnis im Allgemeinen

III. Das Kindesverhältnis im Allgemeinen

1 Entstehung und Wirkungen des Kindesverhältnisses stehen, sobald dieses Gesetz in Kraft getreten ist, unter dem neuen Recht; der Familienname und das Bürgerrecht, die nach bisherigem Recht erworben wurden, bleiben erhalten.

2 Befinden sich Kinder, die nach dem neuen Recht von Gesetzes wegen unter der elterlichen Gewalt stehen, bei seinem Inkrafttreten unter Vormundschaft, so tritt spätestens mit Ablauf eines Jahres nach diesem Zeitpunkt an deren Stelle die elterliche Gewalt, sofern nicht nach den Bestimmungen über die Entziehung der elterlichen Gewalt das Gegenteil angeordnet worden ist.

3 Eine unter dem bisherigen Recht durch behördliche Verfügung erfolgte Übertragung oder Entziehung der elterlichen Gewalt bleibt auch nach Inkrafttreten des neuen Rechts wirksam.

4 Steht bei Inkrafttreten der Änderung vom 21. Juni 2013 die elterliche Sorge nur einem Elternteil zu, so kann sich der andere Elternteil binnen Jahresfrist nach Inkrafttreten dieser Änderung mit dem Antrag auf Verfügung der gemeinsamen elterlichen Sorge an die zuständige Behörde wenden. Artikel 298b findet sinngemäss Anwendung.2

5 Der Elternteil, dem bei einer Scheidung die elterliche Sorge entzogen wurde, kann sich nur dann allein an das zuständige Gericht wenden, wenn die Scheidung im Zeitpunkt des Inkrafttretens der Änderung vom 21. Juni 2013 weniger als fünf Jahre zurückliegt.3


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 21. Juni 2013 (Elterliche Sorge), in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).
3 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 21. Juni 2013 (Elterliche Sorge), in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 12a1C. Familienrecht / IIIbis. Adoption / 1. Fortdauer des bisherigen Rechts

IIIbis. Adoption

1. Fortdauer des bisherigen Rechts

1 Die Adoption, die vor Inkrafttreten der neuen Bestimmungen des Bundesgesetzes vom 30. Juni 1972 über die Änderung des Schweizerischen Zivilgesetzbuches ausgesprochen worden ist, steht weiterhin unter dem am 1. Januar 19122 in Kraft getretenen Recht; Zustimmungen, die nach diesem Recht gültig erteilt worden sind, bleiben in jedem Falle wirksam.

2 Personen, die beim Inkrafttreten des Bundesgesetzes vom 7. Oktober 1994 noch nicht 20 Jahre alt sind, können auch nach Eintritt der Mündigkeit noch nach den Bestimmungen über die Unmündigen adoptiert werden, sofern das Gesuch innerhalb von zwei Jahren seit Inkrafttreten des Bundesgesetzes und vor dem 20. Geburtstag eingereicht wird.3


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 3 des BG vom 30. Juni 1972, in Kraft seit 1. April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).
2 Art. 465 ZGB in der Fassung vom 1. Jan. 1912: 1 Das angenommene Kind und seine Nachkommen haben zum Annehmenden das gleiche Erbrecht wie die ehelichen Nachkommen. 2 Der Annehmende und seine Blutsverwandten haben kein Erbrecht gegenüber dem angenommenen Kinde.
3 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 7. Okt. 1994, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1996 (AS 1995 1126; BBl 1993 I 1169).

Art. 12b1C. Familienrecht / IIIbis. Adoption / 2. Hängige Verfahren

2. Hängige Verfahren

Für Adoptionsverfahren, die im Zeitpunkt des Inkrafttretens der Änderung vom 17. Juni 2016 hängig sind, gilt das neue Recht.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 3 des BG vom 30. Juni 1972 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200). Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 17. Juni 2016 (Adoption), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 12c1C. Familienrecht / IIIbis. Adoption / 3. Unterstellung unter das neue Recht

3. Unterstellung unter das neue Recht

Die Bestimmungen der Änderung vom 17. Juni 2016 über das Adoptionsgeheimnis, die Auskunft über die leiblichen Eltern und deren Nachkommen sowie die Möglichkeit der Vereinbarung eines persönlichen Verkehrs zwischen den leiblichen Eltern und dem Kind gelten auch für Adoptionen, die vor ihrem Inkrafttreten ausgesprochen oder im Zeitpunkt ihres Inkrafttretens hängig sind.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 3 des BG vom 30. Juni 1972 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200). Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 17. Juni 2016 (Adoption), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 12cbis1

1 Eingefügt durch Anhang Ziff. 2 des BG vom 22. Juni 2001 zum Haager Adoptionsübereinkommen und über Massnahmen zum Schutz des Kindes bei internationalen Adoptionen (AS 2002 3988; BBl 1999 5795). Aufgehoben durch Ziff. I des BG vom 17. Juni 2016 (Adoption), mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 12d1C. Familienrecht / IIIter. Anfechtung der Ehelicherklärung

IIIter. Anfechtung der Ehelicherklärung

Für die Anfechtung einer unter dem bisherigen Recht erfolgten Ehelicherklärung gelten sinngemäss die Bestimmungen des neuen Rechts über die Anfechtung einer Anerkennung nach der Heirat der Eltern.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 131C. Familienrecht / IV. Vaterschaftsklage / 1. Hängige Klagen

IV. Vaterschaftsklage

1. Hängige Klagen

1 Eine beim Inkrafttreten des neuen Rechts hängige Klage wird nach dem neuen Recht beurteilt.

2 Die Wirkungen bis zum Inkrafttreten des neuen Rechts bestimmen sich nach dem bisherigen Recht.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 13a1C. Familienrecht / IV. Vaterschaftsklage / 2. Neue Klagen

2. Neue Klagen

1 Ist vor Inkrafttreten des neuen Rechts durch gerichtliche Entscheidung oder durch Vertrag eine Verpflichtung des Vaters zu Vermögensleistungen begründet worden und hat das Kind beim Inkrafttreten des neuen Rechts das zehnte Altersjahr noch nicht vollendet, so kann es binnen zwei Jahren nach den Bestimmungen des neuen Rechts auf Feststellung des Kindesverhältnisses klagen.

2 Beweist der Beklagte, dass seine Vaterschaft ausgeschlossen oder weniger wahrscheinlich ist als diejenige eines Dritten, so erlischt der Anspruch auf künftigen Unterhalt.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 1 des BG vom 25. Juni 1976, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 13b1C. Familienrecht / IVbis. Frist für die Feststellung und die Anfechtung des Kindesverhältnisses

IVbis. Frist für die Feststellung und die Anfechtung des Kindesverhältnisses

Wer durch das Inkrafttreten des Bundesgesetzes vom 7. Oktober 1994 mündig wird, kann in jedem Fall noch während eines Jahres eine Klage auf Feststellung oder Anfechtung des Kindesverhältnisses einreichen.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 7. Okt. 1994, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1996 (AS 1995 1126; BBl 1993 I 1169).

Art. 13c1C. Familienrecht / IVter. Unterhaltsbeiträge / 1. Bestehende Unterhaltstitel

IVter. Unterhaltsbeiträge

1. Bestehende Unterhaltstitel

Unterhaltsbeiträge an das Kind, die vor dem Inkrafttreten der Änderung vom 20. März 2015 in einem genehmigten Unterhaltsvertrag oder in einem Entscheid festgelegt worden sind, werden auf Gesuch des Kindes neu festgelegt. Sofern sie gleichzeitig mit Unterhaltsbeiträgen an den Elternteil festgelegt worden sind, ist ihre Anpassung nur bei einer erheblichen Veränderung der Verhältnisse zulässig.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 7. Okt. 1994 (AS 1995 1126; BBl 1993 I 1169). Fassung gemäss Ziff. I des BG vom 20. März 2015 (Kindesunterhalt), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 13cbis1C. Familienrecht / IVter. Unterhaltsbeiträge / 2. Rechtshängige Verfahren

2. Rechtshängige Verfahren

1 Auf Verfahren, die beim Inkrafttreten der Änderung vom 20. März 2015 rechtshängig sind, findet das neue Recht Anwendung.

2 Das Bundesgericht entscheidet nach bisherigem Recht, wenn der angefochtene Entscheid vor dem Inkrafttreten der Änderung vom 20. März 2015 ergangen ist; dies gilt auch bei einer allfälligen Rückweisung an die kantonale Instanz.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 20. März 2015 (Kindesunterhalt), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 13d1C. Familienrecht / IVquater. Name des Kindes

IVquater. Name des Kindes

1 Führen die Eltern nach Inkrafttreten der Änderung vom 30. September 2011 dieses Gesetzes aufgrund einer Erklärung nach Artikel 8a dieses Titels keinen gemeinsamen Familiennamen mehr, so können sie binnen Jahresfrist seit Inkrafttreten des neuen Rechts erklären, dass das Kind den Ledignamen des Elternteils erhält, der diese Erklärung abgegeben hat.

2 Wurde die elterliche Sorge über ein Kind nicht miteinander verheirateter Eltern beiden Eltern oder dem Vater allein vor Inkrafttreten der Änderung vom 30. September 2011 dieses Gesetzes übertragen, so kann die in Artikel 270a Absätze 2 und 3 vorgesehene Erklärung binnen Jahresfrist seit Inkrafttreten des neuen Rechts abgegeben werden.

3 Die Zustimmung des Kindes ist gestützt auf Artikel 270b vorbehalten.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I des BG vom 30. Sept. 2011 (Name und Bürgerrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 141C. Familienrecht / V. Erwachsenenschutz / 1. Bestehende Massnahmen

V. Erwachsenenschutz

1. Bestehende Massnahmen

1 Für den Erwachsenenschutz gilt das neue Recht, sobald die Änderung vom 19. Dezember 20082 in Kraft getreten ist.

2 Personen, die nach bisherigem Recht entmündigt worden sind, stehen mit dem Inkrafttreten des neuen Rechts unter umfassender Beistandschaft. Die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde nimmt von Amtes wegen so bald wie möglich die erforderlichen Anpassungen an das neue Recht vor. So lange die Behörde im Fall erstreckter elterlicher Sorge nicht anders entschieden hat, sind die Eltern von der Inventarpflicht, der Pflicht zur periodischen Berichterstattung und Rechnungsablage und der Pflicht, für bestimmte Geschäfte die Zustimmung einzuholen, befreit.

3 Die übrigen nach bisherigem Recht angeordneten Massnahmen fallen spätestens drei Jahre nach dem Inkrafttreten der Änderung vom 19. Dezember 2008 dahin, sofern die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde sie nicht in eine Massnahme des neuen Rechts überführt hat.

4 Hat ein Arzt gestützt auf Artikel 397b Absatz 2 in der Fassung vom 1. Januar 19813 für eine psychisch kranke Person eine unbefristete fürsorgerische Freiheitsentziehung angeordnet, so bleibt diese Massnahme bestehen. Die Einrichtung teilt der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde spätestens sechs Monate nach dem Inkrafttreten des neuen Rechts mit, ob sie die Voraussetzungen der Unterbringung weiterhin für erfüllt erachtet. Die Erwachsenenschutzbehörde nimmt nach den Bestimmungen über die periodische Überprüfung die erforderlichen Abklärungen vor und bestätigt gegebenenfalls den Unterbringungsentscheid.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
2AS 2011 725
3 AS 1980 31

Art. 14a1C. Familienrecht / V. Erwachsenenschutz / 2. Hängige Verfahren

2. Hängige Verfahren

1 Hängige Verfahren werden mit dem Inkrafttreten der Änderung vom 19. Dezember 20082 von der neu zuständigen Behörde weitergeführt.

2 Das neue Verfahrensrecht findet Anwendung.

3 Die Behörde entscheidet darüber, ob und wieweit das bisherige Verfahren ergänzt werden muss.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. II des BG vom 6. Okt. 1978 (AS 1980 31; BBl 1977 III 1). Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
2AS 2011 725

Art. 15 D. Erbrecht / I. Erbe und Erbgang

D. Erbrecht

I. Erbe und Erbgang

1 Die erbrechtlichen Verhältnisse und die mit ihnen nach kantonalem Recht untrennbar verknüpften güterrechtlichen Wirkungen des Todes eines Vaters, einer Mutter oder eines Ehegatten werden, wenn der Erblasser vor dem Inkrafttreten dieses Gesetzes gestorben ist, auch nach diesem Zeitpunkt durch das bisherige Recht bestimmt.

2 Diese Vorschrift bezieht sich sowohl auf die Erben als auf den Erbgang.

Art. 16 D. Erbrecht / II. Verfügungen von Todes wegen

II. Verfügungen von Todes wegen

1 Eine vor dem Inkrafttreten dieses Gesetzes erfolgte Errichtung oder Aufhebung einer Verfügung von Todes wegen kann, wenn sie nach dem Recht, das zur Zeit ihrer Errichtung gegolten hat, von einem verfügungsfähigen Erblasser errichtet worden ist, nicht deshalb angefochten werden, weil der Erblasser nach dem Inkrafttreten des neuen Rechtes gestorben ist und nach dessen Bestimmungen nicht verfügungsfähig gewesen wäre.

2 Eine letztwillige Verfügung kann wegen eines Formmangels nicht angefochten werden, wenn die Formvorschriften beobachtet sind, die zur Zeit der Errichtung oder des Todes gegolten haben.

3 Die Anfechtung wegen Überschreitung der Verfügungsfreiheit oder wegen der Art der Verfügung richtet sich bei allen Verfügungen von Todes wegen nach den Bestimmungen des neuen Rechtes, wenn der Erblasser nach dessen Inkrafttreten gestorben ist.

Art. 17 E. Sachenrecht / I. Dingliche Rechte im Allgemeinen

E. Sachenrecht

I. Dingliche Rechte im Allgemeinen

1 Die beim Inkrafttreten dieses Gesetzes bestehenden dinglichen Rechte bleiben unter Vorbehalt der Vorschriften über das Grundbuch auch unter dem neuen Recht anerkannt.

2 In Bezug auf ihren Inhalt stehen jedoch das Eigentum und die beschränkten dinglichen Rechte nach dem Inkrafttreten des Gesetzes, soweit es eine Ausnahme nicht vorsieht, unter dem neuen Recht.

3 Wäre ihre Errichtung nach dem neuen Rechte nicht mehr möglich, so bleiben sie unter dem bisherigen Recht.

Art. 18 E. Sachenrecht / II. Anspruch auf Eintragung im Grundbuch

II. Anspruch auf Eintragung im Grundbuch

1 Die vor dem Inkrafttreten dieses Gesetzes begründeten Ansprüche auf Errichtung eines dinglichen Rechtes werden als rechtskräftig anerkannt, wenn sie der Form des bisherigen oder des neuen Rechtes entsprechen.

2 Die Verordnung betreffend Grundbuchführung bestimmt, welche Ausweise für die Eintragung solcher Ansprüche erforderlich sind.

3 Der vor dem Inkrafttreten dieses Gesetzes durch Rechtsgeschäft festgesetzte Inhalt eines dinglichen Verhältnisses bleibt auch unter dem neuen Recht anerkannt, soweit er nicht mit diesem unverträglich ist.

Art. 19 E. Sachenrecht / III. Ersitzung

III. Ersitzung

1 Die Ersitzung richtet sich von dem Inkrafttreten dieses Gesetzes an nach dem neuen Recht.

2 Hat jedoch eine Ersitzung, die auch dem neuen Recht entspricht, unter dem bisherigen Recht begonnen, so wird die bis zum Inkrafttreten dieses Gesetzes abgelaufene Zeit an die Ersitzungsfrist verhältnismässig angerechnet.

Art. 201E. Sachenrecht / IV. Besondere Eigentumsrechte / 1. Bäume auf fremdem Boden

IV. Besondere Eigentumsrechte

1. Bäume auf fremdem Boden

1 Die bestehenden Eigentumsrechte an Bäumen auf fremdem Boden werden auch weiterhin nach kantonalem Recht anerkannt.

2 Die Kantone sind befugt, diese Verhältnisse zu beschränken oder aufzuheben.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. IV des BG vom 19. Dez. 1963, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 20bis1E. Sachenrecht / IV. Besondere Eigentumsrechte / 2. Stockwerkeigentum / a. Ursprüngliches

2. Stockwerkeigentum

a. Ursprüngliches

Das vom früheren kantonalen Recht beherrschte Stockwerkeigentum ist den neuen Vorschriften dieses Gesetzes unterstellt, auch wenn die Stockwerke oder Stockwerkteile nicht als Wohnungen oder Geschäftsraumeinheiten in sich abgeschlossen sind.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. IV des BG vom 19. Dez. 1963, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 20ter1E. Sachenrecht / IV. Besondere Eigentumsrechte / 2. Stockwerkeigentum / b. Umgewandeltes

b. Umgewandeltes

1 Die Kantone können auch Stockwerkeigentum, das in Formen des am 1. Januar 1912 in Kraft getretenen Rechtes in das Grundbuch eingetragen worden ist, den neuen Vorschriften über das Stockwerkeigentum unterstellen.

2 Die Unterstellung wird wirksam mit der entsprechenden Änderung der Einträge im Grundbuch.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. IV des BG vom 19. Dez. 1963, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 20quater1E. Sachenrecht / IV. Besondere Eigentumsrechte / 2. Stockwerkeigentum / c. Bereinigung der Grundbücher

c. Bereinigung der Grundbücher

Die Kantone können zur Durchführung der Unterstellung des umgewandelten Stockwerkeigentums unter die neuen Vorschriften und zur Eintragung des bestehenden eigentlichen Stockwerkeigentums die Bereinigung der Grundbücher anordnen und dafür besondere Verfahrensvorschriften erlassen.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. IV des BG vom 19. Dez. 1963, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 21 E. Sachenrecht / V. Grunddienstbarkeiten

V. Grunddienstbarkeiten

1 Die vor dem Inkrafttreten dieses Gesetzes entstandenen Grunddienstbarkeiten bleiben nach der Einführung des Grundbuches auch ohne Eintragung in Kraft, können aber, solange sie nicht eingetragen sind, gutgläubigen Dritten gegenüber nicht geltend gemacht werden.

2 Mit Dienstbarkeiten nebensächlich verbundene Verpflichtungen, die vor dem Inkrafttreten der Änderung vom 11. Dezember 20091 begründet wurden und sich nur aus den Grundbuchbelegen ergeben, können Dritten, die sich in gutem Glauben auf das Grundbuch verlassen, weiterhin entgegengehalten werden.2


1AS 2011 4637
2 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 22 E. Sachenrecht / VI. Grundpfandrechte / 1. Anerkennung der bestehenden Pfandtitel

VI. Grundpfandrechte

1. Anerkennung der bestehenden Pfandtitel

1 Die zur Zeit des Inkrafttretens dieses Gesetzes bestehenden Pfandtitel bleiben in Kraft, ohne dass deren Anpassung an das neue Recht zu erfolgen hat.

2 Den Kantonen bleibt es jedoch vorbehalten, eine Neuausfertigung der bestehenden Pfandtitel auf der Grundlage des neuen Rechtes mit bestimmten Fristen vorzuschreiben.

Art. 23 E. Sachenrecht / VI. Grundpfandrechte / 2. Errichtung von Pfandrechten

2. Errichtung von Pfandrechten

1 Neue Grundpfandrechte können nach dem Inkrafttreten dieses Gesetzes nur noch in den von diesem anerkannten Arten errichtet werden.

2 Für deren Errichtung bleiben bis zur Einführung des Grundbuches die bisherigen kantonal-rechtlichen Formen in Kraft.

Art. 24 E. Sachenrecht / VI. Grundpfandrechte / 3. Tilgung von Titeln

3. Tilgung von Titeln

1 Die Tilgung und Umänderung der Titel, die Pfandentlassung u. dgl. stehen nach dem Inkrafttreten des neuen Rechtes unter dessen Vorschriften.

2 Bis zur Einführung des Grundbuches bestimmen sich jedoch die Formen nach kantonalem Recht.

Art. 25 E. Sachenrecht / VI. Grundpfandrechte / 4. Umfang der Pfandhaft

4. Umfang der Pfandhaft

1 Der Umfang der Pfandhaft bestimmt sich für alle Grundpfandrechte nach dem neuen Recht.

2 Hat jedoch der Gläubiger vermöge besonderer Abrede gewisse Gegenstände in rechtsgültiger Weise mit dem Grundstück verpfändet erhalten, so bleibt das Pfandrecht an diesen in Kraft, auch wenn sie nach dem neuen Recht nicht mitverpfändet sein würden.

Art. 26 E. Sachenrecht / VI. Grundpfandrechte / 5. Rechte und Pflichten aus dem Grundpfand / a. Im Allgemeinen

5. Rechte und Pflichten aus dem Grundpfand

a. Im Allgemeinen

1 Die Rechte und Pflichten des Gläubigers und des Schuldners beurteilen sich, soweit es sich um Vertragswirkungen handelt, für die zur Zeit des Inkrafttretens dieses Gesetzes vorhandenen Pfandrechte nach dem bisherigen Recht.

2 In Bezug auf die von Gesetzes wegen eintretenden und vertraglich nicht abzuändernden Wirkungen gilt von diesem Zeitpunkte an auch für die schon bestehenden Pfandrechte das neue Recht.

3 Erstreckt sich das Pfandrecht auf mehrere Grundstücke, so bleibt die Pfandhaft nach bisherigem Recht bestehen.

Art. 27 E. Sachenrecht / VI. Grundpfandrechte / 5. Rechte und Pflichten aus dem Grundpfand / b. Sicherungsrechte

b. Sicherungsrechte

Die Rechte des Pfandgläubigers während des bestehenden Verhältnisses, wie namentlich die Sicherungsrechte und ebenso die Rechte des Schuldners stehen für alle Pfandrechte vom Zeitpunkte des Inkrafttretens dieses Gesetzes an unter dem neuen Recht.

Art. 28 E. Sachenrecht / VI. Grundpfandrechte / 5. Rechte und Pflichten aus dem Grundpfand / c. Kündigung, Übertragung

c. Kündigung, Übertragung

Die Kündbarkeit der Pfandforderungen und die Übertragung der Pfandtitel werden bei den Pfandrechten, die zur Zeit des Inkrafttretens dieses Gesetzes bereits errichtet sind, nach dem bisherigen Recht beurteilt, unter Vorbehalt der zwingenden Vorschriften des neuen Rechtes.

Art. 29 E. Sachenrecht / VI. Grundpfandrechte / 6. Rang

6. Rang

1 Der Rang der Pfandrechte bestimmt sich bis zur Aufnahme der Grundstücke in das Grundbuch nach bisherigem Recht.

2 Vom Zeitpunkte der Einführung des Grundbuches an richtet sich der Rang der Gläubiger nach dem Grundbuchrechte dieses Gesetzes.

Art. 30 E. Sachenrecht / VI. Grundpfandrechte / 7. Pfandstelle

7. Pfandstelle

1 In Bezug auf die feste Pfandstelle oder ein Recht des Gläubigers auf Ein- oder Nachrücken gilt mit der Einführung des Grundbuches und jedenfalls nach Ablauf von fünf Jahren seit dem Inkrafttreten dieses Gesetzes das neue Recht, unter Vorbehalt der für den Gläubiger bestehenden besondern Ansprüche.

2 Die Kantone können weitere Übergangsbestimmungen aufstellen.1


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. II 21 des BG vom 15. Dez. 1989 über die Genehmigung kantonaler Erlasse durch den Bund, in Kraft seit 1. Febr. 1991 (AS 1991 362; BBl 1988 II 1333).

Art. 31 und 321E. Sachenrecht / VI. Grundpfandrechte / 8. ...

8. ...


1 Aufgehoben durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 33 E. Sachenrecht / VI. Grundpfandrechte / 9. Gleichstellung bisheriger Pfandarten mit solchen des neuen Rechtes

9. Gleichstellung bisheriger Pfandarten mit solchen des neuen Rechtes

1 Die kantonalen Einführungsgesetze können feststellen, dass im Allgemeinen oder in bestimmter Beziehung eine Grundpfandart des bisherigen Rechtes einer solchen des neuen Rechtes gleichzuhalten sei.

2 Soweit dies geschieht, finden die Bestimmungen dieses Gesetzes mit dessen Inkrafttreten auch Anwendung auf solche kantonale Pfandrechte.

3 ...1


1 Aufgehoben durch Ziff. II 21 des BG vom 15. Dez. 1989 über die Genehmigung kantonaler Erlasse durch den Bund, mit Wirkung seit 1. Febr. 1991 (AS 1991 362; BBl 1988 II 1333).

Art. 33a1E. Sachenrecht / VI. Grundpfandrechte / 10. Fortdauer des bisherigen Rechts für bisherige Pfandarten

10. Fortdauer des bisherigen Rechts für bisherige Pfandarten

1 Gülten sowie in Serien ausgegebene Schuldbriefe bleiben im Grundbuch eingetragen.

2 Sie unterstehen weiterhin den Bestimmungen des bisherigen Rechts.

3 Das kantonale Recht kann die Umwandlung von Gülten, die gestützt auf Bundesrecht oder früheres Recht errichtet wurden, in Pfandarten nach geltendem Recht vorsehen. Die Umwandlung kann für geringfügige Beträge auch die Einführung einer persönlichen Haftung des Eigentümers des verpfändeten Grundstücks beinhalten.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 33b1E. Sachenrecht / VI. Grundpfandrechte / 11. Umwandlung der Art des Schuldbriefs

11. Umwandlung der Art des Schuldbriefs

Der Grundeigentümer und die am Schuldbrief Berechtigten können gemeinsam schriftlich verlangen, dass ein vor dem Inkrafttreten der Änderung vom 11. Dezember 20092 eingetragener Papier-Schuldbrief in einen Register-Schuldbrief umgewandelt wird.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2AS 2011 4637

Art. 34 E. Sachenrecht / VII. Fahrnispfandrechte / 1. Formvorschriften

VII. Fahrnispfandrechte

1. Formvorschriften

1 Fahrnispfandrechte können vom Zeitpunkt des Inkrafttretens dieses Gesetzes an nur in den von diesem vorgesehenen Formen errichtet werden.

2 Soweit vor diesem Zeitpunkt ein Fahrnispfand in anderer Form errichtet worden ist, erlischt es mit Ablauf von sechs Monaten, die bei Fälligkeit der Forderung mit dem Inkrafttreten des neuen Rechtes und bei späterer Fälligkeit mit deren Eintritt oder mit dem Zeitpunkte zu laufen beginnen, auf den die Kündigung zulässig ist.

Art. 35 E. Sachenrecht / VII. Fahrnispfandrechte / 2. Wirkung

2. Wirkung

1 Die Wirkungen des Fahrnispfandrechtes, die Rechte und Pflichten des Pfandgläubigers, des Verpfänders und des Pfandschuldners richten sich vom Zeitpunkte des Inkrafttretens dieses Gesetzes an nach dem neuen Recht, auch wenn das Pfandrecht schon vorher entstanden ist.

2 Ein vor dem Inkrafttreten dieses Gesetzes geschlossener Verfallsvertrag verliert mit diesem Zeitpunkte seine Gültigkeit.

Art. 36 E. Sachenrecht / VIII. Retentionsrecht

VIII. Retentionsrecht

1 Das Retentionsrecht dieses Gesetzes erstreckt sich auch auf solche Sachen, die vor dessen Inkrafttreten in die Verfügungsgewalt des Gläubigers gekommen sind.

2 Es steht dem Gläubiger auch für solche Forderungen zu, die vor diesem Zeitpunkt entstanden sind.

3 Früher entstandene Retentionsrechte unterliegen bezüglich ihrer Wirksamkeit den Bestimmungen dieses Gesetzes.

Art. 37 E. Sachenrecht / IX. Besitz

IX. Besitz

Der Besitz steht mit dem Inkrafttreten dieses Gesetzes unter dem neuen Recht.

Art. 38 E. Sachenrecht / X. Grundbuch / 1. Anlegung des Grundbuches

X. Grundbuch

1. Anlegung des Grundbuches

1 Der Bundesrat legt nach Anhörung der Kantone die Einführungsplanung für das Grundbuch fest. Er kann diese Zuständigkeit an das zuständige Departement oder Amt übertragen.1

2 ...2


1 Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. II des BG vom 5. Okt. 2007 über Geoinformation, in Kraft seit 1. Juli 2008 (AS 2008 2793; BBl 2006 7817).
2 Aufgehoben durch Anhang Ziff. II des BG vom 5. Okt. 2007 über Geoinformation, mit Wirkung seit 1. Juli 2008 (AS 2008 2793; BBl 2006 7817).

Art. 391E. Sachenrecht / X. Grundbuch / 2. Amtliche Vermessung / a. ...

2. Amtliche Vermessung

a. ...

...


1 Aufgehoben durch Anhang Ziff. II des BG vom 5. Okt. 2007 über Geoinformation, mit Wirkung seit 1. Juli 2008 (AS 2008 2793; BBl 2006 7817)

Art. 40 E. Sachenrecht / X. Grundbuch / 2. Amtliche Vermessung / b. Verhältnis zum Grundbuch

b. Verhältnis zum Grundbuch

1 In der Regel soll die Vermessung der Anlegung des Grundbuches vorangehen.

2 Mit Einwilligung des Bundes kann jedoch das Grundbuch schon vorher angelegt werden, wenn genügende Liegenschaftsverzeichnisse vorhanden sind.

Art. 41 E. Sachenrecht / X. Grundbuch / 2. Amtliche Vermessung / c. Zeit der Durchführung

c. Zeit der Durchführung

1 ...1

2 Die Vermessung und die Einführung des Grundbuches kann für die einzelnen Bezirke eines Kantons nacheinander erfolgen.


1 Aufgehoben durch Anhang Ziff. II des BG vom 5. Oktober 2007 über Geoinformation, mit Wirkung seit 1. Juli 2008 (AS 2008 2793; BBl 2006 7817).

Art. 421

1 Aufgehoben durch Anhang Ziff. II des BG vom 5. Oktober 2007 über Geoinformation, mit Wirkung seit 1. Juli 2008 (AS 2008 2793; BBl 2006 7817).

Art. 43 E. Sachenrecht / X. Grundbuch / 3. Eintragung der dinglichen Rechte / a. Verfahren

3. Eintragung der dinglichen Rechte

a. Verfahren

1 Bei der Einführung des Grundbuches sollen die dinglichen Rechte, die bereits bestehen, zur Eintragung gebracht werden.

2 Zu diesem Zwecke ist eine öffentliche Aufforderung zur Anmeldung und Eintragung dieser Rechte zu erlassen.

3 Die nach bisherigem Recht in öffentlichen Büchern eingetragenen dinglichen Rechte werden, soweit sie nach neuem Recht begründet werden können, von Amtes wegen in das Grundbuch eingetragen.

Art. 44 E. Sachenrecht / X. Grundbuch / 3. Eintragung der dinglichen Rechte / b. Folge der Nichteintragung

b. Folge der Nichteintragung

1 Die dinglichen Rechte des bisherigen Rechtes, die nicht eingetragen werden, behalten zwar ihre Gültigkeit, können aber Dritten, die sich in gutem Glauben auf das Grundbuch verlassen, nicht entgegengehalten werden.

2 Der Gesetzgebung des Bundes oder der Kantone bleibt es vorbehalten, alle im Grundbuche nicht eingetragenen dinglichen Rechte auf einen bestimmten Zeitpunkt nach vorausgehender Auskündung für aufgehoben zu erklären.

3 Vor dem Inkrafttreten der Änderung vom 11. Dezember 20091 entstandene, nicht eingetragene öffentlich-rechtliche Grundlasten und gesetzliche Pfandrechte des kantonalen Rechts können Dritten, die sich in gutem Glauben auf das Grundbuch verlassen, noch während zehn Jahren nach dem Inkrafttreten entgegengehalten werden.2


1AS 2011 4637
2 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 451E. Sachenrecht / X. Grundbuch / 4. Behandlung aufgehobener Rechte

4. Behandlung aufgehobener Rechte

1 Dingliche Rechte, die nach dem Grundbuchrecht nicht mehr begründet werden können, wie Eigentum an Bäumen auf fremdem Boden, Nutzungspfandrechte u. dgl. werden im Grundbuch nicht eingetragen, sind aber in zweckdienlicher Weise anzumerken.

2 Sind sie aus irgendwelchem Grunde untergegangen, so können sie nicht neu begründet werden.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. IV des BG vom 19. Dez. 1963, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 46 E. Sachenrecht / X. Grundbuch / 5. Verschiebung der Einführung des Grundbuches

5. Verschiebung der Einführung des Grundbuches

1 Die Einführung des Grundbuches nach den Vorschriften dieses Gesetzes kann mit Ermächtigung des Bundesrates durch die Kantone verschoben werden, sobald die kantonalen Formvorschriften, mit oder ohne Ergänzungen, als genügend erscheinen, um die Wirkung des Grundbuches im Sinne des neuen Rechtes zu gewährleisten.

2 Dabei ist genau festzustellen, mit welchen Formen des kantonalen Rechtes die vom neuen Recht angeordneten Wirkungen verbunden sein sollen.

Art. 47 E. Sachenrecht / X. Grundbuch / 6. Einführung des Sachenrechtes vor dem Grundbuch

6. Einführung des Sachenrechtes vor dem Grundbuch

Das Sachenrecht dieses Gesetzes tritt im Allgemeinen in Kraft, auch ohne dass die Grundbücher angelegt worden sind.

Art. 48 E. Sachenrecht / X. Grundbuch / 7. Wirkung kantonaler Formen

7. Wirkung kantonaler Formen

1 Die Kantone können mit dem Inkrafttreten des Sachenrechtes und vor der Einführung des Grundbuches die Formen, wie Fertigung, Eintragung in Grund-, Pfand- und Servitutenregister bezeichnen, denen sofort Grundbuchwirkung zukommen soll.

2 Diese Formen können mit der Wirkung ausgestattet werden, dass auch ohne und vor Einführung des Grundbuches in Bezug auf Entstehung, Übertragung, Umänderung und Untergang der dinglichen Rechte die Grundbuchwirkung mit ihnen verbunden ist.

3 Dagegen besteht, solange nicht das Grundbuch selbst eingeführt oder eine andere Einrichtung ihm gleichgestellt ist, eine Grundbuchwirkung zugunsten des gutgläubigen Dritten nicht.

Art. 491F. Verjährung

F. Verjährung

1 Bestimmt das neue Recht eine längere Frist als das bisherige Recht, so gilt das neue Recht, sofern die Verjährung nach bisherigem Recht noch nicht eingetreten ist.

2 Bestimmt das neue Recht eine kürzere Frist, so gilt das bisherige Recht.

3 Das Inkrafttreten des neuen Rechts lässt den Beginn einer laufenden Verjährung unberührt, sofern das Gesetz nichts anderes bestimmt.

4 Im Übrigen gilt das neue Recht für die Verjährung ab dem Zeitpunkt seines Inkrafttretens.


1 Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 3 des BG vom 15. Juni 2018 (Revision des Verjährungsrechts), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2020 (AS 2018 5343; BBl 2014 235).

Art. 50 G. Vertragsformen

G. Vertragsformen

Verträge, die vor dem Inkrafttreten dieses Gesetzes abgeschlossen worden sind, behalten ihre Gültigkeit, auch wenn ihre Form den Vorschriften des neuen Rechtes nicht entspricht.


  Zweiter Abschnitt: Einführungs- und Übergangsbestimmungen

Art. 51 A. Aufhebung des kantonalen Zivilrechtes

A. Aufhebung des kantonalen Zivilrechtes

Mit dem Inkrafttreten dieses Gesetzes sind die zivilrechtlichen Bestimmungen der Kantone aufgehoben, soweit nicht bundesrechtlich etwas anderes vorgesehen ist.

Art. 52 B. Ergänzende kantonale Anordnungen / I. Recht und Pflicht der Kantone

B. Ergänzende kantonale Anordnungen

I. Recht und Pflicht der Kantone

1 Die Kantone treffen die zur Ergänzung dieses Gesetzes vorgesehenen Anordnungen, wie namentlich in Bezug auf die Zuständigkeit der Behörden und die Einrichtung der Zivilstands—, Vormundschafts-1 und Grundbuchämter.

2 Soweit das neue Recht zu seiner Ausführung notwendig der Ergänzung durch kantonale Anordnungen bedarf, sind die Kantone verpflichtet, solche aufzustellen, und können sie vorläufig auf dem Verordnungswege erlassen.2

3 Die kantonalen Anordnungen zum Registerrecht bedürfen der Genehmigung des Bundes.3

4 Die übrigen kantonalen Anordnungen sind dem Bundesamt für Justiz zur Kenntnis zu bringen.4


1 Heute: Erwachsenenschutzbehörden (siehe Art. 440).
2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. II 21 des BG vom 15. Dez. 1989 über die Genehmigung kantonaler Erlasse durch den Bund, in Kraft seit 1. Febr. 1991 (AS 1991 362; BBl 1988 II 1333).
3 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
4 Eingefügt durch Ziff. II 21 des BG vom 15. Dez 1989 über die Genehmigung kantonaler Erlasse durch den Bund (AS 1991 362; BBl 1988 II 1333). Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 19. Dez. 2008 (Erwachsenenschutz, Personenrecht und Kindesrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 53 B. Ergänzende kantonale Anordnungen / II. Ersatzverordnungen des Bundes

II. Ersatzverordnungen des Bundes

1 Hat ein Kanton die notwendigen Anordnungen nicht rechtzeitig getroffen, so erlässt der Bundesrat vorläufig die erforderlichen Verordnungen an Stelle des Kantons unter Anzeige an die Bundesversammlung.

2 Macht ein Kanton in einer Sache, die einer ergänzenden Verordnung nicht notwendig bedarf, von seiner Befugnis keinen Gebrauch, so verbleibt es bei den Vorschriften dieses Gesetzes.

Art. 54 C. Bezeichnung der zuständigen Behörden

C. Bezeichnung der zuständigen Behörden

1 Wo dieses Gesetz von einer zuständigen Behörde spricht, bestimmen die Kantone, welche bereits vorhandene oder erst zu schaffende Behörde zuständig sein soll.

2 Wo das Gesetz nicht ausdrücklich entweder vom Gericht oder von einer Verwaltungsbehörde spricht, können die Kantone entweder eine gerichtliche oder eine Verwaltungsbehörde als zuständig bezeichnen.

3 Soweit nicht die Zivilprozessordnung vom 19. Dezember 20081 anwendbar ist, regeln die Kantone das Verfahren.2


1 SR 272
2 Fassung gemäss Anhang 1 Ziff. II 3 der Zivilprozessordnung vom 19. Dez. 2008, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 55 D. Öffentliche Beurkundung / I. Im Allgemeinen

D. Öffentliche Beurkundung

I. Im Allgemeinen1

1 Die Kantone bestimmen, in welcher Weise auf ihrem Gebiete die öffentliche Beurkundung hergestellt wird.

2 Sie haben für die Errichtung von öffentlichen Urkunden in fremder Sprache ordnende Bestimmungen aufzustellen.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 55a1D. Öffentliche Beurkundung / II. Elektronische Ausfertigungen und Beglaubigungen

II. Elektronische Ausfertigungen und Beglaubigungen

1 Die Kantone können die Urkundspersonen ermächtigen, elektronische Ausfertigungen der von ihnen errichteten öffentlichen Urkunden zu erstellen.

2 Sie können die Urkundspersonen auch ermächtigen, die Übereinstimmung der von ihnen erstellten elektronischen Kopien mit den Originaldokumenten auf Papier sowie die Echtheit von Unterschriften elektronisch zu beglaubigen.

3 Die Urkundsperson muss eine qualifizierte elektronische Signatur verwenden, die auf einem qualifizierten Zertifikat einer anerkannten Anbieterin von Zertifizierungsdiensten im Sinne des Bundesgesetzes vom 18. März 20162 über die elektronische Signatur beruht.3

4 Der Bundesrat erlässt Ausführungsbestimmungen, welche die Interoperabilität der Informatiksysteme sowie die Integrität, Authentizität und Sicherheit der Daten gewährleisten.


1 Eingefügt durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 11. Dez. 2009 (Register-Schuldbrief und weitere Änderungen im Sachenrecht), in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 SR 943.03
3 Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. II 3 des BG vom 18. März 2016 über die elektronische Signatur, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 4651; BBl 2014 1001).

Art. 561E. Wasserrechtsverleihungen

E. Wasserrechtsverleihungen

Bis zum Erlass einer bundesrechtlichen Ordnung gilt für die Wasserrechtsverleihungen folgende Bestimmung:

Die Wasserrechtsverleihungen an öffentlichen Gewässern können, sobald sie auf wenigstens 30 Jahre oder auf unbestimmte Zeit ausgestellt und nicht als Dienstbarkeit mit einem herrschenden Grundstück verbunden sind, als selbständige und dauernde Rechte in das Grundbuch aufgenommen werden.


1 Siehe heute Art. 59 des BG vom 22. Dez. 1916 über die Nutzbarmachung der Wasserkräfte (SR 721.80).

Art. 571F.–H. ...

F.–H. ...


1 Aufgehoben durch Art. 53 Abs. 1 Bst. b des BG vom 8. Nov. 1934 über die Banken und Sparkassen, mit Wirkung seit 1. März 1935 (AS 51 117; BS 10 337; BBl 1934 I 171).

Art. 581J. Schuldbetreibung und Konkurs

J. Schuldbetreibung und Konkurs

Das Bundesgesetz vom 11. April 18892 über Schuldbetreibung und Konkurs wird mit dem Inkrafttreten dieses Gesetzes abgeändert wie folgt:

...3


1 Neue Nummerierung der letzten vier Artikel als Folge der Aufhebung der ursprünglichen Art. 58 und 59, gemäss Ziff. I der UeB OR, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1912 (AS 27 317; BS 2 199; BBl 1905 II 1, 1909 III 725, 1911 I 845).
2 SR 281.1
3 Text siehe im genannten BG. Für die Fassung der Art. 132bis, 141 Abs. 3 und 258 Abs. 4 siehe AS 24 233 SchlT Art. 60.

Art. 591K. Anwendung schweizerischen und fremden Rechtes

K. Anwendung schweizerischen und fremden Rechtes

1 Das Bundesgesetz vom 25. Juni 18912 betreffend die zivilrechtlichen Verhältnisse der Niedergelassenen und Aufenthalter bleibt für die Rechtsverhältnisse der Schweizer im Auslande und der Ausländer in der Schweiz, und soweit kantonal verschiedenes Recht zur Anwendung kommt, in Kraft.

2 ...3

3 Das Bundesgesetz vom 25. Juni 1891 erhält folgende Einfügung: Art. 7a–7i

...


1 Neue Nummerierung der letzten vier Artikel als Folge der Aufhebung der ursprünglichen Art. 58 und 59, gemäss Ziff. I der UeB OR, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1912 (AS 27 317; BS 2 199; BBl 1905 II 1, 1909 III 725, 1911 I 845).
2 [BS 2 737; AS 1972 2819 II 1, 1977 237 II 1, 1986 122 II 1. AS 1988 1776 Anhang Ziff. I Bst. a]. Siehe heute das IPRG vom 18. Dez. 1987 (SR 291).
3 Aufgehoben durch Ziff. I 2 des BG vom 5. Okt. 1984, mit Wirkung seit 1. Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 601L. Aufhebung von Bundeszivilrecht

L. Aufhebung von Bundeszivilrecht

1 Mit dem Inkrafttreten dieses Gesetzes sind die damit im Widerspruch stehenden zivilrechtlichen Bestimmungen des Bundes aufgehoben.

2 Insbesondere sind aufgehoben: das Bundesgesetz vom 24. Dezember 18742 betreffend Feststellung und Beurkundung des Zivilstandes und die Ehe; das Bundesgesetz vom 22. Juni 18813 betreffend die persönliche Handlungsfähigkeit; das Bundesgesetz vom 14. Juni 18814 über das Obligationenrecht.

3 In Geltung bleiben die Spezialgesetze betreffend das Eisenbahn-, Dampfschiff-, Post-, Telegraphen- und Telefonrecht, die Verpfändung und Zwangsliquidation der Eisenbahnen, diejenigen betreffend die Fabrikarbeit und die Haftbarkeit aus Fabrikbetrieb und aus andern Unternehmungen sowie alle Bundesgesetze über Gegenstände des Obligationenrechts, die neben dem Bundesgesetz vom 14. Juni 1881 über das Obligationenrecht erlassen worden sind.


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I der UeB OR, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1912 (AS 27 317; BS 2 199; BBl 1905 II 1, 1909 III 725, 1911 I 845).
2 [AS 1 506]
3 [AS 5 556]
4 [AS 5 635, 11 490; BS 2 784 Art. 103 Abs. 1]

Art. 611M. Schlussbestimmung M. Schlussbestimmung

M. Schlussbestimmung

1 Dieses Gesetz tritt mit dem 1. Januar 1912 in Kraft.

2 Der Bundesrat ist unter Zustimmung der Bundesversammlung befugt, einzelne Bestimmungen schon früher in Kraft zu setzen.


1 Neue Nummerierung der letzten vier Artikel als Folge der Aufhebung der ursprünglichen Art. 58 und 59, gemäss Ziff. I der UeB OR, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 1912 (AS 27 317; BS 2 199; BBl 1905 II 1, 1909 III 725, 1911 I 845).


1 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 4 des BG vom 26. Juni 1998, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).2 Fassung gemäss Ziff. I 4 des BG vom 26. Juni 1998, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

  Wortlaut der früheren Bestimmungen1  des sechsten Titels

  Sechster Titel: Das Güterrecht der Ehegatten

  Erster Abschnitt: Allgemeine Vorschriften

Art. 178 A. Ordentlicher Güterstand

A. Ordentlicher Güterstand

Die Ehegatten stehen unter den Vorschriften der Güterverbindung, insofern sie nicht durch Ehevertrag etwas anderes vereinbaren oder unter ihnen der ausserordentliche Güterstand eingetreten ist.

Art. 179 B. Güterstand des Ehevertrages / I. Inhalt des Vertrages

B. Güterstand des Ehevertrages

I. Inhalt des Vertrages

1 Ein Ehevertrag kann sowohl vor als nach Eingehung der Ehe abgeschlossen werden.

2 Die Brautleute oder Ehegatten haben für ihren Vertrag einen der Güterstände anzunehmen, die in diesem Gesetze vorgesehen sind.

3 Ein nach Eingehung der Ehe abgeschlossener Ehevertrag darf die bisherige Haftung des Vermögens gegenüber Dritten nicht beeinträchtigen.

Art. 180 B. Güterstand des Ehevertrages / II. Vertragsfähigkeit

II. Vertragsfähigkeit

1 Für Abschluss, Abänderung und Aufhebung eines Ehevertrages bedürfen die Vertragschliessenden der Urteilsfähigkeit.

2 Sind sie unmündig oder entmündigt, so ist die Zustimmung ihrer gesetzlichen Vertreter erforderlich.

Art. 181 B. Güterstand des Ehevertrages / III. Form des Vertrages

III. Form des Vertrages

1 Abschluss, Abänderung und Aufhebung des Ehevertrages bedürfen zu ihrer Gültigkeit der öffentlichen Beurkundung sowie der Unterschrift der vertragschliessenden Personen und ihrer gesetzlichen Vertreter.

2 Eheverträge, die während der Ehe abgeschlossen werden, bedürfen überdies der Zustimmung der Vormundschaftsbehörde.

3 Der Ehevertrag erhält Rechtskraft gegenüber Dritten nach den Vorschriften über das Güterrechtsregister.

Art. 182 C. Ausserordentlicher Güterstand / I. Gesetzliche Gütertrennung

C. Ausserordentlicher Güterstand

I. Gesetzliche Gütertrennung

1 Kommen die Gläubiger im Konkurse eines Ehegatten zu Verlust, so tritt von Gesetzes wegen Gütertrennung ein.

2 Sind zur Zeit der Eheschliessung Gläubiger vorhanden, die Verlustscheine besitzen, so kann jedes der Brautleute die Gütertrennung dadurch begründen, dass es diesen Güterstand vor der Trauung in das Güterrechtsregister eintragen lässt.

Art. 183 C. Ausserordentlicher Güterstand / II. Gerichtliche Gütertrennung / 1. Auf Begehren der Ehefrau

II. Gerichtliche Gütertrennung

1. Auf Begehren der Ehefrau

Der Richter hat auf Begehren der Ehefrau die Gütertrennung anzuordnen:

1.
wenn der Ehemann für den Unterhalt von Weib und Kind nicht pflichtgemäss Sorge trägt;
2.
wenn er die für das eingebrachte Frauengut verlangte Sicherheit nicht leistet;
3.
wenn der Ehemann oder das Gesamtgut überschuldet ist.
Art. 184 C. Ausserordentlicher Güterstand / II. Gerichtliche Gütertrennung / 2. Auf Begehren des Ehemannes

2. Auf Begehren des Ehemannes

Der Richter hat auf Begehren des Ehemannes die Gütertrennung anzuordnen:

1.
wenn die Ehefrau überschuldet ist;
2.
wenn die Ehefrau in ungerechtfertigter Weise die nach Gesetz oder Güterstand erforderliche Zustimmung zu den Verfügungen des Ehemannes über das eheliche Vermögen verweigert;
3.
wenn die Ehefrau die Sicherstellung des eingebrachten Frauengutes verlangt hat.
Art. 185 C. Ausserordentlicher Güterstand / II. Gerichtliche Gütertrennung / 3. Auf Begehren der Gläubiger

3. Auf Begehren der Gläubiger

Der Richter hat die Gütertrennung auf Begehren eines Gläubigers anzuordnen, wenn dieser bei der gegen einen Ehegatten durchgeführten Betreibung auf Pfändung zu Verlust gekommen ist.

Art. 186 C. Ausserordentlicher Güterstand / III. Beginn der Gütertrennung

III. Beginn der Gütertrennung

1 Die Gütertrennung infolge Konkurses beginnt mit der Ausstellung der Verlustscheine, wird aber in Betreff des Vermögens, das die Ehegatten seit der Konkurseröffnung durch Erbgang oder auf andere Weise erworben haben, auf den Zeitpunkt des Erwerbes zurückbezogen.

2 Die gerichtliche Gütertrennung wird auf den Zeitpunkt der Anbringung des Begehrens zurückbezogen.

3 Der Eintritt der Gütertrennung wird im Falle des Konkurses oder des gerichtlichen Urteils zur Eintragung in das Güterrechtsregister von Amtes wegen angemeldet.

Art. 187 C. Ausserordentlicher Güterstand / IV. Aufhebung der Gütertrennung

IV. Aufhebung der Gütertrennung

1 Durch Befriedigung der Gläubiger wird die infolge Konkurses eingetretene oder wegen eines Verlustes in der Betreibung auf Pfändung angeordnete Gütertrennung nicht ohne weiteres aufgehoben.

2 Dagegen kann der Richter auf Verlangen eines Ehegatten die Wiederherstellung des früheren Güterstandes anordnen.

3 Die Wiederherstellung ist zur Eintragung in das Güterrechtsregister von Amtes wegen anzumelden.

Art. 188 D. Wechsel des Güterstandes / I. Haftung

D. Wechsel des Güterstandes

I. Haftung

1 Durch güterrechtliche Auseinandersetzungen oder durch Wechsel des Güterstandes kann ein Vermögen, aus dem bis dahin die Gläubiger eines Ehegatten oder der Gemeinschaft Befriedigung verlangen konnten, dieser Haftung nicht entzogen werden.

2 Ist ein solches Vermögen auf einen Ehegatten übergegangen, so hat er die Schulden zu bezahlen, kann sich aber von dieser Haftung in dem Masse befreien, als er nachweist, dass das Empfangene hiezu nicht ausreicht.

3 Was die Ehefrau aus dem Konkurse des Ehemannes oder in einer Anschlusspfändung zurück erhält, bleibt den Gläubigern des Ehemannes, soweit sie nicht auch Gläubiger der Ehefrau sind, entzogen.

Art. 189 D. Wechsel des Güterstandes / II. Auseinandersetzung bei Eintritt der Gütertrennung

II. Auseinandersetzung bei Eintritt der Gütertrennung

1 Tritt während der Ehe die Gütertrennung ein, so zerfällt das eheliche Vermögen mit Vorbehalt der Rechte der Gläubiger in das Eigengut des Mannes und das Eigengut der Frau.

2 Ein Vorschlag wird den Ehegatten nach ihrem bisherigen Güterstande zugewiesen, einen Rückschlag hat der Ehemann zu tragen, soweit er nicht nachweist, dass die Ehefrau ihn verursacht hat.

3 Behält der Ehemann während der Auseinandersetzung Frauengut in seiner Verfügungsgewalt, so hat er auf Verlangen der Ehefrau Sicherheit zu leisten.

Art. 190 E. Sondergut / I. Entstehung / 1. Im Allgemeinen

E. Sondergut

I. Entstehung

1. Im Allgemeinen

1 Das Sondergut entsteht durch Ehevertrag, durch Zuwendung Dritter und kraft Gesetzes.

2 Was ein Ehegatte als Pflichtteil von seinen Verwandten zu beanspruchen hat, kann ihm nicht als Sondergut zugewendet werden.

Art. 191 E. Sondergut / I. Entstehung / 2. Kraft Gesetzes

2. Kraft Gesetzes

Kraft Gesetzes sind Sondergut:

1.
die Gegenstände, die einem Ehegatten ausschliesslich zu persönlichem Gebrauche dienen;
2.
die Vermögenswerte des Frauengutes, mit denen die Ehefrau einen Beruf oder ein Gewerbe betreibt;
3.
der Erwerb der Ehefrau aus selbständiger Arbeit.
Art. 192 E. Sondergut / II. Wirkung

II. Wirkung

1 Das Sondergut steht im Allgemeinen und namentlich mit Hinsicht auf die Pflicht der Ehefrau, zur Tragung der Lasten der Ehe einen Beitrag zu leisten, unter den Regeln der Gütertrennung.

2 Die Ehefrau hat ihren Arbeitserwerb, soweit erforderlich, für die Bedürfnisse des Haushaltes zu verwenden.

Art. 193 E. Sondergut / III. Beweislast

III. Beweislast

Behauptet ein Ehegatte, dass ein Vermögenswert zum Sondergut gehöre, so ist er hiefür beweispflichtig.


  Zweiter Abschnitt: Die Güterverbindung

Art. 194 A. Eigentumsverhältnisse / I. Eheliches Vermögen

A. Eigentumsverhältnisse

I. Eheliches Vermögen

1 Die Güterverbindung vereinigt alles Vermögen, das den Ehegatten zur Zeit der Eheschliessung gehört oder während der Ehe auf sie übergeht, zum ehelichen Vermögen.

2 Ausgenommen hievon ist das Sondergut der Ehefrau.

Art. 195 A. Eigentumsverhältnisse / II. Eigentum von Mann und Frau

II. Eigentum von Mann und Frau

1 Was vom ehelichen Vermögen zur Zeit der Eheschliessung der Ehefrau gehört oder ihr während der Ehe infolge von Erbgang oder auf andere Weise unentgeltlich zufällt, ist ihr eingebrachtes Gut und bleibt ihr Eigentum.

2 Der Ehemann hat das Eigentum an dem von ihm eingebrachten Gute und an allem ehelichen Vermögen, das nicht Frauengut ist.

3 Die Einkünfte der Ehefrau und die natürlichen Früchte des Frauengutes werden unter Vorbehalt der Bestimmungen über das Sondergut auf den Zeitpunkt ihrer Fälligkeit oder Trennung Eigentum des Ehemannes.

Art. 196 A. Eigentumsverhältnisse / III. Beweis

III. Beweis

1 Behauptet ein Ehegatte, dass ein Vermögenswert zum Frauengut gehöre, so ist er hiefür beweispflichtig.

2 Werden während der Ehe zum Ersatz für Vermögenswerte der Ehefrau Anschaffungen gemacht, so wird vermutet, dass sie zum Frauengute gehören.

Art. 197 A. Eigentumsverhältnisse / IV. Inventar / 1. Errichtung und Beweiskraft

IV. Inventar

1. Errichtung und Beweiskraft

1 Sowohl der Ehemann als die Ehefrau können jederzeit verlangen, dass über das eingebrachte Eigengut ein Inventar mit öffentlicher Urkunde errichtet werde.

2 Ist ein solches Inventar binnen sechs Monaten nach der Einbringung errichtet worden, so wird es als richtig vermutet.

Art. 198 A. Eigentumsverhältnisse / IV. Inventar / 2. Bedeutung der Schätzung

2. Bedeutung der Schätzung

1 Wird mit dem Inventar eine Schätzung verbunden und diese durch die öffentliche Urkunde festgestellt, so bestimmt sich die gegenseitige Ersatzpflicht der Ehegatten für die fehlenden Vermögenswerte nach dieser Schätzung.

2 Sind Gegenstände in guten Treuen während der Ehe unter dem Schätzungswerte veräussert worden, so tritt der Erlös an die Stelle der Schätzungssumme.

Art. 199 A. Eigentumsverhältnisse / V. Eigentum des Ehemannes am Frauengut

V. Eigentum des Ehemannes am Frauengut

Mit der Schätzung kann unter Beobachtung der Vorschriften über den Ehevertrag binnen sechs Monaten nach der Einbringung des Frauengutes die Bestimmung verbunden werden, dass das Frauengut zum Schätzungsbetrag in das Eigentum des Ehemannes übergehen und die Frauengutsforderung unverändert bleiben soll.

Art. 200 B. Verwaltung, Nutzung, Verfügungsbefugnis / I. Verwaltung

B. Verwaltung, Nutzung, Verfügungsbefugnis

I. Verwaltung

1 Der Ehemann verwaltet das eheliche Vermögen.

2 Er trägt die Kosten der Verwaltung.

3 Der Ehefrau steht die Verwaltung insoweit zu, als sie zur Vertretung der ehelichen Gemeinschaft berechtigt ist.

Art. 201 B. Verwaltung, Nutzung, Verfügungsbefugnis / II. Nutzung

II. Nutzung

1 Der Ehemann hat die Nutzung am eingebrachten Frauengut und ist hieraus gleich einem Nutzniesser verantwortlich.

2 Diese Verantwortlichkeit wird durch die Schätzung des Frauengutes im Inventar nicht erhöht.

3 Bares Geld, andere vertretbare Sachen und Inhaberpapiere, die nur der Gattung nach bestimmt worden sind, gehen in das Eigentum des Ehemannes über, und die Ehefrau erhält für deren Wert eine Ersatzforderung.

Art. 202 B. Verwaltung, Nutzung, Verfügungsbefugnis / III. Verfügungsbefugnis / 1. Des Ehemannes

III. Verfügungsbefugnis

1. Des Ehemannes

1 Der Ehemann bedarf zur Verfügung über Vermögenswerte des eingebrachten Frauengutes, die nicht in sein Eigentum übergegangen sind, der Einwilligung der Ehefrau, sobald es sich um mehr als die gewöhnliche Verwaltung handelt.

2 Dritte dürfen jedoch diese Einwilligung voraussetzen, sofern sie nicht wissen oder wissen sollten, dass sie mangelt, oder sofern die Vermögenswerte nicht für jedermann als der Ehefrau gehörig erkennbar sind.

Art. 203 B. Verwaltung, Nutzung, Verfügungsbefugnis / III. Verfügungsbefugnis / 2. Der Ehefrau / a. Im Allgemeinen

2. Der Ehefrau

a. Im Allgemeinen

Soweit die Vertretung der ehelichen Gemeinschaft es rechtfertigt, hat die Ehefrau die Verfügung über das eheliche Vermögen.

Art. 204 B. Verwaltung, Nutzung, Verfügungsbefugnis / III. Verfügungsbefugnis / 2. Der Ehefrau / b. Ausschlagung von Erbschaften

b. Ausschlagung von Erbschaften

1 Zur Ausschlagung einer Erbschaft bedarf die Ehefrau der Einwilligung des Ehemannes.

2 Gegen die Verweigerung kann die Ehefrau die Entscheidung der Vormundschaftsbehörde anrufen.

Art. 205 C. Sicherung der Ehefrau

C. Sicherung der Ehefrau

1 Der Ehemann hat der Ehefrau auf Verlangen jederzeit über den Stand ihres eingebrachten Gutes Auskunft zu geben.

2 Die Ehefrau kann jederzeit Sicherstellung verlangen.

3 Die Anfechtungsklage nach dem Bundesgesetz vom 11. April 18891 über Schuldbetreibung und Konkurs bleibt vorbehalten.


1 SR 281.1

Art. 206 D. Haftung / I. Haftung des Ehemannes

D. Haftung

I. Haftung des Ehemannes

Der Ehemann ist haftbar:

1.
für seine vorehelichen Schulden;
2.
für die Schulden, die er während der Ehe begründet;
3.
für die Schulden, die sich aus der Vertretung der ehelichen Gemeinschaft durch die Ehefrau ergeben.
Art. 207 D. Haftung / II. Haftung der Ehefrau / 1. Mit dem ganzen Vermögen

II. Haftung der Ehefrau

1. Mit dem ganzen Vermögen

1 Die Ehefrau haftet mit ihrem ganzen Vermögen, ohne Rücksicht auf die dem Ehemann aus dem Güterstande zustehenden Rechte:

1.
für ihre vorehelichen Schulden;
2.
für die Schulden, die sie mit Einwilligung des Ehemannes oder bei Verpflichtungen zu seinen Gunsten mit Zustimmung der Vormundschaftsbehörde begründet;
3.
für die Schulden, die aus dem regelmässigen Betriebe ihres Berufes oder Gewerbes entstehen;
4.
für die Schulden aus Erbschaften, die auf sie übergehen;
5.
für die Schulden aus unerlaubten Handlungen.

2 Für die Schulden, die von ihr oder vom Ehemanne für den gemeinsamen Haushalt eingegangen werden, haftet sie, soweit der Ehemann nicht zahlungsfähig ist.

Art. 208 D. Haftung / II. Haftung der Ehefrau / 2. Mit dem Sondergut

2. Mit dem Sondergut

1 Die Ehefrau ist während und nach der Ehe nur mit dem Werte ihres Sonderguts verpflichtet:

1.
für die Schulden, die sie als Sondergutsschulden begründet;
2.
für die Schulden, die sie ohne Einwilligung des Ehemannes begründet;
3.
für die Schulden, die sie in Überschreitung ihrer Befugnis zur Vertretung der ehelichen Gemeinschaft begründet.

2 Vorbehalten bleiben die Ansprüche aus ungerechtfertigter Bereicherung.

Art. 209 E. Ersatzforderungen / I. Fälligkeit

E. Ersatzforderungen

I. Fälligkeit

1 Sind Schulden, für die das eingebrachte Frauengut haftet, aus dem Mannesgut oder Schulden des Mannes aus dem eingebrachten Frauengut getilgt worden, so besteht eine Ersatzforderung, die jedoch unter Vorbehalt der gesetzlichen Ausnahmen erst mit der Aufhebung der Güterverbindung fällig wird.

2 Sind Sondergutsschulden der Ehefrau aus dem ehelichen Vermögen oder Schulden, für die eheliches Vermögen haftet, aus dem Sondergute getilgt worden, so kann die Ausgleichung schon während der Ehe gefordert werden.

Art. 210 E. Ersatzforderungen / II. Konkurs des Ehemannes und Pfändung / 1. Anspruch der Ehefrau

II. Konkurs des Ehemannes und Pfändung

1. Anspruch der Ehefrau

1 Im Konkurse und bei der Pfändung von Vermögenswerten des Ehemannes kann die Ehefrau ihre Ersatzforderung für das eingebrachte und nicht mehr vorhandene Frauengut geltend machen.

2 Gegenforderungen des Ehemannes werden in Abzug gebracht.

3 Die noch vorhandenen Vermögenswerte kann die Ehefrau als Eigentümerin an sich ziehen.

Art. 211 E. Ersatzforderungen / II. Konkurs des Ehemannes und Pfändung / 2. Vorrecht

2. Vorrecht

1 Wird die Ehefrau durch die Zurücknahme ihres Eigentums und die ihr gegebenen Sicherheiten nicht für die Hälfte des eingebrachten Frauengutes gedeckt, so geniesst ihre Ersatzforderung für den Rest dieser Hälfte ein Vorrecht nach dem Bundesgesetz vom 11. April 18891 über Schuldbetreibung und Konkurs.

2 Die Abtretung des Vorrechts sowie der Verzicht auf dasselbe zugunsten einzelner Gläubiger sind ungültig.


1 SR 281.1

Art. 212 F. Auflösung des ehelichen Vermögens / I. Tod der Ehefrau

F. Auflösung des ehelichen Vermögens

I. Tod der Ehefrau

1 Stirbt die Ehefrau, so fällt das eingebrachte Frauengut mit Vorbehalt der erbrechtlichen Ansprüche des Ehemannes an die Erben der Frau.

2 Für das Fehlende hat der Ehemann, soweit er verantwortlich ist und unter Anrechnung dessen, was er von der Ehefrau zu fordern hat, Ersatz zu leisten.

Art. 213 F. Auflösung des ehelichen Vermögens / II. Tod des Ehemannes

II. Tod des Ehemannes

Stirbt der Ehemann, so nimmt die Ehefrau das noch vorhandene eingebrachte Frauengut zurück und kann gegen die Erben für das Fehlende die Ersatzforderung geltend machen.

Art. 214 F. Auflösung des ehelichen Vermögens / III. Vor- und Rückschlag

III. Vor- und Rückschlag

1 Ergibt sich nach der Ausscheidung des Mannes- und Frauengutes ein Vorschlag, so gehört er zu einem Drittel der Ehefrau oder ihren Nachkommen und im übrigen dem Ehemann oder seinen Erben.

2 Erzeigt das eheliche Vermögen einen Rückschlag, so wird er vom Ehemanne oder seinen Erben getragen, soweit nicht nachgewiesen wird, dass ihn die Ehefrau verursacht hat.

3 Durch Ehevertrag kann eine andere Beteiligung am Vorschlag oder Rückschlag verabredet werden.


  Dritter Abschnitt: Die Gütergemeinschaft

Art. 215 A. Allgemeine Gütergemeinschaft / I. Eheliches Vermögen

A. Allgemeine Gütergemeinschaft

I. Eheliches Vermögen

1 Die allgemeine Gütergemeinschaft vereinigt das Vermögen und die Einkünfte von Mann und Frau zu einem Gesamtgute, das den beiden Ehegatten ungeteilt und insgesamt zugehört.

2 Kein Ehegatte kann über seinen Anteil am Gesamtgute verfügen.

3 Behauptet ein Ehegatte, dass ein Vermögenswert nicht zum Gesamtgute gehöre, so ist er hiefür beweispflichtig.

Art. 216 A. Allgemeine Gütergemeinschaft / II. Verwaltung und Verfügungsbefugnis / 1. Verwaltung

II. Verwaltung und Verfügungsbefugnis

1. Verwaltung

1 Der Ehemann verwaltet das Gesamtgut.

2 Die Kosten der Verwaltung trägt das Gesamtgut.

3 Der Ehefrau steht die Verwaltung insoweit zu, als sie zur Vertretung der ehelichen Gemeinschaft berechtigt ist.

Art. 217 A. Allgemeine Gütergemeinschaft / II. Verwaltung und Verfügungsbefugnis / 2. Verfügungsbefugnis / a. Verfügung über Gesamtgut

2. Verfügungsbefugnis

a. Verfügung über Gesamtgut

1 Zu Verfügungen über Vermögenswerte des Gesamtgutes bedarf es einer Erklärung der beiden Ehegatten oder der Einwilligung des einen zur Verfügung des andern, sobald es sich um mehr als die gewöhnliche Verwaltung handelt.

2 Dritte dürfen jedoch diese Einwilligung voraussetzen, sofern sie nicht wissen oder wissen sollten, dass sie mangelt, oder sofern die Vermögenswerte nicht für jedermann als zum Gesamtgute gehörig erkennbar sind.

Art. 218 A. Allgemeine Gütergemeinschaft / II. Verwaltung und Verfügungsbefugnis / 2. Verfügungsbefugnis / b. Ausschlagung von Erbschaften

b. Ausschlagung von Erbschaften

1 Zur Ausschlagung von Erbschaften bedarf ein Ehegatte während der Ehe der Einwilligung des andern.

2 Gegen die Verweigerung kann er die Entscheidung der Vormundschaftsbehörde anrufen.

Art. 219 A. Allgemeine Gütergemeinschaft / III. Haftung / 1. Schulden des Ehemannes

III. Haftung

1. Schulden des Ehemannes

Der Ehemann ist persönlich und mit dem Gesamtgute haftbar:

1.
für die vorehelichen Schulden beider Ehegatten;
2.
für die Schulden, die sich aus der Vertretung der ehelichen Gemeinschaft durch die Ehefrau ergeben;
3.
für alle andern Schulden, die während der Ehe durch ihn oder zu Lasten des Gesamtgutes durch die Ehefrau begründet werden.
Art. 220 A. Allgemeine Gütergemeinschaft / III. Haftung / 2. Schulden der Ehefrau / a. Der Ehefrau und des Gesamtgutes

2. Schulden der Ehefrau

a. Der Ehefrau und des Gesamtgutes

1 Neben dem Gesamtgute haftet die Ehefrau persönlich:

1.
für ihre vorehelichen Schulden;
2.
für die Schulden, die sie mit Einwilligung des Ehemannes oder bei Verpflichtungen zu seinen Gunsten mit Zustimmung der Vormundschaftsbehörde begründet;
3.
für die Schulden, die aus dem regelmässigen Betriebe ihres Berufes oder Gewerbes entstehen;
4.
für die Schulden aus Erbschaften, die auf sie übergehen;
5.
für die Schulden aus unerlaubten Handlungen.

2 Für die Schulden, die von ihr oder dem Ehemanne für den gemeinsamen Haushalt eingegangen werden, haftet sie, soweit das Gesamtgut nicht ausreicht.

3 Für die andern Schulden des Gesamtgutes ist sie nicht persönlich haftbar.

Art. 221 A. Allgemeine Gütergemeinschaft / III. Haftung / 2. Schulden der Ehefrau / b. Sondergutsschulden

b. Sondergutsschulden

1 Die Ehefrau ist während und nach der Ehe nur mit dem Werte ihres Sonderguts verpflichtet:

1.
für die Schulden, die sie aus Sondergutsschulden begründet;
2.
für die Schulden, die sie ohne Einwilligung des Ehemannes begründet;
3.
für die Schulden, die sie in Überschreitung ihrer Befugnis zur Vertretung der ehelichen Gemeinschaft begründet.

2 Vorbehalten bleiben die Ansprüche aus ungerechtfertigter Bereicherung.

Art. 222 A. Allgemeine Gütergemeinschaft / III. Haftung / 3. Zwangsvollstreckung

3. Zwangsvollstreckung

Während der Dauer der Gütergemeinschaft geht die Zwangsvollstreckung für die Schulden, für die das Gesamtgut haftet, gegen den Ehemann.

Art. 223 A. Allgemeine Gütergemeinschaft / IV. Ersatzforderungen / 1. Im Allgemeinen

IV. Ersatzforderungen

1. Im Allgemeinen

1 Werden Schulden, für die das Gesamtgut haftet, aus diesem getilgt, so entsteht unter den Ehegatten keine Ersatzforderung.

2 Sind Gemeinschaftsschulden aus dem Sondergute oder Sondergutsschulden aus dem Gesamtgute getilgt worden, so entsteht ein Anspruch auf Ausgleichung, der schon während der Ehe geltend gemacht werden kann.

Art. 224 A. Allgemeine Gütergemeinschaft / IV. Ersatzforderungen / 2. Frauengutsforderung

2. Frauengutsforderung

1 Im Konkurse des Ehemannes und bei der Pfändung von Vermögenswerten des Gesamtgutes kann die Ehefrau eine Forderung für ihr eingebrachtes Gut geltend machen und geniesst für deren Hälfte ein Vorrecht nach dem Bundesgesetz vom 11. April 18891 über Schuldbetreibung und Konkurs.

2 Die Abtretung des Vorrechtes sowie der Verzicht auf dasselbe zugunsten einzelner Gläubiger sind ungültig.


1 SR 281.1

Art. 225 A. Allgemeine Gütergemeinschaft / V. Auflösung des ehelichen Vermögens / 1. Grösse der Anteile / a. Nach Gesetz

V. Auflösung des ehelichen Vermögens

1. Grösse der Anteile

a. Nach Gesetz

1 Stirbt ein Ehegatte, so fällt die eine Hälfte des Gesamtgutes dem überlebenden Ehegatten zu.

2 Die andere Hälfte geht unter Vorbehalt der erbrechtlichen Ansprüche des Überlebenden auf die Erben des Verstorbenen über.

3 Ist der überlebende Ehegatte erbunwürdig, so kann er aus der Gütergemeinschaft in keinem Falle mehr beanspruchen, als ihm bei Scheidung der Ehe zukommen würde.

Art. 226 A. Allgemeine Gütergemeinschaft / V. Auflösung des ehelichen Vermögens / 1. Grösse der Anteile / b. Nach Vertrag

b. Nach Vertrag

1 An Stelle der Teilung nach Hälften kann durch Ehevertrag eine andere Teilung gesetzt werden.

2 Den Nachkommen des verstorbenen Ehegatten darf jedoch ein Viertel des bei seinem Tode vorhandenen Gesamtvermögens nicht entzogen werden.

Art. 227 A. Allgemeine Gütergemeinschaft / V. Auflösung des ehelichen Vermögens / 2. Haftung des Überlebenden

2. Haftung des Überlebenden

1 Der überlebende Ehemann bleibt für alle Schulden des Gesamtgutes persönlich haftbar.

2 Die überlebende Ehefrau befreit sich durch Ausschlagung des ihr zufallenden Anteils von jeder Haftung für die Schulden des Gesamtgutes, die nicht zugleich ihre persönlichen Schulden sind.

3 Übernimmt sie ihren Anteil, so ist sie haftbar, kann sich aber von dieser Haftung in dem Masse befreien, als sie nachweist, dass das Empfangene zur Bezahlung jener Schuld nicht ausreicht.

Art. 228 A. Allgemeine Gütergemeinschaft / V. Auflösung des ehelichen Vermögens / 3. Anrechnung

3. Anrechnung

Bei der Teilung kann der überlebende Ehegatte verlangen, dass ihm auf Anrechnung diejenigen Vermögenswerte überlassen werden, die von ihm eingebracht worden sind.

Art. 229 B. Fortgesetzte Gütergemeinschaft / I. Voraussetzung

B. Fortgesetzte Gütergemeinschaft

I. Voraussetzung

1 Der überlebende Ehegatte kann mit den gemeinsamen Kindern die Gütergemeinschaft fortsetzen.

2 Für unmündige Kinder bedarf es hiezu der Zustimmung der Vormundschaftsbehörde.

3 Wird die Gütergemeinschaft fortgesetzt, so können bis zu ihrer Beendigung erbrechtliche Ansprüche nicht geltend gemacht werden.

Art. 230 B. Fortgesetzte Gütergemeinschaft / II. Umfang

II. Umfang

1 Die fortgesetzte Gütergemeinschaft umfasst das bisherige eheliche Vermögen sowie die Einkünfte und den Erwerb der Beteiligten, mit Ausnahme des Sondergutes.

2 Was den Kindern oder dem Ehegatten während dieser Gemeinschaft infolge von Erbgang oder auf andere Weise unentgeltlich zufällt, wird, soweit nicht anders verfügt ist, ihr Sondergut.

3 Die Zwangsvollstreckung ist unter den Beteiligten in gleicher Weise beschränkt wie unter den Ehegatten.

Art. 231 B. Fortgesetzte Gütergemeinschaft / III. Verwaltung und Vertretung

III. Verwaltung und Vertretung

1 Sind die Kinder unmündig, so steht die Verwaltung und Vertretung der fortgesetzten Gütergemeinschaft dem überlebenden Ehegatten zu.

2 Sind sie mündig, so kann durch Vereinbarung etwas anderes festgesetzt werden.

Art. 232 B. Fortgesetzte Gütergemeinschaft / IV. Aufhebung / 1. Durch Erklärung

IV. Aufhebung

1. Durch Erklärung

1 Der überlebende Ehegatte kann die fortgesetzte Gütergemeinschaft jederzeit aufheben.

2 Mündige Kinder können aus der Gemeinschaft jederzeit entweder einzeln oder insgesamt austreten.

3 Für unmündige Kinder kann die Vormundschaftsbehörde den Austritt erklären.

Art. 233 B. Fortgesetzte Gütergemeinschaft / IV. Aufhebung / 2. Von Gesetzes wegen

2. Von Gesetzes wegen

1 Die fortgesetzte Gütergemeinschaft wird von Gesetzes wegen aufgehoben:

1.
mit dem Tode oder der Wiederverheiratung des überlebenden Ehegatten;
2.
mit dem Konkurse des überlebenden Ehegatten oder der Kinder.

2 Fällt nur eines der Kinder in Konkurs, so können die übrigen Beteiligten verlangen, dass es ausscheide.

3 Im Konkurse des Vaters sowie bei der Pfändung von Vermögenswerten des Gesamtgutes treten die Kinder an die Stelle der verstorbenen Mutter.

Art. 234 B. Fortgesetzte Gütergemeinschaft / IV. Aufhebung / 3. Durch Urteil

3. Durch Urteil

1 Ist ein Gläubiger bei der Betreibung auf Pfändung gegen den Ehegatten oder gegen eines der Kinder zu Verlust gekommen, so kann er beim Richter die Aufhebung der Gütergemeinschaft verlangen.

2 Wird diese Aufhebung von dem Gläubiger eines Kindes gefordert, so können die übrigen Beteiligten verlangen, dass es ausscheide.

Art. 235 B. Fortgesetzte Gütergemeinschaft / IV. Aufhebung / 4. Durch Heirat oder Tod eines Kindes

4. Durch Heirat oder Tod eines Kindes

1 Verheiratet sich ein Kind, so können die übrigen Beteiligten verlangen, dass es ausscheide.

2 Stirbt ein Kind mit Hinterlassung von Nachkommen, so können die übrigen Beteiligten deren Ausscheiden verlangen.

3 Stirbt ein Kind ohne Hinterlassung von Nachkommen, so verbleibt sein Anteil das Gesamtgut, unter Vorbehalt der Ansprüche nicht an der Gemeinschaft beteiligter Erben.

Art. 236 B. Fortgesetzte Gütergemeinschaft / IV. Aufhebung / 5. Teilungsart

5. Teilungsart

1 Bei der Auflösung der fortgesetzten Gütergemeinschaft oder dem Ausscheiden eines Kindes erfolgt die Teilung oder die Abfindung nach der in diesem Zeitpunkte vorhandenen Vermögenslage.

2 An den Anteilen, die den einzelnen Kindern zufallen, behält der Ehegatte die erbrechtlichen Ansprüche.

3 Die Auseinandersetzung darf nicht zur Unzeit vorgenommen werden.

Art. 237 C. Beschränkte Gütergemeinschaft / I. Mit Gütertrennung

C. Beschränkte Gütergemeinschaft

I. Mit Gütertrennung

1 Die Ehegatten können durch Ehevertrag eine beschränkte Gütergemeinschaft annehmen, indem sie einzelne Vermögenswerte oder gewisse Arten von solchen, wie namentlich die Liegenschaften, von der Gemeinschaft ausschliessen.

2 Die ausgeschlossenen Vermögenswerte stehen unter den Regeln der Gütertrennung.

Art. 238 C. Beschränkte Gütergemeinschaft / II. Mit Güterverbindung

II. Mit Güterverbindung

1 Das von der Gemeinschaft ausgeschlossene Frauengut kann durch den Ehevertrag unter die Regeln der Güterverbindung gestellt werden.

2 Eine solche Abrede wird angenommen, wenn die Ehefrau dieses Vermögen durch den Ehevertrag dem Ehemanne zur Verwaltung und Nutzung überlassen hat.

Art. 239 C. Beschränkte Gütergemeinschaft / III. Errungenschaftsgemeinschaft / 1. Umfang

III. Errungenschaftsgemeinschaft

1. Umfang

1 Die Gütergemeinschaft kann durch Ehevertrag auf die Errungenschaft beschränkt werden.

2 Was während der Ehe erworben und nicht als Ersatz für eingebrachte Vermögenswerte angeschafft worden ist, bildet die Errungenschaft und steht unter den Regeln der Gütergemeinschaft.

3 Für das bei Eingehung oder während der Ehe von Mann und Frau eingebrachte Vermögen gelten die Regeln der Güterverbindung.

Art. 240 C. Beschränkte Gütergemeinschaft / III. Errungenschaftsgemeinschaft / 2. Beteiligung am Vor- und Rückschlag

2. Beteiligung am Vor- und Rückschlag

1 Ergibt sich bei der Aufhebung der Gemeinschaft ein Vorschlag, so wird er zwischen den Ehegatten oder ihren Erben nach Hälften geteilt.

2 Ein Rückschlag wird vom Ehemanne oder seinen Erben getragen, soweit er nicht nachweisbar durch die Ehefrau verursacht worden ist.

3 Durch Ehevertrag kann eine andere Beteiligung am Vorschlag oder Rückschlag verabredet werden.


  Vierter Abschnitt: Die Gütertrennung

Art. 241 A. Ausdehnung

A. Ausdehnung

1 Die Gütertrennung bezieht sich, wenn sie von Gesetzes wegen oder durch Gerichtsurteil begründet wird, auf das ganze Vermögen beider Ehegatten.

2 Wird sie durch Ehevertrag begründet, so erstreckt sie sich auf das ganze Vermögen, insoweit nicht im Vertrag besondere Ausnahmen aufgestellt sind.

Art. 242 B. Eigentum, Verwaltung und Nutzung

B. Eigentum, Verwaltung und Nutzung

1 Jeder Ehegatte behält das Eigentum an seinem Vermögen sowie die Verwaltung und die Nutzung.

2 Hat die Ehefrau dem Ehemanne die Verwaltung übertragen, so wird vermutet, dass er ihr während der Ehe keine Rechnung zu stellen habe und die Einkünfte aus dem übertragenen Vermögen als Beitrag an die ehelichen Lasten beanspruchen dürfe.

3 Ein Verzicht der Ehefrau auf das Recht, die Verwaltung jederzeit wieder an sich zu ziehen, ist nicht verbindlich.

Art. 243 C. Haftung / I. Im Allgemeinen

C. Haftung

I. Im Allgemeinen

1 Der Ehemann haftet persönlich für seine vorehelichen Schulden sowie für diejenigen, die von ihm während der Ehe oder von der Ehefrau in Ausübung ihrer Vertretungsbefugnis begründet werden.

2 Die Ehefrau haftet persönlich für ihre vorehelichen und für ihre während der Ehe entstandenen Schulden.

3 Für die Schulden, die vom Ehemann oder von der Ehefrau für den gemeinsamen Haushalt eingegangen werden, haftet die Ehefrau im Falle der Zahlungsunfähigkeit des Ehemannes.

Art. 244 C. Haftung / II. Konkurs des Ehemannes und Pfändung

II. Konkurs des Ehemannes und Pfändung

1 Die Ehefrau hat im Konkurse und bei der Pfändung von Vermögenswerten des Ehemannes auch dann, wenn sie ihm ihr Vermögen zur Verwaltung übergeben hat, kein Vorzugsrecht.

2 Vorbehalten bleiben die Bestimmungen über die Ehesteuer.

Art. 245 D. Einkünfte und Erwerb

D. Einkünfte und Erwerb

Die Einkünfte und der Erwerb gehören dem Ehegatten, von dessen Vermögen oder Arbeit sie herrühren.

Art. 246 E. Tragung der ehelichen Lasten

E. Tragung der ehelichen Lasten

1 Der Ehemann kann verlangen, dass ihm die Ehefrau zur Tragung der ehelichen Lasten einen angemessenen Beitrag leiste.

2 Können sich die Ehegatten über die Höhe des Beitrages nicht verständigen, so wird er auf Begehren des einen oder des andern von der zuständigen Behörde festgesetzt.

3 Für die Beiträge der Ehefrau wird der Ehemann nicht ersatzpflichtig.

Art. 247 F. Ehesteuer

F. Ehesteuer

1 Der Ehevertrag kann einen Betrag des Frauengutes festsetzen, den die Ehefrau dem Ehemanne zur Tragung der ehelichen Lasten als Ehesteuer zuweist.

2 Was die Ehefrau derart dem Ehemann überlässt, steht, wenn es nicht anders vereinbart worden ist, unter den Regeln der Güterverbindung.


  Fünfter Abschnitt: Das Güterrechtsregister

Art. 248 A. Rechtskraft

A. Rechtskraft

1 Die durch Ehevertrag oder Verfügung des Richters begründeten güterrechtlichen Verhältnisse sowie die Rechtsgeschäfte unter Ehegatten, die das eingebrachte Gut der Ehefrau oder das Gesamtgut betreffen, bedürfen zur Rechtskraft gegenüber Dritten der Eintragung in das Güterrechtsregister und der Veröffentlichung.

2 Die Erben des verstorbenen Ehegatten sind nicht als Dritte anzusehen.

Art. 249 B. Eintragung / I. Gegenstand

B. Eintragung

I. Gegenstand

1 Zur Eintragung gelangen die Bestimmungen, die Dritten gegenüber wirksam sein sollen.

2 Die Eintragung erfolgt, wo das Gesetz es nicht anders bestimmt oder der Ehevertrag die Eintragung nicht ausdrücklich ausschliesst, auf das einseitige Begehren eines Ehegatten.

Art. 250 B. Eintragung / II. Ort der Eintragung

II. Ort der Eintragung

1 Die Eintragung geschieht in dem Register des Wohnsitzes des Ehemannes.

2 Verlegt der Ehemann seinen Wohnsitz in einen andern Registerbezirk, so muss die Eintragung binnen drei Monaten auch am neuen Wohnsitze erfolgen.

3 Der Eintrag in dem Register des früheren Wohnsitzes verliert die rechtliche Wirkung nach Ablauf von drei Monaten, vom Wechsel des Wohnsitzes an gerechnet.

Art. 251 C. Registerführung C. Registerführung

C. Registerführung

1 Das Güterrechtsregister wird durch das Handelsregisteramt geführt, soweit die Kantone nicht besondere Bezirke und besondere Registerführer bezeichnen.

2 Jedermann ist befugt, das Güterrechtsregister einzusehen oder Auszüge zu verlangen.

3 Die Veröffentlichung der Eheverträge hat nur anzugeben, welchen Güterstand die Ehegatten gewählt haben.


1 BS 2 3. Diese Bestimmungen sind als Übergangsrecht insofern noch anwendbar, als es die Art. 9a ff. SchlT (Revision des Eherechtes vom 5. Okt. 1984) vorsehen.

  Inhaltsverzeichnis

A. Anwendung des Rechts Art. 1

I. Handeln nach Treu und Glauben Art. 2

II. Guter Glaube Art. 3

III. Gerichtliches Ermessen Art. 4

I. Kantonales Zivilrecht und Ortsübung Art. 5

II. Öffentliches Recht der Kantone Art. 6

D. Allgemeine Bestimmungen des Obligationenrechtes Art. 7

I. Beweislast Art. 8

II. Beweis mit öffentlicher Urkunde Art. 9

Aufgehoben Art. 10

I. Rechtsfähigkeit Art. 11

1. Inhalt Art. 12

2. Voraussetzungen

a. Im Allgemeinen Art. 13

b. Volljährigkeit Art. 14

c. ... Art. 15

d. Urteilsfähigkeit Art. 16

1. Im Allgemeinen Art. 17

2. Fehlen der Urteilsfähigkeit Art. 18

3. Urteilsfähige handlungsunfähige Personen

a. Grundsatz Art. 19

b. Zustimmung des gesetzlichen Vertreters Art. 19a

c. Fehlen der Zustimmung Art. 19b

4. Höchstpersönliche Rechte Art. 19c

IIIbis. Einschränkung der Handlungsfähigkeit Art. 19d

1. Verwandtschaft Art. 20

2. Schwägerschaft Art. 21

1. Heimatangehörigkeit Art. 22

2. Wohnsitz

a. Begriff Art. 23

b. Wechsel im Wohnsitz oder Aufenthalt Art. 24

c. Wohnsitz Minderjähriger Art. 25

d. Wohnsitz Volljähriger unter umfassender Beistandschaft Art. 26

I. Vor übermässiger Bindung Art. 27

1. Grundsatz Art. 28

2. Klage

a. Im Allgemeinen Art. 28a

b. Gewalt, Drohungen oder Nachstellungen Art. 28b

3. ...

Aufgehoben Art. 28c–28f

4. Recht auf Gegendarstellung

a. Grundsatz Art. 28g

b. Form und Inhalt Art. 28h

c. Verfahren Art. 28i

d. Veröffentlichung Art. 28k

e. Anrufung des Gerichts Art. 28l

1. Namensschutz Art. 29

2. Namensänderung

a. Im Allgemeinen Art. 30

b. Bei Tod eines Ehegatten Art. 30a

I. Geburt und Tod Art. 31

1. Beweislast Art. 32

2. Beweismittel

a. Im Allgemeinen Art. 33

b. Anzeichen des Todes Art. 34

1. Im Allgemeinen Art. 35

2. Verfahren Art. 36

3. Wegfallen des Gesuches Art. 37

4. Wirkung Art. 38

I. Allgemeines Art. 39

II. Meldepflicht Art. 40

III. Nachweis nicht streitiger Angaben Art. 41

1. Durch das Gericht Art. 42

2. Durch die Zivilstandsbehörden Art. 43

V. Datenschutz und Bekanntgabe der Daten Art. 43a

1. Zivilstandsbeamtinnen und Zivilstandsbeamte Art. 44

2. Aufsichtsbehörden Art. 45

Ia. Zentrales Personeninformationssystem Art. 45a

II. Haftung Art. 46

III. Disziplinarmassnahmen Art. 47

I. Bundesrecht Art. 48

II. Kantonales Recht Art. 49

Art. 50 und 51

A. Persönlichkeit Art. 52

B. Rechtsfähigkeit Art. 53

I. Voraussetzung Art. 54

II. Betätigung Art. 55

D. Sitz Art. 56

I. Vermögensverwendung Art. 57

II. Liquidation Art. 58

F. Vorbehalt des öffentlichen und des Gesellschafts- und Genossenschaftsrechtes Art. 59

I. Körperschaftliche Personenverbindung Art. 60

II. Eintragung ins Handelsregister Art. 61

III. Vereine ohne Persönlichkeit Art. 62

IV. Verhältnis der Statuten zum Gesetz Art. 63

1. Bedeutung und Einberufung Art. 64

2. Zuständigkeit Art. 65

3. Vereinsbeschluss

a. Beschlussfassung Art. 66

b. Stimmrecht und Mehrheit Art. 67

c. Ausschliessung vom Stimmrecht Art. 68

1. Rechte und Pflichten im Allgemeinen Art. 69

2. Buchführung Art. 69a

III. Revisionsstelle Art. 69b

IV. Mängel in der Organisation Art. 69c

I. Ein- und Austritt Art. 70

II. Beitragspflicht Art. 71

III. Ausschliessung Art. 72

IV. Stellung ausgeschiedener Mitglieder Art. 73

V. Schutz des Vereinszweckes Art. 74

VI. Schutz der Mitgliedschaft Art. 75

Cbis. Haftung Art. 75a

1. Vereinsbeschluss Art. 76

2. Von Gesetzes wegen Art. 77

3. Urteil Art. 78

II. Löschung des Registereintrages Art. 79

I. Im Allgemeinen Art. 80

II. Form der Errichtung Art. 81

III. Anfechtung Art. 82

I. Im Allgemeinen Art. 83

II. Buchführung Art. 83a

1. Revisionspflicht und anwendbares Recht Art. 83b

2. Verhältnis zur Aufsichtsbehörde Art. 83c

IV. Mängel in der Organisation Art. 83d

C. Aufsicht Art. 84

Cbis. Massnahmen bei Überschuldung und Zahlungsunfähigkeit Art. 84a

Art. 84b

D. Umwandlung der Stiftung

I. Änderung der Organisation Art. 85

1. Auf Antrag der Aufsichtsbehörde oder des obersten Stiftungsorgans Art. 86

2. Auf Antrag des Stifters oder auf Grund seiner Verfügung von Todes wegen Art. 86a

III. Unwesentliche Änderungen der Stiftungsurkunde Art. 86b

E. Familienstiftungen und kirchliche Stiftungen Art. 87

I. Aufhebung durch die zuständige Behörde Art. 88

II. Antrags- und Klagerecht, Löschung im Register Art. 89

G. Personalfürsorgestiftungen Art. 89a

A. Fehlende Verwaltung Art. 89b

B. Zuständigkeit Art. 89c

A. Verlobung Art. 90

I. Geschenke Art. 91

II. Beitragspflicht Art. 92

III. Verjährung Art. 93

A. Ehefähigkeit Art. 94

I. Verwandtschaft Art. 95

II. Frühere Ehe Art. 96

A. Grundsätze Art. 97

Abis. Umgehung des Ausländerrechts Art. 97a

B. Vorbereitungsverfahren

I. Gesuch Art. 98

II. Durchführung und Abschluss des Vorbereitungsverfahrens Art. 99

III. Frist Art. 100

I. Ort Art. 101

II. Form Art. 102

D. Ausführungsbestimmungen Art. 103

A. Grundsatz Art. 104

I. Gründe Art. 105

II. Klage Art. 106

I. Gründe Art. 107

II. Klage Art. 108

D. Wirkungen des Urteils Art. 109

Aufgehoben Art. 110

I. Umfassende Einigung Art. 111

II. Teileinigung Art. 112

Aufgehoben Art. 113

I. Nach Getrenntleben Art. 114

II. Unzumutbarkeit Art. 115

Aufgehoben Art. 116

A. Voraussetzungen und Verfahren Art. 117

B. Trennungsfolgen Art. 118

A. Name Art. 119

B. Güterrecht und Erbrecht Art. 120

C. Wohnung der Familie Art. 121

I. Grundsatz Art. 122

II. Ausgleich bei Austrittsleistungen Art. 123

III. Ausgleich bei Invalidenrenten vor dem reglementarischen Rentenalter Art. 124

IV. Ausgleich bei Invalidenrenten nach dem reglementarischen Rentenalter und bei Altersrenten Art. 124a

V. Ausnahmen Art. 124b

VI. Verrechnung gegenseitiger Ansprüche Art. 124c

VII. Unzumutbarkeit Art. 124d

VIII. Unmöglichkeit Art. 124e

I. Voraussetzungen Art. 125

II. Modalitäten des Unterhaltsbeitrages Art. 126

1. Besondere Vereinbarungen Art. 127

2. Anpassung an die Teuerung Art. 128

3. Abänderung durch Urteil Art. 129

4. Erlöschen von Gesetzes wegen Art. 130

1. Inkassohilfe Art. 131

2. Vorschüsse Art. 131a

3. Anweisungen an die Schuldner und Sicherstellung Art. 132

I. Elternrechte und -pflichten Art. 133

II. Veränderung der Verhältnisse Art. 134

Aufgehoben Art. 135–158

A. Eheliche Gemeinschaft; Rechte und Pflichten der Ehegatten Art. 159

B. Name Art. 160

C. Bürgerrecht Art. 161

D. Eheliche Wohnung Art. 162

I. Im Allgemeinen Art. 163

II. Betrag zur freien Verfügung Art. 164

III. Ausserordentliche Beiträge eines Ehegatten Art. 165

F. Vertretung der ehelichen Gemeinschaft Art. 166

G. Beruf und Gewerbe der Ehegatten Art. 167

I. Im Allgemeinen Art. 168

II. Wohnung der Familie Art. 169

J. Auskunftspflicht Art. 170

I. Beratungsstellen Art. 171

1. Im Allgemeinen Art. 172

2. Während des Zusammenlebens

a. Geldleistungen Art. 173

b. Entzug der Vertretungsbefugnis Art. 174

3. Aufhebung des gemeinsamen Haushaltes

a. Gründe Art. 175

b. Regelung des Getrenntlebens Art. 176

4. Vollstreckung

a. Inkassohilfe und Vorschüsse Art. 176a

b. Anweisungen an die Schuldner Art. 177

5. Beschränkungen der Verfügungsbefugnis Art. 178

6. Änderung der Verhältnisse Art. 179

Aufgehoben Art. 180

A. Ordentlicher Güterstand Art. 181

I. Inhalt des Vertrages Art. 182

II. Vertragsfähigkeit Art. 183

III. Form des Vertrages Art. 184

1. Anordnung Art. 185

2. ... Art. 186

3. Aufhebung Art. 187

1. Bei Konkurs Art. 188

2. Bei Pfändung

a. Anordnung Art. 189

b. Begehren Art. 190

3. Aufhebung Art. 191

III. Güterrechtliche Auseinandersetzung Art. 192

D. Schutz der Gläubiger Art. 193

E. ... Art. 194

F. Verwaltung des Vermögens eines Ehegatten durch den andern Art. 195

G. Inventar Art. 195a

I. Zusammensetzung Art. 196

II. Errungenschaft Art. 197

1. Nach Gesetz Art. 198

2. Nach Ehevertrag Art. 199

IV. Beweis Art. 200

B. Verwaltung, Nutzung und Verfügung Art. 201

C. Haftung gegenüber Dritten Art. 202

D. Schulden zwischen Ehegatten Art. 203

I. Zeitpunkt der Auflösung Art. 204

1. Im Allgemeinen Art. 205

2. Mehrwertanteil des Ehegatten Art. 206

1. Ausscheidung der Errungenschaft und des Eigengutes Art. 207

2. Hinzurechnung Art. 208

3. Ersatzforderungen zwischen Errungenschaft und Eigengut Art. 209

4. Vorschlag Art. 210

1. Verkehrswert Art. 211

2. Ertragswert

a. Im Allgemeinen Art. 212

b. Besondere Umstände Art. 213

3. Massgebender Zeitpunkt Art. 214

1. Nach Gesetz Art. 215

2. Nach Vertrag

a. Im Allgemeinen Art. 216

b. Bei Scheidung, Trennung, Ungültigerklärung der Ehe oder gerichtlicher Gütertrennung Art. 217

VI. Bezahlung der Beteiligungsforderung und des Mehrwertanteils

1. Zahlungsaufschub Art. 218

2. Wohnung und Hausrat Art. 219

3. Klage gegen Dritte Art. 220

I. Zusammensetzung Art. 221

1. Allgemeine Gütergemeinschaft Art. 222

2. Beschränkte Gütergemeinschaften

a. Errungenschaftsgemeinschaft Art. 223

b. Andere Gütergemeinschaften Art. 224

III. Eigengut Art. 225

IV. Beweis Art. 226

1. Ordentliche Verwaltung Art. 227

2. Ausserordentliche Verwaltung Art. 228

3. Beruf oder Gewerbe der Gemeinschaft Art. 229

4. Ausschlagung und Annahme von Erbschaften Art. 230

5. Verantwortlichkeit und Verwaltungskosten Art. 231

II. Eigengut Art. 232

I. Vollschulden Art. 233

II. Eigenschulden Art. 234

D. Schulden zwischen Ehegatten Art. 235

I. Zeitpunkt der Auflösung Art. 236

II. Zuweisung zum Eigengut Art. 237

III. Ersatzforderungen zwischen Gesamtgut und Eigengut Art. 238

IV. Mehrwertanteil Art. 239

V. Wertbestimmung Art. 240

1. Bei Tod oder Vereinbarung eines andern Güterstandes Art. 241

2. In den übrigen Fällen Art. 242

1. Eigengut Art. 243

2. Wohnung und Hausrat Art. 244

3. Andere Vermögenswerte Art. 245

4. Andere Teilungsvorschriften Art. 246

I. Im Allgemeinen Art. 247

II. Beweis Art. 248

B. Haftung gegenüber Dritten Art. 249

C. Schulden zwischen Ehegatten Art. 250

D. Zuweisung bei Miteigentum Art. 251

A. Entstehung des Kindesverhältnisses im Allgemeinen Art. 252

Aufgehoben Art. 253 und 254

A. Vermutung Art. 255

I. Klagerecht Art. 256

1. Bei Zeugung während der Ehe Art. 256a

2. Bei Zeugung vor der Ehe oder während Aufhebung des Haushaltes Art. 256b

III. Klagefrist Art. 256c

C. Zusammentreffen zweier Vermutungen Art. 257

D. Klage der Eltern Art. 258

E. Heirat der Eltern Art. 259

I. Zulässigkeit und Form Art. 260

1. Klagerecht Art. 260a

2. Klagegrund Art. 260b

3. Klagefrist Art. 260c

I. Klagerecht Art. 261

II. Vermutung Art. 262

III. Klagefrist Art. 263

I. Allgemeine Voraussetzungen Art. 264

II. Gemeinschaftliche Adoption Art. 264a

III. Einzeladoption Art. 264b

IV. Stiefkindadoption Art. 264c

V. Altersunterschied Art. 264d

VI. Zustimmung des Kindes und der Kindesschutzbehörde Art. 265

1. Form Art. 265a

2. Zeitpunkt Art. 265b

3. Absehen von der Zustimmung

a. Voraussetzungen Art. 265c

b. Entscheid Art. 265d

B. Adoption einer volljährigen Person Art. 266

I. Im Allgemeinen Art. 267

II. Name Art. 267a

III. Bürgerrecht Art. 267b

I. Im Allgemeinen Art. 268

II. Untersuchung Art. 268a

III. Anhörung des Kindes Art. 268abis

IV. Vertretung des Kindes Art. 268ater

V. Würdigung der Einstellung von Angehörigen Art. 268aquater

Dbis. Adoptionsgeheimnis Art. 268b

Dter. Auskunft über die Adoption und die leiblichen Eltern und deren Nachkommen Art. 268c

Dquater. Kantonale Auskunftsstelle und Suchdienste Art. 268d

Dquinquies. Persönlicher Verkehr mit den leiblichen Eltern Art. 268e

1. Fehlen der Zustimmung Art. 269

2. Andere Mängel Art. 269a

II. Klagefrist Art. 269b

F. Adoptivkindervermittlung Art. 269c

I. Kind verheirateter Eltern Art. 270

II. Kind unverheirateter Eltern Art. 270a

III. Zustimmung des Kindes Art. 270b

B. Bürgerrecht Art. 271

C. Beistand und Gemeinschaft Art. 272

1. Grundsatz Art. 273

2. Schranken Art. 274

II. Dritte Art. 274a

III. Zuständigkeit Art. 275

E. Information und Auskunft Art. 275a

A. Allgemeines

I. Gegenstand und Umfang Art. 276

II. Vorrang der Unterhaltspflicht gegenüber einem minderjährigen Kind Art. 276a

B. Dauer Art. 277

C. Verheiratete Eltern Art. 278

I. Klagerecht Art. 279

II. und III.

Aufgehoben Art. 280–284

IV. Bemessung des Unterhaltsbeitrages

1. Beitrag der Eltern Art. 285

2. Andere für den Unterhalt des Kindes bestimmte Leistungen Art. 285a

V. Veränderung der Verhältnisse

1. Im Allgemeinen Art. 286

2. Mankofälle Art. 286a

I. Periodische Leistungen Art. 287

II. Inhalt des Unterhaltsvertrages Art. 287a

III. Abfindung Art. 288

I. Gläubiger Art. 289

1. Inkassohilfe Art. 290

2. Anweisungen an die Schuldner Art. 291

III. Sicherstellung Art. 292

G. Öffentliches Recht Art. 293

H. Pflegeeltern Art. 294

J. Ansprüche der unverheirateten Mutter Art. 295

A. Grundsätze Art. 296

Abis. Tod eines Elternteils Art. 297

Ater. Scheidung und andere eherechtliche Verfahren Art. 298

I. Gemeinsame Erklärung der Eltern Art. 298a

II. Entscheid der Kindesschutzbehörde Art. 298b

III. Vaterschaftsklage Art. 298c

IV. Veränderung der Verhältnisse Art. 298d

Aquinquies. Veränderung der Verhältnisse nach Stiefkindadoption in faktischen Lebensgemeinschaften Art. 298e

Asexies. Stiefeltern Art. 299

Asepties. Pflegeeltern Art. 300

I. Im Allgemeinen Art. 301

II. Bestimmung des Aufenthaltsortes Art. 301a

III. Erziehung Art. 302

IV. Religiöse Erziehung Art. 303

1. Dritten gegenüber

a. Im Allgemeinen Art. 304

b. Rechtsstellung des Kindes Art. 305

2. Innerhalb der Gemeinschaft Art. 306

I. Geeignete Massnahmen Art. 307

II. Beistandschaft Art. 308

Aufgehoben Art. 309

III. Aufhebung des Aufenthaltsbestimmungsrechts Art. 310

1. Von Amtes wegen Art. 311

2. Mit Einverständnis der Eltern Art. 312

V. Änderung der Verhältnisse Art. 313

1. Im Allgemeinen Art. 314

2. Anhörung des Kindes Art. 314a

3. Vertretung des Kindes Art. 314abis

4. Unterbringung in einer geschlossenen Einrichtung oder psychiatrischen Klinik Art. 314b

5. Melderechte Art. 314c

6. Meldepflichten Art. 314d

7. Mitwirkung und Amtshilfe Art. 314e

1. Im Allgemeinen Art. 315

2. In eherechtlichen Verfahren

a. Zuständigkeit des Gerichts Art. 315a

b. Abänderung gerichtlicher Anordnungen Art. 315b

VIII. Pflegekinderaufsicht Art. 316

IX. Zusammenarbeit in der Jugendhilfe Art. 317

A. Verwaltung Art. 318

B. Verwendung der Erträge Art. 319

C. Anzehrung des Kindesvermögens Art. 320

I. Zuwendungen Art. 321

II. Pflichtteil Art. 322

III. Arbeitserwerb, Berufs- und Gewerbevermögen Art. 323

I. Geeignete Massnahmen Art. 324

II. Entziehung der Verwaltung Art. 325

I. Rückerstattung Art. 326

II. Verantwortlichkeit Art. 327

A. Grundsatz Art. 327a

I. Des Kindes Art. 327b

II. Des Vormunds Art. 327c

A. Unterstützungspflichtige Art. 328

B. Umfang und Geltendmachung des Anspruches Art. 329

C. Unterhalt von Findelkindern Art. 330

A. Voraussetzung Art. 331

I. Hausordnung und Fürsorge Art. 332

II. Verantwortlichkeit Art. 333

1. Voraussetzungen Art. 334

2. Geltendmachung Art. 334bis

A. Familienstiftungen Art. 335

1. Befugnis Art. 336

2. Form Art. 337

II. Dauer Art. 338

1. Art der Gemeinderschaft Art. 339

2. Leitung und Vertretung

a. Im Allgemeinen Art. 340

b. Befugnis des Hauptes Art. 341

3. Gemeinschaftsgut und persönliches Vermögen Art. 342

1. Gründe Art. 343

2. Kündigung, Zahlungsunfähigkeit, Heirat Art. 344

3. Tod eines Gemeinders Art. 345

4. Teilungsregel Art. 346

1. Inhalt Art. 347

2. Besondere Aufhebungsgründe Art. 348

Aufgehoben Art. 349–359

A. Grundsatz Art. 360

I. Errichtung Art. 361

II. Widerruf Art. 362

C. Feststellung der Wirksamkeit und Annahme Art. 363

D. Auslegung und Ergänzung Art. 364

E. Erfüllung Art. 365

F. Entschädigung und Spesen Art. 366

G. Kündigung Art. 367

H. Einschreiten der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde Art. 368

I. Wiedererlangen der Urteilsfähigkeit Art. 369

A. Grundsatz Art. 370

B. Errichtung und Widerruf Art. 371

C. Eintritt der Urteilsunfähigkeit Art. 372

D. Einschreiten der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde Art. 373

A. Voraussetzungen und Umfang des Vertretungsrechts Art. 374

B. Ausübung des Vertretungsrechts Art. 375

C. Einschreiten der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde Art. 376

A. Behandlungsplan Art. 377

B. Vertretungsberechtigte Person Art. 378

C. Dringliche Fälle Art. 379

D. Behandlung einer psychischen Störung Art. 380

E. Einschreiten der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde Art. 381

A. Betreuungsvertrag Art. 382

I. Voraussetzungen Art. 383

II. Protokollierung und Information Art. 384

III. Einschreiten der Erwachsenenschutzbehörde Art. 385

C. Schutz der Persönlichkeit Art. 386

D. Aufsicht über Wohn- und Pflegeeinrichtungen Art. 387

A. Zweck Art. 388

B. Subsidiarität und Verhältnismässigkeit Art. 389

A. Voraussetzungen Art. 390

B. Aufgabenbereiche Art. 391

C. Verzicht auf eine Beistandschaft Art. 392

A. Begleitbeistandschaft Art. 393

I. Im Allgemeinen Art. 394

II. Vermögensverwaltung Art. 395

C. Mitwirkungsbeistandschaft Art. 396

D. Kombination von Beistandschaften Art. 397

E. Umfassende Beistandschaft Art. 398

Art. 399

I. Allgemeine Voraussetzungen Art. 400

II. Wünsche der betroffenen Person oder ihr nahestehender Personen Art. 401

III. Übertragung des Amtes auf mehrere Personen Art. 402

B. Verhinderung und Interessenkollision Art. 403

C. Entschädigung und Spesen Art. 404

A. Übernahme des Amtes Art. 405

B. Verhältnis zur betroffenen Person Art. 406

C. Eigenes Handeln der betroffenen Person Art. 407

I. Aufgaben Art. 408

II. Beträge zur freien Verfügung Art. 409

III. Rechnung Art. 410

E. Berichterstattung Art. 411

F. Besondere Geschäfte Art. 412

G. Sorgfalts- und Verschwiegenheitspflicht Art. 413

H. Änderung der Verhältnisse Art. 414

A. Prüfung der Rechnung und des Berichts Art. 415

I. Von Gesetzes wegen Art. 416

II. Auf Anordnung Art. 417

III. Fehlen der Zustimmung Art. 418

Art. 419

Art. 420

A. Von Gesetzes wegen Art. 421

I. Auf Begehren des Beistands oder der Beiständin Art. 422

II. Übrige Fälle Art. 423

C. Weiterführung der Geschäfte Art. 424

D. Schlussbericht und Schlussrechnung Art. 425

I. Unterbringung zur Behandlung oder Betreuung Art. 426

II. Zurückbehaltung freiwillig Eingetretener Art. 427

I. Erwachsenenschutzbehörde Art. 428

1. Zuständigkeit Art. 429

2. Verfahren Art. 430

C. Periodische Überprüfung Art. 431

D. Vertrauensperson Art. 432

I. Behandlungsplan Art. 433

II. Behandlung ohne Zustimmung Art. 434

III. Notfälle Art. 435

IV. Austrittsgespräch Art. 436

V. Kantonales Recht Art. 437

F. Massnahmen zur Einschränkung der Bewegungsfreiheit Art. 438

G. Anrufung des Gerichts Art. 439

A. Erwachsenenschutzbehörde Art. 440

B. Aufsichtsbehörde Art. 441

C. Örtliche Zuständigkeit Art. 442

A. Melderechte und -pflichten Art. 443

B. Prüfung der Zuständigkeit Art. 444

C. Vorsorgliche Massnahmen Art. 445

D. Verfahrensgrundsätze Art. 446

E. Anhörung Art. 447

F. Mitwirkungspflichten und Amtshilfe Art. 448

G. Begutachtung in einer Einrichtung Art. 449

H. Anordnung einer Vertretung Art. 449a

I. Akteneinsicht Art. 449b

J. Mitteilungspflicht Art. 449c

A. Beschwerdeobjekt und Beschwerdebefugnis Art. 450

B. Beschwerdegründe Art. 450a

C. Beschwerdefrist Art. 450b

D. Aufschiebende Wirkung Art. 450c

E. Vernehmlassung der Vorinstanz und Wiedererwägung Art. 450d

F. Besondere Bestimmungen bei fürsorgerischer Unterbringung Art. 450e

Art. 450f

Art. 450g

A. Verschwiegenheitspflicht und Auskunft Art. 451

B. Wirkung der Massnahmen gegenüber Dritten Art. 452

C. Zusammenarbeitspflicht Art. 453

A. Grundsatz Art. 454

B. Verjährung Art. 455

C. Haftung nach Auftragsrecht Art. 456

I. Nachkommen Art. 457

II. Elterlicher Stamm Art. 458

III. Grosselterlicher Stamm Art. 459

IV. Umfang der Erbberechtigung Art. 460

Art. 461

B. Überlebende Ehegatten und überlebende eingetragene Partnerinnen oder Partner Art. 462

Aufgehoben Art. 463–464

C. ... Art. 465

D. Gemeinwesen Art. 466

A. Letztwillige Verfügung Art. 467

B. Erbvertrag Art. 468

C. Mangelhafter Wille Art. 469

I. Umfang der Verfügungsbefugnis Art. 470

II. Pflichtteil Art. 471

III. ... Art. 472

IV. Begünstigung des Ehegatten Art. 473

1. Schuldenabzug Art. 474

2. Zuwendungen unter Lebenden Art. 475

3. Versicherungsansprüche Art. 476

I. Gründe Art. 477

II. Wirkung Art. 478

III. Beweislast Art. 479

IV. Enterbung eines Zahlungsunfähigen Art. 480

A. Im Allgemeinen Art. 481

B. Auflagen und Bedingungen Art. 482

C. Erbeinsetzung Art. 483

I. Inhalt Art. 484

II. Verpflichtung des Beschwerten Art. 485

III. Verhältnis zur Erbschaft Art. 486

I. Bezeichnung des Nacherben Art. 488

II. Zeitpunkt der Auslieferung Art. 489

III. Sicherungsmittel Art. 490

1. Des Vorerben Art. 491

2. Des Nacherben Art. 492

V. Urteilsunfähige Nachkommen Art. 492a

G. Stiftungen Art. 493

I. Erbeinsetzungs- und Vermächtnisvertrag Art. 494

1. Bedeutung Art. 495

2. Lediger Anfall Art. 496

3. Rechte der Erbschaftsgläubiger Art. 497

1. Im Allgemeinen Art. 498

2. Öffentliche Verfügung

a. Errichtungsform Art. 499

b. Mitwirkung des Beamten Art. 500

c. Mitwirkung der Zeugen Art. 501

d. Errichtung ohne Lesen und Unterschrift des Erblassers Art. 502

e. Mitwirkende Personen Art. 503

f. Aufbewahrung der Verfügung Art. 504

3. Eigenhändige Verfügung Art. 505

4. Mündliche Verfügung

a. Verfügung Art. 506

b. Beurkundung Art. 507

c. Verlust der Gültigkeit Art. 508

1. Widerruf Art. 509

2. Vernichtung Art. 510

3. Spätere Verfügung Art. 511

I. Errichtung Art. 512

1. Unter Lebenden

a. Durch Vertrag und letztwillige Verfügung Art. 513

b. Durch Rücktritt vom Vertrag Art. 514

2. Vorabsterben des Erben Art. 515

C. Verfügungsbeschränkung Art. 516

A. Erteilung des Auftrages Art. 517

B. Inhalt des Auftrages Art. 518

I. Bei Verfügungsunfähigkeit, mangelhaftem Willen, Rechtswidrigkeit und Unsittlichkeit Art. 519

1. Im Allgemeinen Art. 520

2. Bei eigenhändiger letztwilliger Verfügung Art. 520a

III. Verjährung Art. 521

1. Im Allgemeinen Art. 522

2. Begünstigung der Pflichtteilsberechtigten Art. 523

3. Rechte der Gläubiger Art. 524

1. Herabsetzung im Allgemeinen Art. 525

2. Vermächtnis einer einzelnen Sache Art. 526

3. Bei Verfügungen unter Lebenden

a. Fälle Art. 527

b. Rückleistung Art. 528

4. Versicherungsansprüche Art. 529

5. Bei Nutzniessung und Renten Art. 530

6. Bei Nacherbeneinsetzung Art. 531

III. Durchführung Art. 532

IV. Verjährung Art. 533

A. Ansprüche bei Ausrichtung zu Lebzeiten des Erblassers Art. 534

I. Herabsetzung Art. 535

II. Rückleistung Art. 536

A. Voraussetzung auf Seite des Erblassers Art. 537

B. Ort der Eröffnung Art. 538

1. Rechtsfähigkeit Art. 539

2. Erbunwürdigkeit

a. Gründe Art. 540

b. Wirkung auf Nachkommen Art. 541

1. Als Erbe Art. 542

2. Als Vermächtnisnehmer Art. 543

3. Das Kind vor der Geburt Art. 544

4. Nacherben Art. 545

1. Erbgang gegen Sicherstellung Art. 546

2. Aufhebung der Verschollenheit und Rückerstattung Art. 547

II. Erbrecht des Verschollenen Art. 548

III. Verhältnis der beiden Fälle zueinander Art. 549

IV. Verfahren von Amtes wegen Art. 550

A. Im Allgemeinen Art. 551

B. Siegelung der Erbschaft Art. 552

C. Inventar Art. 553

I. Im Allgemeinen Art. 554

II. Bei unbekannten Erben Art. 555

I. Pflicht zur Einlieferung Art. 556

II. Eröffnung Art. 557

III. Mitteilung an die Beteiligten Art. 558

IV. Auslieferung der Erbschaft Art. 559

I. Erben Art. 560

II. ... Art. 561

1. Erwerb Art. 562

2. Gegenstand Art. 563

3. Verhältnis von Gläubiger und Vermächtnisnehmer Art. 564

4. Herabsetzung Art. 565

1. Befugnis Art. 566

2. Befristung

a. Im Allgemeinen Art. 567

b. Bei Inventaraufnahme Art. 568

3. Übergang der Ausschlagungsbefugnis Art. 569

4. Form Art. 570

II. Verwirkung der Ausschlagungsbefugnis Art. 571

III. Ausschlagung eines Miterben Art. 572

1. Im Allgemeinen Art. 573

2. Befugnis der überlebenden Ehegatten Art. 574

3. Ausschlagung zugunsten nachfolgender Erben Art. 575

V. Fristverlängerung Art. 576

VI. Ausschlagung eines Vermächtnisses Art. 577

VII. Sicherung für die Gläubiger des Erben Art. 578

VIII. Haftung im Falle der Ausschlagung Art. 579

A. Voraussetzung Art. 580

I. Inventar Art. 581

II. Rechnungsruf Art. 582

III. Aufnahme von Amtes wegen Art. 583

IV. Ergebnis Art. 584

I. Verwaltung Art. 585

II. Betreibung, Prozesse, Verjährung Art. 586

I. Frist zur Erklärung Art. 587

II. Erklärung Art. 588

1. Haftung nach Inventar Art. 589

2. Haftung ausser Inventar Art. 590

E. Haftung für Bürgschaftsschulden Art. 591

F. Erwerb durch das Gemeinwesen Art. 592

I. Begehren eines Erben Art. 593

II. Begehren der Gläubiger des Erblassers Art. 594

I. Verwaltung Art. 595

II. Ordentliche Liquidation Art. 596

III. Konkursamtliche Liquidation Art. 597

A. Voraussetzung Art. 598

B. Wirkung Art. 599

C. Verjährung Art. 600

D. Klage der Vermächtnisnehmer Art. 601

I. Erbengemeinschaft Art. 602

II. Haftung der Erben Art. 603

B. Teilungsanspruch Art. 604

C. Verschiebung der Teilung Art. 605

D. Anspruch der Hausgenossen Art. 606

A. Im Allgemeinen Art. 607

I. Verfügung des Erblassers Art. 608

II. Mitwirkung der Behörde Art. 609

I. Gleichberechtigung der Erben Art. 610

II. Bildung von Losen Art. 611

III. Zuweisung und Verkauf einzelner Sachen Art. 612

IV. Zuweisung der Wohnung und des Hausrates an den überlebenden Ehegatten Art. 612a

I. Zusammengehörende Sachen, Familienschriften Art. 613

I.bis Landwirtschaftliches Inventar Art. 613a

II. Forderungen des Erblassers an Erben Art. 614

III. Verpfändete Erbschaftssachen Art. 615

Aufgehoben Art. 616

1. Übernahme

a. Anrechnungswert Art. 617

b. Schatzungsverfahren Art. 618

V. Landwirtschaftliche Gewerbe und Grundstücke Art. 619

Aufgehoben Art. 620–625

A. Ausgleichungspflicht der Erben Art. 626

B. Ausgleichung bei Wegfallen von Erben Art. 627

I. Einwerfung oder Anrechnung Art. 628

II. Verhältnis zum Erbanteil Art. 629

III. Ausgleichungswert Art. 630

D. Erziehungskosten Art. 631

E. Gelegenheitsgeschenke Art. 632

Aufgehoben Art. 633

I. Teilungsvertrag Art. 634

II. Vertrag über angefallene Erbanteile Art. 635

III. Verträge vor dem Erbgang Art. 636

I. Gewährleistung Art. 637

II. Anfechtung der Teilung Art. 638

I. Solidare Haftung Art. 639

II. Rückgriff auf die Miterben Art. 640

I. Im Allgemeinen Art. 641

II. Tiere Art. 641a

I. Bestandteile Art. 642

II. Natürliche Früchte Art. 643

1. Umschreibung Art. 644

2. Ausschluss Art. 645

1. Verhältnis der Miteigentümer Art. 646

2. Nutzungs- und Verwaltungsordnung Art. 647

3. Gewöhnliche Verwaltungshandlungen Art. 647a

4. Wichtigere Verwaltungshandlungen Art. 647b

5. Bauliche Massnahmen

a. Notwendige Art. 647c

b. Nützliche Art. 647d

c. Der Verschönerung und Bequemlichkeit dienende Art. 647e

6. Verfügung über die Sache Art. 648

7. Tragung der Kosten und Lasten Art. 649

8. Verbindlichkeit von Regelungen und Anmerkung im Grundbuch Art. 649a

9. Ausschluss aus der Gemeinschaft

a. Miteigentümer Art. 649b

b. Andere Berechtigte Art. 649c

10. Aufhebung

a. Anspruch auf Teilung Art. 650

b. Art der Teilung Art. 651

c. Tiere des häuslichen Bereichs Art. 651a

1. Voraussetzung Art. 652

2. Wirkung Art. 653

3. Aufhebung Art. 654

III. Gemeinschaftliches Eigentum an landwirtschaftlichen Gewerben und Grundstücken Art. 654a

A. Gegenstand

I. Grundstücke Art. 655

II. Unselbstständiges Eigentum Art. 655a

I. Eintragung Art. 656

1. Übertragung Art. 657

2. Aneignung Art. 658

3. Bildung neuen Landes Art. 659

4. Bodenverschiebung

a. im Allgemeinen Art. 660

b. dauernde Art. 660a

c. Neufestsetzung der Grenze Art. 660b

5. Ersitzung

a. Ordentliche Ersitzung Art. 661

b. Ausserordentliche Ersitzung Art. 662

c. Fristen Art. 663

6. Herrenlose und öffentliche Sachen Art. 664

III. Recht auf Eintragung Art. 665

C. Verlust Art. 666

D. Richterliche Massnahmen

I. Bei unauffindbarem Eigentümer Art. 666a

II. Bei Fehlen der vorgeschriebenen Organe Art. 666b

I. Umfang Art. 667

1. Art der Abgrenzung Art. 668

2. Abgrenzungspflicht Art. 669

3. Miteigentum an Vorrichtungen zur Abgrenzung Art. 670

1. Boden- und Baumaterial

a. Eigentumsverhältnis Art. 671

b. Ersatz Art. 672

c. Zuweisung des Grundeigentums Art. 673

2. Überragende Bauten Art. 674

3. Baurecht Art. 675

4. Leitungen Art. 676

5. Fahrnisbauten Art. 677

IV. Einpflanzungen auf dem Grundstück Art. 678

1. Bei Überschreitung des Eigentumsrechts Art. 679

2. Bei rechtmässiger Bewirtschaftung des Grundstücks Art. 679a

I. Im Allgemeinen Art. 680

1. Grundsätze Art. 681

2. Ausübung Art. 681a

3. Abänderung, Verzicht Art. 681b

4. Im Miteigentums- und im Baurechtsverhältnis Art. 682

5. Vorkaufsrecht an landwirtschaftlichen Gewerben und Grundstücken Art. 682a

Aufgehoben Art. 683

1. Übermässige Einwirkungen Art. 684

2. Graben und Bauen

a. Regel Art. 685

b. Kantonale Vorschriften Art. 686

3. Pflanzen

a. Regel Art. 687

b. Kantonale Vorschriften Art. 688

4. Wasserablauf Art. 689

5. Entwässerungen Art. 690

6. Durchleitungen

a. Pflicht zur Duldung Art. 691

b. Wahrung der Interessen des Belasteten Art. 692

c. Änderung der Verhältnisse Art. 693

7. Wegrechte

a. Notweg Art. 694

b. Andere Wegrechte Art. 695

c. Anmerkung im Grundbuch Art. 696

8. Einfriedigung Art. 697

9. Unterhaltspflicht Art. 698

1. Zutritt Art. 699

2. Wegschaffung zugeführter Sachen u. dgl. Art. 700

3. Abwehr von Gefahr und Schaden Art. 701

1. Im Allgemeinen Art. 702

2. Bodenverbesserungen Art. 703

I. Quelleneigentum und Quellenrecht Art. 704

II. Ableitung von Quellen Art. 705

1. Schadenersatz Art. 706

2. Wiederherstellung Art. 707

IV. Quellengemeinschaft Art. 708

V. Benutzung von Quellen Art. 709

VI. Notbrunnen Art. 710

1. Des Wassers Art. 711

2. Des Bodens Art. 712

I. Inhalt Art. 712a

II. Gegenstand Art. 712b

III. Verfügung Art. 712c

I. Begründungsakt Art. 712d

II. Räumliche Ausscheidung und Wertquoten Art. 712e

III. Untergang Art. 712f

I. Die anwendbaren Bestimmungen Art. 712g

1. Bestand und Verteilung Art. 712h

2. Haftung für Beiträge

a. Gesetzliches Pfandrecht Art. 712i

b. Retentionsrecht Art. 712k

III. Handlungsfähigkeit der Gemeinschaft Art. 712l

1. Zuständigkeit und rechtliche Stellung Art. 712m

2. Einberufung und Leitung Art. 712n

3. Ausübung des Stimmrechtes Art. 712o

4. Beschlussfähigkeit Art. 712p

1. Bestellung Art. 712q

2. Abberufung Art. 712r

3. Aufgaben

a. Ausführung der Bestimmungen und Beschlüsse über die Verwaltung und Benutzung Art. 712s

b. Vertretung nach aussen Art. 712t

A. Gegenstand Art. 713

1. Besitzübergang Art. 714

2. Eigentumsvorbehalt

a. Im Allgemeinen Art. 715

b. Bei Abzahlungsgeschäften Art. 716

3. Erwerb ohne Besitz Art. 717

1. Herrenlose Sachen Art. 718

2. Herrenlos werdende Tiere Art. 719

1. Bekanntmachung, Nachfrage

a. Im Allgemeinen Art. 720

b. Bei Tieren Art. 720a

2. Aufbewahrung, Versteigerung Art. 721

3. Eigentumserwerb, Herausgabe Art. 722

4. Schatz Art. 723

5. Wissenschaftliche Gegenstände Art. 724

IV. Zuführung Art. 725

V. Verarbeitung Art. 726

VI. Verbindung und Vermischung Art. 727

VII. Ersitzung Art. 728

C. Verlust Art. 729

A. Gegenstand Art. 730

1. Eintragung Art. 731

2. Rechtsgeschäft Art. 732

3. Errichtung zu eigenen Lasten Art. 733

1. Im Allgemeinen Art. 734

2. Vereinigung Art. 735

3. Ablösung durch das Gericht Art. 736

1. Im Allgemeinen Art. 737

2. Nach dem Eintrag Art. 738

3. Bei verändertem Bedürfnis Art. 739

4. Nach kantonalem Recht und Ortsgebrauch Art. 740

5. Bei mehreren Berechtigten Art. 740a

II. Last des Unterhaltes Art. 741

III. Verlegung der Belastung Art. 742

IV. Teilung eines Grundstücks Art. 743

Aufgehoben Art. 744

I. Gegenstand Art. 745

1. Im Allgemeinen Art. 746

2. ... Art. 747

1. Gründe Art. 748

2. Dauer Art. 749

3. Ersatz bei Untergang Art. 750

4. Rückleistung

a. Pflicht Art. 751

b. Verantwortlichkeit Art. 752

c. Verwendungen Art. 753

5. Verjährung der Ersatzansprüche Art. 754

1. Rechte des Nutzniessers

a. Im Allgemeinen Art. 755

b. Natürliche Früchte Art. 756

c. Zinse Art. 757

d. Übertragbarkeit Art. 758

2. Rechte des Eigentümers

a. Aufsicht Art. 759

b. Sicherstellung Art. 760

c. Sicherstellung bei Schenkung und gesetzlicher Nutzniessung Art. 761

d. Folge der Nichtleistung der Sicherheit Art. 762

3. Inventarpflicht Art. 763

4. Lasten

a. Erhaltung der Sache Art. 764

b. Unterhalt und Bewirtschaftung Art. 765

c. Zinspflicht bei Nutzniessung an einem Vermögen Art. 766

d. Versicherung Art. 767

1. Grundstücke

a. Früchte Art. 768

b. Wirtschaftliche Bestimmung Art. 769

c. Wald Art. 770

d. Bergwerke Art. 771

2. Verbrauchbare und geschätzte Sachen Art. 772

3. Forderungen

a. Inhalt Art. 773

b. Rückzahlungen und Neuanlage Art. 774

c. Recht auf Abtretung Art. 775

I. Im Allgemeinen Art. 776

II. Ansprüche des Wohnungsberechtigten Art. 777

III. Lasten Art. 778

I. Gegenstand und Aufnahme in das Grundbuch Art. 779

II. Rechtsgeschäft Art. 779a

III. Inhalt, Umfang und Vormerkung Art. 779b

1. Heimfall Art. 779c

2. Entschädigung Art. 779d

Aufgehoben Art. 779e

1. Voraussetzungen Art. 779f

2. Ausübung des Heimfallsrechtes Art. 779g

3. Andere Anwendungsfälle Art. 779h

1. Anspruch auf Errichtung eines Pfandrechts Art. 779i

2. Eintragung Art. 779k

VII. Höchstdauer Art. 779l

D. Quellenrecht Art. 780

E. Andere Dienstbarkeiten Art. 781

F. Richterliche Massnahmen Art. 781a

A. Gegenstand Art. 782

1. Eintragung und Erwerbsart Art. 783

2. Öffentlichrechtliche Grundlasten Art. 784

Aufgehoben Art. 785

1. Im Allgemeinen Art. 786

2. Ablösung

a. Durch den Gläubiger Art. 787

b. Durch den Schuldner Art. 788

c. Ablösungsbetrag Art. 789

3. Verjährung Art. 790

I. Gläubigerrecht Art. 791

II. Schuldpflicht Art. 792

I. Arten Art. 793

1. Betrag Art. 794

2. Zinse Art. 795

1. Verpfändbarkeit Art. 796

2. Bestimmtheit

a. Bei einem Grundstück Art. 797

b. Bei mehreren Grundstücken Art. 798

3. Landwirtschaftliche Grundstücke Art. 798a

1. Eintragung Art. 799

2. Bei gemeinschaftlichem Eigentum Art. 800

II. Untergang Art. 801

1. Verlegung der Pfandrechte Art. 802

2. Kündigung durch den Schuldner Art. 803

3. Entschädigung in Geld Art. 804

I. Umfang der Pfandhaft Art. 805

II. Miet- und Pachtzinse Art. 806

III. Verjährung Art. 807

1. Massregeln bei Wertverminderung

a. Untersagung und Selbsthilfe Art. 808

b. Sicherung, Wiederherstellung, Abzahlung Art. 809

2. Unverschuldete Wertverminderung Art. 810

3. Abtrennung kleiner Stücke Art. 811

V. Weitere Belastung Art. 812

1. Wirkung der Pfandstellen Art. 813

2. Pfandstellen untereinander Art. 814

3. Leere Pfandstellen Art. 815

1. Art der Befriedigung Art. 816

2. Verteilung des Erlöses Art. 817

3. Umfang der Sicherung Art. 818

4. Sicherung für erhaltende Auslagen Art. 819

1. Vorrang Art. 820

2. Tilgung der Schuld und des Pfandrechtes Art. 821

IX. Anspruch auf die Versicherungssumme Art. 822

X. Unauffindbarer Gläubiger Art. 823

A. Zweck und Gestalt Art. 824

I. Errichtung Art. 825

1. Recht auf Löschung Art. 826

2. Stellung des Eigentümers Art. 827

3. Einseitige Ablösung

a. Voraussetzung und Geltendmachung Art. 828

b. Öffentliche Versteigerung Art. 829

c. Amtliche Schätzung Art. 830

4. Kündigung Art. 831

1. Veräusserung Art. 832

2. Zerstückelung Art. 833

3. Anzeige der Schuldübernahme Art. 834

II. Übertragung der Forderung Art. 835

I. Des kantonalen Rechts Art. 836

1. Fälle Art. 837

2. Verkäufer, Miterben und Gemeinder Art. 838

3. Handwerker und Unternehmer

a. Eintragung Art. 839

b. Rang Art. 840

c. Vorrecht Art. 841

I. Zweck; Verhältnis zur Forderung aus dem Grundverhältnis Art. 842

II. Arten Art. 843

III. Stellung des Eigentümers Art. 844

IV. Veräusserung. Teilung Art. 845

1. Im Allgemeinen Art. 846

2. Kündigung Art. 847

VI. Schutz des guten Glaubens Art. 848

VII. Einreden des Schuldners Art. 849

VIII. Bevollmächtigte Person Art. 850

IX. Zahlungsort Art. 851

X. Änderungen im Rechtsverhältnis Art. 852

XI. Tilgung Art. 853

1. Wegfall des Gläubigers Art. 854

2. Löschung Art. 855

XIII. Aufrufung des Gläubigers Art. 856

I. Errichtung Art. 857

II. Übertragung Art. 858

III. Verpfändung, Pfändung und Nutzniessung Art. 859

1. Eintragung Art. 860

2. Pfandtitel Art. 861

II. Schutz des guten Glaubens Art. 862

1. Geltendmachung Art. 863

2. Übertragung Art. 864

IV. Kraftloserklärung Art. 865

Aufgehoben Art. 866–874

A. Obligationen für Anleihen mit Pfandrecht Art. 875

Aufgehoben Art. 876–883

1. Besitz des Gläubigers Art. 884

2. Viehverpfändung Art. 885

3. Nachverpfändung Art. 886

4. Verpfändung durch den Pfandgläubiger Art. 887

1. Besitzesverlust Art. 888

2. Rückgabepflicht Art. 889

3. Haftung des Gläubigers Art. 890

1. Rechte des Gläubigers Art. 891

2. Umfang der Pfandhaft Art. 892

3. Rang der Pfandrechte Art. 893

4. Verfallsvertrag Art. 894

I. Voraussetzungen Art. 895

II. Ausnahmen Art. 896

III. Bei Zahlungsunfähigkeit Art. 897

IV. Wirkung Art. 898

A. Im Allgemeinen Art. 899

I. Bei Forderungen mit oder ohne Schuldschein Art. 900

II. Bei Wertpapieren Art. 901

III. Bei Warenpapieren Art. 902

IV. Nachverpfändung Art. 903

I. Umfang der Pfandhaft Art. 904

II. Vertretung verpfändeter Aktien und Stammanteile von Gesellschaften mit beschränkter Haftung Art. 905

III. Verwaltung und Abzahlung Art. 906

I. Erteilung der Gewerbebefugnis Art. 907

II. Dauer Art. 908

I. Errichtung Art. 909

1. Verkauf des Pfandes Art. 910

2. Recht auf den Überschuss Art. 911

1. Recht auf Auslösung Art. 912

2. Rechte der Anstalt Art. 913

I. Begriff Art. 919

II. Selbständiger und unselbständiger Besitz Art. 920

III. Vorübergehende Unterbrechung Art. 921

I. Unter Anwesenden Art. 922

II. Unter Abwesenden Art. 923

III. Ohne Übergabe Art. 924

IV. Bei Warenpapieren Art. 925

1. Abwehr von Angriffen Art. 926

2. Klage aus Besitzesentziehung Art. 927

3. Klage aus Besitzesstörung Art. 928

4. Zulässigkeit und Verjährung der Klage Art. 929

1. Vermutung des Eigentums Art. 930

2. Vermutung bei unselbständigem Besitz Art. 931

3. Klage gegen den Besitzer Art. 932

4. Verfügungs- und Rückforderungsrecht

a. Bei anvertrauten Sachen Art. 933

b. Bei abhanden gekommenen Sachen Art. 934

c. Bei Geld- und Inhaberpapieren Art. 935

d. Bei bösem Glauben Art. 936

5. Vermutung bei Grundstücken Art. 937

1. Gutgläubiger Besitzer

a. Nutzung Art. 938

b. Ersatzforderungen Art. 939

2. Bösgläubiger Besitzer Art. 940

IV. Ersitzung Art. 941

1. Im Allgemeinen Art. 942

2. Aufnahme

a. Gegenstand Art. 943

b. Ausnahmen Art. 944

3. Bücher

a. Hauptbuch Art. 945

b. Grundbuchblatt Art. 946

c. Kollektivblätter Art. 947

d. Tagebuch, Belege Art. 948

4. Verordnungen

a. Im Allgemeinen Art. 949

b. Bei Führung des Grundbuchs mittels Informatik Art. 949a

4a. ... Art. 949b

4b. ... Art. 949c

4c. Beizug Privater zur Nutzung des informatisierten Grundbuchs 949d

5. Amtliche Vermessung Art. 950

1. Kreise

a. Zugehörigkeit Art. 951

b. Grundstücke in mehreren Kreisen Art. 952

2. Grundbuchämter Art. 953

3. Gebühren Art. 954

III. Haftung Art. 955

IV. Administrative Aufsicht Art. 956

1. Beschwerdebefugnis Art. 956a

2. Beschwerdeverfahren Art. 956b

Aufgehoben Art. 957

1. Eigentum und dingliche Rechte Art. 958

2. Vormerkungen

a. Persönliche Rechte Art. 959

b. Verfügungsbeschränkungen Art. 960

c. Vorläufige Eintragung Art. 961

d. Eintragung nachgehender Rechte Art. 961a

1. Von öffentlich-rechtlichen Beschränkungen Art. 962

2. Von Vertretungen Art. 962a

1. Anmeldungen

a. Bei Eintragungen Art. 963

b. Bei Löschungen Art. 964

2. Ausweise

a. Gültiger Ausweis Art. 965

b. Ergänzung des Ausweises Art. 966

1. Im Allgemeinen Art. 967

2. Bei Dienstbarkeiten Art. 968

V. Anzeigepflicht Art. 969

I. Auskunftserteilung und Einsichtnahme Art. 970

II. Veröffentlichungen Art. 970a

I. Bedeutung der Nichteintragung Art. 971

1. Im Allgemeinen Art. 972

2. Gegenüber gutgläubigen Dritten Art. 973

3. Gegenüber bösgläubigen Dritten Art. 974

1. Bei der Teilung des Grundstücks Art. 974a

2. Bei der Vereinigung von Grundstücken Art. 974b

II. Bei ungerechtfertigtem Eintrag Art. 975

1. Zweifelsfrei bedeutungsloser Einträge Art. 976

2. Anderer Einträge

a. Im Allgemeinen Art. 976a

b. Bei Einspruch Art. 976b

3. Öffentliches Bereinigungsverfahren Art. 976c

IV. Berichtigungen Art. 977

I. Regel der Nichtrückwirkung Art. 1

1. Öffentliche Ordnung und Sittlichkeit Art. 2

2. Inhalt der Rechtsverhältnisse kraft Gesetzes Art. 3

3. Nicht erworbene Rechte Art. 4

I. Handlungsfähigkeit Art. 5

II. Verschollenheit Art. 6

IIa. Zentrale Datenbank im Zivilstandswesen Art. 6a

1. Im Allgemeinen Art. 6b

2. Buchführung und Revisionsstelle Art. 6c

IV. Schutz der Persönlichkeit vor Gewalt, Drohungen oder Nachstellungen Art. 6d

I. Eheschliessung Art. 7

1. Grundsatz Art. 7a

2. Rechtshängige Scheidungsprozesse Art. 7b

3. Trennungsfrist bei rechtshängigen Scheidungsprozessen Art. 7c

4. Berufliche Vorsorge Art. 7d

5. Umwandlung bestehender Renten Art. 7e

1. Grundsatz Art. 8

2. Name Art. 8a

3. Bürgerrecht Art. 8b

II. Güterrecht der vor 1. Januar 1912 geschlossenen Ehen Art. 9

1. Im Allgemeinen Art. 9a

2. Wechsel von der Güterverbindung zur Errungenschaftsbeteiligung

a. Änderung der Vermögensmassen Art. 9b

b. Vorrecht Art. 9c

c. Güterrechtliche Auseinandersetzung unter dem neuen Recht Art. 9d

3. Beibehaltung der Güterverbindung Art. 9e

4. Beibehaltung der gesetzlichen oder gerichtlichen Gütertrennung Art. 9

5. Ehevertrag

a. Im Allgemeinen Art. 10

b. Rechtskraft gegenüber Dritten Art. 10a

c. Unterstellung unter das neue Recht Art. 10b

d. Vertragliche Gütertrennung nach bisherigem Recht Art. 10c

e. Im Hinblick auf das Inkrafttreten des neuen Rechts abgeschlossene Eheverträge Art. 10

f. Güterrechtsregister Art. 10e

6. Tilgung von Schulden bei der güterrechtlichen Auseinandersetzung Art. 11

7. Schutz der Gläubiger Art. 11a

III. Das Kindesverhältnis im Allgemeinen Art. 12

1. Fortdauer des bisherigen Rechts Art. 12a

2. Hängige Verfahren Art. 12b

3. Unterstellung unter das neue Recht Art. 12c

Aufgehoben Art. 12cbis

IIIter. Anfechtung der Ehelicherklärung Art. 12d

1. Hängige Klagen Art. 13

2. Neue Klagen Art. 13a

IVbis. Frist für die Feststellung und die Anfechtung des Kindesverhältnisses Art. 13b

IVter. Unterhaltsbeiträge

1. Bestehende Unterhaltstitel Art. 13c

2. Rechtshängige Verfahren Art. 13cbis

IVquater. Name des Kindes Art. 13d

1. Bestehende Massnahmen Art. 14

2. Hängige Verfahren Art. 14a

I. Erbe und Erbgang Art. 15

II. Verfügungen von Todes wegen Art. 16

I. Dingliche Rechte im Allgemeinen Art. 17

II. Anspruch auf Eintragung im Grundbuch Art. 18

III. Ersitzung Art. 19

1. Bäume auf fremdem Boden Art. 20

2. Stockwerkeigentum

a. Ursprüngliches Art. 20bis

b. Umgewandeltes Art. 20ter

c. Bereinigung der Grundbücher Art. 20quater

V. Grunddienstbarkeiten Art. 21

1. Anerkennung der bestehenden Pfandtitel Art. 22

2. Errichtung von Pfandrechten Art. 23

3. Tilgung von Titeln Art. 24

4. Umfang der Pfandhaft Art. 25

5. Rechte und Pflichten aus dem Grundpfand

a. Im Allgemeinen Art. 26

b. Sicherungsrechte Art. 27

c. Kündigung, Übertragung Art. 28

6. Rang Art. 29

7. Pfandstelle Art. 30

8. ... Art. 31 und 32

9. Gleichstellung bisheriger Pfandarten mit solchen des neuen Rechtes Art. 33

10. Fortdauer des bisherigen Rechts für bisherige Pfandarten Art. 33a

11. Umwandlung der Art des Schuldbriefs Art. 33b

1. Formvorschriften Art. 34

2. Wirkung Art. 35

VIII. Retentionsrecht Art. 36

IX. Besitz Art. 37

1. Anlegung des Grundbuches Art. 38

2. Amtliche Vermessung

a. ... Art. 39

b. Verhältnis zum Grundbuch Art. 40

c. Zeit der Durchführung Art. 41

Aufgehoben Art. 42

3. Eintragung der dinglichen Rechte

a. Verfahren Art. 43

b. Folge der Nichteintragung Art. 44

4. Behandlung aufgehobener Rechte Art. 45

5. Verschiebung der Einführung des Grundbuches Art. 46

6. Einführung des Sachenrechtes vor dem Grundbuch Art. 47

7. Wirkung kantonaler Formen Art. 48

F. Verjährung Art. 49

G. Vertragsformen Art. 50

A. Aufhebung des kantonalen Zivilrechtes Art. 51

I. Recht und Pflicht der Kantone Art. 52

II. Ersatzverordnungen des Bundes Art. 53

C. Bezeichnung der zuständigen Behörden Art. 54

I. Im Allgemeinen Art. 55

II. Elektronische Ausfertigungen und Beglaubigungen Art. 55a

E. Wasserrechtsverleihungen Art. 56

F.–H. ... Art. 57

J. Schuldbetreibung und Konkurs Art. 58

K. Anwendung schweizerischen und fremden Rechtes Art. 59

L. Aufhebung von Bundeszivilrecht Art. 60

M. Schlussbestimmung Art. 61

A. Ordentlicher Güterstand Art. 178

I. Inhalt des Vertrages Art. 179

II. Vertragsfähigkeit Art. 180

III. Form des Vertrages Art. 181

I. Gesetzliche Gütertrennung Art. 182

1. Auf Begehren der Ehefrau Art. 183

2. Auf Begehren des Ehemannes Art. 184

3. Auf Begehren der Gläubiger Art. 185

III. Beginn der Gütertrennung Art. 186

IV. Aufhebung der Gütertrennung Art. 187

I. Haftung Art. 188

II. Auseinandersetzung bei Eintritt der Gütertrennung Art. 189

1. Im Allgemeinen Art. 190

2. Kraft Gesetzes Art. 191

II. Wirkung Art. 192

III. Beweislast Art. 193

I. Eheliches Vermögen Art. 194

II. Eigentum von Mann und Frau Art. 195

III. Beweis Art. 196

1. Errichtung und Beweiskraft Art. 197

2. Bedeutung der Schätzung Art. 198

V. Eigentum des Ehemannes am Frauengut Art. 199

I. Verwaltung Art. 200

II. Nutzung Art. 201

1. Des Ehemannes Art. 202

2. Der Ehefrau

a. Im Allgemeinen Art. 203

b. Ausschlagung von Erbschaften Art. 204

C. Sicherung der Ehefrau Art. 205

I. Haftung des Ehemannes Art. 206

1. Mit dem ganzen Vermögen Art. 207

2. Mit dem Sondergut Art. 208

I. Fälligkeit Art. 209

1. Anspruch der Ehefrau Art. 210

2. Vorrecht Art. 211

I. Tod der Ehefrau Art. 212

II. Tod des Ehemannes Art. 213

III. Vor- und Rückschlag Art. 214

I. Eheliches Vermögen Art. 215

1. Verwaltung Art. 216

2. Verfügungsbefugnis

a. Verfügung über Gesamtgut Art. 217

b. Ausschlagung von Erbschaften Art. 218

1. Schulden des Ehemannes Art. 219

2. Schulden der Ehefrau

a. Der Ehefrau und des Gesamtgutes Art. 220

b. Sondergutsschulden Art. 221

3. Zwangsvollstreckung Art. 222

1. Im Allgemeinen Art. 223

2. Frauengutsforderung Art. 224

1. Grösse der Anteile

a. Nach Gesetz Art. 225

b. Nach Vertrag Art. 226

2. Haftung des Überlebenden Art. 227

3. Anrechnung Art. 228

I. Voraussetzung Art. 229

II. Umfang Art. 230

III. Verwaltung und Vertretung Art. 231

1. Durch Erklärung Art. 232

2. Von Gesetzes wegen Art. 233

3. Durch Urteil Art. 234

4. Durch Heirat oder Tod eines Kindes Art. 235

5. Teilungsart Art. 236

I. Mit Gütertrennung Art. 237

II. Mit Güterverbindung Art. 238

1. Umfang Art. 239

2. Beteiligung am Vor- und Rückschlag Art. 240

A. Ausdehnung Art. 241

B. Eigentum, Verwaltung und Nutzung Art. 242

I. Im Allgemeinen Art. 243

II. Konkurs des Ehemannes und Pfändung Art. 244

D. Einkünfte und Erwerb Art. 245

E. Tragung der ehelichen Lasten Art. 246

F. Ehesteuer Art. 247

A. Rechtskraft Art. 248

I. Gegenstand Art. 249

II. Ort der Eintragung Art. 250

C. Registerführung Art. 251


 AS 24 233, 27 207 und BS 2 3


1 [BS 1 3]. Dieser Bestimmung entspricht Artikel 122 der Bundesverfassung vom 18. April 1999 (SR 101).2 Fassung gemäss Anhang Ziff. 2 des Gerichtsstandsgesetzes vom 24. März 2000, in Kraft seit 1. Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).3 BBl 1904 IV 1, 1907 VI 367



Dies ist keine amtliche Veröffentlichung. Massgebend ist allein die Veröffentlichung durch die Bundeskanzlei. Publikationsverordnung, PublV.
Droit-bilingue.ch (2009-2021) - A propos
Page générée le: 2021-01-16T19:35:11
A partir de: http://www.admin.ch/opc/en/classified-compilation/19070042/index.html
Script écrit en Powered by Perl